. wet, i) ty #. ' ’ poate y= - *e we at x r # dol ait ‘ ' «- Sy" F ‘ . “i Ke : . * . alsin y cet ee Toya tet a she S pest : Vu 8 yet to8 ant 3 i . en , tere - ‘ ‘ isa : ‘ wy : : egg? sreraa sens mL NA ' a , can { cil Hf Treaty. woh Oh” ' B ay nt ey, cite eres ; ; oars md ay) duties ” Ne 4 . et pes ‘ . oan Or 9 ' ’ toa * ‘ * * Peo V6 fe ‘ 4 * ’ ‘ vet é yon Ae ial Sos ‘ vpoa ‘ ~ . " Poplar FM Se ‘ an - , ” ” 1 1 ne on aes ae fan < ‘ , : ’ » u t : . . ‘ . . t a ° " ay . ovow ; ae t f Gir , eels Oh nr , ' te - Wuihiws BAUR : * 7 : ae 7 = ay ied = 7 . Pet er sh ested : te pany : on an . ‘ ve t . rd 7 . oar ; 7 a 7 ae : x ‘ . i Mian ee ei han wes ys tees “ab: 7 1 “t wi Fi kaos (gabe - ‘ : Le F 7 SNS iis bgt es - . Ca 2 = , : a) a Sree ote SENS e . , 2oreee ‘ ' we . = eas * ‘ : ‘ , ; F 4 ‘ . fi oy Vy > ' : ‘ _ p es wees os PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY HELD AT PHILADELPHIA FOR PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE. Vol, XVIII. JULY 1878 “ro MARCH 1880. PHILADELPHIA : PRINTED FOR THE SOCIERLY BY M’CALLA & STAVELY. nee 1880. Se, ¥ 2 tages SEI ’ PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY, HELD AT PHILADELPHIA. Vou. XVIII. JULY to DECEMBER, 1878, Stated Meeting, July 19, 1878. Three members present. Stated Meeting, August 16, 1878. Present, 4 members. Vice-President, Mr. Fratey, in the Chair. A letter accepting the appointment to prepare an obituary notice of Prof. Joseph Henry was received from Prof. Fair- man Rogers. A communication entitled “Saponin in its relations to Physiology, by B. F. Lautenbach, M.D., Ph.D., Prosector of Physiology in the University of Geneva,” was presented by Mr. Platt, with a letter from the author. A communication was received entitled, “ Oil Well records in McKean and Elk Counties, Pa., by C. A. Ashburner.” Dr. Sadtler made a verbal explanation in reference to his comments on his correspondence with Prof. Morton (see PROC. AMER, PHILOS. SOC. XVIII. 102. A. PRINTED NOV. 21, 1878. 2 |Sept. 20, minutes of May 17) in which /he gave Prof. Morton credit for correctly quoting Dr. Sadtler’s letter. And the meeting was adjourned. Stated Meeting, September 20, 1878. Present, 5 members. Vice-President, Mr. Ext K. Pricer, in the Chair. Prof. Houston communicated the following notes: 1. On a new system. of ‘Electric Lighting, in which the sparks (“extra sparks”) produced by interrupting feeble currents are utilized for the purpose of dividing the light. 2. On a new form of Electric Lamp, depending also on the development of the extra-spark, instead of the continu- ous are. These notes embodied the results of the joint investiga- tions of Prof. Thompson and himself, Mr. Eli K, Price read a communication entitled “ Nature’s Reforesting,” and offered the following resolution, which was adopted : Resolved, That of the paper on ‘*Nature’s Reforesting’’ 300 extra cop- ies, without cover, be printed at the expense of the Michaux Legacy. The death of Mr. Henry Armitt Brown, at Philadelphia, Aug, 24th, aged 88 years, was announced by Mr. Price. Pending nominations 857 to 870 were read. The following persons, on scrutiny of the ballot boxes by the presiding officer, were declared duly elected members of the Society. . . Hon. Carl Schurz, of Washington, D, C. Mr. J. B. Knight, of Philadelphia. Rev. Fredk. Augustus Muhlenberg, D.D. of Philadelphia. Dr. Elliott Cones, U.S.A. Dr. A. 8. Packard, Jr., of Salem, Mass. Mr. Joel Asaph Allen, of Cambridge, Mass. ee ae 1STR.pqo" 3 Mr. Samuel H. Scudder, of Cambridge, Mass. Rey. William Rudder, D.D., of Philadelphia. Dr. Morris Longstreth, of Philadelphia. Prof. Houston gave notice of his intention to move at the next meeting of the Society, certain corrections in the last page of the printed proceedings (p. 728), being the records of the meeting held June 21, 1873. And the meeting was adjourned, Stated Meeting, October 4, 1878. Present, 13 members. Vice-President, Mr. Fravey, in the Chair. Letters accepting membership were received from the Rev. W. Rudder, D.D., dated Media, October 1; the Hon. Secretary of the Interior, Carl Schurz, dated Department of the Interior, Washington, October 2; the Rev. F. A. Muhlenberg, D.D., dated 4307 Walnut street, Philadelphia, October 2; Mr. J. A. Allen, dated Museum of Comparative Zoology, Guta birds; Mass. October 2; Dr. Elliott Coues, of the U. 8. Geological and Geographical Surveys of the Ter- ritories, dated Washington, October 2; and Prof. James C. _ Watson, of the Observatory of the Universttpiaf Michigan, dated Ann Arbor, September 18, 1878. Photographs tor the album were received from Mr. A. R. Wallace, dated Waldron Edge, Duppas Hill, Croydon, Eng- land, and from William H. Hlewree F.R.S., of the College of Surgeons, London. A letter was received from Mr. A. M. Fox, dated Penjer- rich, Falmouth, September 4, 1878, respecting the decease of his father, Mr. R. W. Fox (July 25, 1877, aged 88), and the disposition of publications forwarded to him, Letters of acknowledgment for publications of the Society 4 [Oet: 4, received, were read, as follows: Royal Society of Tasmania, February 17 (95, 96); Physical Society of Berlin, June 16 (96, 98, 99); Natural History Society of Gdttingen, June 15 (99, XV i, ji); Holland Society of Harlem, Thing 25 (100; List) ; Teyler Foundation of Harlem, July 6 (100; List); Royal Society of Luxembourg (100; List): Royal Institu- tion, London, June 1 (IIT to XI; XVI, ii; 100); Society of Antiquaries, London, June 18 (100; Laat)! Statistical So- ciety, London, July 15 (100; List); Royal Observatory, Greenwich, July 19 (99, 100); Royal Society of Edinburgh, July 5 (100); Maine Historical Society, (101); New Hampshire Historical Society, July 8 (101); Massachusetts Historical Society, July 9 (101; Cat. iii); “Boston Public Library (101); Harvard College, July 9 (Cat. part iii); New York Hospital, July 8 (101); New York Historical Society, June 10 (101); Albany State Library, July 12 (Cat. part iii); U. 8. Mstitaey Academy Library, July 16 (101); New Jersey Historical Society, July 8 (101; Cat. iii); Pennsylvania His- torical Society, July 8 (101; Cat. iii); Franklin Institute, July 26 (Cat. iii); Mr. John Fulton, Johnstown, July''8 (101); Peabody Institute of Baltimore, July 31 (Cat. iii) ; Naval Observatory, Washington, July 8 (101); Dr. William Elder, Washington, July 22 (101); Georgia Historical So- ciety, July 9 (101); Rantoul Literary Society, July 8 (101); Chicago Academy of Sciences, July 8 (101); Sig. Mariano Barcena, Mexico, July 8 (100). Letters acknowledging the receipt of diplomas were re- ceived from the following members: Dr. D. G. Gilman, dated Amherst, July 10, 1878; Mr. Lorin Blodget, Philadelphia, July 8, 1878; Mr. Goleane Sellers, Philadelphia, July 8, 1878; Mr. sores Stuart, Philadelphia, 1528 N. 18th street, July 29; Mr. John Fulton, Johnstown, Pa., July 8; and Dr. William Elder, Washington, D,C., July 22, Letters announcing the transmission of publications to this Society were received from the Hungarian Academy of Sciences, Pest, July 16; the Natural History Society at Riga, January, 1878; Zoologico-Botanical Society at Vienna, 1878.], . 7) April 29,1878 ;. Physical Society at, Berlin, June 15, 1878 ; Holland Racist. of Sciences at Harlem, July, 1878; Roy 4 Academy of Lisbon, February 7, 1878 ; ategenlagicnl Office at, London, July, 1878; Secretary - of State of New Hamp- shire, August,10, 1878 ; Harvard College Observatory, Cam- bridge; August 17, 1878 ; Second Geological Survey of Penn- sylvania, September 4, 1878; Coast. Survey Office at Wash- ington, August 17, 1878; Office of the Chief of Engineers, Washington, September 3, 1878; Department of the Inte- rior,, Washington, July 24,1878; * Department of State at Washington, August 31, 1878; the Argentine National Ob- seryatory, April, 1878; and from the Argentine Scientific Society, Buenos Ayres, , Donations for the Library were e received from the Mining Surveyors and Registrars of Victoria; Royal Academies at Berlin and at Brussels; Natural History Societies at Riga, Offenbach am M., Bremen and Boston ; Anthropological So- ciety, and Geological Institute at Vienna; Physical Society at Berlin; Holland Society at Harlem ; Goa riioal Society and, Revue Politique at Paris; Geographical Commercial Society at Bordeaux; Royal Geographical, Geological, An- tiquarian, Zoological and Metereological Societies of London ; Meteorological Office of the Royal Society ; Prof. Richard Owen, and London Nature; Joseph Gurney Barclay, Esq. Peyton, Essex, Eng. ; Belazical Survey of New Hampshire ; Museum of Gomparative Zoology and Peabody Museum in Cambridge, Mass. ; American Journal of Science and Art ; Mr. Henry T. Eddy, of Princeton, N. J.; Princeton College ; Franklin Institute; Journal of Pharmacy, Medical News, Penn Monthly ; Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania ; American Journal Mathematics, Baltimore; Mr. Asaph Hall, of Washington; Kansas Agricultural Report, Topeka; Geo- graphical and Statistical Society, Mexico; Ministerio de Fomento, Mexico; and the Argentine Scientific Society in Buenos Ayres. Also previously, and not ‘noted, from the Royal Danish * Cartas de Indias from the Goyernment of Spain, > . 6 [Oct 4, Society ; Mr. Albert S. Gatschet ; the Editors of the Novara Expedition Reports, Vienna; Meteorological Central Insti- tute of Vienna; Royal Academy at Munich; Dr. Carl Alfred -Littel; Natural History Society at ‘Stuttgard; Physical (Econ. Society at Kénigsberg ; Prag Observatory ; Annales des Mines; Nouvelle Société Indo-Chinoise at Paris; Dr. Le Grand; M. Joachim Barrande; M: A. Woeikof; Ac- eademia dei Lencei, Rome; Sig. Allesandro Dorno; Turin Observatory ; Revista Euskara at Pamplona; R. Academy, Lisbon; R. Academy, Madrid; Victoria Institute, Astro- nomical Society and Sir Edward Sabine, London ;. Natural History Society at Neweastle-upon-Tyne; Mauritius. Expe- dition; Asiatic Society of Japan; Tasmanian Society; New Zealand Institute; Royal Cornwall Polytechnic. Society ; Geological Survey of Canada; Mr. Samuel H. Scudder ; Connecticut Academy of Arts and, Sciences; Harvard Col- lege Observatory; Editors of Psyche; Essex Institute; American Academy of Arts and Sciences, Boston; Mr, W. Ripley Nichols; American Oriental Society ; Superintendent of Fairmount Park; Academy of Natural Sciences, Phila- delphia; American Journal of the Medical Sciences ; Pea- body Institute, Baltimore; Official Army Register; Mr. Samuel Newcomb; U.S. Geological and Geographical Sur- vey Bureau; Cincinnati Society of Natural History; and M. Barcena, of Mexico. A letter was received from the Secretary of the R. Acade- mia di Scienze, Littere ed Arti.of Modena, dated July 30, requesting exchanges. On motion the name of this society was ordered to be placed on the list of correspondents to re- ceive the publications.* A letter was received from Mr, G. E, Billin, Secretary of the Engineers’ Club of Philadelphia, requesting to receive the Society’s publications, On motion the request was * Nore.—Jan. 5, 1877, we received from the ‘*Societa Italiana (in 1782) della Scienze fondata da Anton-Mario Lorgna,'’’ Memoirs (4°) 2d Ser. I (1862), IL (1866)—38d Series I, i (1867), ii (1868), IT (1869-1876). Pub- lished in /lorence. 1878], ; 7 granted and the. Engineers’ Club. placed among the Society’s = correspondents to, receive the Proceedings from the begin- ning of 1878 onward,,, ,. Letters requesting the supply of deficiencies. in the -series -of the Society’s, publications were received from Triibuer & Co., from the Boston Public Library, and the Naval Ob- servatory, and were referred to the Librarian for action. A request for subscription to the “ American Catalogue,” dated September 17, New York, 387 Park Row, was referred to the Librarian to consider and report.* A letter was received from’S. Guerrier, Emporia, Kansas, September 9, asking the worth of an old Bible (1602) de- scribed by its owner. The committee to which was referred Prof. Haldeman’s plates and descriptions of prehistoric remains in the cave near Chicques rock in Lancaster Co., Pennsylvania, reported in favor of their publication in the Transactions of the Society. On motion the report was accepted and the com- mittee discharged. On motion the publication was or- dered. The Committee on Finance was requested to inquire into and report upon the expediency of publishing the two memoirs presented at recent meetings by Dr. Lautenbach, of Geneva, Switzerland.* Dr. Konig exhibited and described a piece of chemical apparatus which he invented for the purpose of applying the - use of sliding glass wedges, colored and transparent, and empirically graduated, to the optical extinction of the colors, simple or compound, of the blowpipe beads of the chromatic metals, ground to a given thickness and rendered trans- parent by a coating of balsam. The use of the glass wedge has been known; but this use of complimentary colors for producing the extinction of a given color, and for thus ob- taining the exact degree on a scale marking the percentage of metallic elements. contained. in the bead, is new, and, as * See Minute Book, Oct. 18, 1878. 8 ’ fOets4, Dr. Kénig promised to show ina coming memoir, efficient for very precise determinations. Prof. Houston desired to place on record an extension of the researches of Prof. Thompson and himself, on Electric Lighting, obtained by passing the Ruhmkorff discharge through glass tubes containing silica, carbonate of ammonia and similar substances. ' Prof. P. E. Chase (detained from the meeting by illness) presented, through the Secretary, a communication entitled * Crucial Harmonies.” Mr. Lesley exhibited several plates of the Permean fossil plants discovered and described by Profs. Fontaine and White of the West Virginia University, at Morgantown, in the country west of the Monongahela River, and took occa- sion to speak of the progress made by Prof. James Hall, Dr. T. Sterry Hunt and others at the late Congress of Geologists opened on the 29th of August last at Paris, in harmonizing the geologies of Europe and America. He described the meetings of the Congress, and the appointment of national committees on classification and coloration, to report to Prof. Capellini six months previous to the next assembling of the International Congress of Geologists at Bologna in 1881. Mr. Lesley laid on the table for examination some quasi coprolites, found by Mr. W. D. H. Mason in the roof slates of the Mammoth bed, as described in a letter dated Williams- town, July 29, 1878. Pending nominations 864 to 870 were read. Prof. Houston moved that the minutes on printed page 728 of No. 101 of the Proceedings be corrected. Owing to the lateness of the hour, and at the request of the Secretary, who reported the minutes,.the subject was postponed for consideration at the next meeting. And the meeting was adjourned. 1878.) . 9 [Ashburner. Oil Well Records in MeKean and Elk Counties, Pennsylwania. By Cuas, A. AsHpuRNER, M.S. AssisTANT GEOLOGICAL SuRVEY. _ (Read before the Ameri oan Philosophical Sockety, August 16, 1878). “The demand for accurate well ‘Teoords in the northern oil field has be- come very great, from the eagerness with which the producers have sought to find petroleum, outside of the limits of the Bradford development. “Most of the explorers, from the way in which their wells are drilled ’ by contractors, are, unable to keep a complete and correct record of the rocks through which the drill passes, yet they are ever anxious to procure reliable records from other sources to aid them in their ‘wild cat’’ operations. During the past two years I have been able to obtain through the assist- ance of Mr, M: M. Schultz of Wilcox, a number of extremely valuable and interesting records of wells drilled in the vicinity of that village. Mr. ‘Schultz by his untiring perseverance has succeeded in getting records of no less than six wells drilled to an average depth of over eighteen hundred feet. All have been kept with the greatest care and most of them under his personal supervision. No complete register of all the rocks passed through by the drill has ever been kept by any of the producers in the Bradford oil field. In De- cember, 1877, Prof. Lesley appointed Mr. Arthur Hale, of the Survey, to the special work of obtaining a correct record of the Dennis & Co.’s Well, No. 1, which was about to be drilled on the high summit to the south-west of Bradford. All of these records, together with a more minute description and fuller discussion of the rocks drilled through, will be found in my forthcoming report of progress in McKean and Elk Counties. I have been induced to communicate to the Society a few of the more valuable well records for immediate reference prior to the publication of the report. The position of the Olean Conglomerate above the mouth of each well is given in feet in order that a comparison may be made between the several sections. All the rocks of the section are not named for reasons which can be better appreciated when the report is published. .. The Olean Conglomerate is the bottom of the Coal Conglomerate No. XII, or Millstone grit. The Bradford oil producing sand belongs without question to the Chemung Period, or the upper part of No. VIII. C. W. Dennis & Co.'s Well, No. 1. Owned by C. W. Dennis & Co., situated on the Roger’s farm, three- fourths of a mile south 35° west of Bradford, Bradford Township, McKean County. The record of this well was kept by Mr. Arthur Hale, aid to Mr, John F. Carll, Assistant Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania. The well was drilled in December 1877, and January 1878. Mr. Hale made the measurements with great accuracy, the method pursued, to- PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XVIII. 102. B. PRINTED NOV. 21, 1878. Ashburner.] : 10 [Aug 16. gether with a fuller description of the facts obtained, will be published in the District report. It is due Mr. Hale to state that the Dennis record is, without doubt; the longest detailed and accurately measured record of any oil well in the United States. Deeper wells have been drilled, but no record has-ever been kept so accurate as this one to such a depth. . Wherever the rock passed through by the drill was found to change a specimen was secured ; in many casesa number of specimens of the same stratum were kept, in order that after a more careful study the horizons or divisions might be shifted the better to agree with the true succession of the strata. ' [hope to deposit a duplicate series of specimens in the museum of the Philadelphia Academy of Natural Sciences, and it is hoped that duplicates may be deposited in other museums throughout the States, In view of this fact, I have given below the numbers of the specimens obtained of each stratum. The elevation of the top of the well above Ocean im feet is 2055. The elevation of the Bradford Station of the Bradford Branch of, ahs Erie Railway being 1444 feet PRLEIOCO, CUR WR ree re eR fe earch so coe eg SU tek 4’to 4! Sandy shale, olive-gray, micaceous, muddy ; spec. 1..........- PES: 15 §. 8. gray, fine, micaceous, muddy ; specs. 2, 3, 4, 5......0... 33“ 48 Shale dark-gray, with thin micaceous sand shells, muddy ; } BOCK. Ay F isnt oe Soe cc es OTE nt E elgg joe ay TG: OF ‘8. 8. gray, fine; soft, muddy ; spec. 85 06556 cv. .0es eee see tees Be sic Slaty sandstone, bluish, fine, muddy ; specs. 9, 10............ 3s 98 Fine gray sand-shells and dark slates alternating, muddy ; Spee) LI Ae LBs er ea ec os eee Cun hie See CONT 18 “°° 116 §. S. ashy gray, very fine micaceous, muddy ; specs. 14, 15.... 16 “© 182 Red shale; soft; “Bpee; TOs icioc vss ccc cee seek ee ee et 6“ 188 8. S. olive gray fine micaceous; spec. 17 ........6..06 wee eee 12 ** 150 8. 8. dark olive gray, fine micaceous ; specs. 18, 19, 20......... 30 180 , 8. S. white, mixed with green and brown, fine ; spec. 21...... 8 “© 188 8. 8. bluish gray, fine, micaceous, muddy ; spec. 22........+.. 9.197 Red shale, ‘ paint rock’’ top soft, bottom sandy and micaccous ; "2 epecs, 38; D6. BBs ices nese ee eee ts eRe 18 “© 215 8. 8. gray, fine, mixed with slate, a few pebbles ; specs. 26, 27.. 28‘ 238 Rinte, Dluish ; specs: 205 80; PO Slivcasviececciceesscescarssat 92"** 260 Slate, bluish, with thin plates of fine sandstone ; specs, 82, 33...15 ** 275 Sandy slate, dark gray, fine, micaceous ; specs, 34, 35, B6...... 16.**'291 Sinte, Diuisir; ‘specs.87,; 86; SO oe tele ce eesti s oe reb everett 24 815 5. S. gray, fine, micaceous; spec. 40. 0.0.6... ee. ees 5 B20 Red slate, micaceous, muddy ; spec. 41, 42...... 660.00 ce eee ees 8 #4 828 8. 8. olive gray, soft, micaceous, some slate; specs, 48, 44, 45. 80 ** 367 Red rock, mottled sandy shale, brown, green and gray ; specs. MG Gis deaeeeeeeae en’ bin eae aid a sa eee PEE APOIS. © S89 Minte sandy, ‘gray }'spec. 48; 55 ésos sects ceagcied ieaeiek eee 8 890 8. 8. dark, very fine; specs. 49, 50,...... ap ees soehin Meena 10 “400 1878.) / 11 fAshburner. /$. 8. gray, very fine, hard, drillings like flour; specs. 51-56 NoheiVAS Soe Hee es ee eae es a on cel else e des oe TOIOE ID 35 to 435 Slate, sandy micaceous ; specs. 57 to 63 inclusive. ............. 38 ‘* 473 8. S. dark-gray, very fine, micaceous, flaky ; spec. 64.......... 6° 479 8. S. bluish-gray, fine, hard, remnants of fossils ; spec. 65..... 6** 485 a sandy in streaks, micaceous, fossi] bands ; specs. 66-76 in- elusive. UOME2% 13 8. OBE PF RUDE AAW ITN OA Zi. CRY 95 ** 580 Dark-gray, thin-bedded 8:8., fine, iniiowdeous, slate partings, fos- sil6 § specs, 77 to 89'inclusive..6i4 Leelee a eee 71 651 8.8. gray, fine, flaky, micaceous, fossils ; specs. 00,°91, 02/0... 23:** 674 Plate F\wpevs? 98)'04. 6020012998 Jo. alzes weNIO. 8. Pa 12 ** 686 8. 8. dark-gray, slate partings, fossils ; specs. 95. 96, 97, 98.... 26% 712 Red rock, purplish, sandy, very fine, micaceous, fossils ; pees. BS BO PINOTTO A iiIeds OA lo wa OAL woled, Poy, ALA 10 £722 Sandy slate, dark, micaceous ; specs. 101, 102, 108............ 20 #4071742 §. 8. fine, micaceous, alternating with slate and ‘chocolate ”’ shale, fossils ; specs. 104 to 113 inclusive.............0..45 63 ** 805 §. 8. thin bedded, micaceous, slate partings, fossils ; specs. 114 ee POLED Glen rere a STN Se ic aor 13‘ 818 Slate, an occasional sand-shell with fossils; specs. 116 to 136 in- RO etter ss ellnvelere» b eins « sarirayekelt We PARED be ad bissa''s Gveiein'ebs 125 ** 9438 8. 8. brown and purplish, fine, hard, fossils; spec. 137........ 8‘ 951 PUIG WR GPE TOA COIOl. 2s cc ss cuss e@e cratic © anijhin me evs take ns 55 ‘* 1006 o* Red: Rock,”’ fine, purple and gray sandy slate; specs. 147, 148, 14 ‘* 1020 Gray sand, shells and slate, fossils ; specs. 149 to 153 inclusive.. 24 ‘ 1044 ey SN Ss 1 ae a en ey eee re ae ap ogee cde. s* 1086 Sy Park; hard. sOne: apec. 156... wanenes 3 ** 1059 $. 8. yellow-gray, drillings as fine as flour: specs. 157 to 163 in. BURG trad states ss 520s Xe Ca naa Rens oe ee ER Dee 13 ‘* 1072 Slate ; specs. 164, 165.,..0..... Pisin bu gecbtach ae Meee re wag sieehten ade 1b 1000 WS. Bs Yollow-graye fing; specs 106 00:6 yen ceases reid Heases see 4 *© 1081 eBlate, aandy ; specs. 167,,168, 160;,,..... .-.esnnsier> csi soneeede 7 «©1088 8. 5. dark-gray, fine, fossils ; specs, 170, 171.........-...-500: 6 ** 1094 Slate x specs. 172 to 175 inclusive. .... 2.5. 6 .c 00 cckwe ole 03s 0 > ly Wehe & 8. 5. brown and gray, fine, soft. with some slate (oil show) ; specs. 176 to 180 inclusive....... F Re fik> OG = PO> aeanee = stale 14 ** 1125 pBlate ; specs: 181 to. 186 inclusive .. 2.0: 2. 2.5:04020d 40 cane nee 23 ‘* 1148 Slate, with dark sand shells; specs. 187 to 190 inclusive........ 15 ** 1163 SIMU WRDOCS? POLLO terse et 65 5 os 6 4's «0 0-4 Oem EMR: cmcpie= «anate 1 2306 Slate, with gray sand shells ; specs. 193, 194. ..........00.0008 5 ‘© 1181 Sitenmnnes, 105. 106, 197... os. bb » «cone beniiadaskcanAanad dae * 12 ** 1193 Slate, with an oceasional sand shell ; specs. 198 to 206 inclusive, 44 ‘‘ 1237 Slate, ‘blue slate ’*’;, specs..207 to 219 inclusive..............- 63. ‘* 1800 _»$. 8. brown, fine, flaky, slate partings, fossils ; specs. 220 to 223 inclusive....... eels dias sth tenet vCeuben oT a eae Pee ViNaae Sy. late 5 specs. 224 to 229 inclusive....c.. oscceeeececceusencees 28 “ 1345 Ashburner. ]} 12 [Auge 16, 8. 8S. dark-gray, fine, close, hard ;/specs: 230, .281......0.06005 6 to 1354 » SOS. brownish-gray, fine, slate partings ; specs. 232. to 237 in- ; NE Nien cn Cans NER REG nyt SGs ba ata a Oars sea ona 30‘* 1381 Sand, shells and slate ; specs. 238 to 242 inclusive.. are tacailen 22 «* 1403 Slate, sand. shell at 1428’ ; specs. 243 to 254 inclusive.......... 59-** 1462 Fine sand-shells and slate alternating ; specs. 255 to 261 inclu-._,. AUR saierareh ec gitan ie meg win sigs SE 0 sis's b's's 6» Fee's e's 25.5* 1487 Slate, sand-shells at 1510’, 1531’, and 1573/; specs. 262 to 286.in- clusive ...... eRe iis ewe, Bi iels Re U1 WORE eee 118. 1605. Slate, with sand shells ; specs. 287 to 291 inclusiye............ 27. 1632 Slate; specs. 292 to.205 imclusive .....<-+.2-.-0ces+--neceeees 32 “* 1664 8. S. brown, fine, flaky. Bradford ‘3d’ or oil producing sand ; uE ¥ ¥ OOM. SN OO Ah COAG io als 5 cisls imag 6+’, + $4 ents pS 8 pa 54 “ 1718 Slate and 8, 8.; spec. B11.....0.5.5.....5. = aiertderen ster rest 1 “ 1719 The top of the ridge directly above the Dennis Well, No. 4, is capped by the Sub-Olean Conglomerate, which lies from 50 to 70 feet below the bottom of the Olean Conglomerate ; the top of the well is about 115 feet below this latter horizon. : The sandstone and conglomerate which caps the summits surrounding Bradford, and which is found broken up in large masses on the hill slopes, comes from the Olean Conglomerate. Kinzua Well or ‘* Dry Hole,” P. C. L. and..P.: Go. Owned by the Producers Consolidated Land and Petroleum Company of Bradford, situated on Kinzua Creek, near the mouth of Glad run, in war- rant 3122, Hamlin Township, McKean County, and about five miles north- east of Kane. The land upon which this well is located together with the adjoining tracts are part of those originally belonging to the ‘‘ McKean and Elk Land and Improvement Co.,"’ General Thomas L. Kane, Supt. The well was drilled in the Spring of 1877, and the’record was ss by Mr. L. C. Blakeslee, Superintendent P. C. L. and P. Co. The elevation of the top of the well, as determined by Mr. J. W. Maur. phy of Wilcox, is 52 feet higher than Wilcox Well, No. 3, or 1718 feet above Ocean. 6 BOVIACG CAVE, WC a a nuncadcnesentsrise PERRTERS Vek tac aot 82 to 82 Soft slate.......... Min fie eee ashi sae aixCaseticeeter ese ee To 1T0 MES INOS cradles ii hit hoe ae a nee Vises He ASABE 95°" "208 MON TORR, on cceve arises teeCuciat tice g ot a ae 50 855 RE es we duleen a abieciio smc ica's Camm anee ee ah aka 36 °° 298 TR POM sk 5 0 vd ve sste'e'g Sauls potubete sp eckaalbCaneicrice. ott a7 B50 Sand ‘‘shells’’ and red rock mixed... .........cacceceeeseeees 15 ** 865 be. Hakie cele ws.c diss cee es eae eke Tewee sedate crates antes wet 35 400 Band Sebel! ti0.). aad Hh a8 ei a MaJdiows $83 to Rowan seus paronlO 47°40 pO il es GE AM ed Fey 2.0 846 956 Mixed slate and hard slate rock,........0.eeeeee0ee RET Pere © B61 * 1017 Mixed slate and sand ‘‘ghells.’’,...ccscescceveshececcsneeess O08 !° 1870 1878.4“ 13 [Ashburner. Hard slate mixed. with oun aa: fa ents aed. i182 2 Se » B70 to 1745 meats and sand alternating?) 202 ..22 0000. ele ed. tet 400% £785 * Drilled dry. Cased'at.............. a eee ey Pte _ 370/ wg Heavy sand “shell” at. ere: OPTIC ELE OERE LECT 1017’ tel de eR ERC ruck aX: sd oi Pays este: Si eeeee 1745! he SygigegMiest [0S 05.605 vagad A gpsiegiots olule, Bar ello 1760’ abil... hae gee Lees EL CLLCEE ELE ERS 1768’ = aie ergy LIS ee Pe on Reg tare ae 1780" Salt water found in sands ates V0.6. i2 5333. 1745/ and 1768 Mr. Blakeslee reports that no “ good show” of oil was found. A small gas vein was struck, position not stated. Elevation of the bottom of the Olean Conglomerate on the P. & E. R. R. four miles due south-west from the. ‘Kinzua Well is 1868 feet. The calculated elevation of the same hori- zon at the well is 1900 feet. Md wolfe $45 “ Witeox Well, No. 2, or Schultz Gas Well. - tb by M. M. Schultz & Co., situated on the west branch Clarion River, in warrant, 2676, Sergeant ‘Township, McKean County, and. five miles north of Wilcox, a station on the Philadelphia and Erie Railroad, 104 miles east of the City of Erie. This well is 855 feet south, 17 degrees 30 minutes west, of Wilcox Well, No. 1, or the old Adams Well,* which was drilled in 1864.\(?) . Drilling on this well was commenced. about the first of the year (1876) aad completed in the latter part of August of the same year. After the drilling was completed to a depth of 2004 feet, an ‘‘oil sayer’’ was attached to the iron casing (53 inch), and the gas issuing from the well was conveyed through a two inch pipe and discharged about two feet above the surface of - the, water, which;partially filled the 250 barrel tank which bad. been erected. Sufficient oil was passed to show itself as a scum on the surface of the water. ., Mr. Schultz conceived, the, idea of inserting into the well to a depth of 2000.feet, an inch pipe, and by closing the mouth of the casing to utilize the pressure of the gas to force the oil out through the inch tubing, .. Mr. Schultz believed that the bulk of the oil which was found in the well was coming from the sand extending from 1795 to 1815 feet, in which the drillers reported that they had ‘‘struck’’ a small quantity of heayy green oil. In this event the immense volume of gas which was issuing from a depth of 1776 feet might more than counterbalance in its pressure the pressure of the oil from a lower horizon, and thus prevent it from fill- ing the hole. ERs _, After the tubing was adjusted and the gas confined in the well as much * For a complete record of this well, see a paper by Prof. Lesley in the Proceed- ‘ings of the American Philosophical Society, Vol. X, page 238; also one in the -Petroleum Monthly of a later date, A description of a very interesting action of this well is given in a paper named “Description of the Wilcox Spoating Water Well,” which I read before the Society, Sept. 21, 1877. Ashburner.) 14 jAug, 16, as two to three barrels were forced out. Mr. Schultz thinks that the tubing. during this time must have been entirely filled with oil to the exclusion of gas. In this case the pressure of the gas must have been sufficient) to raise a column of oil one square inch in section and 2000 feet high. Of course; > such an enormous pressure could only,be temporary. The oil flowed from \) the tubing but for a few moments, the gas then probably became thoroughly mixed up with the oil which from its low temperature quickly congealed and effectually choked the pipe. After a few hours the gas ceased to flow entirely from the well and also from the adjoining well, No. 1... The gas commenced to flow again with greater energy after 36 hours of Boost te s) from both wells, Nos. 1 and 2. In the early part of 1877, the pressure of the gas seemed to increase sud- | denly. About the middle of May, four months after, the gas from both © wells, Nos. 1 and 2, ceased to flow for the second time without any obstruc- |) tion having been knowingly placed in its way. No gas was found to. come from either well till July 14th, when it commenced to flow again... Up to.’ the present time the amount of gas increases and diminishes at) irregular) intervals. The gas from this well was used as fuel in drilling well, No.3: The elevation of Wilcox Well, No. 2, is 1642 feet. above Ocean on the corrected datum of the P. & E. R. R. which makes Wilcox Station 1527.* EGORY GAG MrAVOl ss bbs Peers secs 6236558 AEE ADE RTO 30 to 30 GRMY GIRS) cits a teks iei ssh se vetessiiisseee ies RAR 50“ 80 GURY OIAtSs cs ca cts eascscisssccanssissssccass aaddiveaees 24 *** 82 ber ae See eee re eee ee eee SO Bk Jaap! 125 ee That re ee acre cee ee eee eee ee TT SO co 20 145 eg) Bore Pere Pe Peer eres SEP ETT TESS TTESTSRERERE IE eo a peo i ee Peers Teed) toc eee CERES CT ERER TRALEE eS 25.6 175 Gray soapstone (shale and clay)..............eeseceeeeeeees ‘10 185 Red shale mixed with gray slate.............5 aati ueeuesese 155 340— Streak Of Goft ‘red shales: sc. tiwises sick kee 15 355) GHP alate sn disc eS S 5 CUE NTE CREE tis 8 oss cir RAL 62 417 White sand pebble rock initials gas and salt water....... «> Bees 429 AIRY GARG s ooh a ch cheat hs eSPOR STRESS SELEVE RETNA EEN ee 228 650 pe ag | SERPS See aV IEEE LUC EETESE ERTIES TIRE R EET 30 “© 680 Gray slate and sand...........-.+. GRURDO8S Vieve'e'n whieh GON Cu O75 55 Gray and red slate mixed............. BREE CENSUKEUN SiS EENEN 40 © 795 Gray slate...........0006 LecRAGETECERELEANTO SE VOCE RIES 60% 855 Gray slate and hard shell....5.....c ccc ceeeeeaenian cance 5 ** 860 co Al SPS PEUSTETET TITS TTL TET ET ET SD SET TESEATE SEE 5 865 Gray and red slate..........+.. ROR ESESSESARUED UVES NUNG NURS 20°" 885 GHAY GIAO < oni acters svneds baraateree Svbavens PERV veer es BME Ww" 910 — Red and gray slate......... ETE a TE AO 90 Ae 2 ob O15 Gray slate......... ibvier Tt bviptetcien ss » BO 945 Gray sand,........ TeTTI Tht DeDEWW NEDO Veuve eee . 5 950 Gray and red sand.,.... be dbedbenten Bede EWE ER ND s Sew sO 5“ 955 * Report N. Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania, p, Lit, 1878.] 207 15 {[Ashburner. Griy'and red-wlate. 001s SUIS 3M. Lise asta viaweared,. 15 to 970 Gray slate. .... it of. jp sting halli.yex Wire .oged aved Ange 15 ** 985 Gray slate and sand:....0.... 5 UE GE AVIA ID. DTU eAS UL Ol. 22h LG 1 998 Gray ‘slate... -C2id.wat.dod + ATS OWI IU. MEU 0 SIN DA 200.4 60 “* 1050 Gray'slateand sand. ....... $a oozing Lula os b242't 5 PUPS O1055 Gray slate and sand. ....... 1 A Sid 30s AICHE. AIG 1d. 25 ** 1080 Dark gray sand. ...030...00004 WSU. Pot Ge. Min Se A s 15 ** 1095 Very hard light gray sand. :........ gente, .c9gig adi baled i [s6s400 Gray slate and sand containing small bivalve shells....... .. 20 ** 1120 Gray slate and hard gray sand.......: ISITE CU BA OT. 5 ** 1125 Gray slate and soft sand... 6.5.0. cece ccs on voce ribet BOM. oEs 10 ** 1135 Hard gray sand... vyeic. een... lo. rideekuy on) STH Te. 700.0 0 99145 Softogray slates. 220. vie ediaoas 508. eek h. Seahie. Or. 3 27 1172 Gray een or. outing aso, biases, Wi aa. waltot Aaawe. & baw 8 ** 1180 Gray sand/and slate. 265 00. .0n.ol.0) Dae ee peg Fite Bact 5 ** 1185 Gray slate containing shells. ....00.....000 00.0 b ede ee eee 15 ** 1200 Gray sand containing first strong smell of oil 1205 to 1210.... 20 ** 1220 Gray slate and hard shell.....0........0... 6 li UBS Oe 15 **:1235 Gray slate. ..... pwads tad. SLIT. 3i..$ 62 Bey. ZOOL a 15 ‘* 1250 Gray slate containing shells ....................-- LAi JO. 0 15 ** 1265 Gray slateand clover seed sand...........cecccesccseccesben «5. 1270 Gray slateaith hard shell. ..........-sseereececeeeesesecess. 10:'4.1280 EE Ware rcsine obo rsinistreseesesessneds cite wade 10 ‘* 1290 See ONE TUE OUON) gk. ony sos orp 5 scecpnenesbioawaners 25.‘* 1315 REMINDS os oo b's 099.9 949 Newe debe ahebee rere 10. ** 1325 ccc ccctesesenseshs eeeeearentseieaaai 5 ‘* 1330 Slate. 2.2... RENE See aes és 0 244 cvs 03 £09 REESE RR eee 5 ** 1385 Hard gray sand..... SF ipbheh sessed sd. F2'ooenie Rae winds’ © 5 ** 1340 EEE ORE eer err pe a dhhiws fo 10 ** 1350 Coarse gray sand....... rb datind beesescens bs ae! eee 5 1355 EO”. EEE EEE Pee: eee 5 ‘* 1360 Goer. slates <6 oss seas ns Siet:+fs age nae en sneigieqooeine veddele 30. ‘* 1390 Se UNO 62, Gimmie Sp's hein p 49159 ke 3955 PR NE Oh oe ed 10 ** 1400 i, o's esd eee pases Pe: Se 20. ‘* 1420 Gray slate Gontelning Ahal): «05,5 os os 0250 ¢n0dacedsandes wae 256 1445 NT NONE): 10a oN xx bNee hs ¥h0:0909 422009 Fae be Kime eveda HADES A460 eeup cintewontnining ahell;., j.5 ss oss 0s'2 94562200989 228410 ree 105 ‘* 1565 Hard gray sand. ...... Mesias a9) slosank baths acitiaiie dymxt 4 15 “* 1580 OOMNNMNGE, ec set Marks Sisk: 5:4 boo sab ese Kee oks toe tne) 55 ** 1635 CMON .« ca sss ecek bees 85%? ds erate dad's balbaele baais Sitio 35 ‘* 1670 RE BING. di oh sis oy be os divs) 0599 sd wk hesae Oe elite 3 9 <* 1679 Dark brown sand containing amber oil, greatest amount near top 0 FREISIRSEISEDS Sete Re ey He, | iar Cae ia 16 “* 1695 SNE. G5. te bn tis OURS adv AS Nev ow oho wae oieslaboeke: eee s, 40,65 .1%85 METERING SEN caiccls, 35's Sea's Nd dee susie eine nd ea 10 ‘* 1745 * Probable represéntative of Bradford “3d” or oil producing sand, Ash burner,] 16 . [Aug. 16, NS ee ee eee eee ee ee 25 to 1770 GERy BING BAG BANG? kocsis eee oe ee BRR 6 * 1776 Hard gray sand rock containing a great quantity of gas....... 4 ** 1780 REE on, Set naoacaciriead poses cect ee AON eh CUTER TI90 POOL ONG BNO sco s choc cnosesccsicts o8 cca cess AAR OBA 5 * 1795 Gray sand, upper part containing heavy green oil............ 20 * 1815 Gray and red micaceous sand and pebbies.................... 20 “ 1835 ROT GIOS.. Suvirascdecnnesccccecss 2 UR UT OTA b pie 55 ** 1890 SN RINGS AN FOE BANE 4 2525 59:5 oo oe os ers cided desi gee 5 ** 1895 Be EE ONG TODOS 1520) 2). 5's os ws be aS Pe . 5 1900 Wenite eaed containing vil. ».”..).. 5.2... ek nae ees 10 ** 1910 White and gray sand containing oil............-.....4..445, 20 «* 1930 ER Soret kts Oe ee en cs 74 © 2004 cen ln sa ERE EEE < 541 eeett Water CONN... oi ee +. 48h PPR BRA OBE WONOE SE US ee oe 422/ PBR ANCTOAREE, BANG WALES. oc ii sv oe 5 eso EN SR 538/ yg Se Oe eer ot 1172’ ig ee | ae one cr 1205/ to 1210/ Sand containing greatest amount of oil, particularly at top of sand. Oil, amber color............ 1679/ to 1695/ ERE 1776/ VG Ee ) Ae rere ta ) S 1800/ White and gray sand containing oil........... 1900’ to 1930/" Wilcox Well, No. 8, or ‘*‘ John's Well.’’ . Owned by M. M. Schultz & Co., and situated 1782 feet north 73 degrees 30 minutes west of well No. 2. The well was commenced in the early part of October, 1876, and com- pleted to a depth of 1850 feet about the middle of June, 1877, After the well had been drilled to a depth of 1720 feet, tubing was in- serted to a depth of 1684 feet, and it was reported that the well produced, by pumping, a barrel a day for about six months, when it was decided to drill deeper. The tubing was drawn, and after losing the tools several times, drilling was finally abandoned at a depth of 1850 feet, The elevation of the top of the well is 1666 feet above Ocean ; Wilcox Station being 1527 feet above the same datum. This well was -tubed about the first of the year, and has since been pumped continuously every other day. Its average daily production is Teported to be a barrel and a-half. The Olean Conglomerate is not exposed in the vicinity of the Wilcox Wells, the lower horizon is probably 125 feet above the mouth of Wilcox Well, No. 2. 1878. ], 1 ri | Ashburner. 7. NPE RRL Se SRO “teat 5 43/ to IN UI a an oc elbe 5/ Leam and grawelias, udiicsises twee: 0 vreeeiew civics der 5/ TN) BRE a oe scape naa 10/ RINT A IE a ead an 5 3:40.08 oath 5/ Goevel and pebble tay case Sesuad camectons-imnar 5/ Geevel.end sand rocks, , ......asddviiew fear Gusin« wise aise 5/ Quicksand and coarse pebble..............-..-.-- 5/ OE Fie SO Sire a ee ee 3/ | SGA REA irl pe re parang Rene rey 2 to Ee a og. hae « oy 3h cece eens 35‘ De ee ot 64k iiieaeiaeitines Catan aie 37 ‘ ES SFE ER OR 7 8S hy FeSO Pe ETM 18 “ UU GUE). ss ss acne cctadadavawsennemedaiicss 10 ** EE ra is 6b oc'> sign os np. 4'c Semis ae a desea eeR Se 30 *¢ is Cobh ee RMP 5 REL eine A pete 5“ ete xa y's vic cress co GR OMSeE La koae een Teas 20 * I att ware ek ws access cela Cuabedaeenan eae 25 “ IOC a ys doce sk cenedcaer sagnectetane de 105 “ hele ey dip lnae ala abet e i papa apyet-esapipe 15°“ a le abn ds MRR ur arr Sic? pti bs 15 * Ms cisco ives ss ca ss s0 uceacaethoti et an tee 1 eo ETC REE OR elect ly sc ticc ess accssca case aien ner cce! 25 tee ie ces fe dec. ccc ccnke dhndenaabanonen 15 “ ee eee eee cas cadences taeeese anes 20 “ Gray sand ...... ns opel eben peppers o Pept ae cis egret 15 * re Bette ia ig's\s o.4.aa hale 9 5.0 a savesiag ance plaviga bat 5s TEI WO. han RO ra Wid ini ea o 5 x:nie 3 con mims aie cams ano he EN, ale ton <5 6 s-6-0.0 « boct.d qd swords arg wa Seige 8‘ a ad neki g win ss a dp 8wikh A ass ip) en inate a5 WEEE UE PEEL. oc cs cee nce Coa kusvccaecteenesnes 75 “ EES CEE OEP ey iP 8 alae atl earring Bedell aia iain yrange 43“ TS ra ce. near cs cee cbeganusaetl es CO citric a. Svcs ss cir sy se ccecetesgeaeses 30 “ res tects ccece sscscsacseapueaen ta hes Hard gray sand............... Soe PPR ERY er ee pare: Sesf 15 * DE WR ee ness cc canes dene eta towing aang SRI UW MUON cot oat sys ve sos ace tate Sata bad 55‘ Hard and fine gray sand.......... AE A ee Praha or Pees ae Se 25‘ SEES Serr eee re eg ae Sapp lgg tt rant: Sac eager Pape a kyr Aa abi By SP ME OE BNMIG,. Tos ccs cei rn cs cent e eden scabecer st 5 ** Rr ee rr eyes: rote nee 23°“ , og A ay pdeaipapnllmas AP ee aR ieee Rn poll» oieal cg ae + Ses MEMESES cc Ssasvcce ice Pane cetr sae cae schceeeer res ree 25 < PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XVIII. 102. Cc. PRINTED NOY. 22, 1878. 43/ Ashburner.} ‘ 18 [Aug. 16, ES eee ene 10 to 880, SEE ae EE 85.4 915, NE tN Pe eek es eR ENG ihe UNG NCSL A Oo RAE, 15.‘ 985; OS SS eee ries or 5 940, NT Beene ir, | de true Lhe ABD Dark EE rs ie yg ia’ wks any cc's t's ewe aE me ot Dine PAGO] ES EN SC PPE ET - 5 965 Se ee ec 5 970) Eipo.hard dark gray sand...................-.220025 dhade on Pres ee EERE TAIN Canin s.5'c0s <= s aa s vs bo s'e'e sve eeOeeNeieem 5.f* 980, 0 EN SE EERE R ESTEE rr 35, ‘< 1015, TARE QTAy, SANG. oon. sk we ee eee eee nes Loe 7. 1035 , OTT RSS a eee 7 1070, RESO ee ere: #1075) aes. ceva cay ona ee see aX 45 : “* 1080, EE SE TESS Se eer RE 15 ** 1095, Gray sand and very hard shells..................» © amniemiog ee ae IRONIC hs bob ssn ss ss s+’. fir Ree 050. ec) epee ncaa ae HUEY, NEDO BONE ABIL vo wand coe bance yor 4ca.vae 0 ds bon ceiee rene 25 “* 1810 Pe OO hes eo Se Chin coma va- cc om 60008 s Le os See pene See eee WES OOM. Tn asicesos shine ain bun cdes soeeks eevee SaeRee 10 * 1840 IASG. 0 eo seganpperccccenssece SO Sb ecccesccmnsaccnsece seins 5 1845 SIRIOO M707 MORN. .o > so vuire diane nce ess ane Dh abtien > Git REY ean i Soft white sand....... AAG bs VUE OR A ent et cs° Dao SUNY ORM no bis baes'sns sb adiih oes s teh sh aenekesea aie ace oe Fine white sand......... aveats wien Revise tach shea’ wk? A ~" B* 1870 Slate and hard shell........ os aah atnbscbheh ke kecks hte - 15 1885 SU NN GRE 3 tos oda chacaeestuse nur an Ravana» CaP ene wo BOF 1415 GRAY BEGIG, cca adgsscrose os '0'o.pi'g b> bp be's an abe be cele nie ane 20 1435 Slate and shell, aeho om oir nes haeadee es ch eeewan ove ba ee eae 5 ** 1440 Hard gray sandstone............0eeeeee Shei vce seankae cone 20, 2e 1480 White annd.,, .,..... PEE ee aE EES yy snipe ine epee el: DB 1455 Gray BIATC. . eee *eeeee | eee eee eens a 85 1490 1878.24) 19 [Ashburner. Pree Gray Olina ser sae tate sine ase S Pi 5 28305383503 400 22% 5 to 1495 Meese tour yeerot ree meer rece ester sisters sieee: 5 ** 1500 nme wikte sandsiycis tachi ee serense teks sess. res iden 5 * 1505 Hard wifite. sand: :si:rietscssheecbeesasstinse cess scdorse: 5 “* 1510 | Ct Ore Rea eet Sean ged Dia by Fala pe eae aN 20 ** 1530 | ieee MA fer anne abell 00.5.5 acted sear aree cose ecr shi enne e 5-** 1535 : Mare Wiha: wand: «3 22672925; Messengers tae sl ese eae 10 “ 1545 : Srna, Detireccsvste ceca aae rises tee 5 ** 1550 : Remy MAMRR RS Ssk2eSitedsbesee ss Rees Pek es Meads iets: 25° 1575 : eavwaee aml ebellirss:y:c5s:ccdssaets Zee eee: fot Meh 15 “ 1590 : Gray slate..:3::32:5:: Sekeieisi nares edposrSsegiet neiris: 15 ** 1605 oo ope ELE CHOI RAAB RP a Beto eho. rg 8S pada a 20 ** 1625 Oo AOcacic, He ee EERIE PEEPEEPTSETEN Tos eT PE LEE 10 ** 1635 Gray slaté and shell... ...5..0.0ccccccccdccdedecccccess mibssé 30 “© 1665 MMMaL teas stivsc stacccrsicocser etree a eeniier aa’ 10 “* 1675 ES SE MEE 240d ce Pes ere re 10 ** 1685 Ciper tee tulloe Qiiickeand: 232552526 o6eoFRez bes ioe ees 3: 2“ 1687 Dark sane containing oll::: 35:56 2¢6 sc2235 SER AE 3 1690 Crevice, containing loose stones, and oil..:.....2.6.62026000. 5 1695 re nmMnaRa S205 25357735453 2530sbaseeee remem eee 5“ 1700 MMNNNENMEI 8 Sisscccistspli osc neeeeina pee eee 5“ 1705 PURMMERECRETcceacte cst igisscsccerscscates aie wial@d'e Kigateln was 10 ‘© 1715 oe SDE ons Son2s 0s {205 SNaeakee a eeara ks, 65 ** 1780 as crévice”’ full of stone and sand. . 222.260.000.002. ees 5 ** 1785 ets En Teer erect. 2s este cseeae createed tT 1782 ESET EERO ECOL Ee 16 ‘* 1808 SEE SEAR PP RP nee RB tl a 15 “ 1828 White and red sand mixed, red sand like quicksand........... 9 * 1832 nee ee PPE R ORE ED DEO RPED EP EDEL EAD. 4 7 11 ‘* 1843 0 OTS FSP EEERE EEE Sere EC erro 7 1850 __. Drilled dry. Cased...... Mata SAAT pee we ale » 647! hg Se a Pee EN ERNE Mii ae Ton 43° nner MOAVY Water Course... 2.2... eens 524! EE It BNE ha Ss 5 dou Che a dds dwn Caebees ite 593/ *- First strong smell of of]. ... 0.2.0.0... ... cece ees 1132/ a Gas and strong smell of Oil. ..........-. eee eee 1182/ eee EU MME ADT Ed ais'a-o's's'ein's'c wns i'sisie'sdWale'eeld 1685/ ace: Otevice full of quicksand. :....2......0. 200000. 1687/+ ait Gln cc svisveccvievacscsescrecsccceonws eveueenes 1690 Crevice containing loose stones and oil........... 1695/ EE EMRE Ae soca Waconia ave eats wah ov cese poate’ 1700/ MMMMEEIAS Sc ccactcoce ce reseaseses cscs seceeupee’s 1705/ ek ee er eer reer ere teary. trey ee 1720/ (?) MME SS ci 3, cccstoeoe coset eat aret throat ees 1780/ * _ Gas crevice full of stone and sand..... 2.2.0.0... 1784/ a eNO card cis ins nics siebbininiosnin aa MRO: HER 1808/ The bottom of the Olean Doagiondenle is the same distance above well Ashburner.] 20 [Aug. 16, No. 3)as well: No. 2, allowing for the difference in sevation: of the two wells. Ernhout.and Taylor Well, No, 1 Owned by Capt. John Ernhout ‘and Frank Taylor, Esq., on north side of Wilson Run, near south-east corner of warrant 3218, Jones Township, Elk County, and about 33 miles north-west of Wilcox and several hundred feet north of the P. & E. R.R. The tract upon which this well is located is owned by D. Scull, Jr., Esq.; of Philadelphia. Drilling was commenced Jan. 15, 1878, and abandoned March 13, when the tools were lost at a depth of 1335 feet. It is expected after the tools shall have been parma: that the well will be drilled deeper. ~ Record reported by Mr. M. M. Schultz. Elevation of well, determined by Mr. A. W. Sheafer, Aid, McKean District, 1645 feet aay gUOT SCA UNe sun LICEOR SA Ai Uow. eid oat ste aaa 40 to: 40/ Blue wand ‘shale i747 2. Siac. aw dlaad. odd. azoik ata. Hh60 ew 08 Pine SWAG) $PiVeos Je. Solem Iie. edi 1a Jud. wowdl.eag sods 40 ‘© 240 Red rock...... Dew ees cS eww ode eee we wba bless MOS. JIS Se 95 sf 885 Wed Week, very Tras’. te eg. Jods .ada i. Dossesat Baw. Be 15 ** 850 Red Todi; wohter oA Volvos Jeu alevob.naw. eu tettA sal 45 ** 895 Teed MME ADAG 10. P5002... HOINGi AAs eS gditeedl s 45 ** 440 Paha unid shella. (7. MAL Tats O08 .Clao) J), dora Sab ia oe) 15 455 BSS FAL ATT IWS IVA 20E vod Ji aad, IG QA 15 ** 470 Ted TOCK: ... cece eCUTIU. OM JO.009 At SRS » 10 -«* 480 Red sand.....0..... Oe... wedded Mie Lud. harsogs 15 **) 495 Blue Gand AES. 6. cece cece cc vc vccs sv crhSsh sl IIOD Matele ol ve01BS “i 580 Brown sand and white pebble...........- Sy ere wees (20565) 550 NG HUE BNO pdb neas shocsedccerreso¢d0nes deena 95.‘ 645 Seer SG GAN. curse setae bold bes rodh tees beecouea ee +. 10: $775685 GO) SRST CSS apo ccvkassteeeeevees 20.<* 675 Brown Band and white shells., .......-seeessseseeedee is bese 92s 2880 A RUE obs apboes ds eedserr cies serena TW 4* 755 aR a ORE ts cn ealasic RRs hnteo REEF ERP re ca 210 ** 990 ees UES 5 ol bn acinncppe noes pore ee Kean kee — 20 ** 1010 Slate.’ ..0.... seh iy baeered ds ppbaabeshridevnertaiteal oxesss. SOS 1000 TE sean opp aLAON A ee «.5,0.0.5. 60.0 Hie Ve NE WN Sak eo ap nadine A enon ere a eee 20.‘° 1115 ee PIR Sa ins ooo te heess ones 5s) mae make ee 04 epe-eee wae ANN clikith saan med m annie Rese kee aos mane eblock: phe $1295 Gray slate and shells .......+..+++5 ae Rn oe eewies orinmesmmae +» |(10,'4, 1285 Gray sand.......... phensearrerhekrtah oFeseteat soppy eeeas 20 ** 1305 STE SONU 5s a cc va ucaeadenresenueane eet Scegae. maby jaanee UTS BANG 65 dice cccctencnce PEOTET TLE a Pr e 5 ‘* 1820 White sand containing gas and strong smell of oil...... secewe 9 fat’! 1885 Drilled dry, Cased,,......++ Cap eeeersepercass « 4814/ Gas and smell of oil.........+. oh ne.twas ace oka Lost tools. ee ee 1885/ ee ee ee ee Dai ants 1878.]) > 21 [Ashburner. The position of the bottom of the Olean Conglomerate above the Ern- hout and Taylor Wells has not yet been determined. A comparison may be made betwéen these ‘sections and the records of the Wilcox Wells by means of the red shale bands. roth se | _Ernhout and Taylor Wal, No. 2. >» Owned by ‘Bembout and Taylor, and situated in the south: eastern corner of, warrant 3215, Wetmore Township, McKean County, about one mile north of well No.1: . Tract formerly part of McKean and Elk Land and Improvement Co.’s lands. Drilling commenced March 12, 1878, mineral water ‘‘vein’’ struck ata depth of 1990 feet May 9...The well was afterwards drilled 10 feet deeper through a dark’ fine (coffee grounds) sand strongly impregnated with oil. Oil not having been found in this well in paying quantities the casing was drawn, and water from the fresh water ‘‘veins’’ permitted to flow into the hole The gas threw out of the well water, at regular intervals, toa height of 125 feet, more or less.* Shortly after the casing was drawn, a ‘wooden plug was inserted into the upper part of the well.and partially ‘filled the hole. After this was done the well spouted every eleven minutes, ‘the eruption lasting for two minutes. The column of water and. gas rises above the top of the derrick (70 feet), and after several pulsations falls and tilmost Ceases to. spout, when it suddenly rises again repeating the action, mad vanishing entirely at the end of two minutes. ‘Record reported by Mr. M. M. Schultz, Elevation of well determined iy Mr. Sheafer, 1730 feet (Bar). Loam and sand..... Web sRLASESDESNODED oa0 ids iWidh ins J 40/ to’ 40/ RP OUR, tars neta ketene an snnn is chasannyosas snenawells ie 85: 44) 125 helig. Vb... vias Se tee eee ee sermw ese DURE 10 “* 135 RPE MMUO RGU CNN 046000. 04008 se’ de tax ewsnnstntnnnese ellosie B54 92.200 Gray slate and shells.........se.cceceeeeccues We aide ne ! 105 ‘© 305 Red shale...... DSSS oT HET SWAT OW SRN SWS ONS pwwierentedbreld 10 *® 315 MENG BAG PHONE sooo es creee's serene enw siaeeriwereadeeeeessNwene 40 ** 855 Red shale.............4: TLITCETETTITLe Licht + 125 *©) 480 Shells... ... heat Sore ila "a'e'e'o'a"9"a "0 "0" 'n"e's"0'0's 'n 'b'0 b eb ¥ bees eS ES Nw aw 30.** 510 MECOG TOCK , wis 05 0as a ase si ceases SSRSTTE DED EOIN ES Vise vvensens 00. SSILRED CEPLRY GYRUC irars'a's'a'ssie'a's's’s"0"s's'e'e'e'e'e's'e"s's"e'e' a's'e'ee'steteterareratetetoreeree 30 «© 590 Red shale....... Uta a alalete'plabate"s*e 07s "e'ete'a"e’ ee'o"e"s'e "e's "sie"s'e "arene bie tetw'el are 55 ** 645 Gray slate.....:. SERRBALEA EARNER ere DEAS ineteywere SUSE 175 ‘© 820 OTE GAT SONG. 5555 c0s aise ie ee re eee eae ese sere eee rere ere erwieres 80-** 900 RRINCL (BUDA 0525's °0<''s"a'e'o'a'e's'a'e'e'0"s'a's"s 0°e's'e’s'e'o'se'e'e's'v'0'o's CLONE NTE 100-** 1000 ee rer re eres TT Pee er eee re Ter er err caawse 75° 1075 HEM TOK ietrssiccccdcceccccce cece eet ccewes sateen essed 5.<* 1080 UMNO TOGK, “Pale? s ccceccwdsscddddceredecceacecucderess oe 8 £61085 Ay MMescccccc ecco ll Ie SHON De AR BA MEIN: J 85 ** 1170 * See paper which I read before the Society, Sept. 21, 1877, on the ** Wilcox Spouting Water Well.” ‘The action in these two weils is similar. Ashburner. ] 22 [Auge 16, PIS ao Ue Oc ACLs Oc CRANK nak cc dts axnananeancs ce OOO 5 to 1175 ee MUGOY, OTUSY, SIMU oie dusk ss i'seandeccabanstuanees 130 ‘1305 Ree Mis NA. Sica va encads bike vesvuncahsianeds .siavekewen 80 ** 1385 WUE UAT INNO Se er RCA RCN ORC Re sucesueus cee vuneseNnen 10 “ 1395 MPI R iis cb iswankuasnsnnscacrsdsctebcnnds aaebe OBOUE 10: “* 1405 PT OAT OE OD iiss va dnc access cau cenwananavens Jala fue ¢ 10 1415 Sand containing heavy gas ‘‘ vein.” occa enna ole ee Hr QA? LT AES Rae cc eee eee Ree SUPE re One BECP SE Lowers @ fs [obbelS§ 42D HGRA’ Bate. ce ccc cece cece cee en cene sane nes Hiale 48 «* 1470 Gand atid shells... 5. oie sce ccc ncncecenecnnsnkncnscaces Sutee SOO TASS eariCNe Tiss Stay slate « «nnn ance daicanakunnssse¥enan 210 * 1765 POON ee LLM rac 45 ** 1810 Ae ONY OOD A cake inc vec a cite e eet abee aera 5 661815 REP CTs s Sak 6 us ERA WN Was NU Cd Re CEE RU eUC Rae eee eee «=» 65) ‘*.1880 BREE WE OG0 Gs iis ccc cause cabeen ween Wis Nebaoy ergs». . 10.47(51800 PEP OEORY WIRES is y ain iin en RE e ek een 90. «1980 » Dark sand strongly imspregoased with oil..... Dot sale signe 30 THOSE 52.090 Dark fine sand (coffee grounds) containing Oil........... 60 .» 10 ** 2000 : Drilled dry. Cased...-..... wAS yan nt vesen evens 364/ GAS. i swe cence ee cae tak ba eereresanstetenturetenerete 1415/ GA Seeds cance acc cnasseccuseceeeauessunuaye 1405/ BStrong-smell of of)... .cccecssinesasesestachesst 1890’ 3 Btrong-smell of oil... 6. ces dosesseVentcuseceiuses 1990’ 2 Heavy ‘‘vein’’ of mineral water, easily corroding the t00]s... csesevcccesenesnpsgestsautasccn 1990! Bear Creek Well, or ‘‘ Dry Hole,’ P. C. L. and P. Co. la Owned by the Producers’ Consolidated Land and. Petroleum Company, of Bradford. Situated on Bear Creek, east side of County road between Wileox and Ridgway, in warrant. 3257, Jones Township, Elk peg Land leased from Wilcox Tanning Company. Drilling was commenced about. April 1, 1878, and was completed an from 50 to 60 days, The record was reported by Mr. M, M. Schultz. No show of oil was found, roan The elevation of the top of the well is 1595 feet (Bar.) above ocean, . - iy Pe Sas 4d Bein ea dais (ess kee C keene 25! to''25/ BUC BIBLE TOCK .'.’. 2's’ s's'e'e's'e's's 0 SIvedenerens Soci icenet ae m0 "60 1 AES TS Ted Se Siecsepancets cate wm 65 PME cicdcr eve ccd ldccereer re tibew anak tnd te TO so Red rock..... ERNEST RE ar blade vy yet tant eee d a retry Pine fobdakees maar or ' patty’ slate rOUK.. 35 isis Sossee elise BAP ory > wo AO MEMES Rect s weridvcccvcrsctsccrciassennarent rate 5 85 Ee AT Te rps ser tay toate cs cegekseni aa acket FAUT GOI eC Vata ee ee ee CaS TC aes yn mnal: meee 5°). 1878.] 23 {Ashburner. (Very muddy slate .....ss.eceeees Cehawaedevddarceiseezeesye 20'to 182 UN CRAG encanto ti necdadheceawdetercsdaes css" SiS CIS 10°** 492 Hard 64nd.....-see PupGkwankiaCedeeeccteceaqeeassceads 8 “*. 200 OfEdrd Slates. cc ccscses Cicaeenee Poe Tee UT CE ELE, wee Re, (630 ‘£2230 Wery White loose sand, , ..s0csecnsessentsvcesavevecesacavess 35 ‘* 265 Hard shells and slate ........ pedmderbiatatestesacadsQand 5 ©9270 Very hard sand.......000.0088- pide sees a Oey eects B80.) 204.0 290 PE IEINGE LOCK orc curccrecacadakhawondddensubnausadcedes 10 “* 300 Wery liard shells ../-....---+06- Hineeneddenedsecscerssivea 10 «* 310 PE GON cs cocnnnd conciteeoastedada deol witene lade hOe+* 2.820 DEE ans iestenucddccaneduasanddeaoas sea we2tdal 80 ‘* 350 UBard fide sand. .ccccseccccesecs ceseceaoane eesaevnc deacdeus 69 ** 419 BOTY BEtensnsasawnswwesecccccce seeeese aeedeee POY TET a) 10 ** 429 UPSENG GMO MONA sccctrcccsscecccccecesesssete Ceedeetessoress 10 ** 439 Shells... .... meeeses Mavesweseese reeeaae eteeseastsdevls 2 "BO 1489 OMGry 10d TOCKs cere. ccesvvrroeceeersades Cevereceretssaed ig YBa aT4 _ Soft slate or “putty ”’ rock ........ Je HSU TAVIGHU. Yi 309915 80“ 554 Wells ‘dnd slates ce scececess) SIUCHIIR (Ab e1g aAlle he PERE 55“ 609 SOW SMGS evandssecersssodassanctorereed Waive ss gale deellinlS ** 624 UE ONT TER AN iia dacde.t,ciccckesaancvacevades stares o one 10 ** . 634 Be MRT ODER ICE ey ok abcd c's ccccevvceed ods able venue dOnt 22 ** 656 Hard sandiQuei...eseceesers sbvececcncbes oe AdOs30 didmiz. eo 665 DOOR FOOD io voces vee vess tes ccdeccechswale be diate. wiio6 “ 691 Blue slate... <..xadbowies vals 38S a S9hew lacus ido se nieve. owe 12 ** 703 PE OELER Nh GUbboccdrcccrccestscthvernees dal bak ould A? 10% aE ar a ais waits 6.4 0'6 daa's'a. 4.4.0.» bie d¥/ee wh Oacien es sadlee 86 ‘* %98 Blue slated. Siete nd 53.54 oi de be awul.'s tte oil WH las) vans 22 ** 815 Red rock...... a Ms whe Suman wit 6 did @ nip akae itn Mab aie acai 48 ‘* 863 Glewend shetlave.. 296.200. holehloeson aenkorZedixg 30: 893 Red rockiuPs Vigo Ja of bE IBGE? HOST VAL. OD. Daisul ve oe RGM 919 Hard gray-sandaiw.al. 29.00). SIE a. O) aval b 10 ** 929 Soft slate and shell......... COSUIN. BIC MAL 408 ath L 167 “ 1096 Srey wate. 2000, DFA BIEL. IGA ads. DOOR aIITRR. AY, 159 ** 1255 SO UREA SAD dr cle dou ad a anig-e ds. kiew aac s desoien ia LB Yi. 10 ** 1265 Sintorand witells 044... Winton WM ol. ul, vzodar. eer Diy 30 ** 1295 NI MRNRR Sa RW ee dain dd o.d.da'sme oc cand 0a 0-00 4a@ba cae 10 ** 1305 Slate and sheltis.4 051) Jog FOAL 2 low alt Jogi ay 1 SOS "208 “* 1508 MEP QROUS soca vnnserasescesveanccicevcseccassovecsset 25 “* 15383 MM LMITUN are rca hs Nido oak ca'n.n& be 08 4.0% 8 oa 6 haven ve, B4,** 1567 RETINA BOI conulg Seases Hay cosas svi sbeadievenseseecssenes 12 ** 1579 SMINMOL Se sdie:s ake nixcd Uv vie ** 1920 Blate and shelbla:sissavissrsasesvesvuvssiccesersecevevecusss 8 “« 1928 TAG. Se. rh st a terrier tenes recess --. 60-** 1988 Slate and shellsi: ii sscsetes scorer cceeverevrevrenooneesd 10 ** 1998 SMM AIG) - SOO” voce cov ss cs abeuscpene icon 380’ BIPEOS THDG.S alla ein ules o's eh nee Res was elas 257 Crevice drained off water .........cceccceeccces 120/ 5 i si REO RS Aaa 230’ OS NR te ER REE ART RN SE DS NRE TEES Drillers reported ‘‘ oil smell’’ in sand from 1706 to 1756/ The Olean Conglomerate in this locality varies very much in its charac- ter. It is found changing from a coarse pebble conglomerate, to a-rather fine or even shaly sandstone in comparatively short distances. . The ‘‘blue slate rock’’ directly under the drift in the Bear Creek well, pinks probably a portion of the Olean Conglomerate... ali Silver Creek Well or ‘Dry Hole.’’ Burton and Wallace. Owned by Messrs. Burton and Wallace, of Rynd Farm, situated on Silver Creek, west side of County road, between Wilcox and Ridgway, in War- rant 3261, Ridgway Township, Elk County: Land leased from Diba Tanning Company. Drilling was commenced about the same time as at the Bear Creek Wel, and was completed June 26, 1878. , The record was reported by Mr. M. M. Schultz. No show of oil was ound, , ' The elevation of the top of the well is 1615 feet (Bar) above ocean. SUMOT sa v'si0e; x vaetsnp oie Reb abRVawweeRee ks x5 cue Sue 15’ to 15/ SRUEEM suiddaik'e's th wii 44 's'Ssg 6 Qhale Aceh aa Se ak heen Pee ee Le 10 oe ST ORIME. 5 a's'aca0 seh eeen pabideen ee buRVAvE D061 ee sa REERE 25 BS PERO GADG 4 so ds beac ads au'ss Chuadabih us clcns bce deme 80°**" 85 MMUOOOD ry i cscvincescilicsseceacedus¥ae ours ets iuvablen shen oe” 0 PAM MANLL o's 'o'c nc 0.c.cc0a blew uve uiin's 6e see eae da bic eee sae 60 150 MN MUA. ¢ 5c ogc tcacdaod cbc taxed soana RaseaeE siete 70“ 220 Red slate...... diseveneososttacssoacecgaessce¢4 once ttm RIE MONAG ROCK. o> 5h sv ccba ines eesknat vous Svcavusgeece ese. 0 mee SE PUES No ci écwidvdececcdacesadedgeer se eenee Ctelecghk ge ee Slate and hard shells ..... sive Dae thaceeeeeekaae NS ERI DES clin \\dhedthee + | IO OUI ARO vic vendestcsiscaccecaccrcceseisi sCetEneee ‘eeee "Oe BOO 1678: )5 / 25 {Ashburner. TPPMO HARE ca Sag we'ne ep erver tae Spee: ae Pe AS OP Ry 10 to... 390 ard FMC Sand... ccc cecocesreececieisi« eR Scighe acts KARUN YA funnest BO $0445 White slate and hard shells, . DAdbte OAD e PE PP es aaa shied 954,540 Red rok. . ..........00... Bees Bene Aetna be tp PPE PPL PI LTRS EE 5. 545 Se WII WIAD Iie a. cca. en nicpba uci tae miaadcre Amat d.d0 om aiian. 55,**,, 600 Pee RUPOLIN ORI GIO. cin ak arcane a eae Mokep arenes sn ees 10.“ 610 Me WHO DEK 2. sihacsbacneseaehasaser eerie heen otic heres 40,°*,; 650 WMO TOK. «oc cn FO Roe AoW SOUS Bee Pre Pe OE I 100 ‘+. 750 White slate........ ieGhace toh ee eaeey SPLAT eer e aiieda Bba'sS;,%65 TG ae vx onc cp Gdarrouak canons nee aaa s davon eins wk 6 85 ‘*. 850 2 ie Ret yee Nears Sad ty oe Spree ety sailed 22.°*, 872 TT cities 5 o's 9. ke ed 088 ccvaeea aoe eeuecene rat aas ae « 25 ** 897 White shells and MOG. cc beccctsethcceeane Scenes Sieietha pes: 26 “* 923 PURTPUMEE GaAs cchochcccsevecctexsbosegeces iespectaeg <-> 20 * 988 abn bop) Oe Ee REE PEROT foe ee tees ci teEt 42 * 1005 og i” eeaapampieiary ld 1s ven, Peni aay eee 20 ** 1025 rane WEAES ED SOUS... ccc adeeccavcceee ieee ene. yes 50 “* 1075 Hard black sand................- VoFeccewen rosacea haste 25 «© 1100 Hard slate:..... VE IAM POTTY Gaal, Bidd SU sisiowolas OO eshB fAAW175 "Black slate*and ‘shelle)). $1). ou. oeio00 A aed. aizads .bmed AB ‘* 1220 Hard white anid te F705. (lat Garode00.ni santebus estate 15‘ 1235 BINT. JY Ave a lal Ak adi aby is seidooa ib. s 930x' 1245 Sand and shells... .........2ifiagenn) a sal) adit ie. Gidz00. 10 ** 1255 Hard shelly rock... .....+.20-:sscersscensoecssessesasscenes 45 ** 1300 Pale red rock and’slate........... 22.0008 en 10 “* 1310 White slate. and shelley. . <4 6+.- 4804 seer nae ki dein atatns Feit 1890 Pe Ne tus « nnnernae sheAa ain nereatoain ka 12 «* 1332 POPPIPIAIRTA - Ranash fandls + venene}- see sas eaner ope ennne 68 w» 13.‘¢ 1345 Ee Ra a a BERS ef pa aanae, BO.) 1865 Lightined sands ..5)- 42 2.+5,< Pp eRe ENE TONS Oe atte oe. 10 ‘* 1375 NITEM R aioe. cies ccs ss epithe s geranneets ait ae 20 ** 1395 PA ETRY SRG 505 + + wire iagie > ae> ences tas es 10 ** 1405 PRM OR MN OE aN eBid nul 's osievid ee vigles du CARB Eb ae oe 105 1415 Slate and shells..... ate otpiaie ib (hate 449 Sud fs RPS See 20 ** 1435 PO PA Ng dasa US UE Valve t's Cob eee teiealon sos 25 ** 1460 URMIMIININCY dnd ted cadiara sea c:s 6 0.0.0 400 © od ne aaeRae Mae He 15°“ 1475 Slate and shells...... See ay dos Venciclanctins ck wea Seem erm ek es 35 “1510 AMMO Cs iach Ware dbo as 4 bbc adnecewecdidadeataedeesens 10 ‘* 1520 GPT CBN. 5 cow isis sess vecensccccccsscccacccnbadsgerewscses 8 ** 1528 PENMETNE DP Ahr ae oe? ohtk oie 1a L0c Sec Hed eoR cee: 7 1535 peuateand hard shells, ..c.000s3sie. cee a8 Deets ete ss 45 ** 1580 EMTALA OREM Soot ein guns cones ene tee ee 25 “* 1605 SUMING OBI cn oa.5. a ainte. « were'> viz. oe epee aie ahnen s 20 “* 1625 UNG eal a ox hob bnckan Gin CAGMaes nennas « 8 ** 1633 = ma alii len lit ie eli ele a dl AL he beeen Fei ES DERI SEEN ADE EL SLL TOE OP OES CE sper ee Mase PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xviIl. 102. D. PRINTED NOV. 22, 1878. Ashburner.] 26 [Aug. 16, Hard shbls and “slatenisi ovsul essvide asl. ie WA. -ecaae. 15 to 1665 Hard shells: J. isi8 ylnodtu 4 ATT. BOA, BIOs AQQOT Adit OW 5 £1670 Sand-end:péebblesah od nane Woiges acini Jlalnia.edt ay oUt 1678 Siateland:shelis.i . 22101 .adi ed. bohale . JAG AR «AL DISTIANA 82 «© 1760 Pied Ore. Sieber: i682 seven ae 52 noes: 450/ coe ie RIND iota Sobek a nie Sccne s pilacos ce dee “15? : GIG WEROE TR COMI fo Facies S50 women a Coes ce 445 to 540/ j xe ee EOUISOGR ceils con antec es. 2 1528 to 1535/ Smell of oil reported in sand............. 1670 to 1678’ The Olean Conglomerate is probably represented. in. the record: ie the sand from 30 to 85 feet below the top of the well. The records of the Bear Creek and Silver Creek Wells.are, ip valuable as having a direct bearing upon the probable existence of petroleum to the south and south-east of Wilcox. to _It-will be noticed that the mass of the red.rocks-are some. 300 feet eee in the the Bear and Silver Creek Wells than in the Wileox Wells, estimat- ing from the bottom of the Olean Conglomerate. _ The question as to whether the mass of red bands in the two -Jocalitivs are the same and whether the strata included. between. them and the Olean have thickened to the south and south-east, is extremely suggestive. Nore.—The records are published just as they have been reported to me, I have not even altered the phraseology, which is quite different i ina number of places where the same idea was evidently intended to be con- veyed. ~ I wilf merely add, for those who are unacquainted with the terms em- ployed by the drillers, that ‘‘shell’’ means any hard stratum encountered in the well, and not, as might be supposed, a fossil. Nature's Reforesting. By Bit K. Price. (Read before the Americun Philosophical Society, September 20, 1878.) The paper on Sylviculture read in November and December, 1877,, has produced the following confirmatory letters of views therein expressed, They are from the present. Chief Justice of Pennsylvania, who. lives in Beaver, and the Professor of Botany in the University of Pennsylvania, formerly a resident of Miflin County, Pennsylvania, ContTINENTAL Horen, Fesrvuary 11, 1878. My Dean Sins! have read the address you sent me on Syleiculture with great interest, especially as some of its facts have come under my own observation, The western part of Pennsylvania was once among the best wootled portions of it, yet the destruction of timber has plainly affected 1878] / 27 {Price. springs‘and streams. Many of the springs have become wet weather water courses, while the floods in the streams rise suddenly and high, and sub- ‘side as quickly ; the rainfall running rapidly over the denuded surface, and failing to penetrate it, as when shaded by the forest, and covered with leaves and weeds. There is a. curious fact I have never read of, yet which displays the effort of nature in the spread of vegetation. In July, 1837, I returned home from the Constitutional Convention, which sat,in Harrisburg. When passing along the cana in the valley of the Juniata, I noticed long reaches of stone covered mountain sides, bare of all vegetation from base to summit, and of most curious structure, the stones being, apparently, comminuted rocks, so small and flat as to have come ‘to a regular ineli- nation at angles, varying probably from twenty-five to forty degrees. After I began to come to that city to the sessions of our Court, passing upon the Pennsylvania Railroad, I occasionally looked for some of these ‘naked stone mountain sides without seeing them. At first IT supposed this to be accidental, my attention happening not to be drawn to them at the proper time. In the course of time I began to think IT was mistaken, and ‘that these bald spots had disappeared. I was led to look more closely and continuously, and saw a few left, but greatly diminished in extent, and some mere dots between growing trees. At last I discovered mountain sides covered with a very smail growth of trees, mere shrubs in size. The last time. my attention was given, I saw one large space of mountain side covered with the small flat stones before described, and in it here and there a single sapling or shrub or two standing alone, proving that from leaves or other vegetable matter deposited by the winds, soil had begun to be formed, and vegetation to grow. From what I have noticed of other stony mountain sides covered with large timber, along the same valley, I conclude that there was a time when all these mountains were similar rocky, and stony surfaces, bare of all vegetation, and left by the convul- sions of nature just as she cast them up. IT am very truly yours, DANIEL AGNEW. Hon. Eui K. Price. : ‘fe aw oo! HE sad geod * BEAVER, AvuGusT 26, 1878. “My Dear Sir :—On my return by the Pennsylvania Railroad last week I ‘discovered at several places the evidence of the fact I stated to you last “winter in regard to the growth of timber on the bald stony surface of the Allegheny Mountains. I am now perfectly satisfied of the truth of my sug- gestions. I saw distinctly the remaining uncovered surface as of com- minuted ‘stone in patches small and: great, the young growths of shrubs and sapling interspersed, with here and there one shrub in a bare patch, indicating the beginning of covering and the different stages of progress. The first point I noticed was about seven or eight miles west of Mifflin —the second at 161st mile to Pittsburgh--the third at 152d mile to Pitts- Price.] 28 [Sept. 20, burgh—the fourth 140th mile ¢o Pittsburgh, and the fifth just east of the Spruce Creek Tunnel. An examination of these places I have no doubt will show them to. be constantly arising. Yours Truly, &e. , DANIEL AGNEW. Hon. Exr K. Price, Philadelphia, Pa. Weasr Cuester Co., Penna., August 29, 1878... My Dear Mr. Price :—Your letter was received yesterday. Owing to the work constantly pressing me I have been unable to get away more than four days thissummer. During that time I passed (in train) along the line of the Pennsylvania Central Railroad and in the narrows of the Ju- niata between Mifflin and Lewistown, and my attention was called to the fact that on a number: of rocky places all the timber was small and of recent growth. This is at or near the places mentioned by Chief Justice Agnew, and in so far may be regarded as confirming his views, when taken in connection with the fact that extensive and destructive conflagrations ap- pear to be less frequent there than formerly. Being raised in that region, I can remember when for miles the mountain sides each year were a line of fire. Though I have not been there of late years much of my time, I still feel justified in the statement that such events are now of rare. occur- rence. Fires doubtless do originate each year along the line of the Railroad, but they do not‘appear to spread far and wide as before. Touching the motion of the rocks as preventing growth; I can only give as an instance the old mountain road between MeVeytown and Kisha- coquillas Valley. This ran through ‘some of the most rocky places in the region, and where the slope was very steep, and indeed almost undermined them on the upper side. For years this road was practically abandoned, at least no work was done upon it. I do not remember the place where the rocks had slidden enough to close the road. | Indeed these very places, were favorite places of growth for the Purple Flowering Raspberry (Rubus odor: atus) and the Hydrangea arborescens. Motion here must have been very slight. It is a source of great regret to me, that I have not been able to take the time to go into a full investigation of this matter. As it is one of interest, and closely associated with my line of work. I believe that the large rocks allowing the snow and rain to find its way readily to a considerable depth have also favored carrying the soil in the same direction (and then away). Professor Hayden alluding to similar places in our western domain, offers this as an explanation of the scarcity of large trees there. Very sincerely Yours, J.T. ROTHROCK, 1878.) ,. 29 [Price, I believe Major Powell in. his report, published or about to be published. by Government, goes into the question of destruction of forests by fire very fully, and presents the case in a very strong light. WEstT CHESTER, CHESTER Co., PENNA., September 3, 1878. Dear Mr. Prick:—Since writing to you I find. the following statement in>a lecture by! Prof. Gray of Cambridge, on ‘‘ Forest Geography and Archeology’’ quoting from Professor Shaler of |Kentucky—*‘‘ Professor Shaler from his observations in the border land of Kentucky thinks that there are indications there of comparatively recent conversion of oak openings into prairie,-and now since the burnings are over, of the re- conversion of prairie into woodland.’’ The passage in the first part of the quotation refers to Shaler’s opinion that fires have destroyed the forests there. This you know is in entire accordance with what is said on pages 276 and 277 of Michaux Travels, published in 1805 (Lambert’s translation), of ex- actly the same region, inasor 1 Sincerely yours, A 9 J.T, ROTHROCK. ' Professor Leo Lesquereaux has formed the opinion that the prairies have failed to produce trees because of a soil inimical to their growth. This theory appears to be successfully combatted by O. P, Hay in the American Naturalist for May 1878, p, 299. It is also contrary to many facts stated in “‘Sylviculture.”’? The last page of that paper contains the conclusion of O. W. Wight, in his Geology of Wisconsin, who said, ‘‘ Fire has killed the timber over wide areas, on which grass was growing, exhibiting before our eyes nature’s simple method of reconverting woodland into prairie. The reverse process is just as simple. When prairies are no longer swept over by fire, timber springs up, reconverting prairie into woodland. | Grass, with fire as an ally, can beat timber. Timber can beat grass, when it has no fire to fight.’ We may also add that without fire to fight it can conquer stones and root itself beneath the rocks, and be anchored all the stronger, It is ever man that is the great Centnnyet, and he is competent to repair his own diese nm re Yoniributions from the University of Pa., No. XV. Preliminary notice on Chromometry, a new branch of quantitative analysis with the blowpipe. «2 By PROFESSOR GrorGeE AuG. Kénta, Pa. D. Wirn a PLATE. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, Oct. 4, 1878.) In a former paper presented to the Society (Proceedings Vol. XVI., January, 1877), I described a colorimetrie estimation of titanium. Mention is made in that paper of the interference with accurate results by the pre- K6nig.] 30 [Oct.4, sence of metals producing green glases in the reducing flame, such as vanadium or chromium, the green being complementary with the red of titanium and thus destroying the latter. That method is purely colorimet- — ric, as the determination depends on a comparison of color ¢ntensity with glass beads containing known quantities of titanium. But the mutual ex- tinction of complementary colors led me, already at that date, to seek & way for the utilization of this principle, as expressed in the same paper : ‘*T am now experimenting upon the feasibility of extinguishing the color of titanium by a graduated scale of green, etc.’ Finding, however, some serious practical obstacles, I allowed the subject to rest until the present summer, when perfect leisure favored a more successful pursuit.— I now place before the Society the result in a preliminary form, reserving for a future paper the details and the special determinations, as well as tables, for a number of the most important minerals and ores.—The new. method of analysis I propose to name ‘‘chromometry,’’ for I measure the quality as well as the quantity of certain colors, both isolated and when combined with other colors not their compiementaries, these latter being the determinants, . Thus, iron imparts. to. borax in the oxydizing flame a dark red-brown color while the bead is hot, which passes into pure yellow at the ordinary temperature of the air. Under the same conditions man- ganese produces a purplish-red glass, both together a brown. glass in all shades from pure yellow to pure red, according to the relative quantities of the two metals. If this glass be looked at, through a certain thickness of a transparent green medium, such as green glass—the red will have dis-), appeared and a pure yellow will be seen ; increasing the thickness of green medium ever so little, will cause a greenish yellow. color to appear, whilst an‘equal reduction in the medium will canse a, brownish-yellow tiat.,.The human eye is much quicker to appreciate a change of shade, than asmall , change of intensity of color, as those well know, who are accustomed, to the polarization of sugar. —In this instance [ designate the pure, yellow as the point of extinction, while colorlessness or any other, simple. color, may. represent extinction in other eases.—Thus it will be understood that, the, new method analyses the colors, what, colorimetry of liquids as heretofore, applied does not, it involves another principle and should therefor be called by another name.—Chromometry seems to express the essentials of the, method very well ‘‘a measuring of color’’ besides being a purely Greek compound noun, not Latin-Greek, as Golorimetry,. The new principle ,, of analysis by complementary colors is appiicable to both liquid and solid, transparent colored bodies, but I shall confine myself for the, present to, the solids exclusively. In regard to their behavior comnts borux and mierocosmic salt—the metals are chromatic (imparting characteristic colors’ to, these fluxes) or achromatic (imparting no color, or no characteristic color). —The chromatic series comprises + copper, nickel, cobalt, iron, uranium, chromium, van- adium, tangsten, titanium, manganese, molybdenum, niobium, ilmenium, neptunium. All of these metalls fall within the capacity of chromometric — 1578.) , 31 [Koénig. determination, -Some of,them are.eminently chromatic’ as: Manganese cobalt, vanadium, titanium, and they are capable of very accurate determi- nation... 0. ™s* 01 of Mn..,0,, dissolved in 100 mgrs. of borax glass yields a distinct color,.0. ™s* 1 a deep color, 0. ™s 2 nearly opaqueness. The range of greatest sensitiveness is between 0, ™s"05 and 0. ™s*- 10; the limit of un- rib for my eye is 0. ™*. 002 Mn., Os: Brrecution of the method. 1. Preparation of the bead. Before starting upon an analysis, I melt a number of borax beads weighing each about 90 mgrs. Some of these I crush ina steel mortar and keep the coarse powder on a watch glass for use. A number of platinum wires, weighing 100 mgrs. each, or a few tenths less, are likewise kept in readiness. They have at one end a cir- cular loop (2) 0.1 inch in diameter. One of these wires (w), Fig. 1, I place on the pan of a delicate balance, which should indicate one twentieth of a milligram with precision, and at the same time rapidly. (Such balances are known as “Small size Assay balances and are manufactured in great - perfection ‘by the firm of Trémner & Sons of Philadelphia.) The wire is readily tared by the milligram rider, as its weight is close to 100 mgrs.—-A quimntity (s) of 5 mgr. of the finely ground ore, or in many cases of determinative mineralogy a splinter of a mineral, is now weighed with the greatest care (the hand must rest exactly at zero) since an error here of + 0. ™"-'05 will produce either 99 percentum or 101 instead of 100. With some practice the error will not exceed + 0.5 p. c. T remove now the 5 mgr. weight and replace it by one decigram. In the other pan I place one of the reddy borax beads (b) and with the addition of pulver- izéd borax glass (p) equilibrium is restored. The scale pans are made of platinumfoil.’ The one holding the flux and substance is placed on a holder (Plattner’s cupel holder is very good) and brought beneath the blowpipe flame, so that the current of gases will not affect it, whilst the wire is in- serted into its handle. The flame is a strong clean oxydizing one, produced best with lard of] anda mechanical blast (I find a small Catalan blast, made from a Wolf's bottle, very convenient and steady). Bringing the red hot loop of the wire down upon the borax bead causes this to adhere firmly, and after being melfed picks up at once and without loss the smaller par- ticles of the flux. In adding now the substance every precaution against mechanical Joss must be taken. Should the substance contain volatile matter, care is particularly required, because if the mass of red hot flux be dipped into the midst of the fine powder the gases or vapors will generate so suddenly that a scattering must take place. But if the bead be ap- proached to the margin of the small heap of powder and only a small quantity of, it be taken up at a time, no loss will be sustained, as many ex- periments prove. From the smooth platinum surface of the pan every par- ticle of substance can be collected. This operation consumes from 5 to 10 minutes according to. the solubility of the metallic oxides. The bead is now. allowed to, cool and, still.on the wire, replaced on the balance... Some S20) Konig.] 32 [Oct. 4, of the borax has. been volatilized ; this with the volatilized constituents of the test substance, has now to be made up to 100 by addition of pulverized borax glass. After remelting in the oxidizing flame and cooling it will be found that the weight is still 100 mgr. Now I examine the bead. If too deeply colored or even opaque, I remelt it, throw it from the wire into a porcelain capsule, and crush it in the steel mortar. Of the powder I weigh off 5-10-20 etc. mgrs. according to the depth of coloration, and complement 100 mgrs. by a bead and pulverized glass, as before described. If after melting and cooling the color should be still too deep (in excep- tional cases which will hereafter be described), a second dilution is effected in the same way. Of a substance containing 1.5 p. ec. Mn.,0,—and no other coloring oxides—5 mgrs. will just give the convenient depth of color to the first bead and no dilution is here necessary. Again melted and thrown from the wire, the bead is ready for the next treatment. The quantity of colored glass adhering to the wire matters not, if it does not exceed 10 mgrs. 2. Optical preparation of the bead.—In developing this method it was soon found that with the sphervidal shape of the bead no constant results were obtainable. Acting as a lens it would concentrate the coler if the radius of curvature were smaller, and dilute it if larger,, besides it did not seem feasible to attach the bead in the chromometer so that the line of greatest thickness should exactly fall into the line of vision. After trying a number of contrivances unsuccessfully, I finally hit upon the simplest of all and one that proved entirely satisfactory. I take a platinum cylinder 6.09 inch high, 0.145 inch inner, and 0.167 inch outer diameter, hold it with a platinum tipped forceps into the flame until it is red hot, then press its circumference upon the bead, so that the latter adheres firmly. If now held again into the clear flame horizontally, bead downwards, until the glass becomes liquid and the cylinder red hot, capillary attraction will cause the glass to flow up into the cylinder, without any overflow on the outside of the platinum ring, and if turned properly while cooling, the glass will equally protrude with convex surface on either end of the ring, about 0.03 inch (fig. 3). After cooling, the bead, thus mounted, must ap- pear entirely free of air bubbles. By the next step the protruding convex- ities are cut away, leaving two plane parallel faces and at the same time bringing about the standard thickness in the glass. Fig. 4 represents in natural size the serviceable contrivance which renders this operation both rapid and accurate. A is a brass plate ,'; inch thick and 2 inches in diameter, A central per- foration admits with easy friction the tube B, into one end of which the platinum cylinder fits. By slitting the tube has spring and holds the cylinder sufficiently tight. A shoulder in the tube prevents the cylinder from sliding in deeper when pressure is put on. The apparatus is placed upon a plane glass plate with some fine corundum (or emery) and water, the forefinger presses upon the knob of the tube, while thumb and middle finger grasp the neck of the plate and move the bead over the glass plate. | Proc Amer Phil.Soc.Vo! XVIIL Plate | FIG. 1. cee WAT, SIZE. FIG. 7. NAT, SIZE. RN | / ‘J, Ly FIG. 3. 7 €) : S Y A, Y y FIGS. y NAT; SIZE Y) | a eee: | eteetor wR eet 9 WET at Bates diner Moos: 6 ct Dart Gee i analqer cteulad Sioyil adit aioe bataing ote eutome ixlz@ ant £4: ” : gp sdot sit otal eaky Bomion 2d digo sag y a ae ee Tere . - en cu A eee a 2 Ae ois a ee Pr ay pce rm t i Ld a Pe eo ae sotnaitss 0 pms = Ane wt ux vebsaiiiie one oF 32 : tad? sigcere 0@ Doads patra . ag 2: Tere OP ‘* oo. - = i ok: r = == Ye | r Pa a oe ae v - ote ate at - : (tania ; E - ra y a. * , A Bt pee ares. 5 iy Rn a Oe 1878.] Oo |Konig. After grinding one side, the bead is pushed out, reversed and the other side cut similarly. A rectangular slot in a brass plate (fig. 5) exactly 0.12 inch wide serves as a gauge into which the bead must pass with friction. One obtains soon such a practice that the fit will be obtained without requiring ‘asecond setting. The operation only consumes 3 minutes. The rough- ness of the faces causes now the bead to be only translucent, but by apply- ing athin film of Canada balsam a beautiful transparency is obtained. I place the bead into a small air-bath heated to 150 C° for a few minutes then apply by means ofa pointed tube the liquid balsam, replace in the air-bath 5 minutes, after which the bead is ready for the chromometer, as soon as it has resumed equal temperature with the air in the room. © 3. The Chromometer.—The construction of this simple instrument is represented in transverse sectional view in the fig. 5. A box f,8x1x1 inches, is mounted on a stand s, 18 inches high. A wedge (w) having the complementary color to that of the metal which is to be determined, cemented for support upon a colorless glass plate, moves by rack motion in the box f. The motion is imparted by turning the knob d. In its centre the box is perforated so that pure sky light or light reflected from the porcelain plate ¢ may pass through the colored glass into the tube a, through the bead g, into the eye of the observer at the lens 6. The latter has only a small magnifying power and serves mainly to give a straight line of vision parallel to the tube a. The lens is readily remov.~ able, so as not to obstruct the insertion of the bead into a. The joint e serves to incline the line of vision, if that should become necessary. The sliding plate which carries the wedge is furnished with a permanent milli- meter scale, which is read by the observer through the opening o in the box, simultaneously with the observation of the bead. Fig. 7 gives a natural size horizontal view of the sliding plate with a section through the wedge. The latter is held by the projections p, p,, p,,, p,;,, and can be readily exchanged. Mode of working with the Chromometer. In the first place the wedge must be calibrated. A single determination will suffice for this purpose, since the law pertains that ‘‘the intensity of color is directly proportional to the thickness of the wedge, and hence to the percentage of metal under determination. If, therefore, the wedge is accurately cut, so that its section is a perfect triangle, its length and thick- ness at both ends being known, it is only necessary to dissolve a proper quantity of the chemically pure metal or one of its compounds in the man- ner described, to cut the bead and to determine the point of extinction on the scale, and the quantities corresponding to each millimeter can be cal- culated by simple proportion. Having found, for example, that a certain wedge, 3 inches long, tapering to a perfect edge on one extremity and being 0.1 inch thick at the other extremity, placed so that the apex is exactly at zero on the scale, will extinguish the color of a normal bead containing 0.™s* 08 Mn,O,, exactly at the division 15 on the scale, it is PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. xyiit. 102. Ek. PRINTED DEC. 12, 1878. Pd Konig.] a [Oct.. 4, vevident that»each division awwill be equal we aH =0: 0058. ‘This fraction is, therefore, the ‘titre of this scale. Dissolving 5 mgr. of a mineral con- taining manganese and nothing that could interfere, we find the pola, of CSemIION at 17, then we have percentage p of Mn, 0, jee re 10 ana f notfodiza } ; lo. ornit auld TA a a pe abi paper I stalls give tables ad dotnerinelaaate for a num- ber of important. minerals and ores, As the determinations will have'to he made, for the most.of-them, in) the humid way; the:labor will be:exten- sive and time consuming. [should esteem ita great favor ifmy co-labor+ ers in mineral chemistry would furnish me with such small samples: of minerals and ores analyzed by them and coming within the limits of this method. In so much as each worker multiplies himself,;soyto speak, by lessening the time consumed, in determinations, I cannot ‘but consider this chromometric method as of the greatest importance, and agaimask for active co-operation. in, its further development... Thus; far. I. have proved the method thoroughly only for manganese, ironand chromium.; The former offers no difficulty and. gives equally/aceurate results: with the most ap- proved gravimetric methods. I shall next, extend:it to copper ores...) 009" Oricial Harmonies. By Pliny Earle’ Pind an Dd Pre of 2 Phi sootpny in “Haverford College. spinhe (Read havens the aon Philosophical. Beciety, October. 4th,» deiesyba : No surer test of any hypothesis has ever been suggested than its furnish- ing a successful anticipation, or predictions of facta or: Bac te that — were previously unknown. | The harmonic progression, which starts from Jupiter’s centre of linear oscillation as a fundamental unit and which has 4 for its denominator-dif- ference, Was taken as the ground for such a’prediction, in the communica- tion which I read to the American Philosophical Society on the 2d of May, 1873.* Kirkwood had, a short time before, computed a probable orbit for **Vulean,’’ which satisfactorily represented the second interior term of the series, and this accordance was one of the principal sources of the con- fidence with which I ventured upon a publication of the prediction. Forty-one days afterwards, on’ the 19th of June, De Ja Rue, Stewart and Loewy communicated to the Royal Society certain conclusions, based upon three sets of sun-spot observations, txken in three different years, and extending over periods, respectively, of 145, 123 and 139 days. Those observations indicated some source of solar disturbance at .267 of Earth’s mean radius-vector, which represented the first: interior term of my series and gave the first conclusive verification of my prediction. Tn announcing * Proc, Soc. Phil, Amer., x'li, 2%. HA, | : , 1973.1 575) (Chase. this fact ty the Society, I presented: three ‘nearly identical series, the first being determined solely by Jupiter, the second by Earth, and the third by relations of planetary and solar masses.* I gave precedence to the first of these series, both because of BI upiter ’s predominant importance and because of the many planetary harmonies which are determined by Jupiter’s mean perihelion.+ At the time of the Tate total solar eclipse, Watson and Swift each ob- served two small planets between the orbit of Mercury and the Sun. By comparing the published position of the planet which ‘was first announced by Watson, with some of the most trustworthy of the recorded observa- tions which:were thought by Leverrier to indicate intra-Mercurial tran- sits, Gaillot and Mouchez found an orbital period of 24.25 days,{ which represents the third interior term of my ‘series and pre ois strict verifi- cation of my prediction. The relatively rapid motion of Phobos, the ininer satellite of Mars, and the probably meteoroidal nature of the corona, may reasonably lead us to look for an indefinite number of further verifications in the results of future discovery . Noother known medium possesses so great a degree of elasticity as the hypo- thetical luminiferous #ther ; none other is, therefore, so well fitted for the production of musical, or rhythmical harmonic vibrations. Numerous evi- dences of intelligent arrangement and design have been pointed out in the solar system. They all indicate important laws, but none show so close and general accordance with actual planetary positions as those which most accurately record the ‘music of the spheres.’’§ I submit the following table, both as evidence of the foregoing statements and as # possible help towards the discovery of new planets or the deter- mination of their orbital periods. Wt tee F Nox Harmonic; ‘Prediction; Confirmation, -© 1 % Jupiter = + 3469 Node of Subsidence, 3.469 anit a 4, 694 Venus m~ p, | 698 th voter 4. .885 Mercury m. BST. rey Te. 267, De la Rue, 8... and. L, -.267 5 abr no 204 Kirkwood, .209 6 soap o> 165 Watson, 164 paeets. A gyi; (139 glisolowletiea doidw .‘‘yaxo 8 sy) »120 +93 - 494 lrok gy «105 Helios, 106 on Sa xh, 0196 Themis, 0196 f Bp; -ogbr, -0108 Eunomia, 0108 ey stasis gts .0075...,., Phaos, 0074 odT . phy -).0057 Lyehnis, -0057 6, opty -004606,. Sun’s surface, 004606 #Proo, Soe Phil: Amer., xiii, 470, 472. .t Thid, 259, = Comptes Rendus, 5 5 Aout, 1878. 4 Proe. Soe. Phil. Amer, xili, 474. |m, mean. p. perihelion, Chase.]} 36 [Oct. 4, The harmonic denominators for Nos. 1-8, etc., are of the general form 4n—3. The denominators for Nos. 1,-6,, are of the form 4 V—3; Y being equal to 9 (4n—3). The first term of the second series, or the 9th term of the first series, gives the orbital distance of a planet which would revolve about the sun synchronously with a solar half-rotation, a period which seems to be determined, as we have already seen, by the action of Lieut. The term, orthe 45th term of the first series represents the orbital dis- tance of a planet which would revolve in a sidereal day, or synchronously with Earth’s rotation on its axis. The corresponding planet may be fitly named ‘Themis, in honor both of the daughter of Ouraiios and _— yes of her character as goddess:of-law and order. A The term 3,, or the 8ist.term of the first series, marks the orbital, dis: tance of a planet which would have an orbital period. synchronous with Jupiter’s rotation on its ‘axis. Its designation has also a double fitness ; ; Eunomia having been the mythical daughter of ‘Jupiter and Themis, and her name signifying ‘* good government.” / The term 4,, or the 117th term of the first series, gives! the position as a planet which would have an orbital period, twice as Breat asif it were at Sun’s surface, The term 5,, or the 153d term of the first series, eae. a ‘planet. which would have an orbital period determined by Herschel’s ‘‘ Subsidence” frony opposite extremities of an early solar diameter: ) 2° | The term 6,, or the 189th term of the first series, "represents the present surface of Sun, provided the depth of the photosphere isjone per cent. of Sun’s radius, The denominator of the one hundred and eighty- seventh term of the first series (1+-1864=745), which terminates the intra-telluric series, oe sents the ratio of the aggregate planetary mass to Sun’s’ mass. Herschel’s modified statement of the nebular hypothesis and Gummere’s criterion, not only furnish ground -for a. satisfactory explanation, of such remarkable velocities as that of the inner moon of Mars,* but they also seem to require that secondary orbs, when they revolve in less tim than is required for the rotation of their primaries, should be denser than the primaries. I find, therefore, good. reason’ for anticipating that Phobos, as well as any yet unknown possible, moons of Mars which have an orbital term of less than,a day, will be found to be more dense than the planet itself. That these accordances find a veru causa in the harmonic undulations of the luminiferous «ther, is made still more evident by the constant solar equation, ge = yt == weloeity of light: g; representing Sun’s superficial gravity atany stage of nebular condensation, past, present, or future ; 4, solur modulus of light ; ¢, time of corresponding rotary oscillation, or half- rotation; ¢, fs alsé time of traversing } modulus of light, or J mean lu- miniférous ethereal atmosphere, under the constant acceleration g. * Proce Soe, Phil. Amer, xvil, 302,912, ete. Cb .& 1919" 1s) — 38T 1 ee Heating, October 18, 1878. lel’ 16 members. Vice-President, Mr. PRAuBY, in the Chair. .» Dr, Muhlenberg, a newly. elected member, was. presented ' to the presiding officer and took his seat. ’ Letters “accepting membership were received from Dr. Morris Longstreth, dated Philadelphia, 333 S, 12th street, October 7; Mr. J, B. Knight, Hall of the eee rlias Luai tute October 7; and Mr. Samuel. H. Seudder, Cambridge, Mass., October 4, 1878. » A letteracknowledging diploma of membership was re+ ceived from Mr. A. ‘Agaaniz, dated Cambridge, Mass., July 9,.1878. Letters of acknowledgment for publications received were read:as follows: from the Holland Society of Sciences, Jan. 7, 1877 (I-VI, i; Proc. 1, XLV, XVI); Royal Society, New South Wales, Sydney, September 9 (100; List). The following receipts for Proceedings No. 101: . Essex Institute; Providence Franklin Society and Society for the Encouragement. of Industry ; New: Bedford Library ; Aim- herst College; Yale College; Surgeon-General’s Office; U. S. Naval "Acdideiny’ ; Bhi eeAL fa Institution; Kansas State . Historical, Society ; Messrs,,G. L. Vose, Jangh Bigelow,.M. D., Dr. Waleott: Gibbs, T. Ps James, Dri Asa Gray, EN, Hotaford: Jas. B. Francis, Dr. Pliny Earle, Jas. D. Dana, oe 0. ©. Marsh, H. A. Newton, Geo. G. Brush, Wm. P. Blake, . J.8 eter. Dr, W..A, Hammond, W..,,.Green,, Wm. Blasius, Pliny &..Chase, T. P. Porter, George Smith, C. F, Himes, J. FP. Carll, F. V. Hayden, Simon Newcomb, Dr. Theddore Gill, ©. A Schott, Admiral J. Downes, E. Good- fellow, W. B. Taylor, J. 11..C. Coffin, J. M.. Hart, J... Campbell, Daniel -Kirkwook, A. -H. Worthen; Dr. Robt. Peter, J. D. Whitney, J. F. Clarke; and Dr. E. Jarvis. 38 [Oct, 18, Also_ receipts for Catalogue, as follows.:,Boston, Publie, Library (Part ILD); Amer. Antiquarian Society (Part IID)s, Wisconsin State Historical Society (Part III); Regents of, the University,of New York (Part. I); and the U. $, Naval Observatory (Parts I, II, IIT). A letter requesting exchange of catalogues) sas received. from the Public School Eabrarian at St, Loaia, —On, motion» the exchange was ordered. “TQ I Letters of envoy were received from the Royal Saciatyn of New, South Wales, Sydney, Sept. 11,1878 ; Royal. Bavarian. Academy, Manche March 30,1878 ; and Holland Somiaty@ ot) Sciences, Harlem, Jan., 1877. A letter was beeaivanl from Mr. Walter, White, has atante Secretary of the Royal Society, dated..London,, Sept. 23d, 1878, presenting «a copy in bronze of the newly instituted Davy Medal; and letters from the U.S. Department of State transmitting the same. Donations for the Library. were, received from a R. Bavarian Academy; R. Accademia dei Lincei ;_R. Academy at Lisbon; Kansas Academy at Topeka; and Academy at, San rankises the Department of Mines, Melbourne; Royal Danish Society; Revue Politique, and’ M. M. Delesse and Lapparant, Paris; London Nature; Mr. O. Fisher, F. G. 8. ; Essex Institute; Boston Society of Natural ifsisty: ; wae vard College; American Antiquarian Society ; Yale College ; Prof. Geo. J. Brush ; Ed. 8. Dana; Lyceum of New York, - (N.Y. Academy of Natural Scietice) ; Prof. J. 8S. Newberry ; Polytechnic’ Review; Brooklyn Entomological Society ; Franklin Institute; American Journal of the Medical Scei-’ ences; Medical News and Library; Penn Monthly ; Prof. KE. D. Cope; Dr. J.B. Cox; Mr. Edwin A. Barber;. U.8. Coast Survey; U.S. Engineer Department; Bureawof Edu- cation; Weather Bureau; University of Virginia; Georgia Historical Society; Kansas State, Horticultural, Society ; Ministerio de Fomento, and, Geological, and Statistical So- ciety, Mexico; and Ministerio de Fomento, Madrid. A bronze medal, a copy of the newly instituted Davy 1878, 39° Medal, was ‘presentéd to the Cabinet by the Royal Society of Pdnitéd. ‘On ‘the obverse a head of Sir Humphrey Davy. Of thé ‘reverse the following” legend :- —*'Thé Royal Society to’Robert Wilhelni'Bunseti. Gustav Robert Kirchhoff. In accordance with the will of Humphrey Davy, who devoted” thé testimonial” presented to hint by the Coalowners of the Tyne and’ Wear to the ‘encouragement of Cheinical research —1877.” The’ Secretary offered for publication in’ the Transactions, a memoir entitled, “'The Upper Carboniferous Flora of West Virginia.” With 33 plates. “ By W. M. Fontaine and T. C. White,” and exhibited proof. sheets of the ‘quarto plates.— On motion the paper was referred’ for examination and report to Dr. Leidy, Dr J. 8. Newberry, and Mr. Lesquereox. “The: Secretary read by title a communication entitled “ On the limiting Constant of Gravitation. By Pliny E. Chase.” rof, Lesley read a communication, entitled “ Notes oma series of naly ek of the Dolomitie Limestone rocks of Cum-, berland do. Pa.” —The subject: was discussed by Dr. Konig, Prof, Phazer, and Mr. Walter. wmaiats “Mr. Briggs read from a MSs, part of cath discussion of the economical. problem, of ,force and fuel applied to, Electric) Lighting.as, compared with Lighting by Goal Gas.. _ Mr. Briggsyinvited attention to the remarkable fact) that all, the exhibitors of Artificial Ice Machines,at Paris (six in number, of which Pictet’s seems to be best) claimed for their several machines twice or three times the maximum efficiency to. be, expected, if the S998RF ets distin of the coefficient. of’ heat be true....)/ ) Prot. Frazer communieated the fact tHiad in his: use of the local; telephone cirenit during the Summer he had bespeiniy a continued resonance of over tones. In the course of some experiments on a telephone line 6, a view to. decrease the crackling due to atmospheric disturbance, an observation was. made by Prof. Frazer which will seem to illustrate) to:what an infinites- simal otion the sounds heard through the telephone are sometimes due. A’ telep 1oné Was selected in which the diaphragm was held fast at only two 40 [Octris, or three points instead of on a flat.surface, which usually binds the outside of the metal plete. The diaphragm gave to one note a clear resonance, in which the overtones 80 characteristic of metal plates in vibration were distinctly heard (middle, A of piano), ,.On sounding, this; note, into the mouthpiece, while keeping the othertelephones.covered)so, as. not. to, -he directly affected by the air-waves, it was. found that. the, overtones, were audibly traceable in one of the other telephones with which, connection was had over a line of about one-third ofa mile .with,a ground.return cir- cuit. It is difficult enough to understand oe the minute. waves into yarns a metal plate is thrown. by a yigorous note of the voice can reproduce sound through the intermediate agency of maxima and mimima of resistance in the medium.of current transmission ; but that the minute. wavelets. which are produced upon the backs of these, should atthe extremity of a, long line produce sufficiently powerful variations of conductivity to cause the mechanical fluttering of the diaphragm of another instrument to a sufli- cient degree to cause the effect of sound could scarcely haye been foreseen. Pending nominations 864; 867, B66; 869, 870, and new nomination 871 were read. | In the absence of Prof, Houston the consideration of his motion to.amend the minutes was postponed to the cet regular meeting. The Secetary read a Jetter from Prof. Henry Morton, dated Hoboken, Oct. 7., drawing. attention. to.a,marked, word, * Foucow’s,’ in, an.enelosed original letter, written to him: by Prof: Sadtler, dated Dec, 31,1877; and for the purpose of showing that he (Prof. Morton) did Prof. Sadtler no injus- tice in quoting this word (instead of Fouqué) in his. letter of May 15,1878, commented upon. in Prof. Sadtler’s reply as published in the Proceedings A. P.'S., Vol. XVIT, page 724. The pending nominations 864, 867 to 870 were balloted for, and, after scrutiny of the ballot boxes by, the presiding officer, the following were declared duly elected members of the Society :— Dr. Albert H. Smith, of Philadelphia. Rey. Saml. Longfellow, of Germantown, Rev. Ed. A. Foggo, D. D., of Philadelphia. M, A. Descloizeaux, of Petia: | Dr. O. Schorlemmer, of Manchester, England, and the meeting was adjourned, | 1878.) 41 (Chase, eu Dhe: Limiting Constant of Gravitation. By Pliny E. Chase. - Read before the, American Philosophical Society, October 18, 1878.) Bf Litiol and Lesage both thought that gravitation might be due to some ‘action of an ether or ““tliereal spirit.’’ If such supposed action is uniform ‘it should be capable of representation by some uniform or constant value, toward Which planetary or gravitating motion should constantly tend. ‘Faraday sought in vain to find such a value, and his want of success led him to the belief that the ‘‘correlation of forces’’ could not include the force of gravity: “It is true that a kind of constancy is observable in bodies at rest, and ‘another kind in'circular orbits; but if the distance from the ‘principal center is changed, the former varies inversely as the square of the distance, the latter inversely as the square root of the distance. In- ‘asmuch as there is no known limit of possible density, there is no obvious init ‘to the possible velocity of gravitating motion. “My various investigations have shown that heat, actinism, kinetic laws, spectral’ lines, the arrangement and masses of planets, interstellar nodes, barometric fluctuations, centers of inertia; terrestrial magnetism, chemical combinations, and the aggregation or dissociation of stellar systems, all point to the velocity of light asa limiting constant. Weber, Kohlrausch and Maxwell having found a like pointing, in the relations which exist — between electro-static and electro-dynamie phenomena, it seems probable that the goal of Faraday’s search may also have been the velocity of light, and that such velocity is the fundamental basis of universal correlation. Thave already pointed out three methods of approximation to the limit : 1, by the tendency towards equality in planetary revolution and in the mean moment of solar inertia of rotation ; 2, by the tendency to equality between, mean radial oscillatory velocity and the velocity which marks the limit between complete solar dissociation and, incipient nueleal aggrega- tion ;“8, by the tendency to uniformity in dissociative velocity at each of the three principal centres of nebular condensation in the solar system. Against the first of these methods the objection has been urged that it supposes the sun to/be homogeneous. The validity of this criticism cannot be determined until-the problem has been subjected to a rigid mathematical analysis. If such analysis should hereafter show that the objection is well taken, it may be found that the sun is more homogeneous than the dense planets, and sufficiently so to satisfy all’ the requirements of the method. Draper’s recent photograph of the corona indicates a diameter twice ‘as great as that of the sun. This is in exact accordance with the/supposed gaseous nature of the sun, and, consequently, with its homogeneity, as well as with the relations which I Bere pointed out between Jupiter's mass and position. Some have thought the second method fiiulty; because it involves a con- sideration of hypothetical conditions of nebular condensation, such as are inconsistent with the common notions of the nature of matter. But those conditions were introduced merely to indicate joint tendencies, without PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XVIII. 102. F. PRINTED DEC. 12, 1878. Chase] 42 [Oct. 18, any regard to the variety of possible or impossible forms which the’ tenden- ciesmay be ‘supposed to’ assume! “OF to indicate.” ‘In| all mathematical physics an‘ ideal completeness is‘assumed, such as isnever found in nature. ne The method in’ question is analogous to “the one whieh “has been “satisfac: ’ torily adopted in investigating the laws'of elastic undulation! 8) It seems to have been ‘generally admitted that the third method may be’ aecepted as lending, probability to) the indications of the other two, but it: involves the same question of dissociative velocity, and is, therefore, open. to the same criticism as the second method. For this- reason it, seems de-, : sirable to see Whether the problem can be successfully treated ‘in, some. is other way. Tf gravitating movements ‘have any common limit, either ‘of originating efficiency or of ultimate tendency, which is uniform in all stellar ‘systems, a that limit should evidently be sought in the direction of phenomenal maxima, and with special reference to the principal center ot the. system. If the ethereal hypotheses are correct, we may reasonably presume ‘that the: ‘ gravitating constant is dependent upon some ethereal constant> La Place established the general principle that the “state of a system of bodies becomes periodic when the effort’ of the primitive conditions of movement has disappeared by the ‘action of resistances. This principle, © which is a necessary consequence of the third law’ of motion, is well illus: trated in elliptical planetary orbits, in which the cyclical movement may be resolved into alternate oscillations, of approach to perihelion and re- treat to aphelion. The duration of all.such oscillations, whether circular, slightly elliptical, or as néarly radial and rectilinear as ‘the central nucleus will allow, is determined by the length, of the major axis, varying as the $ power of the length. If the major axes are equal, the oscillations are synchronous. If orbital collision’ of particles, in the neighborhood of the focus, shorten the major axes, .cosmical rotation .may be. substituted for free ; phun¢t- ary” revolution. But the limiting value, which is to be alternately over. come and renewed, | will not be changed ‘thereby; the’ period for de. stroying or acquiring that limiting value should still be one-half) of the! © cyclical period, or the period of a, half rotation,,.; » ratte; | The equation of constant velocity, in an elastic atmosphere, 0 or in an 4 wthereal medium, is’ v= V gh = gt, | =. . » denoting the wave-velocity; g, the acceleration of gravity at the point of observation ; %, the modulus of elasticity, or the height of a homogéneous — atmosphere ; ¢, the time of rise or fall, througlr $ 2; under the constant re-) tardation or acceleration g; tis also, as has just been shown, the time ofa half-rotation which, is supposed to be.due to ethereal impulses. Challis has found* that if all the ordinary central forces ate due to transformed wthereal vibrations, “the actions of such forces on atoms are’ th’ every ine stance attributable to @thereal currents, whether the atoms be tmmediately acted wpon by. steady motions of the wether or by ethereal vibration.’ * Phil. Mag., Sept., 1872; Sept,, 1876; June, 1876, i 1878.4 46 43 (Chase, The. constancy, of ,wave-yelocity, requires that, and.¢ should vary. ins versely.as.g.,...The law of,conservation.of areas demands the same ratios of variability in the rotation of any contracting or expanding nebular nucleus; for, the velocity of rotation varying inversely as. radius, and the distance traversed varying, as radius, the, time, of rotation. (or ¢, the time of semi- rotation) varies as the square, of radius; but g- varies inversely as the square of radius, .'. go oat =) XK ands bemeteat for all possible:stages of nebular condensation. tue record of rotation is, therefore, ‘invariable, representing the _undulatory velocity of the sethereal medium, as, well as the constant limiting velocity of gravitating tendency for which Faraday sought. The value of g being a maximum, in our system, at Sun's surface, there is “where ‘the Jimiting value of gt is to be found, If we estimate Sun’s semi diameter* at 16/ 2’’, Earth’s mean radius vector. is 214,41 solar radii, Laugier’ 8 mean estimate of ¢ (the, time of Sun’s. semi-rotation) is 12.67 days, or, 1098872, seconds ;, ¥ gr = (214.4? X 271). + (865.256. x $6400)> | grt 2559500. and gts= r 2.840, . But, the. velocity,,of light, ac- cording, to. Struve’s constant of aberration,, is 214.4107 -3+, 497.825 5 2 =- 2.322,4 This investigation, therefore, leads to the same, result,as those which I have before undertaken, and given the atems of light as the limit- ing fasta? of arardiatien, T Piste ie “Stated Meeting, November. 1, 1878, Present, 20 men bers. sli Vice-President, Mr. FRALEY, in, the Chair. Mr. J. B. Knight, Prof. L. Haupt, and Dr. Morris Long- streth, newly elected members, were introduced, to, the -pre- siding officer and took their seats. Letters accepting membership were received from Dr. Al- bert H. Smith, dated 1419 Walnut St., Phila., Oct, 20,1878 ; Rev. Edward A. Foggo, D.D., 717 Locust St., Phila., Oct. 28, 1878; Rev. Samuel Longfellow, Germantown, Oct. OA ; ue Dr. A. S. Packard, Jr., Brown University, Prov- dues, R. 1., Oct. 18; 1878." Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Ob- setvatory at Prag, Nov. 6, 1877 (99,100, List); the Royal Danish. Academy, Sept. 30, 1878 KM, hast the Royal. *\Amer, Nautical Almanac. + This is equivalent to: Faye’s vatueof gtfor lat, 16° 5), or Carrington’s for lat. 11° 46’. 44 [Nove1, Institution; London, Oet. '15;/(101,: Cat. IIL); ‘the Royal Astronomical Society, Oct: 18, (101, Cat. IIT); the Society of Antiquaries, London, Oct. 14, (101, Cat. LIT); and the Boston Publie Library, Oct. 17, (Cat. | IIL). . Letters of .envoy were, received: from: Sir - Lewis: Mallet, India Office, Oct. 11, 1878; Physical Society of Bordeaux, Oct..15 (acknowledging also, the receipt of .Proc, 99, 96, 98, 99); Meteorological Office, London, Oct., 1878; and. Mr. E. Steiger, 25 Park Place, New York, Oct. 23, 1878... 5 Donations for the Library. were received from the Acad- emies at St. Petersburg, Copenhagen, and Brussels; the So- ciété Vaudoise ; Geographical Society, School of. Hua wes: and Revue Politique, Paris; Commercial Geographical: Society at Bordeaux ; Observatory at. San Fernando ;, Harvard. Col- lege Jibrary, and Museum. of Comparative: Zoology; Cam: bridge; E. Steiger; Entomological, Society of Brooklyn; Engineers Club, and Historical Society, Phila. ; Museum of Wesleyan University, Middletown, Conn.; Public School Library, St. Louis; and the Argentine See of Sciences at Buenos Ayres. Prof. Chase read a “ Note on the density of the Kinetic Ether.” Prof. Sadtler read a paper ‘On the, Electrolytic, Estima- tion of, Cadmium, by Edgar F, Smith, Ph.D.” .as.a contribu- tion from the Laboratory of the University of Pennsylvania. Prof. Sadtler presented to the Society a chemical prepara- tion obtained by a new and interesting reaction, from, Penn- sylvania petroleum, The presence of Olefines or unsaturated hydrocarbons in Petroleum ‘has been. proved by Prof. Schorlemmer, who obtained bromides of these hy- drocarbons by the action of bromine upon the several, fractions of petro- leum. This reaction has only proved the presence of the lower boiling members of the series however. I had given to me by Dr. O. M. Cresson a thick viscid liquid said to be mainly made up of higher olefines., Now the following reactions have been carried out with Ethene C, H,— OH. 0, H, + CIOH = 0, H, { pa » y § OH CH, Cl CH yor +% = co.on + 2° T endeavored to apply these reactions to the mixture of higher olefines, fase 45 and succeeded perfectly.: In.oxydising I used the **chromie acid ’’ mix- ture, and after obtaining the; chlorine:substitution acids I saponified them with caustic soda. The prep: ration shown is, therefore, a mixture ofsoda salts of these chlorine: rtettbatia. compounds of the higher fatty acids As these compounds ‘cannot be made by such reaction from the higher Sp sepramateee their formation sett sagging the shanti of the higher ‘‘olefines.”” mt y re A ae +* TRI Prof. Houston’ read a joint paper entitled’ “On the cir- cumstances influencing’ the efficiency of Dynamo-electric machines, ' ‘by Prof: Houston and Prof. Thompson. Prof. Haupt read a paper entitled “On the scales of Maps” with tables. » Pending nomination No. 871 was read. | Prof. Houston’s resolutions, offered October 4, were called up for orisideration, and after a discussion of the subject by Prof. Barker, Prof. Houston, Prof. Thompson, Dr. Konig, and other members present, it was . Re oleed, That, the fourth and fifth paragraphs of page 728 of No,, 101 of the pesutit being Portions of the minutes of the meeting of June e 2ist, . 1878; be corrected to réad as follows : **Prof. Houston exhibited a microphone relay invented and made by himself and, Prof. Thompson of the, Philadélphia High School, to be ap- plied to the articulating telephone.”’ **Prof. Barker exhibited a suite of Mr. Edison’s instruments, casio and made by him during the last year or two, and stated that, in his opin- ion, in their inventions so far as they involve. similarity of principle, Mr. Edison had priority over Mr. Hughes.’’ “Tt was then, on motion of Dr. LeConte, resolved that the Index oni page 730 be corrected accordingly. — Prof. Sadtler referred to the reading of a letter from Prof. Morton to the Secretaries, at the last meeting, and’said that he had already himself made due acknowledgment to Prof. Morton before the Society at the meeting of August. 16th, , 1878, as the, minutes show. “And the meeting was adjourned. Smith] 46 jNov, 1, 1878. Contributions from the Laboratory of the University of Pennsyloania, No. XVI.—On the Electrolytic Estimation of Cadmium. By Epe@ar F. Smirx, Px: D. = at themeeting of the Américan Philosophicat Society, ‘Noo. 1, 1878. z: In a recent article published i in the American Journal of Soiebs and waite (Vol. XVI., Sept,, 1878), Prof. F.. W. Clarke calls attention, to thesestima- tion of cadmium. by . electrolysis, . which, however,: proved unsuccess- ful—the cadmium. being indeed thrown, out of the solution but in such a form as to; enclose; impurities ; yielding enperena sunk a results, Out of curiosity, to see what, might be affected by. eniiaitating some se salt, for the chloride, Lemployed.an acetate solution and met with oe as the following experiments will show: ©)» into yirsitomp 9 I. .1450 grms. cadmium oxide were dissolved) in ‘acetic acid, the excess of the latter expelled, upon a water bath and the platinum crucible then about half filled with water, and placed upon-a copper-ring connected with the negative pole of a two-cell Bunsen battery, while joined to the wire leading from the positive pole was,a strip of platinum foil extending into the acetate solution. . The deposition of the cadmium upon the sides of the: platinum crucible was regular and in a perfectly erystalline grayish white layer. In about, three hours the separation was complete. The cadmium was first washed with distilled water, then with alcohol.and finally with’ ether. _ It was dried over sulphuri¢ acid, The metallic cadmium weighed: .1270 grms. corresponding to 87.58,% Od. .The calculated percentage of metal in the oxide is 87.50, IL. .2046. grms. cadmium oxide placed in a small broad platinum crucible were dissolved in acetic acid and after evaporating the excess of the latter water was added—the solution, however, remaining rather concentrated. The platinum vessel was connected. with the negative pole of a bichromate battery. To the copper wire of the positive pole was attached a pla+ tinum wire from which was suspended, a, smal) platinum crucible, which dipped into the solution in the larger vessel. ‘The space between the walls: . of the two crucibles was not more than the eighth of an inch, Only two: cells of the battery were employed, . The deposit of cadmium here asin the first experiment was_perfeetly crystalline and metallic in appearance; | Not, the slightest trace of spongy metal, was visible... The separation of the metal was finished in about the same time asin (1), and it was then washed and dried as. above. , Found, .1790.grms. sseteeiiesesaeraise i to 87.48. % Cd, par From. the yarious, experiments made I are | destined thet, to obtain good results the following should be, observed.:, lst. Work with rather concentrated solutions of the acetate, 2d. Employ a) sufficient, number of cells of either battery to produce a rapid and rather energetic current. Oetober 31, 187". y Novy..1, 1878.] 47 | Haupt. On the Scales. of Maps... By L. ae Fleets Prof. of Civil nltngiooaniesy ‘Towne Scientific. Behoole.... (Read before the Agnogtean, Fhaloson Maal Society, Nov. 1, 1878.) . The object pf this paper isto attempt, if possible the removal of the am- biguities existing in regard to the use of ratios as exprusing the scales of maps and degrees of ‘slopes. ° hod af boda » Mathematical authorities astngl no Meahs agreed concerning the defini- tion-of the term ratio: They all maintain’ that it is an expression for the relation existing between two quantities, but differ in the manner of deter- mining the value of this relation ; soine, as Peck, Davies, Robinson and others, divide the second quantity or consequent by the first or antecedent ; some, as’ Hutton; Alsop,’ Ray and ‘others, divide the first by the second quantity, and still’ a third class, as Chauvenet and others, define it as being the quotient obtained by dividing one quantity by’ MAREE. It may there- fore be eithdr * or; 2,000,000; or s4h F000” «The same vonfasiot is found to exist in’ atocantrhy the scales of maps ahd drawings. » Some'publishers and engineers giving it as so many miles, or other denomination, to the inch ; others, asso many inches to the mile. Again in expressing slopes many authorities use the tang. of the angle made with the horizon, that is the’ height divided hy the ‘base (*) while others use the, co-tang.or = 2h Now if) we consider the “manner of omatntng’ thie value of the ratio ina Geometrical Series or progression whére wo ambiguity exists, we find that us euch subsequent term is obtained from its predecessor by multiplying by a constant) factor called the ratio, so to obtain this factor or ratio we must necessarily divide any term by the preceding one, and as this is the * only way in which its value can be determined, it establishes a rule which should be made to apply to all other cases. ‘We should then define'a ratio as being the expression for the value of the relation existing between two quantities, and as obtained by dividing the SECOND by the FIRST. The query then arises as to which quantity should be considered the first and which the second, and we answer that the given material object to be represented by the map or drawing is the Unit or measure with which the otheris to be compared. The map or drawing may be made of any con- venient size, but the object to be represented is already fixed or constant in its dimensions, and hence, as the unit or standard of comparison, should be-made the divisor, or denominator of the quantity expressing the ratio ; itis consequently the antecedent or first quantity. To illustrate, Jet it be required to determine the ratio between a map and its original in nature. The tract to be delineated in miniature is the fixed object, invariable in size, which is to bé compared with the plot representing it, and which may be made larger or smaller according to circumstances, hence it become the unit of comparison, and is the antecedent or first quantity, and as such the denominator of the fraction expressing the ratio. The formula will then be: Haupt.] : 48 [Nov. 1, Field: Plot = =. P and F being always reduced to the same deno- mination. Thus a scale of ;.,, is 5280 ft. of field to 1/ of map or one mile to 1 ft. =; of a mile to 1’’, and not 12’ to 1 mile It is evidently cncorrect therefore to indicate the scales of maps as so many inches to a mile as is frequently done. Take the case of the recent Geological maps of one of our sister states said to be plotted on a scale of 3’ to 1 ™ or 3/’ to 63,360/’ = £8369 — 21,120 that is to say the map is. 21,120 times larger than the state itself, a manifest absurdity resulting from _ considering the map as the first quantity or standard rather than the field itself. : In such cases errors of interpretation can scarcely arise as the intention is so evident, but there are numerous others that may lead to misconstruc- tion, as where the drawings of small objects are nearly of the same size as the things represented—thus a scale of }/ to 1” would confuse a mechanic unless he happened to know which was the larger, the object or the drawing. So the expression }/’ to 1’ is likewise incorrect as it is the reciprocal of the ratio intended—the inches evidently referring to the drawing and the foot to the object. As it stands, applying the definition of ratio as deduced, it will be equal to 12 + } = 48, making the drawing 48 times the size of the model—it should be 1/ to }/’. If it be remembered that the antecedent always refers to the given object and the consequent to the drawing, no difficulty ean arise. It will always happen then that if the drawing is on a smaller scale than the thing deline- ated, the ratio will be a proper fraction ; if larger, an improper fraction, and if equal the value will be unity, or 4. It is hardly necessary to call attention to the fact that the number of scales in use is practically infinite, and that serious inconvenience results therefrom to Engineers and Surveyors whose work extends over several counties or states, making it frequently necessary to re-draw large sections of country. In compiling atlases it is the practice of publishers to vary the scales according to the amount of territory to be represented that the sheet may be filled up, but nothing is gained thereby since the scale used for the greatest area to be represented will show with equal clearness all the features of any other area. Moreover the eye becomes accustomed to estimating distances on the maps, with sufficient accuracy for a reconnais- sance, when the scale is uniform, but when variable it leads to great con- fusion, and especially when the publisher has neglected to indicate the scale, as sometimes happens. It is very desirable to establish, if possible either by recommendations of scientific societies or by general laws, some conventional scales for maps of various sizes. Taking a state of medium area as N. Y. or Penna, for the unit, and reducing it to a convenient size sheet of paper, say 4 x 8 ft., would require a seale of yyyyeq. the same as is used by the U. 8. Coast Survey for general charts and reconnaisance, but too small for most other purposes, Larger states could be plotted on the same scale by dissecting 1878. ] 49 (Haupt. them. Foreign countries conducting Geodetic Surveys have adonted such a system. In Prussia, Austria and Switzerland the plane table sheet are plotted on a scale of ys}y5- In Italy the*field work is plotted on a scale of =s}55, and in Sweden ;y¢555- The older British charts and maps were made on a scale of 1 ™ to 1/ or zy}55, and the later maps of | ™ to 6’ or rofso, but these latter, while not being large enough to show parish bound- aries with sufficient accuracy, require about six times the amount of labor in their preparation and are inconvenient. The scale used by Prussia and Switzerland for general maps is yoy;yy5, Or one fourth that of the detail sheets obtained from the plane table surveys. Populous, cultivated and mineral districts in Great Britain are plotted on a scale of 5/55 == 1 ™- to 25.344", partially cultivated and thinly settled dis- tricts, on a scale of 1™ to 6’ = ;yhzy. For the plans of cities of over 4000 inhabitants a scale of ;},; or 1™ to 10.56 feet is used, and for towns and villages ;;';; or 1™ to 5 ft. is general. Numerous other instances might be cited showing the great variety of scales in use, but these will suffice. It is evident that in Government or State Surveys some systematic connection may readily be established be- tween the several scales used, and it is very desirable that this uniformity of scale be made more general. The scale adopted should be just large enough to show clearly all necessary detail. Anything more than this is a wasteful expenditure of time and money. For general maps of States showing intercommunications, a scale of rooves Will be found sufficiently large. For maps of counties, in toto, a scale of =5}y5 will enable all necessary features to be clearly represented ; this scale applied to Lycoming Co., the largest in Penna., would require a map 6} <4} ft. For townships the scale of 5545, is quite large enough, and furnishes an admirable size for the projection of Geological data. For cities, towns and villages some decimal, sub-multiples of the above scales should be used. Cadastral maps of farms, parks or estates may be plotted on scales of ho» sdo> Tove» etc. In indicating the degrees of slopes or the bater of retaining walls, the natural tangent of the angle which the slope makes with the horizon should invariably be used. To save time in determining the relative values of some of the most im- portant scales in use, and to aid in introducing the metric system of lengths, I have with the assistance of Messrs. Wim, M. Pottsand J. W. Van Osten, Jr., prepared the accompanying tables of equivalents. The first, gives the number of Miles, Kilometers, Poles, Chains, Yards, Meters and Feet of territory which are equivalent to one inch of map for any given scale. The second, is the reciprocal of the first, and states the amoant of map sur- face which would be covered bv any one or more of the above units, for any scale. © PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XVIII. 102. G. PRINTED DEC. 26, 1878. Haupt.] 50 'Nov.1, Table of Map Equivalents giving for each No. Seale. } Miles, Kilometers, - | Chains, Poles, j } 1 : 116. 186.6821 9280.0000 37120.0000 We ial GALA 58.1078 640.000 —-10560.00 i (isis eeens\ 4."3 32.18663 1600.000 6400.00 4 | Sschose®| 203888 30.4791 1515.15 6060.60 5 t pert pae 25.7492 | 1280.00 5120.00 6 | sostore’ | 15-7828 25.3992 1261.62 5046.50 7 srttsox | 12.8000 20.5994. 1024.00 4096.00 8 tehusg 4S: 19.3129 960.00 3840.00 9 gseeoee | 20.0221 16.1286 801.768 3207.07 10 eyeicee i490. 16.09329 800.00 3200.00 11 soccer | 9.4696 15.2398 THT.575 3030.30 12 weewig JB. 12.87456 640.00 2560.00 13 seesee) | 1B0lk 12.6996 631.313 2525.25 14 seeeved |. 063181 10.1597 505.050 2020.20 15 weueee. 4765 9.65587 480.00 1920.00 16 srtzse® 05-9185 9.5239 473.48 1893.92 17 EGbigy? | eh 8.04664 400.00 1600.00 18 se0oe0” | 242848 7.61992 378.78 1515.15 19 ra0-so0 | 877878 6.09570 303.03 1212.12 20 os | 815656 5.07985 252.525 1010.10 21 redate #78 4.827935 | 240.00 960.00 23 redone | O2R6TEas 3.80496 189.39 157.57 24 rie Meee TD > 8.21866 160.00 640.0 25 rrd000 |) 1/89898 3.05784. 151.515 606.06 26 redrooy | 157828 2.53995 126.26 505.05 27 dace tet 1.2626 2.0319 101.01 404.04 28 reek 1.2500 2.01166 100.00 400.00 29 ‘use 1.21212 1.9604 96.967 887.87 30 ss iste 1. 1.6093 80.00 320.00 31 wsteee 0.94696 1.52392 75.75 308.08 32 ua sted 0.9875 1.508737 75.00 300.0 33 seven 0.78914 1.26996 63.131 252.52 34 suber 0.63181 1.0159 50.50 202.02 35 syxoy |. 0/6250 1.0058 50.0 200.0 36 yeltve 0.62138 1. 49.7104 198.88 87 vetree 0.6060 0.9752 48.484 198.93 38 seNrt 0.6000 0.9656 47.925 191.70 39 yore 0.5353 0.86146 42.666 170.66 40 seNue 0.47348 0.7619 87.8787 151.48 41 wrvsz 0.4000 0.64378 82.000 128.000 42 sylvss 0.89457 0.68967 31.5656 126.262 43 ustsy | «(0.87500 0.60349 30, 120.000 44 riiryy | 0.83888 0.58589 26.666 106.666 45 102060 : 0.31565 0, 50798 25,2525 101.0101 46 | re'vev | 0.81250 0.50290 25. 100. 47 rere | 0.80808 0.48762 24.242 96,969 1878] 51 lineal inch of Map, the following number of [Haupt, No. ||» Metres, Yards sud Peet {ff Actual | Where Used. 1 | 1 |186682:18 204160.00 (612480.00 = Map of U. S. in atlas. 2 |53107.86 58080.00 |174240.00 Map of Pa. 3 | 82186.635 (35200.00 10560000 U.8.C.8, 4 | 3047927 - 33383:33° —- 100000.0 ‘U. 8.0. 8. 5 | 25749.27 281600 84480.0 A India. 6 | 25899.2 | 2775.77 $3333.38 'Ue8.C. § 7 |20599.416 2252800 | 67584.00 8 | 19812.95 21120.00 63360.00 RB. R. Va. 9 | 16128.6 | 17638.89 52916.66 (U.S. C.5. 10 | 16093.29 17600.00 52800.00 —- U. S. Eng. 11 | 15239.8 - 16666.6 50000.0 |Wos.c. 8. 12 12874. 65 , 14080.0 42240.0 | Eng. Ord. Sur. 13 | 12699.6 | 13888.8 41666.6 'U. S ©.' 6. 14 | 10159.7 ait 33333.8 ‘U.S.C.S. 15 | 9655.87 =: 10560.0 31680.0 Ludlow’s Rep. 16 | 9528.9 — 10416.5 - 81250.0 W860. 8. 17 | 8046.64 | 8800.00 — 26400.0 ‘Barnes’ Pa. Maps, 1851. 18 | 7619.9 | 8344.3 - 25000.0 eS. C. 8. 19 | 6095.7 6666.6 ~ 20000.0 aT OREO. Bs. 20 | 5079.8 5655.5 - 16666.6 }Wo8.C. 8. 21 | 4827.935 5280.0 1840.0 | Ludlow’s Rep. 22 | 4063.8 4444.4 | -18838.8 /Us8.0. 8. 23 | 3804.9 4166.6 12500.0 U: 8. C.8. 24 | 4218.66 8520.0 ~ 10560.0 Sherman’s March 25 | 9°8057.8 3333.3 10000.0 U8. C. 8. 26 | 2539.9 Q7T7.7 $333.8 U.S.C. 5. 27 | 2081.9 2222.2 6666.6 U.S.C. 8. 28 | 2011.7 2200.0 6600.0 29 1960.5 2138.38 6400.0 Geol. Sur 30 1609.3 1760.0 5280.0 | Fremont 31 1528.9 1666.6 5000:30 = | U.S O.S. 32 | (1508.73 1650.0 4950.0 33 | 1269.9 1388.8 4166.6 iO: 8/0. 8. 84 1015.9 1111.1 $338.3 UW. 8.0.8. 85 1005.88 1100.0 3300.0 (Ue 8. C. 8. 36 1000.0 1093.6 3280.8 37 975.24 1066.66 3200.0 Geol. Surv 38 965.59 1054.38 3163.0 39 861.458 938.66 2816.0 | 40 761.9 833.8 2500.0 \U. 800. 8 41 648.728 704.000 212.000 42 639.673 694.44 2083.383 43 603.487 660.00 — 1980.000 44 535.8969 586.66 1760.000 45) 507.98 555.5 1666.66 | \ } 46 502.906 550.00 1650.00 |U.8.C. 8. 47 (80 487.617 533.388 1600.00 | ’ ‘ int ’ Hagpt } va [Nov. J, Table of Map Equivalents giving for each } Miles, Kifometers, | Chains, Poles, — 48 Seles 0.29700 0.47796 / 23.760 95.04 49 verte 0.25000 0 40232 | 20. 80. 50 —-— 0.23674 0.38099 | 18.9393 75.75 51 sees Ast 0.30174 15. 60. 52 aim sake 0.1578 0.25417 12.626 50.505 53 ped es 0.15625 0.25100 12.500 50.000 54 bas tn 0.15154 0.24876 =| 12.121 48.484 55 hit. ta 0.12500 0.20112 | 10. 40.000 56 sates 0.1136 0.18378 | 9.0909 36.363 57 bas Oe 0.09471 0.15285 | 7.5757 30.303 58 vies 0.09275 0.15092 | 7.5000 head 59 Bas 0.078913 0.12695 | 6.31813 25.252 60 nae 0.078123 0.12582 | 6.250 25.000 61 Be 0.07575 0.121881 6.0606 24.242 62 pis ett 0.06250 0.100561 5 .000 63 0.05681 0.091391 4.5303 18.1212 64 oe 0.05261 0.08463 4.2060 16.8242 65 nih ‘ei 0.05 0.080466 4, 16.000 66 oa 0.04734 0.07610 8.7787 15.151 67 6 the 0.04687 0.07541 3.75 15 000 68 wie Maa 0.03945 0.06396 8.1565 12.626 69 vies 0.03787 0.06098 8.03879 12.1515 70 . 0.03125 0.05029 2.5 10.000 71 = 0.02020 0.032507 1.6016 6.406 72 ae fat 0.019728 0.081697 1.5767 6.307 73 vase 0.018939 0.030578 1.5151 6.060 14 fsa 0.017046 0.027520 1.3636 5.454 15 ate 0.01515 0.024376 1.2121 4,848 76 she 0.013258 0.021399 1.06057 4.2420 771 as 0.0125 0.02011 1. ; 78 vhs 0.01136 0.018378 0.9091 3.6363 79 xis 0.009471 0.015285 | | 0.75757 8.0308 80 no at 0.0078913 | 0.012695 | 0.68181 ' 2.5252 81 rho 0.007575 0.012188 — 0.60606 2 4242 82 atu 0.00568 0.009139 0.45308 1.81212 83 ts te 0.004734 0.007610 | 0.87787 1.51515 84 om bt 0.008787 0.006098 | 0.80379 1.21515 85 rie 0.008125 0.005029 (0.25 1. 86 rhe 0.001894 0.008057 | 0.15151 0.6060 87 0.000947 0.001528 0.07575 0, 8030 88 sucvrory , 0.0006218 | 0,001 00497101 0,1988405 89 oe 0.000568 0.0009189 | 0.045803 0.181212 90 : 0.001804 | 0.0003057 | 0.015151 0.0606 91 0.00001578 | 0.00002536 | 0.0012595 0.00505 92 0,000011835 0,0000190 00009467 0.008787 93 | 0,00000789 —-0,00001268 ~——-:0.0006297 0.002525 1878.] . 53 {Haupt, lineal inch of Map, the following number of . | No. |, Metres, Yards and, Reet} Mi ctannal Where Used. 48 477.96 522.72 | 1568.1 U.S. C. 8. 49 402.325 440.00 | 1320.00 50 380.99 416.66 1250.00 U.S.C.S. 51 301.744 330.00 990.00 52 254.177 277.77 |. 888.83 U. 8:C.8. 53 251.004 | 275.000 825.00 54 243.768 266.66 800. 5B |. 201.125 220.00 = 660. 56 183.782 200. | 600. 57 152.854 166.66 | 500. 58 150.924 165.00 495. | 59 | 126.950 138:888 416.66 /U.8.C.S. 60 | 125.8238 134.166 412.50 61 121.88175 |. 188.888 | 400. ) 62 100.5625 110.0 330. 63 91.391 100. 800.00 64 84.6334 92.592 |, 277.777 | U.8.C.8 65 80.0466 88. | 264. 66 76.1057 83.383 250.00 67 75.4138 82.5 | 247.5 68 - 63.9673 69.444 + 208.83 U. 8. C.S. 69 - 60.9811 66.666 200. U. 8.0.58. 70 |. 50.2906 55.55 166.66 71 | 82.5079 85.555 106.66 U.8.C.8 72 31.6978 34.7222. | 104.166 |U.8.C.S 73 |. 80.578 33.8883... 100. U.8:C.8 14 27.520 30. ce QO. "5 |... 24.8768 26.666 . — 80. 76 21.4046 23.8838. |. _..70. 77 20.1125 22. Panes! 78 18.3782 20. 60. 79 15.2884 16.666 | 50. ) 80 12.695 13.8888 41.666. «U.S.C. 8 81 12.18817 13.8833 40. 82 9.1391 10. 30. 83 7.61057 8.8383 25. 84 6.09811 6.6666 | 20. | 85 5.02906 5.555 16.666 86 3.0578 3.3888. |... 10. | U..8. C. 8 87 1.52854 1.6666 5. 88 1. 1.093623 | 3.280869 89 0.91891 1. ! 3. eg 90 0.80578 0.3388 a: op 91 0.025368 0.02777 | 0.083 92 0.019026 0.020833 0.0625 93 | 0.012684 0.013888. 0.0415, Haupt.] 54 [Nov. Tf, A Reciprocal Table of Map Equivalents showing the number of inches of No. Seale. L Mile, ‘1 Kilometer. > 1 Chain. Lot a Pole. POP 0.0086205, —-0.005359-:0.00010775) 0.00002698 @ Halide a 03080 .01882 .000378 | 0000945 iy ett. ant 05000 .03106 | 000625 .00015625 Yer iia ake .05280 .03280 .000660 .0001650 5 | rorkres | 06250. | .03883 000781 .00019525 ee 06336. .03937 .000792 | -.00019800 a yaa .078125 04854 0009765 | 0002441 8 | veedue .08333-4 05177 .001041 | 00026025 Wot Cee 09979 .06199' .001247 00031175 10 | sssteso 10000 .06213 .001250 .0003125 ONS ane 10560 | .06561 .00132 0003800 12 xeerey .12500 .07766 -001562 “0003905 - is | cokare 4 12672 07874 .001584 0003960 th: ts wees Ss 15840 .09842 .00198 .0604950: | 15 | sxdras 166664) 10855 002083 | .00052075 VS Gee 16896 10498 | -.002112 00052800 17 {°° pee "| .20000 12426 | 00250 .0006250 18 veteas 7 £21120 |) 18122 .00264 0006600 19 | seoo0 | 26400 | 16403 .0013300 .008250 20 | xedver 1 31680 19684 .003960 0009900 ; / Sh bs Sehees a 3883384) .20711°") 004166) ).0010415: Rt rebess .39600 |e 246085 .004950 .0012325 23 ice ac; 42240 26245 .005280° 0013200 24 | retrrs 50000 31067 .096250 | 0015625: 2 | rxduss .52800 .32807 .006600 .0016500 a .63360 - -. 39868 .00792 .0019800 a ies .79200 49210 .009900 | .0024'750 28 wy s00 8 ; , 497101 O01 . 0025 ee 82500 | 51264 .010812 .0025780 90-1 gyers 1.00000 .62130")" .012500 .0031250 31 swlves 1.05600 | 65614 .013200 .008300 | gp once 1.26720. 78737 01585 0039625 Mh see 1.58400 98421 .019800 004950 35 suns 1.6 “994202 02 00500 3th eevee 1.60984" | 1.00000 |’ 020116") 20050200 87 vexas 1.65000 1.02522 .020622 00515550 8 | seer 1.66666 1.08509 0208838 | .0052088 39 ayes 1.875000 1.16537 028487 .005859 40 sod ab ¥.11200 | 1.81228 026400 0066000. 41 sxives 2.50000 1.55884 .081250 0078125 42 srivee 2.58440 |) 1.57474 .081680 --.0079200. 48 | serves 2.66666 4- 1.65692 .08888-- | .6088834- 44 grins 3.00000 1.86408 .087500 --.0098750 | seevs 3.16800 | 1.96842 | [08060009900 46 reves 3.2 1.988404 04 010 4 |) orwhws 3.30000 | 2.05044 04125 OL0B125 1878,] 5d [Haupt. Map and parts thereof, of the various scales now in use, which represent Z 1 Metre. fo/)1 Yard. 1 Foot. | Where Used, .000005359 ory 00000163 [(Military.) | } 00001882 -9000172 -00000573--. Sherman’ 8 March Map. -00003106 | .0000284 000009464-. .00001000,.. U. 8. C. 8. 00008280 -0000300 .00008883 0000355 .00001183-++ Z\ India. Si : Fi RWW CODD Se ewe | 2 .00008937 .00003600 .00001200 «U.S. C. 8. » 00004854 00004438 .00001446 00005177 | .0000473- .00001576-+ R. R. Virginia. .00006199 .0000566 | .000015538-- U.S. C. 5. .00006218 .0000568 | 000015600 U. S. Eng’s. .00006561 .0000600 -0000200 oe. 8. C.:8. .00007766 0000710 -00002364- | Eng. Ord. Sur .00007874 | .0000720. , .0000240 U. 8. C. 8. -00009842 ) 0000900 | .0000300 U.S. C. 8. 15| (00010355. 0000946 ,00003158-4 Ludlow’s Rep. 16 .00010498 | .0000960. .00008200, , U. 8. C. S. 17 | 00012426, .0001136. 000037534. Barnes’ Pa. Map, 1851 18 /,00013122 | .0001200 ——-.0004000 U. 8. C. 8. 19 .,00016403 .0001500 0000500 U. 8. C. 5. 20 » ,00019684 .000180 . .0000600 U. 8. C. 5. 21 .00020711 .0001893 .0006310 —. Ludlow. 22: -00024605, 0002250 -00007300,U. 8. C. 8. 23 -00026245 .0002400 | .0000800 U. 8. C. 8. 24 00031067 .0002840 0000946+ | Sherman’s March 25 00032807 0003000 .0001000 -U, 8. C. 8. 26 .00039368 -0003600 -0001200 U.8.C. 8. 27 -00049210 .0004500 ) .00015000 | U. 8. C. 8. 28 -0004971 .0004545 00015151 29 -00051261 -00046875 00015625. | Geol. Surv. 80 -00062130 -00056800 .00018933-+- Fremont. 31 00065614.| 000600. 000200. /- U.S.C. S. 32 .000662-—-.00060606 —-.00020202 33 .00078737 .000720.---s«.0002400. 34 00098421 .000900-.000300 ae 35 .0009941 0009090 + .0003080 36 0010000 .0009144 | .0003048 37 -00102522 | .00093875 . .0003125 Geol. 38 001035 000947 0003156 39 :00116538 0010658. | .0008551. 40 00131228 0012000 + .0004000. «U.S. G. S. 41 .00155334) 0014190 | .0004730. 42 (00157474 .00144000.- .0004800 43 .00165692 .00151515. .00050505 44 ,00186403 | .0017040. | .0005680 45 ,00196842 | .0018000 | .0006060 | 46 .001988 .001818 .0006060 4% 100205044, .00187500.| .0062500. Haupt.] 56 {Noy. 1, A Reciprocal Table of Map Equivalents showing the number of inches of 1 Kilometer. } 1 Chain. Seale. 1 Mile | | 1 Pole. 5 ae ; : 35 Oe 3.36698 | 2.09206 |) 042087) 0105275 pe 4.0 0.485507 000.05 0125 > ist hs 4.22400 | 2.62456} .052800 .0132000 thes 5.33388 |: 8.314009 06666 .016666 pis 6.33600 | 8.93685 .079200 .0198000 Be 6.4 B.9768080}00.08 > 020 eiss 6.60000 4.10088 > .082500°) 020625 bas fa 8. 4.971014 .10 025. vies 8.80000 «5.46784. .11000 .027500 aa 10.56000 —-6.561428.'| ——-.182000 .033000 cS 10.6666 =| 6.628018 | 133333 .03333 iS fat 12.67200 | © 7.8787 9) 15840} 4.039600 — 12.8 7.958616 | +16 04 er es 13.20000 8.201770 165000 | ».041250 vine 16. 9.942028 | 2 .05 vin 17.6 10.93568 | | .22 055 ve 19.00990 11.81178 | 287628 | .05940575 ether: 20. 12.42434°) 10.25 0625 31000 21:12 13.122846 | 264 } .066 i as 21.33833--18.256086 = «26666 =| 06666 te 25.34400-15.74740 316805) 079200 re 26.40000 1640354. BR0006° 1082500 i: 82. 0) 19.88405 0.4 Jl vise 49.50000 | 22.94414 .618750 .1546875 i at 50.68800 81.49480 .63360 .158400 oe, 52.80000 32.80708 | .660000 .165000 inde 58.66666-4-, 36.45231. |. 738884 | .1838334 “a 66.00000 41.00885 | ..825000 206250 «fo 715.42857 46.86726 | 942857 .28571425 si bi 80.30418 | 49.89670 | — 1.003802 2509505 ’ 88.00000 4.67847 1.100000 275000 de 105.60000 65.61416 1.320000 33000 he 126.72000 -'78.73700 1.584000 .39600 = 132.00000 82.0170 1.650000 .412500 st 176.00000 | 109.35694 2.2000 .550000 die 211.20000 —-181.22888 2.640000 66000 why 264.00000 | 164.03541 8.800000 .825000 see 320. 198.8405 4. ; xfo 528.00000 828.07083 6.600000 | 1.65000 6 1056.00000 656.14166+4-| 18.20000 8.3000 sectnes 1609.330 | 1000, 20. 11668 5.02916 b 1760. 1083.5694 22. BLS = 5280.00000 | 8280.7088 66,00000 | 16.5000 63360,00000 39868.5000 | 792.0000 —_|198,000 : 84480.00 52491.0333-+4. |1056.000 264.000 ; 126720.00 '78787.0000 396,000 1584.000 1878.] 57 {Haupt. Map and parts thereof, of the various scales now in use, which represent No. | 1 Metre. 1 Yard. ) 1 Foot Where Used. 48 .00209206 0019130 00068764 | U.S. C. 8. 49 002485 .002272 0007575 50 .00262456 0024000 | .0008000 | U.S. C. 8. 51 008314 .0030308 0010101 52 00393685 .0036000 .0012000 =| U. 8. C. S. 58 003976 .003636 001212 54 .00410088 00875 .0012500 55 004970 004544 0015150 56 .00546784 005000 001666 57 006561428! 006000 002000. 58 .006628 0060606 .0020202 59 0078737 007200 .002400 . U.8.C. S 60 007952 007272 .002424 61 | » 008201770! 0075000 | .002500 62 00994 .009088 003030 63 —- 0109856 01 .003999 64. 01181178 .0108010 .0036034+ (U.S. C.8 65 | 012424 0118181 0037727 | 66 0131228 012 | .004 ) 67 018256 .0121212 0040404 68 01574740 | .014400 0048000 (U. S.C. S. 69. | 01640354 .015000 005000 = | UL 8. GC. 8. 70 0218712 .02 007999 71 02294414 .0281250 .0093750 (U.S. GS. 72 03149480 028800 .0096000 8 ne? 73 .03280708 .030000 .010000 Biden | 4 .03645231 .03333-+- 01111114 %5 04100885 | 087500 012500 76 04686726 .0428547 0142849 - | 17 .04989670 04562738 0152091 78 .05467847 050000 016666. 79 .06561416 .060000 020000 80 07873700. -.072000 .024000 |US.C S 81 .08201770 .075000 .025000 82 . 10935694 -100000 .088333-+- 83 .13122888 | _.12000 .040000 84 16403541 150000 050000 | 85 218712 | 2 ' 079999 ; | | 86 | +.82807088 .80000 100000 (/s USGS 87 .6561416+4+ 600000 .200000 88. 914392 804464 89 1.093569 1. .838338 90 | $.2807083 8.00000 1.0000 91 89.36850 36.0000 12.0000 92 | 52.49103+4 | 48.00000 16,0000 93 | 78.737000 72.0000 24.0000 : PROC, AMER. PHILOS. SOC. xviit. 102. H. PRINTED DEC. 26, 1878. Houston and Thomson, ] 58 [Nov. 1, Cireumstunces Influencing the Efficiency of Dynamo-Electric Machines. By Profs. Edwin J. Houston and Eithu Thomson. ( Read before the American Philosophical Society, November. 1st, 1878.) During the recent competitive trials made at the Franklin Institute as to the relative efficiency of some different forms of Dynamo-Electric Ma: chines, the authors having been entrusted with the work of determining the relations between the mechanical power consumed and the electric and thermic effects produced, took the opportunity thus afforded to make a care- ful study of many interesting circumstances which influence the efficiency — of these machines. It is proposed in the present paper to select from the many circumstances thus noticed, a few of the more interesting, reserving the others for a fu- ture consideration. It will readily be understood from the Sin paeeEAIyn new fidld i in which we had been working, no reliable data of the electrical work of these ma- chines having before been obtained, that difficulties constantly arose owing to necessary conditions of operation, and new developments as to the be- haviorof the machines under varied conditions, were constantly met. A convenient arrangement of the particular circumstances we are about to discuss may be, 1st, Those affecting the internal work of the machine ; 2d, Those affecting the external work, and 8d, The relations between the internal and external work. The mechanical energy employed to give motion to a Dynamo- Blee- tric Machine is expended in two ways, viz., 1st, In overcoming fric-_ tion and the resistance of the air; and, 2d, In moving the armature of the machine through the magnetic field, the latter of course constituting solely the energy available for producing electrical current. The greatest amount of power expended in the first way was noticed to be about 17 per cent. of the total power employed. This expenditure was clearly traceable to the high speed required by the machine. The speed therefore required to properly operate a machine is an important factor in ascertaining its efficiency. The above percentage of loss may not appear so great, but when it is compared with the total work done in the are, as heat, constituting as it did in this particular instance over 50 per cent. of the latter, and about 38 per cent. of the total work of the circuit, its influence is not to be disre- garded. In another instance the work consumed as friction was equal to about 80 per cent. of that appearing in the are as heat, while in the Gramme machine experimented with, this percentage fell to 20 per Cent. of that which appeared in the are as heat, and was only about 7 per, cent. of the total power consumed in driving the machine. In regard to the second way in which mechanical energy is consumed, viz. : in overcoming the resistance necessary to move the armature through the magnetic fleld, or in other words, to produce electrical current, it must not be supposed that all this electrical work appears in the circuit of the ma- 1878] 59 {Houston and Thomson. chine, since a considerable portion is expended in producing what we term the local action of the machine, that is local circuits in the conducting masses of metal, other than the wire, composing the machine. The following instances of the relation between the actual work of the circuit, and that expended in local action, will show that this latter is in no wise to be neglected. In one instance an amount of power somewhat more than double the total work of the circuit was thus expended. In this instance also it constituted more than five times the total amount of power utilized in the are for the production of light. In another instance it con- stituted less than one-third the total work of the circuit, and somewhat more than one-half the work in the are. Of course work expended in local action is simply thrown away, since it adds only to the heating of the machine. And since the latter increases its electrical resistance, it is doubly injurious. The local action of dynamo-electric machines is analogous to the local action of a battery, and is equally injurious in its effects upon the availa- ble current. Again, in regard to the internal work of a machine, since all this is event- ually- reduced to heat in the machine, the temperature during running must continually rise until the loss by radiation and convection into the sur- rounding air, are eventually equal the production, and the machine will at last acquire a constant temperature. This temperature, however, will differ in different machines according to their construction, and to the power ex- pended in producing the internal work, being, of course, higher when the power expended in producing the internal work is proportionally high. If therefore a machine during running acquires a high temperature when a proper external resistance is employed, its efficiency will be low. But it should not be supposed that because a machine when run without external resistance, that is on short circuit, heats rapidly, that inefficiency is shown thereby. On the contrary, should a machine remain comparatively cool when a proper external resistance is employed, and heat greatly, when put on short circuit, these conditions should be regarded as an index of its efficiency. ; As arule the internal resistance of Dynamo Electric Machines is so low that to replace them by a battery, the latter, to possess an equal internal re- sistance, would have to be made of very large dimensions, so that the efficiency of Dynamo-Electric Machines, cannot be stated in terms of bat- tery cells as ordinarily constructed, In regard to the second division, viz., the external work of the machine, this may be applied in the production of light, heat, electrolysis, magnet- ism, &e. Where it is desired to produce light, the external resistance is generally that of an arc formed between two carbon electrodes ; the resistance of the are is therefore an important factor in determining the efficiency. To re- alize the greatest economy, the resistance of the are should be low, but nevertheless should constitute the greater part of the entire circuit resis- tance, Houston and Thomson. ] 60 [Nov.T, In some of our measurements the resistance of the arc was surprisingly low, being in one instance .54 ohm., and in another .79 ohm. It was how- ever in some instances as high as 3.18 ohms. It may be noted as an interesting fact that where the greatest current was flowing, the resistance of the arc thereby produced was low. | This is undoubtedly due to higher temperature and increased vaporization from the carbons. In this latter case also the greatest amount of light was pro- duced. The amount of work appearing in the arc as measured by the number of foot pounds equivalent thereto, is not necessarily an index of the lighting power. In two instances of measurement, the amount of energy thus appearing in the are wasequal, while the lighting powers were pro- portionately as three to four. This apparent anomaly is explained by con- sidering the resistance of the arc, it being much less in the case in which the greater light was produced. The heat in this case being evolved in less space, the temperature of the carbons, and therefore their light-giving pow- ers, was considerably increased. A few remarks on the economical production of light from electrical cur- rent may not be out of place. Thelight emitted by anincandescent solid will increase as its temperature is increased. In the voltaic are the limit to increase of temperature is in the too rapid vaporization of the carbon. Before this point is reached, however, the temperature is such that the light emitted is exceedingly intense. No reliable method of measuring the temperature of the are has as yet been found. A well known method of obtaining light from electrical currents is by constructing a resistance of some material such as platinum having a high fusing point and heated to incandescence by the passage of a current. When platinum is employed the limit to its increase of temperature is the fusing point of the platinum, which is unquestionably but a fraction of the temperature required to vaporize carbon. Were the falling off in the amount of light emitted merely proportional to the decrease in tempera- ture, the method last described might be economical. Unfortunately how- ever for this method, many facts show that the decrease in the light emitted, is far greater than the decrease of the temperature. Most solids may he heated to 1000° F., without practically emitting light. At 2000° F., the light emitted is such that the body is said to be at a bright red. At 4000° F., the amount of light will have increased far more than twice, probably as much as four times that emitted at 2000° F. It is reasonable to suppose that with a further.increase of temperature, the same ratio of in- crease will be observed, the proportionate increase in luminous intensity far exceeding the increase in temperature, It would therefore appear that the employment of a resistance of pla- tinum or other similar substance, whose temperature of alteration of state as compared with that of carbon is low, must be far less economical than the employment of the are itself, which as now produced has been esti- mated as about two or three times less expensive than gas. 1878.] 61 {Houston and Thomson, e Indeed it would seem that future improvements in obtaining light from electrical currents will rather be by the use of a sufficient resistance in the most limited space practicable, thereby obtaining in such space the highest possible temperature. Perhaps the highest estimate that can be given of the efficiency of Dyna- mo-Electrie-Machines as ordinarily used, is not over 50 per cent. Our measurements have not given more than 38 percent. Futureimprovements may increase this proportion. Since the efficiency of an ordinary steam en- gine and boiler in utilizing the heat of the fuel is probably overestimated at 20 per cent., the apparent maximum percentage of heat that could be re- covered from the current developed in a Dynamo-Electric-Machine, would be overestimated at i0 per cent... The economical heating of buildings by means of electricity may therefore be regarded as totally impracticable, Attention has, long ago, been directed to the use of Dynamo-Electric Machines for the conveyance of power. Their employment for this pur- pose would indeed seem to be quite promising. Since in this case one ma- chine is employed to produce electrical currents, to be reconverted into mechanical force by another machine, the question of economy rests in the perfection of the machines and in their relative resistances. In respect to the relations that should exist between the external and in- ternal work of Dynamo-Electric Machines, it will be found that the great- est efficiency will, of course, exist where the external work is much greater than the internal work, and this will be proportionately greater as the external resistance is greater. Our measurements gave in one instance the relaton of .82 ohm. of the arc to .49 ohm of the machine, a condition which indicates economy in working. The other extreme was found in an instance where the resistance of the arc was 1.98 ohms., while that of the machine was 4.60 ohms. a condition indicating wastefulness of power. Stated Meeting, Nov. 15, 1878. Present, 23 members. Vice-President, Mr. E, K. Price, in the Chair. Letters of acknowledgment were received from Prof. Steenstrup, of Copenhagen, dated Oct. 15, 1878 (101); the R. Zoological Society, Amsterdam, Oct. 15, 1878 (101; Cata- logue, part iii); Teyler Foundation, Leyden, Oct. 26 (101); Astronomical Society, Leipzig, Oct. 26 (101); Astronomical Observatory of the Roman College, Oct. 29 (96); Royal Academy of Sciences, Lisbon, April 28 (99); Royal Obser- vatory, Greenwich, Oct. 29 (101); Prof. B. Pierce (101); Buffalo Society of Natural Science, Nov. 12 (101); and the Public School Library, St. Louis, Oct. 28 (Catalogue i, ii, iii). 62 Donations for the Library were received from the Asiatic Society of Japan; the Minister of Mines, Melbourne; the Government of South Australia; Imperial Academy of Russia; Society of Natural History, Moscow ; German Ge- ological Society, Berlin; Zoologische Garten, Frankfurt ; Natural History Society in Freiberg im Breisgau; N. L. Magazin, Gorlitz; Zoological Society in Amsterdam ; Royal Astronomical Society, Meteorological Officc, Meteorological Society, and Nature, in London; Philosophical: Society. of Glasgow; Royal Irish Academy; American Journal, and Yale College, New Haven; Franklin Institute, Medical News, American Journal of Pharmacy, and Robinson’s Epitomy of Literature, in Philadelphia ; National Museum, and Ministerio de Fomento in Mexico; and Prof. Saenz at Bogota. Dr. Barker, pursuant to notice, described the location, ap- paratus, personnel, methods, and results of the Solar Eclipse observations of July 29, last, at Rawlins, and exhibited photographs, and the tazimeter used by Mr. Edison, who was of the party. Dr. McQuillen described the vivisection and subsequent post mortem dissection of the brain of a pigeon (See min- utes, Proe. Vol. XVII, page 314) which lived six months between the operations; and introduced Dr. Carl Seiler, who described the methods of obtaining slices and mounting them and exhibited such slices in a microscope. A communication was received entitled “On some of the Characters of the Miocene Fauna of Oregon. By E. D. Cope.” i The following resolution was offered by Curator Dr. Cres- son, seconded in writing by Curator Dr. Brinton, and put to the meeting and passed, Resolved, That the Curators of the Society be directed to make arrange- ments through the Numismatic and Antiquarian Society of Philadelphia, for the deposit of the collection of Coins and Medals, belonging to the So- ciety, in the Pennsylvania Museum of Industrial Art, under agreement that the said collection be properly catalogued and displayed and returned on demand, And the meeting was adjourned, . Nov. 15, 1878.] (3 {Cope, On some of the Characters of the Miocene Fauna of Oregon. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, November 15, 1878.) By E. D. Corr. We have been for some time in possession of information as to the ungu- late forms which inhabited Oregon during the Miocene period. Through the labors of Profs. Leidy, Marsh and Bettany, we have learned of the existence there of Oreodontide@ in considerable variety ; of Anchitheriide ; of peccary like species ; of Hlotherium, and of Rhinocerus. But of the un- guiculate types, of Rodentia, and of the inferior orders of Mammalia, almost nothing is yet known. Having recently received a number of specimens from the deposits in question, I am in a position to offer a number of new identifications. The following species already known from the Miocene of Colorado, I find contained in the collection, viz.: Paleolagus haydeni; Canis gregarius ; Canis lippincottianus; Hyper- tragulus calearatus ; Leptomeryx evansi. RODENTIA. STENEOFIBER GRADATUS, sp. nov. This species is represented in my collection by a cranium which is nearly perfect, the principal deficiency being the absence of the mandibular rami. It is of smaller size than the S. nebrascensis and 8. pansus, and differs from both these species in the relative sizes of the superior molar teeth. The first of these is the largest, and the others diminish regularly in size to the last, whose grinding face does not present more than one-third the ex- tent of that of the first. The triturating surfaces of the second and third have their long axes transverse. In all the crowns, besides the in- ternal and external enamel inflections, there is but one fossette, which is anterior to the external inflection, The latter has become isolated from the superficial enamel on the last three molars, by attrition. The superior incisors are flat anteriorly with the external angle rounded, and its dentine presents the transverse undulations seen in S. pansus. Measurements. M. Length of skull from incisive alveolus........ ere bee Width between summits of first molars............... -0060 by fourth -:‘* :icslsaay-'nes poe -0095 Length of molar series, ...........+--e0 peer a 0115 Thin theta’ of dans ves poolar | Anite saat capes ‘tee. .0040 : transverse..... Booey wake -0045 Diameter of third molar § #2teto-posterior ...... be basa’ “OARS PTADS VOIR 15 wore p95 $5 eahie pw sOORe antero-posterior........... .0020 Diameter of fourth molar | LTANSVEFSC. 6.0 occ enwesiees «(0024 From the above measurements it is apparent that the molar series in this species is equal in length to the anterior three molars cf the S. nebrascensis Cope.) G4 [Novy. 15. and S. pansus. The posterior fossettes of the crowns seen in those species are wanting in the S. gradatus. ENTOPTYCHCS CAVIFRONS, gen. et sp. nov. Char. gen. Probably of the family Pattee ey * The cranium is elongate, and presents inflated periotic bones, and slender zygoma. The foramen infraorbitale is smal] and anterior in position, entering the maxil- lary bone near its suture with the premaxillary. Generic characters. Molars $—4, rootless, and identical in structure. The crowns are prismatic, and in the young stage present a deep inflection of enamel from one side, the external in the superior teeth, the internal in the inferior. After a little attrition, the ¢onnection with the external enamel layer disappears, and there remains a median transverse fossette, entirely enclosed by enamel. The tvoth then consists of two dentinal columns in one cylinder of enamel, separated by a transverse enamel-bordered tube. Incisors not sulcate. . The teeth of this genus differ from those of Perognathus in being with- out distinct roots, and in having the enamel loop cut off and enclosed. In Dipodomys, the molars are undivided simple prisms. Specif. Char. This species is represented by some entire crania, and numerous separated jaws. The postorbital part of the skull is subquadrate in outline, and depressed in form. The interorbital region is narrowed, but the superciliary margins dv not meet nor converge to form a sagittal crest. They are thickened, forming two subparallel ridges which are sepa- rated by a shallow concavity of the frontal bone. The nasal bones are very narrow, and their posterior apices just attain the line of the supero-anterior angle of the orbit. The base of the malar bone is much elevated and very oblique. The molar teeth are directed obliquely backwards, the alveolus of the first issuing below the anterior part of the orbit. The first superior molar is the largest, and the proportions of the others diminish regularly posteriorly. The first inferior molar is a little smaller than the second and third, and is about equal to the fourth. Its anterior column is contracted, while the last molar is like the second and third. The face of the inferior incisor is flat, and its enamel is smooth. The external face of the jaw is bounded below by a strong angle, as far anteriorly as below the first molar. Measurements. M Length of skull to incisive alveoli.............00e00e0) O41 Width of skull at mastoids...... ew Sh a lpielctatGh lates “avelvary noes 4 ‘« between orbits..........% ve leth doe TR OUe i ** at middle of muzzle....... Spray St, Elevation of skull from second molar..... is eee pou Length of molar series.............0555 aas.ny Meek eae 007 46 Geet MOML. ce chives ese iD otvecl ceveepe yoee Widthof “* OF pahsine obinapewe cbeb sheik s wRAU Wee Length of crown of last molar........6ecseeeeeeeee ees OOS *See Cones’ Report U, 8, Geol, Surv, Terrs, XT, p, 491, 1878.) 65 (Cope. 7 Measurements. M. Width of crown of last molar........ eteheruy 2 ath s.2001d Length from M. 1 to infraorbital foramen.............. .007 Depth of mandibular ramus at M. 2...............4-.. .006 Width of face of inferior incisor ..............2-.-00-0. 0016 ENTOPTYCHUS PLANIFRONS, Sp. NOV. A larger species than the Z. cavifrons, represented in my collection by parts of crania, and rami. The former show that besides the superior size, this species differs from the H. cavifrons in the absence of the superciliary ridges, and hence perfect flatness of the interorbital region. The latter is also wider, measuring five-sixths the width of the muzzle at its middle, while in the Z. cavifrons it is only half as wide. The subjoined measure- ments give the characters in detail. Measurements. M. Width of interorbital space.......... aie i arelanua a9 ania . .007 = muzzle at middle..... SAA mate ie ok a dimes ae Elevation of skull from second molar............+--+: .0130 Length of inferior molar series........ Saaiecee Alas aaccse sOUle ER TRIOS RE IS, wan ac» cress vemaseneus aia kes 0072 Width of inferior face at M. 2...........cecsecs a ated os ES ee aH LGIBUT sono 0:0 04h 0.2 aa RR A .0018 Distance between infraorbital foramen and M. 1..... .. .0050 ENTOPTYCHUS CRASSIRAMIS, Sp. Nov. This, the largest species of the‘genus, appears to have been less abundant than the two already described. I refer to it portions of two crania and three mandibular rami, found separately. The superior size of the parts is obvious, the posterior three superior molars having the same longitudinal extent as the entire series of the ZH. cavifrons. The gradation in the size of these teeth, is as in that species, the grinding surfaces diminishing rapidly in extent posteriorly. The superciliary ridges are not well pre- served, but were probably thickened as in JZ. cavifrons, and the interor- bital space was relatively as narrow, and not so wide as in Z.planifrons. The measurements below exhibit the characters more exactly. Measurements. M. Width of skull between orbits....... neoatt ia, Aorhe e - .007 Elevation of skull from second molar.............e.-5. .015 Length of series of superior molars......... $a eaaen -0115 Thitneter’ ot aseona a5 le ONr FRE em et! F transverse....... Deitin pied .004 Diiitieter of feardi molar sone TSee olde é -002 transverae....806G.. ee a5 3: .002 In the mandibular rami the inferior masseteric ridge extends to below the anterior border of the first molar, and is very prominent and acute. It results that both the exterior and inferior aspects of the ramus are con- PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOc, xvill. 102.1. PRINTED DEC. 30, 1878. Cope. ] 66 [Nov. 15, cave to the anterior extremity of the crest, which slopes upwards. The incisive alveolus, though not prominent as in the Hystricomorpha, is on the inner side of the base of the ramus in front, and the enamel-face of the incisor tooth is directed more inwards than downwards. Above the alveo- lar prominence, the inner face of the ramus is gently concave. The ante- rior origin of the coronoid process is opposite the posterior border of the second molar. Measurements. M. Length of inferior molar series. ........... Se eta hea .0105 Width of anterior face of inferior incisor.............. .0028 DEPUL OF TOINUE BE. Se cece is cet cee ecusae ses ST a Sc ee ‘Width OF ramus Delow at MT. 20. SSS ca eo een .0070 PLEUROLICUS SULCIFRONS, gen. et sp. nov. Char. gen. Fam. Saccomydiz. Superior molars rooted and short-crowned. The crowns with a lateral fissure bordered with an inflection of the enamel sheath, extending to their bases. In the superior molars this inflection is on the external side, and does not divide the crown. Superior incisors not grooved, This genus is curiously near to the existing Heteromys and Perognathus, the two genera of Saccomyide# with rooted molars. The former differs in having the molars divided into two columns, each of which is sheathed in enamel, while Perognathus only differs so far as I am aware, in having the . superior incisors grooved. Specif. Char. This species resembles those of the allied genus Hntop- tychus in many respects. The superciliary borders are thickened upwards, forming two ridges, which enclose a groove between them which is more pronounced than in the Lntoptychus cavifrons. The muzzle is plane above and considerably wider than the interorbital space. The base of the ma- lar is thin and oblique, and the foramen infraorbitale exterius is well in advance of the molar teeth and at the anterior part of the maxillary bone. A groove passes backwards from its inferior border, terminating in a small foramen which marks a point nearly half way to the first molar. Within this, another shallow groove bounds the more prominent median line. The palatal surface exhibits two shallow lateral grooves, which commence op- posite the posterior border of the first molar. The grinding surfaces of the molars are transverse ovals, only interrupted by the exterior fissure. The first molar is slightly different in form, being larger, and its section, when not much worn, being nearly round, Its an- terior portion extends towards the alveolus, giving an antero-posterior oval, on prolonged wear. Each tooth has three roots, one interior and two exterior ; in the first they may be described as two posterior and one ante- rior. The last molar is the smallest, the series exhibiting a regular grada- tion in size. Measurements, M. Ipterorbital width. «side ci pbnsy Heels cisiee' }e eitnient AOD Width of muzzle at. middle. ...6siccesnciccveccesreaiesl s 0080 1878.] 67 [Cope. Measurements. M. Depth of cranium at M. 2.5-s: wes csien dive cielce diecsac cee 0188 Length of molar series along base...... sm edineda hen ¢iaee 0080 antero-posterior........... .0016 tTANSVEISC......-2eceereee -0020 Width of face of superior incisor...............++-++- -0020 Diameter of second molar MENISCOMYs HIPPODUS, gen. et sp. nov. Gen. Shar. The characters of this genus are derived from the dentition of both jaws, and from portions of the cranium which are preserved. The molars are rooted, and number ¢. Those of the superior series are with- out enamel inflections, and the triturating surface exhibits two external and one internal crescentic sections of the investing enamel. On the sec- ond superior molar there are three external crescents in the typical species ; and the first molar is simply conic. Between the inner and external cres- cents, there are the curved edges of enamel plates directed obliquely and transversely. The grinding surfaces of the inferior molars display in the unworn condition, two L-shaped transverse crests, connected longitu- dinally on the median line ; on wearing, the lateral emarginations of the enamel become shallower, disappearing from the inner side, but remaining on the outer. Incisor teeth not grooved. Forameninfraorbitale anterius, if present, elevated in position and near orbit. The characters of the dentition of this genus resemble those of the genus Pteromys, which is now confined to Asia and the Malaysian Archipelago. The superior molars differ from those of Pteromys in wanting all reéntrant enamel inflection. Specimens in my collection indicate two species of Meniscomys. Specif. Char. Superior molars with a vertical ridge from the points of junction of the crescents on the external side ; there are thus two on the second molar, and one each on the third and fourth. Within each of the external crescents is another crescentic edge of a pair of vertical enamel plates, and the inner marginal crescent sends off a short transverse branch towards them. With attrition, all these crests unite by their extremities, enclosing four distinct lakes, which, after still further wear, disappear. Attrition produces a similar result in the inferior molars, viz.: two pairs of crescents enclosing four lakes, which ultimately wear out. The inferior incisor has a shallow concavity on its anterior face. The maxillary bone, anterior to the molar teeth, is shorter than the pre- maxillary. The incisive foramina are entirely in the latter. The sides and superior aspect of the muzzle are regularly convex in transverse sec- tion. The inferior incisive alveolus is enclosed entirely in the plane of the ramus, and extends posteriorly to below the last molar tooth. The masse- teric ridge is very oblique, and rises to a median point below the second molar. The coronoid process rises from the front of the last molar. Measurements. M. Length of superior molar series.............0.220.00- .008 Cope.] 68 [Nov. 15, Measurements. M. antero-posterior... .004 Diameter of second superior molar 4 P transverse........ .0085 “E : +: 5 antero-posterior... .0020 ae teratigvede coecdee *U0R0 With Of SUNGriok INCIBOF.6 » 06.00: 44 sscaan hoon eA . .0020 Length from base of first superior molar to base of in- TOE 1 rT TS is Pe 52 ae wed us ere aeeNe 0065 Width between bases of first molars.................. -0020 Length of first inferior molar........... ROMs Mails EE 0033 Depth of ramus at second molar. ..............6..00- -0050 Width te BEI aS oe ah eee pitta Tabs eee men .0035 MENISCOMYS MULTIPLICATUS, Sp. NOV. This species is considerably larger than the M. hippodus, and differs in the greater complication of the enamel plates of the inferior molars. The four crescentic areas are discernible on the worn surfaces of the crown, of which the posterior inner is reduced in size on the middle two molars. The two enclosed lakes have very plicate borders which form many small loops, and sometimes they are fused into a single irregular area. The last molar is extended a little posteriorly, and all present an entrant angle be- tween the inner columns. The coronoid process originates opposite the third molar, and the masseteric ridge ceases below the middle of the jaw below the second molar. Measurements. M. Probable length of inferior molar series.............. .0120 Length of posterior three molars...... prawns &s.ingess ah 0095 Tidnihes Of edentid olay { antero-posterior........... .0030 IGCONNOS WF ice cial Ce vi -0025 Length of fourth molar. ............ aed ae tele ae .0040 Depth of ramus below second molar...............+4 .0070 Width s ¢ 3 mas «iar eh a8 asia oe CARNIVORA. TEMNOCYON ALTIGENIS, gen. et sp. nov, Gen. Char. This genus is only known from a mandibular ramus which supports all the teeth excepting the incisors and probably the last molar. There are four premolars and probably three true molars, all having the general character of those of Canis. The only character by which I dis- tinguished the new genus J’emnocyon is seen in the form of the heel of the sectorial tooth. Instead of presenting a concave surface bounded by ridges or tubercles, it presents a more or less median cutting edge as in the poste- rior premolars of Oxyana. In the typical species, there is but one row of cusps on the first tubercular molar, but they are not elevated, and stand on one side of the crown, In comparing this genus with types other than Cunida, one can recognize in its characteristic peculiarity of the sectorial 1878.] 69 [Cope. tooth, one well-known in the typical genera of Viverride and Mustelide. Temnocyon is, however, truly canine in other details, and appears to ap- proach the genus Palewocyon of Lund. According to this author, the posterior inner tubercle of the anterior part of the crown of the sectorial tooth is wanting in that genus, so that it is distinct from the North Ameri- can form. Specif. Char. The mandibular ramus is rather deep and compressed, much more so than in the Canis latrans, with which it agrees in the length of the dental series. As compared with the existing species of Canis and Vulpes of North America, the sectorial tooth is relatively smaller and the premolars larger. In this respect it agrees with most other dogs of the Lower Miocene, and differs from those of the Upper Miocene (Loup Fork).* The posterior tubercle is wanting from the premolars, excepting the last, where it is large and obtuse, differing in this respect also from most recent dogs, and from the cotemporary Canis gregarius. In the sectorial tooth the principal cusp is much elevated above the anterior, while the inner median is small, with its apex in line with the anterior. The cutting edge of the heel is not acute, and is a little external to the median line ; there is a weak cingulum-like angle at its inner base. The first tubercular tooth is large, nearly equaling in antero-posterior diameter the base of the third premolar. It is parallelogrammic in transverse section, and supports two principal cusps and an anterior ledge. The cusps are pronounced and stand exterior to the middie line; their inner side slopes to the base of the crown where there is no cingulum. The ledge is higher on the inner than the external side. There are no basal cingula on either side of the bases of any of the teeth. The second tubercular molar is lost. The alveolar margin of the jaw rises behind the sectorial tooth, and the inferior margin begins to ascend below the middle of the same tooth more decidedly than in (C. lupus, latrans or cuspigerus. The two large mental foramina, are situated, the one below the second, the other below the third premolars. Measurements. M. Length of anterior six molars..................2.2.00- 073 - as BEE ie ede e seacss cs Oth dtueawenee -045 as base of second premolar..............+..--- O11 Elevation of crown ‘‘ = al Bh eee eR eS 2 ieee e's -O11 Length of base of fourth OT iit n Cable ee er |) t: Elevation of crown “ a ees orierr ry | Length of base of sectorial tooth................e00e 0185 Elevation of principal cusp of sectorial tooth......... . .0160 BS anterior as a CS seu aeaun tia ite -009 Length of heel of sectorial........... hist » tig plague cael .007 _ Elevation cs EW Steaks Adal ee = aie tind tae'ye e080 Length of crown of first tubercular.......... Seeseae ses is *See Proceedings Academy Philadelphia, 1875, p. 22, where I have discussed the origin and history of the sectorial tooth. Cope.] 70 [Nov. 15, Measurements. M. Width of crown of first tubercular..................04. .0065 Depth of ramus at P. M. 2..........0..2. Anges Be oe 2 .024 * WSF SIEROOLOTIAL. 5 6 ahe'ctem dig beossthic ae ee ia ae -028 Thickness ‘“ GE? 1) ah Bh ak u ASG ae tice ee oe -010 CANIS CUSPIGERUS, sp. nov. This peculiar species is indicated by the greater part of the cranium with dentition, to which are united both rami of the lower jaw with nearly all of the teeth in place. These indicate a dog of small size, about equaling the Canis gregarius Cope, but one presenting marked characters. The third premolar tooth in both jaws differs from the corresponding one in the C. gregarius and in most recent species, in lacking the lobe of the posterior cutting edge, agreeing in this (as regards the inferior series) with the Temnocyon altigenis. It is present in the fourth inferior premo- — lar, which has besides, a low heel. The inferior sectorial tooth is charac- terized by its great robustness ; the internal median tubercle is much ele- vated, while the principal cusp is short. The heel is wide and basin-shaped, with the inner border as much elevated as the outer. The first tubercular molar is characterized by its width as compared with its length being nearly as wide transversely as fore and aft. It has two anterior cusps followed by a basin with elevated borders. simulating two posterior cusps. There are an anterior and a exterior cingulum. The second tubercular is a min- iature of the first, differing in the more robust external posterior cusp, and the absence of external basal cingulum. There are no complete cingula on the external bases of the other inferior teeth. The second superior tubercular is well developed, having two external tubercles. The anterior inner cusp of the superior sectorial is distinct and acute, and there is a cingulum along the inner base of the crown. The exserted portion of the canines is long, slender, and with an oval section narrowed behind. The enamel of all the molars is more or less rugose, a character which is only found among our extinct dogs in the 0. geismarianus. The mandibular rami are shallow, and their inferior margin is not stout. A gentle elevation of the latter commences below the first tubercular tooth and the alveolar border rises but little behind. The masseteric fossa is deep and well defined. Measurements. M. Length of inferior molar series.......... vied lea bw hi open ee i bases of four premolars ....... ealveieiinteh wp Gi 023 Ag base of second’; 8 6 wis ab Gbw ld ois arg iew 005 Elevation crown 5 66. 4h cisiele Weise wk eden coe ODE, Length of base of fourth Ss Wd wins ema depeve vs 0038 Diameters of sectoriul antero-posterior ......... a5 Sse. sOLLD transverse, middle............ .006 Denti ot ramus at sectorial.. .......005<+deeseeks acaab .012 Thickness of ‘ TT Ss pRAS SARC ate oe -007 The affinities of this species are evidently with the C. euspigerus. It is named in honor of Jacob Geismar, a skillful naturalist of Philade}phia. MaAcH2&RoDUS STRIGIDENS, Sp. nov. This obviously distinct species is only represented by the crown of a superior canine tooth, from which the apex has been broken. Its characters are so peculiar that I record it under the above name, rot knowing whether I shall have better specimens. The tooth is long and very much compressed, much more so than in any species of the genus known to me. Its anterior and posterior edges are finely and very perfectly denticulate without lateral flexure near the base. The centre of each side of the tooth is occupied by a wide open gutter, so that the greatest trausverse diameter of the crown is not at its middle. These gutters become planes ‘towards the apex, giving an elongated hex- agonal section. The size indicates an animal of the proportions of the M. primevus, and smaller than the M. brachyops. Cope.] 72 [Nov, 15, As compared with the superior canine of the Daptophilus squalidens, which the present specimen resembles in its compression and fine denticu- lation, it differs in its greater relative length and in the presence of the lateral open sulci. Measurements. M. jMMLELO-DORLOLIOL 2.x die pits wee ae een -0120 Diameter at base liesoar Mee { greatest enikieie ye ee a6 sage median,.... Raivio ais™ -0032 Length of a denticle on base. ........c0..-cececceces . .000143 MACH2ZRODUS BRACHYOPS, sp. nov. This species, which ranged in size from that of the puma to that of the jaguar, is represented in my collection by parts of two crania ; by an en- tire cranium ; by a left mandibular ramus with parts of the skeleton, and by several isolated teeth. The characteristics of the molars in both jaws are those of the other species of this genus. The first superior pre- molar is two-rooted and small, occupying the middle of the short space between the canine and the second premolar. The latter is large, and has no anterior basal tubercles. Sectorial without anterior basal tubercle. Tubercular tooth small, transverse. The crania of the three individuals mentioned agree in many particulars ; and especially in the very short face and muzzle. This may be more ex- actly expressed by comparing the interspace separating the second and third premolar from the canine with the length of the base of the latter. From this it is seen that the two dimensions are equal, while in ‘the M. prime- ous the first mentioned is much the longer of the two. In the mandible referred to this species another character is seen in the relatively large size of the premolars, which much exceeds that of the corresponding teeth in M. primeous. The first is stated by Leidy to have an anterior basal cusp, which is wanting in the M. brachyops. In the first cranium the sagittal crest is well developed. The canine tooth has an oval section at the base of the crown, whose long diameter somewhat exceeds the distance between it and the anterior base of the sec- ond premolar. The infraorbital foramen is large. The second specimen, the left maxillary and part of malar bones with teeth, shows that the length of the base of the sectorial tooth equals the space between it and the middle of the first premolar. The superior aspect of the proximal portion of the malar bone is horizontal, constituting a surface not seen in the spe- cies of Felis. The canine is robust, with an oval section at the base. The posterior denticulate cutting edge extends higher up than the anterior, and ceases at the base of the enamel. The anterior cutting edge is on the in- ner side of the anterior face of the tooth. Measurements. No. 1. M. Length of muzzle in front of canine...iss..eeeeeeeeeee O17 antero-posterior, .....+++ O18 Diameter of canine at base { tYANSVEIBE. 6.2 eee eeee wee O11 Distance from canine to p. My. 2...00eseeeceereoeeecees OLT 1878,] 73 (Cope. Measurements. No. 2. M. Length of base of series to canine.......... geal lw 062 os s¢ second premolar. ......-....+200.--. -018 sed ‘>: Seetortaliy, ute sees. vs waeeau bette ee .025 Elevation to summit of infraorbital foramen........... . .033 The characters displayed by the second cranium lead me to suspect that it is that ofa female. A striking feature of the superior dental series is the small size of the canine, which is also not much compressed at the base. As regards the cranium, the sagittal crest is only distinct over the posterior part of the brain case ; the zygomata are not very widely expanded, and the muzzle is narrowed. The external infraorbital foramen is large. The mental border of the mandibular ramus is not flared downwards but is continuous, but the external is separated from the anterior and in- ferior faces by strong angles. The diastema is long. Three molars, all large ; the first without anterior basal tubercle, the second with a large one. Sectorial tooth the longest, with well developed simple cutting heel. Measurements. M. Total length of cranium......... ad Saini a ate eS Greatest width ‘“ ohakexcd aan un cankekeseneo ans » 128 Length of dental series with canine..... Di ERE SP ARES |W Wisshatue Gf canine at base { antero-posterior.......... .012 transverse. ..... einaden wend Distance between canine and second premolar.......... .019 Length base second premolar.............+.+ wikuhace actata: “ae Length base sectorial..... wiean ak Adc ome nena merce ee Length inferior dental series, with canine........ a Sele kt OMe bs COBION, sicavee hice + ie fo craton watssee sav LORS Herewith are presented, side by side, average analyses of Labradorite and of Pyroxene both calcujated from the data given in the last edition of Dana's System of Mineralogy (Fifth Edition, 1877)... The former is based upon forty analyses of Labradoriie and the latter on eighteen analyses of Pyroxene from eruptive rocks. 1378] 0°") 99! (Frazer. Labradorite| Pyroxene average of | average of 40 analyses | 18 analyses. Bilfce (Bie) 6 WG Tis ic -cor-cmrcomngrendawee cee kta 53.00 49.35 Alumin@ CAID As cp0.6.. 04. So sepees sete clack: ' 27.96 5.79 Tron Sesqui-oxide at cus nba w'dMhS BR eee Sa Te « 1.33 _ Ferrous: Oxide (Fe,0)) 2.0. se vsiieee seeders —_ 8.20 Magnesia (Mg,O) ...... Br COneoD mont done o101049 0.93 13.88 EDIBO. CORO) conctsee scandcepavanimictiiouaeee 10.88 20,86 SOI TTI EO ak o's 05d ik H. va dale bee «beele rel 4.09 = Potash (K,O) ee ee ae oe aed > 696 wm plese © 1.08 ae | oe i) sparailg. 3h acai om ean Aas poeta ! — 0.27 Water.. WEL aNA veep ks onic ¥4 ond EES 0.84 0.19 100.11 98.64 In the following table the percentage of each constituent in Dr. Genth’s analysis of this trap is doubled, and the result compared with a column showing the sums of the percentages of the average Labradorite, and the average Pyroxene : Double Per- Sum of La- centage of radorite ; PP yioadtet Berean ‘ BING fEIOw) asics sdciss. Speed Ree nen ee 102.35 *102.43 Alumina (Al 0s) -. Sa a Bd aod «ack ach < pid eight $a ¢ jay 33.75 28.38 Iron Seaqui-oxide (Fe,0,).. ......0rcccesacncceses 1.23 7.60 SP SERU CIPOE)) «tos sco oes dnc belemenueeus 8.30 14.88 Manganous Oxide (MnO).......6......6.0200004 0,27 0.90 Magnesia) Oxide (MyO)... 06.600... ..ccccsaescees 14.81 15.76 ARR RE eeepenareaiy 3 31.74 19.50 Soda (Na, "ahs Wid ALM onehite 4neleeoedains 4.09 3.70 ns on conan eins Vena aeece eeseen 1.08 1.90 A Bay IRAE RE Wa a RE ab eet | vcs Soop 1.03 $8.90 198.75 199.17 It will be seen that the two columns agree remarkably well in most par- ticulars, which is the same as saying that the composition of the rock is very nearly what the chemical analysis of a mixture of one molecule of Labradorite and one molecule of Pyroxene would show. In Report of Progress C, 1876, + a number of similar traps were discussed and analyses given; amongst others of one from ‘‘ West ae Connec- ticut, and one from Beeler’s farm, York County. The composition ofthe former, like the one here considered, agreed more nearly with a distribution of Labradorite and Pyroxene molecules in the proportion of one toone, while the ‘Beeler’ trap corresponded more nearly with the mixture of two molecules of Labradorite with one of Pyroxene. * 0.70 Ti O, and 0.15 p. c. Pz, Os included in SiO,. + Ignition. t Second Geol. Survey of Penna. Frazer.) 100 [Dec. 20, In the present case tables of comparison were made on the basis of 2 L-+-P, and 3L-+-P,* but none agreed so closely as the two first made and presented above. It should be mentioned that a slight error is due to the counting of all the titanic oxide and phosphoric oxide as part of the silicic oxide, neg- lecting at the same time to make the necessary allowance for.the quanti- valential and atom-weight differences, but the amount of these substances was so small that the error will be entirely inappreciable. And besides, even this small error will be avoided in the considerations presented below. The same is true of the method here followed, which is simply to com- pare the ascertained percentages of the compounds instead of reducing the analysis to percentage weight of the elements and striking a balance be- tween the electro-negative and the electro-positive elements. This latter method is much more exact but is too delicate and no better for the pur- pose than the rough and ready system here followed. A comparison of the same bodies given above in their percentage values would be as follows : P. ¢, com- | Analysis of Positions [oo trep. Silica (BIO) cos oi vis oc os cannon Rib heen uae Gana pe 51.50 $51.64 PAGIIRE BRITA oink kosik tc tins 90 heepecncs sh ea: 16.95 14.19 Tron Sesqui-oxide (Fe,O,)........... ENS = 6 oe a 0.67 3.84 POMOUsIIEIGD (LOO) . hcec dg olvecct chs coens ep Pee 4,17 7.44 Manganous Oxide (MnO)............. emake 0.13 0.48 Magnesia (MgO)...... vide wise danidnes aigiete cue piso-) 7.45 7.88 ATOR: do cee ch ese ana Ris co Nee ase nae abe 16.00 9.75 OKT A Ne SO ales 5's ok atten oss ornate nals Patieai das 2.55 1.89 Borbh (CHAD), . 6.00200 FOGG ZOs slow, papa 0.55 0.95 WERE CIOs cco ott chs not nece dee sots ens ds QD: 0.52 $1.95 It will be observed that the theoretical composition requires more Alumina and Lime than are given in the analysis, The alkalies are about the same in both, for there is a little less soda and a little more potash in the rock, which contains also more iron as both sesaui-oxide and protoxide. Manganese is too small to consider, as is also the slight difference in the per cent. of Magnesia. The analysis thus considered tells us that the actual composition of the rock, though near 1 ; 1 of labradorite and pyroxene, is not quite that, being slightly deficient in alumina and lime (Labradorite), while the excess of the two oxides of iron remind us that we are not to forget one of the most generally distributed constituents of these traps—e.g. magnetite ; though really under the microseope this mineral is not at all prominent, The study of the microscopic section haying led to the suspicion of cal- * L stands for one molecule of Labradorite, P stands for one molecule of Py- roxene, t Including TiO, and P,O,. t Ignition, 1878.) 1 Ol [Frazer. cite in the rock, a great number of specimens were tested for effervescence, and all showed it in a prominent degree. As the above analysis of Dr. Genth gave no carbonic oxide, oninquiry, he writes: ‘‘ The rock is full of cracks and these are lined with a minute quantity of calcite. The portion of which I sent. you the analysis was as nearly as possible selected from that which did not show this coating. * * * Still some of the ‘Igni- tion’ may be UVo,,’’ &e., &e. It is clear from the position of these calcite crystals that they cannot all be due to infiltrated solutions of calcium carbonate through cracks in the rock, because the individual crystals are isolated from each other. Their occurrence is peculiar and will be the subject of future study. Three separate determinations of ignition were 3.65, 3.40, and 3.88 (average 3.64), Average determination of CO,=1,49 p, c. Annexed is the analysis, resolved into the ultimate constituents of the rock (including 1 p. c. out of the ignition for CO,). ANALYSIS OF WILLIAMSON’S PorntT TRAP. Acid p. ¢ Oxygen p. c. ETS: 31?-38.38-- 23.71 \T "Oxiteatess Sears 27,08 ha Habe Ge oe O27 nig eR fe tet on ey 2 hee Rererenane aan, | GOST Shiva. gpg? Moke MB wsesb Gh 4)... 0.07 [i Sees seen ee 0 08 Basie : ee wanes? . 7.55 OXY Wel ssstccas 6.64 | ee SNe dion fs) 20:962:) cee tae ne LABS ss ft Serre OXY PED «.0:5.0:0<4 1.65 my oe cheat ey ttle DEAS hee 41) fedla.bovis 0.11 SGUS OE eoUs f {ai navn ase 8.20 Cath ai. 6.97. (; 20-00 PE yg pa mee Wa; Sinn, 1.40 4 LB at Sas 0.49 | eigig wie. SO. TBS) 110808 Addon sank 00S Delis 0.16 | a 54.72 44.34 Considering this collection of atoms as united into molecules in which the oxygen performs partly a linking and partly a saturating function, we may discover something as to the probable kinds of silicates contained.* __ The chemical units into which this analysis is resolved below represent the amount of bond satisfying work which each atom performs, so that the total amount might with propriety be considered the quantity of molecule constructing work performed. It is calculated by considering the num- ber of atoms of each element present, multiplied by the quantivalence of * On this subject see Report C, 1876, pp. 115 to 124, Frazer.} 102 [Dee. 20, the element. Thus a monad atom having but one bond orvaffinity, exerts a unit of consiructive work in the molecule.* The percentage weight of each element in the compound divided by its atomic weight and this quotient multiplied by the valence of the element will constitute what is here given as the number of its chemical units. Calling @ the atomic weight of the element, w the percentage weight, ® the valance, and 7 the number of atoms ; we have Chemical units—=ne= ». a Subjoined is the table : -’ Cxuemrican Untrs. Acid. s Be iS Raia eine cack o Ce ST Rs ee Swidndid ahah £108 iaaBB87, gus eeu en etn Lek babe misiinee OLED my fies Soils Als m-bnomt es Insetg af ASt ‘20.344 f 8-882 Pheideh Jo.dona. algo alan aaa xia S59 UGOL 0.011 Jo Basic 8 lap Ngee Goce an Pe thee OG reper waa Boa a 1.298 | Wee oo sca vued eee Bice atch oieawane 0.206 Minessesegeseeerseses seers cesses 0-13 2456 Pets ealerctioat Sak gio sce Paes 0.390 Oarieals. fae UO 1a eel uos o.zagif 24158.J Na. hn wows bal wads te stabonrere ~. 0.060 Mets ene wa nhac eee ee ee ee eee ...0.020 Total chemical units of both........ Bie ge 6.288 Excess of acid over basic units.................-. 1.376 4.912 As the bonds of oxygen must be equal in number to the bonds of those elements which the oxygen links or saturates, it must be assumed that the sum of the bonds of the acid and basic atoms must equal the number of bonds of the oxygen. This last remainder, therefore, gives the amount of oxygen in the compound employed exclusively in a linking function, while the difference between the number of acid and basic atoms = 1.376) equals the number chemical units of oxygen which: are employed in saturating the acid bonds in excess, Reduced to percentage of the rock in question— Of the rock there are p. c. of oxygen..........+++.- 4484 Of which the saturating oxygen is ........-... sidan. ao, AB Leaving p. c. of linking oxygen .............+.-- 88.42” *(It must be distinctly understood here that these expressions do not give the total (chemical) energy of the compound, which, however, could be ob- tained by adding together the product of these units of molecule bullding multiplied each by the force necessary to disrupt its union, | 1878, J 103 | Frazer. These represent in the rock— p. ec. of (SiO,) combined in ortho-silicates ............ 22.67 p. c. of (SiO,) combined in mono-meta-silicates........ 28.12 "TOUTS 3's oisat eee eae eae eed NS AR. 2 SS Sa 50.79 _ It.is interesting to note in conclusion that the rational formula calcu- lated for labradorite according to the modern chemical system and which regards this mineral as one of the para-silicates is (Cait Ai) (Si,'” O71... This might be viewed as a mixed ortho- and mono-meta-silicate* in which there are two molecules of the radical (SiO,) and one of (SiO,). In the latter one of the atoms of O is employed in saturating alone, and the pro- portion which this bears to the total amount of oxygen in both radicals is evidently 1:11. _In Pyroxene all the silica is present as mono-meta silicic acid. In a mixture containing exactly one molecule each of Labradorite and Pyroxene, there would then be : SE ete Mono-meta- | Silicic Acid. TADIBOORIEG. | nes cece beet cecssaactadaieiaat 2 | 1 Pyroxene,..,... Seal kak vay are Ce kanes Geeesr ers | ) Lae | 2 2 That is, the number of molecules of Ortho- and Mono-meta-silicic acid would be equal, or if the p. c. by weight of the latter were as above sup- posed, 22.67 in the rock, that of the latter would be in such a mixture, 27.17 p.-c. which is very nearly that actually given. On the Total Solar Eclipse of Juiy 29th, 1878, By Greoree F. BARKER. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, Nov. 15th, 1878.) The purpose of the present paper is to put on record in the Proceedings of the Society some account of the observations made by certain of its members upon the total solar eclipse of the 29th of July, 1878. The expedition was organized in June, by Professor Henry Draper of New York, out of compliment to whom, his associates named it the Draper Eclipse Expedition. The party consisted of Dr. Draper as Direc- tor, with Mrs. Draper as assistant, who were in charge of the photographic and photospectroscopic work, as also of the observations with the slitless spectroscope ; of President Morton, of Hoboken, to whom was confided the general observations, as well as those with the polariscope and pocket spectroscope ; of Dr. Thomas A. Edison, of Menlo Park, who was to _use his newly invented tasimeter. in order to determine whether it was *See “ Tables for the determination of minerals,” Frazer, 1874, Barker.] 104. [Nov, 15, possible to measure the heat of the corona; and of myself, who was to ob- serye with the analyzing spectroscope with the especial object of ascer- taining the presence either of bright or of dark (Fraunhofer) lines in the spectrum of the corona, Rawlins, Wyoming Territory, had been selected by the Director as’ the observing station, because while it was near the central line of totality, it was also easily accessible, being on the Union Pacific Railroad, was a place of some size, having eight or nine hundred inhabitants, and was the loca- tion of the railroad repair shops of the Laramie division, so that in case of need, assistance in constructing or repairing our instruments could be had. Moreover, it had a bountiful supply of excellent water brought in pipes from the neighboring Cherokee mountain, which being of granite, yielded a pure product of inestimable value for purposes of photography. Pre- vious experience in that region of country too, had assured Dr. Draper that the air there was dry, and hence that the chances of clear weather on the day of the eclipse were very considerable. The expedition Jeft New York on the evening of the 13th of July ; and, resting by the way at Chicago for a day, reached Rawlins at mid-night of the 18th. The apparatus and material, which had been sent on by ex- press in advance, had already arrived and in apparently good order, though in all it weighed nearly a ton, After a day’s reconnoitering, plans were perfected and arrangements made for the construction of a temporary observatory in which to shelter the larger instruments. An excellent site was selected by Dr. Draper, protected in great measure from the strong winds from the west which at times sweep over those mountain plains. In this building the telespectroscopes were erected, a portion of it being converted into a photographic dark room, and supplied with running water from the hydrant. The location of this observatory was determined to be latitude 41° 48/ 50’” N., longitude 2h. 0 m. 44s. W. from Washing- ton. Its altitude above the sea level was 6,732 feet. The tasimeter tele- scope of Dr. Edison was erected in an adjoining building, facing the west and about ten or fifteen feet distant. The ten days of time which had been allowed for completing the pre- parations was found to be none too much. During a large portion of every day and most of the night, some or all of the party were engaged in ad- justment of the instruments, in practice with them, in determining posi- tions in photographic work, or in the numberless details necessary to success. On the night of the 24th, we were joined by the English astro- nomer, J, Norman Lockyer, F. R. 8., and also by Professor James C, Watson, of the University of Michigan. Mr. Lockyer’s work being mostly photographic, he was efficiently aided by Mr. J. B. Silvis, the owner of a photographic car traveling over the Union Pacific Railroad, which chanced at that time to be in Rawlins, Mr, Silvis not only most generously placed himself and his car at Mr, Loekyer’s disposal for any experimental pur- poses entirely free of expense, but on the day of the eclipse, he allowed him to take the car to Separation, about thirteen miles distant, assisted him in observing, and returned with him to Rawlins the same evening. 1878. ] 105 : [Barker. The day of the eclipse was all that could be desired. The sky was almost without a cloud throughout, and the dew point was found to be at least 34° F. below the temperature of the air. The entire programme of observations was carried out as it had been arranged, and with singularly good fortune. ‘‘The results obtained,’”’ as summarized by Dr. Draper, “were; 1st, the spectrum of the corona was photographed and shown to be of the same character as that of the sun and not due to a special incan- descent gas; 2d, a fine photograph of the corona was obtained, extending in some parts to a height of more than twenty minutes of arc, that is, of more than 500,000 miles ; 3d, the Fraunhofer dark lines were observed by both Professors Barker and Morton in the corona; 4th, the polarization was shown by Professor Morton to be such as would answer to reflected solar light; and 5th, Mr. Edison found that the heat of the corona was sufficient to send the index beam of light entirely off the scale of the gal- vanometer.’’ As these results seem to be of very considerable importance, it appears desirable to give the various methods of observation somewhat more in detail, adopting for the purpose so far as possible the language of the observers themselves, as given in their several reports. PHOTOGRAPHIC AND PHOTOTELESPECTROSCOPIC. OBSERVATIONS. Fig.l, The instruments which were used by Dr. Draper in his photographic and _phototelespectroscopic obser- yations were: ‘Ist. An equatorial mounting, with spring governor driving clock, loaned by Professor Pickering, Director of Harvard Ob- servatory. 2d. A telescope of five and a quarter inches aperture and seventy-eight inches focal length, furnished with a lens specially cor- rected for photography, by Alvan Clark & Sons. 3d. A quadruple achromatic objective of six inches aperture and twenty-one inches focal length, loaned by Messrs. E. & H, T. Anthony, of New York ; to this lens was attached a Rutherford diffraction grating nearly twoinches square, ruled on speculum metal. This arrangement (Fig. 1.) with its plate holders, etc., will be desig- nated as a phototelespectroscope. Besides these there was a grating spectroscope, an eye slitless prism aren COE PROC. AMER. PHILOS. 800. Xviit. 102. NN.) PRINTED JAN, 25, 1879. Rarker.} 106 [Nov. 15, spectroscope, with two inch telescope, and finally a full set of chemicals for Anthony’s lightning collodion process, w ie in my experience is fully three times quicker than any other process.’ *«The arrangement of the phototelespectroscope requires farther deserip- tion, for success in the work it was intended to do, viz., photographing the diffraction spectrum of the corona, was difficult and in the opinion of many of my friends impossible. In order to have every chance of success it/is necessary to proturea lens of large aperture and the shortest attain. able focal length, and to have a grating of the largest size adjusted in such a way as to utilize the beam of light to the best advantage. Moreover, the apparatus must be mounted equatorially and driven by clockwork so that the exposure may last the whole time of totality and the photographic work must be done by the most sensitive wet process. After some experi- ments during the summer of 1877 and the spring of 1878, the following form was adopted. “The lens being of six inches aperture and twenty-one inches focal length, gave an image of the sun less than one-quarter of an inch in dia- meter and of extreme brilliancy. Before the beam of light from the lens reached a focus it was intercepted by the Rutherford grating set at an angle of sixty degrees, This threw the beam on one side and produced there three images—a central one of the sun and on either side of it a spectrum ; these were received on three separate sensitive plates. One of. these spectra was dispersed twice as much as the other, that is, gave a photo- graph twice as long. This last photograph was actually about two inches long in the actinic region. If, now, the light of the corona was from in- candescent gas giving bright lines which lay in the actinic region of the spectrum, I should have procured ring-shaped images, one ring for each bright line. On the other hand, if the light of the corona arose from in- candescent solid or liquid bodies, or was reflected light from. the sun I was certain to obtain a long band in my photograph answering to the actinic region of the spectrum. If the light was partly from gas and partly from reflected sunlight a result partly of oa and partly a band would have | appeared, ‘Immediately after the totality was over and on developing the photo- graphs, I found that the, spectrum photographs ‘were continuous bands without the least trace of aring. I was not surprised at this result, he- cause during the totality I had the opportunity of studying the corona through a telescope arranged substantially in the same way as the photo- telespectroscope and saw no sign of a ring, “The plain photograph of the corona t taken with my large equatorial on this occasion shows that the corona is not arranged centrally with regard to the sun, The great mass of the matter lies in the plane of the ecliptic but not equally distributed. To the eye it extended about a degree and a half from the sun toward the west, while it was scarcely a degree in length toward the cast. The mass of meteors, if such be the construction of the corona, is therefore probably arranged in elliptical form round the sun. “The general conclusion that follows from these results is that on 1878,] ; 107 |Barker, this occasion we have ascertained the true nature of the corona, viz: it shines by light reflected from the sum by a cloud of meteors surrounding that luminary, and that on former occasions’ it has been infiltrated with materials thrown up from the chromosphere, notably with the 1474 matter and hydrogen. As the chromosphere is now quiescent this infiltration has taken place to a scarcely perceptible degree recently. This explanation of the nature of the corona reconciles itself so well with many facts that have been difficult to explain, such as the low pressure at the surface of the sun, that it gains thereby additional strength.’’ TASIMETRIC OBSERVATIONS. As this eclipse is the first in which any attempt has been made to measure the heat of the solar corona, Dr. Edison’s report to Dr. Draper on this sub- ject is here quoted in full. He says: “The instrument which I used at Rawlins, Wyoming, during the solar eclipse of July 29th, 1878, for the purpose of measuring the heat of the sun’s corona, was devised by me a short time only before that event, and the time was insufficient to give it as thorough a test as was desirable to “ascertain its full capabilities and characteristics. ‘*This instrument I have named the tasimeter, from the Greek words, tacts, extension, and perpov, measure, because primarily the effect is to measure extension of any kind. The form of instrument which T used is shown in the annexed wood cut (Fig. 2.) Fig. 2, “With this instrument was used a Thomson’s reflecting galvanometer on a tripod, having a resistance of three-fourths of an ohm. The galvanom- eter was placed in the bridge wire of a Wheatstone balance, two of the branches of which had constant resistances of ten ohms.cach, while of the Barker.| : 108 {Novy. 15, other two one had a constant of three ohms, and the other contained the tasimeter which was adjusted by means of the screw to three ohms. When thus balanced, if the strip of vulcanized rubber A (seen in Fig. 3), placed between the fixed point B and the carbon button C, was exposed to heat from any source, it expanded, placing pressure upon the carbon button, decreasing in this way its resistance and destroying the balance ; thus allow- ing a current to pass through the bridge wire containing the galvanometer, the amount of this current of course being proportional to the expansion of the rubber and to the strength of the battery. ‘‘The form of instrument here described was finished only two days before leaving for the west; hence, I was unable to test it. However, I set it up upon my arrival at Rawlins, but found that it was a very difficult matter to balance so delicate an instrument as a reflecting galvanometer with one cell of battery, through such small resistances. In fact, I did not succeed in balancing it at all in the usual way. Nor could it be balanced in any way until I devised a method which I may designate ‘ fractional balancing,’ when it became very easy to accomplish the result and also to increase the effect by using two cells in place of a single one. This device Fig. 5, consisted of a rheostat formed of two rows of pins. The rows were about one-half an inch apart. A wire was connected from a pin on one row toa pin on the other row and so on, so that the current had to pass through the whole length of the wire, which was No. 24 gauge and four feet long. This was used asa shunt around the galvanometer. A copper wire con- necting all the pins of one row served to reduce the resistance to zero, When the galvanometer was thus shunted, a very feeble current passed through it, If the spot of light was not at zero it was brought there by either increasing or decreasing the pressure upon the vulcanite of the tasi- meter by the adjusting nut, When thus brought to zero the copper wire of the shunt rheostat was taken off of one pin, thus increasing the resist- >. 1878.] 109 [ Barker. ance of the shunt perhaps to one-fiftieth of anohm. The spot of light was generally deflected nearly off of the scale. The light was again brought to. zero by varying the resistance of the tasimeter, and another one-half inch of wire included in the shunt, another deflection and another balance was obtained by the tasimeter. Thus by gradually increasing the delicacy of the galvanometer by increasing the resistance of the shunt and balancing at every increase, the whole of the current was allowed to pass through the galvanometer and the shunt taken off. When this point was reached the damping magnet or director was in close proximity to the case of the galvanometer. To increase its delicacy to the’ fullest extent it became necessary to raise the director to the top of the rod. This was done by raising it cautiously a quarter of an inch ata time, bringing the spot of light to zero each time by the tasimeter. ‘«In order to form some idea of the delicacy of the apparatus when thus adjusted, a preliminary experiment was made on thé evening of the 27th, with the star Arcturus. The tasimeter beirg attached to the telescope, the image of the star. was brought on the vulcanized rubber. The spot of light from the galvanometer moved to the side of heat. Aftersome minor adjustments, five uniform and successive deflections were obtained with the instrument, as the light of the star was allowed to fall on the vulcanite to produce the deflection, or was screened off to allow of a return to zero. ‘‘Tt was in this condition when the eclipse occurred. The tasimeter was placed in a double tin ease, with water at the temperature of the air between the walls. This case was secured to a Dollond telescope of four inches aperture. No eye piece was used. At the moment of totality the spot of light was slowly passing towards cold. When I withdrew a tin screen and allowed the edge of the luminous corona to fall upon the rubber, the spot of light stopped, went gradually off of the scale towards heat, its velocity accelerating as it approached the end. The time required for the light to leave the seale was from four to five seconds. **T interposed the screen and endeavored to bring the light back to zero, but I was unsuccessful. Had I known that the heat was so great I should have used a platinum strip in place of the vuleanite, and decreased the deli- cacy of the galvanometer by the approach of the | magnet. **T would then doubtless have succeeded in getting two or more read- _ ings, and afterwards by comparison with bodies of known temperature _ would have obtained a near approach to the temperature of the sun’s corona,” dale hl TELESPECTROSCOPIC OBSERVATIONS. ; My own results, obtained with an analyzing spectroscope attached to the telescope, seem to be almost unique in this eclipse. This fact must be my apology, if any be needed, for introducing here at such length, the facts of the case as contained in my report. The instruments and apparatus used in the observations were loaned for the purpose from the physical cabinet of the University of Pennsylvania. They consisted (1) of an equatorially mounted achromatic telescope of four inches aperture made by Jones of London ; (2) a direct vision astronom- Barker. ] 1 10 [Nov. 1, ical spectroscope by Merz of Munich; (3) a second direct vision spectro- scope by Hoffmana of Paris ; and (4) a pocket spectroscope by Geo. Wale & Co. Beside this spectroscopic outfit, a second four-inch achromatic ‘tele-" scope by Deliond was taken for use with the tasimeter by Dr. Edison, and a Savart, a Senarmont, and an Arago polariscope, for determining the’ polarization ef the eerona. The Merz spectroscope above mentioned is described in the “‘ Philosophical Magezine,’’ TV., xli., Feb., 1871. Itis provided with two compound direct vision prisms, of which one or both ean be used at pleasure, each consisting of five single prisms, two of flint glass — with a refracting angle of 84°, and three of crown; one of these having a’ ~ refracting angle of 84°, the ethers of 87°. The dispersive power of each ” of these compound prisms is about equal to that of two equilateral prisms — of flint glass. The instrument has a collimating and an observing tele- scope, each furnished with an object glass two-thirds of an inch in aper- ture and feur inches in focal length. The prism-tube is attached to the © collimater by twe centres, giving ita lateral motion about a line passing’ through these centres, which constitutes an axis parallel to the slit. The observing telescope is similarly attached to the tube carrying the prism. | These motions serve to alter the incidence of the rays upon the surface of the prism, and also te bring any special part of the spectrum into the mid- die of the field. The observing telescope is provided with a positive eye- piece of an equivalent focal length of one inch, and also with a ‘needle — micrometer, having an eye-piece of one-halfinch focus. The graduations - upon this micrometer are strongly cut, enabling the positions and the dis- tances of the lines measured with it to be easily read even in a faint light. The spectrescope was firmly attached to the draw tube of the equatorial telescope by means of an open frame made by Zentmayer, so that the posi- tion of the image with reference to the slit could be readily observed. The time from the date of our arrival at Rawlins until the eclipse, was © oceupied in setting up the instruments, in getting them into adjustment, | and in practice with them. It was found that with only one of the com~-~ pound prisms of the Merz spectroscope, the slit being placed radially, it. was easy to observe the lines © and F reversed in the chromosphere, and ' also the bright line D, On the morning of the day of the eclipse, the © solar edge was examined for protuberances, in order to locate them in ad- vance of totality. But a single ene was noticed, this being on the south: ° western edge of the sun. As the time of first contact approached, the” spectroscope was removed and a paper screen was attached to the draws — tube, an image of the sun being formed on this screen by means of the’ eye-piece ; thus enabling the time of this contact to be approximately de- termined and the subsequent progress of the eclipse to be conveniently observed. No spots were seen under these circumstances, though this” could hardly have been expected since the solar image was so small, scarcely three inches in diameter, unless the spots were of large size. As - the time of second contact drew near, the spectroscope was replaced upon | the equatorial, Since you deemed it of importance to pay special attention > to the oxygen lines in the vieinity of G, the micrometer of this instrament — 1878.] 11 { Barker. was, at your suggestion, so adjusted that one of its needle-points rested on the hydrogen line near G and the other on the line known as h. After the last, ray of sunlight had disappeared, I took a few seconds of the precious time to observe the eclipse with the naked eye. .The moon appeared in- tensely black, surrounded by a pinkish halo, extending to about two-fifths of a lunar diameter from the limb, and occupying the entire cireumfer- ence. At two points this halo was expanded into radial streamers, one of which had parallel sides with a deeply indented or swallow-tailed end, ex- tending westward of the sun and apparently lying in the ecliptic ; the other appeared single, was on the eastern edge, and was inclined twenty degrees or, more to the north of the ecliptic. The former of these streamers was traced to a distance of about a lunar diameter and a half from the edge, the latter to a somewhat less distance. No structure could be seen in the halo, but in the streamers traces of parallel rays appeared. to be present. The amount of light emitted by the corona was a surprise to me. . Preparations had. been made for using artificial light for reading the circles, but this was found not to be at all necessary. The amount of lightseemed to be nearly or quite equal to that given by the moon when ten daysold. Noprotuberances were scen with the naked eye; nor were any streamers observed, other than those already described. A glance at the eclipsed sun was then taken through the finder of the equatorial. The magnifying power being low, the corona presented much the same appearance as to the naked eye; but the streamers showed much more distinct evidences of a radiated structure and a pale rosy protuberance was observed on the south-western edge of the dark disk, . This was undoubtedly the same prominence which was observed previous. to.totality, Turning my attention now to the spectroscope, upon the slit of. which the coronal.image had already been brought by means of the finder, the slit being placed radially, the first glance through the insttument showed me ® bright, but an absolutely continuous spectrum, The region under examination. was of course, that portion of the spectrum which had been placed before totality between the needle- points of the micrometer. Totally unprepared for so unexpected a result, I moved the observing telescope so, as to bring the green portion of the spectrum into the field, expecting cer- tainly to see 1474,K, and by the appearance of this line to determine whether my instrument was out of adjustment ; and if it were, to adjust it again. But no bright line was there; the green region appeared as continuous as the blue. I then gradually closed the slit—which had been previously ad- justed on the solar spectrum so that the line D appeared nebulous on its edges—thinking that I might in this way improve the definition, but with no better resuits; no bright lines could be seen. To my great surprise, - however, when the slit was thus narrowed, the region which was then under examination, that extending from } to G, appeared. filled with dark lines on the brighter background, these dark lines being readily recognized from their general appearance as the solar lines of Fraunhofer. Still intent on getting bright lines, I opened the slit again gradually, moved the observ- ing telescope over the entire length of the spectrum from red to violet, re- Barker. | 1 12 [Nov. 15, peating the operation three times and varying the width of the slit from time to time in each region ; but not a single bright line could'be detected . I then requested you to come and take a glance through my spectroscope, as had been previously agreed ; saying that although I could see dark lines and a continuous spectrum, I was unable to detect a single bright line, and knew not what to make of it. You were then looking at the eclipse through your ingenious little telespectroscope of two inches aperture. You’ came to my instrument, looked at the spectrum, moved the observing telescope over its whole length and remarked that the results in my spectroscope agreed entirely with those in yours, and that in both the spectrum appeared continuous, showing no bright lines whatever. My mind being thus relieved, I took my place again at the spectroscope, and this time, placing the slit tangential to the moon’s limb, I moved the observing telescope from end to end of the spectrum, opening and closing the slit at intervals ; but the spectrum appeared as continuous as before. Again the image was adjusted so that the slit was once more radial; and this time on a still different portion of the corona. On examining again the spectrum, no bright lines appeared, except once for an instant, when the slit passed over the small chromospheric prominence already noticed. Warned by Mrs. Draper’s clear and distinct counting that the precious 165 seconds had two-thirds gone, I decided to devote the time still remaining to a more careful observation of the dark Fraunhofer lines. Now, for the first time, as I adjusted the width of the slit and its position on the corona with more care, I observed that these lines did not pass clear across the field, but were of a length corresponding to the width of the coronal image on the slit. At the base of the spectrum, which corresponded to the base of the corona, they appeared bright and sharp; :certainly quite as much so as in the light of the moon similarly condensed ; though the con- tinuous spectrum which formed their background was relatively brighter than in moonlight. There was no difficulty in identifying them as Fraunhofer lines from their general appearance and position ; but some of them could be identified beyond question. Such were 6 and F, which were especially distinct, D, E and G, which were considerably less so, They faded gradu- ally out from the base of the spectrum upward, appearing to end where the continnous spectrum of the corona was limited above. While thus employed, a flash of sunlight told us that totality had ended and that the solar eclipse of 1878 was over. In discussing the results of the spectroscopic observations which: have now been detailed, I am, in the first place, quite at a loss to account for the fact that no bright lines were seen by me, notwithstanding the persistent efforts made to get them. The failure to observe them can be accounted for, as it would seem, only on the ground that with the dispersive power employed, the bright lines were too faint to be seen on the much brighter background of the continuous spectrum, The lessons to be drawn from these spectroscopic observations appear to be few and simple. The absence of bright lines, or at least of any which 1578. } 113 {Barker. were/at.all brilliant, proves clearly the absence in the solar coronal region of any considerable mass of incandescent gas or vapor; which shining by its own light would of course give a bright line spectrum. The presence of Fraunhofer lines in the coronal spectrum shows conclusively the pres- ence of reflected sunlight in the light of the corona and goes to establish the theory long ago suggested, that masses of meteoric matter raining down upon the solar surface from all directions, reflected to us the light of the sun and were therefore the essential cause of the coronal phenomena. And, finally, the fact of the increased brightness of the continuous spec- trum, as compared with the intensity of the dark lines of Fraunhofer, goes to strengthen the probability that there is still other light in the corona which comes to us from the incandescent liquid or solid matter of these incandescent meteoric masses. These conclusions, deduced very simply from my own spectroscopic results, agree completely, I am happy to find, with those drawn from your most excellent photographs, as well as from the ingenious heat-measurements of Dr. Edison and the polariscopie deter- minations of Dr. Morton. GENERAL CONCLUSION. The general conclusion then, arrived at by the observations of our party upon this eclipse—a conclusion to which all the results point with singu- lar unanimity—is that the solar corona consists of a mass of meteoric bodies falling in from space upon the solar surface, which meteors ‘being intensely heated by the resistance encountered at their enor- mous velocity, as well as by radiation from the sun, become highly luminous, and emit a light which gives a continuous spectrum. More- “over, this mass of incandescent meteors is shown not to be equally extended in all directions around the sun, but appears to be ellip- soidal or at least spheroidal in form. That the larger part of the coronal light comes from the incandescence of these meteors, there can apparently, be but little doubt. But a considerable. portion of it appears to have quite a distinct origin, and to be due to the reflection of solar light by these solid or liquid masses. Hence the appearance of the dark solar or Fraunhofer lines in the spectrum. A third, and in this eclipse an extremely small portion of the light of the corona, would seem to be due to incandescent gaseous matter, either injected into it from below, or produced from the meteoric masses themselves by the intense heat. This portion it is which gives the bright line spectrum, as feeble in this eclipse as it was strong in previous ones, Of the material composing this gas, there is yet, as it would appear, no indication. From what has now been narrated, it must be conceded that the Draper Eclipse Expedition was singularly and exceptionally fortunate. No small part of this good fortune is due, as we believe, to the courtesy and liberality of the railroad and express companies over whose routes either the party ‘or their instruments traveled. I desire to mention especially, in this con- “nection, Col. Thos. A. Scott and Mr. Frank Thomson, of the Pennsylvania PROC. AMER. PHILOS. 8OC. xvitI. 102.0. PRINTED JAN. 27, 1879. Barker.] 114 {Nov 15, Railroad ; Mr. Henry Keep and Mr. M. L. Sykes, of the Chicago and North- western Railroad ; Mr. Sidney Dillon and Mr. Jay Gould, of the Union Pacific Railroad ; Mr. William H. Fargo, of the American Express Com- pany ; Mr. Frederic Lovejoy, of Adams’ Express Company, and the Super- intendent of the Union Pacific Express Company. The cordial appre- ciation by these gentlemen of the fact that the work in which we were en- gaged was one of a purely scientific character, and as such was one to which every reasonable facility should be furnished, was as gratifying to us as it was honorable to them. I should fail to do exact justice were Ito omit mention of the service rendered us by Mr. J. J. Dickey, the Superintendent of the Union Pacific Telegraph ; Mr. E. Dickenson, Superintendent of the Laramie Division; Mr. R. M. Galbraith, Superintendent of the Repair Shops at Rawlins ; Major Thornburgh, Commanding Officer at Fort Fred Steele, with Capt. Bisbee and Surgeon De Witt, his associates in the service ; Mr. Lawrence Hayes, of the Railroad Hotel, and to Mr. J. B. Silvis, of the photographic car. ‘‘ Of the citizens of Rawlins,”’ says Dr. Draper, ‘‘it is only necessary to say that we never even put the lock on the door of the observatory, and not a thing was disturbed or misplaced during our ten days of residence, though we had many visitors.” The agreeable party, the pleasant surroundings, the charming weather, the kindness of friends, and above all, the capital success of the observa- tions, make the Draper Eclipse Expedition an exceedingly pleasant memory to us all. Notes on a series of Analyses of the Dolomitic Limestone Rocks of Cumber- land Oounty, Pa., made by Messrs. Hartshorne and Hartranft in the Laboratory of the Second Geological Survey of Pennsylwania. By J. P. Lesley, State Geologist. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, October 18th, 1878.) At a meeting of the American Philosophical Society, Dec. 20, 1877, I described the progress of an elaborate investigation which I had instituted for the purpose of determining whether or not any fixed or rational order of deposition could be observed in our Lower Silurian, or Siluro-Cambrian Magnesian Formation (No. IT). I selected a fine exposure made by the rock-cut of the Northern Central Railroad, on the west bank of the Susquehanna river, opposite Harrisburg, where a consecutive series of the beds, all conformable and all dipping regularly about 30° to the southward, afforded a good opportunity for col- lecting two sets of specimens for analysis, one at the bottom and the other at the top of the cut; and great care was taken to survey the cut, mark the beds (from 1 to 115) and range the specimens in two parallel series ; so 1878.) 115 [Lesley- that any lack. of homogeneousness in, any bed might be detected by analy- ses of two specimens taken from places in the edge of the bed from 5 to 30 feet apart, according to the depth of the cut, and sometimes by the se- lection of a third and intermediate specimen, many of the analyses of indi- vidual specimens being also repeated. -The investigation was continued throughout the winter by Mr. Henry Hartshorne, and completed during the summer by Mr. Hartranft; and I now find myself able to bring some of the results to the notice of the Society in the form of tables, (1) of analyses, and (2) of averages. At a future time I will be able to carry the discussion of averages still further, and can then venture to base upon them some hypothetical conclusions of great interest, to geologists who occupy themselves with the problem of the genesis of our limestone deposits, Table I, gives the whole series of analyses made ; but includes only the determinations of Carbonate of Lime, Carbonate of Magnesia, and Insolu- ble Matter; omitting the determinations of oxide of iron, alumina, sul- phur, phosphorus and carbon, This table shows to the eye, without need of a diagram, the remarkable alternations of limestone beds with dolomitoid beds throughout the series. TABLE I. Analyses of specimens taken from railroad cuttings opposite Harrisburg ; tn two series: one at railroad grade ; the other near the top of the cut. Nore, when the analysis was repeated, with slight difference, the average is given; but the instances of this are few. LIME CARB. MAGNESIA CARB. INsOL. MATTER. BRD Grade. Top. Grade, Top. Grade. Top. 1 58.35 57.10 36,80 38,25 4.60 4.00 2 ES 55.60 56.20 88.50 89.75 5.30 8.80 (a) 8a 89.90 92.00 3.60 4.00 5.70 4.10 4 3.90 97.05 1.80 1.85 8.80 1.40 (b) 5 96.40 97.20 1.40 0.70 1.90 2.10 6 95.50 97.60 1.40 1.30 1.50 1.10 7 87.10 87.40 8.60 3.70 9.70 9.10 (c) 8 82.30 87.45 14.50 7.50 3.10 3.90 (e) (d) 9 68.30 67.60 24.80 27.00 5.50 5.40 ee (A) 90.70 90.40 8.05 8.15 1.90 1.70 11 97.60 96.70 1.80 1.30 1.00 2.20 12 66.00 75.80 82.40 19.85 1.60 2.50. 13 © 96.80 97.20 2.30 1.85 1.20 1.40 14 95.85 83.70 2.40 Hye 1.80 3.40 15 92.75 97.30 4.45 Fo 3.40 1.80 (a) (3b) (67.20) (66 59) (8.20) (4.10) (26.60) (25.30) (d) (flint in 5) 6.50 9.30 0.80 0.30 90.80 89. (ec) Dup. (1) 72.15 : 21.70 6.30 (d) Intermed. (9) 63.60 30.85 6.10 (e) Caleite (9) 88.70 88.60 0.80 = s = = —] 9.90 [Oct. 18, 116 Lesley. ] sssee o > m= ors RASSIO NMiNHH HBOSHRH NMOHOA NON ALA QMONra MRtreS FONDS HHsdts NMestsso SHSHH HrMRSS BOErHTR BONO S HEesors a ins) _ mom rs es wae —i eg or awe | Fe Oe Ow be Pate be be oe Odes VIR em Se ae 8 ete arene 104 ya = Seco o ° 12 SS 9 SIRBE DOORO 1 HS Rona ADDON’ RAMDNS GHRSr arort Nast xtics PH Or os SOR SSIS RIS Sister AFR OR EPeAsH ASrns 33, 3S a AUS BA a> tet SAD TES o> Lace Q” Roe a sa Ha rSoR WHS CDOAr rH NHD Oise ewod reir MAarMOR SrionrD> of ee ime ou R Q fort et rm OO 8 > ed oO oO onrmrir osceoso i. 19 S ~ ) a OE Fn, £8 8). ey 6450 Se. See ae, ee ee” Eee eee. ee ae Oe i Oe ee ee 6 ee OR Oe Cr BY Mr ee we ee eee ee 87.7 i] ee Ph ~ . IIR 2 a pe EG EE Se 5 edeih( eee all pk. eo Ck aiies BEESES ESS2S SEnSS SEREE ZSESS EGSLE GSSES SSLSE for} RQ =] i> or i] SOSSR ARRAR RARRR BZRRSAR BERR FASTA SSSSE SABES a“ : — aa — ony “->~ Ete S$. -€5 See gs from the record, (m) It is needful in the averages to suppose these brackets, But they are absent (n) Upper part leas magnesian, This balances 4, (/) Upper specimen evidently abnormal; of bed non-homogenous. (g) Calcite (}) Upper part more magnesian, This balances 49, (Jj) Abnormal (magnesian in the upper part). (tf) Abnormal (magnesian in the upper part.) (k) Abnormal (flinty in the upper part), (h) Abnormal (fiinty ? in the upper part ?). [Lesley. 117 1878.) - DO NH MRNA D DBAAAAP ONMOret Dowons tHoatcer Coram ovotesa DOror- Ca Se at eee ee est ar ee a ee ot ee es Bae es Oe ee ee i eee lo a ee ar ee RR a ee ASHDSnR NROTRe HoOsHS SAetoiis SHSGR H¥Asat SGsoss Homan rsicsor PRVIT ARSION. HONAD NOMOH OHMHSOH KBHEHS BOHNHR ANOSHDS Bros PGs SHDESROS wWrxisdecd Sooo Svtaoss estndc SaaS S SHH HSrra RAAMD DHOSSH OCNnAOHH HPOSOONNQ SPOHrS SCHCHRNH BHT OH BPAnHoSo NBWOAAQI+ > ONS ee Se ie ee! ee ene Oe Le eee Se ee i en a ee ee ie eee! 8 ee Ae” Oh ee Cel) ae ek ee BABS HSSSe Boke ri Wririried Sriget sorsd ASrinri Griggs cts cued RHHOR WAONA NOW HHOSOD CHAZ SPHONA HKHSKH ant maowtaw aed rood SSS Brdrn oo SIS SSOMrS HHHSBH HHdtnHn Aransas + RR Ba ASR 35 ES alt) a= eS a ny ra oO SSSSE S5RRE ESESBE BSSES SESRS SFRGER SSSSR SESSB GESES Para PE oe Ser Ra oer ae ees a a ow al RR. ee at Th ae ee ee yh a Se ee er i “ae Se se Ee Se it eo ae (p, (gq), (7) Local, extra quantity of magnesia in lower specimen, (s), (¢) Excessive amount of magnesia in lower specimen. (o) Abnormal amount of flint in lower specimen. (u) Abnormal amount of flint in upper specimen. Lesley.] 118 [Oct. 18, 101 98.2 98.8 1.2 0.8 0.6 0.3 102 64.4 60 4 30.5 34.2 4.3 48 103 94.7 93.1 4.6 48 1.0 1.4 104 80.2 79.5 13.2 14.7 5.6 4.3 105 98.2 96.9 1.2 1.6 0.6 1.1 106 63.4. 63.3 31.6 31.7 3.8 41 107 98.2 99.0 1.6 0.5 0.3 0.4 108 65.0 65.0 29.1 29.6 5.1 5.0 109 94.8 86.9 2.5 4.3 1.8 7.7 110 73.1 64.3 16.5 22.3 9.1 11.6 111 94.5 .. 88.4 2.7 8.3 1.9 2.6 112 54.4 54.4 35.2 36.2 8.4 7.7 113 98.1 76.2 0.9 3.7 1.0 18.2 114 64.6 55.4 26.2 33.8 8.5 9.7 115 95.1 97.7 1.9 0.9 1.7 1.4 Without discussing in detail, at present, this instructive table, several things are evident at a glance, viz: that 1. Alternate strata of limestone and dolomite make up the mass. 2. The dolomite layers carry the most insoluble materials, as a rule. 3. Specimens taken from the top and bottom of the cut (thirty feet apart, or less) differ sometimes as notably from one another as specimens taken from different beds but, as a rule, each layer is nearly homogenous, so far as two or three analyses can show such a rule. 4. Not one of the so-called dolomite layers has enough carbonate of magnesia to make it a true lithological dolomite. They are all, merely more or less magnesian limestones. 5. Carbonate of magnesia is not absent from any bed in the whole series ; but in an extensive range (such as from No. 84 to No. 115), out of thirty-two beds twelve show less than two per cent., three show less than three per cent., and one goes up to four and six-tenths per cent. The re- maining sixteen beds, alternating with other sixteen with great regularity, carry from thirty-six to fourteen per cent., nine of them ranging between thirty-six and thirty, five between thirty and twenty-five, one sinking to seventeen, and one to fourteen per cent. The alternation in these thirty-two beds may be represented to the eye thus : ne pat Sad Nos, of Beds selected from the Series, 35 and over. | 30 fe : fede h] BTUs) BO ls. OR) .. POBI | OB. aah P98 25 as 84 20 zi é 10 g¢ hf oe 0 * _* |. .}85, 86}...| 88}. ..|901...}99]...) 04]... 1196 | 99 1878.] 119 [Lesley. Per cent. . of Gath. Mag. Nos. of Beds selected from the Series. 35 and over.|...|... wns lees LialeGbectse <1 OO oe] ~~ «1-9 4012 30 id 400). 1 OBE. . VS des, TOS ey .4800) Fe). SE. . eae (114 25 ee ’ 20 Py Y | ( 15 “ welecslecislagelecsleebipielen «fab epee 110 10 ae WPA Re bon fs SS 104 Bs iy* «cole ale[ on (408 | o « »..(2001...],..1...(1051;..11071...|100]:..]111)...]118).. [105 It is especially remarkable that so few of the beds occupy an intermedi- ate position, chemically considered, between nearly fixed extreme limits of lime and magnesia. TABLE 2. In this table the beds are grouped by fives, and averaged. LIME CARBONATE. MAGNESIA CARB, | INSOL. MATTER. Bottom, Top. Bottom, Top, Bottom. Top. Beds ito 5) 394.15 399.50 82.10 84.55 | 21.30 15.40 6, 6. 10 | 428,90 480.45 52.85 47.65 | 21.70 21.20 ee 11 6 15 | 448.40 450.70 43.35 35.85 9.00 11.30 "16 20°) 454.10 411.80 37.30 75.10 7.80 12.60 “21 “ 25 899.00 395.45 78.50 80.10 | 21.90 23.10 “¢ 626 ** 30| 398.45 401.00 72.25. ..59.25. |.27.50. 38,94 se 81 “© 85 | = 403.80 397.35 62.20 68.55 | 30.80 29.90 86 -“ 40 | 404.80 = 406.80 77.60 73.85 | 15.50 17.00 AL S45 | «6480.10 = 405.65 62.50 = 69.95 | 15.40 23.50 « 646. § 50 | 873.10 382.30 98.40 95.50 | 23.90. 18.40 1 «=50 | 4129.80 4081.00 | 666.55 690.35 (194.80 211.25 Average. ...... 82.59% 81.62%) 13.38% 18.81%) 3.99% 4.22% 434.5 436.1 43.0 43.0 22.0 + 20.9 - 07 29.7 * 394.1 403.9 82.6 60.5 32.0 re 400.7 410.6 72.4 73.5 3.4 ac 95 | 376.5 871.7 95.8 92.1 34.1 ¢ 96 —100 | 391.5 391.4 80.8 82.0 25.2 21.8 ¢ 51—100 | 3908.4 4015.3 779.5 708.1 (283.6 260.7 Average....... 78.17% 80.31%) 15.59% 14.16%) 5.67% 5.21% * 101—105 | 435.7 428.7 50.7 56.1 12.1 11.9 ‘© 106—110 | 394.5 878.5 81.3 87.4 20.1 28.8 © 111—115 | 406.7 372.1 66.9 82.9 21.5 39.6 © 101—115 | 1236.9 1179.3 198.9 226.4 53.7 80.3 Average..... +--| 80.46% 78.62%| 13.26% 15.09%! 3.58% 5.85% Lesley. ] ] 20 (Oct, 18, Beds 1— 50 | 4129.80 4081.00 | 666.55 690.35 (194.80 211.25 ** ~51—100 3908.40 4015.30 | 779.50 708.10 (283.60 260.70 © 100 —115 | 1236.90 1179.30 | 198.90 226.40 | 53.70 980.30 © 1—115 | 9275.10 9275.60 1644.95 1624.85 582. 10 552.25 Grand average _of 115 beds... 80.655 % 80.668%| 14.30% 14.13%| 4.627% 4.802 % To show how worthless small groups are for analytical purposes it is only necessary to combine the top and bottom specimens of ten beds, and notice the absence of any marked regularity, thus: TABLE 3. Beds; 1 toe? 23. L. C. 82.40 M. C, 13.33 I. M. 3.98 Beds 11 to 20...... 83.25 9.57 2.03 Beds 21 to 30..... ‘ 79.69 14.50 ‘ 8.57 Beds 31 to 40...... 80.63 14.11 é 4.66 Beds 41 to 50...... 79.55 16.32 4.06 but, on the other hand when grand averages of fifty beds are taken, a pic- ture is obtained of the pretty uniform distribution of the two carbonates throughout at least this part of the formation, thus: TABLE 4. Average of 100 specimens (taken from top and bottom*) of fifty beds. Beds ito 50.... 82.15 13.57 i 4.11 Beds 51 to 100.... 79.54 14.87 j 5.44 Beds 101 to 115.... 79.54 14.17 4.47 Beds 1t0115.... 80.662 14.215 4.715. I shall now give a specimen of the results to be obtained by grouping the low magnesian beds together and the high magnesian beds together and for the present leave the discussion of the data presented above to others. I select 14 limestone (A) beds alternating, with singular regularity, with 15 magnesian beds (B, distinguished by black-letter) viz. : beds 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 113, 114, 115; and the result is as follows : TABLE 5. Lime Carbonate. Magnesian Carb, Insol. Matter, Bolttom*® ° Top.* Bottom, Top. Bottom. Top. (A) 96,62 93.47 1.97 2.58 1.24 8.57 (B) 63,83 63.00 27.98 28.52 7.25 7.24 Of the 164 percentages here represented, five are abnormal, as may be noticed by consulting the last part of Table 1. These are included, how- ever, in Table 5. If we combine all the bottom and top analyses of Table 5, without excepting any, we get the following general average :— * Not of the bed, but of the R.R. cutting, 1878.] 121 (Lesley. TABLE 6. ~ Lime Carb. Magnesia Carb. Insol. Matter. (A) -. 95,05 2.27 2.40 - (B) 63.41 28.22 7.24 but if we throw out the 5 abnormal analyses, we get the slightly different general average :— ‘ TABLE 7. Lime Carb. Magnesia Carb. Insol, Matter. (A) 95.77 2.06 1.42 (B) 63.41 28.22 7,24 and this must be taken as the best expression of the chemical distinction between the purer and the more magnesian limestone layers of our Siluro- Cambrian (Calciferous-Sandstone) Formation, No. II, which we can make at present. ‘It shows plainly enough that the magnesian limestones are very far from being typical dolomites. ‘It shows also that the presence of magnesia at the expense of lime is connected normally with a high percentage of alumina silicate. _ This, it seems to me, goes one step towards settling the mechanical theory of the origin of the magnesian carbonate on a sound basis. Although we may have to seek long for the source of the sediment, as a whole it must have a source which is common also to the clay. Difficulties multiply upon us in studying such data. No satisfactory ex- planation of the bedplate structure of the mass has yet been offered. If the deposit be in the main mechanical and not chemical, it is strange that stich sharp distinctions between layer and layer should have been made in the bed ofa deep ocean. It is still more strange, that (on this hypothesis) strongly marked local abnormal analyses should be encountered. This leads me to say that the above investigation is imperfect because carried on in a vertical plane only. Tt should now be repeated in a hori- zontal plane. It is desirable to learn whether the geographical changes may not be great enough to convert a limestone bed here into a dolomitoid there, half'a mile (or perhaps 100 yards) distant. If this prove true (and the possibility of it is indicated by the abnormal analyses), then a new difficulty arises in the way of a sound theory of the origin of the bed plates ; and confuses still more any mechanical theory of the sediments. Finally, it is evident from Table 4, that if we take 50 beds together and compare them with the 50 lying next beneath them, in other words, when we compare together two masses of the formation one or two hundred feet. . thick,—it is evident that, in one long age of deposit, more clay and magnesia were present in the ocean than in the preceding (or succeeding) long age. We have then a large curve of variation, including many small curves, much more strongly marked than in the large one ; like the et curves superposed upon the annual path of the moon. Were it not reckless to-hazard a suggestion that the source of the mag- nesian element is to be sought for in some theory of the ejection and distri- bution of volcanic dust, so that each short time of volcanic disturbance PROC. AMER. PHILOS. 80C, XVIII. 103. P. PRINTED FEB. 25, 1879. Lesley.] 1 2 2 [Oct. 18, 1878, has left its own record in a dolomite bed,—we might proceed one step’ further and find in the larger differences indicia of ages of greater or less volcanism. Daubrée in his ‘‘ Synthetical Studies and Experiments on Metamorphism, &c.,”’ says (see Smithsonian Report for 1861, page 269) : “We know that certain dolomites result from the transformation of limestone. This epigeny may be explained by the action of combinations of magnesia or carbonate of lime. There is, however, nothing to prove that this transformation into dolomite has always been produced by the same agents, and that the dolomite of Campo-Longo, for instance, with its tourmalines, corundums and various minerals, is to be assimilated with the dolomite of the other parts of the Alps and of Nice, or those which are near the deposits of calamine in Belgium. | But there are dolomites, and this is the case with the greatest numbers situated in regular beds, which are often horizontal, constituting very ex- tensive geognostic formations. When they contain remains of testaceous mollusca the shell has disappeared ; they are often crystalline and riddled with holes in such a way as to suggest a substitution. It is possible that the principal part of these last dolomites was directly precipitated. But on account of the disappearance of the shells we must admit, with Elie de Beaumont, that this second case allies itself with the first, by the reaction which the medium has exerted on the matter precipitated, a reaction of such a kind that the carbonate of lime has disappeared. Indeed we notice that pure limestone never alternates with them.”’ This is certainly not the case in respect of the 115 beds of our section ; for certainly the limestone beds of Table 7 (A), page 121 above, with only 2p. c. carb. mag. and 1.4 p. ec. insol. matter, have a right to be classed with pure limestones. The disappearance of shells by solution is not one of the noticeable fea- tures of the limestone strata under discussion in this paper ; and they do. not, as a rule, exhibit any cavities assignable to such a cause. They are non-fossiliferous, not because of the destruction of fossils, but because of the absence of large forms of life in the original sediments. The researches of Mr. E, T. Hardman, of the Geological Survey of Ire- jand, published in No. 7 of the Proceedings of the R. Irish Academy, Vol. II, Ser. II, Jan. 1877, valuable as they are, give us little assistance, be- cause his specimens were taken from the walls of caverns in cavernous limestones, where metasomatic action was in open activity. In the Jahrbuch der K. K. Geol. Reichsanstalt, XXV, 1875, p. 293, MM. Doelter and Hérnes discuss the subject and assign 1, to the slightly magnesian limestones a directly organic origin; 2. to sporadic normal dol- omites a Jater metamorphosis by percolation ; 8. to the largest part of the dolomitoid rocks an original organic origin, with subsequent change of the fossils by magnesia salts, during or shortly after deposition, and still later local lixiviation and concentration, Feb. 7, 1879.] 123 [Chase. The Philosophy of Christianity. By Pliny Earle Chase, LL.D., Pro- fessor of Philosophy in Haverford College. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, February 7th, 1879.) Job xxviii, 12-28. Philosophy is ‘‘ the love of wisdom.” The Philosophy of Christianity is the love of Divine Wisdom. Its cor- ner-stone is the maxim of John: ‘‘In the beginning was the Word, and the Word was with God, and the Word was God.”’ The capacity and the love of investigation are both due to the fact that ‘there is a Spirit in man: and the inspiration of the Almighty giveth [him] understanding.”’ In many of our colleges there is a literary society, in which the requisite qualification for membership is distinguished scholarship. It is designated by the three cabalistic letters 2 & A, which are the initials of the Greek words, gthocugia Siov xvfepyy4tys, ‘philosophy the guide of life.’’ The Christian philosopher, while recognizing the importance of correct guidance in matters pertaining to our present transitory life, attaches the greatest value to the life everlasting. He therefore accepts as his highest rule of faith and practice, both for time and for eternity, the saying of his Master : “this is life eternal, that they might know thee, the only true God, and Jesus Christ, whom thou has sent.’’ Not simply that they might believe, but that they might know ; that the eternal verities of life and immortality have been brought to light through a divinely appointed and divinely anointed Messenger, so that ‘‘ he may run that readeth’’ them. This claim may seem presumptuous to those who have been accustomed to look upon physical science as the only guide to certainty, and who have thought of religious belief as the result of education and circumstance, as something beyond our control, something for which we are in no way accountable and which is, therefore, of little comparative consequence. But the Christian, aware of the influence of belief upon character, feels that there are many things to be feared from faulty belief, while there is nothing to be feared from the clear and absolute knowledge of truth. The Apostle to the Gentiles exhorted the brethren to ‘‘ prove all things ; hold fast that which is good.’’ He did not, however, limit himself to ‘‘ things seen ’’ or to logical deductions from the temporal experience in which all men alike participate, although he showed himself to be a formidable an- tagonist in every arena of disputation. He saw that the search for truth may be prosecuted in two directions : first, in the direction of dependence, under a teachable spirit, waiting and seeking for enlightenment, and re- warded by the satisfaction of religious want; second, in the direction of independence or self-assertion, under a more haughty and confident spirit, forgetful of the sources as well as of the limits of knowledge, devising philosophic or scientific systems. In the field of inquiry to which he was especially devoted, he admonished the followers of that which is good to Chase.] 124 [Feb. 7, ‘rejoice ever more. Pray without ceasing. In everything give thanks. * * * Quench not the spirit. Despise not prophesyings.”’ These different directions of investigation give differences of character to the results of investigation. Philosophy is not religion ; neither of these important pursuits can fill the place of the other; each may, however, help the other. Philosophy is a study, religion is an instinct ; philosophy is theoretical, religion is practical ; philosophy is a doctrine, religion is an experience. A religious philosophy is better than a godless philosophy, because it looks at truth under more varied relations. A philosophical re- ligion is better than a fanatical religion, because it is in harmony with all the mental faculties. But a philosophy which seeks, on the authority of a supernatural revelation, to fetter the intellectual interpretation of the physical universe, narrows the mind, while it checks the intellectual and moral progress which are important ends of religious teaching ; a religion which is limited to the acceptance of philosophical inferences, may satisfy an indolent esthetic curiosity, but it lacks the earnestness and enthusiasm of a living faith which impels its possessor to a steadfast continuance in well-doing, a faith which shrinks from no obstacle and welcomes martyr- dom in preference to a surrender of its convictions. “‘The fear of the Lord is the beginning of wisdom.’’ This truth was recognized by Auguste Comte, the advocate of so-called Positivism, when he taught that intellectual development is, first, theological ; next, meta- physical ; and lastly, positive. A thousand years before the Christian era, David and Solomon had taught the Jews, and Buddha had taught the Hindoos, the vital doctrine which Comte distorted and corrupted, but they were notlike Comte, so foolish as to remove the corner-stone after building the superstructure. They did not believe that the science of phenomena was more positive than the knowledge of God and the knowledge of prin- ciples, or that a system, which was founded in error and which continually added error to error, could finally culminate in ‘positive ’’ and unques- tionable truth. Five hundred years after those early sages had directed the attention of lovers of wisdom to the beginning of wisdom, the disciples of Zoroaster in Persia, of Confucius in China, and of Pythagoras in Greece, participated in the wide-spread reformatory movement, which accompanied the restora- tion of Jehovah-worship at Jerusalem and the settlement of the Old Testa- ment canon under Ezra. They prepared the way for Socrates, who, like Pythagoras, shrank from the seeming arrogance which was involved in the title ‘‘sophist,’’ or wisest, and claimed to be merely a ‘‘ philosophos,’’ or lover of wisdom, Eyen the sophists generally regarded theology as the highest science, Socrates, agreeing with them in this estimate, believed himself to be a special ambassador of God to the citizens of Athens, acting under the continual guidance of a daimen, or divine influence, which kept him from falling into error, Another semi-millenium beheld the birth, in Bethlehem of Judea, of a teacher whose words were received, by his disciples, as coming with an 1879.] 125 [Chase. authority such as had never been known before. Claiming to be the anointed leader for whom the Jews had long been looking, representing his mission to be the fulfilment of “ the law,’’ which was “ashadow of good things to come, and not the very image of the things,’’ he sought not to destroy aught that was good or true in previous systems. Still pointing to God as the source of all truth and all power, still finding the highest wis- dom in the great truths of religion, he counted all earthly knowledge and all earthly possessions as dross in comparison with the heavenly inherit- ance. ‘For what shall it profit a man, if he shall gain the whole world, and lose his own soul ?’’ We thus see that in all the most highly civilized nations of antiquity the wisest men, almost without exception, believed in some means of commu- nication between man and his Maker, and looked upon the ministers of re- ligion as the special recipients of divine oracles. The true followers of Jesus of Nazareth have uniformly claimed that their system of religion is the highest system that has ever been promulgated, appealing both to the intrinsic excellence of its doctrines and to the results of their lissemination for evidence that their claims are well-grounded. They may, therefore, naturally regard the Philosophy of Christianity as the highest of all phi- losophies, and as the most profitable study to which human attention can be directed. Christ himself, although he taught ‘‘as one that had authority, and not as the scribes,’’ gave continual evidence of great personal modesty and humility. Although never derogating in the slightest degree, from the conscious dignity of his divine mission, he often rejected the flattering tributes with which his disciples sought to honor him, directing them to the Father whose will he came to accomplish. He did not even attempt to found a church or to frame a consistent system of doctrines during the time of his own ministry, but he left his hearers to make such application of his teachings as would best satisfy their various individual needs and promote their spiritual growth. The wisdom belonged to him; the philosophy to his disciples. His gospel, ‘‘ good tidings of great joy,’’ was the announce- ment of a Saviour, who should ‘save his people from their sins.’’ His pur- pose was neither to destroy nor to change the divine methods of education, but to fulfil typical prophecies; to throw a stronger light upon the relation- ships of man to his Maker ; to temper personal independence by a clearer sense of personal responsibility ; to communicate a ‘knowledge of the per- sonality of God, His personal interest in His intelligent creatures, and the personal help, which He vouchsafes to all who feel a need of help and are willing to accept it. Free grace and free will; the offer of all requisite guidance ; the :power of choice whether the guidance shall be received or rejected ; the voluntary assumption of all the risks which may attend a wrong exercise of the choice ; and ‘‘the way of salvation’’ through him in whom ‘‘dwelleth all the fullness of the Godhead bodily ;’’ such are some of the chief lessons of Christianity. “ Blessed are they which do hunger and thirst after righteousness ; for Chase,] 126 [Feb. 7, they shall be filled.’’ All nature teems with the evidence of physical adaptations to physical needs. Those who are spiritually enlightened will find still stronger evidence of abundant provision for all spiritual needs. The daily bread for which we are taught to pray is indeed the ‘‘bread of life,’’ the bread which will satisfy to the uttermost all the hungering both of body and of soul. The Father who feedeth the fowls of the air, providing for the wants which He has implanted in His humblest creatures, is not unmindful of the more important wants of the being who was made in His image, and who was endowed with ‘‘dominion over the fish of the sea, and over the fowl of the air, and over every living thing that moveth upon the earth.’’ All true philosophy, Christian philosophy in an especial manner, is al- ways cautious, teachable, longing for greater knowledge and greater faith, glad even to welcome reproof when it tends to the correction of mistakes. It looks towards the infinite as well as the finite, towards the absolute as well as the relative, towards the unknowable as well as the knowable, un- der a conviction that even where it cannot hope for a full satisfaction of all its longings it may gain strength by wrestling with difficulties, and with the unhesitating assurance that the higher its aims the more profitable will be its victories. While modestly acknowledging the limitations which have been imposed upon it, it answers the fundamental questions,—{a) What? (b) How? (c) Why?—by asserting (a) the possibility of knowledge, (b) by means of consciousness, (c) because the Creator of man’s consciousness desigued it for the acquisition of truth. Any intimation of a possibility that human power, human wisdom, or human design may be the highest power, or wisdom, or design in the uni- verse, or any hesitation to deny such a possibility, the Christian philoso- pher regards as an unfortunate manifestation of ignorance. Such igno- rance may be excusable in those who are honestly seeking for truth in other directions, and wherever it exists it is the part of true modesty to acknowledge it. Butif the ignorant man should try to impose his igno- rance upon others, as an insurmountable barrier to knowledge, or if the Christian should hesitate to affirm the absolute and undeniable truth of his answers to the three essential questions of philosophy, no pretense of modesty could shield him from the charge of blasphemous arrogance, Every philosophical or religious system which has any claim to consider- ation, must have its dogmas; its positive convictions; its formulated truths or articles of belief ;* its ‘‘necessary expression in ideas, of the feelings and moral and spiritual laws and conditions which the unity and relationship of heart, conscience, will and intellect in many require should be maintained,’’} Such dogmas, instead of setting aside the Baconian methods, are the most obvious results of observation and experiment and legitimate logical deduction, But while dogmas are useful, dogma- tism, in the sense of arrogant assertion and with a denial of any of the *Krauth-Fleming, Vocab. af the Philos, Sciences, 1H. W. Bellows, . ; 1879.] 127 [Chase. rights of critical investigation, is unphilosophical and suicidal. The nescient or ‘‘agnostic’’ philosopher has the same right to approach any truth whatsoever from his side, as the Christian has from his. The dis- coveries of each may become greatly helpful to the other, and by joint co- operation they may both, at last, attain to a broader generality of appre- hension than either could have gained alone. The Christian’s start, from positive knowledge and justifiable assertion, has, however, an immense advantage over his opponent’s ignorant groping in the dark and despair of satisfactory attainment. The dogmatism of science involves greater inconsistencies and is, there- fore, more unreasonable than the dogmatism of religion. The modest positivist, when he stigmatizes the popular faith as an outgrown and worth- less garment, a ‘‘ caput mortuum,”’ is urged by a spirit of the same kind as the bigot, when he bespeaks, for any form of truth-loving research, the ban of fanatical outlawry, the ‘‘odium theologicum.’’ But the modesty which doubts its own capability of attaining any higher assurance than that of sense, has no excuse for theorizing, or for claiming assent to any- thing which is not attested by undoubted sensible evidence. The bigoted enthusiasm, on the other hand, which rests in a blind unreasoning faith and believes that any contravention of its prejudices may be followed by endless misery, is impelled, as if by a natural instinct, to the immediate adoption of such measures as seem most likely to avert a calamity which it so greatly dreads. Notwithstanding all the teleological consequences which are implied in the admission, probably there are few, perhaps there are none, who would be unwilling to grant that the forces, which man uses for accomplishing his limited purposes, are the same as God uses for accomplishing His un- limited purposes. The Christian philosopher finds it no less evident that the knowledge and designs of the Creator, however much ‘they may differ in degree, do not differ in their essential characteristics from the knowledge and designs of intelligent creatures; he is, therefore, at a loss to ander- stand the difficulties which many persons honestly avow, in recognizing the manifold evidences of an All-wise, as well as Almighty Ruler, who is always ‘‘upholding all things by the word of his power.” May not a principal source of those difficulties be found in the hesitancy of a too skeptical spirit? Doubt is very good in its proper place and within proper bounds ; obvious errors should certainly be avoided ; novel and startling theories should not be accepted until they have been tested by the most searching and conclusive scrutiny ; it may even be well to indulge in an occasional exercise of critical acumen upon possible mistakes, which may have crept into popular creeds, either through the supposed teaching of a popular leader, or through some enigmatical and perhaps accidental inadvertence. But the detection of a petty error is of far less consequence, while it may require a much greater outlay of time and ingenuity, than the grasp of an important truth. The philosopher may safely presume that any belief, which has withstood, for ages, the attacks of cavilers, must Chase. } 128 !Feb. 7, have some solid groundwork of truth. He can make the truth his own only by fully understanding it, but he may often find satisfaction even in a partial comprehension of doctrines which have given intellectual strength and comfort to many generations of deep thinkers. He will surely gain more wisdom by a diligent looking after truth than by a sharp and cynical search for error. Paul’s advice is well supplemented by Peter's : ‘‘ But sanctify the Lord God in your hearts: and be ready always to give an answer to every man that asketh you a reason of the hope that is in you, with meekness and fear.”’ The advantages of high ideals have been recognized in all ages. When every throb of our spiritual lives is accompanied by a feeling of God’s presence, the perceptive, as well as the imaginative faculties are quickened, and our enlightened insight penetrates intuitively to reasons, both of hope and of complete assurance, which a materialistic philosophy could never find and could never understand. All philosophy must necessarily be based upon human nature. Our love of wisdom can only extend to what we can recognize, however dimly, as manifesting wisdom; our capabilities of knowledge are limited by our capacities for knowledge.* The mathematical necessity which requires that all Consciousness should be manifested under the three primary relations of Motivity, Spontaneity, and Rationality, is tacitly recognized in the modern classification of mental faculties as Presentative, Representative, and Intuitive. This subjective aspect of our spiritual nature finds objective intellectual satisfaction in sys- tems of Religion, Morals and Science. The subjective exercise of Consciousness, in the primary relations or faculties, is manifested in Feeling, Will and Thought, which are indica- tions of objective Need, Power, and Purpose. Both the aim and the goal of Consciousness are subjectively developed in Faith, Desire, and Understanding, which find complete objective pro- vision in Revelation, Sanctification, and Inspiration. If we designate the Motive, Spontaneous and Rational forms by the sym- bolic letters M, 8, R, these relations may all be readily grouped, as in the following synopsis : Subjective. M, 8. R. R. Presentation. Representation. Intuition. 8. Feeling. Will. Thought. M. Faith. Desire. Understanding. Objective. M. 8. R. R. Religion. Morals. Science. 8. Need. Power. . Purpose. M. Revelation. Sanctification, Inspiration, Consciousness is the surest of all things, It is, therefore, unphilosophical *See Trans, Soc, Phil. Amer, xii, 494-5, 468-78, 1879.] 129 (Chase, to try to trace its origin to material or unconscious substance, of which nothing can ever be known, except the qualities which Consciousness itself attributes to the supposed occasion of its own least important experiences. The conviction of material reality is, however, so strong that we should accept it as a matter of instinctive belief, and, therefore, as a truth of in- spiration. * Since thought is stimulated directly by will, Reason is apt to believe her- self independent, and to forget that all her powers, as well as all the facts and premises upon which she exercises those powers, are given by the Creator for the special uses which he designed. Scientific investigators often forget that they can reach truth only so far as it has been divinely ‘‘unveiled’’ or revealed, and that all error is the result of too great confi- dence in the unaided strength of imperfect human reason. All the needful revelation that man has been able and willing to accept, has been offered to him, inallages. In order that he may derive the greatest possible help from the offer it is necessary that his will should be wholly given up to the divine will, ‘‘They that wait upon the Lord shall renew their strength.’’ This waiting should not be confined to the religious in- _ stincts. It is no less important in the training of the will and in the en- lightenment of the reasoning faculties. The inspiration of ‘‘ unconscious cerebration,’’ during the quiet watches of the night, often untangles a knotty clue which has led the self-asserting mind into a labyrinth of des- perate perplexity ; the sanctification, which rewards the opening of the door to the Saviour who stands and knocks, always leads to a ‘‘ change of heart ’’ and often transforms the habitual character in a way that may be rightly regarded as miraculous; the inshining light of immediate revela- tion gives a clearness of vision and a certainty of knowledge which are known only to those who have rightly learned both to open and to use their spiritual eyes. In every case willingness must accompany ability. Help is never forced upon us; if we choose to trust solely to our own delegated strength, we are free to do so and we may often make valuable attainments in so doing , butif we wish most fully to appropriate the prophetic assurance, **the crooked shall be made straight and the rough places plain,’’ we must feel the need of help, and be willing to seek for it where alone it is to be found. Christian philosophy discards the use of none of our faculties ; on the contrary, it is theonly philosophy which insists on the right development of them all. Scientific writers often speak as if nothing should be left to faith, but everything should be decided by reason. The Christian, while commit- ting himself to nothing that is unreasonable, places faith above reason, and sees that reason always errs when faith is discredited. The most implicit faith is always given to that which is self-evident to the believer ; his faith in what he believes to be self-evident to others comes next in order and is hardly less confident. The man who should attempt, by any reasoning process, to prove what is self-evident, or even to make it plainer than it is * Loc, cit. pp. 495-503; 467-8; 504-34. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XVIII. 103. Q. PRINTED FEB. 25, 1879. Chase. ]} 130 [Feb. 7, already, would only show himself to be one ‘‘ that ‘darkeneth counsel by words without knowledge.’’ All knowledge must not only begin in faith, but it must also proceed by faith, end in faith, and rest on faith. So long as our faith is weak in the full self-evidence, of our premises, of their logical connection, of the legiti- macy of our reasoning faculties, or of their rightful exercise, all our infer- ences will be vitiated by doubt ; we may reach some degree of probability, but no certainty. Of these reasonable requirements the legitimacy of our reasoning faculties underlies all the others. We can have no other reason- able assurance of that legitimacy than our conviction of the wisdom and truthfulness of the Author of our being. The highest faith is, therefore, religious faith ; the highest religion is the one which offers the most satis- factory provision for all the spiritual needs of man, in all ages and under all circumstances. None of our faculties have been made in vain. If the human race, in its infancy, was more given to theology than it is in the present day, its devotion was due to a greater sense of its needs. If tie devotion led to any exaggerated development of a faith which looks to eternity, who will say that it displayed less true manhood than like exaggerations of a reason which looks only to earthly temporalities, and prides itself in ‘‘ oppositions of science falsely so-called?’’ True science will not only gladly accept, but it will even eagerly seek, ali the help that it can get from every quarter. Assured of the perfect harmony of all truth, and of its many-sided relations, it will see that no truth can be fully understood until it has been studied in its severel primary bearings on the triform intelligence of man; that the proper culture of in- telligence looks to a complete and symmetrical growth instead of a mon- strous, distorted, one-sided growth; that the loftiest revelations of faith yield the most soul-satisfying food for ‘‘the scientific uses of the imagina- tion ;’’ that the most complete sanctification of desire is attended by the greatest earnestness of purpose ; that the fullest inspiration of understand- ing is shown by the clearest recognition and the most cheerful acknowledg- ment of the divine origin of the inspiration ; that the dicta of all the men- tal faculties should be accepted, compared and reconciled, so as to give the broadest possible views of truth ; that whenever inclination or avocation give the mind a special bias in one direction, special pains should be taken to learn what religious, moral or scientific acquirements are needed in order to maintain the equipoise of perfect manhood. - God's revelations in the book of nature, are as old as creation. Man, after the lapse of thousands of years, learns the alphabet, spells out a few of the simplest sentences in the record, and sets himself up in the pride of his new attainments, as the intellectual lord of the universe, He forgets that the lesson must have been set before it could be learned ; that it may be learned sooner by those who are ready to listen to the Teacher, than by those who try to pick it out by themselves ; and that it is never learned without the Teacher's help, although the help may be so skilfully given that the scholar is not aware of it, . 1879.] 131 (Chase, - The cheerful recognition of the intimate connection between religion and wisdom, was not confined to the early sages. In all historical times the wisest men have felt and acknowledged that it was their highest aim and their highest privilege to read and comprehend even the simplest thoughts ofGod. The boasted intellectual progress of the lust three centuries is rightly credited, in large measure, to Bacon’s revival and skilful unfolding of the inductive method ; but the religious reformations of Wiclif and Huss and Jerome and Luther had preceded Bacon and prepared the way, through clearer expositions of heavenly truth, for a fuller understanding of worldly truths. Comte attacked theology and metaphysics, at the outset of his career, with Quixotic zeal and Quixotic blindness ; but he ended by deify- ing humanity as a fit object forthe worshiping instinct of man, and by promulgating a system of more arrogant metaphysics than ever bewildered the followers of the haughtiest Grecian sophist. The leaders of scientific thought in our own day, with few exceptions, are believers in God; many of them, perhaps a larger relative number than at any earlier period, are also devout believers in Christian revelation, and their belief is more weighty because it is not merely traditional, but springs from deliberate ex- amination and conviction. The godless theories and ungodly lives which degrade humanity are due to the ignorance of smatterers, not to the teach- ings of earnest and hardworking investigators. Christianity, more thoroughly than any previous system, teaches the essential identity of secular and sacred truth. To the Pharisees who would fain regulate all observances by their own narrow interpretations of re- ligious doctrines, it says: ‘‘The Sabbath was made for man, and not man for the Sabbath ;’’ to the Greeks who ignorantly worshiped the Unknown God, it says: ‘‘For in him we live, and move, and have our being;’’ to those who needlessly embitter their lives by over-anxious thoughts for the morrow, it shows the providence of the Father who watches over the ravens and the sparrows and the lilies and the grass of the field; to those who would set up their own pride or prejudice as a standard of merit, it says: ‘‘What God hath cleansed, that call not thou common.’’ It invests all days, all acts, all thoughts, all pursuits with a holy dignity, so far as they may be made tributary to the highest welfare of a single individual, and inculcates full consecration in the injunction ‘“‘Thou shalt love the Lord thy God with all thy heart, and with all thy soul, and with all thy strength, and with all thy mind.” While truth is one, interpretation is legion. Difference of interpreta- tion does not necessarily imply error in any of the holders of views which may appear to be irreconcilable, unless we regard all partial truth as actual error. Imperfect beings can only gradually be brought towards perfec- tion; in their upward growth an endless variety of shortcomings may need an endless variety of helps, and the truth which is most helpful, in consequence of the greatest number of possible unfoldings, is, for that very reason, the highest truth. If we extend the definition of Reason so as to embrace in its province Chase.] 132 [Feb. 7, all departments of knowledge, we may designate its three primary subdi- visions as Pure Reason, Practical Reason, and Logical Reason. Pure Reason corresponds pretty satisfactorily to Kant’s Reine Vernunft, in so far as it is the faculty of the highest intuitions. It holds all the di- rect revelations of faith, all positive or a priori certainty, all absolute and incontrovertible knowledge. Of absolute knowledge we have examples in pure mathematics, and in every axiom or proposition which carries with itself the perception of its necessary and universal validity. From the decisions of pure reason there can be no appeal. No professed infallibility, of pope or conclave or synod or man or body of men, can shake the assur- ance with which we accept the decisions of self-evidence. Others may think us in error, either through want of the clear insight which we enjoy, or through misunderstanding some of the details or bearings of our deci- sion. Whatever we know to be true, no one else can know to be false, however much he may doubt it or however absurd he may think it. The Christian philosopher ranks among the most valuable portions of his abso- lute knowledge the facts of his own religious experience ; the certainty of spiritual being ; the self-evidence of a sELF-evident source and authority for self-evidence ; the necessary Being of a Planner and Lawsgiver to pre- pare the plans and enact the laws of the universe. Practical Reason is nearly represented by Kant’s Praktische Vernunft. It works in the field of morality, for the formation of character ; furnish- ing motives for the guidance of the will; fitted, under the divine sanctifi- cation of desire, for the inauguration of noble purposes; giving the real knowledge which makes by fur the largest portion of our intellectual at- tainments. Real knowledge embraces every fact which we are compelled to believe by the constitution of our minds, but of which we do not per- ceive the absolute necessity. Absolute and real knowledge are often so closely united that it is difficult, especially for persons who have not been thoroughly trained in habits of nice discrimination, to tell where the ab- solute ends and the relative begins. For all practical purposes, the au- thority of a truth, which is valid under all the relations by which it is surrounded in our apprehension, is just as binding as the authority of a truth which is valid under all possible relations. Moral certainty is as much the gift of God, and therefore as obligatory, as self-evidence. Both physically and spiritually, the absolute knowledge of others may become our real knowledge, provided we are satisfied of their truthfulness. By practical reason we learn that we are surrounded on every side by limita- tions which we cannot overleap ; that we are, to some extent, the creatures of circumstance; but that, within our bounds and under all possible cir- cumstances there are such things as right and wrong, duty and responsi- bility ; that we must, therefore, have so much freedom of choice and ac- tion as is necessary for the exercise of our responsibility, God has provided for the satisfaction of our needs by giving us a real knowledge of what will elevate our character, as well as by giving us an absolute knowledge of what will elevate our thoughts, 1879.] 133 | Chase. Logical, or Empirical Reason is the faculty which is commonly regarded as the crowning glory of man, by those who look upon reason and faith as mutually antagonistic. It is, however, rather an evidence of intellectual weakness than of intellectual strength; because its sole office is to unfold what is given us by pure and practical reason, and because it is exposed to all the mistakes which may arise from undue assumption of premises as well as from fallacious inferences. Kant calls it Urtheilskraft, the power or faculty of Judgment. It works largely in the field of science, for the classifica- tion of phenomena; examining especially the information which comes to us through the avenues of bodily sensation ; confining itself, therefore, mainly to the interpretation of the material universe ; and attaining, by its unaided efforts, only to problematical knowledge. Problematical knowl- edge covers everything which we believe to be true, but the truth of which depends on circumstances which it is impossible for us to determine with certainty. The vacillations and inconsistencies of scientific theories and systems are due, at least partly, to the attempts to disregard or discredit the testimony of the only faculties which can give us positive knowledge. Fortunately for the interests of truth, and fortunately for science it- self, such attempts are always vain. Whether we are aware of it or not, the inspirations of understanding compel us to act under the instinctive promptings of our highest faculties. We may scoff at metaphysics if we will; yet, if we study at all, we speedily find ourselves trying to explain and coérdinate the physica! facts which we accumulate by observation and ex- periment. The question, what, is necessarily followed by the question, how; fact points and leads irresistibly to theory and law. For the completion of possible knowledge the question, how, is naturally followed by the ques- tion, why; theory and law indicate such accordances of thought and will, as may be readily understood if we believe that they represent the activity of a Thinker and Willer, and such as cannot be satisfactorily explained on any other hypothesis. In order that any physical phenomena may be brought within the domain of scientific thought, we must have faith in the validity of the simple presentation, enough curious desire to keep upa proper representation, enough understanding to distinguish the general from the special and the essential from the accidental. Religion, entrenched in the citadel of faith, has always been helped by antagonism, gaining new strength from every new struggle. Skepticism, assuming protean forms and continually shifting its ground, tries in vain to dislodge its antagonist, and at every assault furnishes new weapons to be turned against itself. The old truths, the primitive beliefs of our race, are still as precious as ever; beyond the reach of death and decay, they continue to hold forth the promise of participation in their own eternal youth and vigor, to those who will accept and rightly use them. Such acceptance and use always bring a full assurance of knowledge, which shrinks from no controversy that is worthy of notice. But skepticism is too apt to forget the two fundamental rules of controversy : that for every individual, self-evidence outweighs all other evidence ; and that, whenever Chase ] 134 {Feb. 7, self-evidence is not attainable, only qualified judges are competent to de- cide mooted questions. Philosophy neither needs nor seeks any suppression of facts, and it is not fettered by any theories, however skilfully they may be framed or however haughtily they may be set forth. It grants to science the right of self-imposed limitation to the field of material phenomena, and it accepts material laws as the true keys to material facts, but it looks to moral and spiritual laws as the only keys to the facts of moral and spiritual life. It does not go to a doctor for legal advice, or to a theologian for scientific in- struction ; it cares little for a deaf man’s judgment of a symphony of Beethoven, or for a scientific theorist’s views upon a question of religious experience ; but it welcomes from every quarter, from Religion, Ethics and Science alike, any new revelation of the eternal truths of God, and it al- ways strives to reach such clear insight into the harmonies of truth as will help it to dispel the mists of human error. No truth is so insignificant that its place would be better filled by a plausible falsehood ; none is so formida- ble that it can overthrow any other truth. The ‘‘may be”’ of the shrewdest conjecture, the ‘‘perhaps ’’ of the wisest hypothesis, may be helpful to the investigator, and the philosopher will always gladly accept every well- established result to which they may lead; but they count for nothing against the ‘‘surely’’ of self-evidence or the ‘‘therefore’’ of experimental knowledge. ‘*A thoughtful writer,’’ cited by Dr. Pusey in a late Oxford sermon, says: ‘‘Special studies, which bring into play any special aptitude of in- telligence without paralyzing the rest, are conformable to the wants of nature. Exclusive studies, which amass a sort of conjectural life upon one point of the mind, leaving the rest in inaction, are but abnormally developing the excresences of intellectual life ; so when special science forms men who are eminent, exclusive science produces .judgments which are false. Ex- clusive science is the only one injurious to religion, but it is also the only one opposed to it. What withholds man from faith is not the knowledge of nature which any one has, but the knowledge of religion which he has not.”’ The Christian philosopher would gladly share this knowledge with others, but he can point out no other way for its attainment than that of direct revelation, He is often astonished at the condescension of God; he asks, with David, ‘‘ what is man, that thou art mindfal of him, and the son of man, that thou visitesthim?’’ If any satisfactory answer can be found to the question he believes that it should be sought by looking upwards, and not downwards ; by following the leadings of the highest spiritual truths, and not by sounding the quagmires of material truth; by studying the records of Supreme Power and Wisdom, not by stopping short at the laws of proto. plasm and chemical affinity and molecular motion, The materialist boasts of the positive knowledge which can be attained by the senses, and regards nothing as worthy of investigation which can- not be verified by sengorial observation and experiment. The Christian 1879.1 > 135 [Chase, recognizes the value of the sensorium as an instrument of mind. and the reverence with which he regards his experimental religious knowledge, leads him to appreciate, at its fullest worth, experimental secular knowledge. But the worth is spiritual, not material. Beauty and order and law are spiritual attributes. The microcosm of each individual is what his spiritual discernment sees it to be, even as the macrocosm of the universe is what God saw it to be, when ‘‘he spake, and it was done; he commanded, and it stood fast,’’ and when he ‘‘saw everything that he had made, and behold it was very good.”’ The deceptions of sense are proverbial. We learn, by experience, to correct such as are practically harmful, but the correction involves an exer- cise of judgment, an assertion of the controlling authority to which sense always is, as it was intended to be, subservient. If each of our senses may sometimes deceive us we can get no valid authority from any combina- tion or comparison of mere sensorial findings. But if the spiritual inter- pretation of every finding has always a relative truth, a way is opened for supersensual knowledge. The unsoundness of any claim that euch in- terpretations are ‘‘ the evidence of the senses’’ may be made more glaring, by showing that sense-deception is not exceptional and rare, but normal and universal. Take the sense of sight. The most advanced physical science of our day teaches that light and shade, color and visible form, are due solely to wave-motions in the luminiferous ether. These motions are received by an optical instrument, consisting of a combination of Jenses and trans- parent media of various refracting powers. Whatever doubts any one may have as to the Contriver of this wonderful instrument, there can be no doubt that it was made with a specific design for a specific end or purpose ; that it was designed to meet certain wants or needs of its possessor, and that its pur- pose is vision. There is little room for doubt that the «ethereal vibrations enter the eye, and are transmitted to the brain, where Consciousness receives them, not as wave-motions, but as a beautiful and inexplicable panorama of blended ideal harmonies and contrasts. Light as we know it, and light as a material agency, are two entirely distinct realities. The spiritual power of the soul transforms the simple motions into conceptions, supple- menting creative purpose by introducing a new order of things, and show- ing that the highest reality requires, for its continued existence, the con- tinual exercise of intelligence. Turn next to hearing. The unanimous verdict of the most competent judges is again in favor of motion, as the physical instrumentality of all the impressions which reach us through this important sense. The waves, however, are now in a much grosser medium, and are received by a much more sluggish apparatus. While the slowest visible light waves vibrate more than three hundred million million times in a second, the swiftest audible sound waves do not vibrate more than seventy-five thousand times in a second. The frequency of vibration is, therefore, more than four thousand million times as great in light as in sound. The atmospheric Chase.] 136 [Feb. 7, waves strike the drum of the ear, awakening answering vibrations in the organs of the inner ear, where they are received by the delicate branching fibres of the auditory nerve and sent to the brain. There Consciousness receives them, not as waves. nor as motions of any kind, nor even as light, but as transformed, by the soul’s spiritual activity, into a new order of spiritual conceptions ; conceptions which have a reality of the highest de- gree, but a reality which exists only so long as it is upheld by the power of intelligence. Taste and smell are more nearly alike than any other two senses, and they may be examined together. The influence of wave motion is not so evident in them as in sight and hearing, but there is no reason for doubt- ing that the gustatory and auditory and all other nerves transmit their im- pressions to the brain and receive their influences from the brain, by waves or beats. Tyndall’s investigations show a striking resemblance be- tween odors and vapors in their absorption and radiation of heat ; sapid substances are always soluble, and taste is not excited until some solution is made. Both these senses, therefore, require a preliminary breaking up of cohesion, and consequent increase of active elasticity. The ‘‘kinetic theory of gases,’’ which was first proposed by Daniel Bernouilli, supposes that they are formed of material particles, animated by very rapid move- ments, and that the tension of elastic fluids results from the shock of their particles against the sides of the vessels which enclose them. In discus- sing the theory most physicists, and perhaps all, have assumed the motions of the particles to be rectilinear, but cosmical analogies indicate a probability that they may be more often elliptical, and perhaps often parabolic or hyperbolic. The likelihood of continual internal motion, of some kind or other, amounts to moral or practical certainty ; the probability that taste and smell are in the same category as sight and hearing, objectively as well as subjectively, is, therefore, incalculably great, and if some skilful physi- ologist should announce the discovery and measurement of waves of smell and taste, the discovery would awaken great interest but little or no sur- prise. While awaiting the discovery we know that the throbs of the different nerves, which terminate in the mouth and nose, finally reach the brain, where Consciousness receives them, not as waves, nor as motions of any kind, nor even as light nor as sound, but as taste and smell. The spiritual wonder-worker again uses its transforming power to set forth new orders of conceptions ; conceptions full of living reality, but a reality which requires the action of intelligence, both to call it into being and to maintain its existence. The sense of touch seems so completely to underlie all the others, that they are often spoken of as modifications of touch. There are, however, some special considerations, connected with the general sensitiveness of the skin, which are worthy of notice. Many of the most important bodily sensations, at least in a physiological point of view, are dependant on tem- perature, One of the most interesting modern physical treatises is Tyn- dall’s ‘‘ Heat as a mode of motion.’’ In that work, the successor of Fara- ee 1879.] 137 [Chase. day recounts the experiments of an American-born citizen, Benjamin Thompson, commonly known as Count Rumford, together with subsequent confirmatory experiments of remarkable nicety and remarkable fruitful- ness, by Joule, Mayer, Colding, and others. Those experiments all point to molecular motion as the source of heat, and their recognized importance is so great that the new science of heat, or ‘‘thermodynamics,’’ ranks as one of the chief physical sciences. Some even go so far as to think it the only physical science, or at least the fundamental science. The genial glow of the hearth-fire may quicken the circulation; the quickened circu- lation may enliven the spirit; but the spiritual enlivenment and the pleas- ant sensation of warmth by which it is accompanied are both very different from motion, and from all other sensations. They are both realities of a higher order than any mere physical fact ; realities that are only possible in and through intelligence. The other tactile sensations as well as the renderings of the muscular sense may be referred to various degrees of resistance, dependent upon the aeriform, liquid or solid condition of the body which awakens the sensa- tion. We have already seen that elasticity may be explained by motion, and even the most solid bodies are often highly elastic. The advocates of the atomic hypothesis commonly regard the ultimate atoms as very hard, but the mathematical requirements of the relation between heat under con- stant pressure and under constant volume point to great elasticity. The new chemistry, and Lockyer’s late spectroscopic discoveries, also have the same ultimate pointing. They regard all the chemical elements as based on the hydrogen atom, and it has been shown* that the elasticity of hydro- gen is so simply related to the elasticity of the luminiferous ether that hydrogen may be merely condensed xther. All the particles of steel and platinum and of all other material substances are supposed to be in endless motion, through orbits of minute extent which are traversed in brief periods with great velocity. The resistance of such orbits to any change of relative position increases in proportion to the square of the velocity, so that any desired degree of rigidity might be obtained, without any actual contact of particles, by simply giving them velocity enough. The nervous action which is excited by the resistances of physical im- penetrability, is transmitted to the brain, where it is received by conscious- ness, not as motion ; not even as light, nor as sound, nor as taste, nor as. smell, nor as warmth, but simply as resistance ; a spiritual reality of a higher order than anything which is merely material ; a reality which is. made by intelligence and which is lost as soon as intelligence ceases to wield its upholding power. We thus see that the ‘‘ evidence of the senses,”’ so far from being a cor- rect transcript of outward realities, is always as deceptive as the seeming quiet of the seeming general flat terrestrial plane, and as the seeming daily revolution of the sun and moon and stars around our seeming centre of the universe, Our natural and irresistible conviction, that the senses report *Proc, Am, Phil. Soc., xii, 394; xiii, 142. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. sOCc. xvii. 103. R. PRINTED FEB. 25, 1879. Chase, } 138 [Feb. 7, things as they are, experiences a shock when we find that there is no more resemblance between the material type and the spiritual reality, than there is between the letters of the alphabet and the ideas which they serve to convey from one intelligence to another. We then begin to see the im- portance of distinguishing the secondary or delegated cause, both from its immediate consequence and from the Great First Cause ; we understand the shrewdness which led the scholastic wranglers to say that there is no light in the sun, no sound ina bell, no sweetness in sugar, no fragrance in a rose, no heat in fire, no cold in ice, no hardness in a diamond ; the funda- mental doctrine of Berkeley, as expounded by Kant, that “all phenomena are merely subjective representations in consciousness,’’ becomes very sug- gestive ; we learn that the universe, as we know it, could only have been made by intelligence, and that it can only be upheld by intelligence ; we know that our consciousness, limited in all directions as it is, has, never- theless, enough delegated power and authority to enable it to make, uphold, direct and govern all the subjective realities which are essential to its own welfare ; we know, also, that such delegated power «nd authority could only have been delegated by a still higher subjective Spiritual Being. Must we then reject all belief in objective reality? By no means. Even the apparent immobility and disk-like shape of the earth, as well as the con- stant daily and yearly apparent motions of the heavenly bodies, have a prac- tical and relative truth which we are compelled to act upon and which is always helpful. We can never attain to absolute knowledge of anything which we have not made our own by subjective experience, but we have a real or practical knowledge of everything that awakens an instinctive be-’ lief in its reality. Some men will doubtless continue to argue for ages to come, as others have argued for ages past, on the one hand against the pos- sibility of motion, on the other against the possibility of free agency. But the former will show their practical disbelief in their own theories by their own bodily changes of place ; the latter, by their continual exercise of free- agency, their satisfaction when they have done right, and their remorse ~when they have done wrong. There is nothing so self-evident that men may not try either to refute it or to make it plainer, and mystify them- selves by so doing. Arguments have been framed to prove that black is white, that one equals two, that Achilles could not overtake a tortoise, and the fallacies have been so artfully covered that many persons have tried in vain to detect them; nevertheless they have not been beguiled into ac- cepting any of the specious sophisms, although they may have had their faith shaken in the infallibility of the reasoning faculties. The proper co-operation of all our faculties will always lead us to such truth as God intended we should reach by their help. The difference be- tween the lower, obscure, problematical or practical truth, and the higher, self-evident, subjective or absolute truth, is an indication of educational purpose. If we are satisfied to rest in the lower, we have no right to com- plain that the higher is hidden from us; if we shut our eyes to the self- evidence that is offered us in one direction, we have no right to ask for 1879.] 139 [Chase. proof in another, proof which would be necessarily sophistical if it could be plausibly framed. The man whois either blind or color blind, or who has any other bodily defect, has an imperfect instrument for the use of his spir- itual ability, and the imperfection will affect all his work ; but it will not prevent his reaching the absolute and the relative knowledge which are best for him, provided he employs his ability to the best advantage. If his limitations unfit him for the reception of any truths but those of physi- cal or natural science, let him devote himself to the labor for which he is best fitted ; but let him not scoff at other truths, and above all, let him not waste time and strength in seeking to solve, by scientific or ‘‘ positive’’ methods, problems which can be solved only by metaphysical or by theo- logical methods, Philosophy and religion offer to science the help which is needed in order to make knowledge complete and symmetrical. If the help is rejected, every attempt to supply its place, by means which God has not sanctioned, will surely fail. Berkeley’s teachings have greatly modified modern materialistic theories. The old idea of inertia, as the essential property of matter, and as implying complete passivity under the controlling influence of immaterial force, is nearly obsolete. Not only is force continually spoken of as material, but will is at the same time spoken of as the ‘‘ highest form of force.’’. Every writer may be allowed to define the terms which he uses, in his own way, and a complete system of science may be, undoubtedly, built upon a defini- tion of matter as ‘‘a substance which may be either conscious or uncon- scious, either living or dead, either active or incapable of action, either di- recting or directed, either originating or originated.’’ But there is always danger that a generalization, which embraces opposite qualities in a single conception, may lead to inadvertent reasoning in a circle and to the beg- ging of important questions. It is well that the controlling supremacy of intelligence, upon which Berkeley insisted so strongly, should become more generally recognized, but it is not well that any needless risk should be run of assuming, in defiance ofall positive proof, that anything which has once been subordinate can ever develop itself into supremacy over what has once been supreme. Even if we enlarge our ideas of matter so as to embrace all possible forms of being, we do not remove a single difficulty thereby. The same questions come crowding up before us, only under different forms. Instead of asking, ‘‘ what are spirit, and soul, and mind, and will, and force,’’ we ask, ‘‘ what are consciousness, and life, and action, and government, and origination.’’ In spite of all our attempts to reconcile the unreconcilable, the eternal facts remain, that there are spiritual phe- nomena in the field of consciousness and time, and physical phenomena in the field of inertia and space ; that all attempts to subordinate the former to the latter have always failed, and that the physical exists only to serve the wants and purposes of the spiritual. It is not strange that mechanical philosophers should sometimes think that all consciousness is connected with a brain, for the highest organic mechanism that is directly and sensibly tributary to consciouness is un- Chase.] 140 . [Feb. 7, doubtedly to be found in the human brain. But the Christian sees evidences of the sway of consciousness everywhere ; in the rudimentary nervous sys- tems of insects and molluscs ; in the busy industry of coral-building polyps ; in the shapeless jelly of the amceba; in the development, from a single cell, of the most complicated vegetable and animal forms ; in the structure of crystals; in the formation of compounds, with new properties, by chemical affinity ; in the continual renewals of creation during each re- turning year ; in the unity of plan which is manifested in the arrangement of planets and of spectral lines ; in the modifications of that plan which are displayed in vegetable-growth and in stellar systems ; in all the indi- cations of life, and law, and order, and purpose, and adaptation of means to ends with which the universe is filled. If steam engines could think, they might regard steam as the source of all the varied and intricate de- signs which are wrought out by machinery, with much more reason than man can give for regarding the brain as the source of consciousness. The more mechanical consciousness becomes, either in its immediate or in its mediate manifestations, the less is the liability to mistake. The in- stinct of animals is more unerring than the reason of man; crystallization and organic growth follow established design more closely than instinct ; the cell, which was meant for one part of the body, rarely goes to any other part; machinery accomplishes its results with greater uniformity than manual labor ; the calculating machine computes difficult tables with more certainty than the most skillful mathematician. Mechanical philoso- phy may naturally regard mechanical perfection as the best evidence of superiority, but a higher philosophy esteems freedom more highly than automatism, and consequently finds in the possibility of imperfection, evi- dence of a high degree of perfection. Man, sinful as he is, and ‘‘born unto trouble as the sparks fly upward,’’ is a nobler creature, from the very fact that he has the power to choose between right and wrong, than he would be if he were compelled always to act from unerring instincts. Now, he is capable of indefinite progress; then, he would have been stationary ; now, virtue and merit and satisfaction in the performance of duty are within his reach ; then, he would have been a mere slave ; now, he has a distinct personality, created in the image of God, made a little lower than the angels ; then he would have been a mere machine. Liebnitz and Coleridge and Cousin all gave great prominence to the doc- trine that ‘“‘Systems are true by what they affirm, but false by what they deny.”’ ‘The heavens declare the glory of God; but ‘‘the fool hath said in his heart, there is no God.’’ We may affirm that consciousness is connected with a brain, but if we say that all consciousness is connected with a brain, we deny the positive assertions of others and make a gratui- tous assumption which is scientifically untenable. We may admit, with Heckel, that every organic cell has a conscious “ soul life ;’’ that in the infusoria a single cell performs all the different functions of life ; that, per- haps, in the higher organisms, the numerous single cells give up their indi- vidual independence, and subordinate themselves to the ‘‘state-soul’’ or 1879.) 141 Lhase. ‘*personal soul,’’ which represents the unity of will and sensation in the “‘cell-association ;’’ and that his theory brings all natural phenomena into a mechanical causal connection, as parts of a great and uniform process of development. But if we deny that there is any higher soul or life or power or wisdom than is manifested in single organic cells or groups of cells, or if we deny that every ‘‘ mechanical causal connection ’’ must have a mechanic to make the causal connection, or if we deny any other theory which is more satisfactory to its upholders than our own, we overstep all scientific bounds and our words are as worthless as the babble of a child. We may accept the alternative, ‘‘natural development or supernatural crea- tion of species,’’ and we may explain the two hypotheses in such way as to present no necessary antagonism; but if we deny the necessity of an intelligent author for every established order and an intelligent origin- ator for every consistent plan, we only show our own foolishness. We may believe, with Cousin, in an impersonal reason which pervades the universe like a spiritual sea or atmosphere, which is the mediate source and endless supply of all finite knowledge and all material de- velopment; but if we deny the existence of a personal reason which is still higher, our vanity leads us into arrogant blasphemy. If we open our intellectual eyes to the light of the highest philosophy, we may see that the truths of affirmation, in all philosophical systems, are partial recognitions of this higher truth which includes them all: wisdom ‘‘was set up from everlasting, from the beginning, or ever the earth was.’’ Modern science is too prudent to make such denials, and none of them have ever been made by men whose opinion is worthy of the slightest _ consideration. The methods of observation and experiment only lead to the discovery of what is; they furnish no grounds for positive assertion of any kind, beyond a simple statement of facts. But the natural disposition to theorize, which is praiseworthy when it is employed merely as a help to investigation, often leads men to attach too much importance to ingeni- ous hypotheses, and to suppose that the explanation which they accept is the only reasonable one. Moreover, the commendable caution, which leads honest and ready investigators to publish nothing that has not been thor- oughly tested by their special methods, is apt to be misunderstood. If men, whose talents, education and calling give them a peculiar aptitude for re- search, hesitate to affirm a mooted doctrine, their admirers often take the hesitation for a denial. The supposed denial has, for them, both the fasci- nation of novelty and the witchery of authority ; they therefore adopt it eagerly, priding themselves on their independence of thought and their superiority over the prejudices of education and tradition. It therefore behooves every one, whose views are likely to influence others, to be very watchful lest he become instrumental in breaking down any of the barriers against immorality. If his assurance of important spiritual truths is not sufficient for him to speak with positive certainty, he _ Should at least guard against such misinterpretations of his teachings as he is unwilling to accept, and he should claim the same rights and the same Chase.] 142 (Feb. 7, authority for students in other fields as he claims for himself. Let his sci- entific reputation be as high, and his physical discoveries as brilliant as they may, he may feel himself honored by the avowal that he is a lover of wisdom, like David and Solomon and John and Paul, and by owning that their experimental knowledge of the spiritual truths, which they pro- claimed, was as positive as hisown experimental knowledge of the physical truths which he proclaims. He cannot show that physical truth is more important than spiritual truth, nor that the scientific writers of our day are more honest, more capable, more careful, or more thorough than the re- ligious writers of the early Christian days. Let him not claim, then, even by the faintest shadow of implication, that the prophets and evangelists and apostles were less competent judges in their special field of experience, than he is in his, or that their assertions are“less trustworthy than his own. Biichner offers the following dilemma: ‘Either the laws of nature rule, or the eternal reason rules; the two would be involved in conflict every moment; the sway of the unchangeable laws of nature, a sway which we cannot call a rule, would allow of no conflicting personal interference.’’* The dilemma itself is well stated, but it is difficult to see how any one who believes in ‘‘eternal reason’’ can accept his solution. How can laws, having ‘‘a sway which we cannot call a rule,’’ rule anything? What are ‘‘laws’”’ and ‘eternal reason?’ Before we attempt to dogmatize, we should try to express our meaning so plainly that it cannot be easily misunderstood. To the Christian philosopher, the assertions that ‘‘the two would be involved in conflict every moment,”’ that the laws of nature are unchangeable, and that their sway ‘‘ would allow of no conflicting personal interference,’’ seem like mere gratuitous assump- tions, The primitive meaning of law, as defined by Webster, is: ‘A rule, particularly an established or permanent rule, prescribed by the supreme power of astate to its subjects, for regulating their actions.’? Between the laws of man and the highest human reason there is rarely any conflict. No human laws are unchangeable, but the more reasonable they are the less likely are they to be changed. If they were in accordance with eternal reason what ground can any one have for thinking that ‘‘ the two would be involved in conflict every moment ?”’ The primitive and etymological meaning of nature, is ‘that which is born or produced.’’ By metonymy nature is taken to represent the pro- ducer, and Darwin defends this use of the word in language which seems to imply his undoubting belief that the producer is intelligent. Biichner says: ‘Nature isa single totality sustained by an internal necessity.’’} This definition might be interpreted to include ‘‘the eternal reason ’’ as a part of nature, but it seems likely from the terms of his dilemma, that he agrees with most other German philosophers, in contrasting nature, as the material world, with the world of intelligence, If such is his meaning, and * Cited by Krauth. Ibid, 1870. 1438 Chase. if he intends to assert that the material universe is sustained by an internal necessity which is independent of any supernatural influences, he is simply begging the question. What are called ‘‘ the laws of nature ”’ are merely the generalizations of our own minds. They represent facts, of order, and harmony, and mutual rela- tionship, which have been observed so often that we look upon them as in- variable, and nearly every provision which we make for future contingencies is grounded upon our confident belief in such invariability. If we were to ask how a religious or political organization is governed, we should think it a very unsatisfactory answer to be told that ‘‘the laws of the organization rule.’’ It is equally unsatisfactory to be told that the laws of nature rule, when we ask, what governs nature? We are not children, to be stopped in our questionings by a simple ‘‘ because,’’ or to be contented with the as- surance that certain orders of fact occur because those orders of fact always occur. Yet what more do they offer us who talk of ‘‘ the sway of the un- changeable laws of nature ?’? Who will say that protoplasm or chemical affinity rules the conscious movements of the infusoria, or the ameba, or the higher organizations which use nerves and ganglia as the instruments of consciousness. — However we may try to account for the origin of consciousness, we can- not divest ourselves of the belief that consciousness is the ruling power of its own polity. Even if we can bring ourselves to think that the ‘‘cell- soul’’ is the product of the material forces which organized the cell, we cannot help thinking that, after it is ‘‘developed,’’ it rules the cell ; even if we define matter so as to include all phenomena, the only ruling force that is self-evident is the force of will. Seeing an established or perma- nent rule in the material universe, which resembles the ‘established or permanent rule prescribed by the supreme power of a state to its subjects,’’ we reason from analogy and call the natural rule, as well as the human rule,alaw. Extending the analogy, we look upon the ‘‘laws of nature”’ as rules prescribed by the supreme power of nature. The Christian philoso- pher extends the analogy still further, and finds that all his questionings are satisfactorily answered by a simple acceptance of the revelation, that the supreme power isan Omnipresent, Almighty, ‘‘ Eternal Reason,’’ and Will, and Love. According to the only intelligible conception which he is able to frame, of the laws of nature and the eternal reason, we have no grounds for saying that ‘‘the two would be involved in conflict every moment.’’ On the contrary, any conflict is an absolute impossibility. ‘‘The sway of the un- changeable laws of nature, a sway which we cannot call a rule,’’ continues only so long as God wills; the laws are unchangeable only while their Author does not wish to change them ; there can be nosuch thing as ‘‘con- flicting personal interference,’’ because at the moment when there would be an interference, provided the laws had an independent existence, the change in the Divine Will makes a corresponding change in the laws. In this conception all the terms are used in their simplest, most obvious, and most general acceptation. If the teachers of a different doctrine have Chase.j 144 [Feb. 7, a well defined notion of the laws of nature, which enables them to give up the idea of an intelligent Ruler, it would be much better that they should express the notion by some other term than law, and they should by all means give such clear definitions as will enlighten the understanding of their readers. If they have no such notion, they use ‘“‘ words without knowledge.’’ The use may be honest, and free from intention to deceive, for every one is liable to an inconsiderate employment of terms which have been familiar from childhood. But a professed searcher for truth, who be- lieves that the majority of thinking men have, for ages, been blinded by error, can hardly be excused for forcing their expressions into a meaning which they would unanimously repudiate. Such a course may lead to one of those endless wars of words which constitute a large portion of the fancied oppositions between science and religion, but they hinder, instead of helping, the spread of knowledge. When science claims the right of free discussion, the right must be granted, but only in legitimate ways. The etymological bond between reor and res, reason and real, think and thing, is only one out of many indications that philosophy is only concerned and can only deal with ideas ; that the ideal is, as Plato taught, the only reality to which we can possibly attain ; that all maniféstation, material as well as spiritual, is only the expression of ideas ; and that nothing can be gained by trying to banish or ignore the highest ideas which have been revealed to men and to shut them within the narrow bounds of manifesta- tion, of which we can know nothing except through subordinate ideas. The highest philosophy, while it seeks for nothing but the truth, will be satisfied with nothing short of the whole truth; truth to the whole triplicity of human nature; truth which can harmoniously promote all the purposes of revelation, sanctification and inspiration. A strong feeling of spiritual need, with the implicit dependence upon the intimations of faith which is its natural accompaniment, gives philoso- phy a leaning towards mysticism ; the happiness, which accompanies every satisfaction of the need, awakening a thankfulness to the Giver of all good and a recognition of His benevolence which lead to theories of op- tumism. An energetic, self-asserting will, with an accompanying disposition to yield to every impulse of desire, gives a tendency towards dogmatism ; the abuses of freedom, which characterize ‘the natural man,”’ giving be- lief a subjective bias which is shown in systems of pessimism. Active reason- ing powers, leading to a continual exercise of thought upon speculative ques- tions, give rise to skepticism ; the impossibility of reaching any conclusion, in which something is not taken for granted, convicting finite reason of in- herent weakness, throwing a shade of doubt over every commonly accepted belief, and tending towards nihilism, or a denial of all reality, Christian- ity assigns each group of theories its proper limits, by teaching that ‘ God is good ;’’ the human ‘heart is deceitful above all things, and desperately wicked ;”’ “the natural man receiveth not the things of the Spirit of God, for they are foolishness unto him ; neither can he know them, because they are spiritually discerned,’’ There is no inconsistency in believing: 1, that 1879.] 145 y [Chase. the created universe is the best possible, when considered with due regard to all the purposes of creation ; 2, that our world is the worst possible, in view of the evil which has resulted from the intentional interference of human liberty ; 3, that no certainty can be reached by a reason which starts with the assumption of its own independence, and refuses the guidance which is offered by its Creator. Aristotle says, ‘‘ philosophy began in wonder.’’* Wonder leads naturally to admiration, admiration to investigation. Through wonder we learn, and the facts which we thus acquire constitute the largest, as well as the most im- portant portion of our knowledge. Through admiration we become attentive, attention giving distinctness and thoroughness to knowledge. Through in- vestigation we unfold the truths which we have already ascertained, and although we are not directly led to new truths, we discover new relations, which may excite new wonder and admiration, thus leading indirectly to the knowledge of new facts. Wonder, admiration and investigation all aim at the highest conceivable ends. Each of them finds special ends of its own, which are so important. that they are sometimes looked upon as all-embracing. But the partial can never be so comprehensive as the gen- eral; the satisfaction of one want is inferior to the satisfaction of all. The fondness for study and investigation is implanted in us for the formation of character, and no better test can be given, of the importance of any belief or pursuit, than the influence which it is likely to exert, either in eleva- ting or in degrading the soul. The order in which the fundamental ques- tions of philosophy naturally arise, tends to lead the mind from effect to cause, and from cause to final cause or purpose ; from creation to creative power, from creative power to creative design ; from manifestation, and power, and purpose to the Source of all things, the only true God, who is at once Upholder, Creator and Designer. Physical science very properly recognizes the fact that the investigation of final causes and of other meta- physical problems is out of its province, but for that very reason it should not reject the help which theology and philosophy are always ready to give it. There is no field of natural science which is not full of pointings, backward to the unconscious, and forward to the conscious. Matter is manifested in various forms which are known as chemical elements ; elements combine to make compounds of various properties; both elements and compounds often occur in crystaline forms, each crystal being built upon a definite plan ; through the mystery of life inorganic matter becomes organic, the simplest manifestations of organizing force transforming the mineral into the vegetable, and higher manifestations making vegetable life tributary to ani- mal life ; both in the vegetable kingdom and in the animal kingdom there are many gradations, from lower to higher species and genera and orders and classes ; the visible creation culminates in man, who boasts his pre- eminence mainly on the ground of his superiority in intelligence. Throughout this ascending scale of being, in which, at every step there *Cited by Krauth,. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. sOC. XviiI. 103. 8s. PRINTED FEB. 25, 1879. Chase.] 146 [Feb. 7, is something added to the step below, there are unmistakable evidences of a unity of design, such as would result from a unity of Supreme Intelligence. The likeness of finite intelligence to Infinite Intelligence, is shown both by the power of partially comprehending the designs of the Creator and by the power of scientific anticipation, which sometimes leads to important scientific discoveries. Evolution, development, execution of purpose, are facts of every day ex- perience. Religion, Morality and Science are all called to deal with them, each according to its own methods. Science, of its own choice, has taken the mechanical method, which is the lowest of all, although it may be as im- portant as any, provided it is employed in the proper spirit. All the details of evolution and development, which can be discovered by the most untiring search, are portions of God’s truth, and we owe many thanks to the earnest, hard-working men through whose diligence they are made known to us. But evolution asa fact or law expressing a Divine method, is one thing ; evo- lution as a self-sufficient theory, is quite another thing. The fact must be accepted, just so far as it is shown to be a fact, and no further; the theory is only a child’s answer to questions of the highest import. The engineer, deeply interested in the workings of an intricate machine, may study it in all its parts, watching the bearing of every joint, and lever, and cog, and band upon the result which the whole combination was intended to bring about, and admiring the simplicity of contrivance which, by avoiding all superfluity, displays the inventor’s wondrous skill. His own knowledge may be enlarged by the study, and he may find him- self greatly helped by it in subsequent important professional undertakings. But what should we think of his scientific wisdom, if he should try to enlight- en usin regard to the orgin of the machine, by telling us that the atom-souls give up their individual independence and subordinate themselves to the molecular-souls ; that the molecular-souls, in their turn, subordinate them- selves to the joint- and lever- and cog- and band-souls ; that the joint- and lever- and cog- and band-souls subordinate themselves to the machine-soul ; that ali the lower forms of consciousness thus become tributary to the higher consciousness of the machine’s state-soul or personal soul, which represents the unity of will and purpose in the atom-association ; and that thus all the phenomena of the machine are brought into a mechanical causal connec- tion as parts of a great and uniform process of development? If we study the mechanism of the eye and ear, and the contrivance by which they are fitted for their intended purposes, can we show any greater wisdom by sug- gesting a similar explanation as final and sufficient? Religion, Morality and Science may all be satisfied by accepting the teaching of David and Solomon, and in no other way: ‘‘He that planted the ear, shall he not hear? He that formed the eye, shall he not see?’ ‘The hearing ear, and the seeing eye, the Lord hath made even both of them.”’ There can be no question that a too great and exclusive absorption in the study of outward nature, will lead us towards materialism, and that ma- terialism will tend to dwarf our spiritual growth. There is little risk, 1879. | 147 | Chase. while physical research continues so rife as it now is, of our becoming too spiritual ; consequently there is little risk in the spread of spiritual instruc- tion, as an antidote to the philosophy which ignores all spiritual control. These grand maxims should be indelibly impressed on every mind, and above all on the minds of physical investigators ; that “ we have a higher warrant for believing in God than for believing in any other truth what- ever ;’’* that the simplest exercise of thought proves the existence of spirit, while the existence of matter ‘‘ as a distinct entity has never been proved, and is seriously questioned ;’’+ and that, even after we have granted the reality of an inert, unknowing somewhat, which underlies material phe- nomena, we should still look to the wisdom which sways, as higher than the ignorance which is swayed. Our age is often called an age of materialism, but when we compare it with previous ages we may find much to be said in its favor, while the faults, with which it is justly chargeable, lie partly at the doors of Chris- tian believers who have neglected their religious duties. Most investiga- tors, in every age, limit their researches to fields in which there is the greatest likelihood of discovery, and in which general interest may be most readily awakened by direct appeals to the senses. This is in accordance with evident Creative Design, for the senses are the only known avenues of intercourse between the spirit of man and the material universe, and the beginnings of education come through such intercourse. The great end of education is, however, spiritual, and if our spiritual teachers do not keep pace with the age, we must all suffer loss, We need, therefore, educated guides, as well as educated followers ; a body of apostles, prophets, evan- gelists, pastors and teachers, { capable of understanding and rightly quali- fied for interpreting and reconciling, the truths which skillful decipherers have drawn from the Bible of creation, as well as those kindred truths of kindred revelation in the Bible of Scripture, and in the Bible of the soul. Although timidity has hitherto greatly blocked the way against such in- terpretation, we have reason for congratulation in the unconscious shaping of physical theories by spiritual intuitions. Newton, near the close of his Principia, says: ‘‘This most beautiful system of the sun, planets, and comets, could only proceed from the counsel and dominion of an intelligent and powerful Being ;’’ and in his third letter to Bentley : « Tt is inconceiv- able that inanimate brute matter, should, without the mediation of some- thing else which is not material, operate upon and aflect other matter with- * out mutual contact ;’’ La Place supposed the velocity of gravitating action to be instantaneous, a velocity which is impossible save through a spiritual medium; Tyndall, in speaking of the ‘‘potency’’ of matter, expressly admits that he does not seek to degrade spirit, but to elevate matter, and in his Manchester lecture he indignantly disclaims ‘‘that creed of atheism which has been so lightly attributed to him ;’? Huxley avows himself a spiritualist, rather than a materialist ; Maudesley regards will, as the highest * Ex-President Thomas Hill. + Rowland G, Hazzard, t¢ Eph. iv, 11. Chase.] 148 [Feb. 7, form of force ; Maxwell says that the progress of science has ‘‘tended to deepen the distinction between the visible part, which perishes before our eyes, and that which we are ourselves, and to show that this personality, with respect to its nature as well as to its destiny, lies quite beyond the range of science ;’’ Barker, in his address before the chemical section of the American Association, quotes the definition of matter, as ‘‘that which is essential to the existence of the known forms of energy, without which, therefore, there could be no transformations of energy ;’’* Cope, in dis- cussing the origin of the will, speaks of ‘‘the goodness of God as the an- chor of the universe ;’’ Draper, addressing the Chemical Society, says : ‘*Shall a man, who stands forth to vindicate the majesty of such laws, be blamable in your sight? Rather shall you not, with him, be overwhelmed with a conception so stupendous? And yet let us not forget that these eter- nallaws of nature, are only the passing thoughts of God ;’’} Frothingham, in the very extremity of his radicalism, makes the following acknowledg- ments: ‘‘Still, that whatever power there is, is alive, in every atom of space, in every instant of time, is put beyond controversy, and manifest, let us add, in a much higher form in mind than in visible matter.’’ ‘‘ It is im- possible for me not to believe that the universe is governed by an intelli- gent will.” Berkeley himself could hardly have found fault with any of these state- ments ; he would have felt little fear of any materialism which defines matter in terms that would be equally applicable to spirit. Quotations might be indefinitely multiplied, to show that the best devotees of modern science, while they fearlessly assert their right to vindicate the truth of their own discoveries and to accept every inference which may be legiti- mately drawn from them, admit, in their best moments, that there is a realm beyond the reach of their physical analyses and experiments. In that realm it is the right of religion and morality to work, and by faithful work they may check all tendencies of science which are one-sided or otherwise dangerous. Whoever has a knowledge of spiritual truth, which is as sure as that of John and Paul, may look for a success akin to theirs; whoever pre- sents the results of his religious experience, as clearly and forcibly as Tyn- dall and Darwin and Huxley present the results of their physical experi- ence, will find that faith and reason, going hand in hand, become mutual helpmeets. Christian philosophy says to its upholders : Yours might have been, much more largely than it is, the credit of that growing recognition of spiritual power which makes the defenders of truth so hopeful ; it is not yet too late for you to resume the armor of your early leaders and renew their career of conquest. Be not afraid to acknowledge the ignorance which you can- not conceal, be bold in asserting the truth of what you know, and science, forgetful of her apparent hostility, will gladly shake hands with you, sit- ting at your feet as an eager learner of truths which round and supplement, her own discoveries, : * Stewart and Tait, + “The laws of nature are the thoughts of God,"”—Oersted, 1879.] 149 (Chase, The most thorough-going evolutionists are the fullest believers in the modifying influences of struggle, want, annoyance ; all of which are evi- dences, more or less striking, of an indwelling consciousness which pro- motes development. The amount of variation which man has assisted in producing, in pigeons, cattle, and other domesticated animals, is often quoted in order to show that neither specific nor generic differences are sufficient to need any unwonted intervention of creative power for their production. In geology and astronomy there are like tendencies to avoid cataclysmic hypotheses, and to seek an explanation of past changes in the earth and in the heavens through such mediate causes as are still at work. These tendencies are not objectionable unless they lead us to forget that the creation of a new cell calls for an exercise of supernatural power as truly as the creation of a universe ; that the miracle of every moment is as won- derful as the miracle of developing order out of chaos ; that the Upholder of all things is also the Maker of all things ; that any relaxation of his mighty energy would be followed by instant and universal confusion. If we keep all these things in mind, our sense of the continual presence of God will lend a solemnity to all our undertakings which will incline us to trust in him as our all-sufficient help and shield. ‘*In discussing the material combinations which result in the formation of the body and the brain of man, it is impossible to avoid taking side- glances at the phenomena of consciousness and thought. . . . Though the progress and development of science may seem to be unlimited, there is a region beyond her reach, a line with which she does not even tend to osculate. Given the masses and distances of the planets, we can infer the perturbations consequent on their mutual attractions. Given the nature of a disturbanee in water, air, or ether, we can infer from the properties of the medium how its particles will be affected. In all this we deal with physical laws, and the mind runs freely along the line which connects the phenomena from beginning toend. But whenever we endeavor to pass, by a similar process, from the region of physics to that of thought, we meet a problem not only beyond our present powers, but transcending any con- ceivable expansion of the powers we now possess. We may think over the subject again and again, but it eludes all intellectual presentation. The origin of the material universe is equally inscrutable.’’* Thus physical research, which starts from faith, and proceeds by faith, ends by sending us back to faith ; ‘‘ the substance of things hoped for, the evidence of things not seen ;’’ for the answer to all our inquiries about the highest realities. Our confidence in the results which have been reached through faith in the phenomena of the lower field, should give us still greater confidence in the phenomena of the higher. The evidence of abundant provision for all the wants of our material nature furnishes a well-grounded assurance that an equally satisfactory provision has been made for all the wants of our spiritual nature. No doctrine can ever gain extended acceptance, unless it is based upon * Tyndall, ‘‘ Heat as a Mode of Motion 4th ed., 2 723.” Chase.] 150 [Feb. 7, some evident phase of truth. However desirable general knowledge may be, it is attainable only through the accumulation, repetition, and com- plete mastery of specific facts, by means of definite practical lessons. This is especially true in the case of religion. Drop everything that is or has been denominational, and you will have little left save a vague philo- sophical] abstraction, in which most men may agree, but in which few can find any satisfaction. The ‘‘absolute”’ of the metaphysician; the ‘‘su- preme’’ of the scientist; the ‘‘all’’ of the pantheist ; represent concep- tions towards which the mind is irresistibly driven, but at which all mean- ing is lost. That which is void of relation, cannot be made the object of thought by beings who think only under relations. As soon as we admit relativity and attribution,we see that God would cease to be Almighty if He had not the power to reveal himself, in rela- tions of love and sympathy and help, to his intelligent creatures in whom he has himself implanted a wish for love and sympathy and help. Hence arises the metaphysical conception of an ‘‘absolute-relative,’’ which ac- cords with the Biblical revelation of an All-wise, Almighty and Ever- living God, who is ‘‘ not a God afar off,’’ but always and every where near at hand. Under a vague perception of the manifold ties which may sub- sist between man and his Maker, systems of polytheism arise, of which the most philosophical forms are found in the trinities of the Hindoos and Egyptians. The hidden truth, which they represent, rests upon the mathematical necessity that a relative spiritual nature, like that of man, must be triform; either affected, self-influencing, or affecting; either emotional, voluntary or intellectual. The revealed doctrine, ‘God said, Let us make man in our own image, after our likeness,’’? is thus in perfect harmony with the highest philo- sophical inference of natural religion, and with the ‘‘catholic faith” of the Athanasian creed, which worships ‘‘one God in Trinity and trinity in unity, neither confounding the persons nor dividing the substance.’’ The conception of the dogma, in the old mythologies, was dim, ill-defined, and generally tritheistic ; its deep spiritual meaning was set forthin the Jeho- vah, Adon, and Ruach, of the Hebrews, the Father, Son, and Holy Ghost, of the Christians. Religion, as well as science, should always be practical, progressive and aggressive in the adaptation of its unchanging principles to the changing requirements of human progress. Truth is so impregnable that it should court criticism, rather than shun it; our interpretations of truth may be vacillating, but if they are, we cannot give them stability by refusing to examine them. Religion has nothing to fear, save from its own fearful- ness; nothing to hope, save in such hopefulness as springs from its own everlasting ground work of truth. Science, resting on reason, asserts its claims with a boldness which almost disarms opposition and carries nearly everything before it; Religion, resting on faith, timidly clings to its tra- ditions, but shrinks from the inevitable contest which is to give them new life. 1879.] 151 [Chase, Our children, with all the natural curiosity of youth, fascinated by the wonderful rapidity of discovery and the charms of novelty, may easily be led to confound hypotheses with facts, unless we provide some means for their proper enlightenment. They may also be easily led to see that all truth is harmonious; that there are ditferent kinds of truth, adapted to different spiritual requirements ; that the existence, the appreciation, and the authority of truth, are all due to spiritual existence ; that spirit is superior to matter; that only through faith in the inspiration of the Al- mighty is any exercise of our reasoning powers or any attainment of knowledge possible ; that faith is, therefore, higher than reason, and it is important that our faith should have the foundation of God, which standeth sure. Let us not hope or desire to banish either bigotry or radicalism. As long as men differ in taste and ability, they will also differ in their lean- ings towards opposite extremes of thought. Men of one idea fill a useful place in the economy of culture, for their very extravagance may serve as a warning ; their devotion, as an example ; their leadership, as an in- spiration ; their antagonism, as a needful restraint. Few walk so safely in the golden mean, that they are never misled by the mists of error ; few can be awakened to a knowledge of their own mistakes, so quickly and so thoroughly, as by wrestling with counter mistakes. He who seeks for a symmetrical growth in truth, should first seek to know himself. If his intellectual vigor is so great as to make him haughty and headstrong, he needs to learn the helplessness of reason and the power of faith ; to see that all our boasted intellectual triumphs are limited to the acceptance of conclusions, which rest upon simple faith in propositions that cannot be proved. If his faith in his creed, his teachers or his companions, degene- rates into the credulity of ignorance, he needs to learn that faith was given us only as a helper, not as a tyrant ; that moral and religious growth should be accompanied by intellectual growth ; that worldly probation was designed for the proper exercise and training of all our powers, in or- der that we may come ‘‘ unto the measure of the stature of the fulness of Christ ;’’ that a reasonable faith should always be accompanied by a faith- ful reason, It is with nations and with ages as with individuals. Each community and each period, represents a certain stage of progress, a certain capacity of development, acertain want of guidanca. Although history often seems to repeat itself, each apparent repetition is shaped by new conditions. Old questions are continually coming up, but they are continually answered under new phases of experience. The thoughts of Socrates and Plato have left an impress upon humanity which can never be obliterated ; the great religions of antiquity prepared the way for Christianity ; the claims of Christianity, as a final and culminating revelation ‘‘in the dispensation of the fulness of times,’’ rest on its completeness and on its adaptation to, the wants, not of a single age or of many ages, but of all ages. The tri- umphs of reason, when guided by faith in the intimations of truth which Chase.] 152 [Feb. 7, are given, with more or less clearness, to all men, are shown in the lasting vitality which pervaded the teachings of the great questioner and the “academic swan ;’”’ the triumphs of faith, when moulded by the sturdy intellects of skilful priests and devotees, maintained the old religions during their severally allotted reigns ; the joint triumphs of reason and faith, under ‘“‘the shining light, that shineth more and more unto the perfect day,” are henceforth to be won by Christian champions, through such diligence of labor and harmony of action, as will promote a thoroughly symmetric spiritual and intellectual growth. Christianity, as thus interpreted, becomes the culmination of all philoso- phy, as well as the culmination of all religion, for any system of complete truth must satisfy all the demands of secular investigation, as well as all the needs of eternal warfare. Few, perhaps none, are fully aware of the mighty influence which the Christian training of nineteen centuries has exerted on the habits of thought, and on the mental calibre, of every in- dividual in modern civilized communities. Scoffers, wearied with the in- consistencies which mar the characters of professed religionists, and dazed by the enchantment which is lent by distance, sometimes extol the purity of heathen faiths, or the superiority of philosophical systems to all forms of faith. But impartial observers find in the Bible, as nowhere else, an embodiment of the best truths of all ages, expressed with a grand simpli- city which is without parallel, and suitable for a ready application to all wants. There will always be a large intellectual class, acknowledging an Omni- present Ruler who is All-loving, Almighty and All-wise, whom they de- light to worship as their Heavenly Father, but of whom, through fear of ‘* dividing the substance,’’ they hesitate to speak in terms which might be interpreted as claiming a knowledge of mysteries that are beyond their comprehension. There will always be a much larger class, so filled with a sense of their own weakness and unworthiness, that they yearn after a still closer and, as it were, brotherly relationship of sympathy and suf- fering, under which they may be emboldened to approach the throne of grace with the prayer of Dayid: ‘‘ Let the words of my mouth, and the meditation of my heart, be acceptable in thy sight, O Lord, my strength and my redeemer.’’? There will always be a third class, rejoicing in the belief that God is a Spirit, who is to be worshiped in spirit and in truth, who offers them at all times the spiritual guidance which is best suited to their immediate spiritual condition, and who will require nothing at their hands but a simple, childlike acceptance of that guidance and consequent obedience to their clearly perceived intimations of truth and duty. Each of these views is a relative and partial view. In each class there will al- ways be many who think, that even if it should be true that partial truths may answer all the positive requirements, the bare necessities of our na- ture, such harmonious development of our faculties as is most desirable, can only be attained through the study and acceptance of all the primary phases of belief, aud the search for the fundamantal postulates which unite them all and give them all their vitality. 1879.] : 153 {Chase. _ Faith cannot take the place of action or of reason ; action cannot take the place of faith or of reason ; reason cannot take the place of faith or of ac- tion. The province of faith is, however, the highest, because it deals direct- ly with eternal verities, and because it furnishes the sole authority for ac- tion and reason ; the province of action is next in order of dignity, because it determines character ; the province of reason is the lowest, because it deals mos‘ly with temporal and worldly relations, and because it indicates a defective intelligence, which can only slowly and laboriously reach a clear understanding of the contents of simple intuitions. None of the facts, either of theology or of metaphysics or of physics, can be gainsaid. Some of them are naturally, and someare spiritually dis- cerned. They may all be KNowN, because God has revealed himself, not only as Powerand as Way, but also as Wisdomand Love, as Truth and Life. In the coincident union of perfect humanity and perfect wisdom is found the Divine image, in which man was made and by which we are able to have the positive assurance, of full and indisputable self-evidence, in regard to all things which God has been pleased to reveal to us and which we are wil- ling to accept. Theories have no binding authority upon any one, and they have no value except as they may be made tributary to the discovery or to the application of new truths or new harmonies. Theologians, metaphy- sicians and physicists should all be mindful of the behest, ‘‘ne sufor ultra crepidam,;’’ they should also remember that the best interpretation of any truth is the one which accords most fully with all other truths. The bigh- est philosophy is that which is best fitted for the highest capabilities of im- mortal intelligence, The surest foundation for philosophy is the one on which Christianity is built, the Rock of Ages, the Eternal Word and Wis- dom of God. ; Stated Meeting, January 3, 1879. Present, 5 members. Vice-President, Mr, Fra.ey, in the Chair. A letter requesting exchanges of Proceedings, was received from Mr. P. Casamajor, Corresponding Secretary American Chemical Society, No. 11 East Fourteenth street, New York City, dated January 1, 1879. On motion the name of that Society was ordered to be placed on the list of correspondents to receive the Proceedings. A letter requesting exchanges was received from Prof. Carus, editor of the Zoologischer Anzeiger, through Mr. E. L. Mark, Instructor in Zoology in Harvard University, dated 48 Shephard street, Cambridge, Mass., December 23, PROC. AMER. PHILOS. Soc. xviit. 103. T. PRINTED MARCH 10, 1879. 154 'Jan. 3, 1878. On motion the Zoologischer Anzeiger was ordered to be placed on the list of correspondents to receive the Pro- ceedings. Donations for the Library were received from the Imperial Russian Academy and Geographical Society ; the Astronomi- cal Observatory at Dorpat ; the R. Prussian Academy ; the Austrian Geological Institute, and Geographical and Anthro- pological Societies ; the Societies at Emden and St. Gall ; the Annales des Mines, and Revue Politique; the Commercial Geographical Society at Bordeaux ; the R. Belgian Acade- my; the R. Astronomical, Geological, and Zoological Socie- ties, and London Nature; Mr. James Henry; the R. Irish Academy; the Canadian Naturalist; the Boston Natural History Society; the National Academy of Sciences; the Bureau of U. S. Geological Surveys of the Territories ; Mr. W. H. Howgate; and the Argentine Scientific Society. The death of Dr. Carl Friedrich Rokitansky, at Vienna, July 23, 1878, was announced by the Secretary. The death of Dr. Hermann Lebert, at Vevay, was reported from Leipsig, by Dr. Felix Fliigel. The report of the judges and clerks of the annual election was read, by which it appeared that the officers and mem- bers of Council for the ensuing year, were elected as fol- lows : President. George B. Wood. Vice-Presidents. Frederick Fraley, Eli K. Price, K. Otis Kendall. Secretaries. J. L, LeConte, Pliny E. Chase, George F. Barker, J. P. Lesley. Councillors for three years. Alfred L. Elwyn, Benj. H. Coates, Benj. V. Marsh. George H. Horn. 1879.] “155 [Derby. Curators. Hector Tyndale, Charles M. Cresson, Daniel G. Brinton. Treasurer. J. Sergeant Price. Pending nominations 871, 872, 873 were read. Mr. Lesley was nominated as Librarian ; and the meeting was adjourned. A Contribution to the Geology of the Lower Amazonas.* By Orvitute A. Dersy, M. S. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, Feb. 21, 1879.) In the following sketch of the geology of the region of the Lower Ama- zonas I have attempted to give a résumé of the most important results of the studies made by, and under the direction of, the late Prof. Ch. Fred. Hartt, in whom Science mourns the loss of one of its brightest ornaments in North America, and of its chief and ablest expounder in the southern con- tinent. It is, for the most part, condensed from an extensive report, pre- pared by Prof. Hartt as chief of the Geological Commission of the Empire of Brazil, the publication of which has been delayed, in consequence of the financial condition of the Empire and of the untimely death of the chief of the Commission. . The history of the explorations on which this sketch is based is briefly as follows: In 1870, Prof. Hartt, with a party of students, visited the Amazonas, ascending the Tocantins and the Tapajos to among their lower rapids, and examining the high lands of the vicinity of Santarem, Monte Alegre and Ereré. In the following year he returned, accompanied by myself, re-examined the Ereré and Tapajos regions and explored the table- topped mountains between Prainha and Monte Alegre, sending me, in the meanwhile, to Obydos and afterwards to the island of Marajé. These ex- plorations gave rise to a number of special papers, published in the Ameri- can scientific journals. On assuming direction of the Brazilian Geological Survey, Prof. Hartt engaged Mr. Herbert H. Smith, a member of the party of 1870, who was then on the Amazonas, to continue the geological ex- ploration, and he afterwards sent me, with Dr. Francisco José de Freitas, to the same region. Together with these two gentlemen I re-examined the Ereré region, and ascended the Maecurtii (Gurupatuba of the maps), as far as the fall called Pancada Grande. After this exploration, Mr. Smith continued the examination, which he had already begun, of the *A Portuguese version of this report is also being published in the Archivos do Museu Nacional of Rio de Janeiro, Vol. IT, 1378. Derby.] 156 [Feb. 21, region about Alenguer, ascended the river Curué de Alenguer as far as the Bem-fica fall, and afterwards revisited the lower Tapajos. Dr. Freitas and myself ascended the Trombetas and I afterwards revisited Marajé, The Devonian fossils have been studied by Mr. Richard Rathbun, while I have myself determined those of the Silurian and Carboniferous. Having been intimately associated with Prof. Hartt in all the Amazonian work, I can claim but little originality in the conclusions drawn from the observations and presented in this article, the most of them having been presented by my illustrious teacher in his various publications, or brought out in our discussions on the subject, in such a way that it is now impos- sible to determine the authorship of each idea. The work of the last ex- plorations by Messrs. Smith, Freitas and myself, in which Prof. Hartt, had no part, was mainly the determination of the character and age of the Ereré uplift, and of the extension and relations of the various Paleozoic deposits on the northern side of the Amazonas. It is proper to state that in regard to the Cretaceous age of the Ereré sandstone and the date of the elevation of the anticlinal, Prof. Hartt reserved his opinion for a more careful examination of the evidence that I had to present on that point, than he was ever able to make. I am confident, however, that if he had made such an examination, I should have been able to convince him of the accuracy of my observations and conclusions. The river known to geographers by the name Amazonas has, like many other rivers, various names which are applied by the inhabitants along its banks to different parts of its course. These popular designations of Amazonas, or Baixo (Lower) Amazonas, Solimées and Marafion, mark ap- proximately three sections of the valley, which are very distinct in physical characteristics and have very different geological histories. They may, therefore, be advantageously retained to designate the lower, middle and upper portion of the great river. The differences in these three sections are due to the relations of the valley with the component parts of the South American continent ; so that in order to understand the structure of the valley, we must bear in mind the general features, long since recognized, of that continent, This is composed of three distinct mountainous regions, more or less united by elevated plains, in which are excavated the great depressions occupied by the fluvial systems of the Orinoco, Amazonas and Rio de la Plata. The Andes form a long, narrow strip of great elevation, along the western coast, and the mountains of Brazil and of Guiana, considerably less ele- vated than the Andes, occupy extensive areas in the eastern and northern portions of the continent. The space between these three elevated regions or nuclei of the continent is oceupied by vast elevated plains, generally less than three thousand feet high, except in a narrow strip between the highlands of Brazil and Guiana, in which the continuity of the plains is entirely interrupted by the depressed valley of the Amazonas. It is also to be noted that between the Andes and the two elevated regions of the eastern part of the continent, the continuity of the plateaux is almost de- 1879.] 157 [De®by. stroyed by the great cuts made by the Rios Paraguay and Madeira in the sonth, and the Rios Negro and Orinoco in the north, and only a com- paratively slight continental depression would be required to entirely sepa- rate these regions. In fact, the region of Guiana may be considered an island, in consequence of the existence of that geographical phenomenon, the Cassiquiari, uniting the Orinoco and Rio Negro. The Amazonas, unlike the Orinoco and the La Plata in this respect, has relations with all three of the mountainous regions above indicated. The upper part, or Marafion, belongs exclusively to the Andes ; the middle, or Solimées portion, is in the region intermediate between the Andes and the highlands of Brazil and of Guiana; and the Lower Amazonas, from the mouth of the Rio Negro to the sea, is between these two last masses of highlands, From a purely geographical point of view, the Lower Amazonas and the Solimées might be united in a single section, because the differences be- tween these two portions are, at present, much less than those between the Marafion and the rest of the great stream. Taking into consideration, however, the geological structure, and especially the conditions which geology shows to have existed in former times, it will be seen, as I hope to prove, that this division of the valley into three. sections is a natural one. An examination of the hydrography of the Amazonian basin, taken as a whole, reveals much more noticeable differences in the three portions than are seen in the valley properly so called. The Marafion and its great southern tributaries in the Andean region, the Huallaga and the Ucayael, descend from great elevations in the cordilheiras, and flow northerly in - the general direction of the trend of the mountains, until, escaping from them, the Marafion takes an easterly direction, in which it presents a no- table contrast with the Ucayale which, although it has descended to a com- paratively low level, a long distance above its mouth, still continues to flow in a northerly direction, as if it were forced for some reason, to follow the margin of the mountainous region. The northern tributaries of the Maraiion, including the Napo which empties nearly opposite the mouth of the Ucayale, descend from the Andes of Equador in a south-easterly direction, directed by the slope of the mountains. The area drained by the Marafion and its tributaries is very long in the direction north-south, but very narrow in the direction east-west. In the Solimées region, on the contrary, the region drained on the north is rectangular in shape, the longest axis of the rectangle extending east- west, parallel with the river, and the tributaries in this region, including the Rio Negro, flow in valleys of slight elevation in an easterly direction, subparallel with the Solimées, as if they were crowded down towards the south, and directed in their courses by a line of highlands, uniting the mountains of Guiana with the Andes. The southern area, drained by the Solimées and included between the Ucayale, the Madeira, and the eastern prolongation of the Andes in Bolivia, is of triangular shape. The tribu- taries in this area rise in the plateau east of the Andes, at moderate eleva- Derfy.} 158 [Feb. 21, tions (the source of the Purts is according to Chandless at an elevation of only 1,088 feet above the level of the sea), and, as Chandless has already pointed out, flow in their upper courses in a general easterly direction, as if directed by an imperceptible slope from the Andes. In the Lower Amazonas region, the mountains of Guiana are compara- tively near to the river, and, in consequence, the northern tributaries are small and flow directly towards the main river, with a slight deflection towards the east. On the southern side, on the contrary, the great plateau’ of central Brazil extends from near the Amazonas to the headwaters of the Paraguay and the mountains of Goyaz. The great tributaries, Tapajos, Xingti and Tocantins, traverse this plateau in a northerly direction, and descend to the level of the Amazonas by a steep incline that commences a short distance above their mouths. I have purposely omitted to mention the Madeira, because this river is related to all three of the sections of the basin. One of its tributaries, the Guaporé, rises in the highest part of the central plateau of Brazil, and appears to flow along a margin of that pla-. teau (the so-called Cordilheira de Parecis), until it joins the Mamoré which, like the Beni and Madre de Deus, descends from the high Andes of Bolivia, circling round the great eastern projection of the Andes, in the district of Santa Cruz de Ja Sierra. “The lower Madeira, which forms the division between the regions of the Solimées and the lower Amazonas, flows north- easterly, subparallel with the great features of eastern Brazil, viz: the mountain chains of the coast and of Minas Geraes, and the valleys of the upper Sao Francisco and upper Parané. Farther on I shall have to speak . of the significance of this fact. Let us now consider in greater detail, the physical and geological fea- tures of the Lower Amazonas region, the immediate subject of this article. What most impresses the traveler on the Amazonas, after the enormous extension, width and volume of the river, the labyrinth of its side channels and the richness of its flora, is the great extent of the varzea or flood-plain that, monotonous as the sea, accompanies the river in a broad belt on each side, from the mouth to the foot of the Andes. Being generally well wooded, the forest gives this flood-plain a false appearance of dry land, and the traveler is very liable to be deceived regarding its true character and extent. To form a true estimate of its importance, it is necessary to ascend one of the few eminences which occur along the margin of the river, as those of Monte Alegre, Santarem and Obydos. From these ele- vations there is seen a great marshy plain, almost on a Jevel with the river, diversified with lakes and island-like groups of trees, and intersected by numerous anastomosing lateral canals, furos or parand-merins, which plain extends for many miles to theshighlands of the opposite side, visible in the distant horizon. In this vast plain, the river, great as it is, appears a nar- row ribbon of water, almost lost in the immensity of its ancient bed, for the varzea can only be considered as a portion, which has been filled up, of the original bed of the river, or, rather, of the estuary which preceded the riverine condition. In this great depression, the river curves from side 1879. ] 159 [Derby. to side, now appreaching one bank, now the other, but rarely reaching the foot of the highlands, except at a few points in the vicinity of Santarem and Obydos. Below the mouth of the Xingt, the varzea which, with rare interrup- tions, forms the banks of the river, as well as the innumerable islands (with the exception of the eastern portion of Marajé), is densely wooded, the rubber tree being particularly abundant and characteristic. From the same point to the mouth of the Rio Negro it is frequently open, and cov- ered with coarse grasses and marsh plants. In certain parts, as in front of Santarem and Obydos, it is sufficiently high along the margins of the river and canals, to be above the reach of the ordinary annual floods, and in these parts there are a few plantations of cacio, and some cattle farms ; but for the most part the varzea is uninhabited, excepting for a few months during the rubber season, in the wooded portions, and during the dry sea- son, in the region of the open plains, when the herds are driven from the’ highlands to take advantage of the pasturage. Besides margining the main river, the varzea extends innumerable branches into every break in the margin of the highlands, produced by the valleys of the tributaries, whose own flood plains are so closely united to that of the Amazonas, that it is often difficult to determine where the valley proper of a tributary ter- minates and where that of the Amazonas begins. The highlands or terra firma are very variable in character and eleva- tion, but may be classed in three divisions, viz: low plains, high plains, and irregular or mountainous regions. The first, having only a few feet of elevation above the varzea, are slightly developed in the lower Ama- zonas region, above the mouth of the Xingii; but from that point to the sea, the low plains are of considerable extent and importance, forming the campos of the island of Marajé and a wooded belt on each side of the river, which belt, in the vicinity of Para, has a considerable extension towards the south. The elevated plains lie on the southern side, at a considerable dis- tance back trom the river, behind the low plains just mentioned, in the region about Pari; but to the westward they approach more and more nearly to the river, until finally they appear on its banks, in the bluffs of Cu- cury, a little below Santarem, and afterwards on the same side, in the Serra dos Parintintins, near Villa Bella. On the northern side they form a series of high table-topped hills, which, lying a few miles back from the river, com- mence almost in front of the mouth of the Xingd, and, under the names of Serras de Almeirim, Pari, Velha Pobre, Paraudquara, etc., extend west- ward behind Monte Alegre as far as, or beyond, the river Trombetas. The same plains appear also in the lower highlands of Monte Alegre and Obydos. ; Where they have not suffered denudation these plains form table-lands, highest on the northern side of the river, where those just mentioned reach an elevation of about 1,000 feet, while those of Santarem and others on the southern side have less than half this elevation. In many regions they have been reduced by denudation to low, gently undulated plains, like those Derby.) 1 60 [Feb. 21, of Prainha, Monte Alegre, Santarem and Obydos, in the midst of which there appears occasionally a conical or flat-topped peak, to attest the orig- inal character of the plain and the extent of the denudation. The table- lands and their slopes are generally wooded, while the lower undulated plains are open and grassy, covered with a karren soil of loose sand. In the interior, on both sides of the river, these table-lands appear to rise gradually in height, until they become united with the more elevated plains of central Guiana and Brazil. The last division of the highlands, that of the hilly or mountainous country, is represented, near the northern bank of the Amazonas, by an isolated group of mountains, in the vicinity of Monte Alegre and Ereré. These rise abruptly in the midst of a plain to a height of 1,000 feet, and are, in general, rocky or sandy and barren. Associated with these mountains and having the same geological structure is a low, stony campo. Ascend- ing the tributaries on both the northern and the southern side, there is found, in the regions of the rapids, at a distance varying from 50 to 200 miles from the main river, a hilly country, whose highest points are, in general, lower than those of the Ereré group of mountains. These hilly regions are usually well-wooded. with many valuable kinds of timber, the Brazil and sapucaia nut trees (Bertholletia excelsa and Lecythis grandi- flora) being very abundant and characteristic. To these hilly regions succeed, on the north, the high mountains of Guiana and, on the south, the table-lands of central Brazil. The differences above noted in the different regions of the highlands or terra firma depend on the geological structure of the valley, and before describing minutely the different formations, it may be well to present a general sketch of the geology of this part of the valley, and indicate the relations of the regions above described. Prof. Hartt has well described this structure as follows ;* ‘*‘The Ama- zonian valley first appeared as a wide strait between two islands or groups of islands, one now forming the base and nucleus of the Brazilian plateau, the other, on the north, the plateau of Guiana, These islands first appeared at, or shortly after, the beginning of the Silurian Age.”’ In this canal, before the elevation of the Andes, were deposited a series of beds, representing the Upper Silurian, Devonian, Carboniferous and Cretaceous, which appeared successively in dry land on each side, narrow- ing the strait between the two islands, Prof. Hartt continues: ‘‘ Before the rise of the Andes the valley of the Amazonas consisted simply of two gulfs united by a narrow strait. The Andes were thrown up across the mouth of the western gulf, converting it into a basin, though it probably had an outlet both to the north and south, The whole continent was afterwards depressed, so that the waters covered widely the Guayanian and Brazilian plateaux, and the Tertiary beds were deposited there, varying in thickness, coarseness or fineness, according to the conditions under which they were formed. * * * * * Journal of the American Geographical Society, Vol. IIT, p, 281, 1872, 1879.) 161 [Derby. ‘*When the continent was once more brought above water, the plateaux, leveled by their new acquisition of strata, first rose; but, by and by, the present water sheds, joining the great plateaux with the Andes, came above water and the Amazonian valley became a Mediterranean, communicating eastward with the Atlantic by a narrow strait. The soft Tertiary beds of the province of Paré were rapidly denuded by the action of the sea during the rise of the land. Probably, while Guiana existed as an island, the Amazonas felt the influence of the equatorial current, which may have aided in carrying away the results of denudation. In the end, the Ter- tiary beds were completely swept away over an immense tract of country; the Serras of Parti and the similar mountains to the northward were left as monuments of their existence. * * * While the Tertiary sheet was being denuded away, the streams from the highlands were cutting for themselves valleys through the same beds, and these, forming estuaries, were widened to a greater extent than it would have been possible for the streams them- selves to have done. During this epoch of denudation deposits were formed, not only in the interior sea, but also in the gulf into which it opened to the east. * * * As the rise continued, the interior sea, now shallowed by much sediment and freshened by the tribute of a thousand Streams, was rapidly narrowed in area, and the river Amazonas, properly speaking, which hitherto emptied into a lake at the foot of the Andes, began to extend its channel, following the retreating waters.” The above quotation explains clearly the origin of the varzea, of the low plains of Paré, and of the higher plains of the interior of the province. In the hilly regions the inclined beds of the formations older than the Tertiary, including the Cretaceous, the Paleozoic and the Archean, appear in virtue of the denudation of the overlying Tertiary sheet. The rocks of the ancient islands, the first lands that appeared in the ocean in which the continent was forming, have been profoundly meta- morphosed, being converted into granite, gneiss, quartzite and metamor- phic schists, and by reason of this, the extent of these islands may be approximately determined by the study of the distribution of the meta- morphic rocks. Those of the north appear in the high mountains of Gui- ana, along the boundary between Brazil and Guiana and, decreasing in elevation towards the south, extend to a line that, beginning near the At- lantic and the mouth of the Amazonas, in about latitude 1° N., extends a little south of west, to the confluence of the Rio Branco and Rio Negro, between latitudes 1° and 2° 8. Along this line, which represents the an- cient coast, the metamorphic rocks are in general only exposed in the valleys, by the denudation of the Tertiary beds. To the west of the mouth of the Rio Branco they extend to, or beyond, the upper Rio Negro. On the Brazilian side, the metamorphic rocks only form high mountains in regions far distant from the Amazonas ; but they are met with under the other formation in the greater part, if not in all the elevated portions of Brazil. In the Amazonian region, they form the rapids of the rivers Tocantins, Xingi, Tapajos and Madeira, the line of exposures passing the PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xviir. 108. U. PRINTED MARCH 10, 1879. Derby.] 162 [Feb. 21, Tocantins between 3° and 4° of south latitude, the Tapajos between 4° and 5°, and the Madeira between 8° and 9°, at the rapids of Sio Antonio. The lower Madeira appears to mark approximately the western limit of the ancient metamorphic region, because in the next river to the westward, the Purts, the rocks under consideration were not met with by Chandless, in the course of his careful exploration. The parallelism of the course of the lower Madeira with the great surface features of eastern Brazil, where the metamorphic rocks are thrown into great folds, trending north-easterly, has already been noted. It seems possible that the Madeira is directed by such a fold, or, what is more probable, by a margin of the metamorphic region, which should there have that direction. It is possible that the Guaporé also marks another margin of the same region, which being trans- verse to the folds is independent of their trend. It is certain that in the Guaporé region there was a canal between the metamorphic region of Brazil and a similar one in Bolivia, the Chiquitos region of D’Orbigny, comparable with the strait between Brazil and Guiana, now occupied by the Amazonas. As in eastern and central Brazil, the metamorphic rocks of the Ama- zonian region can be naturally divided into two very distinct series, of which one, the most ancient, consists of crystalline rocks, including gneiss, gneiss-granite and syenite, and the other, more modern, of altered, but in general non-crystalline rocks, consisting of quartzites, metamorphic schists and crystalline limestones. The older series corresponds in character and geological age with that of the Serra do Mar and Serra do Mantiqueira, in the provinces of Rio de Janeiro and Minas Geraes, which was referred by Prof. Hartt to the Laurentian. This series has been but little studied in the Amazonian region. Custelnau speaks of gray gneiss on the Tocantins above the first rapids, and Chandless met with gneiss in a similar position on the Tapajos. Sfir. Ferreira Penna, of Pard, informed me that the rapids of the Xingt are formed by gneiss and diorite, and showed me speci- mens of the first, consisting of flesh-colored feldspar and quartz with a small proportion of black mica, the rock in hand specimens appearing massive and granitoid. The lower rapids of the Madeira are also formed of gneiss, but I have seen no specimens or descriptions of the rock. On the northern side, gneiss was met with ¢n situ, by Siir. Penna, in the rapids of the Araguary, a small river emptying into the Atlantic, a little to the north of the mouth of the Amazonas, and pebbles of the same rock were met with in the explorations of the Geological Commission, on the rivers Maecurti, Curué, and Trombetas. I am informed by the engineer, Maj. Coutinho, that gneiss is the prevailing rock on the Rio Branco, except at the mouth, where he found red syenite. I found this last rock also in a zone about half a mile in width, at the second rapid of the river Trombe- tas, and saw pebbles ofthe same on the Maecurt, coming from some point above that reached by our explorations. I could not determine, in the short time at my disposal on the Trombetas, whether the rock is stratified or not, and it is possibly of eruptive origin, The syenite consists princi- 1879.] 163 [Derby. pally of flesh-colored feldspar, with a small mixture of hornblende and small scattered spots of a green mineral in Gecomposition. Quartz is en- tirely lacking. The rocks of the second metamorphic series are well exposed in the first rapids of the Tocantins, where they were examined as far as the Cachoeira de Guariba, by Prof. Hartt in 1870. The following notes are taken from his manuscripts. Ascending the Tocantins, the river is at first margined by bluffs of Tertiary sands and clays which, as the rapids are approached, recede from the river and the metamorphic rocks begin to appear. The first exposure of these last met with, is ‘‘A granular quartzite, very hard and with a saccharine fracture, the rock being much traversed by quartz veins. The stratification is very obscure and the rock appears to have a sort of slaty structure. In some places it is very compact, bluish and cherty, and is so cut up by veinlets as to appear honey-combed on decomposition. Next appears, at the Ponta do Noberto, a taleose rock, badly decomposed, but appearing to have an easterly dip. Above this is a bed of compact reddish quartzite. From the Praia dos Mortos there extends a long line of similar rocks, with an easterly dip. At Jequirapua, . found the following section, given in ascending order : 1. Shaly sandstone. _ 2. Compact white sandstone, rather, fine grained, the grain being clear. It weathers brownish, and is traversed by quartz veins. 8. A thin band of purple shale, stratification obscured by faults and ob- lique slips. 4. Heavy band of ferruginous shale, much decomposed. 5. Bed of very compact bluish, whitish and reddish mottled quartzites. 6. Red shale much traversed by little veins. Just below Alcobaga, I observed quartzite with a north-east dip. At Alcobaga are heavy beds of bluish quartzite, very hard and presenting surfaces polished by the river.” . Compact quartzites were observed at various points above Alcobaga, in one place with the strike corresponding with the direction of the river, forming long rocky islands or lines of rock. The dip is well marked, be- ing a few degrees north of east, the angle being about 40°. “‘Just below the Cachoeira (rapid) de Tapanhtiaquara are green schis- tose rocks, dipping eastward, and much diorite. In the schists I found amianthus and serpentine. The rocks that choke up the river and form the rapids are, as far as I could determine, a series of gray quartzites, in- terstratified with thin beds of finely laminated shale: The upper end of the high wooded I]ha das Pacas is composed of a mass of hard, vitreous- looking, bluish or reddish quartzite, much traversed by little quartz veins. On the left bank opposite are ledges and skerries of a slaty rock, with a strong easterly dip. The islets of Janatiquéra are bare masses of a hard cherty rock, whose relations to the other rocks I did not determine. ** At Porta de Braga, a bluff projection on the left bank of the river, the shore is encumbered by very large masses of iron ore, in part a mammillary hematite. The rocks of the vicinity, consisting of quartzites and sand- Derby.] 164 [Feb. 21, stones, have a strong easterly dip. As I remember it, the deposit appears to be superficial, and I doubt if it is of economic value. **Opposite the Praia Grande is a very long narrow line of rocks, running south a few degrees east, and flanked by the schistose rocks, which here present the ordinary eastward dip. The line of rocks is formed by a nar- row outcrop of diorite, which I suspect to forma dyke. This diorite is much cracked and, decomposing concentrically, the fragments give rise to a confusion of rounded blocks. ‘*Near by, the slaty rocks again appear, with the cherty rocks appa- rently overlying them in discordance of stratification. These latter rocks may therefore be of much later origin. In one place I thought that I ob- served signs of horizontal stratification. Near the upper end of an enor- mous sand bank, called Praia Grande, the slaty rocks crop out again, the strike being N. 30° W. and the dip 27° E. *«The Cachoeira de Guariba is formed by the outcrop of a series of meta- morphic rocks, an alternation of shales, quartzites and limestones, extend- ing across the river, forming a sort of dam. The strike here is somewhat irregular, but usually a few degrees west of north, the dip being eastward and at a moderate angle. I could not ascend above the Cachoeira de Guari- ba, from lack of time and of a proper boat. From all that I was able to judge, the metamorphic rocks must extend much further up the river, and it would be very important to have them examined. Whether the whole series that I saw belongs to the same geological horizon or not, I was un- able, in the absence of fossils, to determine, but, afler my studies of the Carboniferous and Devonian of the Amazonas, I think there can be little doubt that the series is Silurian. ‘Tt is interesting to note the dip of these rocks, which is pretty con- stantly towards the east, the strike being remarkably northerly. The fact of the occurrence of trap dykes is also important. I saw no porphyries like those of the lower falls of the Tapajos, and I cannot help thinking that the Tocantins beds above described are newer than those of the Tupajos.’’ The metamorphic rocks of the rapids of the Tapajos were described by Prof. Hartt in the Bulletin of the Cornell University. They consist of quartzites and other rocks similar to quartzites, but without apparent granulation, the beds being traversed by enormous dykes of porphyry and diorite. They are very compact, of a red or chocolate color, trequently marked by little green points, due to some undeterminable mineral in de- composition. In hand specimens the amorphous rocks appear to be igne- ous, a few scattered crystals of feldspar giving them the appearance of porphyry ; but seen in mass, the water-worn surfaces show with great dis- tinctness, lines of lamination and wave and ripple-marks, which prove conclusively the sedimentary origin of the rock. The beds ure inclined 15°-20° 8. E., the strike being N. 80°-40° E. The porphyry of the dykes is evidently eruptive. It consists of a com- . pact, amorphous, feldspathic base of a dark chocolate color, in which are scattered crystals of red feldspar, rounded grains of quartz and little 1879.] 165 [Derby. masses of the green mineral above mentioned. There was also observed in the cachoeiras, two exposures of crystalline rocks which appear to form dykes, but this character was not well determined. One of these is fine- grained and dark-colored, the other consists of light-red feldspar, with grains of quartz. We found on the Trombetas a series very similar to a part of that of the Tapajos. It is exposed in the third cachoeira, called Quebra-potes, and also in the lower course of the river Cachorro, which empties into the Trom- betas just above that cachoeira. The rock varies in color, some beds being dark red, others purplish, and like that of the Tapajos it is marked by green spots. The mass is amorphous, feldspathic, sometimes with small grains of glassy quartz, and it may be classified as felsite or eurite. The stratification is very distinct, and the lamination, wave and ripple-marks are as clearly shown as in any modern sandstone. The beds of felsite rest on those of the syenite already described, which is also marked by green spots, and dip 20° N. E., the strike being N. 30° W. Resting unconform- ably on this series are beds of sandstone, containing Upper Silurian fossils. This last observation is important, proving as it does that the metamor- phism of the rocks and the dislocation of the beds must have taken place during the Lower Silurian or Archean. I am convinced that this conclu- sion can be extended to the whole metamorphic region. The similarity on lithological characters of the rocks of the Trombetas and those of the Tapajos is such, that it can scarcely be doubted that the formations in the two localities are identical. The difference in strike, from N. N. W. on the Trombetas, to N. N. E. on the Tapajos, can readily be admitted in a single system of upheaval, which can include also the disturbed rocks of the Tocantins, where the strike is N. or N.N. W. It should be observed that, while the compact quartzites of the Tocantins resemble the rocks of the Tapajos and Trombetas, the rest of the Tocantins series, consisting of granular quartzites, talcose schists, and crystalline limestones, recall the rocks of the rivers Araguay, and upper Tocantins, and of the mountains of Goyaz and Minas Geraes. It has long since been observed that the metamorphic rocks of Brazil, Guiana and Venezuela have in general a north-easterly strike ; later obser- vations, however, have shown that the strike is often variable, frequently taking a north westerly direction. It seems probable, therefore, that the epoch of metamorphism and upheaval of the ancient rocks was the same in eastern Brazil and Guiana as in the Amazonian region, that is to say, it was anterior to the Upper Silurian. The evidence in respect to the epoch of metamorphism and upheaval afforded by other regions of Brazil is very scanty, but, as far as it goes, it sustains this generalization, although it must be confessed it is as yet insufficient to entirely confirm it. In the provinces of Bahia and Sergipe there is a series of beds of undetermined age, but which ap- pears to be either Devonian or Carboniferous. These beds have been disturbed without being metamorphosed, and they rest unconformably Derby.) : 166 . [Feb. 21, on gneiss, and are overlaid unconformably by Cretaceous deposits. The metamorphism of the gneiss in this region was, therefore, early Pale- ozoic or Archean. In the southern provinces, the evidence is more conclu- sive. In Santa Catharina and Rio Grande do Sul, beds, whose Carbonifer- ous age appears to be well proven, lie horizontally above inclined metamor- phic beds. These Carboniferous deposits extend across the province of Parana to the southern part of the province of Sao Paulo. Near Ponta Grossa in Parani, Mr. Wagoner, assistant to the Geological Commission, found, underneath the Carboniferous beds, others, also horizontal, contain- ing Devonian fossils. In that region, therefore, we may refer the upheaval and metamorphism to a period anterior to the Devonian, and probably, as on the Amazonas, to one anterior to the Upper Silurian. We have seen that the metamorphic rocks present two distinct series, of which one, consisting of crystalline rocks, was, with all probability, re- ferred by Prof. Hartt to the Laurentian. It is probable that this series had been metamorphosed and disturbed before the deposition of the second non- crystalline series. It is true that there appears to be a concordance in stratification between the two series, but it is by no means certain that this concordance is perfect, and that the older series had not been disturbed (probably in the same general direction), before the great general move- ment of upheaval, which affected and gave character to the whole meta- morphic region of Brazil, if not of the entire continent. In regard to the age of the second metamorphic series, we have by elimi- nation reduced it to the ages intermediate between the Laurentian and the Upper Silurian, that is to say, the Huronian and the Lower Silurian. | It seems probable that both are represented, and, accepting Prof. Hartt’s sup- position, that the rocks of the Tapajos are more ancient than those of the Tocantins, we may provisionally refer those, with the felsites of the Trom- betas, to the Huronian, and these to the Lower Silurian, a reference which accords with another opinion of Prof. Hartt, that is, that the granular quartzites (itacolumites) and taleose schists of Minas Geraes belong to the Lower Silurian. At the end of this movement of upheaval and folding, the primitive islands of Brazil and Guiana had received enormous additions to their original areas, and extended to the limits already indicated, in treating of the distribution of the metamorphic rocks, leaving between the two islands a strait, some three or four degrees of latitude in width, in the narrowest part. From that time, which was. during, or at the end of, the Lower Silurian commenced the proper history of the Amazonian valley. In this strait was deposited, without great oscillations of level or up- heavals, comparable with those that had disturbed the metamorphic series, a series of beds gently inclined from the margins towards the center, represent- ing the formations from the Upper Silurian to the Cretaceous, inclusive. There were, however, before the deposition of the Tertiary beds, considerable eruptions of trap and diorite, and local disturbances in at least one region, that of Ereré. This region is so important in the study of the geology of the Amazonas, as to merit special description, 1879.] 167 (Derby. Situated on the margin of the varzea, and about two leagues to the west- ward of the village of Monte Alegre, there is an isolated group of moun- tains, consisting of numerous, small monoclinal ridges, separated one from another, and disposed in an ellipse around a central plain, of which the elevation is a few feet at most above the level of the Amazonas. The major axis of the ellipse is some ten or twelve miles long. and lies in the direction of E.-W. The principal mountain, called Serra de Tajuri, is about 350 metres high, and is situated on the north-east side of the ellipse ; from Tajuri, a curved line of low ridges extends to the second serra in size, that of Ereré, which is on the southern side, and has an elevation of 250 metres ; then come the smaller serras of Aroxi, Maxira, Paraizo, Juliio and Uru- cury, the last being placed at the western end of the ellipse ; between this and Tajuri there is a considerable number of low serras, without names, which have never been explored. All of these serras present an abrupt slope towards the central plain, and a gentle slope, following the inclination of the strata, on the opposite side. This inclination, which varies from 10° to 20°, is N. N. E. in Tajuri, E. in the ridges between Tajuri and Ereré, S. in this last, and W. in Urucury. This variation in dip proves that this group of mountains is only the remnant ofa great anticlinal, of which the central, and by far the larger, part has been denuded away. This opinion, respecting the structure of the region, is supported by the structure of the low Serra de Paittina, which is situated outside of the ellipse, some three or four miles to the south of the Serra de Ereré, with which it is parallel. As was to be expected from its position in relation to the other mountains, Paittina was found to be a synclinal ridge. Itis possible that to the north. ward of Tajuri there are other synclinal ridges, similar to Paittina. There have not yet been definitely recognized in other parts of the val- ley, any elevations, corresponding in age and structure to those of Ereré. I have reasons, however, for believing that, in the vicinity of Obydos, the Serra de Curumt and perhaps that of Cunury may belong to the same sys- tem. Near the margin of the metamorphic region, on the Guiana side at least, the Paleozoic beds are gently inclined, at an angle of 5°-10° ; but in general these beds appear to lie horizontally. The first member of this Paleozoic series of the Amazonas is the Upper Silurian. The rocks of this age appear on the Guiana side, in a belt of a few miles in width, which extends in the direction east-west for a consid- erable distance, if not along the whole southern margin of the metamorphic region of Guiana. They have been recognized on the Trombetas, Curua and Maecurt, and from specimens brought by Sr. Ferreira Penna, from the Maraca, a small river which empties nearly opposite the western end of Marajé6, I judge that they extend eastward nearly to the Atlantic. These rocks have been best studied on the Trombetas. They there appear in a belt four or five miles wide, forming the first and part of the second cachoeira. They were also found, well exposed, in a hill of some 100 metres of elevation, called Oiteiro do Cachorro, situated on the right bank of the river of the same name, a little above its confluence with the Trom- Derby.] 168 [Feb. 21, betas. The lower part of this hill is composed of felsite, above which the Upper Silurian beds form a magnificent overhanging cliff. In the lower part of the second cachoeira, called Vira-Mundo, the Silurian beds rest on syenite. The dip is approximately 5° 8.8. W., the strike being N. 65° W. I estimate the total thickness of the series at about 1,000 feet. The character of the beds is remarkably uniform. They consist almost exclusively of hard argillaceous and micaceous sandstones, generally thin- bedded, but with some massive beds of pure sandstone. The color is very variable, being white, yellow, red or purplish, but the predominant color is some shade of red, generally mottled or banded. Limestones are entirely lacking, and schists are rare and of slight importance, as regards their thickness, but interesting on account of their peculiar characters. One set of beds of cherty schist, about 20 feet thick, is found at the base of the series, in contact with the syenite. This rock looks like one that had suffered some alteration, and this appearance might be taken to prove that the syenite is of igneous origin, and that it had been ejected after the deposition of these beds, effecting an alteration in them. As, however, the altered appearance is less marked in the part of the schists which is in immediate contact with the syenite, than in the upper portion of the bed, I believe that their peculiar appearance is due to some other cause. Another schist of undetermined thickness occurs at the base of the cliff, forming the front of the Oiteiro do Cachorro. It consists of a soft clay, impregnated with alum, which also occurs abundantly in free crystals. At the foot of the Cachoeira Vira-Mundo, and just above the cherty rocks above mentioned, there is a bed of fine-grained, yellowish sandstone, con- taining a few fossils of which we collected with considerable difficulty suf- ficient to determine the age of the formation. The fossils are all in the state of casts and, except a species of Beyrichia and a fragment of a Trilo- bite, are all Molluscan. The most common is an Orthoceras, which is how- ever indeterminable. The genera, Rhynchonella, Orthis, Chonetes, Stropho- donta, Lingula, Pholidops, Bucania, Conularia and Ctenodonta are repre- sented. Among these the species Orthis hybrida Sow., Lingula cuneata Conrad, and Bucania trilobata Conrad are recognizable. In the Oiteiro do Cachorro are thin beds of shaly sandstone, with well marked fucoids, ap- parently of the species Orthrophychus Harlani Conrad. These fossils indicate a close correspondence with the Medina sandstone of the Niagara group. Throughout the whole series worm-tubes are abundant. The same series of beds were met with on the Curué and Maecurt, with characters identical with those just described for the Trombetas. On these rivers the Silurian rocks form cachoeiras, that were impassible with the means at our disposal, and for this reason we did not succeed in reaching the base of the series, where the fossiliferous beds occur. Worm-tubes and indeterminable fucoids were, however, met with. The Upper Silurian has not yet been recognized on the southern side of the valley, but, as all the sections on that side are very incomplete, it is by no means certain that they do not exist. It is possible that the cherty beds of the Tocantins, 1879.] 169 [Derby. mentioned by Prof. Hartt, may belong to this series ; but as cherts are com - mon also in the Devonian and Carboniferous, it is impossible, in the absence of specimens, to form a definite opinion respecting the age of those of the Tocantins. The Devonian is best exposed on the northern side of the valley, where it forms a broad belt, bordering the narrower Silurian belt, and disappears under the Carboniferous deposits, to reappear farther south in the Ereré anticlinal. The beds of this age are variable in character, and may be di- vided by differences in the rocks and fossils into three groups, which, for convenience, may be named for the locality in which each was best studied, the Maecurt, the Ereré andthe Curué group. It must be remembered, how- ever, that all three of these groups are represented at each of the above lo- calities. The first, or Maecurti group, consists of a few beds of coarse, white or yellowish sandstone, which, on the Maecurii and Curudé, have a thickness of thirty feet. On both of these rivers this group is well exposed, with a dip of about 5° §.S. W. The rock is hard insome layers, but very friable in others, and is highly fossiliferous; On the Trombetas it is represented by a bed of sandstone, so friable as to be almost a bank of sand, and at Ereré only a portion of the upper bed is exposed, and no fossils were found at either of these localities. The fossils are impressions, culored and some- what consolidated by oxide of iron ; they are beautifully preserved, and so abundant and varied that, with a few hours’ work, we made an enormous collection, containing about seventy-five species. Trilobites are represented by species of Homalonotus, Dalmania, Phacopsand Pretus ; Gasteropods by Bellerophon, Holopea and Platyceras ; Lamellibranchs by a large number of species of the genera Modiomorpha, Limoptera, Edmondia, Grammysia and others. The most interesting fossils are, however, the Brachiopods, which have been carefully studied by Mr. Rathbun, who has described* twenty- one species from the Maecurti, of which thirteen were also found on the Curua in equivalent beds, nine in the overlying beds of the Ereré group, and six in the lower and middle Devonian of New York. Of the species common to this group and that of Ereré, those that are abundant in one are generally rare in the other, and this, with the numerous species which are limited to each group, gives a special expression to the fauna of each, which justified their separation. The most abundant and characteristic Brachi- opods of the Maecurt group are Amphigenia elongata Hall, Spiriferu duo- denaria (?) Hall, Strophodonta perplana Hall, Rhynchonella dotis (?) Hall, Vitulina pustulosa Hall, Streptorhynchus Agassizii Hartt, and new species of Chonetes and Orthis. The two first and the last new species were not met with at Ereré. It will be seen that these fossils indicate a close relationship to the Corniferous group, which bears about the same stratigraphical and paleontological relation to the overlying Hamilton group, as does the Maecurti group to that of Ereré. These last two may, therefore, be considered as the Brazilian equivalents of the North American formations. , mee of the Boston Society of Natural History, Vol. XX, pp. 14-39, Oo, PROC. AMER. PHILOS. sOc. xviI. 108. vV. PRINTED MARCH 11, 1879. Derby:] 170 [Feb. 21, The Ereré group occupies a considerable area in the central plain between the mountains of Ereré, but so sub-divided, denuded and disturbed by eruptions of trap, as to present serious difficulties for study, which were, however, overcome by Mr. Smith in 1876, who succeeded in making a com- plete section and in proving, by means of fossils, the unity of the group. Mr. Smith calculated the total thickness at about 200 feet, divided between thirteen distinct beds, of which the greater part consist of fine-grained, micaceous sandstone, disposed in thin beds, with subordinate beds of black shale. The sandstone is generally white or yellowish, but exposed to the weather, it becomes reddish, and the shale often weathers white. Near the base of the group there are a few beds of a compact cherty sandstone, that breaks with great regularity into cubical blocks. Fossils are more or less abundant in all of the beds, those of the shale being different from those of the sandstone. The same beds were met with on the Maecuré and Curua, but less sub-divided, with fewer fossils, and without the shales.” The thick- ness of the group on the Curua appears to be less than at Ereré. The fauna is very similar to that described from the Maecurt group, but, except in the class of Brachiopods, it is less rich, both in species and individuals. Mr. Rathbun has described twenty-four species of Brachiopods,* two of Trilo- bites, eight of Lamellibranchs and six of Gasteropods.+ Of the first some have already heen mentioned ; thirteen are limited to this group, of which the most abundant and characteristic are Retzia Jamesiana Hartt, } Retzia Wardiana Hartt, and Discina lodensis Hall. Spirifera Pedroana Hartt, although it appears rarely in the Maecurti group, is, by its abundance, one of the most characteristic fossils of the Ereré group. The third or Curud group consists almost exclusively of black and red shales, passing at times into shaly sandstone. These beds form low cliffs along the rivers Maecurti and Curud for a considerable distance, lying almost horizontal, except where disturbed by eruptions of diorite. On the Trombetas the black shale forms two short cliffS on the river bank, and the red shale is badly exposed on a lake near by. At Ereré these rocks are ex- posed in the eastern part of the plain, and in the base of the serras, par- ticularly that of Tajuri, the front of which is composed almost entirely of these shales. The black shale forms the lowest bed, the thickness of which, on the Curua, is estimated by Mr. Smith at 800 feet. It is well laminated, almost slaty in structure, and in the lower part contains numerous large, cal- careous and arenaceous concretions. The first are bluish black in color, have well developed cone-in-cone structure and emit, when struck with a hammer, a strong odor of petroleum, The reddish shale lies above the black, having more or less the same thickness. It is generally chocolate-colored, mottled with spots of a darker hue and banded, parallel with the stratification, with white, yellow or * Bulletin of the Buffulo Soclety of Natural Science, Vol, I, No, 4, 1874, t Annals of the Lyceum of Natural History of New York, Vol. XI, May, 1875. tit is but Just to mention that the gentleman, to whom this species is dedi- eated, has more than any other, not specially devoted to science, contributed to the progress of geology, not to say of science in general, in Brazil, 1879. ] 171 [Derby. black. The rock consists of clay, mixed with a considerable proportion of finely-divided mica and sand, the last often forming independent layers, a few inches thick. The only fossils found in these shales were Fucoids, of the genus Spirophyton, and small fruit-like bodies, resembling very much a flattened currant, cousisting apparently of a thin pellicle enclosing two to six small grains. The Spirophytons are apparently identical with those de- scribed by Prof. Hall, from the Hamilton group of New York. They occur abundantly in all the localities, in both the black and red shale, near the junction of the two. On the Curué and Maecurt the red shale, which is undoubtedly Devon- ian, is followed by beds of coarse sandstone which, according to Mr. Smith, are at least fifty feet thick on the Curudé. This is followed by fossiliferous Carboniferous beds. The red shale is also overlaid by coarse sandstone, in the mountains of Ereré, but it is not certain that this sandstone is of the same formation as that of the Curua. As regards the extension of the Devonian series, it has been recognized as far west as the river Uatuma, a small river between the Trombetas and the Rio Negro. On the southern side of the valley, there are, on the Tapajos, shales containing Spirophyton and calcareous concretions, which were referred provisionally to the Carboniferous by Prof. Hartt, but which seem to me to be Devonian, and I refer to the same age the black shale found by Siir. Penna on the Xingt. Of all the Palzozoic deposits of the Amazonas, those of the Carbonifer- ous occupy the most extensive area and, at the same time, present the greatest difficulties to study. Composed for the most part of soft beds, they suffered extensive denudation, during the interval between the close of the Carboniferous and the beginning of the Tertiary, during which time they were, for the most part, exposed above the level of the sea; by the deposit of the great Tertiary series they were concealed, over immense areas, and where they have been again exposed by the denudation of the Tertiary, they have again suffered destructive denudation. At present, the exposures are poor and unsatisfactory, rendering very difficult the determi- nation of the relations of the different beds and the vertical extension of the series. Mr. Smith, who has best studied these deposits, is of the opinion that their total thickness is not less than 2,000 feet, and, although the data for this calculation is very defective, I cannot say that it is exaggerated. The horizontal extension is more easy to determine. On the Tapajos the rocks of this series appear at intervals, from a point just below the rapids to near the village of Aveiros, a distance of about eighty miles. It is pos- sible that they extend still farther north to near the mouth of the Tapajos, since I am credibly informed that, near Santarem, a bed of limestone occurs, which is most probably of Carboniferous age. To the westward of the Tapajos, they have been recognized by Chandless on the Mauhé-assi, a small river between the Tapajos and Madeira, and I consider it probable that: they extend as far west as the latter river. I have information that leads me to believe that they exist to the eastward, on the Xing, and I Derby.] 172 [Feb. 21, think it probable that they will yet be found on the Tocantins. On the op- posite or northern side of the valley, they occur close to the margin of the river, in the vicinity of Alenguer, in front of Santarem, and extend fora considerable distance towards the north, along the rivers Curué, Maecurti and Trombetas ; to the west, they extend at least as far as the Uatuma, already mentioned, and to the east, as far at least as the Jauary, near the village of Prainha.* The rocks consist of soft shales and sandstone, and of limestone, which last. although of but slight thickness, is the most important, because, having resisted denudation better than the other rocks and being highly fossilifer- ous, it forms an admirable base of reference in the study of the Carbonifer- ous series. The best exposures of the limestone are on the Tapajos, both above and bejow the village of Itaittiba, where it is quarried to burn for lime. The thickness is about twenty-five feet, some of the beds being of very pure limestone, of a blue or light brown color, others being darker and somewhat argillaceous and silicious. The fossils being silicified, and conse- quently more durable than the rock in which they are enclosed, become detached by the slow dissolution of the limestone, and often appear loose, as on the beach in front of Itaittiba. Cherty masses are common in the limestone, and aside from these, two other kinds of chert occur in loose masses which, in the opinion of Mr. Smith, come from some unknown beds above the limestone. One of these kinds decomposes to a white, chalky mass, the other, which forms large, rounded boulders in front of Itaittiba, takes on, in decomposition, the appearance of a porous sandstone. Cherts of various kinds are very abundant in the whole Carboniferous region, and are often highly fossiliferous, but the beds from which they originate are as yet unknown. Above the limestone at Itaittiba, there are beds of soft, brown sandstone and of shale, of unknown extension, and below there is a heavy series of green, red and black shales, some of which contain Spirophyton and are most probably Devonian. Of the Carboniferous rocks of the Mauhé-asst, the only notices we have are of the limestone, which is identical in character and fossils with that of the Tapajos. Passing now to the northern side, we find a thick bed of limestone at the foot of the Serra of Tajuri, in the Ereré region, where it is associated with a yellowish mottled sandstone, much appreciated by the people for whetstones. The exposure, however, in this locality is so unsatisfactory, that it was impossible to determine its relation to the other beds of the serra. In the region between the Maecurt and Curua, there are exposed, over an extensive area, a variety of beds, which Mr, Smith attempted to arrange in a section which, although some- what defective, is of considerable interest. *In this sketch of the character and extension of the Amazonian Carbonifer- ous, I have, aside from the observations of Prof, Hartt and myself, drawn largely from the excellent studies of Mr, Smith on the northern side of the Amazonas, and am also indebted to Mr, Coutinho, the first discoverer of Amazonian fos- #ils, and to Messrs, Chandless, Brown and Rodrigues, for notices of its existence in regions, not visited by the members of the Geological Commission, 1879.) * 173 [Derby. On the Curu4, Mr. Smith found, above the beds of undoubted Devonian age, a small series of unfossiliferous sandstones, and then at Praia Grande, loose silicified fossils, identical with those of Itaitiba, which indicate the presence of a bed of limestone. Above this there is a series, the estimated thickness of which is 600 feet, composed of alternations of soft sandstones and sandy shales, of which certain layers near the upper part, exposed at a place called Pacoval, are highly fossiliferous. At lake Cujubim, near the river Maecurt, the section begins below with massive beds of yellow sand- stone of undetermined thickness ; then comes two feet of hard sandstone, followed by a bed five feet thick, of impure, silicious, fossiliferous lime- stone, which is separated by ten feet of sandstone and shale from a bed of equal thickness of pure limestone, containing fossils identical with those of Itaitaba ; above this are soft beds of sandstone and shale, with fossils identi- cal with those of Pacoval on the Curué: In various other localities in the vicinity of Alenguer, Mr. Smith found exposures of sandstone and shale of very varied characters, which appear to belong above the series at Cujubim, and to represent, in part at least, the upper portion of the Curué section. Mr. Smith well observes that the variation in the character of these Carboniferous beds, in both their horizontal and vertical extension, indicates deposition in shallow water, during subsidence. The limestone appears to be always near the base of the series. The exposures of Carboniferous rocks on the Trombetas are so unsatis- factory, that they scarcely do more than prove the existence there of sand- stones, shales and limestones, with fossils identical with those of the other localities. The Carboniferous fauna of the Amazonas is very rich, containing more than a hundred species of Brachiopods, Lamellibranchs, Gasteropods, Corals, Bryozoans, Echinoderms, Fishes and Trilobites. Of these, I have already published descriptions of the Brachiopods of the Tapajos,* and hope soon to give descriptions of the remainder. The fauna shows the closest relation- ship to that of the Coal Measures of the Western States, more than half _ of the species being identical. I have already shown that the Bolivian and Peruvian Carboniferous faunas, as far as they are known, are equivalent to the Brazilian, and to that of the North American Coal Measures. The following are some of the most important species common to the three regions : Spirifera camerata Morton (S. Condor D’Orb.), Athyris subtilita Hall, Retzia Mormonii Marcou (R. punctulifera Shumard), Productus Cora D’Orb., Productus semireticulatus Martin, and Chonetes glabra Geinitz. The following are, among others, in addition to the above, common to Brazil and the United States: Spirifera rockymontana Marcou, Spirifera planoconvexa Shumard, Spirifera perplezea McChesney, Myalina kansas- ensis Shumard, Allorisma subeuneata Meek and Hayden, Aviculopecten occidentalis Shumard, Avieulopecten carbonaria Stevens, Schizodus Wheeleri Swallow, Lima retifera Shumard, Entolium aviculatum Swallow, Bellero- phon carbonarius Cox, Rhombipora lepidodendroides Meek, and Synocladia biserialis Swallow. * Bulletin of the Cornell University (Science), Vol. I, No, 2, 1874. ~ Derby.] 174 [Feb. 21, No satisfactory sub-division of the Carboniferous beds of the Amazonas can as yet be made. The fossiliferous beds at the different localities appear to belong to the same limited horizon, and to present always the same fossils. It is true that Mr. Smith found at Curumt and Curucaé¢a, near Alenguer, fossils having a different aspect from those from the other locali- ties, but they are so poorly preserved as to be unrecognizable. The fossils of the calcareous beds are mostly Brachiopods and Corals, while Lamelli- branchs are most abundant in the shales and sandstones; but there are many species in common, and the beds are so closely related stratigraphi- cally, that I am inclined to consider the differences in their fossils as due to differences in the nature of the sediments, rather than to a difference in horizon. While the Paleozoic deposits were being laid down in the Amazonian region, it is to be supposed that the other margins of the ancient Archean and Silurian islands received their quota of deposits and, in fact, in the southern part of Brazil, in the regions now constituting the provinces of Rio Grande do Sul, Santa Catharina, Parana and the southern part of Sio Paulo, extensive Carboniferous and Devonian beds were laid down. It is stated also that Carboniferous deposits are to be found in the provinces of Maranhio and Matto-Grosso, on the Guaporé and Upper Paraguay ; but, although this seems extremely probable, the fact is not as yet well verified. In the Andvan region enormous deposits were formed, during the whole of the Paleozoic. The best known of these are the Carboniferous beds, which appear in the central part of the Cordilheiras, at lake Titicaca, and in the province of Arque in Bolivia ; and on the eastern slope of the Andes, - at Cochabamba and Santa Cruz de la Sierra, in Bolivia, and on the upper Pachetea, in Peru. The beds referred to the Cretaceous, have only been recognized with certainty in the mountains of Ereré. We have seen that the Curua shales of the Devonian series, form in general the base of these mountains. In one place, near the base of Tajuri, these shales are followed by Carboniferous limestones, but in general the Carboniferous beds are lacking throughout the Ereré region, and the Devonian shales are followed by heavy beds of coarse, hard sandstone. In a section made in a hill between Tajuri and Ereré, there are three distinct beds of coarse massive sandstone, separated by beds of micaceous sandy shales, the whole series having a thickness of about 800 feet. Of these three beds of sandstone, the upper or middle, or the two united, form the principal mass of the Serras of Ereré and Paitdna, In the first of these serras were found, in 1871, fragments of fossilized wood, which were referred by Dr. Dawson to the dycotyledonous group of plants, and in the last voyage we found, in Paittina, a thin bed of argillaceous sandstone, intercalated in the coarser beds of the serra, which was crowded with fossil leaves, belonging to various genera of the same group of plan‘s. The leaves and woody structure of tropical plants have been too little studied to permit of the specific, and perhaps the generic, determina- tion of these plants. They are, however, of the utmost importance in the 1879.] 175 . (Derby. determination of the age of the formation, which can hardly be older than the Cretaceous, and since these fossils are in disturbed beds, which are overlaid by the horizontal deposits referred to the Tertiary, we cannot well consider them as more modern than the Cretaceous. Fossil leaves, very similar in appearance to those of the Serra de Pai- tina, have been found at Tonantins on the Solimées, at Uatapucaré on the Tapajos, and at Prainha on the Lower Amazonas, in beds that appear to be Tertiary or recent. A critical examination is required to prove whether or not these fossils from the different localities are identical, or belong to the same horizon. For the present it seems to me most probable that they are distinct, those of Paitina being the mest ancient. It is worthy of note that the fossil leaves at Prainha are in beds of clay and conglomerate that are slightly inclined, and it is possible that, notwithstanding their modern ap- pearance, they may prove to belong to the Cretaceous. These fossils being in the upper bed of sandstone, the age of the lower beds and of the intermediate sandy shales, between the limits of Upper Devonian and Cretaceous, is undetermined. They are, however, so similar in lithological character, to the fossil leaf beds, that I refer them provis- ionally to the Cretaceous. What is well proven is, that the elevation of the anticlinal of Ereré took place during, or after, the Cretaceous age. In this connection I may add, that the beds of the numerous Cretaceous basins along the eastern coast of Brazil are always more or Jess disturbed and inclined. Near the mouth of the Trombetas we found inclined beds of sandstone. containing pebbles of shale which appear to me to have come from the De- vonian or Carboniferous beds, which occur farther up on the same river. In the same region there is a high serra, called Curumt, composed of hard sand- stone, the beds of which appear, as seen from a distance, to be inclined, and I suspect that in that region will be found the equivalents of the Ereré Cretaceous beds. To the south of the mouth of the Amazonas, between Salinas and Bra- ganca, Siir. Penna has lately discovered fossiliferous limestone, similar to that of the Cretaceous basins of Pernambuco and Sergipe. In the Solimées region there is also, according to Chandless and Coutinho, an extensive Cretaceous area, on the river Purfis, characterized by the remains of Mosa- saurus and turtles. The disturbances which all the formations thus far described have suf- fered, were accompanied by eruptions of igneous rocks. In the metamor- phic region, the syenite and perhaps a part of the granite may belong to this category, a question that can only be solved by further study. In the same region, and also throughout the Paleozoic region, diorite is very common, forming immense dykes, and sometimes apparently forming sheets between the strata of sedimentary rocks. Another igneous rock of doubtful character, which I have referred to as trap, forms numerous nar- row dykes in the Ereré and Alenguer region, traversing both the Paleozoic and the Cretaceous beds, The surface is always decomposed, presenting a Derby] 176 [Feb. 21, scoriaceous appearance, and enclosing crystals of quartz and fragments of the adjacent sedimentary rocks, these last being often so slightly metamor- phused, as to still preserve traces of fossils. The beds traversed by the dykes are somewhat altered, for a distance of a few feet from the point of contact. The Tertiary beds have been so often mentioned in the course of this ar- ticle, that little remains to be said regarding their character and distribution. They are distinguished from those of the older formations by their hori- zontal position, and by the absence of fossils and of eruptive rocks. They consist of sandstones and clays, of brilliant and varied colors, such as — white, red, yellow and blue, combined in different shades, so as to produce a very striking effect in the cliffs, which are very frequent along the tribu- taries, but rare along the main river. The rock is in general very slightly consolidated, except an occasional bed or patch, in which a cement of oxide of iron has produced the coarse ferruginous sandstone, found scatter- ed over the surface thoughout the whole of the Amazonian highlands. The Tertiary series is best presented in the serras known under the col- lective name of Serras de Parti, which are seen from tie river, from Almei- rim to near Prainha. These are mountains of cireumdenudation, perfectly level on top, and of an elevation of about 1,000 feet. The one nearest to Prainha, called Paraudquara, was visited by Prof Hartt in 1871, who found the structure well presented in the steep, bare front of the mountain, The beds, whose thickness corresponds approximately to the height of the mountain, consist of sandstones and clays, of various colors, disposed in nine distinct divisions. From Paraudéquira westward, the series of table- topped hills extend for a long distance, but, lying farther back from the river, they cannot be seen, except from some high point as, for example, the mountains of Ereré. From the Maecurt, I saw a rounded peak, rising above the general level, apparently an island of some older formation, in a sea of Tertiary sandstone. In the vicinity of Monte Alegre there are de- posits identical in character with those of Paraudquara, which were evidently laid down after the elevation of the Ereré anticlinal. These deposits, like those of Alenguer and Obydos, have suffered a destructive denudation, which has considerably reduced their original height, which probably was never equal to that of the Serras of Pari. The Tertiary beds of the southern side of the valley, are, in the Santarem region, considerably lower than those of the north, the difference being probably due to the inclination of the bottom of the Tertiary sea, and the smaller quantity of sediment received by the regions farthest removed from the margin of that sea, The highlands behind Santarem are 406 feet high, and do not appear to have suffered denudation that has dimin- ished sensibly their original height. In a bed of blue clay, exposed on the slope of these highlands, I found worm tubes, the only fossils that the Tertiary beds of this region have yet afforded. This lack of fossils is noticeable, not only in the Lower Amazonian region, but throughout Brazil. In every province there are beds similar in charac- 1879,] 177 (Derby. ter and position to those just described, but so far they have yielded no fos- sils, that will serve for their classification, and they have been referred to the Tertiary solely on account of their stratigraphical position. The only Tertiary fossils known from this region are the fossil leaves of Tonantins, and the fresh and brackish water mollusks of Pebas and other localities in Pert. These, however, occur in lignitiferous beds, quite different from those now under consideration, and the relation between the two has never so far as I am aware, been satisfactorily determined. The only division that can at present be madc in the region of the Lower Amazonas, is between the beds of the high table-lands, and those of the lower plains about Para and eastern Marajé. These last, consisting of abrupt alternations of coarse and fine sandstone, generally ferruginous, along with colored clays, are certainly more modern than the former, and belong to the later Tertiary or the Quarternary. During the deposition of the Tertiary, there were considerable movements of depression and subsequently of elevation, but these movements were, as far as is known at present, unaccompanied by disturbances of the strata or eruptions of igneous rocks. After the elevation of the Tertiary table-lands, began the alluvial deposits of the varzea. They consist, according to circumstances and localities, of sands or clays, or a mixture of the two, a yellowish structureless clay pre- dominating, often having above it a bed of black clay, impregnated with vegetable matter. Part of this deposit was without doubt formed in an estuary, while the river was taking possession of the bed prepared for it ; but it is now impossible to distinguish the estuary deposits from those that are purely fluvial. The proofs of the estuary condition are not so much in the characters of the deposits, as in the form of the tributary valleys, which are widened in a manner that can only be explained by the action of the tides. With the formation of the vurzea, the geological evolution of the valley of the Amazonas terminated. We cannot in this place enter into a consideration of the interesting phenomena, illustrative of Geology and Physical Geography, of which the ourzea is the theatre. To witness, close at hand, the operation of many of the processes of which these sciences treat, and which have given form and character to the surface of our planet, I know of no region equal to the Amazonas. Between the water and the land, the river and the varzea, there is a constant conflict. Islands are formed and destroyed, or floated bodily down stream, by the continual process of destruction at one end, and of formation at the other; lakes, furos and parand-merins are being formed, to be again filled up; tributaries extend themselves into the territory proper to the main river, or this throws out one of its lateral channels, to appropriate to itself a part of the valley of a tributary. The conflict, how- ever, is unequal ; the force of the river, irresistible as it isin its great floods, is spasmodic in its action, and can be met by a weaker, more constant one, such as is afforded in aid of the growth of the land, by the vegetative force. PROC. AMER, PHILOS. soc. Xviir. 108. W. PRINTED MARCH 11, 1879. 178 [Jan, 17; Rank behind rank, the various aquatic and marsh plants advance into every shallow, building it up to the common level over which the floods pass, adding new sediment, instead of carrying away that already accumu- lated. In this way the land is slowly extending itself, confining the river more and more to its proper channel ; but this process cannot materially alter the character of the valley, unless aided by some convulsion of nature. Much yet remains to be done on the Lower Amazonas, in filling in the details of this imperfect sketch, which will, I trust, be found to be accurate in the main, and which will serve to show how interesting the region is in itself, and in its relation to the rest of the Continent. Of the Upper Ama- zonas or Maraiion region, enough is already known to show its surpassing interest and importance. Between the two, the middle or Solimées region, is an almost perfect blank, in which future explorers will meet with diffi- culties, even surpassing those presented by the other regions, but will, by well directed efforts, reap results commensurate with the hardihood of the undertaking. Stated Meeting, January 17, 1879. Present, 11 members. Vice-President, Mr. Frauey, in the Chair. A letter of acknowledgment was received from the Natural History Society, Emden (100; List). Letters of envoy were received from the French Minister of Public Instruction; and the Meteorological Office, Lon- don, December, 1878. A letter of thanks for correspondence was received from the Rev. Stephen D. Peet. A letter respecting exchanges was received from Mr, G, W. Ranck, Curator of the Kentucky Historical Society. Donations for the Library were received from the Ade- laide Observatory; M. P. Volpicelli at Rome; the Geo- graphical Society and Revue Politique at Paris ; the Meteoro- logical Office, and Register, and London Nature; the Bos- ton Natural History Society ; American Journal of Arts and Sciences; Library Journal in New York; the Franklin In- stitute, College of Pharmacy, Journal of the Medical Sciences, and Medical News in Philadelphia; the American Journal 1879.] 179 of Mathematics at Baltimore; Mr. 8. H. Scudder; the Bo- tanical Gazette; Mr. G. W. Ranck ; and the Ministerio de Fomento in Mexico. The American Journal of Mathematics of Baltimore was ordered to be placed on the list of correspondents to receive the Proceedings. The death of the Rev. E. R. Beadle, D.D., LL.D., in Philadelphia, January 6, 1879, aged 66, was announced. by the Secretary ; and, on motion, Dr. Robt. E. Rogers, was ap- pointed to read an obituary notice of the deceased. The death of Mr. Morton MeMichael, in Philadelphia, January 6, 1879, aged 71, was announced by Mr. Price; and on motion Mr. Fraley was appointed to read an obituary notice of the deceased. A letter from Mr. P. W. Sheafer, dated Pottsville, Pa., January 6, 1879, reported the result of tests of the visibility of stars in daylight from various depths of the 1600 feet shaft of the Philadelphia and Reading aired Company, near that borough: PorrsviLLEe, Pa., January 6, 1878. Dear Srr :—The question of seeing stars from deep wells, &c., being un- settled, I requested Mr. Edward Herbert, an intelligent boss miner, now in charge of the deep shaft of the Philadelphia and Reading Coal and Iron Company, near this borough, to test the question so far as he could find the opportunity to do so in his frequent ascents and descents of the Pottsville shaft, especially, which is some 1600 feet deep. He reports as follows : ‘Sr. Ciarr, December 20, 1878. ‘Myself and one of the sia id have tried this afternoon at several dis- tances in east shaft, if we could see any stars, but failed to see any. The sky was very clear and atmosphere favorable ; the shaft is a down cast, and was entirely free from smoke or steam. I fear we will not be able to solve your problem in the affirmative.”’ In reply to a further inquiry, as to the depth from which observations were made, he replies as follows : “Sr. Ciarr, January 4, 1879. “ We have tested it at different depths, from 100 feet down to 700 and 800 feet, when the sky has been clear, but have so far failed to see any stars. 180 (Jan. 17, After we got down 600 feet the atmosphere is not quite so clear as it is nearer to the surface.”’ If your society can suggest further tests I will be glad to make them. Iam very respectfully your obedient servant, P. W. SHEAFER. To THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY, Fifth Street, near Chestnut, Phila. Mr. B. Britton exhibited a small and useful specimen-rock crusher for laboratory use, with mortar and pestle, and de- scribed its value in the saving of time and labor. Mr. Lesley exhibited a proof sheet of Mr. J. F. Carll’s col- ored map of the preglacial water basins of North-western Pennsylvania, prepared for the illustration of his fortheom- ing third Report of Progress in the Survey of the Oil Regions. Mr. Marks exhibited and explained a new link-work, which he had invented for the use of his students in de- scribing arcs of epicycloid curves, and which can be made practically useful for plotting the outlines of the teeth of wheels. He also exhibited specimens of other Peaucetlier cell forms. On motion, Mr. Lesley was elected Librarian for the en- suing year. The Standing Committees for 1879 were then appointed, as foliows: Finance. Mr. Frederick Fraley, Mr. E. K. Price, Mr. Benjamin V. Marsh. Publication. Dr. John L. LeConte, Dr. Daniel M. Brinton, Dr. MeQuillen, Prof. E. Thompson, Dr, C. M. Cresson. 1879.] 181 Hall. Gen. Hector Tyndale, Mr. 8. W. Roberts, Mr. J. Sergeant Price. Library. Mr. FE. K. Price, Rey. Dr. Krauth, Dr. G. H. Horn, Dr. Kinderdine, Prof. Houston. Pending nominations Nos. 871, 872, 873 were read, and Nos. 871 and 873 balloted for. No. 872 was postponed on account of the absence of its nominators. The reading of the list of members was postponed. On a scrutiny of the ballot boxes by the presiding officer, the following were declared duly elected members of the Society : Charles B. Dudley, Ph. D., Altoona, Pa. Philip H. Law, of Philadelphia. And the meeting was adjourned. Stated Meeting, February 7, 1879. Present, 19 members. Vice-President, Mr. Frauey, in the Chair. Letters accepting membership were received from Dr. Charles Benjamin Dudley, dated Altoona, January 20,1879 ; and from Mr. Philip Howard Law, dated Philadelphia, Janu- ary 20, 1879. Letters of envoy were received from the Batavian Society of Sciences, Batavia, dated December 15, 1874, August 20, 182 |Feb. 7, 1875, March, 1876, and October 20, 1877; from the Natural History Society at Chemnitz ; and from the Physical Society at Geneva, dated September 15, 1878. A letter of acknowledgment was received from the Physi- cal Society at Geneva (99, 100). A letter from Mrs. 8. N. Byington, to Dr. Brinton, enclos- ing a letter from Major J. W. Powell, of Washington, re- questing the loan of the manuscript Choctaw grammar, written by the late Rev. Cyrus Byington in 1833, for the purpose of having it published along with Mr. Byington’s Choctaw Dictionary, under the editorial care of Prof. QO. T. Mason, was read. On motion the Librarian was authorized to loan the manuseript from the Library, for the needful time, on a guarantee of its safe return. Donations for the Library were received from the Royal Societies of Victoria and New South Wales; the Mining Department of New South Wales; the Academies at St. Petersburg, Berlin, Copenhagen, the Hague,and Brussels ; the Natural Ilistory Society at Moscow; the Geological Society at Berlin; the Societies at Offenbach, Chemnitz, Geneva and Bordeaux; the Observatory at St. Petersburg; the Geo- graphical Society, Revue Politique, and M. Delesse at Paris ; the Royal Astronomical and Meteorological Societies, Meteorological Committee, Lords of Admiralty, and Editors of Nature, London; the Boston Natural History Society ; Harvard College; Silliman’s Journal; American Journal of Ontology in New York; the Brooklyn Entomologica! Society ; the Pennsylvania Historical Society, Journal of Pharmacy, Editors of Naturalists’ Leisure Hour, and Robin- son’s Epitome of Literature at Philadelphia; the Librarian of Congress, and J. W. Powell, at Washington; Mr. M. C. Reed, Hudson, Ohio ; the Botanical Gazette ; the Ministerio de Fomento ; and the Argentine Scientific Society at Buenos Ayres. Copies of Proceedings No, 102, and card list of meetings and officers for the year, just published by the Secretaries, were laid on the table. 1879.] 183 A letter from the Corresponding Secretary of the Ken- tucky Historical Society, dated Lexington, Ky., January 20, 1879, was read, and, on motion, the name of that Society was placed on the list of correspondents to receive the Pro- ceedings, from, the beginning of the current volume. A letter respecting exchanges was received from the Michigan Library Association at Coldwater, Mich., dated January 20, 1879. An obituary notice of the late Robert Frazer, was read by Professor Frazer. The death of Dr. John B. Biddle at Philadelphia, January 19, 1879, aged 66 years, was announced, and on motion Dr. Henry C. Chapman was appointed to prepare an obituary notice of the deceased. The death of Judge John Cadwalader, at Philadelphia, January 26, 1879, aged 73 years, was announced by Mr. Fraley, and on motion Mr. McCall was appointed to prepare an obituary notice of the deceased. A communication, entitled ‘“ Preliminary notice of an in- vestigation on Petrocene, a product of the destructive distilla- tion of Petroleum, by Samuel P. Sadtler and H. G. McCarter,” was read by the Secretary. A communication respecting some remarkable conjune- tions of semi-anthracite and semi-bituminous coal beds in Sullivan county, and certain hygrometric cokes, by Franklin Platt, Assistant on the Geological Survey of Pennsylvania, was read by the Secretary. A communication, entitled “Some notes upon the collee- tion of coins and medals, now on exhibition at the Pennsyl- vania Museum and School of Industrial Art, in Memorial Nall, Fairmount Park, Philadelphia, by Henry Phillips, Jr., A. M.,” was read by the Secretary. An essay on the Philosophy of Christianity was read by Prof. P. E. Chase, pursuant to notice given on the card (see page 123 above). . A new combination of Peaucellier cells intended for draw- ing ares of large circles and straight lines, by students of the University, was exhibited and explained by Prof. Marks. 184 [Feb. 7, Dr. Konig announced that he proposed to show his new chrometric apparatus at the next meeting of the Society, and give a detailed report of its workings. The Chairman of the Michaux Legacy Committee, Mr. E. K. Price, read its annual report, as follows: 4 To the American Philosophical Society : The Committee on The Michaux Legacy respectfully report : That the income received from the Government of France, during the last year, was $534.33, of which one-half, $267.16, was paid to the Fairmount Park Commissioners for the purchase of trees; Michaux’s Sylva for Park Library, $40; for Dr. Rothrock’s Lectures on Botany and Trees in the Park, $280; advertising ditto, $50; Journals of Forestry, three copies, $11.87; planting trees round the University in 1877, $88.80 ;/in 1878, $56.83 ; printing in 1877, $30.25. The payments last year exceed the in- come of the year, $168.43; but there is considerable arrears of income un- spent. The Park Commissioners have on hand for the purchase of trees, of Michaux Legacy, $284.98 ; Cresson Legacy, $379¢5. Dr. J. T. Rothrock delivered a course of lectures on Botany and Trees, in Horticultural Hall, in the Fairmount Park, fourteen in number, to a larger audience, ranging from one hundred to two hundred, than in 1878. The Committee recommend that Dr. Rothrock should continue his lec- tures the present yeir, and that an appropriation out of the income of the Michaux Legacy be made for that purpose, of $280, and $50 for advertising the lectures. ELI K. PRICE, Chairman. JANUARY 24, 1879. On motion the recommendation embodied in the report was adopted, as follows: Resowed, That an appropriation be and is hereby made from the income of the Michaux Legacy, of $280, for a course of fourteen lectures in Fair- mount Park, by Dr. J. T. Rothrock, on Botany, Sylviculture and Agricul- ture ; and $50 for advertising said lectures. Mr. Fraley reported, that he had received and paid over to the Treasurer, the quarterly interest from the Michaux Legacy, due January 1, 1879, amounting to $132.48. A communication was received from Mr. Geo. W. Morri- son, Philadelphia, January 3, 1879, respecting a successful coal dust burning apparatus. On motion this communica- tion was referred to the Board of Officers and Council at their next meeting. And the meeting was adjourned. 1879.) 185 {Sadtler and McCarter. Preliminary Notice of an Investigation on ‘‘Petrocene,”’ a product of the Destructive Distillation of Petroleum. By Samuel P. Sadtler and H. G. McCarter. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, February 7th, 1879.) In the number of Comptes Rendus for 16th December last (tome 87, p. 991), which has just come to my notice, appears an article by MM. L. Prunier and R. David, entitled, ‘‘sur Ja nature de certains produits cristal- lisés, obtenus accessoirement dans le traitement industriel des pétroles de Pennsylvanie.”’ In this article the authors announce that they have begun an investiga- tion of ‘‘ Petrocene,’’ a solid residue from petroleum, which they obtained from Dr. H. Tweddle, of Pittsburg, Pennsylvania. They give some general statements as to the several hydrocarbons, the presence of which they con- sider to have been indicated by the determinations they made of fusing points, boiling points, solubilities, together with crystallizations gotten with picric acid, and with binitroanthracene. Judging in this way, they state that anthracene, phenanthrene, chrysene, chrysogen and other hydro- carbons are present. They give no specific figures of analyses, but say merely that the percentage of carbon varied in their different analyses from 88 to 96 per cent. in 100. After propounding some interesting theories, based upon these indications, they close by promising to communicate the results obtained from a farther study of the cia ani if, as they hoped, these should be new. This same material has been the vililel of our investigation for several months past, and we have obtained results which, while not as yet com- plete, are so far advanced as to be beyond the point of Messrs. Prunier and David's work, as it is stated in their article. We would therefore claim equal right to the field as scientific workers, and shall continue our studies, and hope to push them to an early completion. The material we have operated on consists of a full set of Dr. Tweddle’s preparations, as described by him in the Franklin Institute Journal Vol. 72, p. 204, which was given to one of us some two years ago, by Dr. F. A. Genth, and a bottle of the crude distillate before treatment with petroleum benzine, given to us by Dr. G. F. Barker. Some weeks of study had indeed been given to these products in the summer of 1877, by one of us in conjunction with Dr. E. F. Smith, of the University of Pennsylvania, which work was interrupted and only resumed, as stated, a few months ago. The following is a brief and general statement of the ground covered by our work. The conclusions are all subject to revision as the examination of purer products may demand. We found that the method of breaking up the compound by treatment with solvents did not suffice to give us pure products of constant composi- tions. We therefore availed ourselves of the method of forming double crystallizations with picric acid from solution in alcohol and benzol. We PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC, XviII. 103. x. PRINTED MARCH 20, 1879. Sadtler and McCarter. ] 186 [Feb., 7, obtained what appeared to be three distinct crystallizations here—two of deep red crystals and one of brown plates. These were picked apart as they crystallized together, using a hand lens, and exercising great care, and were then submitted to recrystallizations until quite pure and distinct. On breaking up these picric acid compounds with dilute ammonia, we obtained at least two well-marked and distinctly different hydrocarbons. With re- gard to the hydrocarbon from the third set of crystals we are still in doubt. Of the two hydrocarbons, one fuses constant at 280°C., and the other at 178°C. We are not able to identify them certainly with any of the known hydrocarbons. Of both of these hydrocarbons, quinones have been made, and of one of them the alizarine, acting upon the quinone with strong sulphuric acid with heat, and then fusing the dried residue with solid potassium hydrate. The quinone dissolves in sulphuric acid with a dark purple color, and when the nearly black residue of di-sulphoquinonic acid and potassium hydrate are fused together, a dark yellowish-brown color is obtained. From the solu- tion of this, hydrochloric acid precipitates the alizarine as a dark brown floeculent mass. Several analyses of the quinone and of the alizarine were made. As I hold the whole subject still open to revision, I will not quote them, but merely say that both the quinone and the alizarine derived from the hydro- carbon, fusing at 280°C., indicate a probable composition C,, Hy. This would be a dimethyl-anthracene, yet the hydrocarbon does not agree with the dimethyl-anthracene discovered by Van Dorp, and studied by Wachen- dorf and Zincke. With this brief mention of the work done, we will defer any further dis- cussion until our results are sufficiently advanced to be presented as a whole. We are now engaged upon the work, and will push it promptly to a completion, Character of some Sullivan County Coals. By Franklin Platt. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, February Tth, 1879.) It has already been noted in giving the detailed description of the coal openings in Sullivan county, that the different coals mined presented wide differences in character, and in one or two instances offered some most un: usual features.* These characteristics may be briefly summed thus : + * See unpublished Report of Progress, Second Geological Survey of Pennsy|- vania, GG, +See the analyses made by Mr, A, 8, McCreath, Chemist of the Survey at Har- risburg, given below, 1879.] 187 [Platt. 1. That the Bernice coal as mined from the Big Bed, called bed B, is a semi-anthracite coal, of the usual chemical composition of anthracites, but differing from them in appearance and fracture. 2. That the coal bed lying sixty feet below the coal bed B is a semi-bitumi- nous coal, of curious structure ; holding much water in combination ; and not coking. 3. That in a coal bed opened only one and a half miles east of Bernice, the upper bench is semi-bituminous coal, and the lower bench an anthra- cite, or more nearly semi-anthracite ; with only a six inch black slate part- ing between these two benches ; the semi-bituminous coal bench not coking, and holding a very large percentage of water in combination. 4, That the Forksville coals are semi-anthracites of unusual appearance and structure. 5. That the Laporte coal is really bituminous coal, of very curious struc- ture, holding much water in combination. In order that the main features of the character of these coals may be more forcibly presented, they are grouped together thus :— 1. Bernice, Sullivan County. Run of mine. Bed B. 2. ff ff " Top bench. : 3 He i as Middle bench. ag 4. as oh - Lower ‘ a 5. e My a Cannel-like coal in upper bench, 6 rs sf + Coal 60 feet below Bed B. ve “e te “ce ce “cc “eé “é 8. Pigeon Creek, 4 miles east of Bernice. Bed B. 9. 1} miles east of Bernice. Top bench. 10. ' ee Lower bench. 11. 3} miles 8. W. of Forksville. Lip. & Mercer mine. Top bench. 12. - = cd ~ " Lower ‘ 13. 1 mile south of Laporte. §. Hall’s Coal. ¥ 2 3 “4 5 6 Water <.«; isk Patek 1.295; 1.840) 1.800) 2.220) 1.950). 5.815 Volatile Matter...... 8.100) 9.835) 9.650) 9.405 9.030) 15.085 Fixed Carbon....... 88.344) 76.788 82.378) 81.267) 68.795! 62.329 Sulphur..... eae cite 1.031 .647 .622 .618 .583 AT4 Rai vss vulcew ee 6.230} 10.890; 5.555) 6.490] 24.640) 16,297 100.000} 100.000! 100.000! 100.000| 100,000, 100.000 Reddish Color of Ash........+ Gray. | Cream.| Gray. | Cream, | Cream. | Gray. Platt.) 188 [Feb. 7, 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Water...... 4.130, 2.340) 7.930) .2.910 .930 -810) 6.830 Vol. Matter.| 15.270 8.440) 21.410) 11.780; 12.410) 13.060) 21.930 Fixed Carb.) 67.362) 80.949) 54.099) 81.672, 75.611) 71.679) 55.413 Sulphur.... 523 726 551 -598 574 581 B87 AMEN S65 cies 12.715) 7.545) 16.010) 3.040) 10.475) 13.870) 15.440 100.000 100.000) 100.000) 100.000) 100.000, 100.000) 100.000 Reddish ColorofAsh.' Gray. | Cream. ! Cream. |Cream.! Gray, | Gray. | Red. There is no peculiarity about the chemical composition of the coal from the Bernice Big Bed, or B. The analysis closely resembles that of the Lykens Valley coal; it is burned exactly like any of the other anthracites, and differs from them only in appearance and structure. For all purposes it is classed among the anthracite coals, and is sold for exactly the same purposes. The coal sixty feet below Bed B introduces at once an interesting inquiry, from the fact that although a semi-bituminous coal it does not coke, and re- absorbs moisture rapidly on cooling after being heated to 225°. In his report upon the analyses of coals from Ohio, Prof. Wormley has noted the characteristic feature of their re-absorbing moisture when allowed to coal after being heated to 212° F. In his report on the analyses of the coals of Pennsylvania,* Mr. Andrew 8. McCreath, the chemist of the survey, reports that the Pennsylvania coals have no such characteristics ; and out of many hundreds of coals analyzed by him only four so far have possessed the power of re-absorbing moisture rapidly after it has been expelled at 225° F.+ Under such circumstances it is desirable to note particularly the appear- ance, behavior and composition of these peculiar coals. Three of them are from Sullivan county, and oné from the New Red Sandstone in York county. No. 1. B. Gross coal, from York county, Pennsylvania, on B. Gross farm, on Liverpool road, three-fourths of a mile north of Liverpool, on the Little Conewago creek. Specimen collected by P. Frazer, Jr. The coal is from the Mesozoic rocks, ‘*The coal has generally a deep black color, with somewhat pitchy ap- pearance. It is very brittle, breaking with conchoidal fracture. | Water at 200° ss i. vice tiddaas ieee Socpbwelduie pevidue alse ee Volatile Hydrocarbons. ...-.sccosccccdvccnicnscscvvcsee 10408 Bized Carhon ss sr'nesakanne dilna Wak pie PARANGM AAD SUR as OCkeuR Oeen eee 12.715 Color of ash, reddish-gray. 100.000 On drying at 225° the Coal loses. .......c.sscecesenseees 4.13 % 6s 5S BAO 8 ee Soa ae ba gc ngmeaenmepe re same. ~ ae Aes pibtecied TET Tay eed A Ee 4.19 % te val Pe Mee eas RG A phe sais Fees - 4.50 % * ee oe haat re Fe La gaat ible Pe St 4.69 % At a dull red heat the Coal loses............. EPA x 12.59 % But in all these experiments the water re-absorbed is about the same ; that is, the coal re-absorbs 2.48 parts of water. Irrespective, therefore, of the amount of water, &c., driven off by heat, the portion re-absorbed is practically constant ; and this property is not destroyed, even after all the volatile matter is driven off.”’ No. 3. Coal from opening one and a half miles east of Bernice, Sullivan county, Pennsylvania. Top bench of coal. ‘The coal has a dull dead lustre; it is very soft and crumbling, and has a somewhat shaly appearance with laminated structure. The gases burn with a feebly luminous flame, but the coal does not coke. WERLOE: O40 sse cha ania soins aig ithe bia a ack RUSTE MEAT AA CaaS 7.930 Voledle Matter é. o6ceics veusenws Pere Sevadieds Pes a 21.410 Vixed . Carbon hae RAMEE RASS 551 Pian 5: ns ace’ ik bie a. bcitte dik eae ea ame at oe ce nee a 16.010 Color of ash, cream. 100.000 No. 4. Sullivan county, one mile south of Laporte. From 8. Hall’s drift. ‘«The coal has a deep black dull lustre ; it is rather friable ; contains some slate. It does not show the slightest tendency to form a coherent coke ; the volatile matter burns with a feebly luminous flame. The coal acts generally in the same way as that from the Bernice lower coal bed. Wet rs cect as thun ks dye em niesaPad cuhdbewasiia cliente -» 6,880 Volatile Mathers :i06 ict = } of the square of the velocity of equatorial superficial rotation), we may obtain the equation : (* LNNe 2 (1 . yo sage naps ack 1 Sa dapuee test pinadh MEE eae Rtn be obieedD in which y represents the distance traversed by a ray of light (compare Laws 13, 15), while a body,;at the equator, would fall through the ‘‘fun- damental increment’’ of the foregoing tabular comparison (4; of 4215.8 ten millionths of 4 puttin For, 3963 0, = x X 3963 + 86165 = .1445 m. 2 y=r (*) — 8,436 m. % t= V .0000000016468 = 4.8894 — .000018358 sec. Light traverses Earth’s mean radius-vector in 497.825 sec. Therefore, according to this estimate, Sun’s mean distance is Sy : SUSY — 93,208,000 miles ety oP ee coe 28 tee Selatca esate? A second approximation may be made by remembering that the basic lines are the reciprocals of harmonic lines, and comparing the ethereal volumes, or the reciprocals of the ratio of variability in tidal influence, 3 we at the points where the disturbing forces are greatest (the surfaces of the disturbing bodies). By the laws of elasticity, the ethereal undula- tions that are set up at any point, are propagated with uniform velocity. If we take the theoretical fundamental wave length as our fundamental unit, and if we call the mean orbital distance which Earth traverses in the time (¢ = .000018353 sec.) of falling through the fundamental increment, the ‘orbital unit,’’ we find that Orbital unit Sun’s radius \° 3 Fundamental unit Earth’s radius. Sse bisimiaeleimipte slaiste lh enhablcia hie aeD For, representing Earth’s mean radius-vector by 2 ; Orbital unit = 27 @ XK 000018353 sec. + 1 year. 4215.8 % .0000000039871 Fundamental unit = 68360 m. Sun’s radius = a -+- 214.524, Earth's radius = 8963 m. Substituting these values in equation (8), we get 2-2 XK .000018353 x 63360 8 865.250 x 86400 x 4215.8 x 0000000030871 \214. Er < 8968 o's @ = 02,579,000 miles... ccccesccvccdevectvevebeesviccsevecvesves (4) 1879.] 229 [Chase, It will be readily seen that equations (2) and (4) are entirely independ- ent of each other. The true unknown quantity, or common unit of com- parison, in each case, is the velocity of light. The comparison is drawn, in the first instance, between Earth’s centripetal and centrifugal forces ; in the second, between Sun’s orbit-controlling influence upon Earth, and Earth’s reaction upon Sun. That reaction must be exerted, either through an elastic medium, or by means of quasi-elastic forces. The elimination of the comparative unit, shows that the hypothesis of a luminiferous ether, or ‘‘eethereal spirit’? as Newton termed it, accounts for inter-stellar, plane- tary, chemical, electrical, cosmical and molecular action. Ido not, however, regard this fact as conclusive of the existence of such a medium, although it seems to lend the hypothesis a higher degree of probability than any previous investigations, and it requires, at least, guvasd-elastic action. The difference between the two results is less than one-half of one per cent. It would have been easy to assume values for the constants, which are within the limits of probable errors of observation, and which would have made the accordance exact. The value of Sun’s radius (# + 214.524) is deduced from Dr. Fuhg’s estimate of Sun’s apparent diameter. Three other estimates, which do not make so large an allowance for irradiation, are also included in the following table: Apparent Diam, z-+ Sun’s*, Ki FE PUT a0 baile Win 82’ 2.99 214.524 92,579,000 British Naut. Al........82 3. 64 214.451 92,531,700 cmmerioan: $F) 7048p. or ees02 «64. 00 214.412 92,506, 500 Lockyer’s Astron........82 4. 205 214.388 92,491,000 Among the numerous previous mechanical estimates that I have given, the one which accords most nearly with the two present determinations, was the one which was based upon thermo-dynamical considerations de- rived from the ‘‘ heating energy of flames,’’+ and which gave a# = 92,639,500 miles....... aod siclatals aie kuahd's -b's.aig 6 A'S t ieed vets.) The intimate connection between Sun, Jupiter and Earth, which is indi- cated by Laws} 13 and 14, should lead to many other relations, no less in- teresting than the foregoing. If we take 5}, of the cosmical distance which corresponds to the funda- mental wave-length, we find atz Of .6 of 214.524 = .5028 = 1.0056 & 5.2... eee ce eee ees (5) But .5 is the focal abscissa of the primitive paraboloid, of which Sun’s radius is the focal ordinate. Ill. Relations of Mass. According to Professor Peirce’s meteoric hypothesis, it may be reason- ably presumed that each planet receives meteoric increments, or suffers *Deduced from 6827 measurements; Astron, Nach. 2040, cited in Am, Jour. Sci., x, 159, Aug. 1875. + Ante, xii, 394; Am. Jour, Sci., iil, 292; 1872. tI call all these harmonies “laws,” because they exhibit pre-established pur- poses, though some of them are more special than others. Chase.] 230 [April 4, changes from meteoric influences, in proportion to its mass, so as to main- tain a permanency of relative mass among the principal members of our system. , I have already pointed out various harmonic mass relations (Law 8), in- cluding the following equation involving figurate powers of the supra- asteroidal masses, as well as of their distances.* Saturn’®= Neptune!’ x Uranus* x Jupiter®....... pieamiaee kee (6) I have also called attention to the fact that these four planets, together with Earth and Sun, represent important centres of nebular or guasi-nebu- lar influence, viz: Néptune, centre of primitive annular condensation. Earth, centre of belt of greatest density. Sun, centre of nucleal condensation. ; Uranus, centre of primitive ‘“‘subsidence’’ collision (Law 2). Jupiter, centre of Neptuno-Uranian nebula. Saturn, nebular centre of mean planetary inertia. Saturn is also the centre of paraboloidal subsidence when Neptune was focal and Sun was at the vertex. The report of Professor Pierce’s lecture led me to look for some equation to connect the masses at the two remaining centres (Earth and Sun) with those of the two chief planets, and I soon found that Jupiter’ = Sun x Earth x Saturn........... beetaby) sie wasas ste This equation gives Sun’s mass........ == 328,600. ) ‘+ parallax..... == 8.882 b's en ce ReaD *« distance..... == 92,549,000 miles. J Combining (6) and (7), we find Saturn’ = Jupiter® x Uranus’ & Sun & Earth & Neptune........(8) The masses of Neptune and Uranus seem to be so related as to give them equal ratios between their present orbital momentum and the orbital mo- mentum at their respective abscissas in the solar-stellar paraboloid ($ Nep- tune and } Uranus). 7 >< Neptune= 8 & Uranus 9 ae Vt X Neptune = //} & Uranus seeeesee jviniebitie caw OD Equation (8) may be stated under the form Sat. eet OP ) ( Sat. et Sun, % “Kar. % Nep. Jup. 3 i eee ee fi)! Here the equation of is bed stability groups the centres in two sets, asin equation (7), the first introducing the first powers, the other the cubes, of the relative masses, The same exponential grouping also occurs in (3), but with linear factors instead of mass factors. If we consider that, in a rotating nebula, the time of rotation varies inversely as the square of the * Ante, xiv, 652, 1879.] 23 1 [Chase, radius, and also inversely as the disturbing mass, the first group leads to the equation Earth X lyear & (Neptune’sr. vec.)? _ Sun « 1 day x (Earth’s r. vec. y —_ 1 ee (11) This equation gives Sun’s mass........ = 330,375. St ERS ci ah ee ae Pe FU, Bas kid alee os (12) ‘« distance..... = 92,717,000 miles. In considering this and other relations of mass to ethereal disturbance, it is well to remember that the simple disturbance varies as the mass; the vis viva, or radius of consequent oscillation, as the square of the mass; and the consequent orbital period, as the cube of the mass. By introducing the vector-radii also into the cubical factor of (10) and designating secular perihelion, mean perihelion, mean aphelion, secular aphelion, respectively, by subscript 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, we find Sat., x Sat., } Jup.. x Ura., = 1 Sat., x Sat., mt 1 Jup.,; x Ura., The greatest deviation from exactness, in the first of these equations, is less than } of one per cent.; in the second, less than ,; of one per cent. The mean deviation, in the square root of the product of the two equa- tions, is only 5 of one per cent. We see by (5) and (13), as well as by ordinary astronomical investiga- tions, that questions of relative mass are intimately connected with those of orbital eccentricity. One of the most interesting evidences of such connection, in this special line of investigation, is to be found in the posi- tion of the mean fulcrum of the system, or centre of gravity of Sun and Jupiter, together with the significance which it lends to equations (5), (6), (8), (18), as well as to the fundamental increment which is the ground of equation (8). The orbital vis viva has lengthened the radius-vector of simple equilibrium by ; of its value. For 5.2028 >< 214.524 = 1116.125; $$ of 1116.125 = 1050.471. The limit of synchronous radial and circular oscillations is at 27. Deducting 2 from 1050.471 we find Sun’s mass ~Jupiter’s mass = BOMB ATP a ih Lenibees a: cred. Wels < (14) Equations 7, 8and 9 give the following theoretical values, for Uranus and Neptune, which I compare with Newcomb’s : Sun — Theoretical, . Newcomb. UPanns. 335 RP a 22116 22600 + 100 PUOMONG No 6 Ceccasspacne es 19352 19380 to 19700 Newcomb gives two estimates for Neptune, one (19380 + 70) from satel- lite, the other (19700) from perturbations of Uranus. The latter agrees Chase,] 232 [April 4, precisely with the theoretical ratio (9) between the two planets, while the former is presumably more accurate. ' The uncertainty in regard to all the planetary masses, except that of Jupiter, is still so great, that it is impossible to tell how closely they are represented by the equations for the combined central activities (6, 7, 8). The latest investigations of Leverrier and Newcomb, however, show a closeness of approximation which is remarkable, in view of the wide dis- crepancy in some of the values. Leverrier’s mass-denominators, based on the old parallax (8.//57), are: Neptune, 14400; Uranus, 24000; Jupiter, 1050 ; Saturn, 3512; Earth, 354936. The accordance with the combined equation (8) is within 3 of one per cent. if we deduce Earth from the other masses ; within ;; of one per cent. if we deduce Saturn. If we look to the partial equations, (6, 7), we find that Saturn’s mass, as deduced from Neptune, Uranus and Jupiter, (6), is about 3 of one per cent. greater than Leverrier’s assumption, and about the same amount less than Bessel’s, which was adopted by Newcomb. The mean of the two re- sults shows an exact accordance, as follows: Deduced. Assumed. LeVOrrier. 000000000. 8488:8 3512.0 Newcomb. .........08 3525.0 3501.6 Means Seis AARC 3506.6 3506.8 The results of the second partial equatior, (7,), may confidently await the verdict of the observations upon the last transit of Venus. No other estimate can now claim a greater degree of probability. It may be, as Leverrier suggests, that a small portion of the mass may belong to a group of minute asteroids, near Earth’s orbit, but there is no present likelihood that any material inaccuracy will ever be found in the equation which con- nects the two principal intra-asteroidal centres with the two principal extra- asteroidal centres. E. Wiedemann’s experiments upon the illumination of gases by elec- tricity,* have convinced him that the electric discharge may excite a con- siderable increase of the vis viva of oscillation in ethereal envelopes, with- out increasing the vis vica of the enclosed molecules. Peirce’s meteoric hypothesis opens an immense field for new physical speculation and inves- tigation. If the «ther is material, where shall we draw the boundary between ethereal and meteoric influences? If cosmical masses have been formed by paraboloidal aggregation, may not radiation also be paroboloidal ? The solar forces of association and dissociation seem to be almost exactly balanced, and the law of equal action and reaction may, perhaps, free the science of thermodynamics from the opprobrium of its apparent tendencies to universal aggregation, stagnation and death. * Wied, Ann., vi, p, 391. 1879.] 233 (Frazer. Obituary Notice of Robert Frazer. By Persifor Frazer, Jr. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, February 7, 1879.) Ropert FRAZER was born December 29, 1818, at his father’s house in Newtown Township, Delaware County. His father, Robert Frazer, was a lawyer of excellent standing and distinguished for his knowledge of land law, who had served several times as a member of the House of Repre- sentatives of this State. The elder Robert, son of General Persifor* and Mary Worrall Frazer, was three times married, as follows: On May 3, 1798, he married Sarah Ball, who died without issue, June 21, 1800. On October 15, 1803, he married Elizabeth Fries, daughter of John and Anne Fries, by whom he had six children, three of whom died under the age of one year, and the others were, Anne Fries, Persifor, and John Fries, of whom only the second survives. On February 11, 1818, he married Alice, widow of Eli Yarnall and daughter of Joseph and Sarah Pennell, by whom he had but one child, the subject of this brief notice. The boy was named originally Joseph Pennell, but on the death of his ' father, January 20, 1821, his name was changed to Robert. From that date he continued to live on his mother’s farm, near West Chester, till her death in 1825 or 1826, when he spent some time in Phila- delphia and attended Dr. §. Crawford’s school. In 1834-38 he went to school in Pittsfield, Mass., and finally completed his education at Norwich University, a military academy in Vermont, under the direction of Capt. Partridge. He graduated after having completed courses in Civil Engineering and in the Arts and Sciences. In 1838 he joined the corps of Engineers which was then engaged in laying out the Reading Railroad, and was in charge of the second division above Reading, remaining there until the completion of the road. In the autumn of 1846 he went to Europe and remained about a year, and upon his return commenced the study of law in Reading, in the office of Judge Jones. On being admitted to the bar, he removed to Philadelphia to practice, and not long after this held the office of Prosecuting Attorney for Delaware County for some time. In 1846 he was married to Miss Jane Biddle Wood (daughter of Samuel and Fanny Collins Wood, and grandniece of Marks John Biddle) who was born February 14, 1820. The marriage was celebrated by the Rev.-Ed- mund Leaf, Rector of Christ’s Church, in Pottstown, Montgomery County. On July 22, 1849, Robert Frazer was born as the first issue of this mar- riage. * General of State Militia after the Revolution. Lt.-Col. in the American army during the Revolution, PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC, XVIII. 103. 2D. PRINTED JUNE 8, 1879. Frazer.) 234. [Feb. 7, A daughter, Fanny (now Mrs. Herbert Welsh), was born on October 4, 1852. Almost at the same time in this year (1852) Robert Frazer was elected Secretary and Treasurer of the Camden & Atlantic Railroad, in the con- struction of which road he had been previously engaged as consulting engineer. In November, 1863, he was elected President of the Company, which office he retained till the fall of 1873. It will ever remain asa monument of his devotion, zeal and efficiency in the management of this road that its stock advanced during his tenure of the chief office from an almost unsaleable commodity to a position of prominent favor for such a road. Upon his retirement from the Camden & Atlantic Railroad he was called to the presidency of the Wilmington & Reading (afterwards known as the Wilmington and Northern) Railroad, and while holding this position he died suddenly of a stroke of apoplexy, on May 4, 1878, at 15 minutes past 6, P. M. On the 4th of May, 1878, he was apparently in the best health and in buoyant spirits and attended to all his duties with ease. He was expected at the house of his daughter, Mrs. Welsh, to tea, when a short time before the hour a messenger arrived announcing that he had a severe headache and would not be able to come. Very shortly after this he died. He was a man who was characterized by many salient traits, among which none was so striking, by reason of its rarity, as his gentleness and sweetness of disposition. No one ever observed him in his relations to other men without envying him the kindly tone, the liberal view and the winning manner with which he either opposed or endorsed the sentiments of others. His normal condition of features was the border of a smile, and his heart was full of sunshine, which his cheery words sprinkled like drops of water on those about him. One is tempted to dwell on a charac- ter like this, for the memory of it causes always an agreeable sensation : yet it may be thought that the ties of consanguinity render the writer a too partial witness. But it is not so. All who knew Robert Frazer, knew him as a patient, forbearing, kind and cheerful friend, a model of content, and a well-spring of pleasure to those by whom he was surrounded. His tastes were those of a cultured man, and his mind had that quality of interest and curiosity which kept him actively seeking information and au courant with the affairs of the day. Every new turn of the kaleido- scope of the times which developed some new and beautiful idea, some discovery, or some invention, delighted him whether it was or was not in the direction of his professional work. He was one of those earnest soldiers of ideas who, whether they serve religion, their country, or science, show alike their sense of the solemn meaning of the march of events. He believed in the duty of man to labor for and with that evolution of new forms of truth which is but the measure of onward progress, even though the progress be in any case inevitable ; 1879,] 235 [Frazer, and he believed also unwaveringly in the majesty and goodness, the fit- ness and worthiness of that which the future was to bring forth. Many find this state of mind inseparable from a mood of seriousness, if not of asceticism ; Robert Frazer did not. No one realized more fully the serious side of life, but he had also learned (if it was not taught him by in- stinct) the phariseeism of gloom as an emblem of respect for truth. If ever man served his God with the grateful incense of smiles and joyfulness it was the subject of this sketch. This interest in the affairs of the world around him Jed him naturally to cultivate various branches of science, as an amateur, and he preserved the keenest interest in them to his last hour, though his engrossing occupations forbade him to tread the path of original investigation. Microscopy and Entomology always had great attractions for him, and for several years previous to 1867 he was President of the Entomological Society of this city. He was elected a member of the Academy of Natural Sciences in 1866, and when his duties allowed was frequently seen within its halls on its nights of meeting. In 1873, he was elected a member of this Society. Of his inner life as a member of a family ; of his charm within that circle, shut out from the gaze of the world, I may not speak. But were it per- mitted to pursue this theme a far juster picture of the man could be pre- sented them in these few poor lines in tribute to his memory. Yet those who knew him in the world can easily imagine how bitter was the loss of this friend, who ever dispensed consolation and cheer, to those whom he most dearly loved, and to whom his whole life was a pattern of self-sacri- fice, of manly and healthy virtue, and of the warmest human sympathy. Stated Meeting, April 18, 1879. Present, 19 members. Vice-President, Mr. Fratey, in the chair. A letter declining the appointment to prepare an obituary notice of Dr. Wood, was reccived from Dr. Stillé, whose communication was on motion referred to the Committee on the eulogy. A letter accepting the appointment to prepare an obituary notice of Dr. Beadle, was received from Dr. Agnew, dated April 17. A letter requesting permission to use the Logan-Penn 236 [April 18, MSS. in the Hall of the Historical Society, was received from the President of that Society, Mr. J. W. Wallace. On motion, the Librarian was authorized to entrust, 1. the Wm. Penn’s Letters and Ancient Documents; 2. Logan Papers, Vol. 3; 8. Logan Papers, 399-3, to the care of the Committee of the Histdrical Society, on written receipt for the same and obligation to return without unnecessary delay. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Yale College Library (Trans. XIV, XV), and the Rey. Stephen D. Peet, Unionville, Ohio (Proc. Vols. VIII to XVII complete). Letters of envoy were received from the Imp. Bot. Gar- den, St. Petersburg, March 4, 1879, and from Prof. Ira Remsen, of Johns Hopkins University, April 10, with the first number of the American Chemical Journal, asking for exchanges. On motion, Dr. Remsen’s name, as Editor, was ordered to be placed on the List of Correspondents to receive the Proceed- ings henceforth. | Donations for the Library were received from the Botani- cal Garden, St. Petersburg; the Russian Geographical So- ciety ; Prussian Academy ; Zoologischer Anzeiger; Flora Batava; Belgian Academy; Society of Geography, Paris; R. Astronomical Society ; Nature ; Boston Soc. Nat. History ; Brooklyn Entomological Society; Am. Jour. of Otology ; Astor Library; N. Y. Chemical and Historical Societies ; Franklin Institute; Jour. of Pharmacy; Medical News; Jour. Med. Sciences; Am. Chemical Journal; State Miner- alogist of Nevada; and Sig. V. Reyes, Mexico. The death of Dr. Isaac Hays, at Philadelphia, one of the oldest members and former secretaries of the Society, April 15, aged 83 years, was announced by Mr. Fraley. On motion, Dr. Brinton was appointed to prepare an obit- uary notice of the deceased, Pending nominations 872, 874 to 882 were read, Nos. 872, 874 to 877 were spoken to and balloted for. The Chairman of the Committee on a Premium for an 1879.] 237 Anthracite Dirt Burning Process, Dr. R. E. Rogers, reported progress. (See Minute book.) There being no other business, after scrutiny of the ballot boxes, by the presiding officer, the following persons were declared duly elected members of this Society : William H. Greene, M.D., of Philadelphia. Mr. Arthur Erwin Brown, of Philadelphia, Superintendent of the Zoological Garden. Carl Seiler, M.D., of Philadelphia. Dr. Middleton Goldsmith, of Rutland, Vt. Mr. Richard Wood, of Philadelphia. And the meeting was adjourned. Stated Meeting, May 2, 1879. Present, 13 members. Vice-President, Mr. Fratey, in the chair. Letters accepting membership were received from Dr. Carl Seiler, dated Philadelphia, April 22, 1879; Dr. Wm. H. Greene, dated Philadelphia, 1812 Green St., April 21; Mr. Arthur E. Brown, Zool. Soc., Fairmount Park, April 21, and Dr. M. Goldsmith, dated Rutland, Vt., April 22, A photograph of Mr. Edward Goodfellow, was received for insertion in the Album. A letter accepting the appointment to prepare an obituary notice of the late Dr. Isaac Hays was received from Dr. Brinton. A letter enclosing a communication to be read at the meeting was received from Prof. Daniel Kirkwood, of Bloom- ington, Monroe Co., Indiana, dated April 19, 1879. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Ken- tucky Historical Society (Proc. No. 102); Buffalo Society of’ Natural Sciences (102); Kansas State Historical Society 238 [May 2, (102); Smithsonian Institution (102); Essex Institute (102); Davenport Academy (102); Providence Franklin Society (102); and the Liverpool Lit. and Philo. Society (Nov. 25, 1878, 100 and 101), and postal cards from many members. Letters of envoy were received from the Lit. and Philo. Society of Liverpool, and from the Société des Sciences de V Agriculture de Lille, dated April 1, 1879. A letter offering an exchange of publications was received from the Director of Studies of the Ecole Polytechnique, dated Paris, April ¢, 1879. Donations for the Library were reported from the Asiatic Society of Japan; the Royal Academy dei L. at Rome; Dr. Prof. F. J. Lauth, of Munich ; the Vaudoise Society ; Zoolo- gischer Anzeiger; Royal Belgian Academy ; Revue Politique; Com. Geog. Society at Bordeaux; R. Astronomical Society ; London Nature; Lit. and Phil. Society of Liverpool ; Mr. James W. Barclay; Silliman’s Journal; Penna. Historical Society ; Am. Journal of Pharmacy ; Prof. Andrews, of the Geol. Survey of Ohio; and Prof. Joseph LeConte. A communication was read by the Secretary, entitled, “ Meteoric Fireballs seen in the United States during the year ending March 31, 1879, by Prof. Daniel Kirkwood.” Prof. Cope exhibited a life-size drawing of a vertebra of a new species of Camelosaurus, for which he proposed the name C. leplodirus, and showed in what it differed from the verte- bree of C. supremus. Prof. Marks exhibited a beautiful ‘* Compound Compass,” made under his direction by Wm. Young & Sons, for the use of the Geological Survey in drawing tangents and curves of very great radius, or parallels and meridians, and explained how this invention of Peaucellier could be modified for other uses, Mr. Lesley exhibited a large distemper map of Pennsyl- vania, painted recently to exhibit to the Legislature the progress of the Survey. Also the first bound copy of Les- quereaux’s Coal Flora Atlas of 87 plates, just published by the Board of Commissioners of the Geological Survey. 1879.] 239 [Kirkwood. Prof. Frazer read parts of a correspondence which he had had with Mr. Meehan, respecting the local cause of change of color in autumn foliage. A letter from Prof. Lauth, of Munich, was read, relating to his recent investigations and proposed publication of a new work on Egyptology. Pending nominations, Nos. 878 to 882 and new nomina- tion No. 883 were read. Mr. Fraley, for the Finance Committee, reported that he had collected and paid over to the Treasurer, the quarterly interest on the Michaux Legacy due April 1, amounting to $133.07. A discussion on the Wooten process then took place, pend- ing which the meeting was adjourned. On Meteoric Fireballs seen in the United States during the year ending March 31, 1879.* By Professor Daniel Kirkwood. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, May 2, 1879.) The following paper does not claim to present a complete list of the fire-balls which have appeared in our entire country during the last twelve months, It includes, however, all that have been brought tothe writer’s notice. Of those described only three can be certainly classed as detonating meteors, and in no case has an explosion been followed by a fall of meteoric stones ; at least, no aerolites have been actually discovered. (1.) 1878, June 3, 2h. 59m., A. m.—This meteor, observed at Chicago, by Prof. E. Colbert, was about equal in apparant magnitude to the moon at four days old. Its course was from near the zenith to a point about 4° above Beta Cassiopeize. Near Alpha Cassiopeise it exploded into seven or eight fragments. + (2.) 1878, June 6th, 9h. 25m. (local time).—On the evening of June 6, Mr. Geo. H. E. Trouvelot, at Cambridge, Mass., saw a very large meteor which passed directly over Omicron Urs Majoris, and disappeared just below Eta in the same constellation. It was pear-shaped, the greatest and least diameters being in the ratio of 4 to 3, and it left behind it a long bright train. About three or four seconds after its appearance it burst into five * No. 6 (January 20, 1877) of the fireballs described in my paper read before the A.P.S., March 16, 1877, was found, after the article was in type, to be a news- paper hoax, + Letter from Prof. E. Colbert, dated June 3, 1878. See also the Sci. Obs. for July, 1878, p. 3. Kirkwood.] 240 [May 2, or six fragments, each of which assumed the same form as the original meteor. ‘«The preceding portion was of a crimson red hue, quite brilliant, and not dissimilar to the Strontian flame. The following portion was of a bluish violet color, which merged into that of the trail. This latter was composed of globules, each succeeding following one being of a more and more sub- dued violet, and finally not distinguishable from the color of the sky.’’* (3.) 1878, August 11, 10h. 10m. (Indianapolis time).—A few minutes after 10 o’clock on Sunday evening, Aug. 11, Rev. John A. Bower, of Bloom- ington, Indiana, saw a large meteor near the eastern horizon. Mr, B. had just taken a position facing an eastern window. The meteor when first seen was almost exactly east of Bloomington, perhaps two or three degrees south of east, and 10° above the horizon. Its motion was from south to north, and the length of its apparent track was 20° or 25°. The first half of its course was but slightly inclined to the earth’s surface ; the inclina- tion, however, became sensibly greater towards the point of disappear- ance, which was N, about 70° E., and very near the horizon. The appar- ent diameter of the meteor was about one-third that of the moon. The motion was extremely rapid; the time of flight not exceeding two seconds. No detonation was heard at Bloomington, nor was the meteor seen to sep- arate into fragments at the time of disappearance. The observations of Mr. Bower were given me verbally. To verify their accuracy I placed myself in the position which he occupied, and had him point out the meteor’s course as he had seen it. The foregoing statement, I am satisfied, must be very nearly correct, except as to the time of flight, which is admitted by the observer.to be very uncertain. The same meteor is supposed to be described in the following telegrams which appeared in the newspapers of the next Tuesday morning :—‘‘ Ti- tusville, Crawford Co., Pa., August 12. A beautiful meteoric display was witnessed from here last evening. The meteor made its appearance in the west at 10.30, moving in a northerly direction. It was of a greenish color and shone with great brilliancy, lighting up the entire surrounding country with a light that for the time prevailed over that of the full moon. Its appearance was only momentary, when it burst and divided into three fragments, two of which assumed a reddish color, Calculating from the time the explosion was seen until it was heard, the meteor was about 25 miles distant.’’ ‘‘Oil City, Venango Co., Pa., August 12. A meteor of unusual brilliancy passed here last evening a few minutes after 10 o’clock, It was nearly twice the size of a cannon ball. Its course was north.”’ All accounts agree that the meteor’s course was northward. It was seen to the west of Titusville; and as the final explosion occurred about 25 miles from that city we may conclude that the track terminated over Craw- ford County, Pa, The observations at Bloomington, Indiana, indicate that the body first became visible over West Virginia, The distance directly east from Bloomington to the meridian which bounds Venango County, Pa., on the west, is 348 miles. Hence the meteor'’s altitude when first * Sclence Obs,, June, 1878, 1879.] 241 [Kirk wood: seen was about 77 miles. This, it must be admitted, is somewhat uncer- tain, but we may safely conclude that it was not less than 70 miles nor more than 85. The length of the visible track was between 160 and 175 miles. The estimated time of flight was probably too short ; but the great velocity appears to indicate a hyperbolic orbit. (4.) 1878, September 16, 9h. Om., rp. M_—This meteor was observed by Mr. Benjamin Vail, of Henryville, Clark County, Indiana. It was first seen near Gamma Ursee Majoris, and it passed over Delta in the same con- stellation. Its apparent diameter was about one-fourth or one-fifth that of the moon.* (5.) 1878, November 12, 7h. 0m., P. m. (local time.)—Washington, Indi- ana. Mr. D. Eckley Hunter, Principal of the High School, of Washing- ton, Daviess County, Indiana, was, with several of his students, watching for shooting stars on the evening of November 12, when preciscly as the town clock was striking seven, a large fireball appeared very close to Vega, passed in a sourtherly direction through the milky-way, and disappeared about 20° N. W. of Jupiter. Its motion was very slow ; the time of visi- bility being estimated by Mr. Hunter at 10 seconds. Its apparent dizme- ter was about two-thirds that of the moon. What struck Mr. Hunter as especially remarkable was the sharply defined disk which the meteor pre- sented, up almost to the very moment of its disappearance.+ (6.) 1878. November 14, 3h. 30m., Pp. m.—In the New York Semi-Weekly Tribune, of December 10, 1878, Mr. Thomas Whitaker, of Hillside Farm, Mass., reports the appearance of this brilliant meteor as observed by him- self. The sky was very clear at the time, and the meteor was seen in bright sunshine. It was due south from the place of observation. (7.) 1878, December 30.—A few minutes before 7 o’clock (Indianapolis time) on the evening of December 30, 1878, a large meteor was seen in Indiana, Ohio, and Pennsylvania. So far, however, as known to the wri- ter, the only observations sufficiently prescise to be available in determin- ing the height and direction of its path were made at Anderson, Madison County, Indiana; Washington, Washington County, Pa., and Wooster, Wayne County, Ohio. Anderson, Indiana, Lat. 40° 5’, Long. 8° 28’ W.—The observations at Anderson were made by Mr. Frederick E. Dickinson, a member of the Senior Class, in Indiana University. Mr. D. was in the street, walking east- ward, when the meteor appeared in front of him, a few degrees N. of E., at an altitude of not less than 15° nor more than 17°. As the meteor passed behind a building the point of disappearance could not be determined. The apparent diameter was one-fourth that of the moon, and the time of flight was estimated at two seconds or probably a fraction less. Washington, Pa., Lat. 40° 10’, Long. 8° 12/ W.—The phenomenon as * Letter from Mr. Vail. + Letter from Mr. D. EB. Hunter. { The meteor was seen by others in Indiana, but the descriptions given were + nothing more than vague guesses in regard to its size and general direction. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC, XVIII. 103. 2E. PRINTED JUNE 38, 1879. > Kirk wood.] 242 [May 2, seen in Washington, is described in the following letter from the Professor of Mathematics in Washington and Jefferson College : * WasHINGTON, Pa., February 1, 1879. **Pror. D. Krrxwoop, Dear Sir :—The fact of the appearance of a meteor here some time ago, may be of interest to you I set down the facts as [ learned them at the time, and intended to have written you sooner. About 7 Pp. M., Washington, Pa. time, December 30th, a brilliant meteor was seen here. The account which I have was given me by a young man, Mr. A. M. Gow, Jr., who has given me, I have no doubt, a very fair state- ment of what was to be seen at that time. He was walking eastward on the south side of the street, so that he was in the shade of the buildings ; the moon shining brightly at the time. Suddenly a light shone about him as if an additional Jamp had been lighted close behind him. He did not turn immediately to look, but when he did he saw a meteor about the size of the moon ag he thought by comparing his impression with the half-full moon immediately afterwards. It was of a slightly greenish color, but just . as it disappeared it became reddish. The place in which he saw it, as far as I can judge, was about Alpha Cygni, and the place of its disappearance was about Alpha Lyre. If so, you see its course was W. N. W., and it was observed through 24° of its path. The meteor had been visible a lit- tle time, however, before Mr. Gow turned to look. It was seen by three others here that I know of. Yours Truly, “D. J. McApam.” Observations at Wooster, Lat. 40° 50’ N., Long. 4° 56’ W.—Professor Samuel J. Kirkwood, of Wooster University, had a good view of the me- teor, which he describes as the most brilliant he has ever seen. It was greatly elongated, and the apparent diameter at right angles to its path was half that of the moon. The point of the meteor’s first appearance and also the first part of its track were accurately observed through large tree-tops.* Prof. Kirkwood gives the following angles as the result of careful measure- ment with a surveyor’s transit : ‘First appearance, east, alt. 50°. Disappearance, 8. 18° E. alt. 13°.” Prof. K. remarks: ‘‘ The first appearance is, I am satisfied, quite exact, and entirely reliable. Iam not so confident of the observation at disap- pearance. The meteor exploded when about 8, 83° E.’’+ According to the observations at Wooster and Anderson the meteor be- came visible at a height of 72 miles over a point in Columbiana County, Ohio, Lat. 40° 50’, Long. 3° 40/ W. The Wooster and Washington obser- vations, seem incompatible; the latter, however, make no claim to strict ac- curacy. As the exlosion seen at Wooster was not observed either at Wash- ington or Anderson it is probable that at these greater distances the disap- pearance was simultaneous with the separation into fragments. Such doubtless has been the case in several other instances, For example, the * Amember of the Juntor Classin Wooster University was with Prof. Kirkwood. t Letter from Prof, 8, J. Kirkwood, 1879.] 243 [Kirkwood. fragments of the meteor of August 11, 1878, seen at Titusville, Pa., were invisible at Bloomington, Indiana. If we assume, then,-that as seen from Washington the point of explosion was also that of disappearance, we find by a tentative process that the observations are approximately satisfied by supposing the separation to have taken place over Tuscarawas County, Ohio, about N. 80° W. from Washington, Pa., at a distance of 70 miles, and at a height of 17 or 18. miles above the earth’s surface. After the explosion the parts remained visible at Wooster until within 12 or 13 miles of the earth. The course was nearly 8. W.; the true length of the entire visible track as seen at Wooster was about 85 miles; that of its projection on the earth’s surface, about 60 miles. The inclination of the path to the surface of the earth was about 45°. The velocity, though uncertain, was probably greater than that corresponding to an elliptic orbit. No detonation was heard at any point of observation. (8.) 1879, January 28, 2h. 28m., A. M., local time.—Observations at Princeton, Green Lake County, Wisconsin. Lat. 48° 50/ N., Long. 12° 13’ W.—Rey. William M. Richards, states that between 2 and 3 o’clock* on the morning of January 28, he was awakened by a sudden flash of in- tense light which he at first supposed to be lightning. It continued, how- ever, for some seconds, and by the time he was thoroughly awake and ready to make observations the light had assumed a reddish tinge, some- what resembling that of a Roman candle. He next supposed it to be a fire, but immediately found that if so, it must be out of the village. After making other conjectures, to be as quickly dismissed, he finally reach the conclusion that the light was meteoric. ‘* By that time,’’ he says, ‘‘ the frightful conflagration had settled down into’ low pyramid of lurid light, the base extending 60° along the N. E. horizon, and the vertex having an altitude of 30°. * * * The time of the meteor’s flight is very uncertain ; perhaps 8 to 10 seconds. The bril- liant and white light at first would indicate that the movement was from the West.’’+ Observations at Traverse City, Michigan, Lat. 44° 43’ N., Long. 8° 40’ W. The Grand Traverse Herald, of January 80, 1879, states that the accounts of this meteor by different observers were, in some respects, very conflict- ‘ing; those who saw it being too muclr startled to observe it closely. «What 7s known is that it was an immense ball of fire, that the darkness was made light as nvonday, and that a terrible explosion followed its dis- appearance. A night watchman who saw it explode says it flew into minute pieces like star dust. The one thing that all agree upon is the ex- plosion. This was heard with equal clearness at Mayfield, 13 miles south of Traverse City, and at Williamsburg, 12 miles east. The effect was like that of an earthquake. Houses were jarred, windows shvok, and dishes rattled upon the shelves. A swaying motion seemed to be given to the * Mr. Richards did not notice the exact time. The Michigan observations give 2h. 28m. + Letter from Rey. Mr. Richards. See also the Sci. Am. of March 15, 1879, Kirkwood.] 244 [May 2, buildings as an upheaval and settling back. If the meteor had not been seen it would have been thought an earthquake shock.”’ In response to a letter of inquiry, Thomas T. Bates, Esq., editor of the Grand Traverse Herald, has given me the following additional statement : ‘‘A night watch on our streets, an intelligent, cool-headed man, gives me in substance this : Was on watch ; passing from due west to east ; saw a great light; turned quickly and saw a ball of fire over my right shoulder; turned to left and watched it until it disappeared ; when first seen it appeared about as high as ordinary rain clouds; was on a down grade close to and apparently over the bay; came from 8. W. and passed to N. E.; appeared to me larger than full moon ; full moon locks to me to be 18 or 20 inches in diameter ; meteor appeared to pass me, and move out of sight at about the rate of speed a descending rocket has after its explo- sion ; had a good chance to see it plainly ; just after passing me a singular thing occurred ; a ring of fire seemed to peel off the meteor itself, and this followed the ball of fire out of sight, but dropped a little behind it. It was perfectly distinct, and appeared to be hollow, for I could see a dark centre. Every thing was as light as day. I looked at my watch as it disappeared ; it was just 28 minutes after 2 o’clock. I passed on my beat, and shortly the terzific explosion came. It shook and jarred every thing around. I immediately looked at my watch, and it was 32 minutes after 2. ‘«This is his report as it was given the next day, and as it was repeated to me a few days ago. I have no idea that the meteor fell into Carp Lake, * or that even a portion of it fell there. Every thing points to the correct- ness of Mr. Smith’s report which I send you. ‘Truly yours, P a eT OR, te BATES Charlevoix, Charlevoix County, Michigan, Lat. 45° 15’ N., Long 8° 12/ W. Willard A. Smith, Esq., editor of the Charlevoiz Sentinel states that the meteor was seen by several persons at Charlevoix, where it appeared to be at least four times as large as the full moon ; that it burst almost ex- actly over the village, and that parts of it were seen to fall. The ground was covered with deep snow, which was disturbed in several spots by the meteorites, though strangely enough no fragments were found. The meteor before striking the earth lighted up surrounding objects with an in- tensity of brightness surpassing that of sunshine, and its explosion resem- bled the sound of musketry. Its direction was nearly from 8. W. to N. E., and the interval was very brief between the explosion and report.t Cheboygan, Michigan, Lat. 45° 87’ N., Long. 7° 81/ W. Mr. and Mrs. Jacob Walton, of Cheboygan, both saw the meteoric light as it approached from the 8. W. It lasted several seconds, and was so bright as to cast a very distinct shadow into the windows from the roof of the porch. From “It was reported that a hole through the ice on Carp Lake had been discovered the next day, indicating that the aerolite had probably fallen into the lake, + Condensed from a letter of Mr, Smith to Mr, Bates, 1879.] 245 (Kirkwood. this shadow Mr. Walton estimated the greatest altitude of the meteor at about 45°. The explosion was not heard at Cheboygan.* The preceding observations indicate that the meteor’s course was ap- proximately N. E. by N., and that it first became visible over a point not far from Lat. 44° 25’ N., Long. 9° 0’ W. The distance from Traverse city to the point at which meteoric matter is said to have fallen is about 42 miles. But the interval of four minutes between the observed explosion and the report corresponds to a distance of about 49 miles. This would make the point of explosion 26 miles above the earth’s surface. The height at first appearance, if we can rely upon the rather uncertain estimate of Mr. Walton, at Cheboygan, must have been nearly 100 miles. The true length of the visible track was about 124 miles, and the length of its pro- jection on the earth’s surface, 66 miles. The time of flight is very uncer- tain, though the observations indicate a rather slow motion. (9.) 1879, February 3, 11h. 30m., Pp. M, Indianapolis time.—This meteor is thus described by a correspondent of the Indianapolis Daily News for February 7 : ‘*Raysville [Henry County], Indiana, February 4, 1879. Last night be- tween 11 and 12 o’clock was seen, by a few citizens of this place, one of the largest and most brilliant meteors ever observed in this section. It was larger than the one seen in December, 1876, but did not last so long, being but a few seconds in view. It apparently rose from the eastern horizon, and advanced rapidly, marking its path by a stream of flame until it had almost reached the zenith, when it exploded with a dull but plainly audi- ble report. The different parts shot earthward in various directions, but the lights of all were extinguished before they had gone very far.”’ (10.) 1879, February 17, 8h. 0m., Pp. m., Chicago time.—This meteor was observed by C. A. Kenoston, Professor of Mathematics and Astronomy in Ripon College, Wisconsin. It was first seen in the West at an altitude of about 30°. It moved slowly along the line of the two southern stars in the square of Pegasus and disappeared near the horizon without any audible explosion. It was very bright—increasingly so—and seemed to have a short tail.+ (11.) 1879, February 20, 10h. 45m., Pp. m.—This meteor was seen at Henryville, Clark County, Indiana, by Mr. Benjamin Vail. A brilliant train remained visible nearly a minute after the meteor itself had disap- peared. t ‘ (12.) 1879, March 15, 3h. 58m., A. w.—This meteor was observed by a number of persons at Washington, Daviess County, Indiana. When first seen it was 8: 10° W., at an altitude of 25°. It moved westward 20? and then burst into many fragments. The meteor was of a pale bluish color, but when it exploded it lighted up everything almost like daylight. * Letter from C0. S. Ramsay, Esq., to Mr. T. T. Bates. t Letter from Prof, Kenoston, {Thus briefly referred to in a letter from Mr. Vail. No further description was given, Kirkwood] 246 [May 2, A luminous cloud of smoke or vapor remained visible several minutes after the explosion. No sound was noticed.* REMARKS. As already stated, no meteorites are known to have fallen from any of the fireballs in the preceding list ; although in more than one case the disappearance was followed by loud detonations, and the explosion of the meteor of February 3 took place near the zenith of the principal point of observation. It is also remarkable that the only two whose velocities could be approximately determined were almost certainly moving in. hy- perbolic orbits. This last mentioned fact is in harmony with the theory of Professor Von Neissl, who regards aerolitic and denotating meteors as a distinct class of cosmical bodies, differing both from comets and periodic star showers in the original velocities with which they enter the sphere of the Sun’s attraction.} But not only have certain comets moved in hyper- bolas but the computed velocities of at least a few bolides have undoubtedly indicated elliptic motion. This theory therefore can hardly be accepted without further confirmation. Are meteoroids moving in hyporbolas to be regarded in general as fragments of disintegrated comets ?—The discovery that the meteors of November 14, November 27, April 20, and August 10, are intimately connected with comets moving in the same orbits, has suggested that a@// shooting stars and mete- oric fire-balls may have been produced by the gradual dissolution of comets or cometary clusters. It must be remembered, however, that the comets connected with these meteor streams are all periodic, and that the disper- sion of their matter is due to an indefinite number of returns to perihelion. In cases of non-periodicity complete dissolution, as the result of a single perihelion passage, would be extremely improbable. We conclude there- fore, that the meteor of December 30, 1878, and others with hyperbolic orbits are not cometary fragments dissevered by solar influence. That some fireballs explode noiselessly, while others, apparently no larger, produce loud detonations, is a remarkable fact not hitherto explained. The fact also that explosions very often occur without being followed by the fall of aerolites seems no less mysterious, Professor Newton has sug- gested that aerolites are probably furnished only by such meteors as pene- trate the atmosphere with relatively slow motions ; those moving with great velocities being burnt up or dissipated before reaching the earth’s surface. Much, however, must evidently depend on the size and constitu- tion of the meteoroids. Small meteors (shooting stars) are entirely consumed in the atmosphere. The composition and structure of meteoric stones are very widely various. ‘‘ While some are extremely hard, others are of such a nature as to be easily reducible to powder, It is not impossible that when some of the latter class explode in the atmosphere they may be completely pulverized, so that, reaching the earth in minute particles, they are never * Letter from Prof, D, BE. Hunter, + See the Report on Luminous Meteors by a Committee of the Brit, Assoc, for the Ady, of Sci, for 1877, 1879.] 247 [Kirkwood. discovered.’’* The fireballs of August 11 and December 30, 1878, as well as that of February 3, 1879, had very rapid motions, and we can perhaps best account for the non-appearance of aerolites on the theory of their complete disintegration.t The meteors, it is obvious, could not have escaped out of the atmosphere. Events of this kind are doubtless of very rare occurrence. We have, it is believed, no authenticated instance in whieh a fireball has escaped after approaching within 39 miles of the earth’s surface.{ Assum- ing this as an inferior limit and taking 100 miles as the greatest height at which such bodies become visible, it is easy to show that but one in thirty- four can continue its orbital motion. SUGGESTION TO OBSERVERS. In the theory of meteors it is a matter of first importance to determine the form of their orbits. If any move in hyperbolas they must have had a proper motion in space before entering the solar system. Now the nature of a meteor’s orbit is determined from its observed velocity. Un- fortunately, however, the time of flight (on which the velocity depends) is generally a very uncertain element; the estimates of different observers being very discordant. Persons therefore who report such phenomena should train themselves to habits of exactness in measuring the time of visibility. Stated Meeting, May 16, 1879. Present, 28 members. Vice-President, Mr. Fratry, in the Chair. A letter of envoy was received from Mr. A. Agassiz. A letter of invitation to the members to attend the last session, May 9th, of the West Chester Philosophical Society was received. Donations for the Library were received from the editor of the Zoologischer Anzeiger, Leipsig; M. Melsens, Brus- sels; the Annales des Mines, Paris ; Meteorological and An- tiquarian Societies, Cobden Club, and Nature, London; . * Met. Astr., p. 65. +The average height of shooting stars at extinction is about 55 miles; that of aerolitic fireballs and detonating meteors at the time of explosion, about 25 miles, {This was the nearest approach of the great meteor of July 20, 1860. See Prof. Coffin’s memoir in the Smithsonian Contributions, vol. XVI. 248 [May 16, Science Observer, Boston; Professors Brush and Dana; New Jersey Historical Society ; Franklin Institute, Medical News, Numismatic and Antiquarian Society, Philadelphia; and Mr. Horace W. Smith. The librarian exhibited the six volumes, in elephant folio, bequeathed to the Society by its late President, Dr. George B. Wood, entitled, Gli Hdifizi di Roma e sua campagna, &e. By Com. Luigi Canina, 1848, 1851, 1856. Vols. I and IL describe the Roman walls, gates, forums, basilicas, porticos, illustrated in 151 plates; Vols. III and IV describe the Roman theatres, amphitheatres, circuses, baths, aqueducts, bridges, and imperial Palatine houses, in 159 plates; and Vols. V and VI describe the antiquities of the Campagna with a large detailed map of the same in six sheets, and 139 plates of views. An obituary notice of the late Dr. Isaac Hays was read by Dr. D. G. Brinton according to appointment April 18, 1879. The death of Prof. Paolo Volpicelli at Rome, his natal city, at 11 p. m., April 14th, 1879, was announced by family circular. A communication “On the Geology of the Diamantiferous Region of the Province of Parand, Brazil, by Orville A. Derby, M.8.,” was read by the Secretary. This English version of a Portuguese report prepared for the Brazilian Government was read by permission of the Director of the National Museum. Mr. Lesley remarked that the paper just read was an im- portant contribution to Geology for several reasons: 1. It showed the topography of the southern part of Brazil in a new light. The province of Sao Paulo, south of the celebrated diamond province of Minas Geraes, and the province of Parana, south of Sao Paulo, were tra- versed by three ranges of mountains, the Sierra do Mar, or Serra Graciosa, 8000 feet high, with peaks 5000 feet high, along the coast; composed of granite, porphyries and schists, equivalent to our Blue Ridge, South Moun- tain and Highland range. Back of this the Serra Serrinha (or Little Moun- tain) over 3000 feet high, composed of highly inclined metamorphic non- crystalline schistose gneisses, red schists, and talcose or hydromica schists, probably of Cambrian and Silurian age, with a covering of pebbles of 1879.) 249 itacolumite and other quartzites. And back of this again at the west bor- der of the famous Campos Geraes grass plain, the Serra de Esparanga, also about 8000 feet high, composed of Devonian (and carboniferous ?) fossilif- erous soft red sandstones resting on the shaies and sandstones of the great plain, and having a bold escarpment towards the east, like our Alle- gheny-Cumberland backbone range. The upper part of the escarpment, however, is an outcrop of amygdaloidal and porphyritic trap 350 feet thick, and full of agates, which forms the long back or west slope perhaps all the way to the Parana river, the border of Bolivia; and this is conjectured by Mr. Derby to be of Trias age. 2. The trend of the formations resembles that of the Atlantic border of the United States, being from west of south to east of north. But while the general geographical order is the same, namely,—Azoic, on the east along the coast, and Devonian on the west,—there are striking differ- ences, first in its great simplicity, and secondly, in the Trias and trap lying west of the Devonian. All three ranges have escarpments towards the east. A very high (2000 feet) plateau fills in the space between the first and second ranges ; and another plain sloping gently westward, and 1500 to 2000 feet above the sea, fills in the belt 100 miles wide between the second and third ranges. There is, therefore, a general uptilt of this part of Brazil towards the east; higher and higher rocks coming in as one goes west, and the whole slowly settling into the great central plain of South America, as ours do under the plain of the Mississippi Valley. 8. The drainage system has some striking features of resemblance to that of the United States when we consider the short rivers which flow east- ward into the Atlantic, and the long rivers, like the Upper Ohio, Kenawha and Tennessee, which flow through the Allegheny Mountains. down dip, westward into the Mississippi. For Mr. Derby describes four main rivers : 1. The short Ribeira which alone flows east, through the granite range, into the Atlantic; 2. The long Iguassu on the south, and 3, the long Paranapa- mena on the north, both of which drain the first high plateau and flow in opposite directions from one another, and then turn and cut westward into the face of and through both escarpments, and through the second plain ; and 4, the long Ivahy, between them, which cuts across the second plain and third escarpment westward, also into the Parana. 4. Mr. Derby shows that the pot holes of the Tibagy (a branch of the Paranapamena) got their diamonds and other crystals not directly from any older formation than the Devonian, for the Tibagy drains nothing but Devonian country. But again he shows that the diamonds, &c., must have been set free by the erosion of the Devonian sandstones as pebbles or sand- grains or fossils ; for the Devonian sandrocks are not in the least metamor- puosed. The diamonds must therefore have been originally derived from much older itacolumite rocks, &c., out of which the Devonian rocks them- selves were constructed by erosion and deposition. - Dr. LeConte, at the request of Mr. Dubois of the U.S. Mint, exhibited a very fine specimen of laminated native PROC. AMER, PHILOS. soc. xvrit, 103. 2F. PRINTED JUNE 10, 1879. DR 250 [May 16, copper from the Calumet and Hecla mine, Lake Superior, and explained its appearance on the supposition that it had been subjected to a sliding pressure between the two walls of a fissure, thus representing a phase of slickensides. Prof. Cope presented a paper entitled, “Notes on some landshells of the Pacific slope, by J. G. Cooper, M. D. Mr. Lesley exhibited a slab of limestone full of Trenton trilobites, given nine years ago to Dr. Isaac Lea by Mr. 8. Emlen Sharples, of Bucks County, Pennsylvania, who took it from the walls of a limekill at a quarry near Greenville, on the north edge of the belt of limestone rocks (enclosed in Mesozoic) 3000 feet thick, and dipping northward. The slab is given by Dr. Lea to the Museum of the Geological Survey, and is valuable in evidence of the pres- ence of the Trenton formation in a range over which dis- cussions have been and are still taking place. It is of es- pecial interest just now in view of the late publications of Prof. J. D. Dana, on the new localities of Trenton fossils around Poughkeepsie, east of the Hudson river. The minutes of the last meeting of the Board of Officers were read. Pending nominations Nos. 878 to 883, and new nomina- tion No. 884 were read. The Treasurer moved the following resolution, which was adopted : Resolved, That the Treasurer be authorized to execute under the seal of the Society a transfer of the certificate of $5000 of the U. 8. six per cent. loan held by them, and called in by the Secretary of the Treasury. Dr: LeConte’s resolutions of May 2, being in order of busi- ness, it was, after debate, on motion of Mr. McKean, re- solved that the consideration of the resolutions be postponed to the second regular meeting in October next. On motion, leave was given to Mr, Briggs, and Dr, Barker, and to Mr. Britton to withdraw their reports read at the last meeting. Ou motion, an appropriation of $10 was made for sub- scribing to the life of Dr. William Smith, by H. W. Smith, 1879.] 251 [Derby. one volume of which was exhibited, and the other promised in August next. The meeting was then adjourned. The Geology of the Diamantiferous Region of the Province of Parent, Brazil. By Orville A. Derby, M. 8. (English Version.) (Read by permission of the Director of the Brazilian Museum before the American Philosophical Society, May 16, 1879.) A portion of the ancient Capitania of Sao Paulo, now the province of Parana, has long been known to be diamantiferous, but as no extensive washings have ever been undertaken, and as the gems thus far found have been of small size, although of good quality and color, only very little attention has been attracted to this region, in comparison with the more fully explored diamond fields of the provinces of Minas Geraes and Bahia. During a recent excursion in Parana, I was able to make some observations on the geology of the region in question, and on the mode of occurrence of the diamonds. The province of Parana lies between Sio Paulo on the north, and Santa Catharina and Rio Grande do Sul on the south, and extends from the Atlantic to the river Parana, occupying about six degrees of longitude and three of latitude. Topographically it is divided into two very distinct regions : a mountainous region along the coast, extending about 100 miles inland, and a plateau region, occupying the central and western portions of the province. The first or mountainous region constitutes a distinct geological area, while the plateau portion is divided into two grand geologi- cal provinces. Strictly speaking, the whole province, with the exception of « coast belt from ten to twenty miles wide, isa plateau, the coast moun- tains, constituting a part of the great Serra do Mar system, but known in this province by the beautiful and appropriate name of the Serra Graciosa, rising abruptly from the coast belt, and forming the margin of a plateau, from 800 to 1000 metres in height. In the northeastern part of this great plateau, an interior range of mountains, a continuation of the Parana- piacaba range of Sio Paulo, rises above the general level, but dies away towards the south. The coast belt, the Serra do Mar, and the eastern por- tion of the great interior plateau, whether mountainous, as in the north, or nearly level, as in the south, have the same general geological charac- ters, and may properly be united together in what I will designate as the first or mountainous or, geologically speaking, the. metamorphic region. The topography of this region, in the more mountainous portions, is bold and abrupt, with picturesque peaks, rising to a height of about 1500 metres above the sea, and 600 to 700 metres above the river valleys and the more level portions. The latter are, in general, moderately undulating prairies, Derby.] 252 [May 16, with strips and patches of forest. In the southern portion of the province one such area, of considerable size, extends from the Serra do Mar to the margin of the second region, and reaches northward to beyond the capital, Curityba. Another and much smaller area exists to the west of the second range of mountains, in the north of the province, about the city, of Castro. This last is generally included in the second region, under the name of the Campos Geraes, but geologically it has nothing in common with those cam- pos, and belongs to the first region. The rocks of this region are all metamorphic, the beds being highly inclined, with a general strike E. N. E. Along the coast and in the Serra do Mar granite, porphyritic and schistose gneisses occur, as in the corres- ponding region of the province of Rio de Janeiro, with an abundance of igneous rocks, including diorite, porphyry and a compact variety with a basaltic structure. In the plains about Curityba epidotic rock occurs abun- dantly, with schistose gneiss ; while farther west the latter is associated with metamorphic, noncrystalline, red schists, which are either talcose or hydromica, and with red, metamorphic porphyry, which is a more meta- morphosed portion of the same schists. In the plains about and to the west of Curityba a thick deposit of decomposed material covers the rock and good exposures are rare. The rocks seen in situ are those above men- tioned, but an abundance of pebbles of itacolumite and other varieties of quartzite attest the existence of other rocks in the vicinity. Unfortunately I was unable to visit the northern mountainous portion of this region, about the head-waters of the river Ribeira, which is by far the most interesting part of the metamorphic belt. In the western margin of this district, which is known by the general name of Assunguy, I found the red schists and porphyries, above mentioned, extensively developed, with beds of white marble and iron ore. From the specimens and information I was able to obtain from this region, it appears to be very rich in marbles, iron ores and auriferous rocks. From about fif- teen miles north of Curityba, I saw a greenish serpentine marble, iden- tical with that associated with the same red schists near Sorocaba, province of Sio Paulo, and from other portions of the Assunguy region, I saw specimens of itacolumite and of the peculiar auriferous, ferruginous quartz- ite called Jacutinga, so characteristic of the metamorphic region of Minas Geraes. These specimens, and the few observations I was able to make, confirm the opinion I had already formed, that the non-crystalline meta- morphic series, composed of quartzites (itacolumite, itabirite, jacutingn, etc.), taleose (hydromica?) schists and marbles,* so characteristic of the interior of the provinces of Bahia and Minas Geraes, extend in a continu- ous belt to the southward, probably as far as Rio Grande do Sul, presenting everywhere the same essential characters. I have elsewhere} presented reasons for referring the crystalline meta- * The crystalline marbles forma very subordinate part of the series, which, for convenience, [ call non-crystalline, to distinguish it from the older crystailine series, composed of gneisses, ete, | Proceedings, American Philosophical Society, page 161 above, Archivos do Museu Nacional, Rio de Janeiro, Vol, IT, 1878, 1879.] 258 (Derby. morphic series to the Archean, and the non-crystalline series to the Lower Silurian or Cambrian, a classification in which I but follow my esteemed friend and teacher, the Jamented Prof. Hartt. Going west from Curityba, at a distance of about thirty miles, an abrupt escarpment, called the Serrinha, or Little Serra, is met with, rising to an elevation of 1040 metres, or about 200 metres above the plateau of Curityba, which it completely dominates. This escarpment extends across the prov- ince in a general north-south direction, being, however, somewhat irreg- ular and zig-zag towards the north, where it becomes, in a measure, con- founded with the higher lands of the Assunguy region, which surpass it in elevation. In consequence of this it does not separate so completely as in the south the various systems of drainage. This escarpment is composed, in the lower part, of the inclined meta- morphic beds above described, capped by massive horizontal beds of coarse, friable, white sandstohe, which rise everywhere to the same level, but vary’ in thickness from 20 to 100 metres, owing to the irregularities of the sur- face upon which they were deposited. The Serrinha forms the eastern margin of the second region, the far famed Campos Geraes. This is a vast grassy plain, extending westward about 100 miles, with a gentle inclination towards the west, where the ele- vation of the highest portions becomes reduced to from 850 to 900 metres. The surface along the margin is almost perfectly level, but the innumera- ble streams, fed by thousands of springs and by torrential rains, soon cut themselves deep valleys, descending in the western portion of the region to an elevation of 600 metres, rendering the surface more and more undula- ting, as one enters the Campos. In a broad zone in the western part, there are, in addition to the irregularities due to denudation, others of greater consequence, caused by numerous immense dykes of diorite. The character of the rock changes also in going wes ward, the sandstone becoming finer and tending to give way to beds o* shale, which occur interstratified with the sandstone, in such a manner as to show that they belong to the same formation. In general it may be said that, in the west, as a rule, the lower portion of the formation is composed of shales and shaly sandstones, the shales in the extreme west becoming charged with silicious and calcareous concretions, and containing a few subordinate beds of a peculiar, silicious, odlitic limestone. This shaly portion is wholly, or in part, overlaid by soft sandstone, which to the eastward is the predomi- nant formation. The sandstone appears to cover the shales over the entire region, but on this point I cannot form a positive opinion, before making a detailed study of the fossils collected, as it is possible that, in the wooded limestone region, I may have been deceived in regard to the identity of the sandstone that occurs there, with that of the open campos, further east. The rock is everywhere charged with pebbles, and often, in limited re- gions, changes to a pudding stone or conglomerate. In a ravine near Ponta Grossa, I found such a conglomerate, containing boulders a foot and a half in diameter, of metamorphic rocks, such as gneiss, syenite, quartzite, Derby.] 254 [May 16, etc. The most interesting is a boulder of metamorphosed conglomerate, containing rounded pebbles, the size of one’s fist, of the rocks above-men-— tioned, united by a metamorphosed, silicious cement. These boulders un- doubtedly indicate the neighborhood of some high point of the original surface of the underlying metamorphic rocks, which, before being buried, formed an island in the sea, in which the deposits of shale and sandstone were being laid down. In the portions of this region where the sandstone is the prevailing sur- face rock, the soil is poor and sandy, supporting only grasses and, on the slopes, small patches of forest, in which the Araucarian pine occurs in great abundance. This tree is also extremely abundant on the metamorphic plateau of Curityba. The shaly portions of the region have a somewhat tter soil, but are still poor, in the eastern and central parts. Going west- ward, the soil improves, the beautiful open campos giving place to others with scattered pines and an abundance of shrubs, and these in turn, in the extreme west, where the shale is more varied in character, and where diorite and calcareous rocks are abundant, are replaced by luxuriant forests, showing the superior quality of the soil. The geological age of this sandstone and shale has never been satisfac- torily determined. The first light on the subject was thrown by a few fragmentary fossils, discovered by Mr. Luther Wagoner, Assistant of the Geological Commission, in 1876, and determined by Mr. Rathbun and my- self to be Paleozoic, and probably Devonian. A few months ago, I found in the province of Sao Paulo, in a cherty limestone, identical with that above mentioned, a few obscure Lamellibranchs, belonging to Devonian or Carboniferous types. In my last excursion I visited the localities dis- covered by Mr. Wagoner, and had the good fortune to find more perfect specimens. From a bed of shale, intercallated in the sandstone, at Ponta Grossa, close by the conglomerate locality above mentioned. I found a species of Ophiuran, a few badly preserved Lamellibranchs, and species of Lingula, Discina, Spirifera, Rhynchonella, Streptorhynchus and Vitulina, strongly resembling, and probably identical with, those of the Devonian of the Amazonas, The Spirifera, Streptorhynchus and Vitulina are par- ticularly well-marked Devonian types, the former being probably identical with S. duodenaria. In the cherty limestone at Ivahy, I found a number of species of Lamellibranchs, some of which are identical with those of Sio Paulo, but I could not, in the field, give them the study required to determine with certainty whether they belong to the Devonian or Car. boniferous. Fragments of Lepidodendron also occur in the same rocks. As above remarked, the elevation of this second region diminishes some- what towards the west, where the heights, including the diorite ridges, rise to 850 or 900 metres, although, owing to the excessive deepening and widening of the numerous valleys, the general level is somewhat lower. From this level rises a second escarpment, known as the Serra de Esperanga, toa height of 1040 metres. On the steep slope there is seen, in ascend- ing, a considerable thickness of soft, red sandstone, overlying the shales mt 255 [Derby, and sandstone of the second region, and above this a bed, 100 metres or more in thickness, of amygdaloidal and porphyritic trap, apparently a kind of trachyte. The amygdaloid is full of beautiful agates. This second escarpment is the beginning of the third geological region, the topographi- cal features of which are very similar to those of the second or Campos Geraes region, —that is, produced by denudation on horizontal beds. The escarpment extends entirely across the province, in a north-south direction, and into the province of Sao Paulo, where I have recognized the same rock, in the margin of the plateau, west of the Piracicaba river. South of the river Iguassd, I am informed by Mr. Luis Cleve, a very competent ub- server, that it bends eastward, under the name of Serra de Espigio, and extends as far as the Serra do Mar. Prof. Hartt had already observed that the Serra do Mar, in Santa Catharina, is capped by phorphyritic trap. It is probable, therefore, that these rocks cover the greater part of the in- terior of that province, as well as the neighboring portion of Rio Grande do Sul, in which agatiferous trap is common. A portion of the Republic of Uruguay probably belongs to the same formation. To the west the coun- try is unexplored, but from the scanty information I could obtain, it seems probable that the trap formation extends to the river Parana. The surface of this region is, in general, a heavily wooded plain, but has several extensive campos, the most important ones being those of Guarapuava, which unite, to the south, with the extensive campos of Rio Grande do Sul. There appears to be a slight inclination towards the Parana, and the river valleys being deep, present high steep slopes, that have been dignified by geographers, as well as the common people, as mountains. In point of fact, no true mountains exist in the province, out- side of the metamorphic area. No very definite data exists for determining the geological age of this enormous outflow of trap. It is certainly later than the Devonian, and is most probably Mesozoic. In lithological characters both the trap and the red sandstone, which appears to be associated with it, and to be distinct from the underlying Devonian series, resemble in a striking manner the Triassic rocks of eastern North America. The drainage of the province is determined by the above described topo- graphical features, and is principally toward the Parand, only one large river, the Ribeira, flowing directly to the Atlantic. This river rises north of Curityba, in the mountainous Assunguy region, and flows northward, into the province of Sao Paulo, breaking through the Serra do Mar, above the city of Izuape. Some of its tributaries flow down the slope of the Serrinha, and have cut ravines, indenting the margin of the sandstone region, but can hardly be said to drain any part of the Campos Geraes. In the same metamorphic region, between the Serra do Mar and the Serrinha, rises the principal river of the province, the Iguasst, which flows first southward and then westward, traversing the second and third re- gions, to empty into the Parané. Passing over several almost unknown rivers, belonging exclusively to the third region, we come to the Ivahy, Ore Derby.) 256 [May 16, which rises in the wooded western portion of the second region, flows for some distance northward, skirting the base of the Serra de Esperanga, and finally turns westward, entering the third region, and traversing it to the Parané. Inthe north, forming a part of the northern boundary of the province, is the large river Paranapanema, which, like the Iguasst, rises in the metamorphic region and traverses the two others, receiving from the province the Itarari, Rio de Cinzas and Tibagy. The latter is, par excel- lence, the river of the Campos Geraes, in which it rises and flows, to with- in a short distance of its mouth, where it enters the third region. It re- ceives from the north the Pitangui and Yapo, both of which rise in the metamorphic region, about Castro, and enter the sandstone region by deep cafions. The diamantiferous region is principally in the valley of the Tibagy. Its tributaries, the Yapo and Pitangui, also contain the gems, but are sup- posed to be less rich than the main river, perhaps because of insufficient examination. Fine diamonds are also said to have been found in the Rio de Cinzas. As far as I was able to learn, they have never been found in the Iguassti or Ivahy, although I see no reason why they should not occur, at least in the former river. The gems occur in the sands of the river, in the numerous pot-holes, and also in gravel banks, known as dry washings, situated in the campos, ata greater or less elevation above the river. Near the village of Tibagy, are two of these dry washings, One is in a depression of the Devonian shale, in the valley of a smal}] stream, and is only a few metres above the level of the river. It may therefore be supposed to have been deposited by the river, or by the stream that now cuts through the deposit. The section presents below a very irregular deposit of pebbles and sand, a few centimetres in thickness, which is the part washed. Above this are three or four metres of coarse, variegated sand, with pebbles scattered irregularly through the bed, which shows very irregular lines of deposition, as if deposited in an eddy. Portions of this bed have been cemented by oxide of iron, forming curious, corrugated sheets, globes, and irregular masses, of extravagant form. On top is about a metre and a half of dark-red, structureless clay. The other washing is on a hill side, near the top, at an elevation of about twenty metres above the bed of a small stream, which flows along the base of the hill, and empties into the river, at an elevation of about 100 metres below the mine. The deposit has evidently been laid down under water, but it can scarcely be attributed to any of the present streams. It also rests on Devonian shale, fragments of which are scattered abundantly through it, and consists of a bed, about three metres thick, of sand and pebbles, in which diamonds are irregularly distributed. Above this are about six metres of structureless, red cluy, like that of the first washing, The pebbles in both these washings are well rounded, and consist mainly of quartz and of quartzose rocks, with pebbles of gneiss, and of various other metamorphic and igneous rocks, The red clay continues nearly to the top of the hill, which is a long ridge, with moderate slopes, and extends for a 1879.] 257 [Derby. considerable distance horizontally, but whether it is everywhere underlaid by the diamantiferous gravel or not, I cannot state. Other washings have been opened, some twelve or fifteen miles below Tibagy, and it is probable that there are many other localities in which diamonds may be found. As I saw no work in progress, I could form no idea of the richness of these mines. The diamonds are said to be rare, and small and poor, in com- parison with those found in the river, The workings have been conducted on a very small scale and very carelessly, so that, although the mines are cer- tainly not extremely rich, it is impossible to affirm that they would not re- pay better, and more systematic management. A small quantity of gold also occurs in these washings, and this metal is quite generally distributed throughout the region. In the river, the best stones are found in the deposits in the pot-holes, which contain gravel, firmly cemented by ferruginous matter. Rarely pot- holes are found with a very hard, bluish cement, and these are reported to contain the most diamonds, which are of the best quality both as regards size and perfection. Not having seen this cement, I can form no idea of its character. The miners note as a curious fact, that in a group of pot-holes close together, one may have the bluish cement, while all the rest have the ferruginous, the pebbles of the one being quite different from those of the others. Many of the stones shown me were broken and worn, but a fair pro- portion were perfect crystals. The largest ones I saw were about the size of a small grain of corn, but were irregular and broken. The most valuable stone found here, of which I could obtain an authentic account, was sold for a conto of reis ($500). The stones are in general of good color and brilliancy. Coming now to the question of the origin of the diamonds, it seems to me to be very evident that they are washed out of the Devonian sandstone. As already remarked, the Tibagy is almost exclusively a river of the De- vonian plain. The lower portion, in the trap region, is not known to be diamantiferous, and if it is, since the stones occur throughout the whole course of the river, before it enters the trap formation, the latter may be eliminated from the problem. There remain then the Devonian rocks and the diorite. Having passed around the head of the river, and crossed it at three different places, I have become satisfied that these are the only rocks that come to the surface, to the eastward of Tibagy, that is to say, in the diamantiferous region. It is of course possible that the river may have cut down, in certain places, to the underlying metamorphic rocks, but of this there is no evidence, and it is not probable that any considerable area of such rocks are exposed, or if so exposed that it could have furnished diamonds to so wide-spread a region. Two considerable tributaries, the Yapo and the Pitangui, flow from the metamorphic region, and might be supposed to have brought the diamonds from the rocks cut through in that region, but I was unable to obtain any notice of diamonds, found in those rivers, before en- tering the sandstone district, and the Tibagy is diamantiferous above, as well as below, its confluence with them. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. xvii. 103. 24. PRINTED JUNE 10, 1879. Derby.] 258 . [May 16, The diorite can scarcely be supposed to have furnished the gems, not alone on account of the nature of the rock, but because in the upper part of the valley, where diamonds are not uncommon, diorite is extremely rare, if it occurs at all, and because the pebbles which always accompany the gems, certainly do not come from the diorite. This last has most probably furnished, by decomposition, the red clay, above the gravel at Tibagy. The only other rocks which, as far as I observed, could have given such a clay, are those about Castro ; but it would be difficult to account for its transportation from there to Tibagy, while large dykes of diorite are com- mon near the latter place. The secondary origin of the gravel is not far to seek. The sandstone is everywhere full of pebbles, and on every slope where this rock is exposed the surface is strewn with gravel, set free by disintegration. The primary origin of the pebbles is equally clear; they, in common with all the ma- terial of the Devonian beds, are derived from the metamorphic series. That the diamonds have the same primary origin can hardly be doubted, as they cannot be supposed to have been produced in the sandstone, which does not show the slightest sign of metamorphism or of crystallization of any kind. That the diamond must have originated in some series rich in crystals is evident from the fact, that it is always accompanied by a variety of crystals, called by the miners informations. I have not had an opportunity of determining those of Tibagy, which do not differ materially from those already described from Bahia and Minas Geraes. It may then be regarded as extremely probable, if not absolutely certain, that the diamonds originated in the metamorphic series; that, during the Devonian age, they were washed out and redeposited in the sandstone, from which they have been again extracted, to find their third resting place in the sand banks and pot-holes of the river, and in the gravel deposits of the campos. May we not suppose that the rare patches of gravel, with blue cement, are nests formed in the sandstone and laid bare by the forma- tion of pot-holes? As to what portion of the extensive metamorphic series constituted the original matrix of the diamond, I could obtain no data in Parané. The evidence on the subject, which is being slowly accumulated, tends appa- rently to the confirmation of the old idea, that it belongs to some part of the itacolumite series. After my studies in Paran4, it seems to me probable that the extensive high sandstone plateaus of Central Brazil, which we have been accustomed to consider of Tertiary age, are in reality much older, and probably Palo- zoic. It is yet too early to form a decided opinion respecting them, but if my suspicion regarding their age proves correct, we can explain the course of geological events in Brazil much more satisfactorily than at present, The lower plateaus, of almost precisely similar topographical and litho- logical character, along the coast and on the Amazonas, are certainly later than the Oretaceous ; but none of those, whose age can be positively deter- mined, rise much above 1000 metres, and the higher plateaus of the inte- rior have been referred to the Tertiary, solely on resemblances in lithologi- cal characters which, in Brazil, are peculiarly deceptive and untrustworthy. 1879.] 259 [Brinton. Obituary Nowce of the late Isaac Hays, M.D. By Daniel G. Brinton, M.D. 1 (Read before the American Philosophical Society, May 16, 1879.) The subject of the present memoir, Dr. Isaac Hays, had been at the time of his death, a member of this Society for very nearly fifty years, his name first appearing upon its rolls in 1830. For many years he was also one of its most active members, and in the published volumes of our Proceedings which embrace the period previous to 1850, his name frequently recurs. Most of the subjects which he brought before the Society, related to medi- cal science, and especially those portions of it connected with the physi- ology of vision and ophthalmic surgery. But he did not confine himself to professional topics. I find, on looking over the earlier numbers of our Pro- ceedings that ‘he took considerable interest in geology, particularly in the remains of the gigantic mammals preserved from the post-tertiary period. About 1840, a number of such remains were collected in Missouri by Dr. Koch, and subsequently exhibited in this city and London. An active dis- cussion arose among paleontologists as to their classification. Besides, the mastodon, the Hlephas primogenius, and the mammoth, they distinctly proved, so one party maintained, the former existence of another species of mastodontoid animals belonging to the class Proboseide, to which was given the name Tetracaulodon. Dr. Hays sided with this party, and in addition to many verbal statements embodied in the Proceedings, he published in the Transactions a paper on the teeth of the mastodon, evincing in its preparation a most careful study of his theme. That later investigations have disproved his position, detracts but little from its merit; for the ab- stract correctness of a scientific theory is of less importance than the honesty and ability with which it is advocated. At various periods Dr. Hays served on the Committee of Publication, and the Council, and was Curator. At the time Dr, Hays was elected to this Society, he was thirty-four years ofage. He was born July 5, 1796, in this city, his father. residing at that time on Chestnut street below Third. His education had been first at the Grammar school kept in those days by Samuel Wylie, next at the Uni- versity of Pennsylvania, whence he was graduated, A. M., in 1216; and finally as a medical student in the same institution whence he received the degree of M. D., in 1820. His preceptor was the eminent Dr. Nathaniel Chapman, celebrated not less for his wit than for his professional skill. In early life Dr. Hays was much interested in natural science, and even before his graduation in medicine, he joined, in 1818, the Academy of Natu- ral Sciences. With its history and success, he was identified for more than half a century. From 1865 to 1869 he was its President, and in many other official capacities actively aided its progress and influence. His sympathies with the advance of general science led him to unite with others in the organization of the Franklin Institute. He was one of its original members, and for a number of years its Corresponding Secretary. Brinton.] 260 [May 16, To his activity much of the success of that prosperous institution can justly be ascribed. As a physician, Dr. Hays studied and practiced his profession in a spirit of liberal culture and honorable feeling. The special branch which he cul- tivated was ophthalmology, and for a long time he stood first in that de- partment in this city. He was one of the earliest to detect the pathological condition known as astigmatism, and the case which led to his discovery of it was reported to this Society. His professional life was not confined tothe care of his large practice, but extended to the relations of medical men to each other and to the public. Thus he was a member of the Convention which organized the American Medical Association, and of that which led to the formation of the State Medical Society of Pennsylvania. As Chairman of the Committee of the former body to draw up a Code of Ethics, he was mainly instrumental in collating and reporting the code which has since been universally adopted throughout this country, and in some parts of Europe. He was also Chair- man of the Board of Publication, and Treasurer of the Association for sev- eral years. In September, 1835, he was elected a member of the College of Physicians and for a number of years was its Senior Censor. He was also Chairman of its Building Committee, and it was largely through his endeavors that the commodious structure at the corner of Thirteenth and Locust street, was erected for the College. Dr. Hays literary labors include an edition of Wilson’s Ornithology, 1828 ; Arnott’s Elements of Physics, 1848; Hoblyn’s Dictionary, 1846 ; Laurence on Diseases of the Eye, 1847, and some other medical works ; but he is best known in this connection as the editor of the American Journal of the Medical Sciences, with which he was actively connected from February 1827, until his death. The ability and judgment he displayed in this task met with full recognition from the profession, both in this coun- try and Europe, and the Journal has for half a century been recognized the world over as unsurpassed by any other medical periodical of its class in this country. Advancing age led to his retirement from active practice in 1864-5, but he continued his literary and scientific labors, with unimpaired faculties and undiminished interest in the progress of knowledge to the last. In conclusion, I may add that Dr. Hays married in 18338, and at his death left four children, one of whom is a prominent member of the same profession, and has succeeded to his father’s position as editor of the Amer- ican Journal of the Medical Sciences. 1879.] 261 [Cope. Eleventh Contribution to the Herpetology of Tropical America. By E. D. Cope. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, June 20th, 1879.) The materiais studied in the preparation of the present paper, are the following : 1. A collection made at Batopilas in Southern Chihuahua, by Edward Wilkinson, Jr. 2. Two collections made at Guanajuato on the Mexican Plateau, by Dr. Alfredo Dugés, 3. A.collection from the Isthmus of Tehuantepec, by Francis Sumi- chrast. 4. A collection made in Costa Rica from Jose Zelodon. 5. Three collections from the Island of Santo Domingo, made by Messrs. Wm. M. Gabb anj Charles A. Fraser and Dr. J. J. Brown. 6. A collection from the Island of Dominica, made by Ferdinand Ober. 7. A collection from the Island of Tobago, also from Ferd. Ober. 8. A few specimens from North west Bolivia, from the late Prof. James Orton. Of these, all excepting Nos. 1 and 8, and a part of No. 2, belong to the Smithsonian Institution, and have been placed in my hands for identifieca- tion, by Professor Baird, the Secretary. No. I. Batroprias, Wilkinson. Batopilas is a mining town of Chihuahua, in a region celebrated for the extent and richness of its silver deposits. It is on the western side of the water shed of the Cordilleras on the upper waters of a tributary of the Rio Fuerte, which forms in the lower part of its course the boundary dividing the States of Sonora and Cinaloa. The surrounding country is mountainous and dry. This locality is one of especial interest in its relations. to the faunal dis- tricts of the adjacent parts of Mexico and the United States. The absence of Batrachia and Turtles from Mr. Wilkinson’s collection shows its simi- larity to the elevated regions north and south of it. LACERTILIA. 1. Anolis nebulosus Wiegm. 2. Cyclura acanthura Wiegm. 3. Uta bicarinata Dum. 4, Sceloporus tristichus Cope. Report U.S. G. G. Survey W. of 100th Mer. G. M. Wheeler, Vol. III, p. 571. 5. Sceloporus clarkii Bd. Gird. 6. Phrynosoma cornutum Harl. 7. Phyllodactylus tuberculosus Wiegm. 8. Cnemidophorus communis Cope, Var. II. Proceedings American Philosophical Society, 1877, p. 95, PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XVIII. 104. 2H. PRINTED AuGusT 11, 1879. Cope.] 262 [June 20, OPpHIDIA. 9. Stenostoma humile B. & G. 10. Procinura emula Cope, gen. et. sp. nov. Char. gen. Dentition opisthoglyph. Form that of Hlapomorphus. Two nasal, one loreal, and one preocular plates ; internasals and prefron- tals distinct. Scales smooth, excepting those of the posterior dorsal and caudal regions, where they are keeled, those of the latter so much so as to be tubercular. Anal plate double. This genus is near to Scolecophis Cope, but the peculiar tubercular cari- nation of the tail distinguishes it. The only known species inhabits a rocky, mountainous region, and I have little doubt that this peculiar char- acter enables the animal to force itself into the earth or beneath stones, The tail is used as a fulcrum in pushing against rough and resistant bodies. Char. specif. Scales broad rounded, in fifteen longitudinal series, the median rows rather smaller than the lateral, of which three rows are equal. Muzzle projecting beyond the mandible, rounded, the rostral plate visible from above, presenting an obtuse angle posteriorly. Top of head flat. Pre- frontals much wider than long, their external canthal border equal to that of the internasals. Frontal wide, sending a long angle backwards. Parie- tals short, wide ; temporals 1-2, the first small, as deep as long. Superior labials seven, all except the first, deeper than long, the third and fourth entering the orbit. Preorbital vertical, narrow, not reaching frontal ; pos- torbitals two, equal and small. Loreal quadrangular. Inferior labials eight, fourth largest ; pregeneials three times as long as postgeneials and separated from gastrosteges by six rows of scales. The dorsal carine first appear on the twenty-second transverse row of scales anterior to the vent and occupy the median nine series. All the caudal series are keeled, and as they are wider than long, the free apices of the keels projecting, give them a depressed pyramidal form, Gastrosteges 148 ; urosteges 41. In the coloration of the body this species is an almost exact repetition of the Hlaps fulvius. It is surrounded by wide black rings, which are broadly bordered with yellow, and separated by red interspaces of twice their width. The scales of the red spaces have each a central black spot which are more distinct than in H. fuloius, on the anterior part of the body above the sides ; posteriorly they are weaker, The black annuli pass round the belly, but all are somewhat broken anteriorly. Between them the gastros- teges have black shades, The coloration of the head differs from that of the HZ. fulvius in having merely a large black spot covering the parietal, superciliary and frontal plates, and extending round the eye but not reach- ing the edge of the lip, Muzzle and chin unspotted. Total length, M. .364; length of rictus oris, .011; length of tail, .061. Although this curious and handsome serpent so much resembles the Elaps fulvius, it is not yet known that the two species inhabit the same region. 11. Phimothyra grahamia B, & G., numerous specimens, 12. Mutenia sirtalis Linn, variety near the sub-species ordinata, having 1879.) 263 (Cope. the dorsal and lateral bands and lateral dark spots, obsolete. General color bright olive. 13. EHutenia cyrtopsis Kenn. 14. Trimorphodon upsilon Cope. 15. Hlaps euryxanthus Kenn. REMARKS, This collection, though small, is of interest as serving to fix the exten- - sion of the Sonoran fauna to a point further south than has been hitherto practicable. The following are the faunal affinities of the fourteen species enumerated above. Hutenia sirtalis may be dismissed as common to Mexico and the Nearctic Realm; Procinura wmula may also be passed by as peculiar to the locality investigated, so far as yet known. Stenostoma humile, is, according to Baird and Girard, an inhabitant of the Pacific dis- trict, and is a very rare species. Species found in various parts of Mexico are: Anolis nebulosus, Cyclura acanthura and Cnemidophorus communis ; the last occurring also in 8. W. Texas. Trimorphodon upsilon is a species of West Mexico, having been found at Guadalaxara, Guanajuato, and the present locality ; but is not as yet known from the West Coast. Six species are exclusively of the Sonoran district viz: Sceloporus tristychus; 8S. clarki, Phimothyra grahamia ; Eutenia cyrtopsis and laps euryzanthus. Phyllodactylus tuberculosus belongs to the Sonoran fauna, but occurs also south of Batopilas in Western Mexico. Phrynosoma cornutum is also Sonoran, but is Texan besides. The comparison of this list so far as it relates to the Mexican fauna, is with that of the Tableland; only two species of it, occurring in the Tierra Caliente also ; these are the generally distributed Cyclura acanthura and Cnemidophorus communis. Mr. Wilkinson’s collection contained a specimen of Pelamis bicolor, which he informs me was taken in the Gulf of California near Guaymas. In the Proceedings of the Philadelphia Academy for 1868, p. 810, I noted that William Bischoff had sent to the Smithsonian Institution from Mazatlan the species Agalychnis dacnicolor Cope, Leptodira personata Cope, Leptodira pacifica Cope, and a species of Holbrookia, which I named H. bischoffii, but did not describe. Since then it has been described under the name of H. elegans by Bocourt (Mission Scientifique de Mexique 1874, p. 164), which name it must retain. I add to this list Bufo dedilis Girard, which gives the extreme western limit of its range. It occurs also in West Texas. II. Guanasvuato, Duges. One collection from this locality was sent me by Dr. Duges, and another collection was subsequently received by the Smithsonian Institution. I give the catalogue numbers of the specimens contained in the latter. BATRACHIA. 1. Spelerpes belli Gray. 2. Bufo punctatus B. and G. 3. Bufo intermedius Giinth. 4. Bufo monksie Cope, sp. nov. Cranium without any crests, superior borders of orbits not reverted, can- Cope.] 264 | (June 20, thus rostralis sharp, lores perpendicular, muzzle vertically descending to lip. Tympanic disc concealed, parotoid gland a wide oval, and rather large. Fingers moderate, first and second equal, fourth longer. Heel of extended posterior limb reaching posterior border of orbit. Web of toes measuring half the length of the shorter. Skin rough with small harsh tu- bercles, which are more remote on the back, but are closely appressed on all the inferior surfaces. They are especially acute on the limbs. There are two distinct tarsal tubercles, which are prominent, though small and with- out cutting edge. Color above, blackish- brown with a few small ashen spots, and an ashen cross band extending across the eyelids and intervening frontal space. Lores and lips brown spotted; blackish spots on the sides, belly, throat and limbs. Length of head and body, M. .035 ; axial length of head to angle of man- dible, .010 ; width of head at angle of mandible, .012 ; length of hind limb, .042 ; length of hind foot, .020. No. 9896. This is one of the few Mexican species without cranial crests, resembling in this respect, the B. compactilis ;* B. hematiticus, and B. politus. From the first it differs in the absence of the fossorial spur; from the last two in the roughness of the skin, and the degree of palmation of the feet; the acute canthus rostralis distinguishes it from the B. politus. I dedicate it to my friend Miss Sarah P. Monks, of Cold Spring, New York, who has paid especial attention to the cold blooded vertebrata of North Aierica. 5. Spea hammondi Baird. Several specimens. This species was also brought from Chihuahua by John Potts, so that its range is shown to be wide. Nos. 9881, 4-5, 9915. 6. Hyla eximia Baird. Nos. 9875, 9898. ; 7. Hyla arenicolor Cope. Nos. 9897, 9916. 8. Malachylodes guttilatus, gen. et sp. nov. Char. gen. Mostly like Syrrhophus and Phyllobates, but with a fronto- parietal fontanelle as in Liuperus. Nasal bones wide, in contact on the middle line. Vomerine teeth none, Toes free, no tarsal spurs, This new genus is of interest as exhibiting the lowest station in the series which is typified by Hylodes, excepting that the nasal bones are not so reduced as in the type of Phyllobates, The presence of the fontanelle places it nearer to Hylorhina than any other of this group, and allies it to the Liuperine division ; but its xiphisternum is a thin cartilaginous plate, and the terminal phalanges support a transverse piece as in the Hylodina. Char. specif. Head flat and rather wide, with an oval muzzle. Canthus rostralis not well marked, Eye not prominent nor large, its diameter equal distance from its anterior border to the nostril. Muzzle not overhanging. The heel reaches the posterior border of the orbit, and the wrist reaches the end of the muzzle, The foot is rather short, and the terminal dilata- tions are small, Tarsal tubercles insignificant. Skin without folds, smooth, except some small tubercles on the eyelids, and a trace of areolation on the posterior part of the sides and abdomen, * RB, levifrons Broech!; Bullet, Société Philomathique, Paris, 1877, 18 (Extract), 1879.] 265 [Cope. Color above dark mulberry-brown with numerous, very faint small pale spots. On the sides the ground color becomes paler, and the light spots much more distinct. Limbs banded with rufous. Lower surfaces uniform yellowish. Length of head and body, .022; of head to angle of jaws, .007 ; width of head at angle, .009; length of hind limb, .030; length of hind foot, .014. No. 9888. This species has some resemblance to the Syrrhophus leprus from Te- huantepec. 9. Oystignathus microtis, sp. nov. Like all the Mexican species of this genus, this one has short series of vomerine teeth behind the posterior nares, and a discoidal fold of the ab- dominal integument. It differs from the 0. melanonotus Hallow, in not having a dermal margin of the posterior digits. The dorsal skin does not present any glandular folds such as oceur in C. labialis and C. gracilis. The muzzle is not elongate, and is convex in transverse section, the can- thus rostralis being absent. The limbs are very stout, especially the femur, as in 0. melanonotus, but not elongate, the heel only reaching the posterior border of the orbit. The eye is not large, and the tympanum’s diameter is only two-fifths of its length, a characteristic peculiarity of the species. Color above dark brown, with a blackish pale edged triangle between the eyes, with its apex directed posteriorly. A dark light edged spot be- low the front of the orbit. Tympanum and a streak behind it, blackish. No light stripe on the upper lip. Belly dirty white gray, marbled ante- riorly. Throat dark brown ; limbs light brown below. Length of head and body, .028; length of hind leg, .038 ; length of hind foot, .020; length of head, .009 ; width of head behind, .009. Three specimens. Nos. 9906, 9908-9. 10, Rana montezume Ba. No. 9891. 11. Rana halecina Kahn. var. No. 9900. LACERTILIA. 12. Sceloporus dugest Bocourt. Nos. 9886, 9893, 9904-5. 13. Sceloporus formosus Wiegm. var. Nos. 9876, 9878. 14, Sceloporus torquatus Wiegm. var. 9877. 15. Sceloporus spinosus Wieg. Eupataro. 16. Sceloporus grammicus Wieg. Eupataro. 17. Holbrookia maculata B. and G.; sub-species approximans Baird. This is the Mexican form of H. maculata, and has not been found within the limits of the United States. Nos. 9894, 9903. 18. Onemidophorus communis Cope. Nos. 9879, 9882-7, 9901-2. OPpHIDIA. Conopsis Nasus Gthr. 19. Ogmius varians Jan. (Oxyrhina) Ogmius Cope, Proceed. Amer. Philos. Soc. 1869, p. 162. No. 9913. 20. Adelophis cope Duges MS., gen. et sp. nov. Char. gen. Allied to Tropiaodlonium. Scales keeled; anal single ; Cope.] 266 (June 20, caudal scutella two-rowed. Teeth equal. Cephalic shields normal. Nasals distinct, and separated by a space from the single preocular, which is occu- pied by the prefrontal, since the loreal is wanting. Head little distinct from body. Rostral plate not produced. The absence of loreal plate is the only character that separates this genus from T'ropidoclonium. Char. specif. Total length, 33 centimetres ; tail-very acute and termi- nating in a cone; length of tail, M.0.066. Cephalic scales convex ; dor- sals and supra-caudals carinate, those on the flanks smooth. Urosteges divided ; a single preanal. A single preocular and two post-oculars ; temporals three (1 + 2). Superior labials five, the first in contact with the two nasals and the rostral; the second is in contact with the posterior nasal and fronto-nasal; the third is in contact with the fronto-nasal, the preocular and the eye; the fourth is in contact with the eye and the in- ferior post-ocular ; the fifth and largest is in contact with the inferior post- ocular, the first temporal and the inferior temporal of the second row. There are two nasals ; the nostril piercing the posterior border of the an- terior one. The rostral projects very slightly above the level of the muzzle. No frenal, the fronto-nasals extending on the sides till in contact with the superior labials. The internasals are small, triangular. The frontal or vertical is much longer than wide, and is six-sided. Palpebrals (supra- oculars) are elongated, straight; occipitals large. Five inferior labials on each side, and a small mental. Four elongate inframaxillaries, the ex- tremity of the posterior ones angulated and separated by two small gulars. Three rows of gulars on each side. I have counted fifteen dorsal rows of scales longitudinally; the rows in contact with the gastosteges the largest and smooth, those on the back and upper side of tail carinated, rhombic and truncated (emarginate) at their extremities. The preanal is undivided. On the middle of the back there js a yellowish line extending from the occiput to the commencement of the tail, which embraces two rows of scales. On each side of this line a chestnut-brown band of the same width as the former, which is bordered below by a black line ; the line is lost in the tail, and behiud the eye it forms an elongate black spot. The flanks and belly are light brown ; there is a black line on the posterior margin of each of the scales in contact with the gastrosteges ; towards the tail they disappear. The upper side of the head is chestnut and the lips are like the flanks in color, very yellow. Habitat, Guadalajara, Mexico. 21. Phimothyra bairdi Jan., 9883. 22. Lytorhynchus mexicanus D. & B. Zamenis D. & B. Eupataro. 23. Bascanium taniatum laterale Hallow. 24. Hutania cyrtopsis Kenn , 9892. 25. Kutenia sirtalis Linn., 9899. 26. Hypsiglena ochrorhynchus Cope, 9889, 27. Trimorphodon upsilon Cope, 9911-12. Elaps fulvius L. 1879.] 267 [Cope. 28. Crotalus polystictus Cope. C. triseriatus Jan. nec. Wagler. C. ximenesit Dugés. REMARKS. Points of interest in geographical distribution, indicated by the collection of Dr. Dugés, are the following: The species of the above list which be- long distinctively to the Sonoran district fauna are five, viz: Bufo punc- ‘tatus, Hyla arenicolor, Spea hammondi, Hutenia cyrtopsis, Hypsiglena ochrorhynchus. Besides these genera, the following belong to the Nearctic Realm, and not to the Neotropical: Rana, Sceloporus, Holbrookia, Phimo- thyra, Buscanium. Cystignathus is the only Neotropical genus; while Malachylodes, Ogmius, Canopsis and Trimorphodon are especially Mexican. I add that Dr. Dugés has sent Hypopachus variolosus Cope, from the State of Guadalaxara, a species heretofore only known as Costa Rican. Ill. TeauantTerec, Sumichrast. A list of species from this locality and collector was published in the Proceedings American Philosophical Society for 1869, p. 161. Since that date a number of collections have been sent by Mr. Sumichrast, which add materially to our knowledge of the distribution of the Batrachia and Rep- tilia of the district of Mexico properly so called. Iappend Mr. Sumichrast’s notes. BATRACHIA. 1. Gdipus rufescens Cope, 10042 (15). Heretofore only known from Vera Cruz. Found in tufts of Tillandsia. 2. Mdipus carbonarius carbonarius Cope. 2. QHdipus carbonarius salwini Gray. 3. Siphonops mexicanus D. & B. 4. Bufo agua Daud. 5. Bufo sternosignatus Gthr., 10014 (No. 2). Only found in the begin- ning of the rainy season breeding in pools. 6. Bufo canaliferus Cope, 10015, 10022 (No. 3). Found in woods, and not seen in pools at the breeding season. 7%. Bufo coceifer Cope. 8. Bufo valliceps Wiegm., 10013 (No. 1). 9. Microphryne pustulosa Cope, 10023-8. 10. Hngystoma ustum Cope, 10021. 11. Rhinophrynus dorsalis D. & B. 12. Hyla miotympanum Cope. 13. Smilisca baudini D. & B., 10016 (No. 4). Abundant, but only seen in the rainy season, when it comes to pools, lagoons, etc., to breed. _ 14. Hylella platycephala, sp. nov. This species conforms to the characters of the genus Hylella, as I under- stand them, viz: in the general structure of Hyla, including fronto-parietal fontanelle and narrow divergent nasal bones, but wanting vomerine teeth. The present species is not large and has elongate hind limbs, the heel reaching the middle of the orbit. The sole of the hinder foot is rather Cope.] 268 [June 20, short, not exceeding the length of the astragalus more than the fifth of its own length. The digital dilatations are well developed on both extremi- ties; the posterior digits are two-thirds webbed, while the anterior are searcely one-fourth palmate. The species is particularly characterized by the abbreviation and flatness of the head, which is also wide. Thecanthus rostrales are distinct and very convergent ; the muzzle is truncate vertically, but projects a little beyond the mandible. The nostrils are terminal and lateral, and are as far anterior to the eye as the long diameter of the latter. The latter dimension is four times the diameter of the tympanum, and is equal to the interorbital width. The skin of the superior surface is every- . where smooth. The thorax, belly and inferior face of part of femora are areolate. The color in spirits is light ashen above, rather darker on the head. Canthus rostralis dark shaded. Inferior surfaces light orange. No mark- ings on the sides or concealed faces of the limbs, nor on the superior faces of the limbs. Length of head and body, .033 ; length of head to angle of jaws, axially, .007 ; width of head posteriorly, .011 ; length of fore limb, .015; of hind limb, .045 ; of hind foot, .019. This is the first of the genus detected in the Mexican district. It is larger than the H. carnea Cope, of Brazil, has a weaker palmation of the fingers, and more uniform coloration. From Japana, from an elevation of from 2000 to 3000 feet. It is found in the tufts of epiphytic Tillandsie and M. Sumichrast thinks it undergoes its metamorphoses there, in rain-water held in the axils of the leaves. 15. Lithodytes rhodopis Cope, 10020 (No. 8). 16. Lithodytes podiciferus Cope. 17. Syrrhophus leprus, sp. nov. The genus Syrrhophus was proposed by me in 1878* to receive frogs allied to Phyllobates, but with largely developed nasal bones, which meet on the middle line, as in Hylodes, thus covering the ethmoid cartilage. The typical species is the 8S. marnoehii of West Texas ; a second species is the S. eystignathoides Cope,} and the present frog increases the number to three. These species are distinguished as follows: Posterior limbs short, heel to tympanum; head wide; tympanum half orbit ; rufous, brown spotted .... ccc: cece eee ee cee S. marnochit, Posterior limbs longer, heel to front of orbit ; head wide, a canthus ros- tralis ; tympanum one-third orbit ; brown, pale spotted......S. leprua. Posterior limbs longer, heel to front of orbit ; head narrow, no canthus ros- tralis; tympanum one-third orbit; brown, dark spotted, S. eystignathoides. In the S. leprus the muzzle is broadly acuminate and obtuse, with ver- tical profile ; nares lateral and terminal, and as far from the orbit as the diameter of the latter. Lores vertical. Eye not prominent upwards. * American Naturalist, p, 258. t Phyllobates, Proceed, Am, Philos, Soe,, 1877, p, 89. 1879.] , 269 [Cope. Choane and ostia pharyngea small and equal ; tongue obpyriform and en- tire. The digital dilatations are small, and the inferior tubercles of the digits are well marked both anteriorly and posteriorly. A large palmar tubercle; solar tubercles weak. The hind foot is rather slender, the solar part equaling the tibia in length. Skin everywhere smooth. All the superior surfaces, including limbs, a dark mulberry-brown, dot- ted with moderately large gray spots; below a pale pinkish-brown (in spirits), without markings. Lores and upper lip like the back. Length of head and body, .024; of head to angle of jaws (axial), .008 ; width of head at angle of jaws, .009; length of hind limb, .035; of hind foot, .010. From Santa Efigenia. No. 10040 (No. 14). Found in woods. Accord- ing to Mr. Sumichrast, the dorsal spots are yellow in life. 18. Cystignathus melanonotus Hallow. 19. Cystignathus perlevis, sp. nov. The species of this genus are numerous, and difficult to distinguish. They fall naturally into groups defined by the form of the series of vomer- ine teeth, and the presence or absence of a discoidal fold of the abdominal integument, and of membranous margins to the posterior digits. The latter character does not suffice for the discrimination of a genus, hence I regard Tarsopterus R. & L. as synonymous with Cystignathus. The species of the Mexican district of the Neotropical Realm all have a discoidal abdominal fold, and the vomerine teeth in short transverse series behind the line of the posterior boundary of the choane. I know but one species which has dermal digital margins. The species are distinguished as follows. I premise that the presence or absence of spots is not con- stant among them: I. Posterior digits with dermal margins. Dermal glandular folds numerous, generally broken up; legs stout, heel reaching orbit; tympanic membrane .66 of eye; no light stripe on Bsc Seeds cabeat tase baka per eee be petecescececcces Ue MMONOROEMS, II. No digital dermal margins. No glandular folds ; legs slender, heel reaching front of orbit ; tympanum -66 of orbit ; no light lip stripe................eee0e ee eee C. perlevis. Glandular folds (?) none ; legs very robust ; heel reaching orbit ; tympanum sMOfiorbit + mo etrin’ aa NB is. is so ais veel C. microtis. Glandular folds present ; legs short, reaching orbit ; tympanum equal or- bit; lip stripe Imperfects 6 iii. ces LR eb see O. gracilis. Glandular folds ; legs long, reaching front of orbit ; tympanum .6 of orbit; 9. lip dfipenass Vissaes dS. 3 GGo) addy sGeiAe GO Vidiaiee 6 scccesese CO. labialis, The 0. perlevis is characterized by its exceedingly smooth and shining skin, which is entirely without the glandular ridges usual in the genus, The head is angular oval in outline with distinct canthus rostrales, which are near together, and much within the labial outline. The muzzle pro- jects a little, and the nares are about one-third the distance from its apex to the orbit. Tongue a longitudinal oval, entire behind ; choane rather PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XVIII. 104. 21. PRINTED AUGUST 11, 1879. Cope.] 270 [June 20, small and equal to the ostia pharyngea. The vomerine series are well separated from each other and extend but little external to the inner border of the nares. Vertical diameter of tympanic disc a little less than the hori- zontal. Second and fourth fingers equal ; the first a little longer. The pos- terior foot is slender, and the solar portion is as long as the tibia and half of the astragalus. Solar tubercles insignificant. Dark ashen gray above, sides blackish above, speckled with white and blackish below. An interorbital dark spot ; upper lip marbled ; posterior face of femora dark, with light specks. Below white, the sides gray marbled. Throat gray, white spotted. Posterior limbs obscurely cross- banded above. Length of head and body, .038 ; of head axially to angle of jaws, .014; width at latter point, .0135 ; length of hind limb, .055; of hind foot, .028. Taken from a well near Japana. 10041. (No. 16, F. 8.) 20. Cystignathus gracilis D. B. 10018-9. (No. 6-7.) Found under old logs and stones, near water. 21. Cystignathus labialis Cope, Proceeds. Amer. Philos. Soc. 1877, p. 90. The original deseription of this species was taken from young specimens in which the posterior limbs are not as long as in adults. Numerous speci- mens from Tehuantepec, which fix the characters and locality, There are also three specimens sent by M. Sumichrast, from Potrero, near Cordova, Vera Cruz. 22. Ranula affinis Pet. (No.5, F. 8.) Rather common in pools and rivulets. It grows to a large size, when the dorsal markings become obso- lete. Rana halecina Kahm, var. with indistinct dorsal spots. Some varieties of this species from its extreme southern range, look quite different from the typical form. The dorsal green becomes more vivid, and has sometimes a blue shade on the head. The spots become obscure, and there is a general resemblance to the Ranula affinis. It may be distinguished from that frog by the less palmation of the toes, which are without apical callosities, and by the presence of dermal folds between the dorso-laterals, although these are sometimes faint. The most aberrant examples come from Coban, Vera Paz. LACERTILIA, 24. Hpaphelus sumichrasti Cope. 25. Mocoa assata Cope. 26. Celestus chalybeus Cope. 27. Onemidophorus microlepidopus Cope, Proceed. Amer. Philos. Soc. 1877, p. 93. 28. Onemidophorus unicolor Cope, |. c. 93. 29. Onemidophorus immutabilis Cope, |. c. 93. 80. Onemidophorus lativittis Cope, 1. c. p 94. B31. Amiva undulata Wiegmann. 82. Lepidophyma smithii Bocourt. 1879, 271 [Cope. OPHIDIA. 38. Stenostoma phenops Cope, Journal Academy Philadelphia, 1875, p. 34. Loxocemus bicolor Cope. 35. Geagras redimitus Cope, Journal crercagron, eg Phila., 1875, p. 141. 36. Ficimia olivacea Gray. 87. Tantilla rubra Cope, loc. sup. cit. 144. 38. Conophis sumichrasti Cope, loc. cit. 187. 39. Coniophanes proterops Cope, |. c. 1388, 40. Coniophanes sissidens Gthr. 1. c. 138. 41. Spilotes corais melanurus D. and B. 42. Bascanium mentooarium D. and B. 43. Leptophis diplotropis Gthr. 44. Dryophis fulgidus Daud. 45. Himantodes cenchoa L. 46. Oxyrrhopus clelia L. REMARKS. This catalogue represents a part of the Mexican fauna properly so-called. There is not a single non-Neotropical genus.excepting Rana and Basca- nium. Of the remaining thirty genera, fifteen are characteristically Neo- tropical ; twelve are peculiarly Mexican, two are cosmopolitan or nearly so, and one (Célestus) is West Indian. IV. Costa Rica, Zeledon. This collection includes a number of species which I have named in my monograph on the Herpetology of Costa Rica,* with some additional ones. I now give the names of the latter only, enumerating them from the end of my former list. 3. Cidipus morio Cope. Inserted in the essay above cited as doubtfully occurring in Costa Rica. From Cartago on the Plateau. 45. Coleonyx elegansGray. Inserted in my list on the authority of Peters. Zeledon’s collection contains fine specimens, which he states were found in ant hills on the table land near San José. 131. Scolecophis zonatus Hallow. 132. Coluber triaspis Cope. The Plateau near San José. The most southern locality for this species and genus. 133. Porthidium nasutum Bocourt. From Limon, on the East Coast. This species is very near the Both- riopsis proboscideus Cope, and may not prove to be distinct from it. In the latter there are two nasal plates, the supranasals are longer, more con- cave on the external edge, and more widely separated than in P. nasutum, and the frontal scales are carinate. They are smooth, or nearly so, in Mr. Zeledon’s specimen, which also has the rostral plate a little shorter than in the B. proboscideus. The specimens of the latter are smaller than the single P. nasutum. It is questionable whether a large series will sustain * Journal Academy Philadelphia, 1875, 93. * Cope.] 272 [June 20, these characters. In P. nasutum the scuta are, 136-27; in B. proboscideus, 182-31. VY. San Domineo, Drs. Brown, Fraser and Gabb. A few of the species of the collection made by Dr. Brown are from the Island of Gonave, off the West Coast of Santo Domingo ; the others are from near Port-au-Prince. BATRACHIA. 1. Trachycephalus marmoratus D. and B., Fraser and Gabb. Puerto Plata. 2. Hylodes martinicensis D. and B., Gabb and Fraser. LACERTILIA. 3. Celestus rugosus, sp. NOV. Scales in thirty-six longitudinal rows; each with a strong median keel, and seven or eight weaker ones on each side of it, making fifteen or seven- teen in all. The median keels are strong and continuous from the nape, becoming stronger posteriorly, especially on the tail, whose superior and lateral surfaces are thus thrown into gutters. In the specimen the distal part of the tail is lost. The keels form oblique lines over the sides ; they are strong on the hinder and weaker on the anterior limbs. The general form is slender, and the limbs are quite weak ; the latter when extended along the side fail to meet by the length of the posterior foot and leg to the knee. The head is flat and rather elongate, and its seuta are normal, There are nine superior labials, of which the eighth is the first one angulated above. Both the loreals are rather higher than long. Five supraorbitals, the posterior separated by two scales from the parietal. Interparietal large as parietal; a large post-interparictal. Five pairs of large infralabials, which are separated from the labials by scales. Ground color gray; no longitudinal lines, but the nape and back are crossed by seventeen brown cross-bars, which are nearly in contact me- dially, and taper to disappearance on the upper part of the side. Their dorsal portions are sometimes confluent longitudinally. A series of faint dusted brown spots on the inferior part of the sides. Below, white, with a few scales here and there brown. Limbs brown above. Length from end of muzzle to vent three and a half inches; from do, to middle of auricular meatus five-eighths of an inch; from do. to axilla one and five-eighths inch. From Puerto Plata, Santo Domingo, Charles A. Fraser. No. 10260. | This species is quite distinct from those previously known in both squamation and color. 4. Celestus stenurus Cope, var. Proceedings Academy, Philadelphia, 1868, p. 126, Puerto Plata. Fraser. 5. Celestus phoxinus Cope, Gabb. 6. Spharodactylus alopex Cope, Fraser. 7. Anolis calestinus Cope, Gabb. 1879.] 273 (Cope. 8. Anolis semilineatus Cope, Gabb. 9. Anolis cybotes Cope, Gabb and Fraser. 10. Anolis distichus Cope, Gabb, Fraser. Puerto Plata. 11. Liocephalus trigeminatus Cope, Fraser. Puerto Plata. Eupristis ricordii D. & B., Gabb and Fraser. Amphisbena innocens Wein)., Gonave Island, Brown. OPpHIDIA. 12. Typhlops lumbricalis D. B. Puerto Plata. Fraser. 13. Ungualia hetiana, sp. nov. Scales in twenty-seven rows, entirely smooth. Body stout, head not distinct, tapering ; eye small, its diameter less than one-third the length of the muzzle in front of it. Internasals longer than wide ; internasofrontals and prefrontals much wider than long. Parietals as long as frontal, in contact medially. Superior labials 9-10; only those in front of the orbit higher than long. Oculars 1-3, fourth and fifth labials entering orbit. Gastrosteges 192; urosteges 32. Color brownish-ashen above, with four rows of alternating round black- ish brown spots, of which the median are larger and become confluent at some parts of the body. Another row of dark spots on the inferior part of the side, which are separated by yellowish scales. An additional row of larger spots alternating with these involve the ends of the gastrosteges, and may or may not meet across the middle line of the abdomen. Total length, .680; of rictus oris, .017; of the tail, .075. This, the largest species of the genus, much resembles the U. maculata of Cuba, etc., but it has a larger number of scales, and also exceeds it ma- terially in the number of gastrosteges. Its smooth scales distinguish it from the U. melanura and U. pardalis. From Port-au-Prince and Gonave Island, Dr. Brown. No. 10164. Puerto Plata. Fraser. 14. Homolochilus striatus Fisch. Frazer. 15. Dromicus parvifrons Cope, Gabb. Puerto Plata. Fraser. A va- riety was found on Gonave by Dr. Brown. In two specimens the ground color is black, and the belly is white; a light olive color extends on the ‘sides as far as the third row of scales. Belly not spotted as in the usual variety. 16. Hypsirhynchus ferox Ginther. Dr. Brown, Port-au-Prince. These specimens agree exactly with Dr. Giinther’s description, and differ from the H. scalaris Cope, in the presence of a loreal plate and the triangular form of the dorsal spots. Although I have united these supposed species, I now incline to believe them distinct. 17. Jaltris dorsalis Giithr., Gabb. 18. Leptophis catesbeyi D. and B., Gabb. Puerto Plata. Fraser. 19. Leptophis oxyrhynchus D. and B., Brown. CROCODILIA. 20. Crocodilus americanus Seba, Fraser. Puerto Plata. Cope.] 274 [June 20, VI. Domrnica, Ober. As no study of the herpetology of this island has been made, the follow- ing list of five species partially supplies a deficiency in our knowledge. 1. Mabuia cepedei Gray. 2. Xiphosurus oculatus, sp. nov. Abdominal scales smooth, those of sides and back minute: two median dorsal rows a little larger, keeled, and elevated on a moderate simple dermal fold which extends to the head. Superciliary scales separated by one or two rows of scales, and widely removed by scales from the small occipital. Muzzle rather long, flat above; ridges not prominent, covered with large scales, and separated by a shallow concavity, which contains in front, four rows of smaller smooth scales. Six or seven loreal rows; three large in- fralabials, the first smaller than each symphyseal. Supraorbitals surrounded with granules, consisting of three inner scales the largest, five in the inner row smaller, and six in the external row the least, all nearly smooth. Oc- cipital concavity not profound or sharply defined posteriorly. Scales of arm and posterior leg keeled. Caudal spines well developed in the male. Color above brownish-ash, with numerous white spots which sometimes form vertical lateral bands, and a white band extending from above the axilla to the middle of the side or beyond. Above this band, on the ante- rior half of the side are two round black spots, each of which has a white spot in the center. A white band from upper lip to side of nape ; lip brown spotted, inferior surfaces dirty white, face yellow posteriorly. Tail uniform. Total length, .185 ; of head and body, .072; of head to angle of mandible, -021 ; width at latter point, .008 ; length of fore limb .082; of hinder limb, -055 ; of posterior foot, .025. The animal which I suppose to be the male, generally has one row of scales between the superciliaries, while the female has two, and has no caudal crest. The color differs in being brown, without the lateral white band or black eye-spots. The white spots form vertical series on the sides. It is possible that this is a different species, but it is in general identical with what the female of the X. oculatus should be. This species differs from its nearest ally, the X. cristatelius, in having the superciliary plates separated on the middle line, by the shallow occipital depression, the longer muzzle, and in coloration. Evidently abundant on the island. Nos. 10139-48, 10150-1, 10153. 8. Aporophis* julia sp. nov. Resembles the Opheomorphus meleagris Shaw (Liophis merremii D. and B.), but has the long tail of the genus Aporophis, this member entering the total length 3.4 times. Appropriately, the number of the urosteges is con- siderably in excess of that found in the longest tailed varieties of 0. meleag- ris, where, according to Duméril and Bibron, they do not exceed 68, They here number 82, and the gastrosteges are 158, The scales are in seventeen rows, and are rather wide, and are as in other species of Aporophis, poreless ; nevertheless there are a few on the * ope, Proceed, Amer, Philos, Soc, 1877, p. 18. Lygophis olim, 1879.] >) [Cope. sides posteriorly with a single apical pore. Rostral plate small, not pro- duced ; nasals subequal ; loreal high as long : preoeular not reaching fron- tal. Two postoculars ; temporals 1+2+3; the first and second bounding the parietals large and subequal. Superior labials eight, fourth and fifth entering orbit. Inferior labials ten, six in contact with geneials. Pairs of geneials equal. Frontal with straight sides, longer than wide in front, equal occipital. Ground color above black, each scale with a round yellow spot near the base, including the first row, and excepting a row on each side of the ver- tebral row, which is uniform black (with an occasional spot) for the pos- terior third of the body. A median dorsal black line on tail. Ground color of head above brownish-yellow ; a black band through eye, which sends branches along the borders of the labials ; a black spot on top of muzzle; a black cross band between eyes, and the greater part of each parietal plate black. . Total length, M. .640; tail, 190. This handsome species is named for my daughter. 4. Alsophis sibonius, sp. nov. This species does not conform exactly to the diagnosis of the genus Also- phis, which I gave in 1862,* since the tail is less than one-third the total length, not much exceeding one-fourth. It thusapproaches Liophis, and the question of reference to one genus or the other is lefi to depend on the character of the scale pores. These have the full number common to the species of Alsophis and the ground Colubrine snakes generally, while in Liophis there is but one on each scale, as in many Coronelline and water snakes. The physiognomy of the A. sibonius is much that of species of the A. antillensis type, but the coloration resembles that of the common South American Sibon annulatum. The scales are thin and are in nineteen longitudinal series. Gastrosteges 191; anal double; urosteges118. Total length, .646 M.; tail, .200. Eight superior labials, the third, fourth and fifth entering the orbit, the part of the third contributing being small. The muzzle projects above and is obliquely truncate below; the rostral plate is flat and barely appears on the superior surface of the head. Post- nasal higher than prenasal; loreal longer than high, the superior border straight, not angulate. Preocular not much elevated, not reaching the frontal. Postoculars small; temporals 2-2-4. The superior temporal of the first row larger than the others and in contact with the inferior post- ocular only. The inferior temporal adjoining it does not reach the post- oculars, and is, in fact, a dismemberment of the seventh superior labial, which is, in consequence, reduced to a very small size. This arrangement is identical on both sides of the head. Inferior labials ten, six of which are in contact with the geneials ; latter subequal. Top of head flat, and orbits not prominent. Lengths of internasals and prefrontals on median suture equal. Frontal longer than wide, the superciliary borders but little * Proceedings Academy Philadelphia, February. 0 Cope.] y 276 [June 20, eoncave. Occipitals short and wide for the genus; each is bounded pos- teriorly by a single large temporal plate behind the anterior one on each side, which are only separated on the median line by a small scale. The ground color in spirits is straw-color. The dorsal region, between the fourth row of scales on each side, is occupied by a series of large rounded brown spots, whose borders are almost in contact on the median line. There are forty-two between the nape and the vent. Occasionally twoor more of them are confluent onthe middle line. Belowand between them the sides are brown shaded, the shade assuming the form of spots anteriorly. Head brown, with a pale spot on each side of the nape; a brown spot with darker borders passes from the muzzle through the eye, and joins the brown dorsal spot on the nape. All the colors become darker posteriorly. Inferior surface unspotted anteriorly; it is sparsely dusted with brown on the posterior half of the body, and the caudal scutella are dusted most densely along the middle line, forming a stripe. No. 10138 Mus. Smithsonian. VII. Toxsago, Ober. Amiva surinamensis tobaganus, sub-sp. nov. A single Amiva from Tobago forms a strongly marked race of the com- mon continental species, but whether separable as a species or not I am not yet able to state. It differs from the typical A. surinamensis in color, in a disposition to a somewhat greater subdivision of the scuta of the limbs and belly, and in the greater length of the posterior foot. There are twelve rows of abdominal scales at the middle, as is sometimes seen in A. suri- namensis. The two inner rows of antebrachials extend to the wrist ; only one row extends so farin A. surinamensis. Both brachial and postbrachial scales, as well as those of the gular fold are rather more numerous than in A. surinamnesis. In the latter species the length of the posterior foot equals the distance from the axilla to the middle of the loreal plate ; in the form tobaganus the foot is as long as from the axilla to the end of the muzzle. Color olivaceous, with a black lateral band with undulating edges, which are not light bordered, but which are marked by small yellow spots at regular distances. Back with a chain-like series of black annuli on each side, each ring with an obscure yellow spot in its center. Sides black and yellow-spotted ; below uniform straw-colored ; head uniform brown, lips lighter. No. 10113; size less than that of the adult A. surtnamensis. Anolis alligator D. and B. Drymobius boddaertii Sectzen. Bothrops lanceolatus Merr. (Fer de lance.) Scales in thirty-one and thirty-three longitudinal rows ; colors pale, with the cross bands obscure, as in other West Indian specimens. Hylodes martinicensis D. and B. No. 10121. The Island of Tobago is, of the Lesser Antilles, the nearest to Trinidad, Proc. Amer. Phil. So No.103. Plate IV. Fig.l. : | Fig.2. ossils(?) from Lancaster County, near the Marviand State Line, : ld 1879.] 2 ‘ 7 {| Frazer, and it might, on this account, be anticipated that its fauna would present a larger representation of continental types than the more northern islands of the series. That this is the case is shown by the present very limited list, which includes two Brazilian species of the genera Amiva and Drymobius. None of the species of the Dominica list were found on Tobago by Mr. Ober. VIII. NorrHern Borrvria, Orton. Among the collections sent by Prof. Orton to Philadelphia before his de- parture for the Beni River, was a collection of reptiles from La Paz, on the eastern slope of the Andes, in Western Bolivia. This city, asis well known, is situated a short distance above the forest line, and enjoys a temperate climate. In packing, some specimens from Puno, on Lake Titicaca, were mixed with those from La Paz. As reptiles are rare at that elevated locality it is probable that most of the species enumerated were derived from the latter place. Bufo spinulosus Wiegm. Oxyrrhopus doliatus D. and B. Aporophis teniurus Tsch. Bothrops microphthalmus Cope, Journal Academy Philadelphia, 1875, p. 182. Scales in twenty-one longitudinal rows, all carinate excepting the first row, the keels not unusually prominent, and not reaching the apex of the scale. The second labial scute bounds the maxillary fossa in front, but it is partly cut off by suture on both sides. In the above characters the single specimen of the collection differs from the type. The latter is large, the present individual is small, and the less development of the keels of the scale$ is perhaps due to immaturity. The scales on the top of the head are larger than in other species of the genus but not so large as in the type. The superciliaries are wide as in it, and there are only seven superior labials. The color of the inferior surface is, anteriorly, mixed black and gray, posteriorly black. Fossil (2?) Forms in the Quartzose Rocks of the Lower Susquehanna. P3; Persifor Frazer, Jr. With a plate. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, April 4, 1879.) The forms which accompany and illustrate this paper are found in a hard quartzose greenish rock, difficult to name, which forms part of the left border line of the great river in Cecil County, Maryland, just below the Pennsylvania line. By a mistake (not the fault 0° the writer) in the title, the figures are given as from Lancaster county, Pennsylvania. In reality the discoverer of these curious and as yet unexplained phenomena, Dr. C. H. Stubbs, of Fulton PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xvirt. 104. 27. PRINTED sEPT. 18, 1879. Frazer.] 278 (April 4, Township, Lancaster Co., found them all in one locality, viz: Frazer’s Point, a headland in the river about half a mile below Mason and Dixon’s line. Two of the original specimens have been submitted in turn to Prof. Whitfield, of the New York Museum; Prof. Jas. Hall, State Geologist of New York, and Dr. Joseph Leidy, of this city. Letters from the first two are found below. Dr. Leidy expressed no definite view. In the face of the inability of such eminent authorities to determine anything in regard to these objects, I feel reticence to be but the part of sound wisdom. I will only add that these have been very faithfully and accurately delineated of actual size by the artists, Mr. Faber and Mr. Tuthe. (The latter transferred all the drawings to stone, besides making the original sketch of No. 1.) The horizon whence these were taken is believed to have been that immediately under the Potsdam, but in no case can be ascribed to one more recent than the latter formation. A partial analysis by the undersigned of the very thin film out of which one of these forms, not here represented, was made, here follows. Amount obtained for analysis 0.0562 Gram : MOmtares: 26. hiss: aigtew bons sVRVet owe pee oee 2.18 81S ied bapa Satan te, by Pon ae wrtas cr hw ce ettivieome set 57.11 Tron Sesquioxide .............. Bree asiURees Jk er 4.93 Altimiiie ci isto ex iSeries eee hi ee as Lime...... ChwekeOdsetes be oaditay Vd Sim ect, 608 Magnesia. 2.0 si605 0d .4% ite Saboneinds wt lias? 2.88 Sum eeenrvn eee nane ene * eeere *. eenreeneeeee ee 80.50 Undetermined and loss......... 5 ie so, emia s Bio asd ori Ra 19.50 Total A — 5.438 — 4.99 99.98 100.00 This occurrence of pyrophyllite in coal slates and as the petrifying ma- terial of coal plants is exceedingly interesting, and I believe it to be the first time that it has thus been observed. Prof. Giimpel noticed that a mineral resembling pyrophyllite constitutes the mass of many graptolites, but Prof. von Kobell has shown, by analysis of specimens from Nordhalben, near Steben in Upper Franconia, that this substance is not pyrophyllite, but a micaceous mineral, containing over 3% of potassium oxide, which he called ‘* giimpelite.”’ The petrifying material of coal plants in the Tarantaise in Savoy has also been confounded with pyrophyllite, but we are now indebted to Prof. Giimpel for an investigation of this subject. His analysis gave 6.803% of potassium oxide and 2,208 % of sodium oxide. He has also made an analysis of the mineral of the graptolites from Graefenthal, in Thuringia, which gave 5.06% of oxides of potassium and sodium, All these analyses show that the substances found as petrifying aw cite of coal plants in the Tarantaise and of graptolites are not pyrophyllite, but varieties, or perhaps mixtures, of micaceous minerals of greater or less purity, belonging to that group, which Prof, Dana puts under the head of pinite, and which are so frequently met with in nature as the results of alteration of numerous minerals, such as iolite, nephelite, seapolite, feld- spars, staurolite, cyanite, corundum, topaz, &c., &e., which, when pure, would be recognized as damourite, paragonite, &c. University of Pennsyloania, July 14, 1879. *T could not getnough of it in a pure state for an analysis, but a partial analysis proved It to be pyrophyliite, 1G. Techermoak, Mineralogisehe und Petrographisehe Mitthetlungen TT, 2, 189. 1879.] 281 [Chase, Approzimute Quadrature of the Circle. By Pliny Earle Chase, LL.D, (Read before the American Philosophical Society, June 20th, 1879.) Y m> AB =3; AC = 20 AD =3 AB; AX=8 AC BE parallel to CD EY = AC XY = 3.141585 AC The deviation from perfect accuracy is less than zy'y55 of one per cent. which would give an error of less than 4 of an inch per mile. For all practical purposes the construction may be regarded as exact, for the error would be inappreciable in any mechanical work. HAVERFORD COLLEGE, June 16th, 1879. Nore.—July 16, 1879. My attention has been called to the following more-complicated construction, and closer approximation, in Perkins’s Geometry (D. Appleton & Co., 1858). On an indefinite straight line A N, take AB=BD=DE=1; atE erect a perpendicular EG=2AB=>2EF; on EN takeEH=>HK = AG, K L (towards A) = AF, L M (towards N) = DG, MN=DF; bisect E Nat P, EPatR, A B atC; trisectE RatT. Then C T= 3.1415922. The author calls this method ‘‘very simple,”’ and says, that a better one ‘‘can hardly be expected, or even desired.’’ But the approximation of Adrian Metius, #5, is still closer, and the following construction of his ratio is simpler. D B c On A B =7 erect the perpendicular B C=8; extend C B to D, making BD =9; on A D erect the perpendicular D F = 15; take AE = AO, and draw EG parallel to F ©. Then + = $33 = 8.1415929, the true ratio be- ing 3.1415926-+-. ) The error of this construction is less than yyg555 Of one percent. Per- kins’s error is more than ;5)55 of one percent. Neither method is so simple, nor so desirable for practical purposes, as the one which I commu- nicated to the Society at its June meeting. Cooper.] 282 [May 16, Notes on sume Land-shells of the Pacific Slope. By J. G. Cooper, M. D. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, May 16, 1879.) The recent publication of Vol. V of the ‘‘ Terrestrial Air-breathing Mol- lusks of the United States,’’ etc., by W. G. Binney, as a * Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College,’’ forms a fitting oc- casion for making some further observations, biographical and taxonomic, on the species found west of the ‘‘Great Plains,’’ which form the chief boundary within our limits between the eastern and western groups of species. ; It is to be regretted that Mr. Binney has not had ‘‘ time and inclination”’ to improve on the classifications of Albers and Von Marten, which his own original investigations have made quite inadequate to the subject (Preface, p- iii). The many improvements made on the system adopted in the ‘‘ Pul- monata Geophila,’’ of Binney and Bland (Smithsonian Mise. Pub., 194, 1869), are very satisfactory, few of the errors there noted being retained in this work, which is to a great extent a republication of that, with additions from other sources, rendering it more complete as a manual) of the subject. The bad results of the habit of biindly following foreign authorities is shown in the higher divisions adopted on p. 81, the first, Agnatha, being founded on a negative character as to the jaw, while those of the lingual teeth are not different in divisions B and C, and all of them show that these parts are insufficient for classification alone, while they Jead to far more confusion of distinct forms than divisions founded only on external characters. The labored investigations of the microscopists into the internal anatomy has at last led to nearly the same results as a comparison of external forms, as far as they prove a close connection to exist between the two groups of characters, and we may hope that the less difficult system of classification by external resemblances will in time resume its former importance, modi- fied and improved by a knowledge of the entire structure of the animals. The fallacy of making family divisions to depend on a few internal charac- ters has been often shown, and is becoming more and more certain with in- crease of investigation. I do not claim that the sells alone should guide in classification, but, with the form of the animal, they should define the higher groups, leaving the details of special organs to determine genera and species. Genus Hexrx. Again following his authorities Mr, Binney uses ‘ //elix’’ as a compre- hensive term, like Pfeiffer including in it every helicoid Jand-shell, and like the French naturalists making genera by distintegrating it without leaving a single original Helix. No other genus founded by the immortal Linnaeus has so hard a fate, and it is to be hoped that at least one species will yet be found to be a Helix. et 1879.] ; 283 [Cooper. I have before shown tliat our west-coast banded group has claim at least to be considered first cousin to the type of Helix, and cannot yet see more than sub-generic differences, supposing lapicida to be the type. Mr. Bin- ney, however, while admitting that the shell furnishes the most reliable characters for the division (p. 252), makes it subordinate in most genera, and appears to me to give it too little value. Sub-genus ARIONTA. I am more convinced by further comparisons of additional specimens that the group of forms of this sub-genus found around San Francisco Bay are merely local races of one species, the californiensis of Lea, running. into the var. nemorivaga Val. (usually called nickliniana Lea, which however was so described as to include several), bridgest Newc., passing into next, ramentosa Gld. (nearly = reticulata Pf.), and the extreme Monterey race vincta Val. (= californiensis of Binney). A specimen from Cedar Mountain, east of San Francisco Bay, found by Dr. Yates, has nearly the form of var. vincta, being almost as high as wide, but much dwarfed. Occasional specimens occur within the range of each variety connecting it with some of the others, I suspect that the examina- tion of numerous specimens of each would make the differences in internal characters pointed out by Mr. Binney less uniform than he makes them ap- pear, as he admits much variation in these respects in several species thus examined. ~The named varieties of the European A. arbustorum are even more dis- tinct than in our group inhabiting the region around San Francisco Bay. In the only admitted species of the Sierra Nevada, A. tudiculata, I have before mentioned that many varieties exist, though less localized and marked, only one having yet been named, the var. cypreophila Newc., MSS.; distinguished by thinness and umbilicus. This form, of very small size, was also found by Dr. Yates in 1875, at Shasta, Cal., near lat. 41°, the most northern point at which it has recently occurred. Nor does it pass east of the Sierra Nevada, though lately included in the shells of the Great Basin by Ingersoll, from misunderstanding the locality of ‘‘ Bear River, Cal.,”’ given by Carlton. It may yet be proved that A. arrosa is but a sub-species of californiensis, the varieties arboretorum Val., and the later varieties holderi and stiversi- ana described by me, forming the connecting links. In thatcase A. erar- ata Pf. must also fall into the series, being connected with arrosa by inter- mediate specimens, though rare and local. But the very rarity of all these links tends to indicate an original difference in the chief forms, now becoming obscured where they meet in their ranges of distribution. (See Amer. Jour. of Conch., TV, 288.) In a recent article I have shown by maps the peculiar distribution of the species I refer to, Arionta being grouped in narrow limits as compared with the others. (Proc. Cal. Acad. Sc., V, 121, 1878.) Having now disposed of the Ariontas of the San Francisco group, there remain those of Southern California, and the islands, extending onto the peninsula. I have before shown in various articles that these are all con- Cooper. ] 284 [May 16, nected by intermediate forms, even that retained by Mr. Binney in genus Euparypha (Tryon), the difference in this being merely the result of a greater abundance of lime in its food, and therefore in the shell. It is also not improbable that the species called Huparypha from southern Eu- rope, etc., are merely Artonte developed under similar conditions. In our species, however, I see no reason for allowing more than specific dif- ferences. Specimens of H. kellettii, and of var. crebristriata may be selected, and are more common fossil, that have just as much-claim to be considered Huparyphe (or of other genera) as Tryoni. No single char- acter, external or internal, will suffice to dai sti genera in this family or order of animals. A. redimita W.G. Binn. The author of this name now calls it ‘‘proba- bly a variety of A. ramentosa,’’ relying upon a resemblance in sculpture. But this file-like surface is characteristic of many forms in the young state, and of these species, the island variety first named redimita, shows in its form a much nearer approach to A. kelle/iéi than any other, and much the same sculpture. The jaws and linguals are also nearer. sapsisivid shndis hie3 400% Ee 5. Clay, white, good, but containing ferruginous streaks 7 feet. 6. Clay, ferruginous, seen.......... b dpsed hiculen aid vey AO 188 POMBE gong Caos PIT wR RRS PLOT Tn ben wana tae aoe The other section is: 1. Sand, clay, etc...... id bw Mereielacd axle heptane .. 8 to 10 feet. Bi QUO i 6 sisis «scsi shin aks pk sae Sekrebulen dectvn Bito dOnt 3. Ferruginous conglomerate........ beds ce age 0 ft. 1 inch. 4. Glass sand...... Tey Sree aviéte viahes ale 18 feet. §, Sarid, inferior, 2). cis. s seecee oan ee Pe niewad -» unknown. Respecting the thickness of the ferruginous clay, No, 6 of the first sec- tion, nothing is known further than that at 10 feet from the top the tools used in boring became hopelessly fast. An attempt was made to bore through the sand, No. 5, of the second section, but the tools could not be pushed beyond 15 feet. At a little distance beyond the pits, the third bench of the Stewartstown series is reached, but the fourth bench has been masked by crosion so that the wash from the thick deposit on the fifth covers the place of the fourth and becomes continuous with the deposit on the third. Throughout the deposits on both benches, transported fragments are found in vast numbers A well digged on the third bench is 28 feet deep and does not reach the bottom of the sandy deposit. At a little way beyond, the bottom of the sand is reached and the thickness to the rocky shelf is shown to be 85 feet. 1879.]. 293 [Stevenson. The black clay of the first section, commonly known as the ‘‘swamp clay,’’ was reached in a boring here at 25 feet from the surface. In it, amid the numerous fragments of half-rotted wood, the cupule of an acorn was found along with what seemed to be berries of the black haw. The latter were thoroughly carbonized and crumbled rapidly on drying ; but the acorn cup was still tough, and it was kept for some time as a curiosity. The wood in this clay is tough enough to snap in breaking and it has the peculiar tint characterizing the half-rotted wood so frequently seen in peat bogs. A point of the third bench projects towards George’s creek at a little north from the road. Unio shells, much decayed, are common here and are barely covered by the soil. A rise in the road at half a mile nearer to New Geneva brings it again to the level of the fifth bench. There a small deposit of glass-sand was found, but it was soon worked out. It rested on an irregular deposit of clay an‘l sand. This fifth bench is continuous along the river hills from the State line to the mouth of George’s creek, except where cut away by streams, but some- times it is so defaced by erosion as to be recognized only with difficulty. It is handsomely preserved at Greensboro’, on the west side of the river opposite New Geneva, where it shows vast numbers of rolled stones. Mingled clay and sand occur above it to 300 feet above water-level. Between George's Creek and Redstone Creek. Below Greensboro’ on the river hill, benches occur at 20, 180, 265 and 310 feet above low water. At the mouth of Whitely creek, in Greene county, the third bench of the Stewartstown series, at 180 feet, is very distinct up the creek to the village of Mapletown, and polished fragments are numerous all the way. At the mouth of Muddy creek, in the same county, the fifth bench, covered with rolled and polished stones, is handsomely shown, and along the creek it is quite perfect as far as Carmichaels, where the detrital coating is as thick as it is along the river. On Pumpkin run, in the same county, this bench is shown with the same features. The measurement given in the Greene and Washington report* is erroneous and the bench isconfounded there with one which was not seen in the Stewartstown series, put which seems to be intermediate between the fifth and the sixth, and to be persistent along several of the streams in Greene county at 30 feet above the fifth bench. At the mouth of Ten-mile creek the first, third and fifth of the Stewartstown series are shown, together with the supplemental one just mentioned ; while at Fred- erick, in Washington county, or rather, at two miles back from the river, and near Frederick, isa still higher one, which is clearly the same with the eighth of the Stewartstown series, though the erroneous measurement given in the Greene and Washington county report would make it inter- mediate between that and the seventh, * During part of the season of 1875 I used a barometer which proved to be quite bad. In this way came the erroneous measurements referred to, PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xvitt. 104. 2n. PRINTED SEPT. 26, 1879. Stevenson.} 294 [Aug. 16, Between Redstone Creek and Pittsburgh. The benches are handsomely shown on both sides of the river below the mouth of Redstone creek, which enters the river at Brownsville, 50 miles above Pittsburgh. At Belvernon, near the northern line of Fayette county, the deposit on the third bench has been opened to procure glass-sand ; and at present two ex- cavations are worked on the opposite side of the river. At the upper one of these the following detailed section was obtained : 1. Alternations of fireclay, gravel and coarse sand, with frag- ments of varying size ; the whole containing much carbon- aceous matter in streaks, mostly broken coal ; very ferrugi- nous toward, the base ys « »$ wim Had Fe ewe ik oka Cte ae ..+..12 to 16 ft. 2. Sand, fine and angular, excellent for manufacture of fine win- dow and mirror glass ; containing thin, irregular layers of blue plastic clay, with occasional layers of conglomerate cemented by oxide of iron ; contains also numerous rounded fragments of rock, some of them very large ; the pebbles are of limestone, sandstone, and carboniferous conglomerate....16 to 22 ft. 3. Coarse sand and gravel, with many small rounded fragments ; much carbonaceous matter, coal, and imperfect lignite ; oc- casionally yields large fragments of trees. This is often a ferruginous conglomerate. ..........eeeeees er ER 2 ft. 4, Ferruginous sand, frequently conglomerate ; contains some transported fragments of considerable size .............- -» 2to4 ft, 5. Blue plastic clay ............++0 melmis ethos pie ‘athichae- oa estan ah 0 to 4 ft. 6. Blue laminated shale of the lower barren series. The plastic clay, No. 5, is evidently derived from the underlying shale on which the deposit rests. The section shown in the other excavation is : 1. Clay, containing rounded fragments, lumps of coal, etc.,...> 10 ft. 2. Dark sand used for moulding........ ws «to fois Hialeah beset Seles 7 ft. 8. White sand,used in making glass..............+ 9 Seger ae 7 ft. 4. Sandy and clayey material, containing rounded fragments and Jumps. Of ITODL/ONE 35,0 eine: 01h 9:0 pee eincimrbin ins) i du ale ep bien otk fh 5.; Dark OA0d sis dis nie vientick wane Tate rite nas 4 ft. As these excavations are barely half a mile apart, they show the extreme irregularity of the deposit, which is from 40 to 45 feet thick at the upper excavation, while at the lower one it rarely exceeds 35 feet. At Monongahela city, the third and fifth of the Stewartstown benches are at 190 and 320 feet above low water mark; above these are the sixth and eighth at 1110 and 1190 feet above tide. Between the third and fifth there is an ill-defined bench at 290 feet above low water, which is distinct further down the stream, for a terrace, holding that place, is reported from Peter's creek and Thompson's run, The third bench, also, is well defined down the river, being that along which the Pennsylvania Railroad runs from just below Braddocksfield almost to Pittsburgh, The lowest bench at Monongahela city is at 40 feet above the river or at 750 feet above tide. The Baltimore and Ohio Railroad runs along this 1879.) 5 295 ’ [Stevenson. bench for a considerable part of the way below the mouth of the Youghio- gheny river. It is the bench along the river front at Pittsburgh. Benches along George's Creek. The third and fifth benches of the Stew- artstown series are persistent along this creek, but constantly rise up-stream so that at the village of Smithfield the fifth is 304 and the third 200 feet above the river at the mouth of the creek. The rise is quite regular and in this distance the lower one has gained five feet on the upper one. The eighth bench is shown on the south side of the creek near the village of Morris Cross-roads, forming the crests of several flat-topped hills on the divide between George’s creek and Grassy run, the latter a tributary to Cheat river. Its absolute level is unchanged, being 1195 feet above mean tide. The sixth bench is found near Grassy run, and the second is there at 80 feet above the run, or 125 feet above Cheat river at its mouth. Crossing the divide between Grassy run and Rubbler’s run, also tribu- tary to Cheat river, several benches were seen, but their relations could not be made out owing to lack of time. On Mitchell’s hill, projecting from Chestnut Ridge almost immediately behind the old Springhill furnace, the eighth bench stands out from the mountain for almost 400 yards. This bench is continuous thence southward to the line of West Virginia, where, as the divide between Rubbler’s run and Cheat river, it extends for a long distance eastward and westward. Its elevation was determined on this divide and differs from that near Stewartstown by barely five feet. Returning to George’s creek and taking the road from Smithfield to Uniontown, which fellows the west side of the valley, one finds the third, fifth and sixth benches constantly persistent along the side of Brush ridge, which, as already mentioned, is the elevated land marking the course of the Saltsburg anticlinal. East from the road are some minor benches whose relations were not made out. Beyond the creek, on the flank of the mountain, fragments of the eighth bench are occasionally shown, and the same bench is reached on the road at the summit of the divide between George’s and Redstone creeks at one mile from Uniontown. Meanwhile, in ascending the creek, the fifth bench has shown a constant increase in altitude, so that as the divide is approached, that bench takes place of the sixth and finally is merged into the seventh. According to the barometer, the eighth bench is somewhat higher here than at the mouth of Cheat river, being 1206 feet instead of 1195, but the measurement was not verified. No opportunity was afforded for following out the minor benches in this valley, but their steady rise from the river to the village of Smithfield justifies the belief that they rise with the stream until, at last, the ‘‘ bottom ”’ becomes merged into the highest bench at the head of the stream. Benches on Redstone Oreck. No little difficulty was experienced in the attempt to trace out the benches along Redstone creek, which enters the Monongahela at Brownsville, 50 miles above Pittsburgh. From the river to Upper Middletown, 3 miles below Uniontown, the creek is hemmed in Stevenson.] 296 {[Aug. 15, by high hills and the valley is so narrow in many places that the benches are necessarily very indistinct. It is sufficiently clear, however, that the bench, on which Uniontown is built, is the same with the third of the Stewartstown series as exposed at Brownsville. The transported fragments were seen on Redstone at five or six miles from the river, where the bench is fairly well defined. Further up, the same bench is imperfectly shown at Upper Middletown. Along the road leading from Uniontown to Connellsville, the eighth bench is reached very soon after leaving the National road, and it is ex- posed again near Lemont furnace at four miles from Uniontown, where the sixth bench is handsomely preserved at 90 feet below it. The latter bench shows changes in level as insignificant as those of the former. The eighth bench is persistent throughout the whole of the Redstone valley east from Brush Ridge, but it becomes a little obscure near the sum- mit dividing the waters of Redstone from those of Dunbar creek, There a higher bench was seen, which belongs between the ninth and tenth of the Stewartstown column. On the old Pittsburgh road leading north from Uniontown, the eighth bench is well shown, and, at the first summit, the tenth bench is reached. This seems to be the most extensive plain along the east side of Brush Ridge. BENCHES ALONG THE NATIONAL Roap. Between Uniontown and the Monongahela River. The National road be - tween Uniontown in Fayette county and Washington in Washington county seems to have been laid out with the view of crossing the summit of every high hill between the two boroughs. It affords excellent oppor- tunity for the study of the higher benches with the least possible expendi- ture of labor. The eighth bench is soon reached west from Uniontown, and a persistent floor representing the seventh bench is shown at 50 feet below it. The tenth bench is seen at three miles west from Uniontown ; and a rude sur- vey of the surrounding country, made with the level, shows that bench to be very widely persistent and to be the important plain of Brush Ridge. The ninth bench is reached on the hill holding the eastern outcrop of the Pittsburgh coal bed at five miles west from Uniontown. At that place one comes to the benches of Dunlop’s creek, and the ninth bench is seen to be constantly distinct along that stream during its passage through the arch of the Saltsburg axis. On the hill beyond the old hotel at nearly nine miles west from Union- town, a higher bench is reached, which is shown in several hills in the vicinity, ali of them flat-topped, These truncated cones mark an eleventh bench, whose altitude is 60 feet greater than that of the tenth, or 1850 feet above mean tide, The tenth bench is reached again at a little way further west, and thence for a considerable distance the road runs on the ninth which is handsomely defined, 1879.] 297 [Stevenson. Thence to within a mile of Brownsville, the country is so disfigured by erosion that nothing can be determined ; but at that distance from Browns- ville one comes within sight of the Monongahela river and the road soon falls to the eighth bench, which has an absolute altitude of 1185 feet, if the en- gineers’ station at West Brownsville was correctly identified. This is ten feet less than at the mouth of Cheat river and 5 feet less than on the Con- nellsville road near Uniontown. The other benches below this are sufficiently distinct along the river above Brownsville. Between the Monongahela River and Washington. On the west side of the river, the eighth bench is reached within a mile and it is the im- portant one north and south as far as the eye can reach, until one comes to a station, known as Kreppsville, say three miles west from the river as measured along the road. But there, at a.short distance north from the road, a higher bench is seen at 1225 feet, which seems to be the ninth of the series and is persistent northward. The road reaches this bench at a little way further west and follows it to near the village of Centreville, where, while crossing a stream, it comes down to the eighth bench. At Centre- ville, it returns to the ninth, while both north and south from the village a higher bench is seen in fragments, with an elevation of 1245 feet. Still further north, the tenth bench is shown in the crowns of several flat-topped hills, which have an elevation of 1285 feet. Between Centreville and a mile and a half east from the village of Beallsville, the road runs alternately on the 1225 and the 1245 feet bench, but at the latter place it falls to the eighth as it crosses the valley of a stream emptying into the Monongahela river. It quickly rises again to 1225 and then to 1245 feet, both distinct benches, and within a short dis- tance it comes up to the tenth. The last is the great bench north and south, and apparently it is the most important bench thus far on this side of the river. West from Beallsville is a high hill, which seems to mark the dividing line between the benches of the Monongahela Valley and those belonging ‘to the valley of Chartiers creek and the Ohio river at the west, though it is broken by Pike run at a little way north from the National road. On this hill, one rises to 1420 and 1445 feet above tide, two splendid benches, and the summit of the hill is little less than 1500 feet. Descending the west side of this hill, one comes to the 1420 feet bench and goes below it ; but in ascending the first summit east from Hillsbor- ough, he crosses benches at 1420, 1445 and 1475 feet, all of them perfectly distinct, the first two quite as much so as on the east side of the Beallsville Ridge. Descending from this, one soon comes to the tenth bench at 1295 feet, but in ascending to Hillsborough he again crosses benches at 1420, 1445 and 1475 feet and reaches 1505 feet at the hill-top, the three benches be- ing very distinct. Hillsborough is at 12 miles east from Washington. At eleven miles east from Washington, the road crosses the 1445 feet bench ; at ten miles, the bench at 1380 feet ; and at 9} miles, the tenth at 1295 feet. At nine miles, one reaches the head of Pike run, and in the Stevenson.] 298 [Aug. 15, whole region north from the National road, the tenth bench is the most widespread, the one which gives character to the country. At 8 miles and a half from Washington, the genera} elevation of the country increases and the road rises, so that from that point to the four-mile post the road oscil- lates between the 1420 and the 1445 feet bench. But near that post: it falls to 1375 or 1380 feet and comes upon a fine terrace, which is of considerable extent north and south from the pike. Between the second and third mile-posts, the road ‘crosses an island of the 1420 feet bench and at the second post it is again at 1375 feet. This is the principal bench of the Chartiers Valley, being well shown on both sides. The lower benches came out in their order from this horizon down to the railroad depot at Washington, which is near the place of the sixth bench. ; The observations from the river to Washington were made altogether with the barometer, but under very favorable circumstances, for on repe- tition the measurements showed insignificant variations ; and in both cases the total change in the barometer during the passage was barely five one- thousandths of an inch; the altitudes of the stations terminating the line having been well determined by railroad levels. BENCHES ON West SipE or CuestNuT RipGE SoutTH FROM THE YOuGHIOGHENY RIVER. This slope shows for the most part a very regular face in the Redstone region. Near the West Virginia line and beyond that southward as far as the observations were carried, the rocks of the Lower Barren and Lower Productive Coal Series have so far escaped erosion, that the benches below the eighth are easily recognized. Northward from the middle of George’s township, in Fayette county, to the divide between Redstone and Dunbar creeks, the lower rocks of the Coal Measures have been in great part re- moved, and the massive Pottsville (Seral) conglomerate, resisting erosion, has remained to give the mountain its present slope. The benches do not exist where this rock forms the face of the ridge and traces of them are very rare. It is noteworthy that the outcrop of this conglomerate, though at a considerable distance from the plane of the axis, is not much below the average elevation of the summit of the ridge. On the summit, at the National road, the surface is covered by a fine reddish sand, almost free from clay, which is well shown at the Summit hotel. The well on the opposite side of the road was digged in this sand to the depth of 40 feet, and the people in the vicinity were surprised by the occurrence of river snails and mussels, many of them being quite fresh looking. This point is about 2400 feet above tide. A well marked bench was seen on the Seaton road, 180 feet higher, which extends along that road for nearly two miles south from the National road and is covered with loose sand derived from the disintegration of the Pocono (Vespertine) sandstone, A level bench covered by loose sand can be followed for sev- eral miles along the crest of this ridge. 1879.] 299 [Stevenson. Some of the low gaps, which extend to but a short distance below the summit are beautifully terraced. The benches in Wymp’s gap, exposed by removal of the timber, are distinct to one standing even on the opposite side of George’s Creek Valley. The gorges made by the larger streams are usually so narrow and have soabrupt walls that no benches remain, and it is doubtful if benches could have existed in any but very few of them. For this reason no benches below the eighth have been fully recognized along the greater part of this face, south from the Youghiogheny river. BENCHES ALONG THE YOUGHIOGHENY RIVER. The river ‘‘ bottom’’ at M’Keesport is at 765 feet above tide. Thence it is continuous to Connellsville, at the mouth of the Chestnut Ridge gap, _ where it is 894 feet above tide. At Perryopolis, just south from the river, a fine bench is shown covered by sand, which contains many enormous bowlders, all of which have been brought down from the mountain gaps. Possum run enters the river almost opposite Connellsville. On the road leading along this run from that borough to Brownsville, a bench, reached at the first summit, barely 200 feet above the river, is the highest limit of transported fragments. All of the bowlders are of huge size and many of them weigh not less than a ton. They have polished surfaces and are so numerous that the farmers use them in building fences. This bench is the same with that seen at Perryopolis. This bench is persistent along the river above Connellsville, but it can be followed only with difficulty as slides in the gaps have masked it at several localities. It is very nearly 200 feet above the river at Connellsville, but thence it rises less rapidly than the river bed, so that at Ohiopyle Falls it is not quite 140 feet above the stream. While flowing on this bench as its bed, the river ran directly across the neck of the peninsula at Ohiopyle Falls, and the gorge through which the stream now flows has been eroded since the bed fell below that bench. At Confluence, immediately above the east end of the gap through Laurel Ridge, the river ‘‘bottom,’’ which is only 765 feet at M’Keesport, is 1346 feet above tide or 581 feet higher than the same bench at the mouth of the river. A very fine bench was seen southwest from Confluence at 1820 feet above tide. The persistent bench to which reference has been made, is still seen along the river, but is much nearer the stream than it is at Ohio- pyle. Riding up Castleman’s river, which unites here with the Youghio- gheny, one soon rises alove this bench or rather finds the river bottom merged into it. BENCHES IN WESTMORELAND County Wrst FROM CHESTNUT RIDGE. Few available measurements were obtained in this part of Westmoreland county. The survey was made during the autumn of 1876, a season strangely marked by violent fluctuations of the barometer ; but no measure- ments have been accepted as trustworthy except such as were verified by direct comparison with a spivit-leveled line as a base. Stevenson.] 300 [Aug. 15, Though the observations thus available are very few, yet they suffice to show that the system of benches in this county is the same with that found in Fayette and Washington. The eighth bench of the Stewartstown series is shown half a mile west from Jacksonville, near the county line ‘on the Pittsburgh and Bedford road, at 1190 feet above tide; a still higher one at Jacksonville with an elevation of 1230 feet, is evidently the ninth of that series. These benches are well shown both north and south from the pike, forming the crowns of many hills, while the tenth is distinct north from the Pennsylvania Rail- road. Following the pike one finds the twelfth hench at three miles and a half west from Greensburg, with an elevation of 1380 feet, precisely the same as on the National road many miles southwest ; and at two miles west from Greensburg the ninth (?) is shown with an elevation of 1242 feet. Benches were seen north from Greensburg at 1185, 1270, and 1300 feet on the road to New Salem, evidently representing the eight and tenth with the intermediate bench seen in Fayette county between the aga and tenth. The highest point at the village of New Salem is on the eleventh bench, which is of wide extent in that part of the country. The benches are fine- ly shown west from New Salem along Turtle Creek and its tributaries, but unfortunately, all of the measurements made in that vicinity proved alto- gether worthless, owing to flagrant variations in the barometer. Measurements made on the Bedford pike near Latrobe, as it descends to Loyalhanna creek, showed the fifth, sixth, eighth and ninth benches at 1050, 1105, 1185 and 1240 feet above tide. The fifth is here the ‘*bottom’”’ of the Loyalhanna. The highest plain seen near the pike is about 1450 feet above tide. BENCHES IN THE LIGONIER VALLEY. On the National Road. There was no means of verifying the measure- ments made here. The base used is the altitude of Chestnut Ridge summit as determined by the original survey at 2400 feet above tide. This determination agrees closely with that shown by the barometer, the rail- road level at Uniontown being taken as the base ; but as gross errors were made by the engineers in running the line for the road, and as there is no well-fixed point nearer than Uniontown, the altitudes of the benches can- not be regarded as fairly determined. At the same time it may be best to record the levels obtained, because they show that the surface of Ligonier Valley is marked by horizontal benches precisely similar to those seen on the west side of Chestnut Ridge. The following series was made out be- tween the summit and the village of Farmington, midway between Chest- nut and Laurel Ridges : 2155, 2060, 1965, 1880 feet above tide. The crowns of the hills in this part of the valley are almost absolutely level and the es- carpments of the benches are very steep. The forms stand out more fairly than they do west from Chestnut Ridge. South from the National road, Laurel Ridge loses its mountain character St 1879.) ° 3 301 [Stevenson. and, as it were, breaks down into a broad level country, known as the ‘*Glades,’’ which stretches over into West Virginia and Maryland. Though thus breaking down, the ridge loses little of its height, and the ‘‘Glades’’ are not far from 2200 feet above tide. In general character this plain is precisely like the benches. A fine series of benches was seen near Indian creek at Springfield in Fayette county, but no way existed whereby the exact altitude could be determined, and no measurements were made. Near the Loyalhanna. Between Ligonier and the village of Stahlstown in Westmoreland county, on the divide between Four-mile run and the Loyalhanna, the following benches were found : 1690, 1570, 1520, 1489, 1390 and 1245 feet above tide. These measurements were verified by ref- erence to the levels of the Ligonier and Latrobe Railroad at Ligonier. The last three are remarkably near three seen on the National road not far from Hillsborough, and the last two undoubtedly represent the ninth (?) and twelfth of the series. BencuweEs in SOMERSET COUNTY. The elevation of Meyersdale on the Pittsburgh und Connellsville Railroad has been well established at 2063 feet above tide. Within sight of that village are three fully defined benches at 2128, 2288 and 2323 feet above tide, as determined by barometer from Meyersdale. _ The first bench is the floor of the country away from the Castleman’s river ; is shown on the hill between Elk Lick creek and the Castleman’s ; is the first bench on the road to Berlin north from the River, where it is beau- tifully distinct ; and is again reached on the summit beyond the crossing of Blue Lick by that road. At each of these places the bench is seen to be persistent over a wide area, The second bench is at the hill-top on the property of the Cumberland and Elk Lick coal company, and its place southward from that locality is shown by flat-topped hills. The same bench was seen on the road to Berlin. The third bench was seen on the road to Berlin at the Pine Hill church as well as at Berlin, where its existence is proved by the flat-topped hills. All of the benches are distinct at Berlin, and the second and third are well preserved along the west face of the Alleghanies. EAST FROM THE ALLEGHANIES. The observations here are not in detail. For the most part they were taken hastily along Wills creek and in the vicinity of Cumberland. Enough, however, was ascertained to show that a series of benches similar to that already described, exists along the east side of the Alleghanies in Maryland. ; Fine river terraces were seen along the Potomac and on Wills creek, which enters the Potomac river at Cumberland. The chief terrace of the Potomac is easily traced from Cumberland to Piedmont, and has even more rapid rise than along the Youghiogheny or the Castleman’s river. The PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XVIII. 104. 2M. PRINTED SEPT. 26, 1879. Stevenson.] 302 [Aug. 15, detrital fragments become very coarse in the mountain region, just as they do on the Youghiogheny and Castleman’s, and the deposit bears some re- semblance to glacial debris. The huge fragments have been transported but a short distance, and slides from the mountains are mingled with de- tritus moved by the stream ; so that, upon the whole, the deposit has little likeness to the material covering the terraces on the lower Monongahela or Youghiogheny, where the larger blocks have been rounded during their long journey, while many of the smaller ones have been reduced to fine sand or clay. II. RESUME OF THE FACTS AND THEIR RELATIONS. Looking now at the observations recorded in the foregoing part of this paper, we see that although very fragmentary, they show the existence of two sets of benches, in one of which, the higher, the individuals have an almost unvarying level, whereas in the other or lower set, the members have no definite altitude with respect to tide, but vary much, as do the beds of the streams along which they are found. Arranged in tabular form, we have, first the benches of the higher series : 1. Chestnut Ridge, Seaton road.......above tide, 2580 feet. 2. Chestnut ‘ National road...... 519 [Grote, with India, opened by Solomon (1015, 975 B. C.), must have settled down to staple articles.’’...... ‘Considerable time elapsed from the first partner- ship of Solomon with Hiram, before India became well known and its gold proverbial.’? ‘‘The Euphrates was the chief river...... since the main troubles of the Israelites originated thence.’’ The author then gave a chapter on the ‘* Testimony of Archzology,’’ describing the Assyrian tablets of the Genesis, Deluge, &c., and laid special stress on the occurrence of the deity J] in the Chaldean Pantheon, ‘‘stand- ing at its head, the fountain and origin of deity, equivalent to the Hebrew Hil, Eloah, with its plural Hlohim, and of the Arabic Al/ah.”’ ‘«The word used in the Hebrew text of Genesis, and translated God, is Elohim, a plural, but the verbs and pronouns agreeing with it are all in the singular, excepting in the account of the sixth day. The twenty-sixth verse of the first chapter of Genesis reads, ‘And Elohim said: Let us make man in our image, after our likeness.’ The twenty-seventh verse again returns to the singular by beginning, ‘So Elohim created the man in his - own image, in the image of Elohim created he him.’ We see then the noun signifying the Deity is plural, but conceived as a unit in its creative power. «And now let us look at the first verse of the account of the fourth day and the fifth Chaldean tablet quoted above in full. ‘It was delightful all that was fixed by the Great Gods (Jilinu, Hebrew Elohim) stars their ap- pearance in figures of animals He arranged.’ Exactly as in the Hebrew text, the noun is in the plural and the pronoun and verb in the singular, and this is kept up throughout the whole account. Thus, under the test of the linguistic crucible, this difference also gives way and the identity of the Hebrew and Chaldean accounts, not only in their incidents, but even in their fundamental mythological notions must be accepted as proven.” He then discussed the probable date of the Chaldean originals of the Assyrian tablet stories, and ‘the conclusions....reached may be tlus briefly stated: The legends having existed for a Jong time as oral tradi- tions, were committed to writing before the union of the kingdoms or before 2234 B. C., when Abraham, according to Biblical chronology, was not yet born. The earliest date assigned to the composition of the Biblical records is the time of Moses; this date is positively established through hieroglyphical inscriptions to be that of the king Menephthah, the Pharaoh of the Exodus, who followed his father Rameses II. on the throne in the year 1245 B.C. According to this the Chaldean account of Genesis would be nearly 1000 years older than the composition of the Biblical legends.’’ After giving ‘* parallel myths’’ from other races and nations, the author ‘concluded his paper with ‘‘ The testimony of facts.’’ _. **At the outset it will be seen to be foreign to our purpose to introduce here any evidence in proof of the reality of the process of Evolution. But the existing evidence that things have been brought to their present con- dition by a slow process of succession, in which the more simple forms pre- Grote. ] 320 (Sept. 19, ceded the more complex, is unanimously conceded by all who have investi- gated any branch of natural science, and effectually contradicts the sudden and separate origin of things deducible from the account in Genesis. With this, it will be sufficient if we point out in a brief way the facts discovered by science which contradict the account of creation in Genesis, whether we accept the sequence of plants and animals revealed by a study of fossils and living kinds, as indicating a genetic connection, or as being insufficient grounds for such a conception. ‘* From internal evidence, Genesis is not homogeneous in its composition, as we havealready seen. An originally detached portion having a different immediate source, terminates with the third verse of the second chapter, and it is quite evident that in dividing the text into chapters a mistake has been committed in this instance; the second chapter should begin, if an arbitrary division into chapters is intended to help the comprehension of the text, at its fourth verse. That these two accounts contradict each other is plain. The first account affirms that when God created man, ‘male and female created he them.’ The second account as positively . declares that man was created in the person of Adam as one sex and soli- tary. Finding that such a creation was incomplete and useless, the Deity made woman not out of the ground or dust, but of a bone of man himself. At one time one can readily conceive that such a belief could be seriously entertained when we read the accounts given by existing savages of their own origin. But. it never for one moment occurs to us to credit such con- ceptions. The idealists have been busy with this account of the origin of woman. It is taken assymbolical of the marriage state, of the dependence of woman upon man, ‘bone of his bone, flesh of his flesh.’ But to the uncultured races their fairy-stories are real, they believe them as Roman Catholics believe modern miracles and Protestants ancient miracles. Among the people who originated this fairy-tale of the origin of the first pair, the story passed for circumstantial fact. It satisfied their natural enquiry as to the origin of things, and it arose out of their mental status. But to ask us, who have gone beyond their mental condition, to still accept it as true, is unreasonable, and it is quite impossible that we should comply with such a request. ‘In the second account the events of creation are given in a different order from the first, and this account is throughout more circumstantial. The Garden of Eden is described, and this has been lately identified with the mythological center of the ancient Chaldean Pantheon. Before both accounts were cast in their present fossil condition in the Hebrew Bible, they probably had a connection, as we have seen ina preceding chapter, and had undergone a development in which both had lost something of their original form, the first account more, the last less. “The first account in the first chapter of Genesis may be now compared with the facts ascertained by science. We must believe that the text should be understood literally when it speaks of ‘day’ and ‘night,’ because with th's reading it agrees with the context, From the alternation 1879.) 321 [Grote of light and darkness sprang ‘day’ and ‘night,’ and ‘the evening and morning were one day.’ To take these days as indefinite periods is a proof of want of exact thought, it is an effort to reconcile an exploded statement with the new facts, rather than cut loose at once from demonstrated error. The Hebrew word Yom not only means a day of twenty-four hours, but it expressly means day in this connection. «But even granted that we take the less natural meaning of the word ‘day’ as the proper rendering, and that by this word ‘day’ any con- ceivable measurement of time is intended, it is only on the fourth of these days that the Sun appears. Astronomy, if it shows anything, proves that the satellites of a central orb, as separate masses of matter, must have been projected from it and at one time formed a part of such a body. The rela- tion between the earth and the sun, as we gather it from astronomical sources, is a different one from that intended by the account in Genesis. ~ We cannot conceive that the sun or the moon were created for the benefit of the earth or its inhabitants. Night and day are not necessities in the sense that we could not have become accustomed to some other division of times, for darkness and light, as indeed the Eskimo noware. Our organs of vision have plainly adapted themselves to the light which evidently existed before eyes were developed. And as to the succession we find that the earth is the child of the sun and the parentof the moon. But, that such a succession was comprehended by the writer of Genesis cannot be main- tained. He undoubtedly believed that the sun and the moon were created for the benefit of the earth, which he did not know was round and a satel- lite, but imagined as flat and the center of the system. Liht is also con- ceived of as independent of the sun. Plants bearing ‘seed and fruit after their kind,’ are regarded as being created before the sun, whose rays, the physiological botanist now shows, alone give them health and vigor. Again, whole groups of animals of whose remains mountains are made, such as corals and rhizopods, are omitted from the account. Such an omission, if it tallied with the restricted knowledge of the times in which such an account was believed, proves conclusively that the account was not extraneous, or in any way above the level of ancient civilization. And undoubtedly it does so tally, and the most powerful argument against Genesis, for those accessible to reason, lies in the fact that it contains no information superior to a very low grade of observation in natural history. Later on, in the magnified and equally improbable story of Noah’s ark, we find no mention of the rescue of the plants or how they stood the flood. At that time it was simply not known that plants breathed like animals and would drown as well as they. ‘«The records of the rocks tell us unmistakably that plants and animals have flourished through untold ages side by side, new forms succeeding old ones. But in Genesis, the creation of trees and shrubs took place in a period perfectly distinct from animals. The paleontologist must, then, reject the account of Genesis as perfectly incredible. Again the distinction between the ‘beast of the earth after his kind and cattle after their kind,’ shows Grote.] 322 [Sept. 19, a belief that domestic animals were created in a state of domestication, The Hebrew word d’hemah means cattle, ¢. e., domesticated animals, in contradistinction to wild animals. The other term chayah means wild beasts, in contradistinction to tame animals. The use of both terms shows that both kinds were believed to have been created ‘after their kind,’ and as distinct species. There is nothing contradictory in the conclusion that the statement was at one time believed in, because savage man still believes in parallel assertions, and this particular belief was generally current in Europe before naturalists had shown its contrary to be true, and that all domestic animals were originally wild and by man’s selec- tion have been changed from their original physical condition. A vege- table diet is also assigned at first to beasts and man, but the physiologist knows that carnivorous animals have always existed and that the instincts of animals are true to their teeth. “‘The story of Genesis takes no account of the different races a man- kind nor of prehistoric man. Its chronology is recent and special. All attempts to consider it as merely omitting to mention these facts, which it could as well have given, must be rejected as defective reasoning, If it could go so far as to note the creation of cultivated races of beasts, such as cattle, it should not have failed to note the more important races of man- kind. The character of the fauna of the country in which the myth originated is stamped on the face of the recital. All attempts to consider it as the true Genesis of the white, or Semitic and Aryan races, and there- fore as reliable to this extent, must likewise fail. The history of the descent of man is not yet written, but, so fur as we have the facts, they make for the view that the negro is a geographical variety, thrown off from — an ancient stock of mankind, and therefore not an older stem through which mankind has passed to become white. ‘Finally, at no time can it be true to say that ‘ thus the heavens and earth were finished and all the hosts of them.’’ Change in all nature is the well attested truth, and this change has never relaxed its endless pro- cession, ‘*Unessential as much of the scientific criticism directed against the ethical portions of the Scripture is seen to be, such criticism must be appro- priate when directed against a portion which deals almost exclusively with statements of facts. The Gods of the two accounts in Genesis expressed by nouns plural in form mark a reminiscence of a preceding plurality of deities and are plainly not coincident with our modern conception of the Deity. The notions of the Bible writers about God are not the same as the notions of the Israelites during the times of which the Bible writers treat. And our notions about God are not the same as those of the Bible writers. There has been on the one hand a growth in the direction of a recognition of an universal God, who at one time was tribal and national; and on the other hand there has been a progress in the direction of a recognition of one God, the final cause of Nature, who has absorbed the minor deities into himself. 1879.) 323 |Grote. This last change runs parallel with our progress in science and philosophy. We have gradually come to the knowledge that the laws which govern Nature are related and correlated and it is now no longer necessary to have a separate God for each phenomenon. But our Gods were those of the Aryan nations, Greek and Roman, Indian and Scandinavian, and these nations were behind the Semitic in the expression of monotheism. In fact we came by our present and popular monotheism suddenly through Judaism in its form of Christianity ; while the monotheism of the Hebrews was not fully expressed until the eighth century before Christ. Moses, as has been abundantly shown, was not a monotheist. In the ten command- ments, which in their ideas are certainly his, we find the expression, ‘‘ Ye shall have no other Gods before me (Yahveh).’’ This carries the force of an acknowledgment that after Yahveh, and as of inferior rank and power, other Gods might be worshiped. The monotheism of the Israelites is more especially a development on the side of morality. Yahveh is the High and Holy One; a broken and contrite heart He will not despise! By giving Yahveh the character of supremacy the first steps towards a pure monotheism were slowly established ; and the straight line of the best con- duct being recognized, it was easier to reach monotheism by this route than by an intellectual acquaintance with the forces of Nature, upon which the Inco-European mind, before its contact with Judaism, principally con- centrated its powers. But in the mythology of Aryan nations a progress towards monotheism can be shown; only the Aryan idea is more abstract and intellectual, the Semitic concrete and moral. As soon, therefore, as Judaism wes offered as the true religion for Aryan nations, it was only ac- cepted in its dilution of Trinitarianism. It is now the province of science to demonstrate from the intellectual side the truth of the monotheistic philosophy. But, undoubtedly, the prime error of the orthodox Biblical expounders, as also the error of the Bible writers themselves, is the measuring of past epochs by present conditions. “Tn the Biblical story of creation we have to do with a myth, which had undergone many changes before Genesis was written. Since that time and when the latter could no longer change, many differing conceptions of the origin of things have found their orthodoxy in a play upon the meaning of the words and a distortion of their original intent. A lax wording, a shorter and more general statement, a monotheistic conception, gives an elasticity to the story of Genesis and a certain adaptiveness to later dis- coveries; but in its treatment of the heavens and the heavenly bodies, in the Jittle bit of the earth on which its miracles are performed, it is still akin to the notions of the Homeric ages with regard to the Universe.” Kirkwood.] 524 [Sept. 19, The Cosmogony of Laplace. By Daniel Kirkwood, LL.D., Blooming- ton, Indiana. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, Sept. 19th, 1879.) Laplace’s celebrated nebular hypothesis was first distinctly stated in his Systeme du Monde.* The reasoning by which it is there sustained is gen- eral, and it does not appear that the author made any effort to test his theory by analysis. The law of the conservation of energy was then un- discovered, and hence data, which now seem available for a critical exami- nation, were entirely wanting. Let us consider the hypothesis in some of its obvious aspects. 1. It is assumed by Laplace that nebulous rings were abandoned only in the vicinity of the present orbits of the planets. While I have for many years believed that the matter of the solar system originally existed in a gaseous condition, and hence that a nebular hypothesis in some form must furnish the true explahation of the planetary motions, I have more than once ventured the opinion that this assumption of Laplace is wholly un- warranted. I make a single quotation from the Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society for January, 1869 : ‘to recall to the mind of the distressed or doubting Hollandérs the two signal examples of the Divine beneficence that are commemorated upon this coin. No. 34379. Obverse, ZELUS . DOMINI . EXERCITUUM . FECIT . HOC. Upon the upper portion of the field the name of Jehovah in Hebrew letters, surrounded by a cloud from which a naked arm holding a sceptre is pro- jecting ; below is a landscape in which several cities and towns are visible. Reverse, STENOVICO. | OTMARSIA. | COVORDIA. | CAPTIS. | HOSTE. | REPUL- so. | Sen. | Fazp. Pro. | F. | F. | m-p-xcu. This piece refers to the cap- ture of the cities named. No. 34404. Obverse, CASTRACON | SPEXIT INSE | ADVERSARIA | SELVOLDA cum | BisLecHio aD | Noy’ Mpxcy. Reverse, a battlemented tower, at whose base a battering ram worked by eight warriors is being operated and has effected a breach. This and the next jetton commemorate the capture of the towns of Selvold and Bislich. No. 34405. Obverse, Qua#RERE. Within a circle of vines Mars stands armed with lance and shield ; by his side the trunk of a tree, upon which a bird is resting; in the foreground a mass of infantry. Reverse, Er, TUERI. MpDxcv. A female figure seated facing front, with a large helmet upon her head, holding in her right hand a shield, upen which is dis- played the Lion of Holland ; in the left a lance; at her right side is seated an owl upona branch. In the background is an encampment of tents. This relates to Prince Maurice’s prudence in preserving his conquests and to his Mars-like valor in effecting them. No. 84407. Obverse, FRUSTRA . OPPUGNAT . USQUEDUM. PROTEGIT . pkus. Soldiers standing by ariver bank with a crowned leader ; the other side of the river is protected by a shield which a hand holds out from heaven. Under the shield are four soldiers ready for the fray, and behind them are seen kneeling three personsin prayer. Reverse, VIGILATE. ET. ORATE . DEO. CONFIDENTES . MDxCvi. A seated female figure with folded hands ; upon her right a sentry is keeping watch; on her left a shield dis- playing a crowned lion, by the side of which is a tower, upon whose summit there is also a sentinel. ) This jetton refers to the province of Zeeland being threatened by the Archduke Albert. No. 84423. Obverse, Orpvrn. | Auspre. prin. | Mauri. puoru. | Hosre ap Tum | NoUTUM C4s0. | DECEM OPIDIS. ET. | TRIBUS, ARCIBUS. | EXPUG. ET. TOTA. | CISRHE, DITIO| NE. PACATA, | 1597. Reverse, SOL. DEO, HONOR ET GLORIA. The Belgian lion rampant, holding a sword and bundle of arrows. This celebrates the victory at Turnhout and the recapture of nine towns. No. 34457. Obverse, wperatror. Maris, Terra Dominus. A full- rigged ship under sail. Reverse, Lucron mr pmeroo, 1602, A four, leaved rose between small crosses, This relates to commerce and naviga- tion once more beginning to be lively, 1879.] 337 (Phillips. \ No. 84461. Obverse, ARs. GRAVE. TOLLIT. ONUS. A man bending down over a lever is endeavoring by its means to raise a huge millstone. Re- verse, INDUSTRIA ET LABORE, A spade transpiercing a crown. In the exergue MDCII. This relates to the surrender of Grabe. No. 34491. Obverse, SERVAT. VIGILANTIA. CONCORS. MpCVvI. A ship in a storm-tossed ocean, whose waves are breaking its masts ; clouds are in the heavens. Seven figures are to be seen upon the ship who are busied in taking necessary measures for the preservation of the ship and bringing it) to its destination. Reverse, Moprcas. | Fiver. Quip. | TIMETIS. | 8. C. This refers to the general depression and consternation of the Nether- landers. No. 34518. Obverse, FoRTITUDO. BELGICA. A bundle of arrows with their points upwards. Reverse, Mpoxu. | INDUGIAR. | 1101, | 8. c. | This commemorates the fourth year of the truce. 2np. COINS. Among the coins a number of fine specimens have been added, of which the following are a few of the more important. There is a very interesting silver coin of ancient Spain. It bears on the obverse a head with a stern forbidding countenance, and crisp curled hair and beard, calling to mind the conventional Assyrian type. There are also certain rude letters both on the obverse and on the reverse. It is the cur- rent opinion among Numisrmatists that these coins were copied after those issued by the early Greek monarchs with such changes as the lack of skill on the part of the artists would naturally cause. The reverse exhibits a horseman charging with a lance seated upon a steed whose forefeet are raised in motion from the ground. The action is spirited, and by no means so stiff as the low state of the arts would have warranted us in expecting. The head on the obverse does not, in my opinion, bear out its presumed Greek origin, and I incline to the belief that it is rather a representation of some one of their gods, possibly the Phcenician Hercules. The first settlements in Spain were those of the Carthagenians, estab- lished ages before the earliest known. periods of classical history. There exist numerous varieties of these early Spanish coins with various inscriptions, which have only been deciphered in the last few generations, ‘and even as yet their true signification is in doubt. The author of La science des Meduilles, an early work on Numismatics, published at Paris in 1715, speaks of these coins as being truly medallas desconnocidas, which no ‘one had undertaken to collect or reduce into order, although ‘‘ Lastanosa ait eri rendre un grund service aux curieux, de se donner la peine d’en farre un Volume, qui fut imprimé a Huesca en 1645 ou il a fuit graver environ deux cents de ces medailles qu’il avait dans son Cabinet, la plipart d argent.’’ » Lastanosa had an insight into the true status of these coins which had -been considered as bearing Punic letters. He maintained that the charac- ters on them were those of the early language of Spain, and that it was Phillips. | 3338 [Oet. 3, to these coins Pliny referred when speaking of the booty carried away by the Romans from Spain, argentum signatum oscense. The coin of which we are speaking has been ascribed by both Henin and Akerman to the city of Tarragon, the capital of the Province of the same name, much celebrated in ancient authors for its beauty and opulence. Pliny writes of it that it was Setpiorum opus ut Carthago Paenorwm. Augustus erected in honor of his visit, an altar, upon which subsequently & palm-tree grew. It issued coins while under the dominion of the Romans, and there are some extant bearing the heads of the Gothic rulers of Spain. Carthage is probably one of the best known cities of antiquity, and abund- ant specimens of its coinage have descended to our own times. The pieces in the exhibition are small bronze coins bearing on the obverse the head of Demeter (or Persephone) adorned with necklace, earrings, &c., and on the reverse the figure of a horse and a palm-tree. The Carthaginians adopted from Sicily the worship of patie and Per: sepbone, and the horse possibly refers to Libya, which was famous for its horses, or perhaps to the horse’s head fabled to have been dug up at the foundation of the city. Carthage was ultimately destroyed by the Romans 146 B. C., and the coin was probably issued about the third century before the present era. There is a very fine didrachm of Vetta in Lucania bearing on the obverse a beautifully executed head of Apollo, and on the reverse a lion in the act of leaping upon a stag, which it is rending to pieces. The muscles are admirably portrayed, and the action is depicted entirely with- out stiffness, but with the ease and grace which arises from the conscious- ness of power and strength. Velia was a large and prosperous city founded by the Greeks, and. its coinage exhibits the undoubted confirmation of history. Greek culture alone could have produced such fine specimens of Art It is now known as Castela mar delia Brucca, and lies between Policastro and the Gulf of Sa- lerno. It was mentioned by both Strabo and Pliny, and was the seat of the Eleatic sect of Philosophers, who received their appellation from the city ; their leaders were Zenophanes, Parmenides, Zeno and Melissus, The speculations of this school rose to a higher region of pure thought than those of the Lonic or Pythagoric schools, and among the Eleatics for the first time comes distinctly into play the dialectical movement in human thought. Corinth, in Achaia, is represented by a fine didrachm, bearing on the obverse helmeted head of Venus; and on the reverse, Pegasus, with the letter — (Koph), the ancient or Phanician form of K. ‘‘A city,’ says Strabo, ‘large, rich and prosperous ; replete with men fit for the handling of every sort of affair, civil, artistic and political.’? Founded by Bellero- phon, the type of the reverse refers to his subjugation of the steed Pegasus. The coinage of this city exhibits a high degree of artistic culture, a thorough proof, were any wanting, of the ict as history records of 1879, |), 339 [Phillips. its refinement and luxury. From the earliest days of its coinage, when the reverse was simply the rude punch mark, to the last periods when its money was issued, the pieces struck and engraved for this city are worthy of a high rank and possess a great merit. The very first coins issued by Corinth bear on the obverse Pegasus, with the archaic letter 2 (Koph), which disappeared from the later Greek alphabet. Reverse, the so called key pattern punch mark. The execu- tion of the flying horse is very bold. This city was colonized at a very early period by the Pheenicians, and was destroyed by the Romans under L. Memmius, B.C. 146. The present piece was issued about 480 B. C. It is interesting to compare the coinage of this city with that of Sybaris, both of infamous renown for the pursuit of pleasure. There are also specimens of what is known as the incused coinage of Magna Grecia. These pieces were issued by the Grecian colonies settled in lower Italy, and are probably the most remarkable specimens of the monetary art which have ever been produced. Instead of being thick and hemispherically raised towards the center, they are thin and flat, and bear on the reverse in intaglio the same subject which the obverse bears in alto- relievo. This coinage had been abandoned before the sixth century B. C,, and all these coins are of very great antiquity, yet their workmanship is fine and artistic, even when the design is of the simplest. What the object for the adoption of so peculiar a form could have been, has been the sub- ject of numerous conjectures, but as yet none seem satisfactorily to explain this abnormal condition of coinage. The specimens which the Numismatic and Antiquarian Society have placed on exhibition are SyBaris and MeTaPpoNTuM. The coinage of Metapontum bears on the obverse an ear of corn, on the reverse the same incused. This city was founded about 700 B. C., by a colony from Northern Greece, and its prosperity became exceedingly great, owing to the fertility of its soil, which was especially rich in wheat. The Metapontines sent annually to the temple at Delphi a golden sheaf of wheat and considered Ceres as their tutelary goddess, impressing her emblem, the ear of corn, upon their coinage. Sybaris presents, on the obverse, a bull standing and looking backwards, and the same type incused on the reverse, with the inscription Y'/, being written from right to left in the most ancient manner and with the sigma of an archaic type, resembling a mu. The history of Sybaris and its suc- cessor city, Thurium, is well told by Dr. Cardwell. “The people of Sybaris, on the bay of Tarentum were conquered and their city destroyed by the Crotoniats about the year 500 B.C. Fifty eight years afterward the Sybarites endeavored to rebuild their city, but were again driven away six years later by their old enemy. The aid of Athens and the Peloponnese was invoked, which in 444 B. C. laid the foundations of Thurium, near the site of the ancient Sybaris, taking the name from a fountain in its neighborhood. Soon the foreign element prevailed over the 2 Phitlips] 540 [Oet. 8, Sybarites and put them to the sword. * * * What then is its numis- matic history’? We have several coins of Sybaris, bearing in the form of their brief inscriptions and workmanship the strongest evidence of high antiquity, so that we may fairly assign them toa period fully five cen- turies before the Christian era. The constant device on these coins was Bos stans et respiciens, showing that it was the acknowledged cognizance of Sybaris. The next coins belonging to the place are more recent, as we may judge from the form of their letters and their highly finished style of workmanship, and taken on the analogy of coins in general, they might be assigned to a period not much anterior to the time of Philip and Alexan- der. But we find from these that the devices of the place have undergone an important change. The ancient cognizance of Sybaris is now of sec- ondary consequence and has given way on one face of the coin to the Caput Puliadis, the well-known badge of Athens. The inscription, too, is, in one instance, the abbreviated word Sybaris, in another a similar abbreviation of the newly contracted name, Thurium. So then, these coins strictly mark the period when the natives and foreigners were living together in compact, mutually endeavoring to cenciliate each other, each party pre- serving tokens of its hereditary attachments. ‘‘The next set of coins is distinguished by a minuteness of ornament which marks them decidedly as the most recent of the three, and these coins, in perfect accordance with the historical narration, bear no memo- rials of the ancient Sybaris. The inscription in every instance is of Thur- ium, the Caput Palladis is prominent, and the ancient cognizance of the Bull is no longer stans et respiciens but irruens et cornupeta. Doubtless there was found in the meaning of the word @ovp tov, a reason for the differ- ence they adopted ‘a bull running and butting.’ ‘* When, later in the history of the town, Athens and other powers of Greece began to claim it as a dependency, they boldly refused to acknowl- edge any other founder or patron than the deity of Delphi. And what say the coins? Some of them, which seem to have been minted when the republic was yet scarcely free from its ancient habits, retain the badge of Athens, but some also bear the emblems of Ceres, the tokens of agricul- tural prosperity, and others are impressed with the head and insignia of Apollo.” The device of the bull occurs upon the reverse of a denarius of Augustus (of which a specimen is in the present collection), and also those of the gens Tuorta, ‘ The ‘ Bos irruens,’’’ says Smyth (Northumberland family coins, p. 288), ‘ora fleree bull charging, is no doubt a punning allusion to the moneyer’s cognomen, Mosprog, impetuous, and not an agrarian em. blem. Some antiquaries, however, insist that it alludes to an agrarian law introduced by the tribune Sp. Thorius Balbus, which lex concerning the Roman public lands was engraved upon the back part of the same tablet which contained the Lex Servilia de Repetundis; this tablet was broken * Cardwell Lecture, ITI, p, 66 et seq. Diodorus Siculus, Ixi., 2 90, &e,; 1xil,, 2 li and %, 1879.) 341 {Phillips. at some unknown time, but seven of its fragments have been preserved and published by Fulvius Ursinus about A. D 1577.” ‘«The symbol of the bull plays an important part in many mythoses. This animal was intended to represent power of body and unwearied mas- culine energy, two great attributes especially coveted by ancient kings and great men. The bull seemed to be, in a manner, sacred to Venus, whilst the lion was emblematic of the male creator. The bull and the lion, among the Assyrians, occupied much the same place as the lion and unicorn do in modern heraldry. Lajard (Culte de Venus) has summed up the mat- ter in the following words : ‘Les deux principaux attributes characteristiques de Vénus furent en orient comme en occident Je taureau et le lion, l’un symbole du principe de la chaleur et du pouvoir generateur actif, l'autre, symbole du principe humide et du pouvoir generatif passif ; et tous les deux signes du Zodiaque, mais avee cette difference que le taureau etait le premier signe de l’equinox vernal et la domicile de la lune 4 l’epoque de sa plus grande exaltation, et que le lion placé au solstice d’été etait le domicile du soleil pendant la canicule. Ces deux animaux furent donc aussi les hierogly phes ideograph- ique de ’hermaphroditisme de Venus, divinité a laquelle les anciennes traditions assignent, comme a Mithra, une place entre les equinoxes et les solstices et donnent pour monture le taureau.’’ In another passage he writes thus: ‘‘Premier @tre sorti des mains d’un dieu créateur du monde, le taureau, symbole de vie, est appelée d’un nom qui signifie & la fois vie et taureaw. Par une conséquence immédiate d’une doctrine qui enseignait que les premiers @tres vivants étaient né dans |’eau, il est, en méme temps, le symbole de principe humide, du pouvoir passif de la génération ou du sexe feminine.’’ (Inman’s Ancient Faiths, Vol. 1, p. 376, et seq.) The symbol of the bull also is frequently taken to represent water, or the watery principle in which life takes its beginning* and hence, ne doubt, the reverence paid to rivers, as instanced, even at the present day, in India, by the burial of the Hindoo dead in the holy waters of that region. It may there- fore be considered as a representative of the 47'£/X or the great humid principle of nature. Not a trace now remains of Sybaris, this great city which once ruled over twenty-five of its neighboring towns, and sent into the war that resulted in its downfall three hundred thousand fighting men. Nothing is known of its mansions and its palaces, not one stone is left to show the spot where ‘*men slept upon beds of roses and those renowned banquets took place to which women were bidden a year in advance that they might have the whole interval for rendering their beauty more irresistible.’’ Recent ex- plorations have resulted in the finding of a sarcophagus full of carbonized matter, showing that the corpse had been cremated prior to interment. Amidst the remains of the funeral pyre, near the head of the corpse, were some golden fragments, the ornamentation of a box, and afterwards the bronze naiis with which it had been fastened were found. Near the breast *cef Inman, p. 377, nole. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOc. xviiI. 104. 2R. PRINTED DEC. 12, 1879. Phillips. | 342 é; fOat.'3, of the deceased were two small silver plates, of the size of large: buttons, which bore in relief two beautiful female heads. Near the remains of the skull was discovered a small plate of thin gold folded together, on which were visible some traces of Greek writing, and which, on being opened, dis- closed within its folds another similar tablet likewise bearing an inscription. The learned professor to whom this find was given to decipher, believes that the larger plate contains mystic matter written by one familiar with the Eleusinian mysteries ; the small plate contains an inscription in capital letters in the Dorie dialect, in which a hierophant addresses the dead, con- gratulating him that after having suffered the worst of evils he had from a miserable mortal become a god, having pursued the right path which leads to the fields reserved for the just in the bowers of Persephone. There is a fine Tetradrachm of the famous city of Tyre (in Pheenicia), bearing on the obverse a laureated head of Heracles, on the reverse an eagle on rudder behind a palm branch, to left date H/ (year 18), inscription, TYPOY IEPA KAI ASYAOY, Tyre was one of the grandest cities of all antiquity, and its commerce and riches are frequently spoken of in the classical writers. From Tyre, as from modern London, ships went to visit all parts of the globe to which they could reach ; and to Tyre came merchandise from all parts of the con- tinents of Europeand Asia. According to Herodotus it was founded about 2755 B. C., and received its independence about 126 B. C. This coin was therefore issued about 108 B. C. The execution of this coin is especially noteworthy. The massive boldness of the head of Melkarth (the Tyrian ‘Hercules) exhibits a brutal and repelling countenance; the eagle (sacred to this god) on the reverse is in an attitude of life-likeness almost unsurpass- able. The rudder exhibits the maritime character of the city and the palm was the emblem of Tyre and Sidon. Phoenicia is fabled to have taken its name from this tree, which in Greek was known as ®0/N/E. The palm was ‘likewise the well known emblem of victory. As found upon coins it is, according to Spanheim, of three varieties, viz : ist. That which is tall, thick-branched and leaved, but bears no fruit. 2d. Smaller, less dense and bears fruit. 3d, The small sterile dwarf palm. The palm tree of Judea, which bears fruit, is found upon the cotnage of that country. Asa branch the palm is found upon the coins of Arabia ; as a tree, upon those of Tyre, Damascus, Alexandria and the Pheenician Colonies of Sicily, Africa and Spain. The palm tree was one of the ornaments sculptured in Solomon’s Tem- ple, and among modern writers (¢. g., Inman's Ancient Faiths) has been considered to be a Phallic emblem equivalent to Asshur, ‘On a coin of Epbesus a palm tree is represented as springing up by the side of a stag cut asunder, meaning that the ‘Great God (Kronos or Ilos) being cut off, the palm tree repairs all.’’’* * Inman, Vol. 1, p, 10), 1879.] 343 { Phillips. The epithets, 7EPAY (Holy) and ASY AOS (inviolable sanctuary) were adopted by many other cities. After a very long period of life, with check- ered prosperity, Tyre was finally destroyed by the Saracens, A. D. 1291, after having withstood many sieges, including one by Alexander the Great. In addition to these already described in my previous paper there are a number of so called family coins, among which are well pre- served specimens of the Cornelia, Fulvia, Hostilia, Maiania, Opeimia, Pomponia, Scribonia, Vibia, and other gentes, presenting interest- ing types. The gens Cornelia was a most noble family, both Pa- trician and Plebeian, and has left a number of devices upon the denarii which are attributed to it. The gens Fulvia although ‘‘con- fessedly one of the most conspicuous of the Roman gentes, is only known by one denarius, except some colonial ones figured by Morell’’ (Smyth Family Coins, p, 85). It bears on the obverse the head of Pallas Nike- phora with alated helmet and the word ROMA; on the reverse, ‘‘ Victoria alata holds out a chaplet in a biga galoping to the right. Under the horse is CN FOUL, and in the exergum M GAL Q MET. Although we do not hear of the Fulvii till L. Fulvius became consul in B. C. 822, it is known that even then they were of long standing in Tusculum. * * Of the ladies of this gens two played a very conspicuous part; the first, a woman of rank, divulged the Catalinian conspiracy, the second married Mark Antony for her third husband, breathing nothing but war and domina- tion. This is the fury who pierced the dead Cicero’s tongue with a bodkin, uttering all sorts of opprobrious epithets all the while.’’ (Smyth, loc, cit.) A denarius of the gens Matanza presents on the obverse ‘“‘a winged and galeated head of Roma with the mark x ; on the reverse, a winged Vic- tory in a rapid viga holding the reins firmly with her left hand, while her right is whipping the horses, which are unusually free from harness. Below is the inscription C MAIANIA; exergue Roma. History makes no mention of this gens and its rank is unknown.”’ (Smyth, p. 127.) The gens OpEimia presents ‘‘the galeated head of Pallas, bearing stern and manly features, wearing an earring with a long pendant and a necklace ; in front is the denarial stamp x, and at the back isa chaplet. On the reverse, L. OPpEIMI; exergue Roma. Victoria alata in a galloping quadriga holds the reins with her left hand and a laurel crown in her right. This was probably struck by L. Opeimius, the aristocratic praetor who suppressed the revolt of Tregelle, B. C. 125. This is the man who being consul four years later, hunted C. Gracchus, with personal animosity, to his destruction ; and being himself condemned for receiving Jugurtha’s bribes, died, hated and insulted, a poverty stricken exile at Dyrrachium. * * * The Opeimii are first brought on the stage of history at the time of the Samnite wars, yet the components of the gens are but little known.’’ (Smyth, 157.) The denarii of the gens Pomponia occur frequently and are of many devices. Upon someare seen the figures of the Muses, Clio, Euterpe, Thalia, Melpomene, Terpsichore, Erato, Polyhymnia, Urania, and Calliope, with Phillips.] 344 [Oct. 3, the symbols respectively indicative of their supposed avocations. Upon one denarius is found the representation of Hercules Musagete playing upon alyre. ‘‘The temple of Hercules Musarum was built in the Flaminian circus by the consul Fulvius, who having, when imperator in ‘Greece, recognized Hercules as Musagetes, consecrated to his tutelar protection the nine statues of the Muses, which he had brought over from Aetolia, B.C. 189. The Pomponia, though a plebeian gens, were very proud, and, towards the end of the Republic, followed the example of the other Roman gentes by claiming high antiquity, pretending descent from Pompo, one of the sons of Numa.”’ (Smyth, p. 184, et seq.) The gens Vibia likewise affords many varieties of obverses and reverses. Among the former we find the laureated head of Apollo, the head of Pallas, an ivy crowned head of Bacchus, a scenic mask of Pan, a laureated female head supposed to represent the Goddess Libertas, laureated head of Hercules, bearded head of Jove; on the reverses are galeated figures in quadriga, Ceres crowned with wheat marching across a field, Jupiter Axuris, Roma seated on a pile of bucklers, holding in her right hand a spear, in her left the parazonium, pressing with her left foot on a globe, and in the act of being crowned by a flying Victory, two clasped right hands sustaining a winged caduceus (relating to D. Brutus, who being besieged by Mark Antony at Mutina, B.C. 45, was liberated by the consuls Hirtius and Pansa), a panther with his fore feet raised on a decorated cylindrical altar on which are the Bacchie attributes, a bearded mask and a long thyrsus adorned with ribbons, Victoria alata placing a garland upon a trophy composed of spoils, and Ceres, crowned with corn, holding a lighted torch, seated in a car drawn by two dragens.’’ These dragons are portentous creations of the ancient imagination in all countries. The serpent worship was all but universal. It is alluded to in the earlier portions of the Bible, and it is known to have prevailed among the Chal- dees, the Persians and the Egyptians as emblematic of the Sun and Time and Eternity. From the Orientals it descended to the Greeks, and from them to the Romans, among whom it became a type of Victory, Prosperity and Health.’’ (Smyth, p. 255, etseq.) Ceresin her car, drawn by dragons, likewise occurs upon the coins of the gens Voltei. There is a handsomely executed Paduan fabrication of a first brass of the Emperor Otho, bearing his head on the obverse, and on the reverse the Emperor standing with his right hand extended over an altar clasping the hands of three soldiers who bear military ensigns ; inscription Securt- TAs P. BR. 8. Cc. A Roman first brass of the Emperor Otho is something that has always been a desideratum; none are known to exist or to have ever existed. Bronzes from the Egyptian Mint are to be met with and these alone must replace the Roman issue in collections unless the unex- pected, which is always occurring, should some day bring to light a hoard of these coins. The usual explanation given for the absence of the first bronzes of this Emperor is based upon the power retained by the Senate of striking copper, while their rulers had usurped the privilege of coining gold 1879,] 345 {[Greene, and silver.. The denarii of Otho are of not infrequent occurrence, not- withstanding the extremely short duration of his reign. We cannot more appropriately conclude this sketch than with the words of the Spanish writer, Gusséme : “No pretendo que la aficion a las medallas sea la imica ; pero si que no 8¢ olvide, que no se abandone, antes si que se cultive. LEllaes de tal calidad, que siempre recrea, que ofrece a cado paso nuevas satisfacciones, y con una solidez, que no se halla con tanta freqiencia en los demas estudios. * * * La Erudicion debe ser en todos tiempos, y en todas Naciones upetecida y solicitada ; y seguramente no hay modo para adqutrirla con mayor exten- sion que el uso de los medullas, el estudio para su perfecto conocimiento, y el manejo de los libros que tratan de ellas. Quien las cultiva va adquiriendo de grado en grado los mas utiles conocimientos, y una vasta extension en el campo de las bellas lettras. ; “Cada medalla es un diploma o instrumento autentico ; que comprueba la verdad dela Historia ; y no habra en el mundo archivo de mas seguros y antiguos documentos. * * * * Hil estudio de la antigiiedad es cosa que no debemos jamas olvidar y abandonar segun Claudiuno ; Nec desinat unquam Tecum Graia loqui, teeum Romana vetustas.”’ On the Formation of Dibenzyl by the Action of Ethylene Chloride on Benzol in the Presence of Aluminium Chloride. By William H. Greene. (Read at the Meeting of the American Philosophical Society, October 17, 1879.) By a series of the most remarkable chemical investigations of late years, MM. Friedel and Crafts have shown that the radicles of the saturated hy- drocarbons can be grafted upon the benzol nucleus by the action of alu- minium chloride upon a mixture of benzol and the monatomic chlorides, bro- mides, etc. Thus, on passing methyl chloride into benzel in which alu- minium chloride is suspended, all of the methyl derivatives of benzol, from toluol to hexamethyl benzol, may be formed, according to the proportions of benzol and methyl chloride which are brought into contact. In the same manner, the ethyl, propy], and other derivatives of benzol may be ob- tained abundantly. In these reactions, liydrochloric acid is disengaged, and the explanation proposed by Friedel and Crafts supposes the reaction to take place in two phases: In the first, a compound of benzol and aluminium chloride is formed, with elimination of hydrochloric acid. CeH® + ACIS = C*H®. APC + HCl In the second, the aluminium-benzol compound reacts upon the mona- Greene.] 346 (Oct. 17, tomic chloride present, the organic radicle entering the benzol nucleus, and aluminium chloride being reformed. CH’. APC + CH'C] = C*HS. CH’ + APCIS A small quantity of aluminium chloride serves for the preparation of an indefinite quantity of the new hydrocarbon. By the action of aluminium chloride on the monatomic chlorides alone, hydrochloric acid is also eliminated, and the radicle is condensed. Hence, the reaction which would take place between benzol and a polyatomic chloride under the same-circumstances cannot be entirely foreseen. It seems possible that in the case of ethylene chloride, for example, both atoms of chlorine might be replaced by phenyl groups, but it would seem more probable that, after the first substitution, one molecule of hydrochlo- ric acid would be removed from the ethylene chloride, and that a more condensed hydrocarbon, styrol, would be formed. However, the first re- action is that which actually occurs. When aluminium chloride is introduced into a mixture of benzol and ethylene chloride, the reaction begins in the cold, and becomes energetic on the application of heat. Hydrochloric acid is disengaged abundantly ; when the reaction has ceased, the mixture is thrown into water to separate the aluminium chloride, and the oily liquor which separates is heated with alcoholic potassium hydrate, in order to decompose any remaining ethylene chloride. After washing and drying the product, it yields, on fractional distilla- tion, very nearly the theoretical quantity of dibenzyl, after which a thick oily mixture remains, which does not completely distill at 200° in a vacuum. This mixture consists of condensation products, and yields no satisfactory results, as it cannot well be fractionated, and does not solidify in a freezing mixture, Pure dibenzyl melts at 52.5-538°, and boils at 279°, under a pressure of 767 millimetres, the thermometer being entirely immersed in the vapor. This boiling point is lower than that given by Cannizarro and Rossi (284°), and higher than that indicated by Fittig (272°). On Dioxyethyl-methylene, and the Preparation of Methylene chloride. By Wm. H, Greene, M.D. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, November 21, 1879.) With the exception of the diethyl ether of methylene glycol, all of the oxyethy] substitution compounds of methane have already been described, Orthoformic ether, CH(OC*H®)', was suudied by Kay and Williamson, and is generally known as Kay’s ether; orthocarbonic ether, O(OC*H®)‘, was discovered and described by H. Bassett: methyl-ethyl oxide has long been known, By a reaction similar to that by which these ethers are formed, I have 1879.| 347 (Greene. isolated dioxyethyl-methylene, the reaction between sodium ethylate and methylene chloride taking place as indicated by theory. The chief difficulty lies in the preparation of pure methylene chloride ; the process described by Perkin, and depending upon the reduction of chloroform by zinc and ammonia, yields only small quantities of methy- lene chloride, and the direct chlorination of methylchloride yields equally unsatisfactory results. The method which, after numerous experiments, I have found to answer best, consists in the reduction of an alcoholic so- lution of chloroform by zinc and hydrochloric acid. The zine and chloroform mixed with several times its volume of alcohol are placed in a flask connected with a suitable condensing apparatus, and hydrochloric acid is added in small portions. The reaction develops con- siderable heat, and methylene chloride and chloroform distill over ; when the reaction has somewhat subsided, and no more liquid distills, more hydrochloric acid is added, and a moderate heat is"applied, if necessarv. In any case, the mixture is heated towards the close of the operation, until alcohol begins to distill in quantity.” The operation is then arrested, and the product in the receiver is washed, dried and rectified, that portion which passes below about 53° being retained. The residue is returned to the flask and again submitted to the action of the zinc and hydrochloric acid. By several careful rectifications of the product passing below 53°, pure methylene chloride, boiling at 40-41°, is obtained. By several operations in this manner the yield of methylene chloride may be brought up to about twenty per cent. of the chloroform employed. Little or no advantage is gained by attempting to fractionate the product as it distills from the flask, so that the chloroform may flow back into the reducing mixture, for such distillation necessarily takes place in a stream of hydrogen which carries with it about as much chloroform as methylene chloride. DIOxYETHYL-METHYLENE.—This compound was prepared by gradually introducing one molecule of sodium into a mixture of one molecule of methylene chloride and about four times the theoretical quantity of absolute alcohol, contained in a flask connected with a reflux condenser, After all of the sodium has been introduced, the mixture is heated on a water-bath for about an hour, and is then distilled. The distillate is fractionated, and the portion which passes below 78? contains all of the diethyl ether. It is agitated with a tolerably concentrated solution of calcium chloride, and the light ethereal layer is separated, dried over calcium chloride and carefully rectified, until a liquid is obtained which boils at 86-89°. Dioxyethyl-methylene so obtained is an ethereal liquid, having a pene- trating, pleasant odor, somewhat recalling thatof mint. Its specific gravity at 0° is 0.851, and it boils at 89°, under a pressure of 769 millimetres. It is slightly soluble in water, from which it may be separated by the addition of caleium chloride ; it mixes in all proportions with ether and alcohol, and it cannot readily be separated from its alcoholic solution if much alcohol be present ; in such a case, fractional distillation and treatment of the portion which passes below 78° with solution of calcium chloride, effect the separation. Haupt.) 348 {Nov. 2l, On the Codrdinution of the Vurious Methods of Expressing Thought as Applied to the System of Public School Instruction. By Lewis M. Haupt, C. #., Prof. of Civil Engineering, University of Pennsylvania. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, November 21, 1879.) Language, in its most general signification, is any medium by which thoughts or ideas may be conveyed from one person to another, and the avenues through which it affects the human intelligence are the senses. In-transmitting an idea, the senses may be called into action cither singly or in combination. Thus speaking involves the sense of hearing, for a person born deaf must of necessity be dumb also. We may therefore re- gard the vocal organs and the ear as complementary functions for the trans- mission and reception of audible intelligence. These may be supplemented or entirely supplanted in their absence by the hand and eye, also com)le- mentary. In both of these cases the vocal organs and hand are the media of, while the ear and eye are the guides to, the proper form of expression. From this it follows that there may be two distinct forms of language, namely, Oral, or that proceeding from the mouth, as in speaking, and Graphical, or that produced by the hand, as in writing, drawing, and printing. Oral language appeals to the ear of the recipient, Graphical, to the eye, for the correct interpretation of the idea intended to be expressed. If the same meaning be given to a combination of words, by the recipient, as was intended by the originator of an idea, then the result will be an identity of thought and a mutual understanding resulting in harmony. But as words have many meanings, the same words may produce very different impressions upon different minds even under similar circumstances, hence, to avoid misunderstanding, with its attendant confusion or discord, it is desirable to employ, if possible, a less ambiguous form of language. A single instance will serve to illustrate this proposition, Let the name of a substance, as iron, be mentioned. An audience com- posed of physicists, chemists, engineers, artisans, artists and literati imme- diately begin to think of some of its characteristic properties. While the man of letters may regard it as a rigid, incombustible sub- stance, the chemist considers it flexible and burns it with great brilliancy; while the prisoner may look upon it as an obstruction, the electrician makes it a channel of communication. The agriculturalist may use it as an im- plement of peace, whilst the soldier will make it an instrument of war. With the civil or mechanical engineer it is an important material of con- struction, whilst with the military engineer it is an engine of destruction. “The meaning of such a word is like the rainbow: everybody sees a different one, yet all maintain it to be the same,’”’ It is thus with many words in our vocabulary, and hence arise sectarian - isms, difficulties, violations of contracts and tedious litigation to determine the sense of some particular form of expression. It is not necessary to dilate further upon the ambiguities of language, nor of the many serious and sometimes comical mistakes resulting from 1879. | 549 {Haupt. them, but a few suggestions may not be out of place as to the necessity for more extended instruction in that branch of it which relates to the expres- sion of ideas by graphical representations and especially by drawings. It is a matter of primary importance to the progress of civilization that every avenue for the interchange of thought should be unobstructed, that there may be an unification of purpose and action ; and secondarily, that the media used to convey such thought should be unambiguous and of general application. Now, since all ideas must have for their subject matter things physical or metaphysical, it follows that there may be a different form of language used in giving expression to each. As most physical concep- tions treat of tangible objects, having form, and as such form or line of apparent contour is the first characteristic observed by the eye, and is more or less familiar to all persons living within the habitat or range of the object, it is natural that this form, more or less conventionalized or symbolized, should have been used to represent the object in an unmis- takable language. In developing the intellectual faculties of mankind,. beginning with the child, there is first the inception of an idea, derived from some form and an associated sound, expressing its name ; this is followed by the repetition of the sound by the child, giving rise to vocal language which is developed in later years in the public school system of instruction by spelling and reading. Thus the first, or oral, division of language is cultivated, while the second, and more extensive in its range and application, the graphical, does not receive the attention which its importance deserves. It is true that writing has long held an important place in our popular educational systems, and of late years drawing has also been introduced systematically, but as yet only so far as to cultivate the eye and hand in sketching outlines and shading, that is, in making pictures and elementary designs either for decorations or for the practice which such operations afford in estimating magnitude, distance and direction. That important division of drawing which is the basis of the correct interpretation of all forms and magnitudes and is of the greatest practical importance to all artisans and many artists and professional men, is as yet entirely ignored, I refer to a knowledge of elementary projections, without which a work- ing drawing can neither be made nor understood, and the artisan destitute of it is obliged to acquire the practical knowledge for the successful applica- tion of his handicraft by long years of apprenticeship while he learns the uses of the various templates that may be placed in his hands by a master. A moment’s consideration will convince an observer that there are two methods of representing objects, viz.: 1st, as they appear to exist, consti- tuting perspective ; and 2d, as they do actually exist, as in projections, in which, relative position, form and magnitude are given. The perspective view is of little practical importance to the workman, as he is unable to obtain from it the data necessary to reproduce the object. No two persons in an audience can see the same object from the same PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xvill. 104. 2s. PRINTED DEC. 12, 1879. Haupt.) 350 [Nov. 21, point of view, and hence unless it be symmetrical with reference to a point in space, as a sphere, the line of apparent contour will be different to each. The magnitude will also appear larger or smaller according to the distance of the observer from the object. Thus, ifa circular disk be held up before an assembly it will appear circular only to that person at the end of its axis, while to those in the plane of the disk it will appear to be a straight line, and to all others the ellipses of which the line and circle are the limits, thus verifying the aphorism of the poet Longfellow, when he says, * And things are not what they seem.” With projections, however, the case is different, as, if understood at all, they can only convey one impression to the reader. But it must be con- fessed that they are no more intelligible without a knowledge of the prin- ciples upon which they were constructed than is a printed work to one ignorant of letters. The principles of projections are, however, as simple as has of element- ary geometry, upon which they are based, and can be readily compre- hended by the pupils in our public schools. And a knowledge of these principles would enable many of them to work much more intelligently in the various trades in which they may thercafter become apprentices. The application which may be made of such information is very ex- tended. As a disciplinary study it is one of the first order, developing the conceptive faculties and enabling one to grasp an idea readily. It has its application in nearly all manufactured articles and in all constructions and designs, in wood, iron, stone, clay, or other materials. It is used con- stantly by the engineer, architect, builder, pattern-maker, iron or sheet metal-worker, stair-builder, stone-cutter, designer, and a host of others. It is the basis of all perspective drawings which are generally made by rule and without reason, and is essential to a correct interpretation of all sug- gestions relating to constructions of any kind. It is used to explain and reinforce verbal language, and should be so used whenever possible. One of the most important applications of graphical language must not be overlooked. To the statistician as well as merchant it is valuable as furnishing at a glance information which if expressed in a mass of figures would be unintelligible. It cannot be surpassed as a method of exhibiting rapidly the distribution of population, of products, of poverty or wealth, of crime or morality, of vital, or in fact any statistics which may be expressed numerically. To the physicist it is also particularly useful in investiga- tions into the properties of molecular or mass physics, and enables him to discover almost immediately the laws governing the motions of niatter. Fluctuations of prices, in the market values of daily commodities, may be more intelligently expressed by this means than any other and can be compared at a glance, In short, the number of intelligent and eminently practical applications that may be made of projections is almost limitless, Its introduction would supplant a certain amount of mnemonical by rational and manual development, and would thus be a relief to a system already overtaxed with memorizing. 1879.1 351 Another means of disseminating thought, as well as of developing the mental and manual faculties simultaneously, would be the introduction of type-setting in the public school as a weekly exercise, but as it is not the purpose of this article to discuss here the means and methods of industrial education, any further remarks on this head will be out of order. It is merely intended to call attention to the fact that there is need of a more complete development of all the faculties used to convey or receive impressions and to codrdinate them into a closer and more efficient system of instruction as a basis for the more intelligent expression of thought. Stated Meeting, June 20, 1879. Present, 5 members. Vice-President, Mr. Frauey, in the Chair. A photograph of Mr. J. F. Mansfield, was received for in- sertion in the album. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Natural History Societies at Wiirttemberg, April 1 (101, 102); Frei- burg, Feb. 2 (101); the Societies at Harlem, Aug., 1877 (97, 98, 99); Lyons, Aug. 1,1878 (I to XV); Edinburgh, Oct. 31, 1878 (100, Cat. IIT); the Royal Academy, at Amsterdam, Oct. 22,1877 (100, Cat. IIT); New Hampshire Historical Society, June 16 (103); the Essex Institute (103); the U.S. Military Academy, at West Point (103); the New York Historical Society (103); the American Ethnological Society (103), and Astor Library (103); the Numismatic and Antiquarian So- ciety (103), and Historical Society at Philadelphia (103); the Wisconsin Historical Society (103); and various mem- bers (103). Letters of envoy were received from the Royal Academy, at Amsterdam, Feb. 7,1879; Imperial Academy, at Vienna; Royal Academy, at Munich, April 10, 1879; Holland So- ciety, Harlem, Dec., 1877; Government Surveyors, Victoria, Feb. 12; Greenwich Observatory, June 20; Meteorological Office ; and Mrs. Sarah S. Pickering, May 19, 1879. Donations for the Library were received from the Acade- mies at Amsterdam, Bruxelles, Berlin, Vienna, Rome, and 352 (June 20. Philadelphia; the Societies at Copenhagen, Harlem, Gdt- tingen, Gorlitz, Freiburg, Stuttgard, Liége, Lyons, Bor- deaux and Salem; the Observatories at St. Petersburg, Munich, Paris, Greenwich and Cape Town; the University at Christiania; the Statistical Commission of Belgium; the Anthropological Society and Geological Institute at Vienna; the German Geological Society and Botanical Association, at Berlin; the Zoological Garden, at Frankfurt; the Geo- graphical, Anthropological and Antiquarian Societies, Eth- nographical Institution and Museum of Natural History, at Paris; the Physical, Linnean and Geographical Societies, at Bordeaux; the British Association; the Astronomical, Me- | teorological, Geographical, Geological and Zoological Socie- ties, Victoria Institute and London Nature; Mr. L. C. Miall, of Leeds; T. P. James, of Cambridge, Massachusetts; Mrs. Pickering, of Boston; the Cambridge Library and Museum of Comparative Zoology; Prof. J. D. Whitney, Prof. W. A. Norton and Silliman’s Journal, of New Haven; the Brooklyn Entomological Society; the American Chemical Society and Mr. F. R. Rathbun, of New York; the Franklin Institute, Zoological Society, Medical News, American Journal of Pharmacy and International Committee of Philadelphia; the American Journal of Mathematics, at Baltimore; U. 8. Smithsonian Institution and Wm. B. Taylor, of Washing- ton; the Wisconsin Natural History Society; the Geo- graphical Society and National Museum in Mexico. A medal of Joseph Henry, was received from the en- gravers of the Mint, Messrs. Wm. and Chas. E. Barber, for which, on motion, the thanks of the Society were presented to the donors. Mr. Ilenry Phillips, Jr., offeréd for the acceptance of the Society, under certain conditions, a copy of Sabin’s Biblio- theca Americana, as far as published, which, on motion, was accepted for the Library. No. 108 of the Proceedings, just issued, was laid upon the table for examination. A simple and closely approximate diagrammatic solution 1879] 353 of the problem of squaring the circle was communicated by Prof. P. E. Chase. (See page 281.) A communication entitled, “Eleventh Contribution to the Herpetology of South America,” was received from Prof. E. D. Cope. (See page 261.) The Committee on a Eulogy on Dr. G. B. Wood reported a recommendation that Dr. Henry Hartshorne be appointed in the place of Dr. Alfred Stillé, to prepare an obituary no- tice of the deceased, which was adopted. Pending nominations 878 to 884 were read, and the meet- ing was adjourned. Stated Meeting, July 18, 1879. Present, 5 members. Vice-President, Mr. Fratey, in the Chair. A photograph of Prof. John LeConte, and a vignette of Gen. F. E. Spinner, were received for insertion in the album. Letters acknowledging the receipt of Proc. No. 102, were received from the Royal Danish Society, June 17; and of Proc. No. 103 from Prof. Steenstrup; Mr. A. Agassiz; the New Jersey Historical Society; Prof. Fred. Prime; the Maryland Historical Society; the Engineers’ Club; the U.S. Naval Observatory; Mr. Asaph Hall; Prof. Kirkwood; the Davenport Academy; the Georgia Historical Society and Prof. John LeConte. Letters of envoy were received from the Batavian Obser- vatory, May 7; Dr. H. Scheffler, of Braunschweig, April 20; the Bureau des Longitudes per U. 8. State Department; and the Engineers’ Club of Philadelphia. On motion, the Librarian was authorized to supply a copy of Proceedings No. 97 to the Cherbourg Natural His- tory Society. On motion, the Journal of Medical Sciences was ordered to be placed upon the list of correspondents to receive the Proceedings. 34 (uly as, An offer from the State Librarian of Michigan to ex- change was accepted. Donations for the Library were received from the Acade- mies at St. Petersburg, Berlin, Brussels, Rome and Minne- apolis; from the Geographical Societies of Russia, Paris and Bordeaux; the Observatories at Prag and Adelaide; from the Bureau des Longitudes; London Astronomical Society ; and the Corporation.of the City of London; Essex Institute ; Boston Society of Natural History; Brooklyn Entomologi- cal Society; American Chemical Society and the New York Mercantile Library Association; Franklin Institute, Ameri- can Pharmaceutical Association, Union League and Engi- neers’ Club of Philadelphia; Smithsonian Institution; and Argentine Scientific Society; Yale College; Wabash Col- lege; U.S. Engineers’ Department; Mexican Agricultural Bureau; Melbourne Mining Bureau; Young Men’s Associa- tion at Buffalo; Dr. Scheffler, of Braunschweig; Canadian Naturalist; Silliman’s Journal; New York Entomological Society, and Mercantile Library; Journal of Pharmacy, Journal of the Medical Sciences, Pennyslvania Magazine of llistory, &c., Prof. Frazer, Dr. Genth, Mr. Benson, Prof. Jacques, and Dr. Gross. A communication was received, entitled, “On Pyrophyl- lite” from Schuylkill Co., Pa., by Dr. F. A. Genth (p. 279). Mr. Lesley described a recently discovered ancient buried river channel crossing the Allegheny river twice, from the mouth of the Clarion, above and below Parker, at the north- ern limit of Armstrong County. As Mr. Carll has shown that the preglacial Allegheny river had its heads in the high ridge south of Tidioute, in Venango County, it is evident that the Clarion river was then the main Allegheny river ; which explains the ancient double curve at Parker. After the ice had retreated from the northern country, leaving all the valleys choked with drift, the combined waters which until then had entered the basin of Lake Erie, at Dunkirk, in New York State, broke away through the ridge below Tidioute, and cut the present straight channel at Parker, across and 100 feet lower than the ancient channel, Pending nominations No, 878 to 884, and new nomination 885, were read, aii 355 Pending nominations 878 to 884 were balloted for, and after scrutiny of the ballot boxes by the presiding officer, the following persons were declared duly elected members of the Society: Prof. Charles Martins, of Montpellier, France. Sir George Biddle Airy, Astronomer Royal of Great Britain. Mr. Charles M. Wheatley, of Pheenixville, Pa. Mr Andrew 8. McCreath, ot Harrisburg, Pa. Prof. Tra Remsen, of Baltimore, Md. Prof. E. Reneviers, of Lausanne, Switzerland. Mr. Benjamin B. Comegys, of Philadelphia. And the meeting was adjourned. Stated Meeting, August 15, 1879. Present, 2 members. Secretary, Dr. J, L. LeConrg, in the Chair. A portrait of George Ord was presented by Dr. M. Hay, for insertion in the album. Letters accepting membership were received from Mr. Charles M. Wheatley, dated Phoenixville, July 24, and Mr. Andrew 8. McCreath, dated Harrisburg, Pa., July 24. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Reale Academia dei Lincei in Rome (101, List. Cat. ITI); and the Boston Society of Natural History, July 21 (103, List. Cat. IID. Letters of envoy were received from the Zoologico-Botani- | cal Society of Vienna, May 20; and the Natural History So- ciety of Gorlitz, March 2, 1879. Donations for the Library were received from the Insti- tute of France; the Geological Institute, Zoologico-Botani- cal Society, and Anthropological Society at Vienna; M. Joseph de Lenhosack, of Buda-Pest; the Societies at Gér- 356 [Sept. 19, litz and Bremen; Prof. F. Sandberger; the Royal Danish Academy ; the Geographical and Anthropological Societies, School of Mines, Polytechnic School, and Revue Politique, of Paris; the Linnzan and Geographical Societies at Bor- deaux; the Royal Institution, Astronomical, Meteorologi- cal, Geographical, Geological, Zoological, Asiatic Societies, and Prof. Bickerton, of London; the Royal Geological So- ciety of Ireland; the Canadian Naturalist and Survey of Canada; Essex Institute; Boston Natural History Society ; Museum of Comparative Zoology; Old Colony Historical Society,at Taunton; North American Entomologist ; Amer- ican Journal of Otology; American Chemical .Society of New York; Franklin Institute, American Journal of Phar- macy and Medical News and Library, in Philadelphia; the U.S. Naval Observatory, Engineer Department, Department of the Interior, and the Department of the U.S. A.; the Cincinnati Society of Natural History ; Indiana State Geo- logical Survey ; American Antiquarian; Botanical Gazette ; and M. Barcena, of Mexico. A donation for the Cabinet was received from M. Joseph Von Lenhossik, of Buda-Pest, per M. Eugene Turnoosky, M. D., 73 West Forty-fifth street, New York, March 30, 1879, viz., a cast of the skull figured and described in his work, entitled, “* Deformations, &c.,” received of same date for the Library. A communication entitled, “Surface Geology of South- west Pennsylvania and adjacent portions of West Virginia and Maryland, by John J. Stevenson, Professor of Geology in the University of the city of New York,” was read. (See page 289.) And the meeting was adjourned. Stated Meetiny, September 19, 1879. Present, 10 members. Vice-President, Prof. Kunxpant, in the Chair. Letters accepting membership were received from Prof. J. Reneviers, dated Lausanne, Aug. 5, 1879; from Prof. 1879, 357 Ch. Martins, dated Montpellier, Aug., 1879; and from Sir Geo. B. Airy, dated Royal Observatory, Greenwich, London, 8. E., Aug 12, 1879. A photograph of Charles Martins was received for inser- tion in the album. Letters of acknowledgment, were received from the Astro- nomical Soviety at Leipsig, dated Aug., 1879 (101); the Natural History Society at Newcastle-upon-Tyne, dated Aug. 18, 1879 (102); the Philosophical Society at Glasgow, dated Sept. 5, 1879 (102); the Society of Antiquaries at London, dated Aug. 5, 1879 (102); and the Free Public Library at New Bedford, dated Sept. 11, 1879 (103 2). Letters of envoy were received from the Royal Irish Acad- emy, dated Aug., 1879; and the U.S. Naval Observatory, dated 1879. Letters asking for back numbers of the Proceedings were received from Triibner & Co., in behalf of the Geological Survey of India (II 15, 17,19; IV 28, VII 62, 63, 64, X 73, XIV 92), and in behalf of two public libraries in London (XV Trans. 2, 3; Proc. 101, 102). A letter from the Society “ Amigos del Pais” of Santo Domingo, July 21, forwarded by H. Bellini, Dominican Con- sul, Aug. 13, requesting Trans. X VI was read. Donations for the Library were received from the Depart- ment of Mines, Melbourne; the Observatory at Adelaide ; the New Zealand Institute; the Asiatic Society of Japan; the Academies at Berlin, Rome, Bruxelles, and Boston; Prof. C. A. Dohrn of Stettin ; the Geographical Societies at Paris and Bordeaux ; the Museum of Natural History and Revue Politique, Paris; the Geological and Antiquarian Societies at London; Profs. G. J. Brush and E. 8, Dana, of New Haven; Mr. H. C. Bolton of Hartford; the American Chemical Society ; the North American Entomologist; the Franklin Institute, Journal of Pharmacy, College of Physi- cians, and Medival News; the Departments of War, Engi- neers, and Agriculture, at Washington ; the Observatory at Mexico ; and Dr. Hugo von Meltzel, Koloszvar, Hungary. PROC. AMER. PHILOS, soc, xvitr. 104. 27. PRINTED NEC, 18, 1879. 358 [Oct. 3, A communication was read entitled, “The Cosmogony of Laplace. By Daniel Kirkwood.” (See page 324.) A communication was read entitled, “ The Philosophy of the Biblical Account of the Creation. By Aug. R. Grote, A. M.” (See page 316.) On motion it was resolved that the Hall Committee be authorized to provide additional shelving for the Library. And the meeting was adjourned. Stated Meeting, October 3, 1879. - Present, 9 members. Vice-President, Mr. Ext K. Pricer, in the Chair. A letter accepting membership was received from Mr. B. B. Comegys, dated Philadelphia, Sept. 27, 1879. A letter of acknowledgment was received from the Royal Geological Society of Ireland (101 ; Cat. ITT). Letters of envoy were received from the Botanical Garden at St. Petersburg, Sept. 1; the Harvard College Observatory, Sept. 15; the Flora Batava, per the Consul-General of the Netherlands, New York, Sept. 25; and the New York State Library, Sept. 19, 1879. Donations for the Library were received from the Bo- tanical Garden at St. Petersburg; the Flora Batava; the Annales des Mines, and Revue Politique; the Commercial Geographical Society at Bordeaux ; Harvard College Obser- vatory ; Prof. O. C. Marsh; the American Chemieal Society ; the New York University ; the Engineering and Mining Journak; the Brooklyn Entomological Society ; Botanical Gazette; and the American Journal of Pharmacy, A communication was received, entitled, “ Additional Notes upon the Collection of Coins now on exhibition in the Pennsylvania Museum and Sehool of Industrial Art, Memo- rial Hall, Fairmount Park, Philadelphia. By Henry Phil- lips, Jr.” (See page 827.) sin 359 Mr. Lesley exhibited a mounted set of uncolored proof sheets of the contour curve map of Morrison’s Cove, Canoe Valley and contiguous region to the west, extending to the crest: of the Alleghany Mountain, in Blair County, surveyed and drawn by Mr. H. N. Sanders, Assistant Geologist on the Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania, and executed on stone by Mr. Julius Bien, of New York, for publication in Report of Progress T, by Mr. Franklin Platt, Assistant Geologist. He pointed out its most striking topographical ' and geological features. Pending nomination No. 885 was read. On motion, the Librarian was authorized to complete the printing of the Catalogue. And the meeting was adjourned. Stated Meeting, October 17, 1879. Present, 18 members. Vice-President, Mr. Fratey, in the Chair. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Bel- gian Academy (102,103) and the Royal Zoological Society in Amsterdam (102, 103). . Donations for the Library were received from the Victoria Mining Bureau ; Russian Academy ; Revue Politique; Vic- toria Institute ; Royal Asiatic Society ; Cobden Club; Har- vard College ; Silliman’s Journal; Prof. Newberry; En- gineering and Mining Journal ; North American Entomol- ogist ; Franklin Institute ; J acter of the Medical Sciences ; Medical News; U.8. Departments of the Navy and Rdaea- tion; Mr. A. R. Grote; Mr. Philip H. Law, and the Mini- sterio de Fomento. The death of Ieury C. Carey, at. Philadelphia, on the 13th inst., in the 86th, year of his age, was announced by Mr. Fraley ; and, on motion, Prof. Robert. Ellis Thompson, 360 |Oct. 17, Professor of Political Economy in the University of Penn- sylvania, was appointed to prepare an obituary notice of the deceased. Dr. Le Conte, on behalf of himself and others, presented to the Society a portrait in oils of the late Joseph Henry, copied by Mr. Ulke, of Washington, from Mr. Ulke’s origi- nal portrait from life, painted in 1876. A communication was read, entitled, ‘Ou the formation of dibenzyl, by the action of ethylene chloride on benzol in the presence of aluminium chloride. By Wm. H. Greene.” (See page 345.) | Mr. Lesley exhibited a photograph fac-simile of a contour map of a region of Western Pennsylvania, extending from Johnstown in Cambria County on the east and Indiana on the north, to Latrobe on the south and Greensburg and Saltsburg on the west. He described its eventful history : how it had been surveyed and drawn by himself, under orders from the President of the Pennsylvania Railway. Company, for geological purposes, in 1852-3-4; lost for twenty-five years; recovered without explanation in_ the spring of 1879; and recently photographed in duplicate by Mr. Julius Bien, of New York, for future completion and publication in the Reports of the Geological Survey. Pending nomination No. 885 was read and postponed, on account of the absence of its nominators. The resolutions of Dr. Le Conte, offered May 2, and post- poned from May 16, were called up for consideration and, after debate, passed (with an amendment of the third reso- lution), as follows: Resolwed, That the further consideration of processes for economically utilizing anthracite coal-dust be indefinitely postponed. Resolved, That the Committee appointed to investigate the subject be discharged, and the thanks of the Society be tendered to the Committee, for the industry and patience with which they have endeavored to come to a decision on the subject. . Resolved, That the prize heretofore offered by the Society for a process for the economical use of anthracite coal-dust, be withdrawn, . And the meeting was adjourned, 1879.] 361 Stated Meeting, November 7, 1879. Present, 9 members. _ Vice-President, Mr. E. K. Price, in the Chair. A photograph of Mr. Juhlin Dannfelt was received for insertion in the album. A letter accepting his appointment to prepare an obituary notice of the late Henry C. Carey was received from Prof. R. E. Thompson, dated October 22. Letters of envoy were received from the U. 8. War De- partment Nov. 6, and Smithsonian Institution, Nov. 4. Donations for the Library were received from M. Dann- felt, of Stockholm; the Academies at Copenhagen, Berlin and Brussels; the Vaudois Society; the Geographical So- ciety and Political Review of Paris; Annales des Mines, and Museum of Natural History ; Commercial Geographical Society at Bordeaux; Nova Scotia Institute; Essex Insti- tute; Boston Natural History Society ; Cambridge Museum ; American Antiquarian Society; American Journal of Sci- ences; American Chemical Society, aud Journal of Otology, _N. Y.; Brooklyn Entomological Society ; North American Entomologist; Pennsylvania IListorical Society, Medical News, American Journal of Pharmacy, and Mr. H. Haupt, Jr., of Philadelphia; Second Geological Survey of Pennsyl- vania; Prof. Himes, of Carlisle, Pa.; the Cincinnati Society of Natural History; Dr. Saml. D. Gross; Mr. Geo. W. Ranck ; the American Antiquarian, of Chicago; the Ministerio de Fomento; and the U. 8. War Department. The death of Prof. James Clerk Maxwell, of England, Noy. 5, 1879, in the 48th year of his age, was announced by the Secretary. Dr. LeConte exhibited a piece of iron pipe much corroded and obstructed by deposit from city water during the last thirty years, as illustrating the formation of brown hematite ore beds. The pipe connected the Juniper street main with the laboratory of the U.S. Mint, and leaked from having spontaneously parted. 362 [Nov 21. Pending nomination 885, and new nominations 886, 887 and 888 were read. . And the meeting was adjourned. Stated Meeting, November 21, 1879. Present, 12 members. Vice-President, Mr. Fratey, in the Chair. A photograph of Mr. I. Phillips, Jr., was received: for insertion in the album. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the R. Society, Tasmania, Hobartstown, July 17, 1878 (99); from the R. Academy, Lisbon, July 28, 1879 (101); from the R. Observatory, Brussels, Nov. 3 (102, 103); and from the Vic- toria Institute, London, July 2 (102). Letters of envoy were received from the Car. University, Lund, Aug. 15; R. Saxon Society, Leipsig, May 29; Hol- land Society, Harlem, June 10; and the Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania, Nov. 17, 1879. A letter, offering on the part of the family of the late Joseph Henry to restore for use to the Society back num- bers of the Proceedings, was received from Prof. Baird, dated Smithsonian Institution, Washington, Nov. 15. Donations for the Library were received from the Academies at St. Petersburg, Berlin, Bordeaux, Madrid, Lisbon and Dublin; the Observatory at Adelaide; the Uni- versity at Lund; the R. Societies at Hobartstown, Leipsig, Gottingen and London ; the Anthropological and Geograph- ical Societies, Geological and Meteorological Institutes at Vienna; the German Geological Society; Jablownowski Society and Natural History Society at Leipsig; the Natural History Society at Bonn; Zoological Garden at Frankfurt ; Holland Society at Harlem; Geographical and Anthropo- logical Societies, and Revue Politique, Paris ; Physical, Geo- graphical and Linnean Societies at Bordeaux; Zoological, Geographical, Meteorological and Astronomical Societies, es 863 and Victoria Institute at London; Philosophical and Liter- ary Society at Leeds; R. Cornwall Polytechnic Society ; Mr. James Henry, of Dublin; the Mining Bureau at Mel- bourne; the Wesleyan gapenad Connecticut ; American Chemical Society, N. Y.; Princeton Museum of Geology and Archeeology ; Hranklin Institute; and Pennsylvania Geological Survey. The death of Mr. John Walter Harden, in West Philadel- phia, Nov. 8, aged 63 years, was announced by Mr. Lesley, who was appointed to prepare an obituary notice of the deceased. A. communication, entitled “On Dioxyethyl-methylene, and the preparation of Methylene-chloride, by William LL. Greene, M.D.,” was read. (See page 346.) Dr. Greene stated that a paper on the formation of dibenzyl by the reaction described by him at the meeting of Oct. 17, had been published by M. Silva in the Comptes Rendus of Oct. 6.. Priority must therefore be granted to M. Silva, although the journal containing the results of his investi- gations did not arrive here until after the presentation of Dr. Greene’s paper. Mr. Haupt made a short verbal report of the progress of the extension of the U. 8. Trigonometrical (Coast) Survey in Berks, Chester and Lancaster counties, Pennsylvania. A communication, entitled ‘On the Codrdination of the various methods of expressing thought as applied to the system of public school instruction, by Lewis M. Haupt, C. E., Prof. Ciy. Eng., Univ. Pa.,” was read. (See page 348.) Mr. Eli K. Price referred to the growing use of graphical testimony in the law practice of the courts. Mr. Briggs described the recent invention of a perpetual battery by Profs. Ilouston and Thompson, exhibited at a meeting of the Franklin Institute. 'Notes on the etymology of 7jpaxdys were read by Mi. Lesley. The minutes of the last meeting of the Board of Officers and members in Council were head; ~ 364 F [Dec. 5, Pending nominations 885 to 888, and new nomination 889 were read. Mr. Fraley reported the receipt of $131.81, being the last . quarterly interest on the Michaux Legacy fund, due Oct. 1. And the meeting was adjourned. Stated Meeting, December 5, 1879. Present, 13 members. Vice-President, Mr, Fraey, in the Chair. A letter enclosing a photograph for insertion in the album was received from Prof. Richard Akerman, dated Stock- holm, Nov. 18, 1879. An acknowledgment of the receipt of Proc. No. 103, was received from Professor J. J. Stevenson, dated New York, Nov. 28. A letter of envoy was received from the Central Physical Observatory at St. Petersburg, dated Oct. 1879. A letter was received from the Cleveland Library Asso- ciation requesting exchanges. ' Donations for the Library were received from the Senk- enburg Society of Natural Sciences; Revue Politique; Com- mercial Geographical Society, Bordeaux; London Nature; Geological Survey of Canada; Boston Society of Natural llistory; Yale College; Mr. Redfield, of Philadelphia; the Botanical Gazette; North American Entomologist; and the Ministerio de Fomento, Mexico. The death of M. Michel Chevalier, at Paris, Nov. 28, aged 73, was announced by the Secretary. Mr. Monerre Robinson was appointed to prepare an obituary notice of the deceased. Mr. Lesley exhibited a slab of roofing slate covered with casts of Buthotrephis flexuosa, obtained by Prof. Frazer for the Museum of the Second Geological Survey of Pennsy!- vania, from the Rev. Prof. Rendall, of Lincoln University, 1879, _ 865 who obtained it (with several others) from a miner in the Peach Bottom slate quarries ori the Susquehanna river near the Maryland State Line. The other slabs are in the York Museum, in York County, Pennsylvania. The species of fucoid was determined by Prof. Lesquereux from a careful drawing, which he pronounced sufficiently characteristic. The great importance of this discovery in confirming the long suggested possible existence of Hudson river slates (Lower Silurian, No. 111) so metamorphosed as to be almost totally destitute of organie remains, in the so-called sub- paleozoic, hypozoic, hypazoic, azoic, or eozoie (Huronian, Cambrian, or Laurentian) belt of the Atlantic sea coast, was dilated upon and discussed by Prof. Lesley, Prof. Frazer, Prof. Cope, and Prof. Hayden. Mr. Lesley said: Prof. Lesquereux has just determined Buthotrephis flexuosa on a slab of roofing slate from the quarries on the Susquehanna river near the Mary- land line. This is a most important discovery. Prof. Frazer has been studying the roofing slate belt and adjoining chlorites for several years in connection with his York and Lancaster courty work. He never found any traces of organic life, nor could hear of any. But he found several curious forms in the rocks across the State line in Maryland, one of which looked like a flattened Orthoceras. Prof. James Hall and Mr. Whitfield were disposed to consider them not organic, They haye been figured for the American Philosophical Society’s Proceedings and for the Reports of the Survey. These are the only fossils ever seen in that region to our knowl- edge. The slab of B. flexuosa, is in our Museum and will be figured. Prof. Frazer received it from a Presbyterian clergyman, President I. N. Ren- dall of Lincoln University, who got it from a miner, as part of a mass four or five times as large, the remainder of which he sent to the York Mu- seum, York, Penna., in acknowledgment of aid from the citizens to the university. There seems to be no doubt that the slabs came from the Peach Bottom quarries as asserted. There are two species of Buthotrephis known, one in the Trenton, three in the Hudson river slates, one in the Clinton. One is reported from the Devonian of Russia. Several from the Subcarboniferous remain unstudied. B. flexuosa is characteristic of ihe Hudson river. It is in the upper part of the Hudson river formation, along the foot of the Kittatiny or Blue or North Mountain, on the Lehigh river, in eastern Pennsylvania, that we have our Slatington and other roofing slate quarries ; and no trap is known in the neighborhood, and no reason can be assigned for excessive metamor- phosis of structure (not of lithology); but on the Maryland line, a trap dyke many miles long has been followed by Prof. Frazer, across Lancaster PROC. AMER, PHILOS. soc. xviiI. 104. 2u. PRINTED DEC, 30, 1879. 366 (Dec. 5, county, from the Peach Bottom roofing slate belt through the Gap Nickel mine, north-eastward into the Welsh mountains. But, as the roofing slate belt is several miles long, I can see no important connection between the trap at one end of it and its metamorphism. Prof. Frazer feels sure that the roofing slates are part and parcel of the chlorite slate formation which makes such a show along the river for miles north of the quarries. But the structure is very obscure. To the north of the (south dipping) chlorites, a bold, double-crested anticlinal (of Toequan creek) crosses Lancaster and York county, and is finely exposed upon the two banks of the Susquehanna river, bringing up massive gneisses, &c., evi- dently referable to our Philadelphia gneisses, to those of the Welsly moun- tains west of the Schuylkill river, and to those of the Highlands of New Jersey and New York states. The chlorite slates are always seen in this region in juxtaposition with limestones which we feel confident are No. II (“Magnesian”’ “Calciferous”) ; but the structural connection is not yét quite satisfactory. Mr. C. E. Hall is disposed to look upon them all along the Chester county ‘‘south valley hill,’”? and across the Schuylkill into Philadelphia, and towards Trenton, as No. III (Hudson river) metamor- ‘phosed. Everything points towards nonconformable basins or outlying patches of metamorphosed Silurians in the heart of our Azoic country of southern Pennsylvania and Maryland, and this discovery of B. flexuosa leaves very narrow room for further doubt on the subject. Prof. Frazer gave a partly detailed description of the sec- tion along the Susquehanna,—an analysis of the difficulties he encountered 1 in making out its true structure,—and the doubts which still hang over the relationship of the roofing slate belt to the chloritic, mica slate and gneissoid areas, on each side of the great Tocquan anticlinal. Prof. Frazer said that in reference to the effect of the determination of the Peach Bottom slates as of Hudson river age, a word of explanation would make its extent clear, nei The Susquehanna section was prepared carefully foot by foot with a per- fectly accurate 200 ft. = 1 inch R, R. plotting in the hand. The exact position of every station (the stations were all 100 feet apart) and the outline of the shore and curves in the road were given on the plot, while the inner side of the outer rail was painted with the number corre- sponding to each station. Locations were therefore almost perfectly ac- curate. From Columbia to Turkey hill (+: 5 miles south) was filled with limestone. ‘Chilorite slates come in abruptly at Turkey hill, and last along the shore (still going south) to within a mile or so of Safe Harbor, when ee 367 they aoa alter to mica, schist, and beyond Safe Harbor to true gneiss.. This lasts for about eleven miles, with its dips about evenly divided by the Tocquan creek, the northern portion dipping gently N. W. and the southern portion S. E. Whatever be the age of the chlorite series there- fore, and. whatever be the age of the Tocquan rocks, the latter interpose a limit to-the extent to which a change of horizon of the former may affect the structure. The Tocquan anticlinal is too broad and flat and extensive, not. to mention its strongly marked lithological characteristics, to be any- thing else than what it seems. Nobody can invert either of its limbs. It is a Safe Harbor to the bewildered stratigrapher ; and a Mount Ararat. to the ark of the propounder of theories. This welcome element of structure, however, fades out into inconclusive and rare exposures near Fishing creck, after which the chlorite series begins to appear, and continues, with nu- merous exposures, to a point a little less than half a mile north of Peters creek, quartz entering largely into the composition of the rocks which are otherwise highly convoluted, green and unctuous. Here come in the Peach Bottom slates with but little time for transition, and pass, aftera breadth of a few hundred yards, equally abruptly, into chlorites again, and finally into a greenish chloritic quartzite, which is the northern boundary of Peters creek (when in flood).. This greenish quartzite puzzled the speaker so much that in his report written two years ago, but not issued, he deemed the matter important enough to present two views of itsage. He says, page 135, ‘‘The structure supposed in the section will not assign to this rock contemporaneity with the Chikis quartzite, nor form a continuity with the quartzites to be noted further down the river’’ (which are ascribed to Pots- dam age). ‘‘But the interpretation of the stratigraphy here is of the greatest difficulty,” &c., &c. Again, page 141, another structure than that ~adopted is given which makes ‘‘the hydromica schists in the basin of the first synclinal the lower limestone slates or hydro mica schists.’’ Not be- cause of any lithological considerations, however, but solely on the hy- pothesis that the column of formations appear in their normal order, which needs to be established. j In other words, if the Peach Bottom slates be established as of Hudson river age, the real difficulty would seem not be a stratigraphical one ; for )they.might be supposed to be deposited unconformably on any of the older series, without the intervening members of the column. . But the only diffi- culty—not an insurmountable one perhaps—will be to account for the alteration of the argillaceous strata characteristic of that horizon, to the highly crystalline magnesia hydromicas which remind one so much of _what the speaker asks permission still to regard as the true chlorites—the , chlorites of the South Mountain. It is interesting in this connection, to call attention to the analysis of these Peach Bottom slates, made at my request by Mr. A..S. McCreath, at Harrisburg. . The specimen. is from J. Humphrey & Co,’s Quarry, half a mile east of Delta, York county. Silicic Oxide (BiG )iisevis. agi< .eckt.w0. Saw vb abled Oe 55.880 Titanic Oxide (TiO?) .. Slosifav deiiesa ved. b dese hodtnele 1.270 Sulphuric Oxide (SO*)..........3.. sd a5} DoE lees « (0:022 Alomina-(A FO") ainss jes dud ses to dood aan Se 21.849 Ferrous Oxide (HQ) 33 . 2evidsousien Go Vaieeeas os ie ove 9,083 Manganous Oxide (MnQ).............. ig sd anhd wi oy 0.586 Cobaltous: Oxide (CoO)... 20:5 668 eisai ed cease ceeuns trace Lime (CaO }s cys vss tied. acces eck aucune oh cade 0.155 Magnesia (MgO)iicd.siads antias sane spansien cients snk 1.495 Soda (Na?Q) sical. Sapes sght cost ree ips NEO 'StOS 0.460 Potash, GR?O)si6 as cai. (0b... saoidagats Game omits ah 209 3.640 ™Garbon (0) ull. cece oeet . o5 pe OSE Hh im ve «» 91.794 Water (0) . ..ersi Dein 065i} techie dbidle 09999 4490 «Bx 3.385 Iroh Bisulphide. Two contributions to the present subject have been heretofore made by’ the writer, viz., in the Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society; for November, 1878; and in the Bulletin of the U. 8. Geological Survey. of the Territories for February,-1879. In the latter article thirty-eight species of vertebrata were enumerated as having been discovered, in the Truckee beds of the White River formation of Oregon, of which all but one were mammalia. I have since conducted explorations in that region, the éxendioden being mostly under the direction of Jacob L. Wortman, This gentleman has obtained a great many specimens, several of which indicate new species, which it is the object of the present article to describe. In addition to these discoveries, Mr. Wortman has sent remains of Lacertilia and Ophidia, or- ders previously unknown in Oregon. I had discovered them in the White River formation in Colorado in 1873. . HESPEROMYS NEMATODON, sp. nov. This rat is represented by a beautiful skull, discovered by Prof. Thomas Condon, of Eugene city, and by several jaws, and other fragments stlbse- quently found by Mr. Wortman. The frontal region is not contracted as in Humys elegans and Fiber zibethicus, but the superciliary ridges are well separated from each other, — as in Hesperomys americanus. The frontal and posterior nasal regions are slightly concave in transverse section. The molars display tubercles on one side, and crescents on the other, the former being external in the su- perior series. The first superior molar has an additional tubercle at its an- terior extremity. The incisors have a transverse anterior face, rom is divided by several delicate ridges. Length of superior molar series, .0065 ; length of first superior molar, .0028 ; interorbital width, .0042. Length of inferior molar series (speci- men No. 2), .0064 ; length of first molar, .002; width of incisor, .001 ; depth of ramus at second molar, .004, 18 Tel ScIURUS VORTMANT, sp. NOV. Like the S, relictus, of the Colorado White Riyer beds, this is a rare species, being only represented by a mandibular ramus in my collection, This part is remarkable for its. depth as compared with its length ; and the base of the coronoid process has an anterior position. It rises opposite the posterior part of the third molar, and its anterior border descends toa point just below the posterior part of the first molar, The inferior border of the masseteric fossa is a prominent edge, which descends below the inner in- ferior margin of the ramus. The molars diminish regularly in size for- wards ; their crowns are basin-shaped, with the anterior angle of the ex- 1879), 371 [Cope. ternal border elevated, and the inner border notched medially. Incisor compressed. Length of inferior molar series, .010 ; antero-posterior diameter of first molar, .0024 ; length of fourth molar, .003 ; depth of ramus at diastema, .0055.; depth at third molar, .0095. This species is considerably larger than the S. relictus. It is dedicated to Jacob L.. Wortman, of Eugene, Oregon, a successful explorer of the paleontology of that State. PACICULUS INSOLITUS, gen. et sp. nov. Char. gen. Superior molars three, rooted. Enamel forming three entrant loops on the external face of the crown, and one on the internal face. While the number of the superior molars of Paciculus is as in the Mu- ride, the details of their structure is much as in Dasyprocta and Steneo- jiber. But one species is known. Chir. spec. Size small. Molars regularly and rapidly diminishing in size posteriorly. Inner enamel loop turned forwards ; the external straight and transverse, excepting in the first molar, where the anterior column of the tooth is extended forwards, and the anterior loop is turned back wards. Length of superior molar series, .006 ; length of first molar, .0021 ; width of first molar, .0018; length of third molar, .001. CANIS LEMUR, sp. nov. ‘This species is represented by several crania in my possession. . It is the smallest of the genus yet discovered in the Miocene formation of Oregon. It is characterized by the contracted proportions of the muzzle, the width of the front, and the large size of the eyes. The postorbital process is only a short angle.. The superior border of the temporal fossa is traceable from the postorbital process. Those of opposite sides embrace a smooth sagittal area of an elongate urceolate form, and unite posteriorly in a very short crest. The species is further characterized by the large size of the first su- perior tubercular molar, which with the second, has a distinct inner cingu- lar border, and median tuberele. The superior sectorial is short, and its inner cusp is anterior. ~ Some mandibles probably belonging to this species exhibit posterior cut- ting lobes on the third and fourth premolars, The blades of the sectorial are very short, and the heel large and wide. The tubercles of the tubercu- lar are large. Length of cranium to front border of orbit, M. .0525 ; elevation of occi- put, .058; length of superior sectorial, .097; length of first tubercular, .0058 ; width of first tubercular, .0078 ; width of second tubercular, .005 ; length of second tubercular, .0035 ; interorbital width of second specimen, -0056 ; length of inferior dental series, .048; length of sectorial, .008 ; length of heel of sectorial, .0035 ; length of inferior tubercular, .055 ; depth of ramus at sectorial, .0105. _.-"This species is smaller than Canis gregarius, and differs from both it and the C, cuspigerus in the larger orbits, more contracted muzzle, and in the distinct. superior border of the temporal fossa, ete. Cope.) 372 [Dec. 5, The dog which I referred to the genus Hnhydroeyon (Cope) under the name of Z. basilatus, probably belongs to another genus. Portions of the maxillary bone present the dentition of Jctieyon, viz., P-m. 4, M: 1, thus differing from Enhydrocyon, which possesses P-m. 3; M. 2. As there are but three premolars in the inferior series, this species cannot be referred to Icticyon, but must be accepted as typical of a new genus. This I propose to call Hyenocyon. It resembles Hyena more nearly than any genus yet discovered in North America, but probably belongs to the Canida. AMPHICYON ENTOPTYCHI, sp. nov. This rather small species is represented by a skull which lacks the ex- tremity of the muzzle and the mandible, and has its parietal region crushed. The superior premolar teeth are rather short in anteroposterior diameter, while the tubercular molars are relatively large. There afe no posterior lobes on the former; the internal and external cingula are well developed in the first and second of the latter. The third tubercular is about ‘as wide as the second is long. The sagittal crest is only distinct on the posterior part of the parietal region. Estimated length of skull, M. .1103; length of superior molar series, .041 ; length of true molar series, .016; length of first tubercular, .0075; length of second tubercular, .055 ; width of second tubercular, .0074 ; length of third tubercular, .0036; width of third tuber- cular, .052 : Length of sectorial width between anterior external angles of first tuberculars, .030. The teeth of this species are about half the size of those of A. vetus Leidy. ARCH2ALURUS DEBILIS Cope. American Naturalist, 1879, p. 798a, December. Char. gen. Dentition, I. 3; C.4; P-m. #4; M. 4; mandible with the anterior face of the symphysis sepafated from the lateral face by an angle : which is not produced downwards. Superior sectorial without anterior lobe ; inferior sectorial with heel. The characters place Archalurus at the base of the Felide, showing that it is the most generalized form yet known, and about equally related to the feline and Macheerodont series. Char. specif. General structure of the jaws weak. Superior canine small, little compressed, with an acute posterior edge which is not serru- late. First premolar in each jaw one-rooted ; second inferior’ premolar large ; sectorials large, diastemata very short. Alveolar border below the inferior sectorial and tubercular teeth everted, forming a large osseous callus, which has a free inferior and posterior margin, the latter rising into the base of the coronoid process, Zygomata slender ; postorbital processes little prominent ; front wide, convex transversely. Length of cranium, M. .200; superciliary width, .052 ; zygomatic width, .124; length from orbit to superior incisors, .066; length of superior secto- rial, .028 ; length of inferior molar series, .064; diameter of superior canine, -012, About the size of the panther, or of the Nimravus brachyops. The osseous callus below the true molars is a remarkable character, unique in the order of Carnivora. It is evidently a provision against the weakness of the mandibular rami, at the point of greatest strain. 1879.}" 373 [Cope. HorLoPHONEUS PLATYCOPIS Cope. American Naturalist, 1879, p- 798, December. This is the largest sabre tooth discovered in North America. It was twice the bulk of the H. primevus Leidy, and differs from that species and the H. occidentalis in the relatively larger size of the premolar teeth, which are less obliquely placed than in the latter. The first superior premolar is very small, The canine is large and compressed as in the species of Mach@rodus, and has serrulate posterior and anterior cutting edges. Inferior incisors with conic crowns. The symphysis is very deep in consequence of the large development of the inferior flares for the canines. Sagittal crest making a steep angle with the front. Total length of cranium, M., .280; zygomatic width, .192 ; length from orbit to superior incisors, .095 ; length of inferior sectorial, .025; of in- ferior sectorial, .022 ; length of inferior molar series, .055 ; length of crown of superior canine, .060 ; width of superior canine at base, .026. This skull is less than one-sixth smaller than that of the Bengal tiger (Uneia tigris). OHANOHYUS DECEDENS, gen. et sp. nov. The characters of this genus will be best understood by comparison with those of the two other genera of suilline animals which occur in the same formations. Premolars three, a wide diastema between the anterior one and its successor. ..........- SDibiebidd aleiseD bled RKKNN «sees» OChenohyus. Premolars four; diastemata before and behind the first... Thinohyus. Premolars four, in a continuous series....... NEES Paleocherus. It is then apparent that Chenohyus differs from Dicotyles in ‘naving the diastema behind the anterior premolar instead of in front of it. Char. spec. This hog is represented in the collection of Prof. Condon at Eugene City, Oregon, by the anterior part of a cranium, which includes both maxillary bones. Its size is a little less than that of the Dicotyles torquatus. The series of maxillary teeth is slightly convex externally; and the teeth diminish rapidly in size anteriorly. The differencein dimen- sions between the first and last true molars is much greater than in the other suillines of this period known to me. The external tubercles of the true molars are somewhat flattened externally, and a distinct cingulum passes entirely round their external bases, The first superior premolar has one root, the other premolars possess two. I suspect that the Dicotyles hespertus of Marsh belongs to Chenohyus. It differs from the C. decedens in its materially smaller size. According to Marsh, it is considerably smaller than his Thinohyus socialis, which is about as large as the C. decedens, Discovered by Prof. Condon in the region of the John Day river. THINOHYUS TRICHANUS, sp. nov. Represented by the greater part of the maxillary and mandibular aes of both sides, with teeth. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XVUI. 104. 2v. PRINTED DEC. 30, 1879. Cope.) 374 (Dee. 5, There is a diastema behind the second. inferior premolar, about equal in extent to that in front of it, which is twice as wide as the one in. front, of the first premolar. The first and. second premolars. have but one. root, while the two others have two. The first superior premolar is close to the. canine, and has but one root; itis separated by a diastema from the second. The latter has one root, and is near the third, which, has, two roots, . The third and fourth superior premolars have each. one compressed external, and one internal lobe. That of the third is lower and is pressed against. the external. It is continued asa ridge posteriorly, enclosing a shallow basin with the external tubercle. The true molars of both jaws have the intermediate tubercles well Me veloped. The external tubercles of the superior molars, are not flattened, and have a low cingulum surrounding their bases.. Surface of enamel nearly smooth. Length of true molar series of upper jaw, M. .046 ;. of last superior molar, .017; width of do., .013. Diameter of first true molar,— anteroposterior, .012; transverse, .011.. Length of posterior three pre- molars along base, .028; of diastema, .011. Length from inferior canine to third inferior premolar, .028; length of diastema anterior to second pre- molar, .008; do. of diastema posterior to second premolar, .007. This is the species I formerly called Paleocherus condoni* Marsh (Platy- gonus Marsh). That species belongs to the Loup Fork fauna, and not to the present one. Some teeth which probably pertain to it in Prof. Con- don’s collection, exhibit the peculiarity of not possessin g any basal cingula on the molars of either jaw. From the fact that Pomel} implies that some of the species of Paleoche- rus present a diastema, I have referred the Tainohyus of Marsh to it as a synonym.{ Pomel’s genus was, however, established on a species (P. typus) which has no diastema, hence Thinohyus is probably to be preserved. This species is about the size of the Thinohyus lentus of Marsh, and agrees with his descriptions in several respects. There appears, however, to be a material difference between the specimens in the relations of the in- ferior premolars. Marsh describes a much more considerable diastema in front of the first premolar, and does not mention the one behind the second premolar. I am acquainted with a second species of the genus of about the same size, in which there are but two diastemata, viz., one before and one behind the first premolar, and I suppose this one to resemble the 7. lentwa, Specimens of this character are in my collection, and I have seen one in that of Prof. Condon. PAL AOCHGRUS SUBAQUANS, Sp. nov. This suilline is represented by an entire cranium which was discovered by Prof. Condon, It indicates a species of the size of the Divotyles tor: quatus, and smaller than the Thinohyus trichanus. The first true molar is not disproportionately smaller than the third ; and * Bull, U.S, Geol, Surv, Terrs,, 1879, V, p. 58. + Catal. Vertebr, Foss, Basin Lotre, 1855, p, 86, t Bull, U.S. Geol, Surv. Terrs., 1879, V, p. 4 1879.) 375 [Cope. there is a distinct cingulum at the external base of the superior true molars. The external faces of the external tubercles of these teeth are somewhat flattened. The first premolar has one root, the others have two. They are equidistant and not very closely crowded. Several suillines are described by Marsh and Leidy, either imperfectly or from imperfect material, so that I have had some difficulty in determining my specimens. The D. hesperius of Marsh is probably, as above observed, a Chenohyus. YT have specimens agreeing with Marsh’s description of Thinohyus socialis. They belong to an animal of the size of the Chano- hyus decedens, but the superior molars have no basal cingulum. Its generic position is yet uncertain. Other specimens agree in characters with the Dicotyles pristinus of Leidy, with which Thinohyus lentus of Marsh agrees in size. In this hog there is no diastema in front of the third inferior premolar, so that it is clearly distinct from the Thinohyus trichenus of the present paper. MERYCOPATER GUIOTIANUS Cope. Having obtained several crania of this species, I can give the characters of the genus Merycopater * more fully than hitherto. Dentition; I. 452; C, +; P-m, +; M. §. A diastema above and below ; fourth superior pre- molar with two external crescents; fourth inferior premolar identical in form with first true molar ; the first inferior premolar functionally the canine. Orbit open posteriorly; no facial fossee or vacuities. This genus is Agriochwrus, with a considerable diastema, and very much reduced superior premaxillary teeth. In my best preserved cranium there is no alveolus for the first ; that of the second is rudimental, and that of the third is small. The premaxillary bones are very small and distinct | from each other. The enlargement of the cingula represents the posterior internal tubercle of the fourth superior premolar, so distinct in Coloreodon. The deficiency in superior incisors is an interesting approximation to true ruminants not heretofore observed in Oreodontide. I have found the inferior incisors deficient in the genera Cyclopidius and Pithecistes. COLOREODON FEROX, gen. et sp. noy. Char. gen. Dentition, I. ?; C0. 1; P-m, *; M. 3; a wide diastema above; the first inferior premolar functionally the canine. Last superior premolars with two external and two internal crests. Orbit open poste- riorly ; no facial fosse or vacuities. The genus differs from Agriocharus in the wide diastemata, presence of but three superior premolars, and two inner tubercles of the fourth premolar. I possess two species of this new genus, which are represented in my collection by crania without premaxillary bones and mandibles. Char. specif. Size of Oreodon culbertsoni. Maxillary bone excavated above the diastema, the superior border of the concavity extending nearly to the base of the zygoma. Zygomatic arches expanded, their external face concave below the orbit, and plane posteriorly. Saggittal crest very *Cope, American Naturalist, 1879, p, 197, Cope.] 376 (Dec. 5, high, dividing anteriorly into two ridges, which diverge widely, and terminate at a point opposite the postfrontal process. The space enclosed in their angle is plane. Space between supraorhital foramina convex. The posterior internal tubercle of the fourth premolar is much smaller than the anterior ; the inner basal tubercles of the second and third are subposterior and acute. The length of the diastema is equal to that of the premolar series. The enamel of the molars is wrinkled. The canines are robust. Estimated length of skull, M. .200; length of superior molar series, .066 ; of diastema, .028 ;-diaineters of second true molar, — anteroposte- rior, .016, transverse, .017; width of palate at do., .033; interorbital width, .060. The strongly developed crests and wide zygomata of this animal, to gether with the large canine teeth, evidently indicate that it was & formid- able antagonist even for the Carnivora of its time. Discovered by Charles H. Sternberg. COLOREODON MACROCEPHALUS, sp. NOY. This Oreodont is considerably larger than the C. ferox, being of the size of the Hucrotaphus major, while the former equals the Oreodon culbertsont. It also differs from its congener in the relatively longer and narrower frontal region. The sagittal crest is elevated, and divided into two crests opposite the posterior part of the zygomatic fossa. These branches are nearly straight, and diverge at an acute angle, terminating above the postorbital processes. They enclose a deep concavity, which is continuous with the front anteriorly. In 0. ferox these crests diverge much more ab- ruptly and widely from a more anterior point, and enclose a much smaller concavity. The supraorbital foramina are close together and are separated by a small protuberance of the middle line. The parietal walls of the tem- poral fossa are rugose. The posterior tubercle of the fourth premolar is well developed, while a single tubercle is present on the preceding premo- lar. Length of craniuin from inion to above superior canine, M. .230; length from superior canine postorbital angle (axial), .124; length from junction of crests to supraorbital foramina, .060 ; interorbital width, .072 ; length of bases of the molars except the last, .050 ; length of three premolars .027, Length of diastema, .030. From the North Fork of John Day River ; found by J. L. Wortman. 1879.) 377 Stated Meeting, December 19, 1879. Present, 10 members. Vice-President, Mr. Frauey, in the Chair. A letter of acknowledgment and envoy was received from the Linnean Society, London, Oct. 20 (99, 100, 101; XV, 2). Letters of envoy were received from the Batavian Society of Arts and Sciences, Feb. 23, 1877, and April 15, 1878; from the Royal Observatory, Brussels, April, 1879; from the Bunker Hill Monument Association, Boston; and from the Society of Geography and Statistics, Mexico, Nov. 17, 1879. A letter requesting cabinet exchanges was received from the Bridgeport Scientific Society, Conn., Nov. 20, 1879. Donations for the Library were received from the Asiatic Society of Japan; Royal Society, Victoria; Batavian Socie- ty, Batavia; M. Joachim Barrande, Prag; the Academies at Berlin, Munich, Brussels, and Philadelphia; the German Geological Society ; Zoologische Anzeiger, Leipsig ; Socie- ties at Bonn, St. Gall, Cherbourg, Cambridge (England) ; the Commercial Geographical Society at Bordeaux ; Geo- graphical and Statistical Society, Mexico; Geographical Society, Paris; Geological, Geographical, Zoological, Lin- nean, and Antiquarian Societies, Victoria Institute and Nature, in London; Dumfrieshire and Galloway A. N. H. Society ; Bunker Hill Monument Association and Natural History Society, Boston; Silliman’s Journal; Brooklyn Entomological Society; Journal of Pharmacy, Medical News, and Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., Philadelphia; Peabody Institute, Baltimore; Smithsonian Institution ; Milwaukee Public Library ; and National Museum, Mexico. A bronze medal for the cabinet was received from the 37 8 [Dee,.19, Batavian Society, with the inseription:—socrETAS.. ART . SCIENT . BAT . IN. MEMORIAM)./I ..SAEO). FEL). CLAUSI.. in a wreath, and around the margin A.P. VIIT. X . MAL. MDOCLXXVIII—MDCCCLXXLVIII . On the reverse,a palm, labeled on its trunk {; mountains in. the background; marginal legend: TEN NUTTE VANE GEMEEN BATAVIA’S GENOOTSCHAP. Mr. Chase communicated a note on the Sun’s apparent diameter and the nebular origin of the terrestrial day. Dr. Horn communicated two papers: 1. “A monographic revision of the species of Cremastochilus of the United States ;” 2. “A Synopsis of the Euphoride af the United States.” With one plate. Mr. Hale gave an interesting verbal account: of his ac- quaintance with the various Indian tribes collected on the Canadian reservation’ at Brantford, east of London, Upper Canada; of the most distinguished surviving chief of the Six Nations, Sakayenkwaraton (disappearing mist), known to the English as John 8. (smoke) Johnson, now 87 years old. His son, Chief George Johnson, bears the official title of the one of the original 50 council chiefs whom he represents, Mr. Hale described the formation of the confederation, three centuries ago, and testified to the accuracy of Mr. Morgan’s history of it. He then described the Book of Rites, which after two cen- turies of verbal tradition was reduced to writing, by some one connected with the early missions, Two copies exist, and Mr. Hale is obtaining a translation of it. It is the only known American aboriginal piece of literature, north of Mexico. It has many archaic words, and is engrossed, in an old-fashioned current English hand, in a common school- boy’s copy book.. He then described the Wampum belts of the confedera- tion, partly preserved by the Onondagas in New York, and partly among the Indians in Canada. Ile also told of his discovery that the Tutelos were not an [roquois tribe, but were allied to the Dakotahs or Sioux of ie 379 the West. Their first seat was in North Carolina. Brainard reported that Tutelos, Iroquois and Delawares lived to- gether at Shamokin, Pa., speaking three entirely different languages. The syntactical position of the personal pronoun before, after, or between any two syllables of the verb allies the Tutelo language with the two dialects of the Dahcotah, and separates it from all the other Indian dialects... But Tutelo seems to be older than the Dahcotah.. So also Huron (Quebec) was older than [roquois (Six Nations); and Dela- ware older than Chippeway. It looks as if the movement was from east to west, aud not from west to east. Repeated questions from. the members present elicited many curious and interesting personal details from Mr. Hale, who hopes to have before long a memoir ready for publication. Pending nominations 885 to 892, were read. The Minutes of a special meeting of the Board of Officers and Members in Council were read, and the claim for the Magellanic premium was referred to the Committee ap- pointed at the last meeting of the Society. The Report of the Trustees of the Building Fund was read, dated December 16, 1879, by which it appeared that the receipts since January 30, 1877, had amounted to $2882.04; and that the Fund now consists of assets to the value of $12,586.50. Signed, Benj. V. Marsh, Treasurer ; Eli K. Price, F. Fraley, auditors of the Finance Committee. ‘The Report of the Finance Committee was read, and the appropriations for the expenses of the ensuing year, recom- mended in the report, were on motion, ordered. And the meeting was adjourned. Chase.} 380 [wee 19, Astronomical Approximations. I. Apparent Semi-diameter of the Sun, and Nebular Origin of the Terrestrial Day. By Pliny Earle Chase, LL.D., Professor of Philosophy in Haverford College. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, Dec. 19, 1879.) The various mathematical deductions which I have drawn from the nebular hypothesis, as modified by Herschel’s theory of ‘‘subsidence,”’ furnish many independent tests for judging of the probable accuracy of delicate and difficult astronomical otservations. The consistency of the tests may be shown by examples, one of which is given In the present note. The hypothesis that the solar system has been shaped by undulations, moving with the velocity of light, leads to the following equation : 1 =) fa ol Earth’s distance y 1dayF § 2 * \ Sun’s semi-diameter From this equation we find, for Earth’s mean distance from Sun, 214.54 solar semi-diameters; and for Sun’s apparent diameter, 32/ 2//.85.. The accordance of this result with observations is as follows : Distance. Diameter. Newcomb, 214.86 82’ 0” Chase, 214.54 82.» 2.85 Fuhg, 214.52 82 2.99 British Naut. Almanac, 214.45 82 8.64 American “© 214.41 82 4 Lockyer, 214.39 82 4.205 Dr. Fuhg’s estimate, which approximates most closely to my own, is deduced from 6827 measurements.* Notwithstanding the vast labor which is represented by those measurements and their subsequent discussion, I cannot but believe that my own result is still more accurate. For it in- volves no careful micrometry, no allowance for irradiation, and no other elements of possible uncertainty than small fractions of a second, in the estimated lengths of the sidereal year and of the mean solar day. This result may, perhaps, be rightly regarded as an experimentum crucis. Therefore, to avoid the trouble of referring to the papers in which I have established the data for my formula, I will repeat the fundamental con- siderations on which it rests. Any body, revolving in a cireular orbit, under the influence of a central force g, which varies inversely as the square of the distance, would ac- quire the velocity of revolution (y qr), in the time of describing an are equivalent to radius. It would acquire a parabolic velocity 7/2 gr, in 1 =e of a revolution, and it would acquire i times the parabolic ve- ' y¥2 locity in a half revolution, provided all the increments of the central * Astron. Nachrichten, D410, cited tn Am, Journ, Sel, for Aug, 1875, p, 07. 1879.] 381 [Chase. force were retained, The parabolic velocity is the limit between the tendencies to incipient aggregation and to complete dissociation, in the sub- sidence of dense nebulous particles. In a body which is both revolving about the centre of a system and ro- tating on its own axis, every particle is subject, during each half-rotation, to cyclical variations in the systematic stress, which are antagonized by the constant central force of the body itself. In a condensing or expanding nebula, the time of rotation varies as the square of radius. At any given instant, the squares of the velocities, or the living forces of different rotating particles, are proportioned to the squares of their radii, or to the times of nebular rotation and synchronous revolution when condensed to their respective positions. If the velocity of synchronous rotation and revolution is determined by the aggregate resistances of the central force of the nucleus, to cyclical variations of stress which may be represented by a wave-velocity, while the velocity of rotation of a detached planet is determined by a force which may be represented by an incipiently aggregating or parabolic velocity, the representative parabolic velocity of the nucleus may be found by taking V2 Tt equatorial limit of the nebula, or Laplace’s limit of possible rotating at- mosphere, and ¢ being } the corresponding time of synchronous rotation and revolution. I have already shown that gf, in the solar system, is the velocity of light. Let a represent the time of synchronous rotation and revolution when Sun’s surface should contract so that Laplace’s limit would correspond with its present equatorial radius; #,a mean solar day; 7, Earth’s mean dis- tance + Sun’s radius ; J, a sidereal year. Then ¢ = 6+ 3; tang. Sun’s gt; g representing the force of gravity at any past, present, or future 1 apparent semi-diameter = r= According to Leverrier and Hansen, Earth’s present aphelion, or limit of incipient condensation, is at 1.016771 rad. vee. This corresponds, within roo Of one per cent., to Stockwell’s determination of the centre of the belt of greatest condensation.* The relations between the primitive solar and terrestrial centres are thus simplified, so that the foregoing considerations lead us at once to the following equations: G)=% oth *The arithmetical mean between Mercury’s secular perihelion (.2974307) and Mars’s secular aphelion (1.7363254) is 1.016878, PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. xvii. 104. 2w. PRINTED DEC. 31, 1879. Horn.} 382 {[Dee. 19, A Monographie Revision of the Species of CREMASTOCHILUS Of the United States. By GrorcGe H. Horn, M.D. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, Dec. 19, 1879.) In the Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc. 1871, p. 339, et. seq., will be found a table prepared by me of the species then known, after a short study, the object of which was to present some means for their identification in a ready manner, the descriptions being scattered in books, inaccessible to many, and sometimes unintelligible, either from their brevity or want of apprecia- tion of characters which have since come to be of greater value. The above mentioned table was made use of by Prof. Westwood:(in his **The- saurus Oxoniensis,’’ p. 58), who at the same time described a certain num- ber of supposed new species, since which others have been described by Dr. LeConte, so that the aggregate assumed quite formidable dimensions for a genus so peculiar. The types from which Prof. Westwood’s descriptions were made are for the most part in the Royal Museum of Berlin, where I had the opportunity of examining them, through the kindness of the curator in charge. The descriptions appeared soon after my examination had been made, and ats nothing to be desired for their identification. : Having had occasion to study the species more closely, I have seen no reason for any great alteration of the table already given, further than to add the new species and transpose one which seemed rather out of place. The accompanying table is, however, made so full as to contain nearly all the important characters of each species, so that the’ chances of a mistake in identification are reduced as near as possible to the minimum. 8 Before proceeding to the table it seems proper that the characters should receive more extended notice and comparison, which can be FIperesersnes by considering the different members in order. The head is short, oval, rather deeply inserted in the thorax, the vertex usually convex, the clypeus more suddenly deflexed, forming an angle with the front. In planatus and sauecius the head is more, exsert. and) presents in each characters worthy of special observation, these are—the carina on the middle of the clypeus common to both species, the supraorbital, carine of the first and the sudden narrowing of the head behind the eyes) im the second. In neither species is there an obtuse ridge indicating the limits of the clypeus and front, but the upper surface of the head is gradually declivous in planatus and very convex in saucius, In pilosicollis, crinitus and Knochit the front is rather flat and the limit between it and the elypeus is indicated by an obtuse arcuate ridge, so that the clypeus seems suddenly deflexed from the front, In leucostiotus the front and elypeus are. on the same plane, nearly flat, while all the other species not already mentioned have the front convex but to a variable degree. 1879.] 383 [Horn, .).The clypeus normally is not broader than the head, the margin refiexed, the anterior edge more or less arcuate, the angles rounded. In two species the clypeus is wider than the head, in Wheeleri conspicuously so with the angles rather acute, in erinitus less dilated. with the angles rounded. The anterior margin is rather widely reflexed and is useful in aiding the species in their fossorial tendencies. The mentum presents important modifications, the simplest being that of leucostictus or saucius, in which the face is quite flat and the margins narrowly reflexed. From this form the mentum becomes more concave and the sides more widely reflexed so that it becomes cupuliform. Those species with the mentum least concave have the posterior margin entire, as the concavity increases we find a slight noteh, which in the last four species, becomes a rather wide and deep excision semicircular at bottom. These modifications of the mentum form a very natural means of dividing the species. »/ The thorax is so modified in form and structure in all the species, that nearly all, can, be separated by it alone. The simplest form is that of leucostictus which resembles that of Trichius; apex feebly emarginate, sides feebly subangulate, hind angles rounded, the margin acute posterior- ly, there is no incisure about the front angles nor are there any pubescent spots such. as occur in every other species. In planatus the sides are sub- acutely margined, arcuate in front and gradually narrowed behind, not very unlike Iphthimus, in fact the species resembles a Tenebrionide when walking. .The anterior angles are small, the notch or fovea within feeble, and. there isa notch in the lateral margin which limits the angle. The hind angles are continuous with the margin, not very prominent and limit- ed by an oblique groove within. The next modification in degree is in the Schaumii group, in which the thorax is broader and less depressed, the an- terior angles are feeble, the fovea within them, but no lateral notch in the margin. In two of the species the hind angles are not limited by any groove and the anterior margin of the thorax beneath is not notched. In angularis, however, the hind angles havea limiting groove, and beneath the front angles is a slight incisure. The three species following angularis do not present any very important modification of its type, the angles are nearly the same and there is the subangular incisure, but in pilosicollis, we observe a groove running out- ward from the fovea and limiting the anterior angles. This gives the first intimation of the tuberculiform angle which is observed further on. In nitens, the front angles begin the nodifurm structure by the greater depth of the transverse groove. The hind angles are also much retracted ‘within the line of the sides, and the groove which limits them within is sodeep that the angle is depressed below the surface of the dise of the thorax. In passing to variolosus, the anterior angles become so completely sur- rounded hy deep grooves as to become almost like isolated tubercles, and may be assumed to be the result of the gradual exaggeration of the various Horii.) 384 [Dee,-19, grooves and incisures mentioned inthe preceding forms.» In Huarrisit the anterior angles are rather broad and more obtuse than in any of the species described and the incisure beneath them is very feeble: Of a totally different type of ‘thorax wé must consider saucius and W heeleri, which require special mention. These have the disc of three parts, a central more depressed portion and the lateral more convex, which may be compared with Heterius or Plegaderus. The division: is best marked in saucius: The region of the anterior angles in this species pre- sents a curious modification; in which the anterior angles appear to be auriculate, but this is really an extension upward and forward of the an- terior margin or collar of the thorax, and corresponds in homology with that portion of the under side of the thorax of the other species which is below the incisure. The true anterior angle will be observed in the figure behind the auriculate process. The hind angles are spiniform, their struc- ture will be observed in the figure. In Wheeleri, the tripartite character is less observable. The anterior angles do not depart much from the normal type, and the incisure beneath is: well marked: The hind angles are broad but obtuse, and havea feeble trace of an oblique limiting groove. This species deserves mention as being the only one with the middle cox absolutely contiguous and the prosiernum behind the coxe slightly eleva- ted. ) ‘T'he legs also vary to an important extent, and will be found described with each species. The tarsi follow the modifications of the legs, and, from being as long as the tibie, are reduced to even less than half that length in Schaumii. Asa rule the shorter the tarsi the more compressed du they become, the only exception being in leucostictus, which with short tarsi has the upper side flat, so that the transverse section of a joint would be an isosceles triangle. bri The distribution of the Species in accordance with the ite of the men- tum is well known. Those with the mentum entire belong from the east- ern base of the Rocky Mountains to the Pacific Coast, there being but one exception, leucostictus, from Maryland. » Where the mentum is) notched or deeply emarginate, the species belongs to the Atlantic fauna, most of them having a wide range of distribution, except in the case of squamu- losus, which is limited to Georgia and Florida. In the accompanying table and descriptions there is very rarely any mention made of the hairs of the surface. . These exist toa greater or less extent on all the species, but are very easily removed and are therefore of uncertain value, So also with the spots of whitish exudation which I have observed to a greater or less extent on leucostictus, pilosicollis, angu- laris, Schaumii, Westwoodi, canaliculatus, and castunea,» These bave all been observed in ants’ nests. pn toll od Mentum plate entire behind. Anterior tarsi with Jast two joints thickened. Clypeus carinate at middle, head with lateral caring above the eyes prolonged backward in obtuse processes, ,...,....planatus Lee. 1879.) 385 (Horn. Anterior tarsi not thickened, more slender at tip: Disc of thorax trilobed. Clypeus carinate at middle ; tibize slender at base. ..... saucius Lec. Clypeus not carinate; broader than the head ; middle and posterior tibiee broad and flat; middle cox contiguous... Wheeleri Lec. Disc of thorax simple, not trilobed. Hind angles of thorax rounded, the margin posteriorly acute ; tarsi very short and flat above... 20. c....6. ...-.leucostictus Burm. Hind angles of thorax more or less prominent. Legs and tarsi short, the former decidedly fossorial, the latter much compressed. Tarsi very short, less than half the tibiz, hind angles continu- ous: with! therdise, 24 ic0i0s ceca aaiek '.+...-Schaumii Lec, Tarsi longer than half the tibie. Hind angles continuous with the disc..... Westwoodi Horn. Hind angles limited by an oblique groove.....angularis Lec. Legs ambulatorial, tarsi as long as the tibiz. ‘Hind angles continuous with the side margin. Front angles smooth, limited behind by a transverse impres- sion...... Jog. ot JOTI 5 oul), bits 6s pilosicollis Horn. Front angles continuous with the disc, punctured. Clypeus wider than the head......2...... ..-crinitus Lec. Clypeus not expanded...........4. «.++es+++Knochii Lee. Hind angles strongly retracted. Surface shining ...nitens Lee. Mentum plate with a small acute incisure behind, - Hind angles of thorax much retracted, anterior angles prominent and distinct from the dise.......2.2..60..4 04 +s eseeeee-Variolosus Kby. Hind angles feebly retracted, anterior angles continuous with the dise.. squamulosus Lec. Monten plate with a deep emargination at the middle of the posterior margin. Disc of thorax coarsely and densely punctured, Surface opaque. Anterior angles of thorax continuous with the dise. Hind angles feebly retracted, continuous at the outer margin. with the disc........ahisol Lbaan s inieaak.os hax .canaliculatus Kby. Hind angles strongly retracted, depressed below the surface of the thorax. sss. ee eee ee wn eee dle Gale's» wale ss " void of hairs, and with whitish dines similar to:thosé of seputeralis' but Tess” sinuous:, Body beneath as in: sepulendtis. Lengtlil4s. 60 inch; 12-15 mimi. di st The antennal club of ‘the male is very ‘distinetly longer, than that of. the female... The anterior tibiae, arey jnidentate: in. both sexes, but. the upper tooth is smabléerin the male, “0% By a-comparison of descriptions it will be’ Seeii that this” species is ‘more shining, less deeply sculptured, and the upper, surface without pubescence... The sculpture, of. the thorax and sides of elytra is notably different: inthe twovoHere'the” sides of the thorax are usually.margined’ with! etetacedus, but in sepulcralis rarely so. The sexual; characters ‘here sare! algo, better ;marked,; 238 mrodi10Vl odd arort euearioega ond of Occurs. in Kansas, Texas and; Nase deinserg odd ‘to sasl ExfasciferaiLees 0) 00) O88 ever aaa :1oloo bavorg bex Black; shining,| glabrous. Cisriauid! ebook as ylomg) aaa angles | rounded, margin reflexed,: not_emarginate,, surface, ner, punctured. Thorax triangular, sides feebly aerial HP e rcusg bi front of scutellum, apex truncate, the middle ‘of stig ar 4 elewated inva tubercle, surface sparscly punctate, color chang a large triangular black space, or with the space ‘replaced ‘by four black” spots. Elytra vaguely bicostate, punctures sparse anid coarse,on ithe disc subocellate, color a reddish-yellow, with) Me ave median, atdbsub apical transverse dentate fascial black, Pygidium éoneentrically strigoses:ve Body; BOTTHIT AMMA ne) | 1879.) F 405 (Horn. beneath very coarsely transversely strigose, and with sparse short pubes- cence. Abdomen very sparsely punctate, and slightly pubescent at the sides. Mesosternai umbone moderately prominent, rounded at. tip. Length .52-.74 inch ; 18-19 mm, PI. iv, fig. 16. The club of the male antenna is a little longer than that of the female ; anterior tibiz tridentate in both sexes, The specimens before me, six in number, are exactly alike in their elytral markings, scarcely varying in the minutest detail; in one in my cabinet, from Utah, the thorax has the large black discal space replaced by four smaller spots. The entirely glabrous surface and the general outline of this species place it in close alliance with fiulgida. Occurs in the Peninsula of California, and extends to South-western Utah at St. George (Dr. Palmer). E. fulgida Fab. This species, well known fromits brilliant green surface, varying to blue, needs but little comment. The upper surface is entirely devoid of pubes- cence. The head is brilliant green, the thorax similar in color, but mar- gined at the sides with yellow, its surface sparsely punctate. On the ely- tra the traces of coste are almost entirely obliterated, the punctuation usually sparse and indistinct, often more or less maculate, with cretaceous spots. The pygidium is concentrically strigose, and with four cretaceous spots more or less confluent. The metasterum is smooth at middle, and at sides deeply strigose. The abdomen is smooth, with but few coarse punc- tures at the sides, and along the margin of the segments, the sides are usually broadly cretaceous, sometimes with a double row of cretaceous spots. The mesosternal umbone is prominent, oval at tip. The legs are reddish or brownish-yellow, tarsi piceous. Length .52-.80inch ; 13-20 mm. The male has a larger antennal club than the female, the tibiee are tridentate in both. In the specimens from the Northern States, the elytra have less of the greenish surface lustre, and exhibit a brownish- red ground color; these have also the fewest whitish spots. In. the specimens from the Gulf States, the color is always more brilliant, the punctuation more evident, and the whit- ish spots more numerous. Occurs from the Middle States westward to Missouri, and south to Florida and Texas. E. californica Lec. Bright green, opaque above, shining beneath, very similar to fulgida, upper surface without pubescence. Clypeus longer than wide, slightly PROC. AMER, PHILOS. SOC. XVIII. 104, 22. PRINTED JAN. 3, 1880. Horn] ° 406. [Dee. 19, narrower in front, apical-margin deeply emarginate, feebly reflexed, sur- face not densely punctured. Thorax >transversely (oval,, sides’, rather strongly arcuate, base emarginate at middle, disc moderately conyex, sparsely obsoletely punctured, a small white spot-on each side of middle, lateral margin very narrowly cretaceous. Elytra obsoletely bicostate, the punctures. between. the cost very fine and in two rows, sides rather strongly plicate, suture rather strongly elevated, especially near the tip, where it is slightly prolonged, surface opaque green with small cretaceotis spots, the first at middle on the inner costa, the second at, three fourths, between this costa and the suture, a third behind the second near the apex, two at the margin placed obliquely behind the first two, a very small spot behind the. humerus. . Pygidium strigose, a white spot each. side. Body beneath shining green, sparsely clothed with hair along the sides. Metasternum and abdomen smooth at middle, coarsely punctured at the sides. _.Meso-metasternal protuberance long, parallel, rounded : at tip. Lica bright green, tarsi black.. Length .64 inch ; 16 mm. Of this species’ I have seen but-one specimen, the ino It was given by Baron Osten-Sacken to’ Dr. Leconte, with the statement that he obtained it in California, but Ido not know if it-was.collected, by him... The species seems to me to resemble the East Indian type and. to belong to. the genus (?) Glyciphana, but until an opportunity is afforded: for:com- parison no positive statement can be made, and 7 leave! it with the doubts above given. recy _ E. herbacea Oliv. Body beneath green, moderately shining, above dull green, ‘changing to opaque brown. Clypeus as broad as long, sides and apex reflexed, the latter not emarginate, surface sparsely punctate. Thorax transversely oval, sides moderately arcuate 9, or! more «triangular with sides nearly straight ¢', base emarginate.at middle, disc sparsely punctate. Elytra vaguely bicostate, intervals finely punctate, sides with coarse strige, surface variable from brownish-green to brown, opaque, with numerous whitish spots of irregular size and shape béhind the middle and near the apex and sides. Pygidium concentrically strigose and with short ‘hairs... Body be- neath green, shining, abdomen often brownish.. Metasternum smooth, at middle, strigose and hairy at the sides, abdomen sparsely punctate, over the entire surface, pubescent at the sides. Mesosternal button oval,’a little broader than long. ‘Length .56-.64 inch ; 14-16 mm. The male club is very decidedly longer than that of the female, the anterior tibiw tridentate in both sexes. This species is entirely devoid of pubescence on the upper surface, except the head and pygidium. It isa well: ‘Known species to all collectors, but less common than inda. 7 > be ATH Pi-2§ 1879.) 407 7 (Horn. Occurs, in the.Middle.States region, occasionally found abundantly, but usually not common. E. inda Linn. Clypeus broader than long, apex not emarginate, angles rounded, margin reflexed. _Mesosternal button more than twice as wide as long. ‘This species is so well known as to require no further comment... Occurs everywhere in the United States east of the Rocky Mountains. E. Schottii Lec. , ~ Black, beneath shining, above opaque, elytra variegated with short trans- verse luteous spots, Clypeus nearly square, anterior angles rounded, apical margin slightly reflexed, truncate, surface coarsely and moderateiy densely “punctured sparsely clothed with erect yellowish hair. Thorax subtriangu- lar, sides feebly arcuate, base emarginate at middle, surface coarsely punc- tured, more densely ‘at the sides and very sparsely near the base, pubescence short and:sparse, color piceous with three luteous vitte at middle. _Elytra piceous opaque, with irregular, short, transverse and sinuous luteous spots, disc yaguely bicostate, intervals biseriately vaguely punctate, at sides irregularly punctate and posteriorly distinctly plicate. Pygidium itdis- “tinetly concentrically strigose. Mesosternal protuberance transverse, arcu- ate in front.. Metasternum smooth at middle, coarsely strigose at. the sides, , Sparsely pubescent, Abdomen very sparsely punctate. and with short pu- bescence. Femora brownish, tibise and tarsi A pte Length .44-.56 inch ; 11-14 mm. The club of the male antenna is very nearly double that of the female, the anterior tibie are bidentate o, or triden- tate 2. Inform this: species bears a considerable resemblance to —herbacea, being much less robust and’ more depressed: than ,inda and.with, less distinct pubescence. There is, however, a very-close relationship between. inda and Schottii, as shown *by a general ‘similarity of appearance, and. the form of ihe mesosternal protuberance. Occurs in Texas, Eagle Pass.” Bibliography and Synonymy. EvuprxHori, Burm. .Handb. II, 370. bagiDh rieglgss 9B. areata Fab... Syst..Ent.. 1, p.50; Gory et Perch.. Mon. p. 267, pl. 52, fig. 1; Burm. ernanaehes, loc. cit. “p. uve. E. wertioals, n. ‘Sp. re Horn.,] 408 (Dee. 19, 1879. te 9 11, 12, 13. 14, 15, 16. 10. . aestuosa, Nl. sp. . Kernii Hald. Stansb. Expl. p. 374, pl. 9, fig. 10; Lec. Proce. Acad. 1853, p. 440. Clarki Lec. loc. cit., p. 441. texana Schauf. Sitz. Ges. Isis, 1863, p. 113. . hirtipes, n. sp. . devulsa, n. sp. . sepulcralis Fab. Syst. El. ii, p. 56; Burm. loc. cit., p. 376. lurida Oliv. Ent. 1, 6, p. 43, pl. 9, fig. 81; Schaum. Ann. Ent. Soc. Fr. 1849, p. 266- Reichei Gory et Perch. Mon. p. 210, pl. 38, fig. 3. melancholica Gory et Perch. loc. cit., fig. 4; Schaum. loc. cit. fascifera Lec. Proc. Acad. 1861, p. 336. fulgida Fab. Syst. Ent. p. 48; Gory et Perch. Mon. p. 1%, pl. 31, fig. 2 ; Burm. loc. cit. p. 393, californica Lec. New Species. 1863, p. 80. . herbacea Oliv. Ent. 1, 6, p. 35, pl. 11, fig. 101; Schaum. Ann. Ent. Soc. Fr. 1845, p. 375. antennata Gory et Perch. Mon. p. 177, pl. 31, fig. 4. pubera Gyll. Schénh. Syn. Ins, 1, 3, App. p. 53; Burm. loc. cit. p. 391. .inda Linn. Syst. Nat. Ed. X, p. 352; Oliv. Ent. 1, 6, p. 40, pl. 6, fig. 40; Burm. Hand. iii, p. 389. barbata Say. Journ. Acad. iii, p. 239. brunnea Gory et Perch. Mon. p. 267, pl. 51, fig. 6. marylandica Frobl. Naturf. 26, p. 116. . Schottii Lec. Proc. Acad. 1853, p. 441. Explanation of Plate 1V. . Cremastochilus planatus Lec. C. saucius Lec. C. Wheeleri Lec. C. leucostictus Burm. C. Schaumii Lec. . C. crinitus Lec. . C. nitens Lec. . C. variolosus Kby. C. Harrisii Kby. C. retractus Lec. Tarsal monstrosity in C, saucius. Euphoria verticalis Horn. B. hirtipes Horn. B. aestuosa Horn. B. devulsa Horn. B. fascifera Lec. Proc. Amer.Philos.Soc. Vol. XVIII. tS § Fee. oh cree ss > pel = = eee ees 1880.] 409 Stated Meeting, January 2, 1880. - Present, 5 members. President, Mr. Fratey, in the Chair. A letter accepting his appointment to prepare an obituary notice of the late M. Michel Chevalier, was received from Mr. Moncure Robinson, dated Dec. 22, 1879. A letter of envoy was received from the London Meteor- - ological office, dated Dec. 1879. A letter requesting a copy of Proc. No. 100, to complete a set was received from the Central Austalt fiir Meteorologie, dated Vienna, Dec. 4, 1879. A letter respecting exchanges of specimens was received from Mr. H. B. Dawson, dated Morisania, N. Y., Dee. 5, 1879. Donations for the Library were received from the Prus- sian Academy; Revue Politique; London Astronomical, Geographical and Meteorological Societies, and the Cobden Club; the Royal Geological Society of Ireland; the Massa- chusetts Historical Society ; the Boston Society of Natural History ; the American Chemical Society; Mr. A. R. Grote; the Franklin Institute; American Journal of Mathematics ; the North American Entomologist ; the U. 8. Treasury De- partment; the Botanical Gazette; the Ministerio de Fo- mento of Mexico, and Mr. 8. H. Scudder. A communication on the Velocity of Light, by P. E. Chase was read. A paper entitled “ An account of an old work on Cosmog- raphy, by Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr.” was postponed to be read at the next meeting. A paper on the relation of the crystalline rocks of South- eastern Pennsylvania to the Silurian limestones, and on the Hudson river age of the Hydromica schists (with map and specimens), by Mr. Charles E. Hall, of the Geological Survey, was postponed to be read at the next meeting. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xvi. 105. 8A. PRINTED MARCH 30, 1880. : 410 (Jan, 2, The report of the judges and clerks of the annual election for officers of the’Society was read; and the following named persons were declared duly elected to be the officers for the ensuing year: President. ~ Frederick Fraley. Vice- Presidents. Eli K. Price, Ey Otis Kendall, «|. .J. Li. LeConte. - Secretaries. P. EK. Chase, G. F, Barker, , yout ® Lesley, ; D. G, Brinton, a Councillors for three years. R. E. Rogers, Robert Bridges, Oswald Seidensticker, Richard Wood. Curators. Hector Tyndale, ‘C. M. Cresson, Henry Phillips, Jr. Treasurer. J. Sergeant Price. Pending nominations Nos. 885 to 892 were read. Mr. Lesley was nominated for Librarian for the ensuing year. And the meeting was adjourned. 1880.41) AVI BI ie » Stated Mestng January 16, 1880; 2 Deieont: 16 members. President, Mr. Frawey, in the Chair. A letter of acknowledgment was received from the R. Academia dei Lincei, Dec. 16, 1879. (102, 103). Letters of envoy were received from the U. S. Department of the Interior, Jan..2; the U. 8. Naval Observatory, Jan. 16; and Dr. B. A. Gould, Director of the Argentine Ob- servatory at Cordova, 8. A, Donations for the Library were received from the Geo- logical Survey of Japan; the Russian Academy; the Zoologischer Anzeiger; M. Delesse, and the Revue Poli- tique of Paris; London Nature; the Museum of Compara- tive Zodlogy at Cambridge ; the Canadian Naturalist ; Har- vard., Observatory; .Silliman’s. Journal; the Scientific American ; the Numismatic Society ; the Journal of Phar- macy ; the Cincinnati Natural History Society ; the Botani- cal Gazette ; the Bureau of Education ; the Geological Sur- vey of the Territories; the Fish Commissioners; the De- partment of the Interior ; General. Wheeler ; and the Mexi- can Meteorological Bureau. The death of Dr. Jacob Bigelow, at Boston, Jan. 10, 1879, aged 92, was reported. Mr. Phillips read an elaborate description of his latin copy of the curious Cosmography of Sebastian Munster, who was born 1489, and died at Basle, circa 1552. Mr. Hall exhibited his provisionally colored map of south-eastern Pennsylvania, from Trenton westward to and across the Susquehanna River, and discussed the age of the Philadelphia rocks on his hypothesis of their metamor- phism, considering them Silurian, and perhaps in part Devo- nian. Mr. Rand, Prof. Frazer and Mr. Lesley took part in the 412 [Jan. 16, discussion; the last, two. dissenting from. the vaew. held by Mr. Hall. Diy A communication was made, by Dr. Greene “On. i a New Synthesis of Saligenin.” M Mr. Lesley was elected. Librarian Sar the ensuing year. The President spprintod, the Standing Committees)as fol- . lows :— ate Seay On Finance. 4 Mr. Eli K~ Price,.,,, Mr. B. V.-Marsh, Mr. Henry Winsor. On Publication. Dr. John L. LeConte, Dr. D. G. Brinton, Dr. G. H. Horn, Prof. E. Thomson, Dr. C. M. Cresson. On the Hall. Gen. H. Tyndale, Mr. 8. W. Roberts,. .. __ Mr. dS. Price. » - On the Library. Mr. Eli K. Price, Rev. C. T, Krauth, Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., Dr, R. 8. Kenderdine, .. Prof, E. J. Houston. Pending nominations Nos. 885 to 892. were, read, soalaie to, and ballotted for, and on scrutiny of the ballot boxes by dng 418 the President, the following’ persons ‘were Heclitid ‘duly -Riegiod members of the Society :— “Cav. Damiano Muoni, of Milan.” Mr. Charles Francis Adams, of Boston.”~ ~ Mp. Henry Wharton} of Philadelphia. ) Mfr Charles A. Ashburner, of Philadelphia: ° Mr. Robert C. Winthrop, of Boston. Mr. Archibald Geikie, of Edinburgh. Dr. Oliver Wendell Holmes, of Boston. Mr. George Whitney; of Philadelphia. And the meeting was. adjourned. Stated Meeting, February 6,1880. Present, 14 members. President, Mr. Fraey, in the Chair. Letters accepting membership were received from Robert ©. Winthrop, 90 Marlborough. Street, Boston, January 23; Henry Wharton, 2011 Delancey Place, Philadelphia, Janu- ary 19; Charles A. Ashburner, 9 Woodland Terrace, West Philadelphia, January 28; Charles Francis Adams, Bos- ton, January 22; and Oliver Wendell Holmes, M. D., Bos- ton, January 23. Letters of acknowledgment and postal cards (Proc. 104), were received from many correspondents and members. Letters of envoy were received from the London Meteoro- logical Office, December, 1879, and the Royal Society of New South Wales, December 18, 1879. Letters were received from Prof. S. F. Baird and Miss ee A+Henry, respecting Prof. Henry’ s library:: / A& letter was received’ from’ Mr. J..G. Henderson, Win- 414 [Feb!'6?" chester, Scott “Co., Ill, January “6, respecting “Thoand skulls, Donations to the Library were received from the Asiatic Society of Japan; the Academies. at, Berlin and Brussels ; the Ludwig Salvator Museum, at Dresden; the Geographi- cal Society ‘and School of Mines, at Paris ; the Geographical Commercial Society, at Bordeaux; the R: Astronomical Society and Meteorological Society, in London; the Rev. 8. 8. Lewis of Cambridge, England; the Museum of Compara- ative Zoology in Cambridge, Mass. ; the Boston Society of Natural History; the American Journal of Science and Arts in New Haven; Prof. W. Carrington Bolton ; the His- . torical Society and American Chemical Society, of New York; the Poughkeepsie Society of Natural History; the Pennsylvania Historical Society ; the Franklin Institute ; the American Journal of Pharmacy ; the American Journal of the Medical Sciences and Medical News; Mr. Henry Phil- lips, Jr.; and Dr. B. A. Gould, Director of the Observatory at Cordova, South America. The death of the Hon. Adolph E. Borie, at Philadelphia, on the 5th instant, aged 70, was announced by Mr. Price. The death of the Rev. Dr. Rudder, at Philadelphia, on the 29th ultimo, aged 58, was announced by Mr. Price. Prof. Cope exhibited suites of skulls of extinct mammalia (allied to canis, felis and ursus), obtained in the Tertiary de- posits on the Pacific Coast, and described their order of evo- lution. Among them was the skull of a large cave-bear. _. He then read a paper “On the Foramina perforating the posterior part of the Squamosal bone of the Mammalia.” New nominations Nos. 893, 894, 895 were read. Mr. Fraley reported the receipt’ of the last quarterly in- terest on the Michaux Legacy, due Jan. 1, amounting to $132. On motion of Mr. Phillips it was ‘* Resolved, That whereas the Society was incorporated on the 15th day of March, 1780, a fact on which the Jate Mr. Robert M: Patterson laid 1880,] 9) 415 great stress in his address before the Society in 1843, as having given ‘to this Society for the first time a legal position which it now occupies,’ and ‘« Whereas, "The 15th day of March, 1880, will mark the hundredth anni- versary of such incorporation, therefore be it - © Resolved, That the Board of Officers and members in Council be re- spectfully asso to make suitable MISeaageTmentD for celebrating this an- niversary.’’ , And the meeting was adjourned. Stated Meeting, February 20, 1880. Present, 17 members. President, Mr, FRALEY, in the Chair. A letter accepting his appointment to prepare a eulogy on Dr. Wood, was received from Dr. Henry Hartshorne, dated on the 9th instant. ‘A letter of envoy from the Harvard College Observatory was received, dated Jan. 29. An wabativelete cist of the receipt of Proceedings, No. 104, was received from Prof. Wm. P. Blake. A circular letter of invitation to send delegates to the Centennial Anniversary of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, on the 26th of May next, in Boston, Mass., was read and its consideration postponed to the next meet- ing. ; ) vist*™ A circular letter of invitation to attend the celebration’ of the two-hundredth anniversary of the discovery of the Falls of St. Anthony, at 10 o’clock, a. M., on the 3d day of July, 1880, on the University reeset Minneapolis, Minne- 416 [Feb. 20," sota, was read and its consideration we ipcto to ‘the next meeting. te YT A circular letter was received fréen the late Chief of the Statistical Bureau of Sweden, Herr Fr. Th. Berg, and another from his successor, Herr Elis Sidenbladh, desiring a continus ; ance of correspondence. “Donations to the Library were received from the Swedish’ Bureau of Statistics; the Academia dei Lincei ; the Revue Politique; the Bordeaux Geographical Secteiy > London Nature; the American Academy, and Boston Society of Natural’ History; the Hon. G. C. Winthrop; the Har- vard Observatory; the North American Entomologist ; the Franklin Institute ; the Medical News; the Smithsonian Institution; the U. S. Naval Observatory; the Light House Board; the Department of the Interior, the Cincinnati Society of Natural History, and the Revista Scientifica. An obituary notice of the late Joseph Henry was read by Mr. Fairman Rogers. The death of Mr. James Lenox, in New York, on the 18th inst., aged 80, was announced by the Secretary. The death of Dr. John Neill, in Philadelphia, on the 12th inst., aged 60, was announced by Mr. Price. On motion, Dr. Brinton was appointed to prepare an obituary notice of the deceased. Dr. Kénig communicated facts respecting his discovery of Spinel and Chondronite in the, crystalline limestone of Ches- ter county, Pennsylvania, and exhibited specimens, compar- ing them with specimens from Orange county, N..Y., and explaining their analogy with the minerals of Franklin, N. J. ms Dr, Brinton communicated a memoir on the ‘Tirjuaus language of Florida, by Albert 8, Gatschet, and gave a ver- bal summary of its contents, manner and. value... This, is, the third important study ofthis group of languages, the other two having been already published, in the Proceedings, of the Society. vit hevios 19 at oer 417 ~Prof. Frazer explained by diagrams his new arrangement, by a side-hinged mirror, for illuminating intensely the whole. field’ of the object, under a microscope.,, A. strong side light is reflected at. a low angle from the under surface of a glass plate placed across the front of the objective, on to and again from the side mirror suspended, from, hinges, ori to the object, and so back through the tube to the eye,of the observer. . The minutes of the last meeting of the Board of Officers and Council were read. Pending nominations Nos. 893, 894, 895, and new nomi; nations Nos. 896, 897 were read. _ And the meeting was adjourned, Stated Meeting, March 5, 1880. Present, 17 members. President, Mr. Fratey, in the Chair. A letter accepting membership was received from Mr. Archibald Geikie, dated Geological Survey Office, Edin- burgh, Feb. 2. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Natural History Society, Emden, dated Nov. 15 (102); the Royal Society of Luxembourg, dated Aug. 20 (102); the Société Hollandaise, dated Harlem, Sept 20 (102, 103); and the Sur- geon General’s Office, at Washington, dated Feb. 20 (104). Letters of envoy were received from the Trigonometrical PROC. AMER. PHILOS. 80C. XVIII. 105, 3B. PRINTED MARCH 30, 1580. 418 {March 5,' Survey of India, dated: Debra: Dun; Jan. 20°; the Natural: History Society, dated» Emden, Nov. 15; the Royal: Saxon Society, dated. Leipsig, Oct. 25; the Imperial Academy, dated Vienna, Dec. 1; the Société Hollandaise, dated: Harlem, Dee. ; the.U, 8, Naval Observatory, and Department. of. ine Interior, dated Washington, Feb. 19. | A-letter respecting Dr. Gabb’s. memoir was received from Mr. R. 8. Swords, acting Librarian of the New Jersey His-. torical Society, dated Newark, March 38. Donations for the Library, were received from the Mining ated Bureau at Victoria; the Repertorium fiir Meteorologie at. St.. Petersburg; tha Academies: at Berlin, Vienna, pe and Brussels; the Societies at Moscow, Stuttgardt, Halle, Giessen, Emden, Bordeaux, Liége, and Harlem ; the Swedish Bureau of Statistics; the German Geological Society at Berlin; the Geological Association at Dresden; the Revue Politique; the Grand Ducal Institute at Luxembourg; the Minister of the Interior at Brussels ; the London Astro- nomical, Geographical and Meteorological Societies ; Society of Arts, and London Nature; the Essex Institute; the New York Academy of Sciences; the Brooklyn Entomological Society; the North American Entomologist; Dr. Wm, Elder; Mr. W. B. Taylor; the U. S. Department of the Interior; the Army Bureau; the Journal of Pharmacy, at Philadelphia; the Cincinnati Observatory ; the St. Louis Public School Library ; the Kansas Historical Society ; and the San Francisco Mercantile Library Association. An obituary notice of the late John W. Harden was base by Mr, Lesley, The death of Gen’l Clement A. Finley, in West Philadel: phia, September, 1879, was announced by the Secretary. On motion the committee on the paper of X, Y. Z. for the. Magellanic premium, was entrusted with the care of the | document for examination, to report. Mr. Ashburner exhibited specimens and photographs of, Oil Sands, and read a paper on the constitution of the Brad- 1880.) 101 419 [Ashburner. ford Oil Sand of MeKean county, Pennsylvania. Remarks were made by Dr. Rogers and Mr. Lesley. Prof. Frazer exhibited his microscopic reflector, made by Mr. Zentmeyer. | “Mr. Frazer then aisiinsiaa the principles of the problem of the popular 15 number puzzle with Mr. Briggs.) ‘Pending nominations Nos. 893 to 897, and new nomina- tions Nos. 898 to 901 were read. On motion, the subject (postponed from the last meeting) of appointing delegates to assist at the Centennial Anniversary of the American Academy of Science and Art, at Boston, was' referred to the President, Mr. Fraley, with power to act. “And the meeting was adjourned. On the Constitution of the Bradford Oil Sand. By Chas. A. Ashburner, M.S., Asst. Second Geological.Survey of Pennsylvania. ( With a plate.) (Read before the American’ Philosophical Society, March 5; 1889.) The constitution of the petroleum sands of Western Pennsylvania, which were discovered in Venango county twenty-one years ago, and which have ever since been producing mineral oil, is no doubt familiar to most of our geologists. The question suggests itself ; in what way is the Bradford sand, of McKean county, Pennsylvania, and Cattaraugus county, New . York, dissimilar ? Beforé describing the structure of the sands, permit me to. give some general facts showing the relative per centage of dry holes and the out-put of ‘the producing wells in the two districts: At a glance; the comparison” will indicate that some essential differences must exist in the sands and mode of occurrence of the oil, to account for the diflerent results which have been obtained. During the year 1879, there were 475 wells drilled to the Venango oil ig A} Y M : Ashburner.]} 420 [Mareh,5; sands in thé counties of Warren, Venango, ‘Clarion and Butler ; “of this number 122 were dry holes or produced no oil ; being 25. 7 per cent. HM In the Bradford or Northern district, there were ‘during the same year, 2536 wells drilled to the Bradford oil sand, of which number but 76 were dry holes or only.3 per cent,; being nearly 23 per cent. less than in cy Venango or Western district. The average daily production, for the first month, soe the walle: drilled i in the Bradford sand was about 20 barrels, while for the wells in the Venango sands it did not attain that amount.* When we take these facts into ‘con- sideration, we can readily understand why there should have been’ mee wells drilled in the Northern district to only 475 in the Western. Since the beginning of the year 1875, when the Bradford oil horizon was discovered, there have been 6249 wells drilled in the district, of which 236 were dry holes or 3.77 per cent. From the most authentic statistics which I can gather in the Western district, about one-fourth of all the wells which have been drilled in the Neate sands, since their discovery in 1859, have proved dry. ne Be ee rae The Bradford sand consists of a gray and witite sand, of ‘about the eae coarseness as the ordinary beach sand of the Jersey coast; compact, yet loosely cemented. The average thickness of the sand is about 45 feet, and from top to bottom, the sandy strata change but little in their general character. It is only when specimens, from the successive layers are placed side by side and closely examined, that any difference in structure can be recognized. The grains of sand are,angular, vary but slightly in size, color, and the quantity,of cementing material, which holds fer together in their rock bed. The same homogeneousness, which characterizes the vertical section, s found to exist over a considerable horizontal area, In fact but little change is found to exist.in the sand obtained from wells 15 miles apart, or in, the sand from-the intermediate wells. The greatest length of the Bradford district is 18 miles north, 30° re its greatest width is 12 miles ina north and south direction. The area of the territory is between 100 and 110 square miles. In this area the sand is so regular and constant, that if wells were drilled at random the number of dry holes, which would be obtained, would hardly exceed 2 in every 100.. The percentage of dry holes spoken of as being obtained in the district includes those which were drilled outside of the probable oil territory and, were genuine wild-cat wells, In the Western district the characteristics of the Venango ee are quite different. The third. or, bottom sand, which is the most productive of the * Some of the wells drilled to the Venango third ofl sand have produced from 2000 to 2000 barrels of oll per day, while the largest well ever found In thé Brad- ford district bas Hot exceeded as many hundred, The largest individual wells have been located in the Western district; the largest average wells in, the Northern district, 1890,J)° 421 [Ashburner. group, is sometimes thin, very fine, micaceous and muddy when taken from the sand pump ; in.this condition it seldom produces any petroleum, . This is the character of the. sand at Pleasantville, where it contained only a trace of oil, “The black oil of this district came from what was known as the stray or split third, occurring some 25 feet above the regular sand. ’ Where the Venango sands are formed in thin layers, fine grained and clayey the driller views the territory with suspicion. Nore,—It must. be sacar dent in comparing the. sands.of the. two dis. tulets that they belong to different geologic formations. Based on lithological and stratigraphical fucts, I make the Venango oil sand group the equivalent of the Red Catskill, No. 1X (Old Red Sandstone), while the Bradford sand is of Chemung age. : The following general section shows their relative positions : ewe ) ENS, TPE RE MTOR SE . 40 feet ? MMUE UME R.< 6.i6's dee vevinedu aks 105 *< Venango group, Catskill, No. IX. 4 Second sand...........-.... wt ergs ETM caer cs ¢ unas baadeh 110° ~< @ "ERAN BANU sss wah cues base c ier PIS Sy TritOFwah As N2083 Ps, FFOIO?. 1°) 1000 SDAA f i No, VIL ABradlord sand’) 69.45 PEW OUR AA 45" ~ See « Oil Sands of Penna.,”’ Franklin Institute Journal, April 1878, also ‘Bradford Oil District,” Transactions American Institute Mining Engi: neers, Vol. VII; by the Author. The accompanying illustration shows a typical specimen of a good pro- ducing third sand in the Venango group and a specimen of Bradford sand, such as might be taken from any of the producing wells in the Northern district. A productive Venango sand consists of a white, gray or yellow pebble rock ; the pebbles being loosely cemented together and generally bedded in fine sand. The rock is open and porous. The intersticés be- tween the pebbles and sand grains are extensive and capable of containing a large bulk of oil; but this character does not maintain itself over any extended area.’ ‘Areas of such sand are small and scattered and are sepa- rated by sand beds, possessing a character belonging to the 1 ptt sands. Adon! ‘The Venango sands are not homogeneous over any considerable area and are frequently very heterogeneous in section, The thicktiess of the sand Waries ; in one’ locality the upper part of the sand may be pebbly and of productive character and the lower part fine and contain no oil, while but a short, distance away the conditions may be reversed. X * Such then are the priséipel features ae the two ry oil producing zoelts “of Pennsylvanta. © Lesiey.] 422 [Mareh5, .“Résimé. The Bradford sand is fine but porous’; constant in thickness’; homogeneous in section ; the character of the sections femintning the same over a very wide area. ad The Venango sands are sometimes coarse, pebbly and porous, sis some- times fine, compact and clayey ; variable in thickness ; heterdgendotis in section and subject to sudden changes in very short distances. The difference in the structure of the sands, when considered in connec- tion with their relative productiveness, is a strong argument in support of the view which has been_accepted by the best informed of our geologists that the sands are only reservoirs or sponges which serve to hold the oil, coming almost entirely from an inferior formation to which itis indigenous. The conditions under which these two sands were deposited must have been essentially different. The Venango sands were undoubtedly shore and shallow water deposits. The currents, by which the sediments form- ing the group were transported, were evidently rapid and shifting. It has been suggested that the sands may have been laid down in a river bed. This would necessitate dry land at the time, on either side of the terti- tory where the sands are at present found. The Bradford sand was possibly deposited in deeper water, by a ‘slower and more constant current. It does not bear any evidences of being a shore deposit, but was probably formed in a bay or estuary. An Obituary Notice of the Late John W. Harden. By J. P. reuse (Read before the American sa cy gent Society, March 5, 1880. ) John W. Harden was born at Leicester, England, June 19th, 1816, and died at Philadelphia, November 8th, 1879. He was versed in the arts of Horticulture and Floriculture, and for a number of years followed them professionally, Was especially successful in designing, ornamenting and laying out estates, notably those of Hon. Capt, Cust, Wormleybury, Hertfordshire and Sie Ralph Howard, Bart.; Craven Cottage on the Thames. He commenced practice as a Mining “Engineer in 1846, and in that year took the management of the Hawkesbury Colliery, near Coventry, Eng- land. He was the means of introducing into the Warwickshire coal field most of the modern improvements at that time only in use at the best col- lieriee in the North of England, Wire ropes took the place of hemp ropes 1880.) 1) 423 (Lesley. and chains,.guides and carriages were introduced, high speed direct.acting hoisting engines replacing the slow,) geared machine of the condensing type. These improvements required corresponding facilities, and extended operations underground, so that much larger areas of mineral, were by these means won through one shaft. He left this.colliery in 1857 for the. purpose of sinking the New, Shafts for the Exhall Coal Company, for winning the coal and ironstone under- lying, the Blakeslee estate, to the dip of the, Hawkesbury Colliery. He succeeded in passing the waterbearing strata and reaching coal, although a former attempt by others had failed, He here met with an accident from which it was thought he could not recover. In descending the shaft he was caught between the carriage and surface plate ; receiving injuries about the head and face which disfigured him, and_no doubt shortened his life many years. After his recovery he made a. professional trip to this country, from which he derived so much benefit that he determined to settle in America, and did so in 1865, and fora time had, charge of the Anthracite Mines of the Plymouth Coal Company, in Luzerne county, Pennsylvania. In 1866, he with his sons, established and maintained a large professional practice in Wilkesbarre until 1870, when he removed to Philadelphia, continuing practice until physical. cisability confined him to the, house, His last report was made in August, 1874, for the Cameron Coal Company. He retained all his faculties, and continued to give advice up to within two weeks of his death. He was married three times, and leaves a widow and two children, be- sides four grown sons by his first marriages. He was a member of the North of England Institute of Mining and Mechanical Engineers, the American Philosophical Society, and the Amer- ican Institute of Mining Engineers. My acquaintance with Mr. Harden commenced on board the Liverpool steamer in the autumn of 1863. I was going to make a special investiga- tion of the alleged success of a new process for hardening the heads of rails, which led me on to an examination of the Bessemer experiments in various parts of Europe; and he was returning from the journey to mifich I have already alluded. His face was disfigured by the terrible injuries it had received ; but that could not conceal the dignity and amiability which was natural to it. He was attractive in all respects; and I soon found the utmost satisfaction in our intercourse. Sir Henry Holland was our constant companion in our walks on deck, and it would be hard to say which of the two, undine as they were, inspired one with more pleasure. ‘ies No one could long know Mr. Harden without loving him and caltfiding in him. His judgments.of men’s motives: were kind; his criticisms: of their acts tempered by justice and. guided. by a long’ experience ;. his opinions were liberaland manly ; his business decisions were gravely and Lesley.| : 424 [March 5, concisely expressed, after a close and systematic statement of all the facts of the case after personal examination. He impressed every one with the feeling that tliey were dealing with a man who professed to know only certain things, and to know these because he had used or made opportuni- ties for learning them well, before he spoke of them. His uprightness was so evidently ingrained that it seemed to hold no relations with either an educated sense of duty, public opinion, or business interests ; and the per- fect straightforwardness with which he treated everything and everybody gave to his carriage and demeanor the air of nobility. These traits of character with which I[ could not help being greatly-im- pressed during our voyage, and which merely made me at that time look upon my companion of a week as one of the finest specimens of man I would be likely to encounter, became in after years the basis of a warm friendship between us. In the following year I was called upon to designate the Superintendent of an extensive colliery near Wilkesbarre, to equip which it was neces- sary to make both sinkings and buildings, lay railways and throw a large bridge across the Susquehanna river. I was fortunate enough to induce Mr. Harden to accept the responsible position, and he took this oppor- tunity to settle with his sons in America. Had his accident of 1863 not implanted the seeds of paralysis in his brain, we should not now be lamenting the long sufferings and death of a remarkable man ; for, during a number of years he acquired a reputation among our coal and iron men, which would have placed him foremost among professional experts of Mining Engineering in Pennsylvania. His physical energy and endurance so well supported his intellectual ability ; his long experience was so completely at the command of a good judgment; the warmth of his heart colored so charmingly his inflexible and proud integrity ; while natural force of will and earnestness of pur- pose made his executive plans rapid and direct, and his methods so thoroughgoing as to be the reverse of that penny-wise pound-foolish, hand to mouth manner so common with Americans, —that life alone failed to the establishmeat of his fame among us. Such was the man whose name stands worthily on the list of members of our Society. 1880.] 425 ; [Chase. Astronomical Approximations. Ti, ut By Pliny Earle Chase, LL.D., Professor of Philosophy in Haverford College. (Read before the American Philosophical Society; Jam 2j1880:) IT. Velocity of Light, and Kirkwood’s Analogy. - The cosmical undulations should produce effects at every centre of in- ertial reaction, which would furnish data for approximate determinations of the velocity of light. We have seen that the favorable central position of the Earth, in the belt of greatest condensation, leads to a simple equation for Sun’s apparent diameter and, therefore, for finding the quotient of Earth’s distance from Sun by Sun’s semi-diameter. The accuracy of the result is confirmed id other inferences which may be drawn from the same data. “’Kirkwood’s Analogy may . formulated thus : Lhe. wc ~2 wan ir ln C) « C) | Let 9, denote Sun’s semi-diameter ; Py Py etc., the mean. vector-radii_ of the several planets (Mercury,, Venus,, etc.); “, mass; ¢, time of rotation synchronous with revolution at Laplace’s limit ; ¥,. number of rotations in ¥, orbital revolutions synchronous with primitive solar rotation ; » » velocity of light ; 0,» velocity of revolution (\/gr) at the surface of planet, ; planetary radius ; the subscript figures being applicable to / 4, ¥, 2, be r, The actions and reactions of light-waves, between the nucleal centre (Sun) and the principal centre of primitive condensation (Earth), lead to the equation, similar to Kirkwood’ &: (“:) x (2) GC) 2 x3) 3 bi Ca (2.) For Earth, Pn = Py = 214.54)% ; Yn = ¥; = 866.2567,; 0, = 0, = .0012- 383r,; v = 214.549, + 497.83 — .43096,. Substituting, and taking the square root of equation (2), we get : 214.54? 00128887, Mo 366.256 ~ 4309600 Hs . If we designate density by ©, mass varies as 7°9, or as the square of 1 .§ Therefore Os =- (} + z ‘) = ( = + 5074 see. y = 8.9175. 9 Oo Io 93 214.542 PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XviII. 105. 8c. PRINTED FEB. 28, 1880. Chase.| 426 (Jan. 2, Substituting i in (8), dividing and reducing: 214.542 43096 Po 366.256 °° “ooigaas 89 4 ¥ 108.1557; =P) = 428,600 miles. pote eeeeeeecess (4.) Py = 214.549, = 91,950,000 miles. aniorite == Ps o 40 88 == 184,710 miles. .. yaitey [soils oft If we suppose Sun to contract till Laplace’ s limit would pt A REREE ath Sun’s present equatorial radius, the foregoing equations would all be*de- ducible from the following : ers 5 Bs ts a Os Oh TOSOHUGHO ; Ho ty . % = Ps jidy . 9 4.007." be saa is ae gnantinins @») aie 11624 dy ~~ 184,710" PO Er cer eres eae obtecss == 328,350/g as adtat somk : 7 te 2 ie nae In thesis first approximations no allowance has been ‘dame for orbital ec- centricities, or for disturbances by the principal:planets,, Iam, therefore, inclined to:attach more importance to the following methods.) 9) «9s 10! » The equivalence of luminous action and reaction, between: the; nucleal ‘centre (¢)) and the principal centre of primitive condensation (¢,), is shown by Earth’s still retaining one-half of the original rupturing force... Accord- ing to Stockwell, Earth’s mean eccentricity is .0338676, (If the rupturing locus is represented by mean. perihelion, since the superficial velocity of rotation in .a condensing nebula varies inversely as radius, the rupturing 1 22 1 velocity was 9001804 times the mean Lipp Al The constant solar etqua tion me Moy zy, Would be satisfied in 9661324 x 4 yx, If we look only to solar bs at the corresponding nucleal surface, or in. 9661324 yrs if, we look to initial terrestrial gravity as one-half of corresponding solar gravity. = ,9661324 x. 865.256 x 86400 x 82-0874 495, 987 mites. | 5280 @) hae ps = 497. 830, = = 92,242,000 miles: fal j In equation (4), if we substitute Earth’s mean solar day for the sidereal day, we get: 866.256 a 428,600 == 429,200 mil Y= 565, 06)! x 428, 429, miles. > py, 92,070,000. miles. ) z 0, = 184,970 miles. Sie ey nisite vime-nel ) By the well-known laws of elasticity, M, the solar modulus of, light, or the height of a homogeneous ethereal atmosphere, at Sun’s surface, which 1880] 427 | Chase. would transmit undulations witli thé velocity of light, is C ‘) Po. This is % equivalent to @--3) Py a2 474 500/,. For D> as we have oe ‘seen, is .480960,, and a is 27s = /0062563,. If nb ot i ees 2 eee Pp iis the cyclical variations of alternately increasing and diminishing stress, to Which every. particle. of the Sun i is exppaed during each ,half-rotation, are due to the velocity of light, the equations, fore o— y Oye and V. gy po Po == +9006- 2563/5, Ge : = 00000039142, 2a 2X3 oe Ee a 2,202,050 sec, "25.486 dy. f 77°77 7(8:) {.€ = : 0 The continual disturbances at Sun’s surface, and the combined influences to rotation and revolution upon spots near the solar equator, make it im- possible to find the exact value of ¢, by direct observation. Laplace’s esti- ‘Mate was 25} days ; Carrington’s’25.38 days. According to his observa- tions, “near the equator the period was about 25.3 days, while it was'a day longer in 30° latitude. Moreover, the period of rotation seems to be dif- ‘ferent at different times, and to vary with the frequency of the spots: But ‘the laws of these variations are not yet established. In consequence of their existence, ‘we cannot fix any definite time of rotation for the Sun, as we can for the Earth and for some of the planets. It varies at different times, ‘and wnder different circumstances, from 25 to 26} days.’’ * It is; therefore, ‘impossible now ‘to assign any more probable value to t than the one. which T have deduced theoretically from the stress of lumi- nous waves. If future observations should lead to the acceptance of a period which is either slightly less or slightly greater, the discrepancy can be easily accounted for, either by orbital neotieranjon or by inertial resist- ance and retardation. If Pa represents Stockwell’s determination of the centre of the belt of greatest condensation (1.016878, = 218.169.) and if we suppose a simi- larity of action and reaction at the nucleal centre sh sion’ $ centre = ¢,) and at the dense- id centre _ ), we find ; _ a 7 yr. Io (“)« (“:) : dy. ined Ys hg (474500 x 1.016878 x 214. 54)? — 366.2567. >» Js Jo = 27.78y,. art, te 5) Py = 40 Sets y= 27.783 .9179 8962.8. = 431,250 miles. vas Js %0- Ps = 214. 54), = 92, 520, 000 miles. aay i 185,850 miles. : é By WOE f *Newcomb: Popular press 05 — Us 7 F) U3 Ls : 186,025 a | Sanpete oie so cee fii nitatid aceite aes tae 11.5 a 261.76 "Va.0a8 = 84-8 Mo — 311.56) >< 1047.88 = 1326,500 | ai : A similar reciprocity, introducing some further interesting considerations, may be found by looking to the centre of reciprocal nebular rupture, Nep- tune’s secular perihelion. Adopting Stockwell’s value of Neptune’s greatest eccentricity (.0145066), and taking the mean between Stockwell’s (30.03386) and Newcomb’s (80.05487) estimates of Neptune’s mean radius-vector, Neptune’s secular. perihelion () is at 87’, Both the linear centre of oscillation and the collisions of subsiding particles} tend to produce cosmi- *Trans. Amer. Acad., 1859, |) tAnte, xvii, 100. 0.088 (@) widlsensbao jis dqseA torecioiT yd aoevig as -aol Chase. ] 430 (Jan, 2, cal aggregations at =f This tendency, considering © as a centre, would fix the boundary of the belt of retrogradely rotating planetsat = o —z'p,. = 9.8695/,, or between Saturn’s mean and aphélion positions, so that Saturn well represents the surface of the belt of directly rotating planets: When the rotating wave-velocity (w) was operating in Saturn’s orbit, ( at = the orbital velocity ¢ )» was found at — = =)t or in the asteroidal belt (3.142), nearly midway between the mean perihelion of Mars (1.403), and the secular perihelion of Jupiter (4. 886), and ‘also’ nearly midway, between Earth’s secular aphelion (1.068), and Jupiter’s mean distance (5. 203), as well as between ‘the mean aphelia of, Venus (.774),.and Jupiter (5.519). The hext change of ‘wave-rotating to orbital velocity brings us to Earthythe central and greatest mass in the belt of greatest condensation. If we start from 2, the surface of early subsidence which would give ‘orbital csuhey at, all these relations may be embodied in, the equations i ta 0, Tt SAY AS erritee 2 Yo V7" 688.84 x I = 59.217 (8.) 16.982 1 aap Pa es Os Leh oe ; 27.7859, = Jo By Eq. II., (9); ?; = 92,540,000 miles. My = 829,200, ; The action and reaction between the reciprocal centre (Nepiune)-and the centre of condensation (Earth), are also. shown, int the ratio, between a, and the velocity of terrestrial rotation (%,): % $907 | —.. 16.989 wm, 289 Bs: ©S eto ol off ta trade ideichag baa stanforsatatsee) Ho — 829,200 _ 19,885 jig 10,982 : Newcomb's estimate for “°, as deduced from observations on Neptune’s Ls satellite, is 19,380 + 70. By combining (4) with Eq. (11) in ‘‘ Further Confirmations of Prediction,”’ * we find the equation between moments of reciprocal rotation CG ) and times of synchronous rotation and revolu- tion (2 * a(t ) *Ib, xvill, 231, 1880.) 431 [chase. Dbinow 95 Lo pgiohictots cae cr 1 Mepe — Myty | 8°19 38502 "829200 x 5074 sec, foe tts eee See 5.) HUle jod? Of 2001§29,200)2 (00 1)x%« 81558150 sec: « sonW lottaly yalilgio gasamakel® sled ox “inthe Saturnian orbit embraces the primitive centre of rotating inertia ; Yeri fy >) Authoritys 0 p, + pjyiqe ccAuthorityss yy fodpe? 1. Mereury, 2,055 Encke, B87km Leverrier;, 308 +2jJVennsy 23,406.45) 695 Hill, +7233 m. Leverrier, 12,246 5. Earth, 80,600 Newcomb, 1,0000 m. Leverrier, 80,600 ‘4.-Mars, ~~ 3,238 °° ~ Hall, 1.5237-m. Leverrier, 7,506 5. Jupiter, 9,543,087- Bessel, ‘5.5193 8. @ Stockwell, 290,693,300 6. Saturn, 2,855,837 Bessel, 10.3433 s. a, Stockwell, 305,528,600 7. Uranus, 442,478 Newcomb, 19,1834 m. Newcomb, 162,837,000 8 Neptune, 515,996 Newcomb, 20.7322 m. p. Stockwell, 456,140.000 J np = Pe Sp = 18,416,692 Sup? = 1,215,247,560 V Sup? re xp = 9.517 J /Saturm’s mean radius-vector is 9.5899,.. The above result, therefore, ‘indicates a slight preponderance, beyond the orbit of Neptune, of the un- known cosmical matter in our system. If the influence of all this un- known preponderance is equivalent: to that-of a mass about * as great as . Earth, at the locus of incipient subsidence (2% = 67"P,), the mean moment of nebular rotation of each planet is represented by Saturn’s mean position. pe map, -* ps) up? 1 8871 an 808 2 «7283 12,246 eae 1.0000 30,600 ‘4 1.5287 WRB oF osiflaine 5 5.2028 (958,817,843 0 oF: scene) 6 9.53888 259, 852, 941 v4 19.1884 162,837,000 8 30.0339 465, 444,000 . x 59.2170 76,446,000, = © ) *a, aphelion; p, perihelion; m, mean; s, secular, Chase.) ) 432 ape 22218, 4401007 bus , Sete risties ots 222; 948, sia DEG eee vestry: ‘The ratio of Uranus to Neptune appears to have been determined By di29 incipient condensation of tlie pi eineem . For orbital velocity is ise: Suse to 2 y': therefore, for any Se aateat initiatory velocity, like 0s mass: oy od proportioned to the radius of equal orbital velocity, or inversely to the. *? power of the velocity of reciprocal orbital revolution, or to the cubes root of the distance from the Sun. Designating the locus of incipient con- densation (Neptune’s secular aphelion) by p) we find t(Py)§ — py (p,)8 3 oe: (30. 4696)? — —p. Se ae = : ery. wae tine -+(8.), My 92618. i by : Newcomb’s estimate Rh oo is 22600 + 100. The inner erurael iueEaE planet (trad ea) i is connected with the » belt of directly-rotating planets by the two proportions : iy is Hs : > Pscay 2 Prva) ] Po ‘ . ; 61: M2 aoa7 ge * + PO8L : Des WP, 6 gag oes (9.) Po 20.044 x 1047.88 —_= as = _.22530 Py 9661 se } ee Ly: sg > 3 Vora) * Vor) fos fig: : 9/214.54 : 7/1.019256 22530 See (10.) Bo. .| 214,54 i ) Ho saate of, PLAS: 22530 = 326,900 7 ty, N1.019256 7° ind In equation (9), Psa) = Earth’s mean perihelion ; x4) == mean aphel-,,, ion of Uranus. In equation (10), iq) = velocity of projection at the mean perihelion centre of gravity of Sun and Jupiter (5.2028 x 214.54 x .95684 +- 1047.88 == 1.019256); 0... == Earth’s mean orbital velocity, The influ- ence of Jupiter’s mean perihelion position will be further shown in the following comparisons (18, 14). In the early ellipsoidal or truncately paraboloidal nucleus indicated, by Peirce’s cometary and meteoric researches, of which, Uranus, (19.1886): OO} iy nt 1880.) 7, 433 [Chase, represents the perihelion, and Neptune (80.034) represents the aphelion, J Cee 8 mean aphelion (5.4274) was central. e centre of reciprocal rupture (Neptune’s secular aphclion = 30.47), the paraboloidal centre (Jupiter’s secular aphelion = 5.52), and the centre of the dense belt, (Earth =.1); are connected, by-the geometrical proportion IOI 1)25.520: 5.520) 80,472.00 Aa lee goblins .i99(4H)} The masses at the centres of rotary inertia (Saturn), and of early nebu- losity (Jupiter,, are proportioned to their respective gravitating tendencies towards the nucleal centre (Sun), or inversely proportioned to the squares of their vector-radii, so that tl primitive moments of rotary inertia were equal. Bessel’s value is 3501.6, so that’ the theoretical mass is about .006 too small. This approximation, which was first pointed out by Professor Stephen Alexander, convinced me that all the cosmical masses must be determined by ascertainable laws, and thus led me to the results which are embodied in the present and previous communications. The ratio between the masses at the centre of rotary inertia (Saturn), and at the centre of greatest condensation (Earth), appears to have been determined by Jupiter’s perihelion influence and by centrifugal force, since the masses vary nearly inversely as their gravitating tendencies towards the Sun, or directly as the squares of their vector radii. Yes _ Used Pa Po han era 7 eT 3532.3 x 1.019256 pi; X 9.5888? } (18.) Mo — 226,661 Ps J The ratio’ between the masses at the nucleal centre (Sun), and at the centre of primitive nebulosity- (Jupiter), combines the ‘projectile, the cen- trifugal, and the square of the centripetal ratios, thus illustrating the ther- modynamic law that equal quantities of heat correspond to equal increments of o7s viva in simple gases. Ye 1c (1) x ua (“)’ ye Pa\ Ys eenreee 14. Me. ..,'9.5888% x 1, tile | ge ite 5.2028: | rolld The centrifugal ratios between Saturn and Earth (13), and the dn tethh : ratios’ between Saturn and Jupiter (12), are further: ‘illustrated by the PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XVIII. 105. 3D. PRINTED FEB. 28, 1880. Chase] 434 [Jan.2, Fector-radii of the centre of inertia nee the .centre,of. nebulosityy For, if we take a locus at 2. of P,, P; is at ba of the locus, or at-the centre of sub- didenes: collision and the centre of linear oscillation, While the locus itself is at the centre of projection due to Saturn's spherical vis viva oe uw : a ff ae ry (x i= PS of 9.5888 = 5.20208... 0-0. neeerecee o(15-) - This MT ee a sien a value for Jupiter’s mean radius- vecee oe is only about 36 is of one per. cent. too large. -; ‘the dense belt, the moment of rotary inertia (np? . of Mars (7, 506) is - lof Earth’ s (30, 600), while Hine of Venus (12, 246) is\.4 of Earth's, thus ae the influence of Sun’ Ss mean sphesinal mbutidnt of inertia, when expanded to Earth’s orbit. The uncertainty with regard to Mercury’s mass is too great to warrant any present ppeguiation. & as. to its origin, Or, ite 4 in- fluence on the stability of the system. The principal considerations, involved in these approximations, are : 1. Fourier’s theorem, that every periodic vibratory motion can always be regarded as the sum of a certain number of pendulum vibrations. 2. The natural alternation of radial and tangential dicillatibng a in elastic media surrounding centres of inertia. o 19190 8. Maxwell's theorem of equality between vires vive of translation and vires vive of rotation. 4. Equality of action and reaction, especially in centripetaland contrifugal tendencies. 5. Perihelion indications of primitive centrifugal or reptestiig fore and aphelion indications of primitive centripetal ‘‘subsidence.”’ 6. Synchronism of rectilinear (47) and circular (277) orbits. 7. The tendency of nodes in elastic media to establish harmonic nodes. 8. The laws of elasticity which connect arithmetical ratios of aera with geometric and harmonic ratios of density. 9. The different variability, in condensing nebule, of times of rottion (cc r*) and times of revolution (oc ry. 10, Laplace’s limitation, of rotating elastic stress, by the radius of equal times of rotation and revolution. 11. The counteraction of the cyclical vadaiins of stress, aati) he half-rotation, by the central force (g), after the analogy of eented from the Earth's surface, se 12. The constancy, at the nucleal surface of any expanding 0 or + contract. ing nebula, of the stress-opposing value on 18. The tendency, in the primitive rupture of a neh, to rotations in opposite directions, mig 10 eTscarnon yi) i fog ') 435 {Hall. 14. Thecontinual reciprocal action, between a centres, ( o “) of disturbances proportional to mass. _ 15. The limiting influence of parabolic velpeltinn upon 1 tendencies to dis. sociation and to aggregation, 16. The ratio of stress-opposing force, at Laplace’s Timit, to parabolic wT (Fs) and to orbital (7) velocity. : 17. The influence of centres of linear and of spherical oscillation. jo 18. The conjoint influence of centres of nucleation, of density, of nebu- losity: of rotary inertia, and of reciprocity. 19. The equations of relation between oscillatory and orbital motion. ‘20. The interesting and suggestive Fact, important in chemistry and gen- eral physics as well as in astronomy, that the central str eee-opposin g value i in . t the solar system G ) is the velocity of light. The Relations of the Crystalline Rocks of Eastern Pennsylvania to the Silu- rian Limestones and the Hudson River Age of the Hydromice Schists. By Charles H. Hall. With a Pilate. (Read before the American. Philosophical Society, January 2, 1880.) _, Recently Prof.) Frazer called the attention of the Academy of Natural Sciences to the fact of the occurrence of the fossil Buthotrephis flexuosa, in the: Peach Bottom roofing slates of York county, Pennsylvania. As Prof. Lesquereux admits that this fossil does not extend below the Trenton lime- stone, it isin all probability within the Hudson river group. . Dr, Emmons assigned this fossil to the Taconic System. Since Dr. Emmons’ time, I ‘think the: fossiliferous bed of the Taconic system have been. pretty well proven to be of the Cambrian series; which would place this Taconic fegeil of Emmons somewhere about the Hudson river group. Tembrace this opportunity to state some facts from which I have divi conclusions concerning the relative positions of the rocks forming the wih talline series of Eastern Pennsylvania. .»/ Lshall.endeavor to make my statements concise, and I think my: reason- ing will be understood. We have the following series of rocks : "First. A’series of granitoid, syenitic, quartzose, and micaceous schistose rocks, to be seen on the Delaware river above the city bridge at Trenton, and extending in a south-easterly belt across Bucks and yom aenet ond “ties, as far west as Chestnut Hill; Philadelphia. Second. A series of syenitic, hornblendic and quartzose rocks exidnding '.) from the neighborhood of Chestnut, Hill. westward across, the, Schuylkill river, and covering a greater part of the northern. portion, of, Delaware . county. Fine exposures of this rock arego be seen on the Schuylkill river “below Spring Mill, Montgomery county. This seriés may be the upper members of the first, or that extending from the Delaware river'to’Chest- nut Hill. Hall} 436 [Jan,,2, Third. Potsdam sandstone,,,.conglomerate, quartzite; and, occasional schistose beds, ,, In this, group,is, included the, Edge. Hill ,rock which, ex- tends.in an unbroken ridge from.the Delaware.riverat..Trenton to, Hunt- ingdon Valley, in Montgomery county, and another ridge of the same rock from a, point south of Willow Grove. to, Spring, Mill, Montgomery, county, near the Schuylkill river. The Edge:,Hill sandstone is identical with the quartzites flanking the north side of the limestone valley of Montgomery and Chester, counties, and merges into them about Willow Grove... This, the Potsdam sandstone, rests unconformably. a upon, the. preceding two groups... The un- conformity is seen at points east, of Willow LG > Grove, where the lower conglomerates, con- tain fragments of the syenitic rocks. TF ari Fourth. Dolomites, schistose or slaty micaceous_ beds, limestone, mat ble, hydromica schists and, bastard marble. .. This, group of limestones and schists rest. upon the above group, and ure the equivalent of the Cambrian limestones of the Great Valley. ..Trenton fossils have been. found. in, the upper part of this group at, Buckingham, Bucks county, by. Mr. Ash, . This Bucks county belt of limestone is cut off from the limestones of Chester Valley by the New Red Sandstone: There. is no. apparent unconformity. throughout the limestone group. The lower beds.are Dolomites; there are.occasional alternations of shale throughout the mass. _The marbles are all confined to the upper horizon and are followed by alternations, of shale and shaly limestone. Fifth. Hydromica schists, quartzose schists, chloritic schists, and occa- sional beds of quartzites and sandy beds and serpentines. _ It is difficult to draw a line between this group and the limestones, which pass, into it by alternations exactly as the Trenton limestone passes into the shales of the, Hudson river group in Central Pennsylvania. These are the Hudson river shales and flank the Chester Valley on the south from some point not far east of the Schuylkill river throughout the entire length of the valley. They extend,south to the syenitic rocks.of the second group, and west of the Schuylkill to the neighborhood of the Brandywine creek in Chester county, and gradually widening out to the south-west. Sixth. Micaceous, garnetiferous schists, limestone in beds which rapidly thin out to the eastward, mica schists, and sandstones. The area of this. group L have not determined, but it is principally confined to the southern central portion of Chester county, resting upon the Hydromica schists. of, the group above-mentioned, .The eastern boundary is about the line of the, Brandy wine, creek, although a tongue extends east of, the, creek tothe, neighborhood of Dillworthtown, .This group rests unconformably upon the western extension of the second group. Seventh. The mica schists of, Philadelphia, mica. schists, hornblendic, garnetiferous, talcose schists with,soapstone and serpentine, These rocks: lie to the south of the first and second groups of rocks, and are cut off, on. the west,and south by the rocks of the second, group, from, any connection, with the rocks of Chester county, /They, rest unconformably. upon, the eae 1880.) 437 ? [Hall. first, second, third and ‘fourth groups and are somewhat different in charac- tér from the fifth group, though they’ resemble portions of the sixth group. There are besides these groups probably two serpentine horizons, which are undoubtedly unconformable deposits above the second group: | I'think the northern belt of serpentine may be considered as altered: sk peer river rock’; while the southern belts are doubtful. OThe first and second groups are the oldest rocks, Seine by the Pots: dam sandstone unconformably. The Potsdam is flanked on the south by the first from Willow Grove to Chestnut Hill, where this group seems to bé suéceeded’ by the second. “It may be only the upper part of the first, however, the sandstone rests on both. The first group is flanked on the south by the’ Edge Hill rock or Potsdam §$. 8. from the Delaware river to ’ the Pennepack creek in Montgomery county. To the north the upturned edgés of thesé rocks are overlaid by the New Red Sandstone. | West of the Pénnepack’ creek the ‘structure is plainly a synclinal, the axis of which Would be just south of Willow Grove; and an anticlinal, the’ axis being about on a line from Abington to Attleboro. “The syenitic rocks flank the Potsdam on the north of the synclinal north of Willow Grove, encircle the end of the synclinal and are exposed along the aiticlinal to'a point near Chestnut Hill. The Potsdam ‘sand- stone is not’ found between Huntingdon Valley on the Pennepack and Waverly Heights, south-west of Edge Hill P. O., along the south sideof the anticlinal. The overlying limestone occurs just south of Huntingdon Valley, over- lying the sandstone, and extends westward beyond the Pennepack creek some distance, lying immediately above the gneisses of the first group. ‘The unconformity is evident between the gneisses of the first group and the limestones, and inasmuch as the limestone occurs almost on the line of strike of the sandstone which again appears at Waverly Heights, it would seem to be sufficient proof of its unconformity to the sandstone. Resting on the Potsdam sandstone from the neighborhood of the Deli: ware river to'a point near Huntingdon Valley, and on the limestones be- tween Huntingdon Valley and Waverly Heights, and also on the Gneisses of the first group, we have the micaceous, garnetiferous schists of the Philadelphia group. These are renin hierar resting pe atid aghiiet these lower rocks. “The sandstone along the south margin of the synclinal, which I spoke of as extending from Willow Grove to the Schuylkill is, most of it, very different in character to that along the north side. The difference ‘in character.on the north and south sides of the valley may be due to the in- filtration of ferruginous matter derived from the New Red moperencaey h which flank the group and overlap it on the north. The dips are high, the rocks are sandy, light colored and very free from iron as a rule ; the ridge is known as Edge Hill. Towards the Schuylkill it dies down rapidly, and disappears below the limestones at Spring Mill, not only swallowed up by a fault, but unédnformably overlapped as well. “On the north'side of this ‘synelinal valley)’ we find the ‘quattzites and’ Hall:] 438 [Jane2, sandstones forming prominent ridges; having a muclyless dip-and ‘covering greater areas. There are several-cynclinals and anticlinals,the axeés of which form an obtuse angle to the line of strike of Edge Hill.» These folds die down very rapidly:to the eastward, but are: marked by _— — ities in the line of strike of Edge Hill.c.jiw o>. t {fist + Ihave been long inclined:to consider’ the dletations of iaaidinidie iene the north flank of the limestone valley, as having been caused by folds and faults, but I do not see any proofs of faulting. But there:is evidence of unconformity between the two groups, as.at Spring Mill, where the lime- stone overrides the upturned Potsdam ; ata point west of the second cross- ing of Sandy Run by the North Penn. R.>R., just south of Fort: Washing- ton, the limestone oceurs in a bay in the sandstone, having a slighter dip. Just south of Mogeetown, east ‘of the Schuylkill river, near Norristown, the limestones rest. unconformably upon the Potsdam, to all appearances. ° ‘The anticlinal ridges of; Potsdam extending diagonally into the valley, are flanked on both sides by limestone, and, in some eases, disappear be- low the limestone which encircles it; but in oe _— eastern —— ; E pesohad whether the limestone is connected. The marble is confined to the south side of the seal The: lat. of: the limestone being to the south, it would place them at or near the top. ©Mar- ble quarries are found in Chester county, close along the southern margin of the limestone valley,.and in close proximity to the slates.. In Mont- gomery County the same rule holds good, and very shortly after the disap- pearance of the slates fo the east of the Schuylkill, we pede the marble is missing as well. ie 2 pon] The rocks rise rapidly to the casted The slates of the South Valley Hill are in regular succession upon the limestone. This may be seen where the South bt Hill ends at Gulf Mills. The structure is clearly proven 7 _ by the succession of rocks, which is marble, bastard marble, ‘shale, on the north side of the synelinal und a double repetition on the anti- clinal at Gulf Mills. «The ocove made by the erosion of ithe anti- ‘clinal is just. west of Gulf Mills, west of Conshohocken. The trans- _ ition shaly limestones are repeated several times by minor contortions, and sapien over inavide area from Gulf Mills to the Schuylkill river. panied I The alternations from the limestone into the sletes is everywhere nue along the southern margin of the Chester valley. 118 The slatestare traversed by aitrap dyke, which crosses. the Schuylkill at Conshohocken. I do not think it marks the line of any disturbance of im- portance. The synelinal, and) anticlinal of the slates do not eross ‘the Schuylkiilriver. The slates flanking’ the marbles, east) of the Schuylkill lie ina monoclinal, pitching to the south against the Potsdam, which was 1880.] 439 [Hall upturned along the line from Spring Mill to Edge Hill P: 0.,:probably prior ‘to their deposition. This is evident: from the fact'that the limestones lap over the rocks of the second group at West Conshohocken. -It may be that the great unconformity of the measures west of the Schuyl- kill river cannot be explained without a fault along ‘the line of junction. » The rocks of. this: group: seem ‘to: vary considerably, and ‘it is’ ios ihii- sprobable, that:they may have:to be subdivided, as I have: included:all the Hall.) 440 [Jan. 2, schistose rocks with limestone from the South Valley Hill slates along the East Branch of the Brandywine to Chadd’s Ford or the Maryland line, and west at least as far as Avondale, Chester county. From their position above the slates of the South Valley Hill, which are Hudson river, they belong to a limestone group above the Hudson river group. Inasmuch as no fossils have been found as yet,-it is difficult to assign them to any particular age, but I am inclined to think that they may be Silurian and possibly Helderberg. There may be an unconformity between these schists and sandstones and the slates below, but as yet I have not been able to determine the area of the upper group accurately, and before this is done it is impossible to state decidedly what the relation is. In Eastern New York, south-west of Albany, we find the Hudson river shales and sandstones overlaid by the Niagara in thin beds of concretionary limestone, often not recognizable, followed by the Helderberg, limestone, the Oneida conglomerate, Medina sandstone, the Clinton group, and Onon- daga shales, all having died out east and north before reaching the Helder- berg escarpment. May we not have similar structure here? The limestones of the Chester Valley extend in an almost straight line from the Schuylkill river to the neighborhood of Quarryville, in Lancaster county, where the straight valley ends and connects with the great lime- stone valley of Lancaster county at Camargo P. O. At Camargo P. O., according to Prof. Frazer’s map, a tongue of slates connects across the limestone and is colored the same as an area of rock north of the limestone valley, extending to the county line south and east of the Gap P. O. The limestone valley from the Schuylkill to Quarryville or thereabouts is a monoclinal, the beds all pitching to the southward, followed by Chloritic _ schists, Hydromica schists and Mica schists, which overlie the limestones. This is clearly demonstrated at the eastern end of the South Valley Hill, which is formed by these slates. The marbles, which are always confined to the southern edge of the valley, mark the horizon of the Trenton lime-- stone with its alternations of slate and slaty limestone, passing by alterna- tions into shale and slate of the South Valley Hill or Hudson river group. ’ Just north of Gulf Mill a synclinal of the slates diés out, and at Gulf Mill we have a double repetition of the alternations of impure limestone and slate foufid flanking the synclinal on the north, which proves Gulf Mill to be on an anticlinal axis. (See wood cut.) The dips, as a rule, are pretty high towards the Schuylkill river, varying from 50° to 85°. But as we proceed westward they become somewhat less, which may in part account for the widening of the slate area before spoken of, but there isa marked thickening in the beds to the ee ie, which also must be taken into consideration, Owing to the short time I have for the preparation.of this paper, TI will proceed to carry these determinations of horizons south- westward. At Camargo P. O., we would have an anticlinal of slates overlying the limestones, which anticlinal would be ona line of the axis of the Toequan creek anticlinal recognized by Prof. Frazer on the Susquehanna, ws fed (stat The lower portion ¢ of Pequea. creek. flows along an anticlinal in which ‘fhe limestone is exposed along the creek to. the neighborhood of Martie- Ville P.O. °A tongue of slates extends, eastward, between the, Pequea, and sonar creeks : as “far as_Willow Street P. O., -which, is.on a line ofa nclinal axis shown. ‘to end at Compassyille, and along which the, Pequea ack flows from ‘Compassville to Wheatland, Mills. P. 0. An, Aan Having its axis about on a line between Petersville P.O. and the mouth of Conestoga creek. A synclinal of Chloritic slates ending somewhere t near Thdian town. “An anticlinal exposing the limestone, extending, from Pros- pect, Furnace P. O., in York county, to Lancaster. ~ K’synclinal of eee extending from a point south-east of Montville Pp, 0. to Washington Manor P. O., and crossing the river,-is evident from the distribution of slates in York county, beyond the line of the Peach Bottom R.'R. Lastly, we have a monoclinal flanking the Chickis Potsdam, extend- ait from Hempfield, which is at the. extreme eastern end of the Potsdam Tee eee Tee eee Aes CO Te eee, CO) SL es. . SSIs See ancien covered by ‘the Trias, but has. a considerable emposune in Lancaster county. - The slates, therefore, south-east_of the limestones. of Chester county, are of Hudson river age. _ The slates of York and Lancaster counties,. which includes the roofing slates of Peach Bottom, are a continuation of those of Chester county, which flank the limestone on the south, and are referable to the same group, “The serpentines of Radnor township, Delaware county, and those. of Easttown, Willistown, East and West Goshen, are undoubtedly. altered beds of the South. Valley Hill slates, or Hudson river slates. They lie un- conformably upon the syenitic rocks of the second group. ny “The probability is that all the serpentines of Chester county. will. be found to belong to the Hudson. river group, and are possibly pretty nearly on the same horizon as the limestones of West Bradford, Merlin, east and west Marlborough, London Groye, Kennet, and other townships of south- ern Chester county, although I have spoken of this limestone group as being possibly of Helderberg age. . The serpentines.of southern Lancaster - county are undoubtedly altered beds of the Hudson river group, and from their. relative position to the roofing slates of Peach Bottom, would be in their proper place. Dr. T. Sterry. Hunt. insists that the serpentines of the Schuylkill are below the Philadelphia schists. If they are, the structure would be eyen more simple than otherwise... Placing them below the Philadelphia schists they would be on a horizon with. the serpentine beds of Chester county, and these Philadelphia rocks equivalent. to those which ,they resemble in southern Chester county ; but if the serpentines of Montgomery and Dela- ware counties are above the. Philadelphia series, they. peneparly belong to a later age than those of the Hudson river group. _At present I am inclined to place these serpentines. above the Philadel- PROC. AMER. PHILOS, SOC. XVIH,- 105, 3E; | PRINTED MARCH 2, 1880... Hall.] 442 [Jan. 2, phia rocks, and, by so doing, assign the Philadelphia series to a higher group than the Hudson river. The relation of the Philadelphia schists to the schists of the sixth group is not fully determined, but they bear a great resemblance to theni, and in many respects are identical. The syenitic rocks of Delaware county which belong to the second group, cut off the connection between them. To all appearances the serpentine belts, which are visible on the Schuyl- kill river at Lafayette station, Montgomery county, and at a point just north of them, are above the mica schists of Philadelphia. The southern belt extends in an almost unbroken line from Chestnut Hill, Philadelphia, to Bryn Mawr, in Montgomery county. A less prominent belt extends from the Schuylkill river to the neighborhood of Rosemont station, on the Pennsylvania R. R., in a parallel line to the first belt. The serpentines of Delaware county are on a general line of strike with these belts, and without doubt represent the same horizons. There is no evidence in this section of the Oneida conglomerate or Medina sandstone, as far as I can observe, but there are sandstones in the south-eastern portion of Chester county I have classified with the sixth group, which may prove to belong to a sandstone formation succeeding the Hudson river slates. LIMESTONE. MICA SCHISTS. { SERPENTINES. GARNETIFEROUS SCHISTS. Ill. 3 HYDROMICA SLATES. ' | CHLORITIC SLATES. ALTERNATIONS OF SLATE AND LIMESTONE. L MARBLE. Il. } SLATE. DOLOMITES. SANDSTONE. I. POTSDAM = oQuarrziTE. ' SYENITIC AND GRANITIC ROCKS. There is no doubt that magnesian beds may be altered into serpentines wherever they may be, and the mere fact of serpentine existing at any place is not proof of a given horizon, but it is in all probability confined to definite horizons within limited areas. The whole question of structure would be easily solved could we prove what is everywhere indicated, viz, a gradual subsidence of the formations north-west of the line of junction between the South Valley Hill slates and the syenitic rock of the second group, which change in level, at the close of: the Hudson river group, allowed the upper magnesian beds of that group to be deposited over the edges of and encircle the second group. The evident nonconformity between the Philadelphia schists and the Proceedings American Philosophical Society: No: 105. Vol. XVIII. Plate VI, en L EHIGH NEW RED S.S. SERPEN- TINES. SA, IMESTONE ! GEOLOGY 5s gNig eon 3 Ry : == SOUTH EASTERN 4 LIME STONE = RY \} Seer QQ zz FT = CALC/PEROUS NY! § : PENNSYLVANIA z \ zl oe PoTsoAM S CHARLES £.HALL = 8.8, sieht teospontvs otenh ad yaar aqorg Arc, 1 stelite veil r “26 rg 5 “eat do oat - meBioxtenit tat frais ROO, ot to ein lodion me wilebw? a Seer ged eatiot odd b SOs OR faved oii sow d: ie. ? i jeiRory al Gioctzpal Baca oa ioe eas : mani XC: pis 1880.] s 443 * (Phillips. rocks of the jirst, second, third and fourth groups may be due to subsequent faulting, but they are nevertlieless more recent. The accompanying map gives the general outline of the groups. I have used Prof. Frazer’s section along the Susquehanna river for illustration with my interpretation. He produced the section through Chickis in his report C. C. of the Second Geological Survey. The changes I have made are on structural grounds. An Account of an Old Work on Cosmography. By Henry Phillips, Jr., A.M. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, January 16, 1880.) It has occurred to me that as all knowledge is within the scope of our pursuits, an analysis of a work on Cosmography, the production of a once famous author, might not prove unacceptable. The errors among which men once blindly groped, the silly tales of wonderment With which re- turned travelers were wont to astonish their stay-at-home friends, the ab- surd statements once received as absolute facts, but later exploded by the Ithurie]-touch of truth, now at these later days, when we are entirely freed from superstition, folly and ignorance, and a blind reliance upon the épse dixit of anyone, may afford us a lesson pregnant with instruction. It is, therefore, with this view that I venture, this evening, to present to our Society an account of a book which bears for its title : ““Cosmographia Universalis Libri VI. in quibus juxta certioris fidei scripto- rum traditionum describuntur omnium habitabilis orbis pdartium situs propri- seque dotes, regionum topographic effigies. Terre: ingenia quibus fit ut tam differentes et varias specie res et animatas et inanimatas ferat. Animalium peregrinorum nature et picture, Nobiliorum civitatum icones et descriptiones, Regnorum initia, incrementa et translationes. Regum et principium Genealo- gies. Item omnium gentium mores, leges, religio, mutationes; atque memora- bilium in hune usque ad annum 1559 gestarum rerum Historia. Autore SEBAST, MUNSTERO.”’ On the recto of the title-page appears the portrait of the author, an elderly, hard-featured man, beneath which are two Latin poems, laudatory of that distinguished person and his work. The preface is dated at Basle, March, 1550. Sebastian Munster may serve us as an example of the scholars of the olden time. He was born at Ingelheim, in 1489, and became a Cordelier monk, but, having adopted the opinions of Luther, he renounced the robes and the yoke of a cloister and took to himself a wife. Such was the usual course in those days which the converted clergy took to show their hatred to the tenets of the church of Rome, where enforced celibacy was of prim- ary importance, and weighed so heavily upon them. For several years Munster taught at Basle, where he gave to the public many valuable works, having rendered himself so very learned in geographi- PRilips) —* 444 [Janes eal and niathematical science; and@‘in the Heprewolanguaze, that he!was known’ as the Esdras and the Straboof Gennanys “The mere, enumeration of his writings in Gesner’s Bibliotheca oceupies'several folio pages. | He'died at Basle, of a) prevailing: ‘pestilence, ‘one yseute cer par Apwae a cof; May, 1552; in'the sixty- third year'of hisiage. gciaiui ef ied? J iw bowrot - This ‘book was) one ‘that became very popular saddles thratigh : omany <éaRib He? It was published’at Basle originally in:1550,:them successively in 2569, 1574, 15781592) 1598 and: 1614: All: these:editionsswere in Ger- man. The Cosmography was issued in Latin in 1550 and 1554,:having béen translated by Munster himself: It was issued: in: French at: Basle in 1552, and at Paris in 1575) in Italian at Bale; 1558-! «A selection:from its con- tents, entitled ‘‘ A treatise on the New India with other neéwe founde Jande and islandes’ as well castwarde as westwarde by Sebastian Munster;:trans- lated into English by Richard Eden,’ was published at London in 1553) and another translation, ‘' A’ brief collection of strange and memorable sthings ‘gathered out the ee ae of Sebabtiaw! rene WAS published. ;at London in 1574+ wD) Bll oas if eoliog (aenr19D) The book, which is EE with Ast. and ae saa cuts, begins owithoa numberof full-pagemaps; among owhicly are: the ;worldion | the °Ptolemeean ‘system | (America, of ‘course, not) shown), surrounded..by) a ‘border representing the:various» winds, Europe! and. iits various divisions (embracing the kingdoms of Bohemia, Hungary, Poland), Africa, Asia and the New World. The British Islands were not: of sufficient import- vance to Warrant a special map and are crowded up towards the top of a general map of Europe in such ‘a manner that very: little: of; Scotland:is ‘shown. England was at this time under! the dominion) of Edward VI. (1547-1553), and the ‘influence exercised by it-upon the politics: of ;Con- ‘tinental. Burope was very inconsiderable; it was looked on, in bie only as a semi-barbarian island in the far-off northern seas. 906 \ Naturally the author begins with the beginning and starts with the: crea- ‘tion of the world; drawn from Biblical sources. ‘To this: chapter is:pre- fixed a wood-cut ‘representing the worldyas:a oplain: from: whose bounds ‘arise lofty mountains, inhabited solely by animals: Ih the) background-is ‘a cirele of flames; in the foreground isan ocean with fishes\and an/old- fishioned high-pooped Dutch galliot, navigating apparently by its-own ‘instinct (for not a living being is'‘anywhere to be seen upon it) the new- made waters. Sea monsters raise their heads from the billows and) gaze with rapt amazement at the ship, takingvit, doubtless, for some novel marine création. Overhead are’ shining the sun, moon and stars, while’ God, represented as an old man with a papal tiara upon his head), is:seated be- tween the heavenly bodies upon a cloud. « At each ofthe upper corners.of the plate’is an sande 5 at — of the lower corners a very teaprapucatti demon. Then follow chapters’ upon land, sea, salads the earth with its ‘vege- table and mineral wealth, earthquakes, hot springs: and: baths, fires existing sBeyuet soaumimoqqs voaros baa tap ot lo dguordile ,doldw onots A* ne Y880s}e 1.) ; 445 {Phillips. inthe bosom ofthe ground, natural. phenomena,-metals, and, their, mode of being mined, the mifiés and the spirits and) devils, who.rule in) them, and the localitiesowhere nietals are found. 0) 09 eons 9 id to On pager 9 is representedia man;using the divining | rod, ( Glueck-ruth) of forked witch hazel, that is turning in«his' hands ashe steps. over.a place where ‘mining operationsareobeing, conducted. A. section ofa hill is shownowith men/at) work breaking: ore and loading) a)rail.car wpon-a tram, way whichvleads'to.am elevator Senne wie toa level with thevopening of ghensind.cél has OG6I oi nital ai b 1200 sdT .onen ol Oh page lbwe find tanthinedul use| foie euebing! ithe cmde ore, Teprey sented as‘sOmewhat similarto a modern. ee posben: the molina PRUE ofowhich is farnished by an-overshot-wheel. » 69 198 -ecIn ‘speaking’ of the :earthyand its ene mre thetanat Wor says ik is aba jnthe centre; that this opening or void:space)is full of flames, and is hells that it is Of sufficient:capacity +6: contain all the! millions of damned ‘souls ithatit? willbe required-to hold. That the earth itself is round, about 5400 (German) miles in circumference, and about 1718 chico miles in diam- refer’ . B109-boOoW sbnut Done Int : oThere areaccounts: given of hy sea inurl Hoa the sacan and:the ‘terrestrial paradise; of which latter there is an: illustration exhibiting the eGarden of Eden witha fountain inthe centre; walled around with crenated “battlements, a lofty tower-rising from the middle of the/enclosure, and we -#rejalso favored with a view of the trees of life and knowledge.’ © 1On page 87 we find a picture representing the migration of some ous etribe, every one of! whom, male and female, is dressed in the fashions prey- -alent'among the Germans of ‘the ‘sixteenth century ; before them is,drawn ‘alow truck containing standard stores for the journey, in which are sey- veral barrels distinetly suggesting | to the mind of the observer (the idea of beer. The parade is passing an old castle. ) On page 42 oceurs a description of ‘the British) Islands, accompanied Se @map'of ithe same.» ‘England :has.only three towns represented, viz; Lon- edony Dover, and what the engraver is pleased to call Ochsenfiirt, (Oxford) . eSceotlandhas only Edinburgliyand Ireland alarge city in. the extreme south, called Vatford.: Theshaperof the British Islands is;simply,atrocious., Jt omust bea mortificationto an Englishman to consider of how little import- ance his country: was: but three hundred -years ago; while, kingdoms that onow have sunk into oblivion and their names even polothe were ahem hiteanh 9 re andeven objects of dread. ditivw The description of England is: short, and: contains nothing ‘of interest. pbewtace of Ireland, reference is made to the rebellion, of 1534,,and the ‘great slaughter that followed/in its;wake... The manners.of the Scotch,are 2condemned, but their mental and moral qualities much :praised); a state- ment is made that the use of coal for burning is so common, that in, Scot- land the beggars supplicate it for alms, rien this en is found the very = wonderful stone known as Gagates (p. 45): Isow Isionior bos oldai “ A stone which, although of a rough and common appearance, yet’ partakes Phillips.) 446 (Jan. 16, somewhat of'a Divine essence; for it kindlesS\fire in» running istreamsiwhich nothing but oil can extinguish, If any one should, drink the water.in which this stone has been steeped, if there has been any stain upon the chastity of such a one, he (or she) will immediately be compelled to micturate, nor can he (or she) possibly avoid it; but if it is drunk By. one babes is pure, no such evil effects will resuit,’’* ~The English language is thus spoken ‘of: ‘It is a mixture of many tongues, especially German and Gallic. Formerly, as we learn from Bede, it was entirely Germanic, who thus writes: ‘The ancient inhabitants of England were accustomed to reckon their months according to the course of the moon, calling the moon Mona (which the Germans call Mon), anda month, Montha. December:was called: Haleg monath (i. e.,, Holy month), and April, Hoster monath, froma goddess named Hoste, to whom’ the Teutonic tribes were wont to sacrifice in this month in Pagan times. — May. was called Thri melei (thrice milked), because in. that, month they. usually. milked their cattle so often.’ This passage,’’ continues Munster, ‘‘is not to be in the printed copies of Bede’s works, but I found it ina versa 9 which Glareanus ex Nigra Silva in 1545’sent here to Basle.” ; Scotland possesses yet another wonder (p49): 2 TS f ‘Here there are trees which produce wfruit enveloped in leaves; this when the proper time arrives falls down into the water below and is turned intoa living, bird which is called the Tree Goose. This tree grows in the island of Pomonia which lies to the north of Scotland at a short distance therefrom. This tree ‘is’ mentioned by all the old Cosmographers, especially Saxo Grammaticus, so'you must not think we have made up this account, Auneas Sylvius writes in this manner concerning it: ‘We have formerly heard that there wasa tree in Scot- land growing on a river’s bank, whose fruit was in the form of aniseed, which when it had come to maturity fell of its own accord, some on the land and some intothe water; and those which fell on the land petrified, but those thatalighted in, the water soon receiving life began to swim and afterwards on their wings, and pinions took to flight. When we were in Scotland in the reign of King James hearing of these things we endeavored to investigate them, all persons uniting in affirming the marvel, but the further to the north we traveled the further was removed the place of the miracle so that it was finally said not, to, exist in Scotland at all but in the Orcades Islands,’ ”’ The description is accompanied by a wood-cut representing the tree with its fruit in various stages of development. Some are entirely closed, some are a crack open, some have the heads of the birds peeping out of them. At the base of the tree is water within whose vivifying influences a num-. ber of these rare exotics may be seén disporting themselves. Owing to the’ favorable position of the tree, only two of its fruits are threatened with premature extinction by falling upon the dry land. There is a map and metrical description of the city of Paris, dated 1548, and on page 185 isa large two-page plate representing the theatre’ at Verona, in its perfect state as it formerly appeared, but of which “only ruins now remain.’ It is. a huge edifice built upon arcades and around it *The Venerable Bede speaks of a stone called gagates, and says: “it (Britain) hath much and excellent jet, which is black and sparkling, — in the fire, and, when heated, driveth away serpents,” IJ nm. ObLY 1880... | 447 (Phillips. a river-is flowing. ~ It»was ascribed to Octavius and is: ‘said to have fur- nished seats for 23,184 persons. At page 249 is a description of the dialect formerly spoken in the island of Sardinia. At page 408 is given a description of two terrible earthijusiees which oc- curred at Basle in 1346 and 1356, accompanied by a wood-cut representing the overthrow of the city; the church steeples, palaces and houses. being raised in the air and cast upon the ground. At page 431 mention is made of curiosities found in the mines of Alsatia, as follows ;. “'There is in this region a lake extremely long and broad and deep, which con~- tains many kinds of living animals and reptiles reproduced by nature in pure copper on the neighboring rocks so that they can be most easily recognized and, known, That most learned man John Hobensack sent me a specimen of one of these stones which figure I have reproduced here.”’ _ According to the picture it is a very ugly looking fish, with a large head, and fins close behind the junction.of the, head and body, anda single fin lower down; the body seems, coated, with plates like a crocodile, with a dividing line running up the back. At page 488 occurs a description of the town of Mayenrce, in wliich is found a description of the invention of the art of printing, which is attrib- uted to John Guttenberg. At page 489 isa long description of the invention of cannon and gun- powder, which latter is ascribed to Bernhard Schwarz. A picture of the very rude artillery in use in those days accompanies the letter-press. At page 493 occurs an account of the tradition of Bishop Hatto and the Mouse-tower, where it is stated that a similar tale is totd of a king and! queen of Poland (names not given) who, with their children, were de- voured by mice. A woodcut shows the tower on an island in the Rhine, with the mice swarming up the walls, climbing into the windows, end, gnawing at the foundations.* ’ A monster born in the Palatinate is thus described on page 625 : “In the year 1495, in the month of September, a woman at Bierstadt gave birth to a monster in the form of two girls, whose bodies were joined together at the forehead, so that they always looked into each other’s eyes, but in all other re- spects were entirely distinct and separate. I (Munster) saw them myself at. Mayence, in the year 1501, when they were about six years old, They were; foreed to have a common will, to walk together, to sleep and rise together; and, when one went forward the other went backward, Their noses a'most touched each other, and their eyes, instead of being straight to the front, were crooked to one side. They lived to be almost ten years old, at which time one of them dying, it was necessary from the decay of the corpse to cut them apart; but the wound mortified, and the survivor quickly followed her sister to the grave, The explanation given for this prodigy was that asa pregnant woman was con- versing with another, a third suddenly coming up from behind knocked their heads together, and the impression of the fright was communicated from the mother to the feetus.” * Vide also Camerarius, Vol. I, p. 45. Babli 448 [Jan.26, Therelisa wood cut representing» these girls ‘as ahi rat the neoioney and looking into,each other’sseyes. | ft pAcrepresentation of the inannerof coining money iin vogue: at ‘that time, is found at page’692,-and. at page 703, «men..and/ wonten -are represented bathing together, entirely nude, in one ofthe | mineral, bath | resorts../ The! Vehm. Gericht is described on page 748, -the animals of Prussia! at.784, and the martyrdom of John-and Hieronymus Hussiat page 80be: a iiiny ; abeod At page,820 is an, engraving) which recurs very frequently throughout the book... The subject is, ‘A great contention between two kings. | Two men in.regal. paraphernalia are; represented as) hauling and. uae and, pulling and.tugging at,.each other,.in,a.tremendous state,of excitement, clutching at each other's; beards and hair .and, garments. This, probably: conveyed. to, the readers, better than the mere force of avirde, thes close ne violent. nature of a combat-between sovereigns. .e)) « . srisd ee , On, page $32, is a-description of Norway; and of the sanatoie that pee "reer Among, these the whale stands pre-eminent.with a head shaped somewhat like that of a dog, with huge projecting tusks like those,of-a boar, and is shown in-the act,,of swallowing aman, who is allouthof sight except his head and. arms, His comrade, more ‘fortunate, appears.on thé mainland, naked and in full flight, A: vessel.is being sucked down into a whirlpool, of which the text.states, that there are many onthe Norwegiam coast. The ocean,is seen swarming with fishes, and a man is portrayed |fol+ lowing the sport of angling with a bait, that) resembles a bundle ofshay. . The Lord’s Prayer in the language/of the Lapps: and. | Finns.is given at page 847, and on. the same page a: gations yes Iceland ean with a representation of Mount Hecla in, full eruption. ’ 1189 ‘Yo Tis A short description. is given of Greenland, at page + 850, as follows ni ates (“Grtinland means Green Land (viens terra), 80 called on account of theluxuri- ant herbage found theres» Of which,as well as of cattle, there is exceeding abun4 dance, as may be seen from the reports brought back by those who have voyaged, thither that they make great amounts of butter and cheese, from which we may conjecture that that country is not rough with mountains. It contains two Bish- oprics, whose Bishops are ordained by the Aréhbishop'6t Nidross, “Phe people? through the negligence of their spiritual pastors; have almost relapsed intohea- thenism, being of fickle disposition, and greatly given to magic arts. By means of incantations and spells, they are reputed to be able toraise, at will, tempestuous storms, and to cause the’ shipwreck of foreign ‘vessels Whose rémains they de! sireto plunder. Theirown vessels being of skins, and any light, are tom safe from collisions against their rocks,” An odd two-page illustration occurs: at, page 852) of the monsters sitioh are to be found in the Northern, Regions. So laughably absurd, so ridicu- lous and so diverse in thelr representations that no pen could ever attempt to describe them with the slightest. approach, to. justice, On, examining them one feels tempted to exclaim with Bottom, when he awoke, from his asinine hallucination, ‘The eye of man hath mot, heard, the; ear of man hath not seen, man’s hand is not able to taste, his tongue to conceive, nor his heart to report’’, what, these remarkable) ASV EM were, intended, to,con- Vey. nsawied ale ‘awe bas aeotw } woe ‘uit tivz Te MO TTY TAM pee 1880,} 01 | 449 (Phillips. Monsters) of ‘every conceivable age}! shape; size;appearance and color ; fish with the heads of owls; whales with *crocodile’s sealy backs’ and the® heads and tusks‘of wild ‘boars; pig-headed animals with fish’s tails and elephants’ bodies ;! fish with eats’ faces and ruffles “arownd> their’ bodies ; fish ‘that: look like ‘turnips’and earrots ; fish swallowing young ‘pigs 5 fish with leopards’ heads and claws ; fish with wolves’ heads ; fish with oxen’s heads ; griffin-headéd fish ; fish with heads of! birds and. bodies like dock leaves; fish attacking men; gigantic lobsters ‘and crawfish} wonderful fish ‘that look like crows; a'sea serpent swallowing a vessel ; and many’ other objects'which “the credulity and superstition of our ancestors accept’ edtin' good faith: !“A whale is ‘represented ‘as attacking w vessel whosé! muriners are vainly endeavoring in accordance with the established eustom to'divert its attention from'their ship by throwing overboard a number of small barrels or tubs; a usage'from whence arosé ‘the saying of casting uw’ tud'to the Aohale;' meaning to divert one by means of a lesser matter froth a greater one: ‘In one corner of the rie oceurs the barnacle tree, a described, with its fruit. idAt page’ 905: is the’ portrait of # monster who was ‘born at “Cracow in February; 1547, and lived three hours. It is a boy whose’ feet and hands’ terminate in four duck-like webs instead of fingers and toes. There grows out ofeach knee'and out of each elbow a dog’s head, being four’ iw ‘all; while from ‘each of his breasts protrudes the head of a ram.’ At the bottom of the ‘breast bone in his’ belly is an extra pair of eyes; a forked tail waves. up to his head. He has a long and flexible elephant’s proboscis in place of ‘an ordinary ‘nose; large and round, saucer-shaped eyes, and an extra’ pair of ears growing out of the corners of his eyes, which, as well as ae ears in their usual position, are formed like those of a rabbit. ,At page 1025 occurs the history of the Tower of Babel, apropos of which Munster gives'the word bread in fourteen. languages, and speaks of Noaly as being identical with Janus. “The Phoenix is described on page, 1034, and at page 1045, the Bs canian, 'Liger ; the latter as, follows : 0 ~© «Tt is a large animal of various colors, which is quite tame when its’ nik? ger i is appeased, It sleeps three days ata time and upon awakening it washes itself and raises a cry and emits a peculiar scent that attracts :to cit all:sorts of wild animals, for with'all such does it preserve friendly rela- tions save with the dragon and with the asp.” ‘The Tartars are described at page 1060 as being anthropophagi, and one of them is delineated as superintending the process of roasting a human body impaled upon a spit over a fire, in the act of turning the Vian ‘care- aay so as to cook it evenly on all sides. 1D Oj “At page 1066 is'a description of India ‘and its customs, one of which ‘is FopFeden tee by a woodcut of on Rigpeane assay to a Koide a serving asa tiller ofthe soikto) | “Dragons are seen on "pase 1069 with'all ‘their ustal’ fabulous ‘Horrors of scales and wings and jaws ; duels between these animals are pictured as‘of PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XVII. 105. 3F. PRINTED MARCH 2, 1880. _ Phillips.] 450 [Jan.16,) frequent occurrence. Nor is the. griffin forgotten. among the. prodigies: which nature is supposed to have lavished upon the lands of the Orient. At page 1073 a hippopotamus is figured as a horned. horse with huge fangs, whose body is half concealed in the river, “Snakes are also repre-~ sented with several heads, each of which. bears a-regal. crown. > Still fur- ther on (at page 1080) we find the Cynocephali, ‘‘the men whose heads, do grow beneath their shoulders,’’ the people who have but one -eye and, that in the centre of their forehead, a race of double-headed. dwarfs and a nation whose feet are more than twice the size of the rest of their bodies« These last are represented as taking their ease on their backs under the shadow of their own feet, which they are holding propped in the air sup: ported. by their hands. The pygmies and their incessant warfare with their hereditary enemies the cranes, are not forgotten. At page 1410 oceurs a woodcut illustrative of the customs of Cathay which modesti@ gratia is transcribed in the German of the edition of 1563.2 “Wan einer sein tochter nic kan ausstetirn, nimpt er trumen und pfeyffen, und zeucht mit seine téchtern uffden marckt, und so jederman herzu laufftals zu einem offentlichen spectakel oder schawspil, hebt die tochter ire kheider daw hinden auff biss an dieschultern, und lasse sich dahinden besehen, darnach hebt, sie sich dafornen auch auff biss tiber die brust, und lasst ihre leib daforne auch sehen, und so etwann einer do ist dem sie gefalt, der nimpt sie zu der eh, und thut kein blinden kauff.” ) JBI The foregoing extracts will give a general idea of the work and its con- tents. To transcribe at greater length would be profitless, as the remain. - ing matter for the most part presents no novelty either of subject or treat- ment. There are narrations of the voyages of Columbus and Vespucius, but differing in no wise from the generally received accounts. There isa very remarkable map of the New World, which, however, I pass over for the present, intending in the hereafter to make it a study by itself. It is needless to dilate upon the pleasure to be derived from the perusal of old books. Cardan says with much truth; “That as in traveling the rest go forward and look before them, an antiquarian looks around about him, seeing all things, both the past, present and future, and so he alone hath a complete horizon,’’ “Such studies allure the mind by their agreeable attraction on accountof theincredible variety and pleasantness of their subjects and excite to further steps toward knowledge, What greater pleasure can there be than to peruse those books of cities put out by Braunus and Hogenbergius? To read those exquisite descriptions of Magnius, Munsier, Herrera, Laet, Merula, Boterus, Leander, &c.? These famous expeditions of Christoph, Columbus, Americus Vespucius? These hodceporicons to remote and fabulous places of the world? To see birds, beasts, and fishes of the sea,. spiders, gnats, files, serpents, &c., all creatures set out and truly represented ?”* The book itself is one of those huge folios in which our ancestors so greatly had their delight; books with broad margins, heavy linen paper, good black ink, large type, bound in ponderous oak boards covered with, stamped hogskin, and weighing several pounds. +‘‘Scholars ofa former, * Burton. + Disraell, 1880.})6.) 451 {Greene, age regarded with contempt small books and a common reproach against a man ‘was that he was the author of such.” But the very magnitude of a work has often been ‘the occasion of its neglect, as but very few persons have either leisure or inclination to wade through long series of ponderous tomes ; a fact only apparent to book publishers within the last one hundred and fifty:years.' Such sized volumes tempt the reader to cry out as Macaulay didi his celebrated criticism upon Dr. Nares’ life of Lord Burleigh. The learning ‘which gave rise to such works was as weighty, as solid, and as substantial as the volumes themselves. The period in which it flourished: was before the day of easy paths to knowledge, compends, abridgments and short cuts; the royal ‘road had ‘not yet been discovered, the quagmires filled up, nor the forests leveled that obstructed the pathway. The con- sequence was that those who were scholars were more thoroughly and deeply learned than those of the present day. The diffusion of knowledge has seemingly resulted in sciolism ; where once the few were educated, the many now are smatterers. _ Knowledge is like a powerful, stream, whose, currents, while checked within its: banks flows deeply and strongly although silently; but when the obstructions which hem it on each side are removed, when the obstacles to its free dispersion are leveled, it spreads itself over the adjacent country, so that where once a noble river ran, naught now remains except a shallow babbling brook. Diffusion of knowledge, as it is fashionable to call it in the cant of our day, is unfortunately frequently only a diffusion of ignorance. On a New Synthesis of Saligenin. By Wm. H. Greene, M.D. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, January 16, 1880.) The method by which I have obtained saligenin synthetically is an ap- plication of a general method for the preparation of. phenolic derivatives, made known by Reimer and Tiemann. Indeed, since by the reaction of chloroform or of carbon tetrachloride on an alkaline solution of sodium phenate salicylic aldehyde or salicylic acid may be obtained, it may natur- ally be expected that, under the same circumstances, methylene chloride would yield saligenin, the latter being an oxybenzylic alcohol. A mixture of 30 grammes of methylene chloride, 30 grammes of phenol, and 40 grammes of sodium hydrate dissolved in 50 grammes of water, was heated in a sealed matrass ina water-bath. The reaction is complete in about six hours, after which the contents of the matrass is neutralized with hydrochloric acid, and agitated with ether, which takes up the saligenin and the excess of phenol. The ethereal solution is decanted, and the ether distilled off; the residue is repeatedly exhausted with boiling water, which takes up the saligenin and leaves the greater part of the phenol undissolved. The aqueous solution is concentrated to a small volume, and the drops of Cope.} 452 [Feb! 6, phenot which separate on 1 dooliny are removed. “After expositig’ the residue for some time over sulphuric atid, a érystalline inass is obtained! Whiel 4s pressed, and recrystallized from boiling water,,or, 0pm aleohol, Pure saligenin is thus obtained. The quantity of saligenin is by no means in areca: to the quantity of phenol employed, and an alcoholic solution of sodium hydrate was found to yield no better results than an aqueous solution, sin the reaction took place more promptly. ‘5 Isomeric oxybenzylic alcohols may be, and probphly, are, forewal aty the same time, but I have uot yet been able to isolate such compounds. On the Foramina, Perforating the Posterior Part of the overeat Bone, of s one tia D. a 90 off} Yo nottonnt aswMlisnnay-orogsnres ot (Read before the American Philosophical Society, February 6, capiaiye 8 vil | 0 The ncrnber of perforations of the posterior part of the squamosal. pulsid in the Mammalia is considerable, and they have not. attracted: that, atten- tion from anatomists which their importance deserves. As Ichave found them to be especially valuable in diagnosis, I have thought it might be useful to place on record the manner of their occurrence in: various) re- cent genera with whose structure we are more or less familiar oineother respects. sont al The one of these foramina of which some notice has been taken, is the postglenoid, which is mentioned by Flower (Osteology of Mammalia) ;as occurring in the dog and bear, and as absent in the cat.» I) find five other foramina which usually form the outlets of canals which are connected with the lateral venous sinus. The principal canal extends from the post- glenoid foramen upwards and backwards between the os petrosum and the squamosal, and enters the cranial cavity at the superior border of the for- mer. Ata point in the. parietal bone, often on or very near the squamoso- parietal suture, it issues on the surface again, in the foramen which may be called the postparietal. A branch of the:canal may take-a posterior direc- tion and issue on the occipital face of the skull in the suture between the ossa petrosum and exoccipitale, forming the mastoid foramen, | Or x pos- terior branch may issue in the posterior part of the squamosal bone in a lateral foramen, the postsquamosal. Tn certain Mammals a large foramen perforates the base of the zygomatic process of the squamosal from above, entering the canal after a short course of its own ; this L-call the: supra- glenoid foramen. Still another inlet to the canal is found in some Mam- mals, perforating the squamosal below the crest which connects the zygoma with the inion, oceupying a position ‘posterior and exterior to the post- 1880, 7} 453 [Cope- glenoid, and, generally, looking more downwards than outwards.. I call this the subsguamosal,.. These foramina may be arranged in, four sets, as follows : ‘J, Looking downwards 3” Postglenoid. UNAS) Subsquamosalion) 6) ene: DOT. Looking outwards ; NONO8S. Postsquamosals Postparietal. oT S10M 998! “TIT. Looking upwards ; cf Supraglenoid. I 9108 19 Ig IV. Looking backwards ; Mastoid. Some foramina of the same region are not necessarily connected with the sinus lateralis. UHyrtl, in his essay* on the arterial system of the _Edentata, shows that a foramen near to the postsquamosal of the Tamandua tetradactyla, gives passage to an *‘arterta diploética,’”’ whichis formed by the junction of the occipital branch of\ the carotid withan ascending branch of the temporo-mawillaris division of the carotid. The a. diploética issues in a forameén which perforates the parietal bone on the orbital border... These two foramina may be called the f. diploéticum posterior and f. d. anterior, respectively. The former enters from the fundus of the same small fossa, which is ‘also perforated in its superior portion by the f. postsquamosate, the canal fronrthe latter foramen taking the usual vertical direction, o- §$till another foramen exists, which is, so far as my present knowledge goes, confined to the Monotremata and Marsupialia, It enters the posteri- or base of the zygomatic portion of the squamosal, and is directed forwards. In Tachyglossus it passes through the base of the zygoma, issuing in the ‘base/of the!zygomatie fossa. In the Marsupialia it enters a fossa of the ‘squamosal bone, which may or may not be partially filled with cancellous ‘tissue.’ I call this the foramen posteygomaticum. bo Dl now give the results of my observations,on the crania of the most im- portant mer which I have observed; one hundred and sixteen in number.+ 10} ) MOoNOTREMATA, \Tachyglossus. The only foramina are the f.f. diploética anterior and pos- asian and the postzygomaticum. The anterior half of the canal comnect- ing the former two has no external wall. “\\Orntthorhynchus. Postzygomatic large and passing: through the na0- ma ; Saneerer large ; no other foramina. MARSUPIALIA. » The types of this order generally have the postglenoid, and hardly ever have the supraglenoid or postparietal.. They are generally distinguished * Denkschriften Wiener Akademie, 1854, T. ITT, pl. 1. ++ Most of these are preserved in my private collection ; for afew Iam indebted tothe Museum of the Philadelphia Academy, , Cope.) 454 (Feb: 6, by the presence of the subsquamosal, ‘but in Hypsiprymnus and Macropus this foramen becomes the postsquamosal, through the failure of the post- zygomatic crest. It need not’ be confounded with another. foramen also found in these genera, which enters above the meatus auditorius externus, and communicates with the tympanic chamber, and which I call the \su- pratympanic foramen. The subsquamosal enters the sinous canal, and in Phascolarctos, where the postglenoid is wanting, constitutes its only exter- nal outlet. The order is further characterized by the presence of the post- zygomatic foramen. Phascolomys ; postzygomatic chamber enormous, extending above mea- tus. No foramina below, except supratympanic ; above, a,supraglenoid and one or two postglenoids. Phascolarctos ; subsquamosal and. postzygomatic only ; the latter com- municating with an empty chamber. Macropus and Hypsiprymnus ; postglenoid, postzygomatic,, supratym- panic and postsquamosal ; the second communicating with a chamber filled with cancelli. Fig. 1.—Skull of opossum (Pidelphys virginiana) natural size, posterior view, parts of the right mastoid and squamosal bones removed. M, mastoid fora- men; SBS, subsquamosal; PG, postglenoid; PZ, postzygomatic foramen, Didelphys ; postglenoid, postzygomatic, subsquamosal and mastoid ; postzy gomatic small. Dasyurus ; postgienoid, subsquamosal and probably mastoid. TI cannot find a postzygomatic. \ Phalangista ; postsquamosal and postparietal only ; no postzygomatic nor supratympanic. EDENTATA. Tamandua ; F. f. diploética anterior and posterior, and postsquamosal only. Dasypus (6-cinetus); postylenoid (large), postsquamosal, mastoid, several postparictals, and a small subsquamosal. 1880.9" 455 [Cope: Chlamydophorus ; a postglenoid only. Manis > postzygomatic only. Megalonyz ; postsquamosal and supratympanic ; a closed fissure at posi- tion of postglenoid.. A large foramen below the usual position of mastoid. - Bradypus and Cholepus; no foramina. RODENTIA. In this order, so far as yet observed, the supraglenoid and postparietal foramina are never present, while the mastoid is rarely, and the sub- squamosal is generally, represented. The ridge connecting the zygoma with the inion being weak, the difference between this foramen and the postsquamosal is less marked in this order than in the Marsupialia. It is, however, always on the inferior border of the squamosal bone. Lepus and Lagomys ; no foramina. Lagidium ; no foramina. Cercolabes ; no foramina. , Lagostomus, Geomys and Hrithizen ; an enormous postglenoid without internal canal. Capromys, Velogenys, Sciurus, Haplodontia, Hesperomys, Mus ; post- glenoid and postsquamosal only. Hystriz, Hydrocherus, Neotoma and Arvicola; postglenoid and post- squamosal foramina confluent ; no others. Castor, Cynomys and Spermophilus ; postglenoid, postsquamosal and mastoid. ‘ INSECTIVORA. The foramina are very much as in the Rodentia in the smaller forms, and as in the Carnivora in the larger. Blarina, Condylura and Sealops ; postsquamosal ce Erinaceus ; postglenoid and postsquamosal only. Mystomys the same, according to Allman’s figures. Centetes ; postglenoid, postparietal and mastoid. Solenodon (from Peters’ figures) ; postglenoid and postparietal. CHIROPTERA. In some members of this order the foramina are, as in many Carnivora, limited to the postglenoid and postparietal. Scotophilus ( fuscus); postglenoid, postparictal and mastoid. _ Pteropus ; postglenoid, subsquamosal and postsquamosal. CARNIVORA. In this order the foramina are few in number, and are very well defined. None of them possess more than three, while the specialized forms, both terrestrial and aquatic, do not possess them. Trichecus and Arctocephalus ; no foramina. Phoca ; a rudimental postglenoid. Cope, | 456 |Feb.6, Ursus, Arctotherium and Hyenodon;-postglenoid, mastoid and post- parietal. : Enhydrocyon and Temnocyon ; postglenoid and postparietal only. Fia@. 2.—-Temnocyon cor Cope, erer Mince A one-half natu- ral size. PP, ian dosage foramen. EXE te & y Archelurus, Dinictis, Pogonodon, cpio and Machrodus (cere- bralia),; postglenoid and postparietal only. ; Procyon, Nasta and Bassaris ; postglenoid only. Canis, Vulpes and Urocyon ; postglenoid only. Viverra, Mustela, Putorius. and Mephitis ; ‘Postglenoid only. Felis (domestica) ; sometimes a minute postglenoid only; sometimes none. Hyena, Uncia, Cynelurus ; no foramina. pe ROSIE: Lemur, Chirogaleus and Tar sius; @ peusienett only. QUADRUMANA. ag Ba Hapale ; postglenoid and postsquamosal. Cebus ; postglenoid and postparietal. The latter is on the suture of the parietal and squamosal bones ; in Hapale penicillata it is entirely within the squamosal bones. Ateles, Callithrie; Mycetes, Semnopithecus and Oynocephalus ;.no for- amina. Macaeus ; a small postglenoid. Troglodytes niger, gorilla ; a closed fissure, but no foramen postglenoia. eum, — hn ee Homo; no foramina in sixteen North Ameridala adalat Lof the Klamath, Bannock, Crow, Sioux and Cheyenne tribes. One postglenc id on one side in a South Australian. One or two mastoids are more usual, be- ing found in © “good many specimens of all races. “They are Ta Hot- tentot negroes. CETACEA, Balena, Beluga and Monodon ; no foramina. SYRENTA. Halicore and Manatus ; « huge mastoid only, 1880, | 457 | Cope. . HYRACOIDEA. Hyraz ; no foramina. PROBOSCIDIA. Elephas ; no foramina. PERISSODACTYLA. In this order the number of the foramina ranges from very few to many. Fig. 3.—Aphelops megalodus Cope, Loup Fork of Colorado; one-sixth natural _ size gshowing postparietal foramen. Rhinocerus, Aphelops ; postparietal only. Fia. 4. Fra, 5. Skulls of Aphelops megalodus (Fig. 4) and A. fossiger (Fig, 5) from behind; one- sixth natural size; showing absence of mastoid foramen, Tapirus ; postparietal and a huge mastoid. Anchitherium, Hippotherium, Protohippus and Equus; postparietal, postsquamosal, postglendid and supraglenoid. In ‘the last three genera PkKOC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xvuir, 105. 3G. PRINTED MARCH 6, 1880. " Copel} 458 | Penis, the vessel issuing from the postsquamosal, grooves the petrvous bone,’ leav- ing it ata point near that usually occupied by thei mastoid foramen. “In the second and last genera,’ and) probably in: the: third, theosinous Canal is protected by a bony:crest:in front; throughout its entire’ length, ARTIODACTYLA, oT 18). Great diversities are found in this order, especially between the suilline and ruminant divisions.’ In the former; with the exception of the Hippo- potamida, there are no foramina; in the Ruminantia they are more *nu- merous than in any other order of the elasso°The Ruminantia are, liké the equine Perissodactyla, characterized bythe presence of the: supraglenoid: foramen; to this the Camelidw and some others add: the mastoid. ‘The Tragulina must be excepted from this rule, for they have nothing but the peatgieniaisk yoni inmiae: Sus, Dicotyles and Phacocherus ; no foramina. Hippopotamus and Cheropsis ; spegheiesy: pusteainneal mastoid’ and @ rudimental supraglénoid. imO ond at (6 Ruminantia, Tragulus ; postglenoid:only. Oreodon ; postparietal‘and mastoid. | In one specimen of 0. euldertsont from Colorado, I find a minute supraglenoid on each side ; in other speci+ mens it is wanting. Poébrotherium ; postparietal, postglenoid ; mastoid ;° a small supraglen- oid. Fra. 6.—Skull of Procamelus occidentalis Vieidy, Loup Fork of New Mexico; one-fourth natural size; showing supriglenoid foramen, SPQ. ~ Procamelus, Camelus, Auchenia ; postglenoid, ‘supraglenoid and aepold, Bos ; postglenoid and supraglenoid only. Antilocapra’; postparietal, postglenoid, mastoid, and a large, supraglen- oid. V3 Giraffa ; pos'gienoid, supraglenoid, postsquamosal.and mastoid. Oreas, Ovia, Cervus; postglenoid, supraglenoid, ee postpa- rietal and mastoid. 1880} | 459. [Cope. -yFrom-the preceding the following conclusions may be derived : 10) The-sinous foramina, furnish valuable diagnostic: characters, and may; with proper limitation, be used in systematic definition) (2) The primitive: condition of the various mammalian orders appears to have been the possession of « limited number of these foramina. (3: The monotreme-marsupial line have developed a mumbes of woramina in their own special way. (4) The Rodentia have voaun4 emo those of the’ infetior part oft oe squamosal bone, if any, (5) The Carnivora commenced with but few foramina, and have peesne ated: these on attaining their highest development. o(6) The history of the se mane a is identical with that of the Car- nivora. (7) The Perissodactyla itibeens very few foramina in the lowest’ forms, and did not increase them in the line ofthe Rhinoceride. In the line of _ the horses an increase in their number appeared. early in geologic time, wndis fully maintained in the existing species. (8) In the Omnivorous division of the Artiodactyla, time has ae ana all the sinous foramina. In the Camels an increased number was apparent at the same geologic period as in the history of the horses (White River or Lowest Miocene), and has been maintained ever since ; while the existing Pecorapresent a Jarger number of the foramina than any of the Class of Mammalia. The only relation between these structures and the habits of the species concerned that:can now be traced is, that the largest number of the foram - ina is found in the specialized vegetable feeders, while the smallest nume ber is found in omnivorous forms. I now give a synopsis of the distribution of the sinous foramina accord- ing to the foramina themselves. The /f. f. diploetica, postzygomatica and supratympanicum are not, included, as. peeir existence is restricted to the wie 3h few y ag already mentioned, S oot ee oe +4 I. No foramina. | Ee Lomo, Troglodytes, Cynocephalus, Semnopithecus, Myetes, 6 lithrix, Ateles. aa Uncia, Hyena, Arctocephalus, Marches. Elephas, Hyraz ; Sus, Phacocherus, Dicotyles. Lepus, Lugidium, Cercolabes. Olas Cholepus, Bradypus. ‘OTL Postglenoid only. - Ni val TADIRODOT 2 a. Rudimental. isfgarque | Hionsl SoG “HSRC eS Phoed. Ati +! hea, BE aig tig aa. Developed. Chlamydophorus.. sfamiqire bionstete0q «syd Lemur, Chirogaleus, Tarsius 3000 2 \° Freeney Macacus. Hsidsdr bitin Tatats Cope.] 460 [Feb6, Mustela, Putorius, Mephitis ; Canis. Vulpes, Uroeyon ; Viverra. Procyon, Nasua, me aelaty i Tragulus. , aaa. Knormous. Si oma asiqua: © Lagostomus and Geomys. °° ND BITIMOIO GOS III. Subsquamosal only. a7 Phascolarctos. IV. Postsquamosal only. Ornithorhyncus, Tamandua, Blarina, Condytura, Scalops. V. Postparietal only. Rhinocerus, Aphelops. — ~ VI. Mastoid only. ree Halicore, Manatus. VII. Postglenoid and subsquamosal only? Hystriz, Hydrocherus, ‘Capromys, Calogenys, Sciurus, Haplo- dontia, Neotoma, Hesperomgs, Mus, Arvicola. VIII. Postglenoid and postsquamosal sp . Brinaceus. Macropua, Hypsiprymnus. Hapale. IX. Postglenoid and postparietal. Chiroptera sp. Temnocyon, Enhydrocyon ; Archelurus, Dinictis, Pogonodon, Hoplophoneus, Macherodus. Cebus. [ X. Mastoid and postparietal. a. Mastoid small. Oreodon. . Mastoid enormous. Tapirus. XI. Mastoid, riatploncad: and postsquamosal. Castor, Oynomys, Spermophilus. » XII. Mastoid, postglenoid and subsquamosal. Dasyurus, Didelphys. . XILL. Mastoid, postglenoid and postparietal. Scotophilus ( fuscus). Centetes. Hyanodon, Ursus, Aretotherium ; XIV. Supraglenoid and postsquamosal only. Phascolomys. XV. Supraglenoid and postglenoid only. Bos. XVI. Supraglenoid, postglenoid and mastoid. Procamelus, Camelus, Auchenia. XVIL. Supraglenoid, postglenoid, mastoid, pentogsiesal a. SBupraglenoid small. Poébrotherium. 1880.) 461 [Rogers. ao: Supraglenoid large. .. Antilocapra. XVIII. Supraglenoid, postglenoid, mastoid and cloteeiaantaal a, Supraglenoid small. fone? Hippopotamus, Ohwropsis. ; aa. Supraglenoid large. Giraffa. XIX. Supraglenoid, postglenoid, postparietal and postsquamosal. a. Supraglenoid small ; mastoid not grooved, Anchitherium. 3. Supraglenoid large, mastoid grooved, Hippotherium, Protohippus, Equus. XX. Supraglenoid, postglenoid, postparietal, postsquamosal and mastoid. Cervus, Oreas, Ovis. Biographical Notice of Professor Joseph Henry. By Fairman Rogers. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, February 20, 1880. ) The admirable memoir of Prof. Joseph Henry, prepared by Mr. William B. Taylor, and read before the Philosophical Society of Washington, October 26, 1878, is so exhaustive both as to his scientific labors and the incidents of his life that little can be added to it until at some future time a biographer will undertake the preparation of a more voluminous life and letters. As to his scientific career, the memoir deals principally with his earlier work as being more directly personal, and the results of his own manipu- . lation and experiment, while his later days were devoted to the direction and coérdination of the work of others. Regret has frequently been expressed by the scientific friends of Prof. Henry, that his acceptance of the Secretaryship of the Smithsonian, and his devotion to the interests of that Institution had withdrawn him from those lines of original research, in which he shone so conspicuously, and while these regrets are perhaps well-founded, it is a question whether he could possibly have been of more value to science under any circumstances other than those in which this later part of his life was passed. In his position his influence upon American Science was great-and varied. He was a constant and shining example before the eyes of the younger scientific men of an unselfish devotion to the interests of science for itself, and not for self aggrandizement. Honest in the widest and deepest sense of the word, he never permitted expediency, self-interest or passion to interfere with the search for truth, and his clearand simple ex- pressions on such subjects put it out of the power of those who consulted. him to do otherwise than follow the example which he set them. Rogers.] 462 [Feb. 20, Filling for years a position. in which, without, violating. any, of the prin- ciples which many, nay, most men consider quite sufficient for their moral guidance, he might have used his knowledge for the furtherance of his own selfish ends, he never swerved for, an instant.from his determination to, ex- amine.and decide all matters from the purely scientific point of, view,,un-, biassed by any considerations as to how_his decisions might affect the in,- terests of any one, and the hosts of inventors and. projectors who are.con-:; stantly hoyering around, Government headquarters found him a sentinel whom it was impossible to cajole or to pass without that. countersign a true worthiness which his-trained mind was quick to recognize. While he, no, doubt; had, he remained in his laboratory, would have! added year after year to the knowledge of the world by original research, ' he did so much in his prominent position to encourage and assist such work by others, that it may be fairly presumed that the results were equally good. While there are many men, who, in the solitude of the laboratory: can’ carry on important investigations, there are few who join to am accurate | scientific training the ability to impress and to, direct: men who are theirs scientific equals, the. lofty incorruptibility, of »character; and»: the | eneriG sighted power of grasping a subject which he possessed. 1.» In this respect as well as by his official, position he much rebdunblenb his! friend Alexander Dallas Bache with whom he was intimately associated: for the many years during which they both lived in Washington.) 9) oo% Brought into continual personal contact with the active scientifie men of the day; they exerted an incalculable effect upon what we might call the scientific morals of the younger po saieenoen and mene trod tiscinsetveay the paths which alone lead to honor. Single minded and steadfast in their purposes, they would waten to na! projects which had about them the taint of selfishness or corruption, and” the man who met them with any project which would not bear the full lightof day soon felt that he had e- a kari mistake, and’ retreited | in confusion. Ban In writing thus, Ido not mean that Prof. Hority frowned only on those | projects which the average sentiment characterizes as dishonest, that was his clear and evident duty, but he also taught that scientific work had ” for its object the development of truth, and that all the petty considerations’ of claims of priority, and the jealousies which so often embitter the rela- tions of scientific men were unreal and unimportant, — seconearytt matters. int a od It issomewhat doubtful whether any one can docuipy again a posittori ii the American scientific. world exactly similar to his. Commencing - big scientific career at a time when it was quite possible fora great man to: know the whole range of the physical sciences ina way more or less com: plete, he was looked up ito by all men working in those fields as an iac:/ knowledged. authority, and his influence \was thus. very extensive.) Nowe’ these flelds have become so large and varied that it-is hardly possiblesfor: any one to become more than a specialist, and the power of coérdination 1880.49 463 fRogers. whi¢h Prof. Henry in common with’ Bache and Agassiz, exercised is gone with them, and aot perhaps now be concentrated 4 ‘in BASE CEnAIGS and So- cieties. ' 1 Prof. Henry’s tbh connection with the American Philosophical Soci- ety was during his residence at Princeton, from the year 1832 to 1846, during which period he made constant comminitations to the Society, and attended its meetings regularly, forming and cementing’ those friendships with many Philadelphians which lasted through his life. This was the time of his greatest activity in original work, and as Faraday, in England, Biot and Becquerel, in France, and Riess, in Germany, were engaged in parallel investigations of the greatest importance, the pears was one of the most interesting in the annals of science. Upon his election, in 1846, as head of the Smithsonian Tdatienrton! nis opportunities for direct private investigation in his own laboratory ceased, but) he: had improved facilities for controlling extensive investigations through correspondents, which added largely to scientific knowledge, and some. of his liter personal researches, such as those relating to lighthouse oijs:and to sound signals, were of’ the greatest importance. Elected President. of the National Academy of Sciences, in 1868, after the death of its first President, Prof. Bache, he exercised in its affairs the same strong, sensible, quiet influence that characterized his usual action; and his last formal connection with it, only a few weeks before his death, was, marked, by two.incidents, in themselves of much interest. sé His waning powers and several sharp attacks of illness had warned him that,his life was drawing towards its close, and one of his intimate friends; with whom he sometimes took counsel about his family affairs, found that. he was troubled by the, fear that his family might suffer from straightened circumstances after his death, Without giving him the least intimation of) what was intended, a fund of forty thousand dollars, in one thousand dol- lar subscriptions, was quickly made up among his friends and admirers in several Eastern cities, principally in Philadelphia, and placed im trust for the benefit. of his wifecand, children during their lives, with the proviso that after their death it should go to the National Academy of Sciences; and form ‘‘’The Joseph Henry Fund,’’ the interest to be applied to assist- ing investigators.in original research. ‘Nothing could have been more pleasant than the way in which Prof. Henry took this: compliment. He appreciated exactly the spirit in which the movement was made, and said that the only source of trouble iw his: mind was now removed: He frequently referred to it, and enjoyed draw- ing a parallel between his lifecand ‘that of his intimate friend, Bache,-re- marking that they had worked together, had occupied high scientific po- sitions under government ‘together, had both been. Presidents of ‘the ~ Academy, and that now the-chain would be unbroken, for he would leave behind him, in the hands of that’ Academy ‘The: ee Henry Fund,”’ as' Bache had left ‘‘ The Bache Fund.’ The presentation of this fund to the Academy formed a conwpicasa part Rogers} 464 (Feb. 9), of the business proceedings of the Session of April, 1878, and the Presi- dent’s address, which was his last formal communication to that body, touched in the most feeling manner upon the compliment paid to him. The other incident was the exhibition tothe Academy, by Mr. Edison, through special invitation, of the. phonograph, and of a number of im- provements upon the telephone and kindred instruments. A private.ex- hibition of them was made in Prof. Henry’s private rooms in the Smith- sonian Institution, and nothing could have been more interesting than the spectacle of the famous old physicist studying with the most intense inter- est and the clearest appreciation, the very latest: developments of the sci- ences to which he had devoted his life, and the application of those investi- gations, in many of which he had led the world fifty years before. He felt, and those about him felt, that it was probably the last time that he would have any direct connection with the active science of the world, and so it preved ; for, within less than four ianere his friends were called upon to mourn his death. The funeral services of Prof. Henry were the occasion of a tase gather ing of the scientific men of the ‘conntry, and of others who, prominent in their respective offices, admired the pure spirit which had. passed for so many years unscathed by the breath of scandal, through the temptations of official life ; and, on a sunny May afternoon, bis remains were deposited in the beautiful cemetery which overlooks the city of Washington, in which he spent so many years, full of honor. in Within a year of his death, the Congress of the United States paid to the memory of Prof. Henry its highest compliment. Both Houses passed on the 10th of December, 1878, the following resolution : ‘* That the Congress of the United States will take part in the services to be observed on Thurs: . day evening, January 16, 1879, in honor of the memory of Joseph Henry, late Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, under the auspices of. the Regents thereof, and for that purpose the Senators and Members will as- semble on that evening in the Hall of the House of Representatives, the Vice-President of the United States, supported by the Speaker of the House, to preside on that occasion,”’ The exercises which were held in a crowded auditorium, consisted in an opening prayer by Dr. McCosh, of Princeton College, and. addresses by Senator Hannibal Hamlin, Senator R. E. Withers, Prof. Asa Gray, Prof. William B. Rogers, Representative James A. Garfield, Representative 8. 8, Cox, and General W. T. Sherman with the concluding prayer by the Rev, Dr. Sunderland, Chaplain of the Senate. With this mention of such a fitting tribute to his worth, and to the cals mation in which he was held by his fellow-men, our short memoir of Re’ Joseph Henry ends. pram 1880.) : 465 [Gatschet. _ THE, TIMUCUA LANGUAGE. . By Avsert 8. GarTscner. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, February 20, 1880, as a third sequel to the Grtiees on this “subject ae April 6, 1877, ane April 5, 1878. patra ~ This third matlale on the Floridian shila once spoken by the Timucua. or Atimoke people is herewith presented to those interested in linguistics, with the remark of the author, that all: his attempts to connect. it by its radical elements with some other language spoken in, the neighborhood of its native soil have proved infructuous, and that therefore he regards it as - constituting a linguistic family for itself. The position of the author as a linguist of Prof. J. W. Powell’s U. 8. Bureau of Ethnology, Washington, D. C., has materially facilitated his researches upon the idiom, and. any further notice bearing upon the history, ethnography and language of this remarkable: nation, the last remnants of which are perhaps not yet ex- tinet, will be received with thanks by the author, »»This article subdivides itself into the following portions : Historic. Re- marks, Ethnographic Remarks, Bibliography, Radical Affinities, Dialeets, Grammatic: Notes and Selected Texts. Among the texts a missive sent. in. 1688: by the Timucua chiefs to the King of Spain will be read with much interest. 7 , Historic REMARKS. Our historic information about the Indians of Florida speaking the Timu- cua language is very fragmentary vp to the period of the publication of René de Laudonniére’s report on his expeditions to that country, or, as he calls them rather unassumingly, ‘‘ Voyages.’’ His account treats of no other American people but of this, for Florida was the only portion of this continent of which he possessed a special knowledge. From the reports of the chroniclers of the expedition of De Soto (1533-43) we can gather the fact that this race extended across the whole northern part of the Floridian peninsula, for they mention proper names of persons and places vn its western coast, which can be explained through no other language but that of the Timucua. Modern research has proved that the dialects of the Indians inhabiting the northern part of the Floridiam peninsula belong to a linguistic family diffzring radically from that of the Maskoki, Yuchi, Cheroki and Alg6nkin. But the early explorers were not aware of this fact, or at least they did not put it in evidence. In those times not even instructed people could appreciate the enormous ethnologic importance of the difference of lin- guistic stocks, and had only a vague idea of linguistic classification. The disparateness of linguistic families means early local distance of the tribes or nations speaking them, and those who have paid some attention to these studies, know that these linguistic differences must go back into an epoch remote from ours by fifty or by a hundred thousand years. Thus the differ- PROC. AMER. PHILOS. 80C. xvi1I, 105. 8H. PRINTED MARCH 26, 1880. Gatschet.] 466 u L[Feb,20, ence of linguistic families. proves,,and is.associated. with racial difference. But racial difference is, not. always associated with a disparateness of lin~ guistic family, for it is recorded that certain individuals, tribes;and nations have, in the course of time, been prevailed upon to adopt the idioms of neighboring populations, especially when conquered by them. “Although the method, how to infer a ‘difference of race from. a thorough, radical disparateness of language was above.the conception even, of the most Iearned men of the sixteenth century, we see that these,as, well as the common adventurers who flooded the islands and coasts of America were, close observers of the ethnographic peculiarities of the tribes they visited. Their records leave us in the dark concerning tlie languages spoken by the. Teqestas and Calos on the southern extremity of Florida; we cannot gather from them whether Caribs, Western or Northern Indians were settled in the peninsula at the time of their visit. But they transmit us many peculiar traits and customs, from which they seem to have inferred. that all Southern Indians of the Gulf States belonged, to one stock, Our present knowledge of Timucua shows that: it stands,in no inddient connection with the Galibi diulects of South America (Arowak, Cumanat] gota, Chaymas, etc.), nor with the extinct Galibi idioms. of the West) In- dies (Eyeri, Taino, Lucayo, ete.), nor with the Carib on the coast of Hon- duras... We must therefore discountenance, in some degree, the far-going) speculations concerning Carib colonies, and their influence on the Indians’ in the Apalache country, indulged in by Hervas, Catalogo I, pag. 386,.Gc.,, though seafaring men of this nation may have temporarily settled on that, coast. Hervas quotes the following terms from Bristock :*‘Palakras’ de los Apalachinos que tienen de los caribes: buottou maza, taumali guisado,: banaré amigo familiar, etotou enemigo, allouha arco, allouani flechas,., taonabo lago, estanque, mabouya espiritu maligno, akarnboue alma humana, y innumerables palabras de cosas curiosas y raras, comunes 4 los caribes de las Antillas.’’* Pag. 386: ‘‘ Las provincias (apalaches), de Amana y Matibue, en donde hay muchas familias de caribes, tienen muchas er Si del antiguo idioma caribe,”’ René de Laudonniére’s report; from witioh Hakluyt made his En aligh and Théodore de Bry his Latin translation, is dated 1586,:and bears the: faltow:' ing title ; L’'HISTOIRE | NOTABLE DE LA FLO | RIDE ‘SITUEE ES” INDBS | Occidentales, contenant les trois voyages faits en icelle par cer- tains Capitaines & Pilotes Franeais, descrits par le Capitaine Laudonnicre, — qui y acommandé |’espace d’vn an trois moys: & laquelle a esté adiousté vn quatriesme voyage fait par le Capitaine Gourgues. x Mise en lumiere par M. Basanier, gentil-homme Frangois Mathematicien. (Vignette: Bellerophon and the chimera.) a * Most of these terms can be identified with Carib words once in use on the” island of Guadeloupe, etc. ef, Breton, Dict,; Brinton, Notes on the Fl, nenine sula, pag. 0C-98, , rain 7 he we : ari ayy 1880.] 9 ~ 467 (Gatschet. A Paris, Chez Guillaume Auuray, rué sainct Tean de Beauuais, au Bellerophon couronné. MDLXXXVI. AVEC PRIVILEGE DV ROY. gr. 12mo,' 124 leaves, numbered recto only. To give a historic sketch of the various vicissitudes of the French adyen- turing ‘soldiers who arrived in Northeastern Florida on June 22, 1564, and established Charlefort or Fort St. Charles (arx Carolana) on the south- ern shore of the St. John’s River, isa task quite foreign to my purpose. My inquiries or the Timucua have prevailingly linguistic tendencies ; hence our attention will be solely occupied by gathering from the above, and other sources, notices on the social status, in which the explorers found the people of the Atimoqua, and by the information which can be made avail- able for linguistic science. “In the countries drained by the St. John’s River and its tributaries René de Laudonniére heard of the existence of jive paracusi, and some of them ruled over a considerable number of Indian chiefs and theirtowns. These five acini were called Caeat hrs, Holata Utina, Potanu, Onethcaqua and Hostaqtat . Saturiwa and his son Athore resided on the Atlantic coast, south of the outlet of St. John’s River, and controlled thirty sub-chiefs, while the Holata Utina; or as De Laudonniére calls him in French orthography, ‘‘ Olata Ouae Utina,’’ ruled over forty chiefs and their towns further inland. The map added: by Theodor de Bry to his pictorial description of these ‘Vo- yages”’ places the seat of the Utina east of some large inland forest, west of the St. John’s River, and there are reasons for locating his seat near Lake St. George, a sheet of water formed by the St. John’s River in its middle course, That‘map locates the town of Timoga, which belonged to the do- main of this head chief, upon the eastern shore of the St. John, and De Laudonniére’s text places it twenty leagues from Saturiwa’s seat. The Timagoa people were the most inveterate and implacable enemies of Satu- riwa’s warriors ; and when a war was impending between Saturiwa and the: Timagoa, because the former had obtained some silver by force from the’ latter, De Laudonniére offered his military assistance to Saturiwa. He: thereby hoped to obtain trustworthy information on the countries, where: the silver, as well as the gold of which some of their ornaments were made, was Obtained; constant rumors pointed to the ‘‘Apalatci mountains’’ as to the source of these precious commodities. Both sexes wore various or- naments made of gold, and most conspicuous. were the disk-shaped gold pieces worn around their loins at, dances and on other solemn. occasions.. Potanu, written Potauou, by De Laudonniére, was twenty-five. leagues from Utina; he gives this name to a.chief, Pareja gives it to.a province in the interior.* This chief controlled an upland tract of country; in this tract was found the hard slate stone, from which the people made wedges to. cleave wood and to finish their canoes after they had burnt out a cavity * Personal names are frequently confounded in De Laudonniére’s and other narratives with local Timucua names, and vice versa. Gat¥ehiet.] 468 (Feb. 20, in the logs beforehand. To deprive Potant of his'slate quarries, thie Olata Utina warréed against him,’ and dn officer of’ De Laudonniére assisted’ him in putting his antagonist to flight." loled Yidsdotg 9 The home of Oncthcaqua is ‘located “near tlie igh! mountains”; the map reads: “Onathicaqua: Hostaqua, Hotistaqua isa ‘@ settlement oeseisee by thé map a short distance from Onatheaqua, and wé are told ‘that the’ pedpile of ‘these’ two’ ‘conimunities “(De Laudonniére calls head-chiefs’ by these nainés) painted their files’ black, while the ae of Molloua (Mfatuay’ uNed red paint for this purpose. ; of Tt is probable’ ‘that these five patactisi’ ‘were nothing but head- chiefs ot tribal confederacies, and that the téal power was not in their hands, but'in those of their sub-chiefs or holata. Head-chiefs and chiefs surrounded them- selves with considerable ceremonial and pomp, and ‘probably on this ac! count the chroniclers call them kings ; but ‘some kind of etiquette ‘sur- rounded all chiefs throughout the territories near the Gulf of Mexico, and that the Timiitiia people enjoyed a sort of democratic rulé is shown by’ the election of a new chief by thé warriors. From Pareja’s writings” ‘alore, which were Composed fifty years later, we would ‘certainly be led titisstiniié that the Timucua people was ruled rather despotically. On many points the narrative of thé French captain is neither precise nor satisfactory ; we learn nothing’ positive about the territorial extent of thé settlements of the Timucua race, nor about’ the national name’ by which ‘they called them selves. His book goes to show that Timoga, Timagoa ‘was the name of one town, village or chieftaincy only ; in later times it was extended over sev- eral chieftaincies only by the circumstance’ ihat the Indians of this place were among the first christianized, and that missionaries composed “books in their dialect only. The same thing has occurred with’ the apes eg San Juan ‘Bautista, California. 01093 Some of the French explorers: seem to have reached the locality where gold was obtained in the sand of the rivers and brooks, but the result being not satisfactory, they soon returned to Fort St. Charles.* When they began to suffer of famine, the Indians showed to them their natural treacherous disposition and scoffed them for their ‘misery, ‘but never at- tacked them, protected as they were by an instar fort’ armed ‘with ¢an- nons. ‘Two Spaniards were liberated! by theni, who told them about the existence of the Calos “kingdém ’” at the southern extremity’ of the penin- sila ; one of them had been despatched as a messenger By the Galos chief to chief Oathchaqua, a four or five days’ journey north of Calos!’ “Hilf way he siw the island Serropé in a fresh water lake of thé ‘same raumeé, 08) _Fontanedg mentions forty towns or settlements of the Gatos, or Calls . Gola was called by them sloroa pire (pira, red, yellow), The ghron\cler. Ton- tanedo speaks of the “ mines of Onogatano, situated in the snow-clad Monnveine of Onogatano, the most distant possessions of Abolacht "Mem, 'p. 32. Of: “The precious metals possessed by the early Floridian) Indians,” pag. 19%-202 (A ppen- dix IL) of Brinton, Notes on the, Flor, Peninsula. Brinton thinks, that the Timucus were probably acquain with the auriferous gulches of the Apalach- jun ridge In Georgia and the Caroll nis, as 1880), é 469 [Gatschet. Indians; who, held the south-western portion of the, peninsula (Brinton, Notes,.p./113)..,- Among, twenty oftheir number, Comachica and Cala-obe are probably belonging to the Timucua language (hica, land,,.country. ; kéla-abo, fruit-stalk or fruit-tree) ; the town of Tampa hasa Maskoki name: itimpi near, close. to,it, Some. of these towns were located, on, Lucayo Islands (the Keys?), and four inthe Jand, of the Tocobayo,,on Lake Mayaimi. Near Manatee, Brinton found:a, small Jake called Lake Mayaco, a name not, altogether unlike Mayaimi ; ; but Lake. Mayaimi is, described by the chroniclers as being of huge proportions. Sarasota Bay and Island, Mana- tee. Co,, on. the western, coast,.seems, to, be a-Timucua, name; but the ma- jority; of; the, present Indian names, of, localities found, on maps of the pen; insular part, of the State are Seminole, an idiom differing but very little from the Creek, of the Maskoki family. Thus Welaka, a town on St, John’s River, Putnam, Co.,. isthe ‘great water,’ o-iwa thliko, contracted into withlako; this was. or,is still the Seminole name forthe St. John’s River, and jis inter- preted by, some writer; ‘‘river, of many lakes.”’, The French, ¢alled, the St, John’s River Ja Riviere Mai, because entered on May 1st by their, ves- sels,; the Spaniards named it Rio de San Mateo, Rio. Picolata, Rio de San TMaM, yy, South, of, Cape Cafiaveral, the country along the Atlantic Coast was called by. the Spaniards, who,had a, post. there, the ‘‘ Province of Tequesta,’’? .The northern portion of this section of land was called in later epochs Ais, Ays, Js, and, Santa, Lucia by the Spaniards. , Ads is interpreted by aisa, deer,a term, not belonging to the Timucua language, but identifiable with itcho, deer, in Seminole, or itchi, itche in Hitchiti and Mikasuke, The work of christianizing the Florida Indians began. with. the establish- ment.ofja permanent, Spanish garrison at St. Augustine by Adelantado Pedro Menendez de Aviles, in 1564. The: padres mostly went, to the southern portions of the land ; two were sent to the “* Calusas”’ in 1567, and 1568 ten others arrived, who dispersed themselves in various diree- tions. Padre Antonio Sedeio settled. in the island of Guale (Mary’s, Santa Maria, now Amelia Island) ’and was the first to compose there a catechism and a grammar of some North. American, language not specified. , After Menendez, had returned to Spain in 1567, the French Huguenot leader De Gourgues, allied with the paracusi Saturiwa, demolished:the most important Spanish forts in the same year, and the Spanish missionaries met with the most cruel reverses,, Padre Rogel returned from the Calos country, disgusted with his ill-success, and went to San Felipe, a Spanish coast, set- tlement in the ‘‘ Province of Orista,’’ north of the Savannah River, but did not. remain long. _ Coava, chief of an inland country named Axacin, one hundred and fifty leagues from San Augustine, put to death all the apostolic missionaries sent among his people. The Die oor captain’ Francis Drake ‘destroyed San Augustine i OO pial ‘In 1592 twelve Franciscan’ ‘padres were sent to this wolocidy field of: Catho- lie martyrdom, and two vears after this, twenty: “mission houses’” were in existence. But the indomitable spirit of the aborigines could not tolerate Gatschet.] . 470 [Feb)'20, any priestly interference with theirsown customs and: traditions. ‘They murdered in cold blood Pedro de Corpa, missionary at Tolemaro, near the mouth of St. Mary’s river, killed the missionaries at’ Topiqui, Asao, Ospo and Assopo, all on Guale island, and destroyed their churclies ‘and other mission establishments, tas . , In 1612, the ‘‘Custodia”’ of the eleven convents of Florida was erected into an independent ecclesiastic ‘* Provincia de Santa Elena,” the principal house being at Havana; thirty-two Franciscan priests were sent there (1612-13) to found a, and in 1616 their number was increased by twelve others. In 1638 a war took place against the Apalache Indians.’ The ¢ivil darned! tration of the province was from 1655 to 1675 in the hands of Governor Don Diego de Rebollado, ‘*Capitan-General.” ~ His successor from 1675 to 1689 was Don Juan Hita de Salacar, who was followed by Don Juan Marquez Cabrera. Twenty-four Franciscans were disembarked in 1676 to chiristian- ize the natives. A town Timucua is, not long after this, recorded at New Smyrna, Volusia eee on the arr raged about eee vs — of _— Augustine. enn In 1687, Governor Juan iTMaigute aoiingilon to remove somié Indian tribes of Florida, Apalachis, ete., to the West Indian Tslands,’ Upon this a revolt broke out in San Felipe, San Simon, Santa Catalina, Sapala, Tupichihasao, Obaldaquini and some other towns; the natives emigrated to Georgia, ‘or took refuge in the forests. This revolt does not seem to have extended over those pueblos or towns who sent the letter, printed below, to King Charles II, of Spain (+ 1700), and they were evidently well satisfied with prsies Bac sent governor. It was perhaps a consequence of this revolt that, in 1687; some Yamassi Indians, living under Spanish rule, left their country for the South, invaded the mission of Santa Catalina, in the provinee of Timucua, pillaged the church and convent of San Francisco by removing its plate and vestments, burnt the town of Timucua, killed many converted Tudians, while others were brought as ‘slaves to Santa Blena. |The reason given by the Yamas+ sis for this unprecedented massacre was that they were disgusted with the rule of the Franciscans, and tried to put an end w it. ro ver tniatigavtons were supposed to be at the bottom. ebitieetr The English colonists of Georgia and the Carolinas, ee of the Span- ish and their power, began from 1702'a series of inroads into Morida, which lasted for half a century, and entailed much misery on the Spanish Indians, Col. Daniels, who Ted the land force of Governor Moore’: s arm: in 1702, took St. Augustine, and met, 'as far as known, with no resistance, These incursions lasted until 1706, and an inroad of the Alibamu Indians occurred in 1705, Farther pagieh inroads are recorded for the atid 1719, 1727. 1736, 1740 and 1745. fay It is not altogether tgaiddalhi that some Timuctia Indians survive at the present time, for the Pueblo de los Atimueas, on the Muskito lagoon, Volusia Oo., has subsisted long afier the beginning of the tra raids. r} nip 1880..." | 471 . [Gatschet. Rither the Atlantic coast or the borders of the interior fresh-water lakes, or the Seminole settlements, Fla., might stil) harbor some of \the race, though little hope is to be entertained that their ancient sansa a may still be heard among them: | ETHNOGRAPHIC REMARKS CONCERNING THE Timocua PEOPLE. Not: only for the history of the Floridians, but also. for their ethnography the report of ,René de, Laudonniére is of the greatest value... Inthe small.extent of territory, which he saw, the manners and customs were probably the same everywhere, on the coast and in the interior ;, but fur- ther to,the. west,;among, the, Apalache, Hitchiti,and Creeks, they; must have differed not inconsiderably,, The artist Jacques, je Moyne de Morgues accompanied, the captain on his expeditions inland, and, with his skilful pencil reproduced most tastefully what he had observed among the red men of the plains and forests, These. sketches do. not seem to be historically faithful in every respect, for striking pictorial effect often seems more desir; able to artists than. historic truth; but: taken as,a, whole, they giye us a vivid picture of the reality of life among the Timucua. They were, pub- lished in Theodor de, Bry’s, collection. of. pictorial voyages, vol, IT; with Latin text at. the lower margin (Brevis Narratio; Francofurti ad Moenum, 1598, fol.).,, Alb, J. Pickett, History of Alabama, Charleston, 1851 ,(2 vols. 12mo.), has reproduced several of these drawings, together, with, extracts from De Laudonniére ; but he wrongly supposes that LeMoyne’s pictures represent the appearance and, customs of the Southern Indians in, general, Neither he nor Fairbanks, nor any other southern, writer speaks of the Timucua as a distinet race. -. Condensed, from De Laudonniére, Pareja and other sources, I nesdail the following short sketch of what appeared to. me the most characteristic of all the, Timucua customs and peculiarities : _ Men and women generally went nude... Their, bedies were allh propor. tioned, the men. were of..a.brown-oliye ‘color, tall stature and without ap- parent, deformities... The. majority of men tattooed, themselves in very artistic devices on the arms, and, thighs,.and to judge, from, Le; Moyne’s pictures, the chiefs at least, were tattooed over the whole. body, \ They trussed up their long black hair in a bunch resting, on their head, and covered their privates with, a well-dressed deerskin. _ Women wore the. hair long, reaching down to the hips, but on losing their hus- bands they cut their hair off to its root, and did not remarry, before. it had grown again to reach the shoulders... Both sexes were in the habit of wearing their finger nails long. The .custom of pressing the heads. of, i in- fants is not mentioned. * . cat apart" * This custom: prevailed lar angely 1 among the. Ch#hta, who were called Flat- heads on that account, The German anatomist, A. E ker, has lately examined twenty skulls excavated on the western coast of Florida. land published the re- sultin the Brunswick ‘t Ar Ay Sir Anthropologie,’ Vol, X.(1878), page 201-14, under the heading: © Zur Kenntniss des Kérperbaues friherer Einwonner der Halb- insel Flori ae'? /He thinks that, a, portion of them was artificially altered an deformed, but that oy Ae belonged Lo a race similar or identical to that encoun- tered by the first Spanish explorers; he further believes; that the people which accumulated the shell-heaps which are so frequent on the Floridian shore-line differed from the above, and perhaps belonged to the Carib stock. Gatschet.] 472 [Feb 20, . Women were seen to, climb, the highest trees, with agility, and. to swim over broad rivers with children on their, backs... When they became preg- nant, they (and the Creek women) kept-away from, their, husbands, and during their periods were careful to eat certain kinds, of nutrimentonly; they drank blood to render their sucking children stronger and. healthier. Chiefs had one. legitimate wife, whose. children alone could inherit, them, and one or two concubines. The first-born males in. the tribe were sacri- ficed to the chief, under solemn. ceremonies. Most Indians were found to be diseased, by the tx % for they were exqvedinglhy fond of the other sex,, calling, their female friends. ‘‘ ‘daughters of the sun.” , Pederasty was not unfrequent, and the French noticed quite a number of ‘ hermaphrodites,’’ who were very strong in ‘body, and used as load-carriers especially on war expeditions, The Indians showed a feel ing of repughance towards them, — The Timucua declared war by sticking a number of arrows into the ground, fliers up, in Close vicinity to the enemy’s camp. This was done with the utmost secrecy the night before the attack, and locks of human hair were seen dangling from the end of the arrows. The chiefs led the warriors on the war-path, club, arrows and bow in hand ; when the fignt had begun, they placed themselves.in the centre of the combatants, and their usual mode of attack was to surprise the enemy, as is done by all In- dians. They fought valiantly and impetuously, when compelled to fight openly ; their weapons were spears, clubs, bow and arrows, and a small target hung on the chest. Their arrows were headed with stones and fish- bones, both being worked quite handsomely and carefully. The warriors put to death all men captured (though exceptions to this are recorded), cut off their arms above the elbow, and their legs above the knee, took their scalps, and ran an arrow into their anus, leaving them in this condition on the battle-field. "The scalps and sometinies the cut-off limbs were brought to camp, stuck on poles which they connected with garlands, and during the scalp dance, which lasted three’ days and nights, the most revolt- ing orgies were gone through. The oldest of their women were com- pelled to join hands in the maddening dance ; the scalps of the slain were smoked over a fire, while praises were sung to the sun for the victory obtained. Women and children of the enemy were kept as slaves. War- riors ornamented their heads with all kinds of feathers, leaves and plants, like ‘the Aztées' and Mayas, or drew the’ head or skin of some wild animal over their foreheads, to protect the head. When hunting game they hid themselves in deer skins, and thus shot their game by decoy. The various superstitions of hunters are contained in Pareja’s queries. He also speaks of their’ barbacoas or provision houses, and Ie Moyne’s picture shows ‘that these were low palisade huts, roofed over, and having Only one issue. Ih the maize gathering season, the whole crop was carried to these barns, ‘and subsequently it was portioned out to every man according to his quality. The watchmen. of these barns, when found to be neglectful of their duties, were executed by a heavy blow’on the head with a war-club, i} [vy p rH ALUM & } 1880;} ©) 473 | Gatschet. As one of the pastinies of their’ young ‘men is mentioned the throwing of balls against a square mat made of bulrush reeds, hanging from a pole 8-9 fathoms high; the one who succeeded in making the mat come down, was winner in the game: At the death of a holata or chief, men and women cut their ‘hair off to half length, ‘anda thorough abstention from food was ordered for three days ; thé deceased was buried’ ceremoniously, on the top of a terrace- mound, a smaller mound erected over his grave, and a large ‘conch or ma- tine shell, which had been his drinking cup, placed over this monticule. The conch was then surrounded by a circle of arrows stuck perpendicu- larly into the soil, at two or three feet distance from the conch. In a people which believes in the power of conjurers over ghosts and spirits, the influence of the bewitcher or shaman must be necessarily immense. From Pareja’s queries we gather the fact that mostly old men, naribua, were acting as conjurers ; they consecrated the arrows before a hunting party left for the woods, and when the game did not expire from the first shots, they: prayed over another arrow which would certainly finish it; they produced rain, restored lost objects to their owners, spoke their bene- dictions over corn-cribs and new fish weirs, over a catch of fish and over baskets of recently gathered fruits. They treated the sick with incanta- tions and physicked them with herbs; they sometimes cured them half- ways only to exact more reward from them. They predicted future events, especially at a time when everybody was interested in what they might re- veal: during war-expeditions. Before going to war, the chief sitting amidst his warriors, consulted one of the oldest and smartest conjurers (who had to be also an accomplished contortionist), concerning the result of the war, the force-and the whereabouts of the enemy. In their midst the magician knelt down on his small round target in such a manner.as not to come in contact with the soil ; after various incantations he derived inspiration from demoniac powers, and while grimacing, drew a magic circie in the sand around his shield, After contorting himself in the most terrifi¢ manner for about twenty minutes, while singing incantations and uttering imprecations against the enemy, he finally stood up, and after getting cooler, he revealed to the ‘*King”’ the number of the hostiles and _ their hiding places or whereabouts and the best moment to attack them. -_ Although we find no direct, mention of, solar, and, lunar worship, in Pareja’s writings, both prevailed among the Timucua, and solar worship throughout the Southern territories. The term acuhiba, mogn, really means indicator (of, time),, literally, ‘the one who tells.’’ .The Timucua wor: shiped the sun under the image, ofa) dcer ;, they raised a.stuffed deer-skin ona high pole, and testified their. reverence for it. by singing aud dancing rites.* _ The sun was inyoked, before a) battle and. praised. after a victory gained; the natives once refused, to,,accept, meat.from the French and '* This is legal the “pes ofthe tribal name A% ‘se, Ais, Ays, patie rey! pope stad) PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xviii. 105. 31. PRINTED MARCH 26, 4880.7" Gatsehet.} 474 [Feb. 20, made them understand that they were aceustomed to wash their! faces and not,to. eat before the sun had gone down. [ ol as einsmisato [saor1eg Another object closely connected with their beliefan was the sacred number three. While the Maskoki tribes: had ‘a 'traditional:reverence for the number four on account of the four points of ‘the: compass) and the winds'coming from each of these four quarters, and while they assigned a particular color to each .of these. four points, »weofind>over a dozen’ references in De Laudonniére toa. worship-of) the number three among the Timucua. They fasted three-daysyat the death of a chief, their sealp-dances lasted three days and three nights ; at! the toya festivity, which probably represents the green-corn festivity of other Indians, men ran into the woods, ‘as if'crazed; and stayed there three days, while the women cut themselves and) tlieit daughters, crying ‘‘ he toya /’? Even in Pareja this: number is alluded to, fur he mentions that chiefs just coming into power ordereda new fire to be made in their cabins to’ burn during six days, and at sowing time the chiefs caused six old men (ano: miso) to eat-a pot of fritters!’ Six is the double of three. The holy fire inthe temple of the sun, among the’ Naktche) was fed by threé logs only ; and«a Peruvian’creation myth ‘pretends that three eggs fell from the skies ; from the golden egg issued the royal family; from the silver egg the nobility; and from the ‘copper egg the commoners. Concerning their mode of sustenance the Timucua stood high abv the northern savages, for they tilled the soil and were not altogether at the mercy of nature,-when an inclement summer season had deprived them of food. A hoe, made of a heavy fish bone or shell adjusted to the end of a stick, served in loosening the compact soil ;‘the women made’ grooves in the ground by hand and carefully deposited maize-seeds ‘in each of them. Here the agricultural work did not devolve entirely on the women for the males turned the soil with their hoes. They made artificial pords to let fish, eels, turtles, etc., come in, and afterwards caught them when needed. They were drinking the black drink, an exhilarating beverage made from the cassine-plant (also known atnong >the Creeks), and to this, probably, refers the charge of drunkenness made by’ Pareja.” ‘They ate alligators, snakes, dogs, and almost every kind of quadrupeds ‘and (fruits;\and were seen mixing coals and sand in their food ; their main staple, however, was maize, and the French saw them kissing the tac cairer of were tapola, standing before them, | boat ssn During the three or four months of the falily season ns retired to the woods and lived there in huts covered with palmetto leaves. They did so evidently to avoid the burning rays of the subtropical sun. About their arts and domestic life not mueh is transmitted’ to-us. The term taca ni timutema, ‘my fire is out’? (Proc. of 1878, page 496), shows that they kept up the fire in the lodge all day. The description of the town, with the chief's house on a mound, as seen by Hernando de Soto on Tampa Bay, is too well known to need repetition here. The ordinary settlements of the Timucua were a conglomerate of huts surrounded’) by strong palisade fences, not unlikd the Kraals (from Span, corral, medieval 1380. rs ATS [Gatschet. Latin: curtinale) of the Kaffirs:: They “must ‘have been very fond of personal ornaments as Le Moyne’s pictures tend to show, and tattooing with some indelible color;was carried to a high pitch of artistic development. They seated thiemselves:on coarse benches made of nine'poles or canes run-+ ning parallel, the’ benches forming half circles ; there they held their councils of war and peace, while the women prepared food for them, or let the cassine drink make the round. of the assembled warriors. \ They were adepts in the art of manufacturing fans, hats and other tissues from palmetto leaves, andialso moulded Jarge earthen vessels, in which water was carried. Not less were they acquainted, with ideographic writing, for each of the two head-chiefs,Olata Utina and Hostaqua-sent five painted ‘skins ‘as’ hope to Captain René de Laudonniére, A study of Pareja’s totemie list goes to show that.two kinds of Sovaaated, cies existed among the Timucua. . The names: of the first refer simply to the relations which the men of the tribe or tribes entertained to their chief, as councillors, ete.'; but the second list.contains the ancient names of the gentes or clans, as given to them/through their! totem. The majority of these totems are names of; animals, and herein the Timueua do not differ from other North American Indians east of the Rocky Mountains. The two lists of Pareja seem to stand in no reciprocal, connection, and hence it is to. be presumed that a. man: who belonged, f. @.,.to,the Anacotima, could belong at the same time to the Apahola or some other clan mentioned. in the second list, , , BiBLiogRaPny. The following are the titles of Pareja’s works. consulted, by.me,injthe peasy of the Historical Society of New York: I. sdlatnasiaastie en league Castellana, y Timuquana. En el qual se: contiene 10 que se les puede ensefar a los adultos que an de ser baptizados: »Com~ puesto por el P, F. Francisco Pareja, Religioso de la Orden del seraphico P. §. Francisco, guardian del Conuento de lapurisima Cocepcion de N. Sefiora de 8. Augustin, y Padre de la Custodia de sancta Elena dela Flor: ida. (Woodeut:) > BN MEXICO, en la impréta de la peter de Pedro Ballix Por G. Adriano Cesar M, DO. XII. In. 16mo., eighty leaves or 169 pages, not numbered, but: every laa eabeok with a letter of the alphabet running from A to K inclusive, at lower right hand margin, the leaves at ana ricer with Roman — Biii, Biiii; Gii,, iy ete. bi ‘In the copy satvanised: byt me the followings ‘* Doctrina’’, is) bound ‘into same volume as part of a second Catechism : » Catechismo y breve exposicion de) la doctrina Sntteacace muy» oaths ¥ necessaria, asi para los Espanoles como para los Naturales, en’ Lengua Cas- tellana y Timuquana, en modo de preguntas, y nespuestas..) Comptiesto por el P..F., Francisco Pareja de la Orden de oN. Seraphico: P. - nr Padre de la Custodia de S» Elena de lai Floridas (00 eso ote Gatsehet:] 476 [Feb.20; .o Follows a woodcut extending-over,more than half) the page) © 9) ofl - Back of title; Woodcut-represehting theoinfant Jesus withthe cross; and Spanish verses toits:praise:| 176:leaves, paged on)yirecto}s the last three leaves 174-76 not numbered. Profusely illustrateds with Tough: dipoles The colophon reads:as follows:: | 2s 0 eotanimiorg eajot Si .°S wih) Con Licencia de los superiores, en Mexico, en casa as la viuda de Pedro Ballis i Afolde,4612.izPorm@siAcGebarss 883i 9b coisa ob .@ & szedao A Il. Confessionario En lengua: Castellanacy) Timuquana.ss Con algunos éon- sejos para animaral penitentess(*)>%/ Y assi:mismo! van declaradvs algu - hos effeetos y :prerrogatiuas deste sancto sacramento, ete. \oOrdenado poriel Padre: Fr.) Francisco; Pareja, Padre: de: lacCustodia de Santa Eléna:de:la Florida.» Religioso \deola Orden: de nuestro: Seraphico Padre: San): Fran: ciseo.: Impresso: con’ licencia sen» Mexico, en la ‘Emprenta dé la Viuda dé Diego Lopez Daualos.:> Aiio de 1613. »H erionivord esl ob sovainion aol Colophon: Aquinorvan opuestos\ los | “Canones, hrillavdeah en elolibro llamado segindo:mandamiento:! oo oseorgmil .sbesu1O sinne sl sb [ste GGOL 9 ) LAUS DEO DRE ARATE jot RE 8 0 3 M5 teat Med Bi Bes ordil%1e9 ob aoidibs sramix Tlie Hook is ih’ 16md andthe title is followed re seven evaaa Tedves: containing testimonials,and documents of the press ‘authorities’ hess Pareja’s books. Follow eight unpaged leaves containing errata and list of | contents. . Follow leayes, the numbers of which run from, 9 to 280, some set up, in one, others in two columns, | ‘the. former, deing | more frequent, The volume i is illustrated with many coarse woodcuts. The star, as marked in the title, occupies | the middle OF SDR DRAGS. 1: it’ sve rhea iheeiaiien Notre.—In the official, preface to the Confessionario (leaf 3). sine meaiadd and auditors of the royal “‘ Audiencia”’ of New Spain mention the following writ- ings composed by Father Pareja: “ ray Francisco Pareja « ela TAON + ase. a compuesto, traduzido y declarado la Doctrina Christiana, tires Odtheslatad, Confessionario, Arte;\y Vocabulario, y otro tratad6 de‘las penas dél Purgatorio, y de las penas del inflerno: y gozos dela Gloria, y,el Rosarlo.de la Virgen,con otras cosas de deuocion, en lengua Castellana y Floridana, y gastado en, esto mas de diez y seys afios." id ‘It is possible that some of these eran ae never appeared bed oe sNGHIOUT Ssitip 9 ht AoAoge 108 SH toms faeats Wee S0c0G tf a ealowoyv tions To the above T-add the titles of two Ata by’ Gregorio’ de Seizeiteg copied from Icazbalceta’s Aptintes :*#) ) 05 | dd ar qu qe Yle Explicacion de la Doctrina que compuso el cardenal Belarmino, por man- dado del Scfior Papa Clemente 8. *{ Traducida en Lengua Floridana : por e) Padre Fr. Gregorio de Mouilla Diffinidor de la Prouincia de santa Elena, de la Orden de S. Francisco, natural de la Villa de Carrion de los Condes * Jong. Gareln Teaxbaleota, Apuntes para un catdlogo de eseritores en lenguas indigcenas de América, Mexico, 1866, 12 mo, page LG-LIB, on yr io ; 1880.J 51) 417 [Gatschet. hijo de la Prowincia de la‘Conéepcion,:y del Conuento recolecto de fira Se- fiora de Calahorray’ Cortegida; enmendada’y afiadida en esta segunda im- pression: ‘por! elomesmo: Autor. | En meets eee ‘con licencia enJa Imprentade Tuan Ruyz)>/Atio de 1635. hotsd mi Jon Oy—b' (En 8°, 12 en prelhninares. Peja 1 1a 197! “i fojas de indiee, oe nu- merat. A fine) sl ob seso 19 oIxoM a9 .297 oh sionaoid Acabose a 9. re Enero de 1636. ‘cowaiBensia’ en 1 Mesi¢s, por Iwan Riijies M. -o(A eontinuacion se halla este otro:optiisculo ) : aod oirgmoleedi a vForma breve de‘administrar los Sieitiaewines 2 va Indios} y Espafioles que viuen entre ellos) 4] Aprobado por Autoridad Apostolica, ysacado del Manual Méxicano, que'seovsa en’ toda) la: tiueua:Espaiia y Pird, ‘nutatis mutindis;“esto es, lo que estaua-en Jégua: Mexicana traducido en lengua Floridana:| Para’ vso de los' Religiosos de:iiro: Padre 8: Francisco, que son los ministros de las Prouincias de la Florida.) ‘] Por.e) Padre Fr; Gregorio deMouillas :Con!licencia del seior Don Lope Altamirano Comissario gen - eral de la santa Cruzada. Impresso en Mexicos:Por Tuan Ruayz)) Ano de 1635. (En 8°, 32 fojas.. En la biblioteca del Sefior D. J. F. Ramirez, México.) La primera edicion de este libro es de Madrid, 1631, en 8°; pero habiendo re- sultade con muchas erratas, volyié el.autor 4 imprimirlo en México, corre- gido, y aumentado, , Asi lo dice en su, prdlogo, s | f eet *) 19 8, DAS STS CRAKS AP FINITIES | Or LANGUAGE. My attempt t to compare thé Timucua language with other linguistic fami- lies PY regard to lexical affinity may be called premature, for we do not know over two hundred vocables of it with some degree of certitude. There are no two languages in the world which will not yield many veal or fan- cied ‘resemblances when ‘confronted with each other, and to’ build “air- castles’ on these has been’ a frequent. ‘mistake! ‘of thany unexperienced in- vestigators. Linguistic families, which are ancient. neighbors of, Timucua, are the: Yuchi, Cherokee; Maskoki-and Carib, but none of them seem to give'any chances for fruitful radical comparisons, and Yuchi and’ Maskoki differ’ widely from it phonetically. ‘The. Carib or Galibi dialects, anciently spoken i in the West Indies, are quite fluctuating in the pronunciation, of their vowels as well as of their consonants, like some Polynesian dialects, and. since we observe the same peculiarity in, Timucua, an additional diffi- culty springs up in the way of arriving at.a,result. A. Timucua-Maskoki affinities. cet ae chief. This’ Timucua ‘term is evidently loaned: from: theo Eastern ©Maskoki dialects, for im Creek hold’hta is a ceremonial ‘titie of men BIE Lemma iby in‘annual festivals aiid busks, ahd isoften connécted with ‘the! warttitlehadjoy: hadsu,owhich’ corresponds ito“ our bold; reckless Bu vaatholichin hidsu)..._In rank, the hola’hta, hula;ta, stands. below, the tusténdéki, who is himself inferior,to the miko or-chiefy. »Hola’hta.is Gatschet.] 478 . [Feb. ‘27, the word holiti, with prefixok-? oVOlati ‘blue, sky blue, the blue color haying become, in some,way or, other, the emblem of these titled warriors., In. the cognate, Hitchiti dialect, blue,is holatle,. Among the Creeks blue was the color symbol. of the south, .(.\) Aha, abo stick, club ; stalk, plant; maize-stalk ; abopaha, eorn-crib.; aboto:, to beat with a stick ; ; abara maize field... In the. Maskoki, dialeets., this term appears as ‘api in Creek : stalk,. stem ; adshim-api, stalk of maize or Indian corn; Adshi-intal-Api cob of Indian corn.,...The Hitchiti dialect pronounces the a longer than Creek ; api stem, han- dle ; nofapi beech, lit: beech-stalk. In Cha’hta ‘this word may b traced in: nusipi oak-tree, and in haksh-ap bark. i oo tedT 2 B. Timucua-Carib affinities. Piro red ; ano pira red man, Indian. In Galibi ta- piré is red and yellow ; in "Tupi piranga is red ;, pira piranga red fish, name of some fish spe- cies (Martius) ; in Taino pu, bu meant scarlet. wowee | puhayhe i in Taino : bohio, BRR ubanna: Sa in the. same dialect (Martius). Ele young, fresh, recent. In Byeri el is son, in Taino el, ili, gua- -ili with, demonstrat. prefix gua-, wa-) young, offspring, infant; in Arowak . elunchy : boy. ' Ichali weir, fish- -pont. Raymond Breton (Dictionn. Caraibe frangais, 1665). pagé 282, hasichali: garden for raising vegetables, p. 468 : tona icali (or driche), fish-weir: ‘‘réservoir de poissen,’’ tona meaning river. The word oubacali he also translates by garden ; otbao island, Jeali. garden: Ibid. p. 111: chaldali he was drowned ; na chalaroyem AR am drowning, I go to the bottom. These two wands are evidently _ representing different linguistic roots, and the first has to he Pros. nounced ishali, according to the French pronunciation. Pareja ex- pressly states that ichali was used for weir on the coast, puye in the interior, and I think it may be a loan word from the south incor- porated into the language after suppressing the tona, which alone : qualifies the Carib word (as spoken on the island of Guadeloupe) ‘as © _ afish-pond. In Eyeri, as spoken on Porto Rico, chali meant a sigh den also. } The terms pointed out certainly agree in’ both languages, but atiey may be loan words; even if they rested on a common origin, their number is" too small to prove identity of ethnic origin of the two peoples, 6) Other resemblances muy be traced, but they are too air for roe relied on ; uy hapu threes kabbuin, kabuin Arora maca, moc sea, ocean: bagua in Taino ; ef. pa in parand, the Tupi tort : for sea, age oly iyorona eels ihiri in: Arowak. The Timucua word is st phan fvotti we verb yuru to shake, trembles) ©) a1 1880.J (557) ' 479 [Gatscheti oid od) oof¢ .DIALECTs OF, TUE Timucua LANGUAGE. This isa topic on which very few indications were transmitted to us by the authors. ‘But'we are told by Pareja that dialects spoken by one tribe were intelligible to tribes speaking other dialects. He mentions several dialectic differénces, f. il, that between ichali and puyu fish-weir, yame ‘and yaman- chu brother-in-law, amitina and chirima my younger sister. — ‘The dialects to which lie refers, are : 1. Thé dialect of Timoga or Timagoa, on Lower St. John’s River, 2. That of Potano, west of St, John’s River. ‘3. That of Itafi. 4. That of the Fresh-water Distri tot: 5. The dialect of Tucururu,.on the Atlantic coast. 6. The dialect of Santa Lucia de Acuera, a short distance south of Cape Cafiaveral. 7. The dialect of Mocama, a term which means: ‘‘on the coast.”’ Many other dialects and sub-dialects must have been spoken throughout the vast inter ior of the peninsula, of which we have no knowledge.. The most instructive passage on this subject is found in Hervas, Catalogo de las Lenguas conocidas, I, p. 388, who quotes Pareja, of whose writings he had seen none but the catechism of 1627: ‘Los indios que tienen mas dife- rencia de vocables y mas toscos que son los de Tucururu y Santa Lucia de Acuera, por participar de la costa del Sur, que es otra lengua, entienden 4 los de Mocama, que es la lengua mas politica, y 4 los de THpRGHA, como lo he experimentado, pues me han entendido predicandoles.”’ Thus Pareja declares the coast dialect of Mocama (which latitude » to. be the most polished of all and a medium of inter-communication with the southernmost dialect with its rude pronunciation. _ Otra lengua does not necessarily mean ‘‘a language of a different stock,” but. only an idiom differing from ours. . Grammatic Nores. On account of the unsatisfactory state of the Timucua texts at hand, our, grammatic and lexical knowledge of this idiom can inerease but slowly. Pareja’s “ Arte’’ or grammar would considerably help our inves- tigations, but no trace could as yet be discovered of its manuscript.or of the book itself, if it has ever been printed. The following remarks contain the result. of my studies on the grani- matic part of the idiom... Many of them may be revoked) in doubt or cor- rected by further research, for the, state of the texts often admits several interpretations of the wording. For this reason I have even hesitated for a while, whether it would be justifiable to publish them or not. In phonetics the most prominent feature is the alternation» of| some vocalic sounds among themselves, and.of the consonants, ean with the same phonic organ of the vocal tube. Other changes are very frequent. also, ae those produced by con- traction, viz.: synizesis, syncope, ekthlipsis.; fad Gatschet.] 480 - [Feb, 20, Thus, the article (or pronoun) na frequently combines with the follow- ing word, whether this begins with a vowel or not : na ucuta : nacuta, ucuta; nacunu : na acu ano. Da uquostano : naquostano, uquostano. ; iti-aye : itaye ; iti ayaqe: itayaqe; isaye isa: isayesa; isaye nate : isa- yente. soba hebi : sobaebi ; piaha : pia. a chuqua cosa ; chuquosa ; chi iquila: chiquila. aya-lacota: yalacota; ano eyo: anoya. THE VERB. The verd being the most important part of speech in every language, I first call attention to the polymorphic and intricate nature of its inflection as it appears in the texts. It certainly shows analytic features by not in- corporating the subject-pronoun, for this may be placed before or after the finite verb, its place being determined by the run of the sentence. Where this pronoun is found combined with the verb, phonetie attraction won seems to have produced this effect. The synthetic character of the Timucua verb. exceeds ‘ee its analytic features or anything that could be construed into such. It shows itself in the formation of the modes, participles and verbals, of the num- bers, of the voices and tenses, of negative and interrogative verbs. To ex- press grammatic relation and derivation, prefixation is much less’ resorted to than suffixation. A large number of American languages do not distinguish more than two tenses, though others show a variety of them. Timucua is poor in tenses ; the tense of the incompleted action, which mostly coincides with our future, is expressed by suffixing manda, manta to the stem, a deriva- tive of the verb mani to desive. The fact that manda sometimes appears before its verb, and sometimes is used as a verb for itself (to be willing, to want, to require), proves that its real function is that of an auxiliary verb, As such it is placed after all the suffixes that may be added to the stem: viroma niponosiheromanda bohobi cho? did you believe that the husband would possibly return (to you)? t bonosoma cayamaquene ubahauetilamanda bohobi cho? did you hatleee that the deer and the partridge would not (no longer) be meng nocomilemanda it will become true. The action completed or just being completed is expressed as falkewes 1. When the action belongs to the past, and is expressed by our imper- fect, preterit or pluperfect, -bi, -vi is suffixed to the stem or basis of the verb : taca quosobi cho? did you make a fire ? 2. When the action is in course of completion, and the tense answers to our present tense, then the pure stem of the verb is used, and -la is added, when the action is done in the presence of the speaker: motala I assent, I agree (while I am here) ; habosotala I accept. -la, -le being the particle of. the. vette mode, panier ers certainty Bus 1880.) 481 [Gatschet. positive statement, actuality, can be added to any tense or mode, but is most frequently used to express the present, especially when the first per- sons are used. nocomi ninihabe/amanda Sebant cho? did you believe that he would cer- tainly expire? balu nanemima ohohauela ‘ gives everlasting life. hanibitila evidently he has not neglected. In chuqualehaue chuquosa cho? how often did you do this? the preterit tense is not marked by any suffix or other syllable. The plural of the verb is often indicated by the suffix -ma, in participles by the suffix -qe, both of which are used for many other purposes also. In: the queries (Proc. 1878, p. 498) mante he desires, has pl. mantema they desire or want ; lapustela it requests, pl. lapustamala they request. No instance of a dual form has occurred: to me: in the verb or substan tive. From yucha two is formed yuchaqua doth. - Whether the verb is making a distinction concerning male and female gender is a matter of doubt, and I can adduce only one passage (ibid., p. sommes which seems to indicate some distinction of this kind : viro uquata puenonicala I bring a male infant. “nia uquata puentanicala I bring a female infant. viro niaquene puenonicala I bring male and female infants. Of the modes of the finite verb one is marked by the suffix -hero, -ero,. -re, which expresses possibility and probability, corresponding somewhat to our auxiliary verb may, might, could. This form, which could be called either a conditional or a facultative mode, may be illustrated by the follow - ing syntactic instances : anoco nihihero manibi cho? did you desire that anybody may die? balu pontahero he may give life. niponosihero-minda bohobi cho? did you believe that he would possibly return? To show the forms of the imperative and exhortative mode with some degree of certainty we have not enough instances on hand. | - Participles are formed by means of the suffixes -mate, -no and -ta, -te. -mate corresponds to our participle in -éng, and to the Latin gerunds, but is appended to nouns also, especially when they become connected with verbal forms in -mate. paha pononomate samota quosobi cho? after Seorss. home, did you rub yourself with herb juice? cuyumate honoso honomate feeding on fish and deer meat. henomate ibinemate for eating and ee etabualunimate after having given birth to. -no, -nu is found in participles of the medial and the passive form : ecano made, worked, worked over. ©) itorinslehaue equelacoma on days where (people) have to fast. PROC, AMER. PHILOS. soc. XvitI. 105. 23. PRINTED MARCH 27, 1880. Gatschet.] 482 ; [Feb. 20, 2 honoma, calama ituhunwlege fruits prayed over. na care henomano caqua all these things, when eaten. : -ta and -te occurs in participles of passive, and also of intransitive verbs ; to distinguish it from the negative and the interrogative -ti, -te is not always an easy matter. --ta mostly occurs as the ending of a gree ubuata caught, from ubua to catch, capture. hibate missa the missa having been said, or having said the missa. ~~ atofa hororoquene hebatage when the owl and the red owl were esac 5 nimota being hunted. ibirita (a woman) who is menstruating. eta baluta (a2 woman) confined. inosobote one compelled to work. ituhute over which a prayer was said; prayed over. There are two negative particles in the language, aya (ya) and -ti, -te. The former either stands for itself, or is prefixed to the verb; when pre- fixed it becomes only agglutinated to, not incorporated into the verb. Aya isa particle of an objective nature, while -ti, -te is used in a subjective, puta- tive sense, the negation of a fact or thought existing rather in the speaker's _ mind, than objectively. Therefore it serves also as an interrogative parti-- cle, and then is mostly joined to in- as inti, though frequently found incor- porated into the verb, and placed after particles of derivation. It then cor- responds to Latin -ne in dicisne? and to pady (wy) od») or to our not in **don’t you say?’ which means the same as ‘‘do you say?” though with a slight shade of difference. aya honoma ituhunu fruits not prayed over. hanibitila he did not neglect. manino-ticote without feeling hunger. = Diosi hubuasotanatila? have you not loved God? Sabena isayente (for isaye nate)? is she thy mother? ‘ isayeste? does thy mother say so? The formation of reflective, reciprocal, medial and causative verbs is effected by derivational affixes, and some of them are mentioned among — the ‘‘ Prefixes and Suffixes of Derivation.”” How frequentative and usita-~ tive, durative and attributive verbs are formed cannot be determined yet on account of the infrequency of syntactic examples. Instances how derivatives are formed, will be seen under mo- and orobo- in the * Words and Sentences.’’ 1oK0g reite’ Tue Noun. The Timucua noun presents many difficult problems. To designate the objective case of the direct object we find in the substantive four suffixes : -co, -nu, -ma, and the plural suffix -qe, or we find no suffix at all. Wie noises with certain classes of nouns only, of the animate as x 0ratt as of the ” a inanimate order. None of them is a sign of a distinct case. chofama pilenoma ibine-ichicosa to throw liver and lungs into cold water, os A} 1880.) ; 483 [Gatschet. ponachica viroma ?.niama? do you bring a male, female (infant)? balunu nanemima: obvhauela it. gives eternal life. The adjective, when used attributively, dots but in a very few examples agree in its suffix with the substantive it qualifies; and generally has:no suffix at all, but stands after the substantive. -mate is a postposition joined to nouns, in honosomate cayamuaiequed, from the deer and from the partridge, Confess. p, 129. The possessive pronouns can become suflixed to conjunctions and adverbs just as if they were substantives or participles. Thus the suffix of the second person of the singular, -aya, -aye is met with in examples like the following, which prove that these particles were originally participles or other nominal forms ; naquostanaye ? in which manner you? chucaya haheno? how often did you eat? equelaya haheno chuqua? how many times a day did you eat? ‘The third person of the singular: . Diosi hebuano nemoquamima, emoqua against God’s law ; lit. ‘‘God’s law. against his against.’’ In participles this is observed as follows ; orobotanaye one cured by you. ara uque naponaye you anointed with bear? 8 grease. i nia hutanaye that woman with whom you slept. ilifotanaye for your killing (deer). A syntactic curiosity are the suffixed particles -leqe, -lehe, -ma, -mano, -qe, which are sometimes placed after each word of a series of. consecu- tive terms. They serve, no doubt, to establish a connection or reference, or to show mutual coérdination of these terms. cf. tacachuleheco, &e., Confess. p. 182 v. ; cuyulege, ibid. The suffix -ge often serves to connect a principal clause with the princi- pal. clause just preceding, We also find repetitions of verbs and nouns, which seem quite unneces- sary, to us, and embarrassing the sense ; honoso henomate inti uquabi cho? deer-meat eating did you eat? hehanimanda hanibi cho? did you quit to cease eating? nia iquimi iquiti mosobi cho? did you insult any women? lit. ‘to women with insults did you insult-cause ?”’ INCORPORATION. There are also a few instances where the nominal object, direct and. in- direct, seems to be incorporated into the verb, as it is the rule in the Aztec language. Traces of this have.been discovered in many other American languages. Some of the examples below are simply compound. words, whieh differ in nothing from the Greek o/zodopéw and the Latin animad- verto. utihanta,, one banished from home, exulant; lit, one yearning (hani), after (his) country (uti). Gatschet.] 484 [Feb 20, sobae to eat meat; lit. to meat-eat (soba-he). ibine-ichicosa to put or throw into cold water; lit. to cold-water (some- thing). It is not probable that cosa forms here a word for itself, but ibine ichi; a noun with its attribute, becomes verbified by the suffixation of ‘cosa: cf. afatacosi to gather chestnuts. If the relation existing between the stuf: fixes -co and -ma was clearly established, we could decide whether’-co ‘is here the sign of the objective case or perhaps the radix of the verb coso to make, produce. cuyuhanta one who eats no fish, lit. missing, deprived of fish. atimoqua lord, master ; lit. servants attend (on him). As well as the direct and indirect object of the verb, other portions of the sentence can become incorporated into one single term in this idiom. If the constituent parts of the sentence, the subject, object, predicate, at- tribute, etc., were morphologically as well defined here as they are in the Indoeuropean and Semitic languages, this would be an impossibility. The grammatic affixes of Timucua do not bear the imprint of sharp logi-. cal distinction and segregation, but embody too many relations at once, material and purely relational ones, as we clearly perceive in the example of -ma and -mate. Diosi hebuano nemoquamima emogqua, lit. God-law-against-his-against (did you proffer curses?). In this sentence -mima, which is the possessive pronoun his, could stand just as well after the possessor (Diosimima hebuano), but the simple fact that it can stand elsewhere also, shows us the true character of the language. Soba sobaebi (for: soba-hebi) cho? did you eat meat? lit. ‘‘meat did you meat-eat?’’ Here the first soba is the object of the verb sobaebi cho, the second soba is the incorporated object of hebi cho only. _ This sentence seems ¢o us to contain an unnecessary repetition, but the Timucua FAEEOID y did not consider it in this light. Chuqualehaue chuquosa cho? how often did you i. this? chuqua, how often, is here verbified in both instances, chuquosa standing for chuqua- cosa. This seems to be more than a mere ellipse of a syllable. Cuyuma ubuata qibenco melasonolehabetele mosobi cho? did you order that the first fish (pl.) caught be not thrown into hot water? In the direct object, cuyuma ubuata qibenco, the last term only contains the sign of the objective case, -co, hence the two terms standing before qibenco must, in the mind of the Timucua, have formed one word only with ig through incorporation. ) Ano pequataye inosobotequa: your subordinates who are put to Wiork. Here the sign of the plural number, -qua, is appended to the last term only, though plurality extends to pequataye as well as to ano. Paha pononomate, lit. ‘‘after-home-returning,’’ After paha a post- position of a locative character is expected ; its lack seems to prove that the Timucua regarded both terms as one compound word formed by incorpora- tion of the indirect object into the verbal form. ‘ 1880.) 485 [Gatschet, PREFIXES OF DERIVATION. Prefixes subservient to the formation of derivatives are not numerous and cannot be easily confounded with syllables entering into the composition of compound words. The demonstrative pronoun na, which we can often render by our definite article the, coalesces in some instances with the word following it after losing its accent, and the same is true of the pronoun chi thou ; but these are not prefixes. i-, verbal prefix : iquaso, iquase to screech, scream; iparu to swallow (?) iquileno in iquilnona married to the sister of my wife ; iquiti to, insult, _abuse; ko, ccso and ike to make, do, to cause to. i-, nominal prefix ; ichini and chini nose, nostrils ; iti father ; isa mother; isale sister of mother. itori subsequent to ; iquini breast, udder, milk ; ibine water, lake. .,)u-, yo-, a prefix equivalent to our through, across or by, near, past ; yu- bueha, yubehe to transfix, pierce ; yuquiso to deposit on the side of ; yoqua _past, bygone. ni-, verbal prefix : mero hot, nimaru to preserve one’s heat; naquila to perfume, ninaquilasi to perfume ; pona to come, niponosi to return to; nacu to drink, ninacu to ask for a drink. si-, verbal prefix of a medial signification, which frequently adds to the verbal base the idea of ‘ for onesclf’* and is sometimes reflective. Sigi or Sigisa in siqisama my father, lit. ‘the one who procreated me,”’ cf. siqita pahana all people belonging to my house, family ; uque oil, grease, suquoni to rub something on oneself (for si-uquoni). SuFFIXES OF DERIVATION, A short examination of the specimens of Timucua given by me in the “Proceedings ” will prove to readers that this language is in a high degree polysynthetic, not only in its signs or syllables of ‘relation (inflectional forms), but also in derivational forms. Often one and the same syllable serves as an inflectional and as a derivational form, and it is a peculiarity of this language that these forms can occur in the form of whole syllables only, either single or double. ~ Suffixes are more numerous than prefixes. They are either inflectional or derivational. . The latter alone will be considered in this chapter, and although the number of them as given here is rather small, Timucua forms ‘a much larger number of them by combination. To define accurately the functions and origin of them all, is what a full grammar of this Floridian language will perhaps one day be able to give. a ba, nominal suffix: hiyaraba lion ; nariba and naribua old (of persons ; _from na ariba) ; hibe louse ; soba meat, deer-meat. -bale, identical with -male, Proc, 1878, p. 497. , _.,.-bo, verbal suffix forming transitive verbs; tinibo to pierce, perforate ; u iniso and inisobo to make somebody work ; aboto and abotobo to beat with a stick 5 orobo and oroboni to cure, heal, to treat for sickness. -cha, -chi suffixed to nouns is not a real suffix ; it is the relative particle Gatschet.] 486 [Féb. 20, cha, hacha,, ‘‘ the one ai those who, that which ;”’ chulufi-chi those of the jay-clan or totem; caru yachimale she that was born with a brother, the female of twins, ya being the pronoun she, po-cha, ‘and hachi- -pa-cha somebody, anybody, lit.‘‘ the one who is born ;’’ ela-pa-cha the members of of one family, lit. ‘‘ those born young together.’’ -co in isitoco to cause to bleed ;.-co is a verbal suffix, but mostly’ occurs in combination with other auftixes and has a factitive or causative function ; 4 ichi cold ; ibine-ichicosa to throw. into cold water ; afata chestnut : afata- cosi to gather chestnuts; isi blood.: isitoco to cause to bleed. -co also oc- curs. in paracusi head-chief, . This suffix seems to be ‘merely the sign of the objective case, here incorporated into the verb. _ -fa, nominal suffix : chofa liver, chorofa jay, atofa owl ; ; ituhu to charm, bewitch : itufa conjurer, This suffix probably alternates With -ba,_ -Ai, cand also with -hi. -hani expresses the idea of cessation, discontinuance, and is in fact a verb ; when connected with other verbs it serves as a sort of auxiliary verb. (ni) he-hani-manda I shall cease to eat, I will not eat. -la, -le, nominal suffix: itele uncle, so called by ephe wi AeietocOn fathers’ side ; cumele heart ; iqila sick, diseased ; apahola buzzard, crow ; eqe, equela day ; tola laurel; anoquela lineage, kinship, pedigree. -lesi, -lesiro, verbal suffix expressing the idea of to become, to begin to be ; -si being causative, -ro pointing to probability and future time ;'-le séems to have the power of verbifying, like -si. Christianolesiro to’ becomé a Christian. holatalesiro to become chief. muenolesiro to receive a name ; lit. «to begin to be called.’’ abotosiro to receive blows, to get beaten. -mi, verbal suffix : ene to see, enemi to discover, find out. -mi, nominal suffix : nanemi perpetual ; adv. always; nocomi aided “ha- somi those belonging to one lineage, clan-people. natlo -ni, nominal suffix: ichini nose, nostrils ; ibi, ibine, ibino water, lake ; he to eat, hini tobacco ; the word for tobacco is in many Indian languages a derivate of to eat, because the smoke is often swallowed by the Apuives, meleni petticoat. -ni, verbal suffix : hani to cease, stop: hanini to neglect. orobini to go to confession ; orobo and oroboni to cure, treat in sickness ; suquoni to rub oneself with. icasini to altercate, quarrel; pona to come: puenoni to bring, -no, -nu nominal suffix, also found in participles of the passive : itaha to pray, ituhunu prayer; hebua to speak, hebuano word, saying, diseotitsej ; pacano subsequent to; pileno lungs ; ahono young ; banino rainbow, ” -no, verbal suffix: pona to come : ponono to return to; bohono to) - lieve. -ra, -ro, nominal, suffix : aba. maize, abara maize-field ; itori late, paste rior; hororo red owl; jufere fish-catcher’s wicker basket. . -#i, verbal suffix ; afatacosi to gather chestnuts ; elosi to whistle (or is it elofi?) ; icasini to altercate, quarrel ; niponosi to return to. somebody ; A Abi. nese to bathe ; nulasi to tiekle,, | ) -#0, verbal causative suffix ; uqe rain; uquiso to produce A gee and 1880,],, 487 [Gatschet. . inosobo to. cause to work, to work somebody ; ituhu to pray: ituhusu to cause to pray, to let pray ; uquaso to give to eat ; coso to make, produce ; _..moso to make, cause ; iquaso, iquase to scream, cry; inibiso to drink to . excess. he to eat, heso to'make eat. -so, nominal suffix : he, heno to eat: honoso deer, antelope. -ta nominal suffix, forming ( 1) nomina acti, and other terms: hibuata say- ings, words, ceremonial taonin' uquata body, flesh ; afata chestnut ; aquita maid; ibine water: hibita river; pequata bondsman ; hulubota maize-ear. (2) .occurring in participles: eta baluta a woman after confinement ; . ibirita a female during her period; nimota for na emota being hunted ; ene to see: na eneta a seer, one who sees; heta nacuta adv. immoderately. -ta, -to forms transitive verbs : abo stick, aboto to beat with a stick ; isi blood, isito to cause to bleed ; samota to tinge, rub oneself with ; huta to cohabit with, CONCLUSION. vk retrospective view upon all that could be gathered to this day con- -ocerning- the. structure of the Timucua or Atimoke idiom shows it to be remarkably simple as far as its phonet’c structure is concerned, but intri- cate in its morphology. Its syllables consist either of one (long or short) - ,wowel,.or of one.consonant followed by one vowel. When exceptionally »»two consonants are joined, some vowel must have been eliminated, The » seems tobe a real trilling sound, and not a graphic substitute for some _. other. sound, for it alternates with no other sound but with 1. This.elementary syllabism impresses, its character on ali the morpologic features of the idiom; roots, prefixes, suffixes are monosyllabic, or if poly- syllabic, the suffixes at least can be proved to be compounds. « Inihimima hebuanoleheco) saahis leheco mosima_na-isticosota sen mosota hebuabi cho? . Siquisonaye maha ere timogiti mine cumelebi: nincoqua. na-inta- nasiqi puenta honochiqe heta nacuta orobistileno chiqena, inta:: alihota- habe nate manibi cho? “ics “ Siquisonayeleheco: anoyaleheco orobistitima anoletage nate manibi cho? Inifaye cobuosatileta hono, na- cume ecatileta tera hhebuatanima hanisobi cho? iter (Here follows; Have you not murdered. ....,Proc, 1878, ay isi MISDEEDS TO BE CONFESSED TO THE PRIEST ONLY. (Catechism, leaf 83 verso to 84 verso. In the original, this article is nist divided into paragraphs or sections as here. ) Hono-melomano pilanileqe nabe chaleqe quenema hayarota ebetoqge ibama nahabosoge mosotequarebama nahitanima ; naquentequa elasosiqe nimarubi michuqui mosilenomano anoco, nencha méfnibi michuqui mo- simano hecate. Naqui monihauemano iniheti ini- nomile atichicolo orobotemaqua oro- binta nashosta mosonihauele caqi ano orebotemano Iesu Christoma, na ichiqitechule. Naque nihaue quentelaha yahamo- simano isticoma inta nabo nabomota, naquosonole betimane na anolatema. - The shell of the ocean opens every night and every morning to receive the dew from the sky, wherewith the pearl congeals in it; the pearl locks itself in, when the sun has risen and the day has advanced, and preserves its natural heat (y viene escalentando), and so that it may be-seen afterwards by all, it locks itself in. We. likewise must manifest, our shortcomings only to the confessing priest, as to a vicarious person, for Jesus Christ, and to none else. Many are doing just. the opposite of this ; those who glory themselves when acting , mischieyously and praise themselves on account of their sins. ito Ide‘ uid stoola 1880.]” * Nahitela naquenema Esaias’: Js-* tanimano namotemano. mine istico inino mimaqua na-iribota hebuata ne- lacare chienta,’ Sodoma hicayayima, anoma isomoni michuqui’ mosotema nahitela. Naquenema hanta eyobeta taano- lenomano unabine yuchinoma ela- care chieta, halifonoma nantela. Guatomano piaha-manda ayahibua- noma’; piteta nuqua ecate hachipile inemimano,; yuchi nihe mosima, apimimaqua nacuquete una oqo yuchi. namotemabeta, na-iqilabono nahitemano isucumaqua nahiabosota eyomano. Chiqesta mosote quentemano ini- heti ininomileno eyomano ; chiqesta atichicolo isucumaqua sacerdote in- tema toloba ajosta na-orobininole- hauela. Naquenemano ano yaha mosimano iniheti ininomima yucheti elacare ahota. Acu caquenta nabalu hache itimi- lonoma mota nimate canimasela mota nabeta nabonta na-anoletema na hitela quosonolebitila Sacramento na-orobininoma nabena sabata iso- nola naquenema intila. 493 [Gatsehet. Of these people says the proplet Esaia:., “ Peccatum suum sicut So- doma praedicaverunt.’’ They have praised and publicly exhibited their sins, like those of Sodom.» That the sinner should reveal. his sins, unless while confessing; seems to be against nature. Cats will hide. their excrements and cover them well [so that they do not stink nor smell bad to others], and all animals cover themselves, by their-tail; and people who have any ugly infirmities conceal. and. hide them from others’ sight, except from the physicians who are to heal them. All this teaches us, that sins must be covered and concealed from al, save from the spiritual doctors, to whom they’ must be confessed openly. Sinners must not be like monkeys, who show themselves nude to all, without shame or bashfulness. There are people, also, who di- vulge not only the sins which, they have confessed, but even. the pen- ances, which they have endured for them, and in this manner almost ex- pose to mockery the Sacrament of the confession, MIscELLANEOUS QUERIES. (Confessionario, leaf 210.) Pahamico anomileheco anv eyole- ‘hecote quenema inibati intage nate manibi cho? o Inihiminéo ano eyo napatabohero maninoma nate quentahaue manibi cho? ~ Niaco obachamisibi cho? ~~ Chuqua? ‘Niareqe chuquarege? ’Caqi nia hutanaye inemimano ano- micote hu‘abi cho? Did you permit any married or other person to have sexual inter- course in your house or elsewhere? Did you consent thatany one have ° connection with your consort? Did you kiss a woman ? How often? ~ How often each woman ? Are there any mothers among all those with whom you had inter- course? Gatschet.} 494 [Feb. 20, (Catechism, leaf50.) Santa Maria aquitasiqems hebuas- ta istala- Caqi aquitasiqe Mariancono chica- conte ? Mine (h)achibueno'tera inemi naya iynomate; graciamate nacumotaqge iyenotima ;> nocomi ~ Dios-isomima nantela. Caqi minequa iyenotincono chan- co hibuante? Hachaqueniqe Diosima’ mueno- lete:? Nanacu hachibueno carema_ na- eneta naqebanta, numamate utimate quenequa mine ecoyaleta hachibuena carema caquenta hauemantema nan- tage ona Diosila. Dios itimi, Dios giemima Jesu Christo nante, Espiritu Santomate. Ano qiemamate Diosi? O, Diosila. Quiemilenomate Diosi? (Catechism, Mime una oquomimano hacha- quenta tuqualamanafaye ? Nanacu una oquomano utinaleno - divinidad muenomacasinta yahota fayela. Nihinima hachaquentaquere tabu- ale? Acuyano, hachequeniqe Christia- nolehula mote cho? Mine Diosi maqua, inostaniqua numa abo orabonoma nimihero ni- mandage, Christianolesiro ni ma- nela. J me on earth, ~T speak with the Virgtit Ma yt a Who is the Virgin Mary ? © ‘Some great queen, rich in‘all vir- tues and graces; the trué asin of ‘God she is called. Where dwells this grand queen?” Why is he called God ? 1} 18 Ph Because he sees all things, and’ ministers to them, ‘he being the powerful ruler of all thin gs in heaveit’ if sb God father, God’s son Jesus’ Christ, and the Holy Spirit. Is the Father God? Bito 9 6s Yea, he isGod. | uM Is the son God? iit page 27v.) In which state did his billy Pa main when in the tomb? — His body was united with the Godhead itself. In which manner did he rise capi the dead? Furthermore, why do you déchite : that you want to become a Christian ? © That I may serve Almighty God, go to Heaven, and. that there the glory may be conferred upon més therefore I want to be a Christian. - | 1880.] 5 495 [Gatschet. ADDRESS OF, THANKS, Sent TO. THE King,or SPAIN By HIS LoyaL, SUBJECTS, THE, (CHIEFS OF THE Timucua PEOPLE ; DATED THE 28TH OF ssrppelannee 1688. Shortly after.the revolt ofthe Indians of the northerm part of the Flori- dian peninsula.against their Spanish governor, who attempted to send some of their number to the mines in the West Indies, and after the inroad of, the Yamassi Indians into their pueblos (1687), the loyal Apalache. chiefs sent a letter of explanation to the Spanish monarch, dated Apalache, Febr. 15, 1688, and endorsed by the Governor Diego de Quiroga y Lossada, ‘*Capitan-general,’’? on April 1, 1688 ; the Timucua chiefs sent) to him a loyalty address bearing date of Jan. 28, 1688, The vidimus of this letter) states, that it was ‘‘escrita de todos los CaCiques de la timucua,’’:and translated by Fray Francisco de Rojas, a Franciscan of Santa Elena Prov- ince, interpreter of Timunyeng in the city of St. Augustine and ‘‘ministro de los naturales, etc.”’ This remark of the translator is dated February 17; the vidimus of the magistrate, ‘‘ Alonsso Solana,’’ is dated February a 1688. The Apalache and the Timucua letter were published in fac similes of the original documents, with printed Spanish translations and vidimus, by Mr. Buckingham Smith, in an undated (1859) folio edition of nine ances and printed in fifty copies only. A copy having no printed title is in the Library of Congress, ee from this I have reproduced the text below. Leclerc mentions the publication of Mr. Smith in his ‘* Bibliotheca Americana,’’ Paris, Maisonneuve & Co., 1878. . 8°. In my English sietie of the address I have’ followed as sacl possible the corrected Timucua text. The vertical bar | shows the end of each line in the text of the original. Readers will remember that only the “ Text of the Original’’ andthe ‘* Spanish Translation of 1688,’’are reproductions of what. is left to us. The original is worded in a dialect differing in some respects from that! found in Pareja’s books, and was written some eighty years later.. “Where we find, ¢. g., lahacu,; bota in the address, Pareja would use leheco, mota. The queer orthography of the original prompted me ¢o attempt a more cor- rect'reading of it, and this I have pought to reproduce in my | pzecnae translation. At.the head of the letter stands the sign of the holy cross, aad in the: : original it is repeated where the C stands before reiheca. Every C of the text is written asa capital letter. The i’s have all long oblique dashes over them (i). In the term namonimanibotela the nam is erased in the original with ink. Numerous difficulties still encumber the full understanding of ,this interesting missive. Gatschet.]} Spanish Translation of 1688. t Al Rey nro Seiior Siempre emos sido vasallos de V. M. pero agora con mejor racon y de ttodo coragon lo somos y asi quere-" mos hablar.=° V. M. a ynviado’ muchos governadores pero como Don Diego noemos vistto ninguno ; otros que an sidos governadores estan aqui pero como este no emos vistto nin- guno,°y por estta causa damosa V. M ‘las ‘gracias ; nos a socorrido a los casiques y pobres vassallos de V. M. con ropa por cuia causa estamos muy agradecidos, Dios se lo pague a V. M.;,y si los_sefiores. governadores que han* benido fueran como el que [Feb, 20, | Text of the Originals ~~ + C reiheca AnoConiCa nanemf” Anequelamftonoma’ ” nf efabobila “hacacheqeno | Cumenati-” moCoCo” Anoquelamitonoma “ni efabotela | queniqe Anohebasisiro-~ nimanibotage——— © i Bf Anonafo holata puquah{mesobonfbf- lahaCu | dontieCunaquimost * niene? ‘bobitila Ano nafo holata | yoqua ~ Caremate efatamalahacu naquimost ” ni | enebobitila naquenema betaleq © diosiquimi leqeysa- | co niquosobori- habenamotaniCa ieholataynemimote | | Anoquelacunemate Amunapuqua- — ninabarasobo | ta niquo soboniquey-~ sacomanta < intanievla Aca Ano'}>~ naioholata ponobi feqticaremaCa— Co niso bonemaqu | mo sinisobomo- ~ bilenincono Cristiano nipuqnuaCoCo-~ lebo | hela Cristianoleno lenoleha-— bema tacubanfheba | sibonela minete™ pataquilononebeleca ynta Cristi | —~ Anoutima niparifosibonelahaeu pata- quilonoma | quayquimfleqemisa= mano haninibiti la santole | nelenela - namonimanibotela ytecarena boso } noletahabe caremate nihebasibota- mosoniqeysa | Comanta efatanicaRe- misa oCotono letahabeCa | remate nihebaneCa sibotahomotaminiqe ysaco | manta ‘efataniCare naquene- mabetaleqe Caqi | Anonafoholata- — hibantema diosiquimileqe | ‘Anila-~ oy esta fueramos mejores xptianos — y hubiera muchos mas xptianos. Su me* a trauajado mucho en ntro vien con tan -malos tiempos y_por si mes- mo a uisitado ttodos los lugares de xptianos y de ynfieles como fue Basisa y nos a dado mucho coAsuelo y con todos estos trauajos nunca a dejado de oy: misa-y asi degimos g® es un hombre santto. A nos en- cargado mucho que honrremos que rreberenciemos a los sagerdoites que nos asisten, como su m¢ lo agia del- ante de nosotros, suplicamos a V.M. se sirua de continuarnos muchos a®* al 8* Governador que es porque pro- cura n® vien aconsejandonos como buen xptiano que oygamos misa atendaumos mucho.a lo que los ro 8 giosos nos ensefian; boluemos a suplicar a V. M. nos continue el S* Don Diego nuestro Gobernador para nro consttelo; nro Sefior de en ttodo a V. M. ttodo gogo y salud como estos pobres vasallos le desean: escrita en 8° Matheo en el mes de henero veintte y ocho de mill ss* y ochentta y ocho aios. Escriptw firmada de los casiques que nos hal- latavs presentes.—= Don Fran? ca- sique de San Matheo. = Don Pedro casique de San Pedro,==Don Bentura casique de Asile.c=Don Diego Oa- sique de Machaua.=Gregorio casique de San Juan de Guacara. = Fran?) Martinez Residente én San Matheo: pusimitaniCale diosibalunu ohonta- haue | tomanCo Caquanihi basibon- © tahcronimant | botaqe Anihebasimi-” -tanibale San Mateo | enero’ elaotu-~ ma yuihoge piqinahii eromano'83 | > don fransisco naystale Acu frans ciseamartine | Don P San P* holata — Dudie go MacbaUa holata | Venturo — Asile holata Gregorio 5 Ju® ho | lata— — Jalon « 4 of10% 1880.] Text as corrected by myself: t Reyheca anoconica : Nanemianequelamitonoma ni eya bobilahaca cheqeno cumena atimo- coco anoquelamitonoma ni botela quenige ano hebasi-siro ni- mani botaqe. Ano. nayo. holata puquahi miso bonibilahacu Don Diecu naqui mo- si ni-enebobitila; ano nayo holata yo- qua caremate eyatamalahacu naqui mosi_ ni-enebobitila. Naquenema betaleqe Diosi iquimilege ; isaco ni- quoso ponihauena mota nica naye holata inemi mote anoquelacune- mate amuna puquanina barasobota ni- quoso. bonige isaco manta intanicala. Acu ano nayo holata ponobi yoque caremacaco nisobonemaque mosi ni- sobo mobilenincono Cristiano nipu- qua.cocolebobela Cristianoleno leno- lehauema, Tacubani hebasi ponela minete pataquilono nebeleca inta Cristi (-anole?) ano. utima_ nipari- fosi. ponelahacu pataquilonomaque iquimilege misamano_haninibitila santole nelenela nimani botela ; ite- care nabosonoletahaue caremate ni- hebasibota mosonige isaco manta eyatanicare misa ocotono-letahaue caremate nihebanica sibota homota- minige isaco manta eya tanicare. Naquenema betalege caqi ano nayo holata hibantema Diosi iquimilege, ani lapusi mitanicale Diosi balunu ohontahaue tomanco caqua nihibasi pontahero nimani botage. Ani he- basi mitanimale San Mateo, enero erao tuma yuchage piqinahu eroma- no 88. Don Francisco na-istale, acu Francisco Martinez. Don Pedro, San Pedro holata... Du(n) diego Macha- ua holata.. Ventura. Asile , holata. Gregorio San Juan holata. 497 eya | [Gatschet. English Translation : t To our King our Lord : Always we have been your sub- jects, but now with more reason and with whole heart are we your sub- jects, and intend fo speak in this way. Some white governors you have sent us, but like Don Diego we have seen none; former white governors stay here, but like him we have not seen any. Therefore we. inyoke (upon you) the grace of God); he has suecored us, the chiefs and the poor subjects (of you) with clothing, and for this cause we show our gratitude. Those white governors who came (here), had they all been like the present one, we would be better Christians, and there would be many more Christians in existence. For our benefit he has worked a great deal, and in person has visited all settlements of Christians and un- believers, has helped us with advice, and having during all his trouble never neglected to attend holy mass, we hence call him a saint; all the priests who assist us, he told us. to honor and reverence, as he has done himself before our eyes. We there-- fore pray you to let the governor stay many years with us, for he works for our weal, advising ‘us to hear mass, and listen to the teach- ings of the priests. Therefore we supplicate, that God bestow His graces upon this white Governor, our adviser; we all pray God he may give life (to him), and thus we constantly pray and wish. We all present have thus spoken at San Mateo, the twentieth and: eighth day of the year (16) 88. Don Francisco was speaker, and he Fran- cisco Martinez... Don Pedro, chief of San Pedro. Don-=Diego, chief of Machaua. Ventura, chief of. Asile. Gregorio, chief of San Juan. S90) > PROC, AMER. PHILOS. SOC. xviiT. 105. 3L. PRINTED MARCH 29, 1880. — Gatsehet.] 498 [Feb. 20; Worps Anpd SENTENCES. acuyano besides, further, furthermore ;in addition £0, afuenoma, see ofuenoma. Alimacaui a Floridian chief, also called Halmacanir; Allimicant paracussi ; contains the word maca, moca sea, 6céan. The map in De Bry, Brevis narratio, locates his settlement on the coast, just North of the mouth of St. John’s River. anoleta knavishness, sin, misdeed. antipola bonassu. These words were uttered by the Indians on the St. John’s River, when they saw De Laudonniére revisiting them on his second expedition. They seem to represent the Timucua words : ‘“‘anta, balu pona cho?” brother, have you come (returned) alive? This author interprets them by *‘ brother ”’ or “ friend,’’ and A. Gal- latin (Archeol. Amer. II, page 106) attempted to explain the first word by a Cha’hta, the second by a Creek term. ati, ate subordinate person; slave, subject, servant. Atemima chu some? body’s negro slave. Atemalema master and slave, or: female slave and owner. al 1h atichicolo spiritual. atichicoloye atimoqua your spiritual lord ; your Christian God. atimoqua, atimoge master, ruler, lord; from ati and maqua, moqua. Atore, Athore, nom. pr. of the eldest son of the paracusi Saturiwa We Laud.). Contains the word itori following, subsequent to. ayahibuano excrements ; lit. ‘‘ what cannot be spoken of.” benasaba, balusobo to dance. betale to supplicate. Bimini, nom. pr. of the mythic ‘Fountain of Life’’ imparting éternal youth to those who drank from it and restoring health to the diseased. Ancient traditions and maps place it on an island north of the Ba- hama Islands. Contracted from ibine mine, ‘‘superior water.” The authors of the sixteenth century mention the Antillian bi life and mini sowrce, but I have looked in vain for analogies to” theed terms in the other Galibi dialects, cani 1) palmetto leaf 2) hat made of palmetto leaves. bit care, pl. carema ‘“‘together ;’’ expresses the idea of temporal- and ‘some- times local simultaneity. Viro niaquene care uquata: male and female infants at the same time. Caru amitimale: male twin, lit.: brother born at a time with a sister. Hica nocoromale: fellow- citizens. Chilili, nom. pr. of an inland Indian town, on an affluent of St. Jolin’s River, and of its chief. . Chiquola, nom. pr. of a ‘ great lord of the country,”’ dwelling north of St. John’s River. His stature exceeded that of his subjects by mote than one foot (De Laud.), chulufi, chorofa jay; chulufi-chi those of the jay-clan (chi, apher. of Liaelit 1880.) 499 [Gatsehet. cote, ticote, ticotacu, cotacu (suffixed to verbs): unless, lest, if not ; al- though, though not. manino ticote without feeling hunger. cote, cota tongue ; language ; portion of discourse, paragraph. mine cotemano the first part (of book, sermon, ete.). --anacoti councillor, adviser. Cuaresma the fasting period of Lent, lat. quadragesima. Cuaresma pira: Red Lent, viz: Lent marked red in the calendar. cumele heart. » cumelenima bohote cho? do you believe with (or im) the heart? cumeleno natimo heartily, with full heart (de todo coragon). cumelesota document ; c. hebuanoma d. of all what was said. ecaleta to perform, to obey, act upon something. ecano made, prepared ; part. of ica to make. auara ele ecano field recently cleared or prepared for maize-culture. ecoyaleta ruler, manager. elo, elosi, or elofi to whistle, hiss at ; aqetu elosibi cho? did you hiss at the _ tempest? Emoloa, Emola, Molua, nom. pr. of a Timucua settlement and of its cacique or chief, who is reported to have been subordinate to the Holata Utina. De Bry’s map has a locality Homoloua on the St. John’s River, near Fort St. Charles. equelete to-day. hachipacha some person, somebody ; lit. ‘‘ who is born.”’ hani to cease, stop, quit. itorinoma hanibi cho? did you cease fasting ? Missaleno hani to miss the holy mass. inifaye viroma chi hanige after your husband had left you. .»> hanini to neglect; haninibitila he has not neglected. -) utibanta exulant, deserter. Helicopile, nom. pr. of a chief (De Laud.). heso to cause or give to eat; from he to eat. heta nacuta, heta ucuta to excess, immoderately. hete what can be eaten : meat, food, edibles ; hetetileta untasted yet. ara-hete bear’s meat; honi-hete edible mussel, nutritious sea-shell. hiatige interpreter. hibuasi, hibuaso wedding. hini tobacco ; der, of he to eat. Hiocaia, nom pr. of a chief dwelling twelve leagues north of Fort St. , /-Charles,..From hio to imitate, and caya turkey, partridge, the name perhaps referring to a headdress of feathers. Hirrihiqua, nom. pr. of the Timucua chief, who captured Ortiz, a Spanish soldier. This is in fact a local name ; War-land, or war-district (iri, >> hiea). . , hitigiri owl, lit. ‘‘ demon-screecher.’”’ . 4 hochie, hochi, echa, other pronunciations of hacha, pron. relat. hono-1) shell, fresh-water or sea-mussel ; lit. food (he : to eat). Gatschet.] } 500 [Feb,20, honi-hete edible shell, bivalve; hono-melo. shell: of..the salt. (melo) water; oceanic shell, pearl-shell:.. On Floridian fresh-water shells, shell heaps and shell mounds, ef. Fifth Ann: sgsiait of. Peabody Museum, Boston, 1872, page 22 sqq. 2) fruit ; berry found in the woods. hororo red owl. Hostaqua or Hustaca, nom. pr. of an Indian settlement and its. ial a on an affluent of St. John’s River. ot iarua sorcerer, conjurer_(De Laud.)... This epithet..given ras Panui shamans refers to their prophetic power and the convulsions affected by them to obtain oracles of war; from yuru.to tremble, to be shaken or contorted. ichi cold ; ibine-ichicosa to throw into ani water. ichuqui ve throw away, to spill. f : inoni to work. Domingo equelemate inonibicho? did 700. aa anni fate on Sunday ? 5a8 inoso, inosobo to make work, to cause to work. iquaso, iquase to cry forth, to uttera cry, to scream ;, iquaseti. son to, utter acry. Cf. qi in hitiqiri. Iracana, nom. pr. of a river falling into the Atlantic, webabbis in nei (De Laud.); also called Salinacani. The French called it ‘la Somme,’’ or aecording to the map of De Bry, ?’ Aisne (Axona).. . \ stan iriboso to flood something. 0 ait isi blood. ; isito to bleed ; ichinima isitoco to. cause my nose to bleed, itori alligator. These reptiles served as food to the Timucua people. ituhunu prayer: -jufere a wicker basket for catching fish (Span. NASA). yechino query; question. yoge, yoqua past, bygone. ano nayo holata yoqua former white SI verhors: yuquiso to lay, deposit on the side of. yubueha, yubehe to transfix, pierce, strike. atulu chi eutehaael the arrow may pierce you. ) . yubuo, yubana sodomite, Yupaha, nom. pr. of a town seen by Hernando de Soto’ 8 amy @ontalhs paha ‘‘ houses ;’’ perhaps: Yoque paha, ‘*Oldtown.’* (055 6 o9 yuri, yuru to be shaken up, to tremble} to be angry. iyorona (for yuruna) eel. Maracu, in the French orthography Sails b0ve an inland camp of Zndians. Seems to contain mero, melo warm, hot. mela, mero hot, heated, boiling. melasonolehabetile sn deamon ‘not to throw the fish into hot vention: aT nimaru to preserve one’s heat, melent petticoat ; probably made of balrushes of the salt voerels Cf. melo), meleniqi to put on a petticoat. melo salt. ibini melo salt water; moca melo, salt, sea;/hono-melo ocean 188u;p 501 [Gatschet. shell. © Probably identical with mela, mera hot, warm, the tempera- ture of the sea water forming a contrast with that of fresh-water springs in southern latitudes. mine winter ; minama in Mcsaeantiaruet during the mens season ; viz. first (mine) of year. miso old, aged; older than. ano miso mareca six old men. ano misoma “< ©° jtuhute incantated by a conjurer. A iO mo to speak, say, tell. mono, mueno to call by name, to name. balodiiede\porhaike: “ © mani to consent, desire ; manino to be hungry or thirsty. manta, manda 1) to wish, desire ; 2) sign of the future tense. mota to agree, consent, declare ; 2) a word, saying; 8) thus, so. moqua, maqua to serve, attend, to wait upon, ef. atimoqua; mine Diosi “° -- maqua to serve the great God. nabe, every, each ; nabe chaleque every morning; viz. : every new (day). naboto to strike (for ni-aboto) ; said f. i. of the thunderbolt (numa-hebua). ‘naeu'to drink ; ninacu to ask for drinking. nacunu contr. from na acu ano. ‘nayo (when standing for na eyo) : another, any other. naquila, ninaquilasi to perfume ; from uque oil, grease. nate (among other significations) or, or else, or either ; acunate again. Nia Cubacani, nom. pr. of a woman (De Laud.) ; probably : niaco pacano. niponosi to return to somebody; from pona to come. niponosihero-manda bohobi cho? did you believe that he would possi- bly return (to you)? ofuenoma, afuenoma, ofonoma, 1) after, behind (temporal and local): ofte- noma Diosima: in preference to God, after God. hibate maytines ofonoma: after having said the morning mass; halifonoma nantela T call it to be against nature. 2) on the subject of, concerning, about something : caqi mandamiento ofuenoma yechino cantela, or: caai mandamiento ofuenoma na-yechinoma cantecarela: all these are questions (or queries) concerning that commandment. Olataraca, nom. pr. of the nephew of the chief Saturiwa (De Laud.).. The first part of the name is holata, chief. orobo, oroboni to cure, heal; to treat for sickness, ch-orobonate you to be cured. orobisi to correct, chastise. orobini to go to confession, ‘8 orobisiono advice, counsel ; na orobisionoma (good) advice, intelligence ; orobaso to bewitch. orobota incantation, witchcraft. orobono glory (of heaven). Patica, nom: pr. of a coast settlement or locality eight leagues from the French Fort St. Charles, on St. John’s River. It lay a short distance “°° south of the outlet of that river; the name is'a compound of paha houses, and tico canoe ; canoe-houses, cabins near a harbor. “pia, piaha to hide, cover up. Gatschet.] 502 ; [Feb. 20, pile field; pilema numa hebuama Ones when lightnings have struck the field. hachipile animals ; lit.:‘‘ what is on the field.” a purucusta to run. If paracusi is a derivative of this, it means ‘‘the chief of the war-expeditions.”’ samota 1) to bathe in ; samota niyena to bathe in the juice of an. herb; 2). a rubbing with, a bathing in. . Sarrauahi, also written Saranay, Serraney; nom. pr, of a river and of an Indian settlement located on its shores, north of the outlet of St. John’s River. Saturiwa, or, in French orthography, Satourioua, nom. pr. of a paracusi on St. John’s River, mentioned by De Laudonniére. Lived on sea- ‘coast, a short distance south of the outlet of St. John’s River. Seloy, nom. pr. of a river in the Timucua territory, interpreted by De Lau- donniére par ‘‘la riviére des dauphins,’’ Porpoise River. sieroa pira red metal, gold (De Laud.). suquoni to rub on, to rub oneself with ; niye suquoni to rub, oneself with the juice of herbs, Tacatacuru, nom. pr. of a river falling into the Atlantic Getan north of the St. John ; contains taca fire, probably in a redoubled form, The French under De Laudonniére called this river La Seine. tapaga tapola ‘‘little baskets of mill’’ (Hakluyt) ; a compound term ; the latter word is holaba, tapolaba Indian corn and contains abo stalk, ; maize-plant. toca ‘‘new fruit,’’ tococo to eat that “‘ new fruit.”’ toya name of a feast of the Timucua people (De Laud.), tola laurel ; Tolemaro a town near the outlet of the St, Mary’s River, on Northern boundary of Florida; once Anehited by. Timucua Indians. The name contains tola laurel, ubua, uba 1) to enter, go into, as into the net. cuyuma ubuata qgibe the first fish (plur.) caught ; 2) to catch, get hold of. uqua to eat, said of certain edibles only, tapolamano inti uquabi cho? did you eat the maize (-ears)? uquaso to eat, and to give to eat, | uque oil, grease ; ara uque bear’s grease, uqui, huge, rain ; uquihe, uquisa, uquise to produce rain, 18604, 503 [Prazer, A Mirror for Illuminating Opaque Objects Sor the ia eatin PRBERE SE By Persifor Frazer, Jr. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, Feb. 20, 1880.) The subject of the present note is an arrangement for representing opaque objects through the gas microscope, especially adapted to Zent- mayer’s 1} inch objective. It is only claimed to be better than the para- bolic reflector of Smith & Beck, J. Lawrence Smith, Sorby and others, where the working distance of the microscope is comparatively large (#. ¢., the distance from the objective to the object on the stage is $ inch or more) and for the purposes mentioned. Where the distance is as great as that just mentioned the dispersion of rays from the reflexion at one point, of rays from very different parts of the mirror, is so great that only a few rays from the upper part of the mirror reach the lens at all. It would be different with a lens having a very small working distance, and in this case a parabolic reflector would be preferable. _ The apparatus consists of a brass tube made to slide over the lens, on the lower end of which is fixed a glass plate about 1 mm. in thickness #0 attached as to be capable of a sliding motion towards or away from the hinged mirror which is attached to the edge of the metal flange in which the glass plate slides. This simple contrivance permits the glass plate to be brought into close contact with the reflecting mirror no matter at what angle the latter may be placed. ~The mirror is made of nickel-plated German silver neatly mounted on a small hinge. The light is admitted from below through a diaphragm after the rays have been rendered parallel by the condenser of the lantern, the aperture of the diaphragm being adapted to the maximum thickness of beam which can be effective for illumination, and which (calling a the aperture of the lens and 7 the angle of incidence of the beam) = a cos 7: or for an aper- ture of 3/’ (= 0.875’) and an incident angle of 62°, 0.411” or roughly 0.4’’. The less the incident angle of course the larger the beam of light will be, and the greater diameter of the diaphragm. The refractive index of the glass employed to make the plate being 1.5, in order that the critical angle 41° 48’ may not be exceeded in the refracted ray, this angle of incidence or 7 must not be less than 61° 517 or roughly 62°. This minimum value of ¢ determines the area of surface which can be illuminated on the microscope stage, but by altering the angle of the mirror very slightly all parts of the object may be successively projected on the , screen. This minimum value is easily obtained from the critical angle of the glass employed, which is 41° 48’, The complement of this, or 48° 12/, is equal to the angle of refraction (or r) when the minimum value of ¢ is attained. sin re sin ¢ = 1.5 (sin 48° 12/) $ = 61° 51’, Frazer, } 504 : [ Feb, 20, cin other said. the ane between the luminous ray andthe glass: plate _ GM. Cover glass. | MN. Reflecting mirror. baie ae) /OPR. Reflexion on object. ) L/L’. Rays which pass through the objective. | D. Lens. ) T. Sliding tube carrying reflecting mirror, igs Angle of incidence 62°. Ole | wi Of .wivx .0o8 @OUIRS .1aMA DONT 1850.) 505 [Frazer. Three Methods and Forty-Hight Solutions of the ° Fifteen Problem: By <> Persifor’ Frazer, Ire (Read before the American Philosophical Society, March 5, 1880.) First Meruop. 5 Aes 5 b 2 8 4 5 6 q 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 SEconD METHOD 1 2 yy ig | | 12 13 105) 8 uy 11 15 6 10 8 | 7 Tarrp Mernop. 1 2 8 4 8 q 6 5 9 10 11 12 15 14 13 PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xviii. 105. 8M. PRINTED MARCH 29, 1880 Frazer.]} 506 [March 5, The requirements of the popular Fifteen Puzzle are.to,‘‘“move the blocks until in regular order.’’ This regular order may be of three kinds, when the numbers are in consecutive series and the Bank space is left either at the beginning or the end : 1. That usually understood where the numbprs follow each other in broken lines like reading matter in type, or in the opposite direction: ' 2. Where the numbers follow a single coil from some point on the-edge of the box to the centre, or vice versa. 3. Where the numbers follow a zigzag course across the box, reading from left-to right on the first and third lines, and from right to left on the second and fourth, or vice versa. It can be shown that the three conditions which render possible. one or the other of these solutions are: 1st, the number which heads the outside column, whether 1 or 15 ; 2d, the direction in which the numbers increase along the outside, whether with or against the motion of the hands of a watch ; 3d, the order in which the four middle numbers oceur. Nore. The direction of the motion of the column itself must always be such that the head does not move to a square just vacated by one of the series of which it is the first or last member. There are sixteen possible solutions under each of the three methods, eight of them applicable to cases where 1 is at the head, and;eight to cases where 15 is at the head. Of these eight solutions four only are possible. in any given. position of the middle blocks in the box, the other four becoming possible when the . positions of any two of the middle blocks are exchanged. Of each group of four possible solutions in any given position of the middle blocks, two are possible when the outside column of numbers 'in- crease in magnitude with the motion of the hands of a watch, and two when the increase is the reverse of this. ) Finally of the two possible solutions where the outside numbers are in arithmetical series and the position of the middle blocks is given, one brings the head of the outside column to a given corner, and the other to the diametrically opposite corner. The middle numbers must always be the lowest four or the highest four, The following four tables comprise all possible groupings of these two sets of four numbers, The dots in the small squares indicate by their num- ber the method by which the solution can be obtained without disturbing the middle blocks, provided the outside numbers have apes BA i a proper order : , a : mi? IC : 1 oldal one Tinie I. 1993 Taste II. 1 2 8. Bot eigh 2 3 ‘ 12°15 | 12 14 | 12 18 . 12°15 | 18 18°] 1a 14 14:0980]) 180150 4.15) 914 18)).44 »} 4s 18)! jo DBo dB pit? | 18 2 | 18 15 | 18 12 | is" 4 °} “48°44 wih ABM AZ b dd 15>] 42 14 15. 14, | 14, 12.) ..19,,45 Cae ee ae eae ae ae Cae CL SL ofogg! 4a 1e tp fs: a8 18°15. |) 15! ago} agerds ‘ 15 14 | 15 18 | 15 12 Al 43.1 1 4) 8 oh toe 18° |°44 “49 P 48° 14 14/18 | 18° 19'} 18°44 Tasue ITI. Tasue LY. 1. 2. 8. 1. 2. 8. Sepp nor tag Cie He gig ty yO lgprplglOag tl pio yen ree) 9.4. 48 4 | 4312 8 phoBak th Bodolo®8 pl) @ Aa do® By lo Bd 1B Bidodna 4 Bij 1i)}wlobhtidode 8 i fe saye gael og Bieegaeeda ggedb Og a ee ee ea De alle FRE PR ZH 5 ee PE Rona aan oD owilesdit So bu ®iq@ii4 rid 1 85]; Bicodio Bd » No combination in any one of these pairs of Tables can be shifted to any combination in the other of the same pair (while the outside numbers re- main in proper order) without lifting out of the box and transposing two of the numbers ; but any combination can be shifted into any other in the same table by temporarily placing one number in the outer row and shift- ing the positions of the other three once, or twice. * Tables I and II are for all cases where 1 heads the column, Table III and IV are fer cases when 15 heads the column. In the first and third methods the box is turned till the first four num- bers fall on the top line, or the last four on the lower line. Fragen) 508 [Mareti'é, Frrst ‘Metin. Arrangement of numbers i in consecutive lines reaching Fo and left to a ight or from right to left.” fp i Number one heads the.column. of owtside numbers... 389 ’ Solutions only’ possible*when 12 and°13' are* diagonally ‘adjacent..! The motion of the head of the column must be past 15-12 in the order named, the' 1 stopping on the square diagonally adjacent to that occupied by 12. Only those combinations permit solution when the 12 and 13 are:diagonally adjacent. After the first: row is: complete, the 5. with. its, following series pass on the next: line pushing the 15-12 before them, and, the 9 and follow- ing three numbers pass on the third line pushing the 13-14 before them. When this third row is complete the numbers are in order,...If.after the outside series is complete the middle numbers occur as in any of the com- binations of Table I (which are resolvable into eachother. by, movingone of the blocks temporarily to the vacant space on the outside, rotating the others and then replacing! it) and if mecessary;repeating the operation by thus temporarily moving one of the blocks which is in its right,place and rotating again till the desired combination. is effected) the aollowing solu- tions are possible: I. The middle numbers occur as in some combination of Table I. : 1. The increase of outside numbers is with the motion of the hands of _@ watch; a1, and b 1 (turn box half round). : 2. The increase of outsiders is opposite to the above ;;¢ 9, and d 3. II. The middle numbers occur in some combination of Table IT.” 1. Increase of outside numbers with motion of watch hands c 1, and d 3. 2. Increase of outside numbers opposite to motion of watch hands a 3 and b 2, van Number fifteen heads the ‘cStumb of outside’ numbers, Solutions are only possible when the 4 and 8 are diagonally adjacent. The 15 passes the 1 and 4 in this order and stops at the square diagonally adjacent to the4. The 11 passes to the next line pushing the 1-4 before it; the 7 to the third line pushing the 8-2, ans when this line is filled the numbers are arranged. [digs [xo |18 eaol ILl., he middle numbers are one of the combinations of Table Ba 7 1. The decrease of outside, numbers. with motion of; watch hands, « el and d 2. 2. The decrease of outside numbers against motion of watch hands, b 8 and al, IV. The middle numbers are some combination of a IV. .0 5 1. Decrease of outsiders with motion of watch hands, a& 2:and b 1. 2. Decrease of outsiders against motion of watch hands, 8 and d 1. 1880.) 9) 509 [Frazer, SEcoND MetHop. +} Hol mon umber one heads the outside column... Bolustons only possible when 12 and 14 of the ‘middle numbers are diag- onally adjacent. Bring the 11 alongside of the 12. i. The middle numbers occur as some combination of. Table T.. *1.The: tnarefte of outside numbers with; motion.of watch hands ;,a 3, and ¢ 1. : 2. Increase of outside. numbers against motion of watch hana 4. 1, Winsoyhvand: b 2. dem 10 si The middle numbers some couieBtentions of Table ys ie 4. Inerease of outside numbers with motion of watch hands b % and d 1. '" 2. Increase of outside numbers against motion of watch hands; c. 2, and a 1. papas fifteen leads. Solutions only possible when band 3:are diagon outs ‘ally ee Yd soiiseqo 91 “Bring thes: mdi fetde thes4: nor TID. “Thé' middle numbers occur as some combination of Table 1H: OT, Deerease of outside numbers with motion of watch iganis b 2, and dl. R anol} 2. Decrease of outside numbers against motion of watch rand a 3, and ¢ 3. TV: Middle numbers oceur as some combination of Table IV. 1. Decrease of outside nim Bors with motion of wateh ppery a 3, “and © 1. 2. Decrease.of outside numbers siniteat 6 motion of watch. hands ; b 2, 8 hk and dq 2. : THIRD Mernop. “The numbers read from left to right on the first and third lines ind from right to left on the second and fourth, or vice versa, thus : Was tS sdexe ss 3 4 aaasal sadehWel ce’ cath: bbs atta © RilkeinGath sidipe Bild ts 9.10.11 12 gad i ove ; fe te oe veel 19 bbwetenel nunldarcpharnia b. 2, 8,:4,,8 7, 6, Bu 9,10, Pe + of 9 Solutions are only possible when 12 and 15 or 1 and 4 are diagonally ad- jacent. _.The first four numbers pass 13-12 in I and II, and 3-4 in ITI and PAL in the order named, the head of the column coming to rest at ‘the square diagonally adjacent to the 12 or the 4 respectively. 8d ehuc Number one heads the column, The upper line ts full.. I. The middle numbers a combination of Table IT. - 1. First four sumbers i increase with motion oF yah hands ; a Ass bag d 2. 2. First four aniniets: inerease ser ng —— of, wath hands; ; b 1 <5 bos nd el8ied dotew : ; isbiain ae Frazer.] 510 {March 5, Il. Middle numbers a combination of Table I. 1. First four numbers increase with motion of watch hands ; b 3, and c 3. 2. First four numbers increase against motion of watch hands ; a 2, and d 2. Number fifteen heads the Pilea Order of outsiders, 15, 14, 13, 12, 8, 9, 10, 11, 7, 6, 5. Ill. Middle numbers a combination of Table I v. : 1. Last four numbers decrease with motion of watch hands ; a 1, and d 3. 2. Last four numbers decrease against motion of watch hands ; b 3, and ec 2. 7 IV. Middle numbers a combination of Table LIL. “1. Last four numbers decrease with motion of watch hands; b 1, and c 2. 2, Last four numbers decrease against motion of watch hands ; d 3, and a 2. It is thus seen that there are four tables, each containing twelve combina- tions of the middle numbers or 48 combinations in all. Each of the three methods of solution takes four combinations from each table or one from every horizontal line, and no combination will permit of but one solution. Since these are all the possible combinations and a solution is given for every one it follows that no other solutions are possible than those above iven. . It is but just to say that the first demonstration of the possible solutions of the first method was printed by me in the Bulletin of Feb. 26; showing that in the 18, 15, 14 difficulty position, two solutions were pos- sible, but that the box must be turned if the 1 was to occupy the left hand upper square. Afterwards a paraphrase of this was printed in the New York Herald of Feb. 28, without credit. Erratum on page 258, 3d line from bottom. For 1000 meters read 1000 feet. R. RarupBun. TO IGLUSTRATE ASRAPER ON THE UONSTPPUTION-GF° THE: BRADFORD OIL SAND, CHAS. AZASHBURNER. M&S. Fig- 1. Fig. 2. ova =o NATURAL SIZE. > “> | 7 * THIRD OIL SAND, BRADFORD OIL SAND, OLL CREEK, VENANGO COUNTY ; KENDALL CREEK, M°KEAN GOUNTY; PENNSYLVANTA. . Phil. Soc. No. 105. Yol. XVII, Plate VII. Phototype. F. Gutekunst. Philadelphia, _ ife \ WOITAAGHLAD aes | ensenavinnas Wraaianue /— | jue ae Morranotnoonl ee poche et _=- as : eb 1 ey. Pies al per gat AM exh gat Insogiee piomgee alin vivedgal A meiiW Ath noe no aM 4 n9d0A orl —_ H a Ad dew V a aN nadie Oil De tH aan wt Praprenipinapes i : . 4 3 CELEBRATION OF THE HUNDREDTH ANNIVERSARY OF THE INCORPORATION. AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY. Vou. XVIII. MARCH 15, 1880, No. 106. Special Meeting at the St. George Hotel. Present, 71 members. President, FrepERICK FRALEY, in the Chair. Vice-Presidents, Mr. Eli K. Price, Prof. E. O. Kendall, Dr. John L. LeConte. Secretaries, Prof. P. E. Chase, Dr. Daniel G. Brinton and Prof. J. P. Lesley. Curator, Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr. Treasurer, Mr. J. Sergeant Price. Councillors, Mr. Henry Winsor, Mr. William A. Ingham, Mr. Benjamin V. Marsh, Dr. George H. Horn, Prof. Robert E. Rogers, Mr. Richard Wood. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. xviII. 106, 3N. PRINTED MAY 20, 1880. Hon. Joseph ‘Allison, Dr. Robert H. Alison, Prest. William H. Allen, Dr. Harrison Allen,,. ‘Mr. James C. Booth, - Dr. T. Hewson Bache, - Mr. William Blasius, Mr. J. Blodget Britton, Prest:: Tyomas ‘Chase, Mr. EB. Coxe,’ Mr..B..B: Comegys, Prest. Wmi-C,,Cattell, 5 Prof. E,, D, Cope, 512 {Mareh 15, Members Mr, William M. Canby, +5 Prof. G, H. Cook, . Prof. T. M. Drown, Prest. D. C. Gilman, Prof. Wm. Henry Green,’ Dr. Wm. H. Greene;)*!' Dr Traill Green, Prof..S. D.,-Gross,; |) Mr. Frederick, Graff, Prof. Arnold Guyot, . Dr, Henry Hartshorne, | Prof. John S. Haines, Dr. F. V. Hayden, Prof. S. S. Haldeman Dit Wm. A! Hammond, Dr Ro J, Levis, 2, “Mr. Henry C. Lea, Cd MO ME. Messchert, 9" o/Dr S. Weir Mitchell, ) “'Dr, Albert HY Smith, |! | Prof. George A. Konig, Mr. Strickland Kneass, Mr. Philip H. Law, Mr. J, B, Lippincott, Mr. Wm. V. McKean, MroA!'S. MeCreath’ 9° 90% / Mr. S..H. Nichols, ett (Mr. Henry.,M. Phillips););. o,)) Mr,Titian, R.. Peale, ) | Prof, T, C. Porter, “Dr. Thomas B. Reed, | “Mr, P: F. “Rothermel, ; Mr. William Sellers}! °° °" 3 «)) ProfeCharles 'WoShields,o va! Hon: Jolin Welsh, Mr, Joseph M.Wilson! | ©" Mr. A. Loudon Snowden, s Mr.,Heary Seybert, 2)){ fo eo!o _.Mr,-Frank Thomson, ... _ Mr. Jos..B, Townsend, _ Prof, Theo. G. Wormley, , Mr, John P. Wetherill, ‘Mr. William’ S) Vaux,’ o1d5 WSO) 513 [Fraley. 1. Address by the President, y) FREDERICK FRALEY; LL.Do’ “Tt is not facts which Deaslex tt us, but the opinions about those facts. So Bpieetus, In May, 1843, our-Society celebrated the'One Hun- dredth Anniversary of its, foundation.’ The century that had thus encircled it was one of the most remark; able the world had witnessed. LM Whether looked at frony political or scienti points of view it)was marked by most important a ba the fruits of which as now enjoyed have,added gréatly to the civilization, wealth and happiness of mankind. The historian of ‘the Society, in his address in 1843, gave a most eloquent and faithful’ account of the his- tory of our institution, but he found his limits, too bar- row to portray all that he desired, and it was left to others in. sessions,.that continued. for several.days.to tell of the: wonders. of scientific discovery. q When my esteemed friend Dr. Robert: M. Patterson closed his address he made a pointed reference tothe incorporation of the’ Society, in. March, 1780; and expressed the hope that when another celebration should be held, the Society could be found as honor- able and as. honored. in the years to come.as, it has been in those. which, he,,commemorated.,, Little -did I think then-that Ishould stand in his, place to-day,and try to trace with no hand or voice like his the record that he left unfinished and the story of the years that have followed: I can scarcely realize that I am the only surviving member of the Committee of Arrange- ment for the Centennial of 1843, and that my venerable friend, Dr. Isaac Lea, is the only survivor of the Board of Officers and Council of that day. » Fraley.] 514 [Mareh 45, “The ‘then°roll of members'is greatly diminished) but ouf ranks have ‘been filled up withthe ‘names! of men whose worth and whose vibe it keep up our! = earned history. ts It has’ been my ood fortune to have had pexeusal knowledge of all the Presidents of the Society, except the first Hides and to have been knit)in- bonds of active friendship and:almost: constant; intercoursé while ‘they lived, with Chapman,-Patterson; Franklin; Bache; Dallas Bache, ;Kanéand:' Wood. :\) Dr. »Patterson, spoke of Franklin; Rittenhouse, Jefferson, Wistar and a f and what historiés were théirs..)\)}o°5 n09 Franklin, the philosopher, economist: ari seanesttaail the diplomatist, the noble and true courtier, the man of America, the ‘useful citizen’ of “Philadelphia, to whom we ‘owe'so much for the establishment of “our ‘insti- tutions of learning and charity.) We may thank -Bos- ton for! having given chin “to us, but God planted him ‘in his true field and he did i Saree TOMO? tor ‘the planting. uquq Rittenhouse, the astronomer and°mechanician, self- cultured, like’ Franklin; mild, modest, benevolent, | just the man ‘tobe °loved for his virtues and to-be honored for his great and perfect knowledge. | Jefferson, the’ statesman and philosopher, whose’ pen could write the strong words that came from heart and head ‘to rousé'a young people to’ the assertion of their rights, and afterwards to command and guide ther ‘ih the path of wisdom for their preservation, 1H Wistar, the beloved physician; the ‘gifted Anatomist and Surgeon, one’ of the worthiest of / the: worthies, who raised the Medical Department of the University of Pennsylvania to its. great reputation, and withal, the 1880, ] } 51 5 ‘ {Fraley. kindest and, gentlest of men, opening weekly his, hos- pitable houseas,a;centre for the assembling of men, of learning: whether in.'science, law or politics, philan- thropy or general affairs. He died .comparatively young»and one of |his successors, made: his fitting eulo- gium, , fy ») Robert Patterson, the fifth President: and ‘the father of Robert M. Patterson, was'born in Ireland, in' 1743, of ‘humble® but respectable> parents. After! ia’ varied and somewhat trying youth, he emigrated to this coun- try and attempted: business as trader.» This was not congenial or successful...:The bent of his mind:was for Mathematics:and Natural Philosophy, and he speedily turned his attention to teaching. He applied for and was elected to the office of Principal of an Academy. at Wilmington, Delaware, It is recorded of him-that his duties required the giving: of instruction in the Latin language, of which he knew nothing, but he manfully went to work to study it and to. keep ahead.of his pupils, thereby managing to give satisfaction;;to)his patrons. He was engaged in this work when the war for Independence broke out, and. before and after school hours drilled several, companies of his townsmen, in military movements. The knowledge for;this he had acquired.as.an enlisted soldier in Ireland, haying been enticed into that sort of life by a promise;on the part of the sergeant that he would have the chance of studying ‘mathematics, while in, service. He entered‘the army of the Revolution first:as>an assistant surgeon, for which he had, qualified himself by a short, study) of) medicine, and. was. afterwards | ap- pointed, Brigade |Major.., On) leaving. thé,.army, he commenced, farming, and being disheartened: by the Fraley.) ~ 516 [Marehi 15, loss Of some Sheep that had'strayed away, while-abséiit in search of them his wifé accidentally fouad? by an advertisement in‘a néwspaper of “Philadelphia, that a Professor of Mathematics was ‘wanted in the: College of that:city. “He proceeded with her advice to:apply for the place, cand /after a courteous! reception from Provost “Ewing, he’ >was’ appointed and‘ continuedsin office*for' many years; holding im addition to‘his Profes- sorship’ the ‘office of Vice-Provost.’| He was ‘one of the best’ mathematicians of his day, and his general knowl- edge of ‘scientific and adie subjects was large and usefully employed. | eat His residence in Philadelphia brought him immed. ately and closely in contact ‘with ‘the leading men of the day, and he soon became ‘a member of our Society, contributing to its Transactions. and filling thé offices-of Sécretaty and Vice-President. In 1805 ‘he was ap- pointed Director of! the Mint of the United’ States, which office he held wnhtil within a°few weeks of ‘his death in! 1824.’ Hé took a déep interest ‘too in’ the progress of mechanical science, and’ became” ‘one of’ the- original “members: of© the Franklin) Institute, and, 1 think was Chairman of its Board> of) Mana- gers when he died. His» career> was one of great honor and ‘usefulness, and his obituary notice by Chief Justice’ Tilghman is’ fulloof interest. | Tilghman, the great jurist to whom ‘the law ‘owes many of its noblest expositions, whose tender! and affectionate spirit was like that of a woman, but whose love of justice was: as inflexible and exact as iif ins him were enshrined the purest'conceptions of ‘the truly god-like dyti¢s: he pk called on officially ‘to discharge. These six ‘were thevheroes of | ouf earlier history, 1880.]., i) HAT : [Fraley. and we.come,now to, the men, of, whom, we can remem- ber. the goings jout,and comings. in. ., | )Duponcéau; who | presided.,at, the Saetnnmeal of 3543 3» had:icome from, rance to: be the /private Secre- tarysof; Baron. Steuben, during, the war of; Indepen- dence, andsafterwards, was admitted, to the bari; He wwas-aischolar of; considerable: aequirements, of) a philo- sophic mind, very | patriotic in his: impulses, and|served the \Society faithfully ;and.acceptably, for many; years as President:,;, He made a number, of valuable contribu- tions to:the Transactions of the Society and was highly respected and justly esteemed by its, members, ||, With his death, ; in,,;184.4,the,; more), modern. history, of ;the \Society begins; .Two.gentlemen equally distinguished in. their, professions, were.voted.for and the, choice fell,on) Dri, Robert, M..Patterson, but with. that;chival- rous feeling that distinguished,.him.and) in, accordance swith >the, preference, he, had, expressed, for; his, com- -petitor, he declined to,accept the office, and, the presi- -deney remained, vacant for a year,; both Chapman, and -Ratterson serving as, Vice-Presidents, iInen846 there |was) no, contest) and. Dr, Chapsiad was elected: President., He :was a doctor of| medicine, skillediin the highest degree in his» proféssion,;a»Pro- fessor in>the Medical School.of the University, witha large: practice. He was one of the most brilliant)men ofthis day, and his sententious lectures told: for.,the eadvancement/of | the knowledge of -his: students; as) the evastyresources. of his) wit and humor, gave brilliancy oand>»pleasure to his social jlife, | For many »yéars) he ehilled'a-large space in society in Philasejpbin, and-was one of ati most: popular mén. of histime. .oDr! Robert M. Patterson; was: our next Bresittent, Fraley.] 518 [March 15, one of, the. most accomplished men_I, ever. knew: In early life becoming Rrofessor.of Natural Philoso- phy and Chemistry in the University, of Pennsylvania,; in the Department of Arts he soon;,achieved,a, wide reputation for his learning, and for his: skill asa: teacher. _He was a most eloquent man,.of captiva~ ting manners, and so genial and attractive that the, old) as well as the young sought his society, He was for: a time a Professor in the University of Virginia, and; for many years was, the Director. of the, Mint. of, the United States. He was one of the original: members: of the Franklin Institute, and its. first» Professor. of Mechanics and, Natural. Philosophy... To. .me}-he, was one of the first links in a chain of friends, which being» welded in 1825, held together, for, nearly, twenty years: unbroken, and then in. death, link by link, it gradually fell asunder. With him began the list. of Presidents) that formed the, body of my.own \personal and. very | dear friends, and the, years that I spent with. them... are filled with the choicest of my recollections, id For.a while the Society had a rule that the Presi- dential term should be for two years, and hence ‘it was) that dating from the time of .Dr, Chapman to bat ofis Dr. Wood, we had five Presidents, sw of Franklin. Bache was the next’ President, ‘He was a great-grandson ; of .Dr,Benjamin \Franklin, \and : in many traits of ;character; résembled him.> Het had a bland; serenity. of. manner,-a ‘great deal of! quiet ,/humor, a very. sagacious, mind,)and habits? of © careful and persevering industry.) He was for ‘a long» time one of the; Secretaries of, the Society, and the” neatness, and completeness) of \his) records, and their’” handwriting greatly. identify, him with, hisvancestor: >” es FE SS ee 1880.] | 519 {Fraley. He was 'a’doctor Of medicine with considerable prac- tice; but soon ‘becamé’a’ Professor in his favorite De- partment 6f Chemistry.’ He succéeded Dr. Wood as’ Professor of that’ subject in the Collegé of Phar- macy, and held the same Chair in the Franklin, In- stitute. He«was subsequently chosen Professor of. Chemistry in the Jefferson Medical College, and held that office until the day of his death. “He was one. of the authors of the Dispensatory of the United States,, and wroté and published a good deal on the subjects to'which ‘he devoted his attention. He was a liberal donor to’ the Society, and for’ many years one of its, most usefuland influential members. He was a man_ of: ‘very noble personal presence, and courteous and kind*to ‘his young associates. (Next °in the order of succession comes Mewanceath Dallas Bache, another great-grandson of our illustrious Founder.’ As Franklin Bache resembled Franklin in many traits of character, Dallas Bache was. regarded by those who knew him intimately as being almost the “tout ensemble” of the venerated sage and philoso- pher, | Like’ Franklin, he was’ not college bred, but after'.an “early ‘training in our best private schools, he was appointed a cadet, and finished his prepara- tory,education at the West Point’ Military’ Academy. I say: preparatory, for he never ceased to bea student or-to learn; He graduated from that institution with ~ great /honor; and was’ in’ coursé appointed ‘a Lieuten~ ant, ofthe United: States Artillery, “and: placed ‘in’ charge of the-construction of fortifications at Newport, ~ Rhode Island» But he was an innate scientist; and was soon: called:to act-im that sphere, being chosen Profes- sor,of»Chemistry and Natural ‘Philosophy in the Uni-: PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. xviiI. 106. 30. PRINTED MAY 20, 1880. Fraley.] 520 [Mareh.14, versity) of; Pennsylvanian |; Here he expanded into his true) proportions, and, took’ |‘his;,rank, in, the highest social,iand professional, circles::;| He became)an ac- tive member. of--the, Franklin. Institute, and with, the coterie of devoted men. that then influenced, its-coun> sels and, organized. its labors; not only-laid. the founda tions: of, its, great! usefulness, but» raised, it. to,-that pre-eminence)as|a widely useful, institution; which -it has) so-long; sa and, which, itso eialapesves main- tainsi;| nol swolls gw 9H aisd When tHe enslainabente bequest ‘of Stephen! Cited was ‘given to’the ‘City of Philadelphia, for the establish- ment of the Girard College, and ‘the plans’ for: organiz- ing that institution were to’ be prepared, ‘the’ Directors elécted Professor Bache,’ Presidént of! the’ College. He resigned his chair in’ the’ University and? accepted the appointment.” He immediately proceeded'to Eu- rope to visit and study’ the’ educational institutions of all kinds) then, in, operation| there, and his, Report: on Isaueation, in Europe,-made to the; Directors,.on, his return,;,contains | a) complete account,.of,,such.. insti- tutions, and. was the; most. full-exhibition!,of. the, sub- jects, of, which it; treated) that ‘had|up to that, time been.) published...-When}; he» .returnedthe College buildings, had.not, been-;finished, and while. ,awaiting their completion he prepared the, plans, for and,organ- ized the Philadelphiao, High: School,; serving, some time as-its Principalyand bringing||to his aid) the very men, who could enter fully;into his plans and aid{himyin an enterprisewhich had so much promise of usefulness. He was an admirable, organizer, andthe great success whicly has’ attended, the school is;due in large measure to the, perfection, with which) \he |started,ity!;,Delays a a = 1880.] 521 [Fratey. having attended ‘the completion of ‘the Girard College buildings and! being unwilling to hold: ‘nominal: offices, he again ‘accepted his) old chair-in'the University which had become’ vacant’ by the ‘resignation of Pro- fessor Roswell Park. Hé'was heartily welcomed ‘back by Professors and ‘students, for there was no’man who possessed a greater faculty of reading’ human charac- ter and striking the chords that! could ‘bind ‘every one to -him/and, as it were, making them a part of his own being. He was not allowed to remain long in his‘old and much, loved seat... By the death of Mr. Hassler, the| office of ;Chief of the Coast Survey. of, the, United States became, vacant and the unanimous voice, of, the scientific men of the,day. designated. him, for, the. place. The) Government ,,wisely: yielded to..this.call,, and the wisdom, of the appointment was, demonstrated;by the complete success, which,attended, all. the, subse- \quent prosecution, of ,the, work. ‘© He put new life into all: its departments, he ‘organ- qzed'anew the details of the field and- office \work, he caused more accurate and delicate instruments te’ be made and the measurements ‘and’ observations ‘to’ be recorded, verified and tabulated in the most’ complete forms.’ Here, as in’ every thing else, confided to him, he ‘always found the right'‘man for the right place) and for years the work went on; full‘of ‘honor for him and for his associates; and alike honorable: and useful to his’country. «It still:bears'the\ impress of his° genius and skill; and is justly regarded ‘as‘oneof the’ great marks of scientific progress of the century. 2 0 -OHis services were called for:im many other matters of’ public concern; and were » always’ faithfully >and efficiently’ rendered. »' He» was one of the founders ‘of Fraley.) 522 {Mareh 15, the National Academy-of Science; and'by his will’gsave itia’ bequest of avconsiderable ‘sum forits endowment. Ihave! dwelt om his noble character and! oreat? merits with peculiar pleasure, for he was my schéolmate*in youth,and one of my dearest friends forthalf accentury. Our ‘next President: was’ John °K. Kane, ‘born’ ‘and bred ‘in ‘Philadelphia, and admitted to’ practice’ in’ its courts atdn early age.’ He was a’fine scholarand. ‘an active citizen, participating in ‘many ways in measures of public interest: «He took an‘active part in’ the pro- ceedings of the vsti soe was Aine arenes if its down dls: is19dil After practicing” his baited for many’ years! he was appointed ‘Judge ‘of the District Court ‘of’ the United States, for the Eastern District of Peaesy anne and died in-office as Judge and President. All the Presidents from Duponceat,' to and including Judge, Kane, had held) office 'as»Sécretaries and Vice- Presidents, -and. were» thereby characterized by i knowledge of the working of the Society. Dr. George’ B)° Wood was’ elected’ President’ in January, 1859, and’ by ré-elections held office ‘until his death in 1879. He was bormin® New Jersey, atid ‘re+ ceived both his ‘literary and professional education in the! University of Pennsylvania. He was by profession a doctor of medicine, and was as’a general practitioner one of the most skillful:and ‘successful of his'day! He soon became: distinguished ‘too as a teacher, and ‘was successively elected: Professor ‘of Chemistry ‘in. thé College of Pharmacy, Professor of Materia Medica in the University of Pennsylvania, and finally Profes- sor of the Theory |and Practice of Medicine in that in- stitution, He. was a man of ‘peculiarly grave and 1880]: )/ | 523 [Fraley: imposing presence, and yét ihad:so«much+of!:kindly human, sympathy, that he could readily: be kindled! into great, geniality, and, give, out very bright'-flashes.of heasty humor. | iHe-was quite.a voluminous writer, and'‘oné of the great standard works of his labors-is the United States Dispensatory,, which, he; prepared: in, conjunction with Dr.|Franklin, Bache. as, before »stated:» His sspecial Text. Books are, held.in high »esteem by: the:-profes= sion. . He was.quite an, eloquent man, and \participated in. public. affairs, to ai considerable extent. |\He was-a liberal giver in all philanthropic movements, and took a deep, interest in the prosperity of. the Society, and besides special donations gave it. by his wilh a legacy of $20,000. for aiding ‘in, the. erection. ofa) fireproof building for the preservation of its valuable nies and, other property. Ihave thus: briefly sketched) the personal history of our Presidents tothe date of our apart Centennial Celebration. | - Would that I had. time and. space to make a’ dike record for, our members;,But.as: that: is impossible; I can only invite your attention to, the names which! jour roll,.of.past and, present associates) will’ give! you of those who have. been| deemed worthy of our fellowship; Both at.home-.and, abroad. men have been selected for this honor-who, had either already won-.or weres win> ning the highest distinctions)in Politics, Science, Litera ture, and. in the) liberal.and, useful Arts, and:alsoomen of; influence in the general walks) of lifeand in-what are called) “affairs,” : \Itshas\ thus) come 'to>pass ‘that sh Galckeey may ‘be Seale can! as presenting the’ most perfect type ofa Fraley.] 524 {March 15; body::devoted> to _ ef idea! of useful kabul edge.” 19 | | sw livio It has’ not forgotten either to recognize that women as well"as men ‘are inthe circle. of those to whom the’ world is indebted: for its’ progréss, and ‘that ‘same roll contains ‘the names Yof women’ of ‘eminent ‘and varied knowledge deemed woreny sn ar nik honorable ae eg a> sete hdr sedis shlactnpae “Let'me repeat here the ‘counsel given in 1843)’ by the Committee “of Arrangements’ and\ specially" én- forced ‘by a ‘resolution ‘then offered) by our late’ asso ciate, Joseph Henry, that it ‘should© beva’< matter of special concérn that the officers and’*members’ should keep constantly in mind that it is an ‘imperative’ duty to call every one’ to’ membership» who by worth, virtue and special fitness is’ calculated to’ benefit the’ world by what he can he oe to it out of the eats) ‘be stowed on him. | But I come now to a field on which I really fear e tread. My predecessor in Centennial’ duty shrank from it on account of its vast extent; and the years that have elapsed since he spoke have added i immense- ly to any adequate conception of what has been wrought in the civilized world from 1743 to 1880. 'T Shall, there foré, as he did, leave to others, to make special refér- ences to the various subjects into which the history divides itself and present only’ a surimary ot what has’ marked our human progress.” Peabevibisicitin’: As on ‘good government all the true advancement of society mainly rests, we may mark what'has beéh ac¢om- plished for the settlement and amendment of political institutions," The’ principles introduced into thé gov- ernment of Great Britait in 1688) ‘had tobe’ cultivated’ Set 1880.0! 525 [Fraley. and sustained by manyigrave struggles and. partial civil wars, before the complete settlement of the insti- tutions, of that.country, in nearly their present form was finally accomplished, by, the, ‘full: acknowledgment, of the House of Hanover as the) source! of sovereignty. That government is, the,only one in Europe that has not, been, changed, by violent revolution, and, its per~ - manence under wise provisions for general, amend- ment, seems,,now to be perfectly secured. Qur own Country in 1776, then thirteen Colonies, literally. strug+ gling under many political burthens and disadvantages, boldly,, struck for its. independence and freedom, and, after,a seven years’, struggle, conquered), the. full, acknowledgment of ,them,,, from, the, British; ‘King, They soon found that the, bands of a, Confederacy,,were, too, weak and loose for, a Nation, and.in a, peaceful examination of, respective rights, powers, (and, duties, the sovereign States yielded enough of. sovereignty to the people to establish a glorious and permanent Union, to be a model for, the world, of the adyantages of self-government,, and of adaptation to meet the wants of a constantly growing Empire. The thirteen feeble Colonies of 1776, have, grown to be thirty-eight powerful States... The three millions of people that won independence, are now swelled to more than forty millions, and;our Country, in Arts, Science, Manufac- tures, Literature and Arms, is acknowledged as a great power in moving and molding the world, France copying from the United States has within the century tried four, times. to, remodel her government in the interest of true liberty, and has three times relapsed into the bonds of despotism, but we may-hope that the fourth effort will be attended. with happier results, KOC Fraley.] 526 [March 15, The struggles for freedom have indeed: pervaded the whole continent of Europe with more or less effect in securing popular rights and: modifying ancient insti- tutions. War has had a great /hand)in accomplishing all this, and the needs of war have stimulated human aan and ingenuity. : Nearly the whole of the continent of South Ameries has been freed from monarchical’ rule; and the whole of the two Americas now seem destined to be republics on,-our model. | The art of war has been wonderfully improved, sad as its instruments have become more: powerful and complete its carnage and misery have been increased. But even in it we find compensations! by°a_ better recognition of the political _ rights..of) States, ».and also by a better regard for’ the laws of humanity and private. rights.’ If the political interests of mankind have been im- proved by these great changes, how infinite have been the advantages. derived from the mechanical inventions of the last hundred years,,\;,., The steam engine, the great, motor for nearly all of these as they now exist, has,emerged, as it were, from an, embryo, to almost a living being, weaving the gossamer threads of animal and vegetable life, with the same ease that it moves the mighty masses of ocean steamers, or wheels the countless trains of cars over the iron pathways of every continent. ii Machinery for almost every mechanical art /has be~ come nearly automatic, and) whether it) moves: the minutest drill, the loom, the printing press or the won- derful ponderous or delicate hammer, it is everywhere | a — SV Te <3 1380,] 527 [Praley. in-our-mostyactive life, the ay: a — servant of men: ri a fotiien were in| their infaniein hah inn eiisetoni of 1843 took place, now they count by hundreds ofthou= sands lof miles, they are: i¢ven threading the routes! of aneient,commerce,As they increase and multiply, so the world is knit more closely and happily together, and human, brotherhood: becomes: more intimate and»per- fect.'», Has science stood still: during all these years 2s! --The answer comes back to us through the telegraph, the telephone and the myriads of inventions: that depend-on :Magnétism and: Electricity. »It speaks‘also in, the, wonders» of Geology, Biology; Chemistry, /As- tronomy,» Physics, Metaphysics, Historical’ résearch, and:in’ Medicine and Surgery. | > But would these ‘results be ours if we had not had the use ofitypes and printing ?’ What revolutions they have wrought in our speech and thoughts. If the ‘world’s knowledge had depended on slow copyists, multitudes would never*have had one? bright intellectual ‘ray.’ *Our founder, Franklin, was a printer, and perhaps the most intelligent and skillful'‘of his day. Look at hissold press ‘as it'stands now in one of our'muséums, and compare it with one of those that’ to-day strike off'many ‘thousands ‘of copies) in’ an hour, and’ you can ‘form some conception of what types and printing aredoing for the promotion of ‘science and useful knowledge. ‘When’ the world was brought - to’ ‘this city in 1876, to interchange the exhibition of its natural’ andartificial: productions, we:had anrinstructive picture of, what»the: present civilized world is.) Mistory-enables us;to, penetrate in some degrée the obscurity and im+" - perfection of.ancient times, but we could: have no; other PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xvitt. 10%. 3P. PRINTED MAY 21, 1880. , ito) Fraley, } 528 [March 15, feeling, than that of real exultation, in, beholding;spread before us in our Great Centennial) Exhibition,our-pres: ent;world in all its strength and. grand proportions, and its ability to realize, for, mankind what ihe ancient poet wished for his people:....... |, o e2srooig sft bar . ‘*©O fortunatos nimium;suaysirbonasnorint? sy pon yl) I must forbear from ‘the further attempt to give ‘the marvels of what°1743 to 1880 reveal.’ Many of them take>date within my “own memory, ands I) amotruly grateful that» T-have' witnessed ‘the cai? of nach _ gifts ito ment We may be proud torfeeb sbi our Society has had’ full share in all this wonderful work) © s> 15m ; “Among our members have been found the States~ men, Philosophers, Méchanicians, Manufacturers, Doc- tors; Lawyers, Judges and’ Merchants who both here and elsewhere have been’ the workers in’ the’ fields. We have in our Transactions and Proceedings essayed _ to ‘give the world the benefit of their discoveries and investigations, ae in return ws have reflected honor’ onus. | ; | eh [ must now leave to my associates to tellus of the match of modern ‘science in’ all its forms, and to perfect the imperfect sketch ‘of it which I have given. | The Society published the first volume ‘of its Tran's+ actions in 773) and they now number \twetity-one vol- umes, with an ‘additional’ one, ready for publication. These volumes contain ‘the more elaborate ‘and impor- tant’ subjects that have been communicated and are to a considerable extent the. important records of scientific progress. The. publication, of the Proceedings was begun. in 1838, and they have now reached 104 parts. P i lee ele ee ei 1880. ERR 529 [Fraley. SP Haetically” they" for! many ‘things ° ‘stipersédé |! the ‘Prafisactions, being’ less' formal’ i#°theit’ character; and isstied' Git rapid! suiécessiOn, ‘eive the current contribu: tidns of oli members for! the advaneement of! 'scienee and the progress of original resea¥ehi) @!" 10! boneiy Our commemoration wouldnot be’complete without some, reference >to: the ;Sdciety as» a corporate, body. It; was incorporated by the General Assembly of Penn- sylvania,; March: 15,1780: “The preamble of) :thesact declares the objects: for ‘which sity is vereated \with\ con- siderable detail and then come the enacting: clausits .. which gave, its name and: powers, > uo 1 9W It is remarkable:|how (fully and clearly the powers are, expressed, and,the only;amendments or additions that jhave, been, made .to.them_,since.are, those which enable;ys to, sell and rent our realestate... It.contains, one.remarkable. clause , which, shows) the, jclear, and catholic, views, that, our, founders. held as.,to; the neu? trality of ,science,, for, it. provides that, all. correspond; ence, or, communications ,to.or from) ,the Society, shall have free transmissions, ea gsi the PEBVAD lence of war, , J In,4.785, the State granted < a, lot, of ground, to.,the Society, as,.asite,for \the ,erection of aj hall.),This lot forms a portion of Independence,Square, and itsdimen- sions. are,70,,by.,.50., feet... The; building -was begun in, 1785,and.it was..occupied,but), not. completely, finished | in.1789..,;The,.old minutes, to -which,] -refer any, curious. inguirer,* contain, many; amusing; as. well, # The plan for incdtporating ‘the Society! was ordered! ata ineeting? held (as) usual then) in the University, Dec. 17, 1779. Dr. Smith, Dr. Duffield apd Mier. Biddle being constituted a committee. |. Feb. 17,1780, inquiry began to be matle for Some idk of grotnd on wien th the Society might erect ~ building foratelisi1 won oved vorlt bag LO$ April, 11, donations were ordered to be solicited. Fraley. ] 530. {(Mareh 5. as instructive» memoranda'of the difficulties: of iget- tinge ‘through swith such an important work. s' Such difficulties'are| not unknown ever to the present genera= tion! “Butoatidast ‘they were ‘happily surmountedpand with but a slight changedn the basement °story; the building: stands to-dayin the’same:shape«as originally constructed. By several additional enactments the leg? islature’ authorized’ the Societyto renty’such'parts of the Hallas were: not needed for its own purposes;and under these we have always had ‘aconsiderable income fromirents:) The city of Philadelphia is now the owner of the whole of Independence Square, except the loton which stands our Hall» They purchased the Square froni the’ State in 1814, andvout of! the ‘sale, our lot wasire> sérvedsand)a prohibition made of: the) érection of any other buildings‘on the Square, than | those: which! «were then on it. Although:this restrictioncwas subsequently repealed, the historical associations *of ‘the Square! ‘are still so strong, that the power'to build has been on}y once exercised ‘by placing: a Cou rt‘ House on the Sixth Street ; iT Mort Vu i With iy _,1 ey ea 18 © Proposals were ade to the Library Company to unite in the purchase of Car- penter’s Hall, Resolved, that for the present, the Society’ 5 meetings, “Abani pe held i ip Care penter’s Hall, to which the Society’s effects were soon transferred, 5.0.) Then follow many minutes, of transactions, respecting a Silk Sogiety, ; per Fac; tory, an, Act of Legislature vesting the Silk Society stock and machinery jin the Philosophical Society, and much trouble, with the, HFA or, directors of, 88 Silk Society, March. 6,:1783, disenbouse moved the transfer of the ian and Pabinel, to some member's house, which, in time, resulted jin, his being virtual librarian and curator, and finally president of the Society. ;, Re Ee? April 10, 1783, enquiries were made of the, University at what rent ‘the Philo- sophical Society might use its house in Kifth Sureety 8 lodT The Society owned some ‘house in the,State House wart ee at a SRN was empowered to sell it, I» July an effort was made to raat a. 40/ by 48/. lot.in Fifth | rea en In September Mr, Willing’s Jot in, Third Street, was looked Bhd: 1 fin. wtetnnal In November a lot belonging to Mr, Powell was, examined. ao ,bavorg a eS ee ee ee eS ee . 1880s) tv 531 [ Fraley. front.io As earlyias 1835 the cityodesired: to» purchase the ?Hall;;and j.a:;fewniyears!safterwards» conditional - arrangements: were made for,such a; purpose but; they were! verbalvand informal, although intended on both sidesto be carried:out in good faith. s¢eile 5 sud ddiive y[Dhere was-at-that time a) large sii dion ‘known as the! Chinese Museum, situated ‘on Niatl! Street, South of Chestnint,-which contained the large -ands valuable collections: of «the Philadelphia; ;Museum,- —— founded by C), Wilson !Pealese wis ov 7 so Am arrangement \was niade, by: which hai ‘Sockets, should» purchase this. building, and lease partvofiit to the:\Museum) Company, and) tise the! remainder for its own purposes and benefit, It was supposed that-what the, City, would, pay for the old. Hall; would,enable, the Society to. buy and substantially pay for. the |\Museum property.( The Society made ‘the purchase, and) used all:its funds ini making the required, payments)! soqo% oo Theseofunds it was expected would be replaced) by the:imoney: to): be, paid | by» the) city; for the !old>-halh The price of the hall was to be fixed by referees, of Later in that month the committee iat that they could get Mr. + Jo: ‘Dun- lap’s lot in’ Filth Stveet for $1009. In December Mr. Hopkinson offered’ his” $!°E.-cor:. Seventh and Arch Street lot, near?’ the Observatory, 40” by 1007; for $1000.’ Tn fact ‘this (?) Tot next”? the OLservatory, eitlarged to 46” by 306’, was,'in the next February, patie of Mi. Hopkinson for £600, half down, half on mortydge! January 16, 1784, Mr. Hopkinson inaugurated a building excitement in the Sbeiety, and, ‘February 6th, the Society resolved’ that’ measures® be’ immediately take for erecting’ a’ stitable'building. ' Sibscriptions were ordered }' an’applita- tion to the Legislature for aid; and, ‘as Soon’as £1000 should be mice a committee to plan and superintend the ‘edifice. ~~ The Legislature responded to the ‘call, ‘and,’ March’ sth, ‘thé Treasitrer ae ‘the Society was ordered to’ draw on the "Treastirer Of the State. Sam, Vaughan, Mr. Rittenhouse and Mr. Hopkinson became a committee: At the’next Meetitig ‘the° Committee teported ‘a petition ‘of the Phildsdphical Society and Library Company conjointly to the Législatute, for’ twa" Tots of ground, one on each ‘side’ of’ the Staté House yard, © : Fries!) 532 [Maroli'46, which each party was to choose two, and in°case they could not agréé'a fifth referee’ Was to' be! chosen’ by the four referees’ and ‘his eonctirrence ih an‘awardby-any two ‘and ‘himself made thé’award’ binding and conelu- sive on both parties! It so/happened that when the four referees met threé would not‘concurinany award. The fifth man ‘was’ chosen’and -hé would not agree with any two of the’ soe Feferees arid so the’ project’ ‘of’ a‘sale fell throughi*! jon. s19w yort nwob jeso isdwomoe While these dszoudidas were in’ progress’ the imem- orable financial’ troubles ‘of "1837-1842, were in ‘full operation, the’ city declined to’ carry out ‘the conditional bargain ‘that had’ Beet’ Made? and the Sot ety” was plunged ‘into the depths ‘of financial trouble, ‘which for a‘ long!'$eason thréaténed® bankruptcy and ‘even ruin. The sequel of this melancholy” Story’ was’ that’ ‘the Museum building was’ sold under a’ paramount mort- gage of Comparatively sinall ‘amount’ against’ which’ it was supposed the’ Sociéty was protected: by a valuable lot on ) Chestnttt street, yO Mitseuiit prop. ‘ i ii OO fai di is) J AIO {n June a botanical garden was started on the Arch Street lot, which was sub- sequently rented to Mrv Rittenhouse, and finally, after'some-years, sold. In December Mr, Vaughan reported that the Library Company were didsatie: fied; and that:he! had presented to: ~ Legislature sage a“ petition of the fo losophical Society. © nino The petition'was' granted) anid the lot on Fifth Street ohtatnéd foi in ebraw April, 1785, it was again resolved to open Subscriptions’ for’ ceoreas ny building on the newly acquired ground ;) and in rom si Dens June, Mr, Vaughan presentet) the plan of ‘a: house, ansiadhaale slich aS was built; except that the north half was: to be: divided into tworrooms, ‘instead ‘of the south; and that vaults beneath the cellars: were discarded as too. costly.» November came; anch Mr; ‘Vaughan “asked authority | to! # oe the! resid walls against the frost, at a cost of 43 165, 6d, [LY nv ni did Sods 1786; » The following) November, Mr. Vaughan’s committee had expelled £365 tos. gay in building; and asked authority to protect it.against the winter, and to pat an “area aroandvit) ata cost.of £2 5s, E TONY pelo Mi 1787." ln May a subseription of £400 for carrying. on the. building was e Sg ae m peli? ee ee ee es A880}, 1) 533 (Fraley. erty, which; had to,,be, sold_first, and also by collateral securityin other. ,forms..,,.But all) these. protections failed jus, inthe day of fiery, trial, and, even-our-library and, collections, were. atone time levied on, by the Sheriff; ..It\,is to |,this., peculiar) crisis,,in our history that Dr. Patterson, so, feelingly refers. in ;his address of 4,843) with, hope but’ yet, with, fear... But. the good old ship. was; still, manned by, a. gallant, crew, jalthough somewhat cast down they were not dismayed. lt Slo} ., They; ,went,to. work manfully, gathered, their; ;re- sources. together, paid their debts, and, as it were; took anewand more, vigorous, start in, corporate. life, and to-day, the Society has a fund of nearly $60,000, the. in- come from, which in addition to its rents enabling it to defray, all. proper expenses and make liberal appropria- tions for its publications. dq It, is,.a,.source. of unalloyed _ pleasure to, -me, ito have participated in this successful restoration of our affairs, and that, 1 am able to answer, to 1843 : We have overcome and prosper. rr Before I close I must refer to a subject i in which my opened by the Society... Butiit was hard: work, getting) money. | Finally,in: No- vember, Franklin (who ywas' president) of the Society until -his death, in April, 1790) ‘camestoiits relief and lent it £500, to. finish: the lnuilding:./The»Street Commissioners objected to the height of the front steps, andothey were after- wards transferred indoors; > Plans for letting rooms to the University, to the Col- lege of Surgeons, to the Freemasons, and. to» Mr. John: Vaughan. -were \formed, and in some cases subsequently carried out; the Society retaining | for, its jown ase only the,south-west room, and the College of: Surgeons taking the south-east. ‘Butitewas not until the following summer— | » tilind Aug. 21, 0789, that a-resolution appears on the: minutes that; elec Franklin's health would:permit of his leaving his chouse, the Society» should meet / ‘not there, but in their own * Philosophical Hall.” Novtrace of a-corner-stone: laying cerémony canbe disebwoith' in ithe minutes.. ‘The accommodations must have been poor, fortwo. years afterwards-~ > March 4, 1791, it was resolved, that the south-west room shouldbe finished in avneat manner;\as soon as contributions could be raised bythe building committee. Fraley.] 534 S {Marehl, lamented, predecessor, Dr. Wood,took a very'deep in- terest It is: well’ known that ‘our Halb is: not? fire- proof, and: our valuable library and: other property is constantly exposed ‘to great :perily s:At his request: in 1866, a Building» Fund:was started; ‘to which he «liber- ally contributed, and the increase of which:he watched with great care. It did not reach: during his life toa sufficient sum to procure a fire-proof edifice. By his will he gave a legacy of, $20,000,to, aid the. fund,» The object that, he had at heart is not yet accom- plished. Let, us follow his good, example, and make a new Hall, such ashe Sees the enduring Monument of this, celebration...) Idsau ‘onisd ys12 Jord What: has been! the influence of) our aeene in) the United States?! We areithevoldest scientific: Society of the New World, but our correspondence with kindred institutions in our own country shows to what an ex- tent Science is now cultivated among us. Some ‘of them are beginning to hold théir centennial 'celebra- tions! and ‘others’ their semi-centennials.' Our sistér of Boston, the American Academy of ‘Arts’and Sciences, invites us to its Centennial in May next by a‘delega- tion. This’ invitation we have’ cordially accepted,’ and the reunion’ of Philadelphia and Boston will kindle glo- rious recollections of our Revolutionary history, ©) 010 We may truly rejoice ‘over the triumphs»of ‘the cen- tury that closes with this day. idt te | The civilized world is blessed with universal Peace, Scienceand ‘the Arts are moving irresistibly onward, Commerce spreads her sails in every’sea and:her cars on every land, the art. of Government is undergoing manifold changes full of. importance to the future. of the human race,and ;that.Charity, which is the greatest rey ntl A880. 56 | 535 (Gray. of allograces is doingats perfect: work. May the next Centennial céléebration jof \the Society have as muchito glory>in as “wei arecenabled to record of the oneojust terminated, and may!rg43 and 1980 /find our successors still in-the field oerainet for the: capita tesa “of Useful Knowledge.\3)) | dt bas udinimeo yIls * . ~* 7 : - Fant ib OF Dua i Q ry} I5SD1T JON : 33 ee iBOTs Ply 2. The Barty Botanists wt the Seeing oveg only mMooo8 3 (2 15°) P of ASA Grav, pings Mass. B OABTL OLS «een when the hoary head is Hain snow, orlzilg toomuaol/, oc The lifeds in the leaf?=sDrydenc £9 isi. Prof. Gray being unable to attend’ the inne iad respond: tosthe above toast, sent ithe eet letter ‘to WA Committee, which wasiread by: Mr? Price : | 1 y1dDM i? CAMBRIDGE, Mass., March 10th, 1880. To THE -Comrrree OF ARRANGEMENTS OF THE “AMERICAN d _Purnosopnicay Socrery ; | , Dear Sirs:-—I am. gratified and tempted by your kind j in; sitakion to the dinner of the, American Philosophical Society, in. commemoration ofthe one hundredth anniversary. of its corporate, existence. ,, 1. knew, that your) Society) was still more-venerable, but I-did not know. that;so mueh, of. its vig orous youth was anterior to the charter of incorporation. > oIt is:interesting: to: me that your) anniversary celebration occurs at this time, for it happens that: theseldest sister of your Society, the American Academy, ef, Arts and Sciences, is preparing to-celebrate the one hundredth anniversary of its foundation a:few weeks later, and) on the very day-ofi your foundation, viz. May:25thy As'one of the elder of the live ing Fellows anda past: President of this Academy; Tshould _ have been glad: to appear before! you asa representative of PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xv1Ir. 106. 8Q. PRINTED MAY 21, 1880. Gilman.) 536 [Marebl, the sister «institution, toobring) you! its»felicitations: and: at the same -time:to solicit) your interest im our:approaching commemorations; Isknow'that) it isyintended -to: invite the American Philosophical Society :/to:send,-us a delegation. But I find myselfiiunablesto leave: home at: sonia and so shall have to forego this pleasure)!s on) of {09 OF B189Y If L could have'-been:present»iti would) have’ sins sitive and pleasing to me tovaddress afew words tothe Philosophi- cal Society in commemoration of the distinguished» Botan- ists it has nurtured or fostered. A Jist' which begins with the name of Johu Bartram, the earliest! indigenous botanist of our country, and includes the names of Barton, Miihlenburg, Collins, Schweinitz and Nuttall, ought to suggest and: inspire some remarks which would not be inappropriate or/uninter- esting upon. the occasion: although ‘no doubt: others wall better fill the place and grace the occasion in which»I shall not. be able to, bear a, part, dT With many thanks for your kind ‘avitatien aa saith my best., wishes for, the, perpetual) prosperity of theAmerican Philosophical Society, [ remain, yours very. traly,, LO! 199d { vod ASA GRAY.) { rth DBO Dri 3. The alliance of Universities and. the learned. So- creties, . — Prest, D. C, GILMAN, Johns Hopkins, University, | | Baltimore, BUGE q * Die Weltgeschichte sicht aus sproedem Stoffen, ~~ bem Kin reines Bild dey Menscbheit zu gestalten.’++¢/edded.) 40) In response, President Gilmansaid: | Mr. Presipent AND GENTLEMEN ‘OP THE Soorety?! 0 0!) As a representative of the youngest of Amerie¢an | uni- versities, Lam happy to greet the oldest of American acad- 1880, J) 1 587 (Gilman. emies; and to. congratulate; the members of this association upon the|success which has followed its operations from the colonial days untilbnow. I congratulate youoom: beginning right and on keeping right through a century of incorpora- ted life, and:on the prospect: of a good: continuance ‘through years to come. As the eldest im ‘a family is Jooked up to.as a leader, so the eldest:in the! academie sisterhood is watched and followed: bya Jong line of younger kins © Your methods of work, your modes of selecting associates, your philosophi- eal discussions, and above ‘all. your publications of: import- ant» contributions to’ haman) kuowledge,' are: scratinized throughout’ the land.) Your progress has been, the progress of science; im your success the: country shares; im your cen+ terinial the academies and universities: of the nation rejoice, and to ppd future they look forward) with Drighs 4 antic Hatiodsdoidw oi aoiesooo of} 6 | od Lit s9ited - The sentiment to which you have asked a response sug- gests the reflection that in this’ wonderful epoch of intellec- tual’ activity, when light beams from such unexpected sources, on so many crypts, dispelling the shadows’ and ghosts with’ which they had been occupied, Universities and Academies stand like priests at the altar of truth, kesping bright | the coals from which the torches of research are lighted, Their objects are the same; perhaps WWaedd | there is a correlation of forces, and university heat, becomes aca- demic work. This at least is certain, that they are the most potent, agencies which. our, civilization possesses for the diseovery of trathy:s'\Whileitds: important that they should be .co-operative,) it; is als important ;that their methods,shonld, be individual, not, identicaly or, in other words, that, their distinctive; functions, should.not, be confounded... 1 take it)that ;the, prime, purpose, of the) uni- Gilman.] 538 [Mareh'15, versity»is-education) its secondary: object: is» research jowhile the converse is trueoof the! academy, which! shouldialways make, its major; task, investigation, / and wealth; but they need stronger and ‘closer combinations than now exist,—better sorganiza~ tion for the advancement of ‘learning. We may hope that: with reeurriug prosperity, increasing ‘vigor will be annate: in their academies and universities..100" (OU oven OW Sand ‘In such activities there’ may be’ emulation, but’ there should be no rivalry; for, as thé? forts which guard ‘the Chesapeake, the Delaware, and the’ Bay of (New York ‘sup- port one another, so these three great cities may Strengthen and ‘encourage eachother by the’ firm establishment of ie! stitutions for the protection and defense of society’ against’ ignorance, bigotry ‘and ‘pretense.’ Sure that the central city” of the trio, the intelectual and’ financial eetter of the Key’ stone State, will do its pat, +! veg ch in’ bymosien ris offer this seiitiment: “O'" - J -baoitk bip The American Philosophical Beiter anid’ the J Came of ‘Pennsylvania § ap they ie as a stelle ahistin throuvh' centuries to come. 7 dst a8 Ont DOIROTT 18805). 04 541 {[Hammond. 4. Our . who have passed away, f Dr. Ww. A. Hao, New Vor City. bi Plena fait a omnj ponent a -Erstetit ad finem longa tenaxque fides.” _In il Surgeon- General Hammond said : : on. - » Before coming on here I was ‘selected ‘by the members of a Scotch society to attend a dinner which was to be given’ upon the/anniversary of the birth or,death of Robert, Burns, and I, was)requested, to post, myself thoroughly. upon Scotch medical men ;, that) I-would, be required.to,‘respond .to,.the: ’ toast, \“‘The Medical Men of Scotland.” , I did, so... To!my: great disgust I found I had made a mistake in the dinner; that,/instead of coming off on Tuesday, it came |.off on) Wednesday ;so that, 1 come here rather filled with), ideas concerning Scotch doctors... Mr. Price said that. would not be,expected to make a mournful speech; \that/ 1, could) respond in the best. vein possible. I think we will all.agree. that we have much more regard. for,the man who. makes us: laugh than the man who makes. us cry, and, crying would, be greatly, out of place this evening. , | For the history of the dead of the American Philosophical Society, you. have ouly to. think ;for,.one, moment of those. remarkable men who have, passed ..away,,who., haye given _ their lives to.science, and were at the same, time members of. this Society. . Of them, have nothing to say, because.they, are familiar, to, you. |, But,,there are three or four men with, whom, L, was.well. acquainted, and, first, in regard. tomy, old friend, Charles B. Trego. I knew him, thirty, or) forty. years ago, | My, very. first idea; of any scientific, impetus was received from, that,.man. .1;saw. him. frequently, and he. treated me as a father would treat a son, and,the amount of = Hammond. | 542 [March 15, knowledge which I acquired from him at that time was far more than I have got from any other one person. Strange as it may seem in these days, Mr. Trego was elected to the Legislature. They do not send such men to the Legislature now ; and if they did, they would probably be entirely out of place. Mr. Trego and I were very frequently together, and I will go on loving him as I love my own father. He was not what could be called a jovial man. I recollect that I went to the Capitol at Harrisburg one day to hear the debates, and some western member was speaking without much re- ference to the matter before the House. Mr. Trego saw him and came over to me and said, “ Do you know what that man is talking about?” I said, “I have not the slightest idea.” ‘* Well,” he said, “neither have I; he is letting »the dark out on it.” | Then about Samuel Jackson and Joe Carson. What a remarkable man Jackson was. Paralyzed in both of his legs, yet I never saw anything but a smile upon his face. Carson was more grave, more dryly humorous. He’ once gave me a conundrum which was unlike anything I had ever heard before. I was then an assistant surgeon of the army, and rather more puffed up than Iam now. Carson said to me, “I have often noticed that assistant surgeons of the army are the knowingest military men in it; I have been thinking about a conundrum. As a military man, can you tell me the difference between a piece of roast beef and a fortification?” On my replying in the negative, “ Well,” said he, “I will tell you. a Philolo- gist, though it may: be ‘takem for) granted: thatyhe: never abandoned the pursuits, of Philosophy for those of Phi- lology, as: Seneca: in. the quotation upon, theo programme seems to assert was done by the wise men of his,day.: But philology in this age means something very different) from what it meant, when Seneca: wrote these» words, or-svhen Franklin’ presided: over the! deliberations of this Sodiety, whose Gentennial ‘we celebrate toanght. Dr. Murray, thie President of the, Philological Society: of England,’ ‘says, ina late, number of -the Independent, that \as: recently as twenty-five years ago, ‘English Philology was. in; its pre- scientifie babyhood;” ‘so that ‘Franklin, though ‘le wasnod mean Latin scholar and. knew. several modern. Janguages, could, not have played what would now be regarded avlead- ing role as a Vhilologist. Yet the illustrious;sage brought his philosophy to bear upon the English language at a point where many of the great. Philologists.are now concentrating their strength, namely, the reform) in.spelling. Not only did this practical, honest, economical printer, revolt, at, the unnecessary expenditure of timejand labor in setting up \the silent, letters and of paper and ink in printing; them,, but his philosophic, soul, was, vexed at, the. wild and, reckless spelling that obeyed no, law, and, could be, reduced. to, no order... He published.a dissertation upon. the subject, based upon these three eminently philosophical principles, (1) that there shouldbe no letter that, is not,sounded, (2) that, every letter should be confined to one, sound, and, (3) that, there should be. no distinet sounds in the language without letters to express them. ‘To. carry out his,reform he invented a new alphabet, contemptuously dismissing six of the present letters as useless and introducing, six new characters) to ex- =—P =. ae 18803} 014 | 545 Cattell. ; -press the sounds: not: already: provided: for. \ Im his letter to Miss Stevenson, .1768,.writtemin: the reformed: spelling. and with themew characters; he ‘disposes: in) his plaim common ‘sense: way of the: objections urged against-the new, depar- ‘ture, including ‘the very ones most frequently advanced: now. ‘But thegreat man, who handled the°lightning’ withosuch success, failed hopelessly in his encounter with the’ English spelling ; ‘and in his letter to Mrs. Mecum, 1786; he sorrow- fullyyadmits that “what is still called the dad) spelling! in English iss really the best, as generally conforming? tothe ' ‘sound ofthe letters and of the words ;” he also quotes, with undisguised: admiration, the conundrum “of Mrs. Brown’s housemaid, if yf don’t spell wife, what does itspell’?” and then’ abandoning all further: efforts: “to propagate useful knowledge ”:in this’ direction, he = ee as a spelling reformer. 0) | s ea ol61 gat \oThe great’ astronomer, David RieteaKUase Franklin’s sue- ‘eessor as President! ‘of this Society; was téo much’ ‘oecti- pied with tle heavenly bodies to: care much “about what owas’ going on upon the ‘earth; but ‘his suécessor, "‘Phoriias Jefferson, had’ ‘a persotial’ ‘and ‘practical ‘interest “in” ‘this ‘matter’ He had! to write ‘many’ messages 6 Congress. ‘This Ted him’ to a hore thorough ‘study of the’ language through Which these important” cottimunidations were made ‘tohis’ fellow-eitizens: “Pam! not stire’ that’ Jefferson was, itechnically | speaking, ‘a spellitig’ reformer. Having utider- ‘tukén’ to’ reform the’ old’ Fedéral party, lie-probably found His'hands fall; and declined ‘any more ebntracts in that Tine ; Duta dtitence ear the elose Of his’ celebrated! say Upon the Anglo-Saxon 'lineuage, written int 1798) 18 pleasitit’ tead- ‘Wefor the spelling Reformers now ; says he; “to express the Sounis ‘ofa language perfectly, every letter“of its alphabet F > Catteil.] 546 [March 15, should have but a single power, and those letters only should be used whose powers, successively pronounced, would. pro- duce the sounds required,’ and then he declares with an emphasis that would have rejoiced the honest heart) of Franklin, that the English spelling is farther removed from this state than that of any other language with which he was acquainted. He also asks in the same connection and with a cheerful confidence in the answer that must be given by all sensible persons, “if the English word cough were spelt cof, would that change the word?” Permit me to add, that although our third President did not do much to ad- vance the reform so dear to the heart of our,first, he did a great service to the English language by introducing Anglo- Saxon studies into the curriculum of our Colleges and Uni- versities. He made the mistake, pardonable in. those days, of regarding the Anglo-Saxon as “merely an. anti- quated form of our present language,” asserting that, if we “would remove the obstacles of uncouth. spelling and unfamiliar characters, there would be little more difficulty in understanding an Anglo-Saxon writer than Burns’ poems ;”’ but he was eminently sagacious in insisting upon “the necessity of making the Anglo-Saxon a regular branch of Academic education,” and was far in ad- vance of his time in giving to this study such prominence in the great university he founded.. But, with your permission, Mr. President, I will add that’ there are other members of the American Philosophical So- ciety who have become eminent as Philologists, though they have not been called upon by the Society to oecupy the high official position once adorned by Franklin and Jefferson, and now by yourself. We need only look around these tables to see them. The learned Professor of Hebrew in Princeton ro 1880.| 547 (Cattell. Theological Seminary, Dr. Green, who sits at my right, has no superior as an Oriental scholar in this or any other country ; and near him I see my old College friend, Mr. Ingham, whose graduation speech was delivered in Latin—the honor then awarded by the Faculty to the first scholar of the class—and although he would not, I am sure, allow me to name him among the specialists in the study of languages, Ioknow that by his philological studies at home and abroad during the intervals of a business life, he has proved himself worthy of the spurs he earned at Princeton College thirty years ago. I see also President Chase, whose schol- arly editions of the Latin and Greek classics are in the hands of all our College Professors; and Mr. Phillips, the eultured scholar, whose good work, both as a Philologist and Antiquarian, is recognized abroad as well as in Amer- ica; and Dr. Brinton, eminent as an authority in the aboriginal languages of our country, and whose learned contributions to our knowledge of the Indians have really done much to redeem the American people from the dis- honor of having broken all the treaties we have ever made with them; and I see at the farther end of the room, the genial and still youthful face of that veteran Philologist, Dr. Haldeman, the mention of whose honored name brings me. back to the spelling reform, for it was this eminent scholar who carried off, over a host of learned and distinguished competitors, the prize offered by Sir William Trevelyan in 1857, “for the best essay upon a reform in the spelling of English.” As often as I turn to the pages of this The- saurus of philological learning and :remember that it was written in Dr. Haldeman’s “pre-scientific babyhood,” quoad philologiam Iam. reminded of Iercules, who while yet in, his, cradle displayed such marvelous strength in Cattell] 548 [Mareh-15;' freeiiiy’ himself! from’ the monster’ which ‘held hime in sits; huge ‘coils.’ But that was probably a lying fubleoo What Dr. Haldeman did isW fixed fact; and | this Jearied pioneer! in? the ‘spelling. reforni claims, “and “with justi¢e,! to! be the’ first English ‘scholat who “can? honestly “usethe ext! ultant ‘line of Bryatity “I broke thé’ ‘spell*that ‘bound me.” Certainly, he and his learned coadjutors—for I do not know! of an eminent philologist who is not enlisted to'some extent? in this spelling reform—have browght ‘the ‘brightést Hopes: of Franklin and “Jefferson tothe port! of redlization! This T° concede heartily—but ‘also sorrowfully, for at my” time of life it ‘is horrible to'think of Tearing to spell-over! again. There was a time, T cofifess, when tiy zeal'to under go this ‘personal ‘tribulation for! ‘the benefit ‘of | posterity which ‘(it has been foreibly said) has neverconferred any? benefits ‘upon “us, was’ not ‘strong enotgh’ to keep Me fron devoutly wishing ‘that a kind? Providence would’ confound the counsels of? these 'ednapitators! against! the established’ disorder, at Téist until’ Iwas out of the'reach of their new spelling books.” Even now, T cannot help'expressing the be= névolent wishbéenevoléit to°rityself’ and my? eontempora- ries—that | this” every-way'desivable! “and! even necessary: reform had ‘come’ earlier (Ti wish!‘ that 2 Franklin” had! finished up the matter; and>that our patriotic forefathers onder his wise ‘and practical Ieadéiship Shad: snecesded it driving the bad'spelling out ‘of the country swith the dise comfited British. It really seems as if those long yeurs that tried’ men’s souls, Would ‘have been just! the yery best opportatiity to dispose of this vaxed questions! There was so much turmoil and confusion during the war; such pecuniary distress, such/afflictive social and political antagonisms that the misery, inevitable tothe generation thatoreforms’ th English spelling, would hardly have been noticed; and the ee 6 a en en ye 1880.fyc0 549 [Cattell people of the Colonies would have emerged from, this double, and) ‘synchronous, revolution|a, really. free and independent; nation upon a,sound: political, and. orthographical. basis} | OH) » But; I auust; not: lose, sight, of the,.text. yowshave given me, which. in connection, with. the,quotatiom from, Seneca, , suggests, more, than. the, spelling reform... Those, who,,are, familiar, with this epistle; of Seneca.to. his friend Lucilius,, cannot, hayve.failed) to, notice. the reluctance with, which he, admits jthat.the Philosophers, have become , Philologists. With..him philology meant the love sand pursuit of, science, and literature, A .nodle aim, But,.the. aim, of philosophy «was, higher;, it was, the; love and .pursnit, of. wisdom, sapientiz amor et adfeetatio, ashe defines it in another, epistle to. the same, friend, or as Cicero, in his De, Offciis had, already.defined it, sapentive studiun:., This wis, dom-—the ,sapientia.of, the Latins, and. the gegia of the Greeks—was, to, ail, these.thoughtful ;men, what. it, waste, the |-inspired, .writer,...“‘ the, principal . thing ;,’.the mater omnium| rerum, bonarum, says. Cicero; the ars vite,;adds Seneca; . To.turn away from, this high subject. in any direc, tion, was a descent, and, Seneca eould, not; without, sorrow record the fact that, what) was, formerly philosophy, bad now, become philology...; But. may not,.the modern Philologists. claim,to; have reascended these heights, where the, Philoso- phets.are gathered to) discuss their great questions ?; Phil- ology has;long,ceased, to be regarded, even in the popular, mind, as, merely a ‘curious, study of, words by, antiquariaus who delight in archaic or obsolete, forms, the ‘ Diversions.of Purley,” dm! theo search |, for, impossible. derivations,».or,.a learned, and» laborious | discussion of the changes of vowels and) consonants in which, according to, the igibe of -Voltaire, the vowels,,count tor nothing, and, the consonants. next.to i} Cattell.] 550 {March 15, nothing. Philology, from the modern: point of: view, is a thorough and comprehensive study not only of all languages and their literature, but of the science of language. This is to study man, for as.a distinguished authority says ; ‘‘there _is no nook of man’s mind or heart or will, no part of his na- ture or history, into which the student of language may not be called to look.” The Philologist therefore equally with the Philosopher, may use the oft-quoted line of Terence, hu- mani nihil a me alienum puto. We continue, indeed,.to send our boys to the schoolmaster that he may teach them Latin and Greek, for the scoffing of this practical age has not. made us undervalue this thoroughly tested and ap- proved means of cultivating the youthful faculties, nor the opulent results, in maturer years, of a familiar acquaintance with the languages in which is contained the literature that has quickened the intellectual life of all cultured nations. But the study of languages in this age has more in view than mental discipline or the ability to translate easily and correctly the classic authors, Its aim is not merely to know the thoughts of men which have come to us in many languages—a great heritage—but to know also the laws of mind in which all language is grounded. Words are things.. The Philologist studies his word as the Botan- ist his plant. He inquires not only to what uses it may be applied, but by what laws it grows. Words not only con- tain thought but they are—merely as words—the product of the laws of thought. To study these laws is to study mind; and does not philosophy reappear in philology, which thus comes to study with it those great questions which lie nearest to the lives of men? It would, perhaps, better suit another time and place to show how what I have said as to the study of those words which have grown up between 1880.] 551 [Cattell. man and man, is also true ina most significant and solemn sense of the great WorpD, which was in the beginning with God, and which conveyed to man the thoughts of God. For He was not merely a teacher. He was himself a reve- lation. We must not only know what He taught ;—it is life eternal to “ kKNow Hi.” In the retrospect, which our celebration to-night suggests to us all, we must as American citizens rejoice in the progress which the study of language, in whatever light we view it, has made in our own country during the past cen- tury. I venture to say that never in any other age or country has the great and noble end of this study been more in- telligently apprehended or have its methods and appliances been more complete. To enumerate the really valuable text books and publications upon this subject that have appeared in America, even within the last quarter of the century, would be to recite a list as long as the catalogue of ships in the Iliad. The work done by the American Philological Association is in the advanced line of comparative philol- ogy. Our colleges vie with each other in the intelligent application of the latest results of philological investigation. The London Atheneum, an authority in such matters, says that the studies of a philological character carried on in one of our Pennsylvania colleges, “are not surpassed in thoroughness by those which we are accustomed to associate with German universities.” And then the great scholars who have arisen among us to give lustre to the age! In this presence I need not name them; but I beg to give one illus- tration of the progress made in American scholarship. Mr. Jefferson, in the essay from which I have already quoted, alludes to the few printed works in the Anglo-Saxon then published, and confesses with patriotic grief. that PROC. AMER. PHILOS. 80C. XVIII. 106. 388. PRINTED MAY 22, 1880. Cattelhy. | 552 [March 16, | thesscholars-of America could donothing to enlarge the!sup-+ ply: oHe-then'says,“tthe publication»of:theineditedo>manu~: scripts which exist in «the libraries: of GveatoBritain only,; must; depend on the learned ofthat nation’? Butletinie say) that: it is an-Americanschiolar-who, during thepast) year; hhas» been requested by the Early English Text! Society of don+ don toedit,asioneof;the seriesvef its) publications; the‘fa- mous Anglo-Saxon manuscript—Alfred’s translatiom of Oro- sius+now inthe library of Lord Tollemache ! I need seareely> say that the name of this great American scholar is Francis A. March; whose Comparative Grammar of the Anglo-Saxon lans guage isa text: book in the/universities of England and of the! continent.o:'The mention of his'name: leads mealso:to wefer! to thesrecentienlargement of the:curriculum of langaages im all our colleges iby :the:introduction/cof :the»philological, study? of the! English; not:as belonging to the’ department of; Rhetoric or of English Literature or of Belles Lettres; but: to the department of Language equally with the Greek and Latin, for in this Dr. March has been a pioneer, and the chair which he occupies, uniting inwone professorship) the study of the English language and, Comparative Philology, was the first of the kind established in this or in any other country. nea? Lilia as pen Let me say further—for the: presence ‘of Dr? Gilman} the learned and accomplished President of! the Johns; Topkins’ University, reminds us of the fact—our college graduates are no longer dependent upon the universities of Europe for ad. vanced. instruction ,in the study of languages, Of, courses, foreign, travel, and even residence abroad, fora limited time, are still valuable for the young graduate, and: there are great, acholars and, teachers and magnificent libraries, in, Europe ; ‘ but he is no longer actually compelled to go abroad for, post-graduate instruction. All the great colleges and uni- | 4 q 1880.91 553 (Brinton: versities of: own country now) offer courses of special»and advanced) studies, Im most ‘respects vequal- and in isome sus) perior to those found | inethe oldest and the best wniversi- ties of Kurope ; and it:is hot)invidious to say that the post- graduate; courses of study offered ‘by our: sisi sister’ of Baltimore lead allthe rest.. i - Bat, Mr. President, I inust: not trespass farthe upon thes time’ allotted: to: these speeches: Already I fear that some of the gentlemen at these tables have called to mind, and with» grave torebodings, that: the original meaning of Philology, was!“ love of talking ;”) and it: is, perhaps, something ‘more than a coincidence that Seneca inthe sentence’ immediately. following the quotatiom given upon the progratime to-night, quotes: the: well known: phrase of Virgil sugit: irreparabile: tempus: © 'These ominous words contain a bhint-of) special sige: nifi¢ance’ to atter-dinner speakers:; and so. [| bring» these» remarks at once to'a close. 193 to 10. 9r10ted J bas slosi®) oilt diiw vils: vil}. bre .199nK ig {ff TOr ,fI7BU BT Sony's mame, 1 4BOtg O90 doidw sisde olidtl ov “Dr. DANret G. BRINTON, SF osar-ongr ee 4octo BS: Jil % POA th thing which Adam had been posed to name, "Pope. ofr, Brinton, in, response, said3) oo iy) yoo oon dod Mr.PRESIDENT AND GENTLEMEN? | Dove! gatooos bas bearss! “Turisin oto respond to the toast which has been propdséd, ha feel I Houle not insist before such an ‘assemblage as this’ on the paramount importance of names. Whatever philosophy’ people ‘many theoretically advocate, they are. ‘essentially ndminalisis in daily life. They’ attach’ more ‘value to! thé naine than’ the thing. The writer of fiction thinks’ his work: half awn pa he has’ discovered a + bee title, a ‘aieaby iii Brinton.] 554 [March 15, name for the infant of his fancy. A bad name has hanged many a good dog, and a good name has saved many a man who would have been the better for the hanging. Such opinions are not irrational. The name alone has perennial life, it perpetuates existence when all else’is gone, on it alone hangs the fame of heroes and the glory of the great. The name is the subject of thought and speech. With it begins the first glimmer of knowledge, as we are reminded by the sentiment attached to this toast. In the first essay of his new-made mind Adam named the beasts of the field, both small and great. , Names applied to institutions have another‘and peculiar significance. They reflect the purpose and object of such in- stitutions, they hint the hopes that gave them birth, they figure forth the ideal which is to be the goal of effort. T invite you to study the name of our Society in this sense, to seek its original significance, and perchance thus to learn the purpose which our revered founder had in mind in bestow- ‘ing it upon our association. For it is probably not unknown to any of you that it- was Dr. Franklin himself who stood godfather to the infant fraternity, and one hundred and thirty-seven years ago suggested for it the name it still is known by, The American Philosophical Society... In his cireu- lar of May, 1743, this is the style and title he proposed, » Like all that he did, this name was the result of mature consideration, and the motives of his choice may be divined from his own words and the scheme he proposed. He named it American because he expected its activity to be oecupied mainly with the New World, it was organized, as he said, to * promote useful knowledge among the British Plantations of America.” His luminous eye foresaw the vast additions to human knowledge which this then unex- eae OO 1380. } 555 (Brinton. : plored continent would furnish ; he icnew, what other men only guessed, the capacity for marvelous: development that lay in those colonies scattered on the virgin marge of an unknown world; with a sublime faith that partook of pro- phetic inspiration, he set to work to build for a future which even the sanguine deemed visionary. In the name he may also have conveyed a limitation as well as an extension ; he may have hinted that the subjects of research with which this Society should occuyy itself should be those in some way relating to its surroundings ; that it were well to leave to others the pursuit of investiga~ tions into classical and medieval matters and into localities of old world note. _ This leads me to the character and purpose of the inqniries he designed to foster by this organization. They are signi- fied in the word Philosophical. 3 » A century and half ago this term had a wider meaning than is current now. Bacon’s definition was still in vogue. That great thinker divided philosophy into three branches, divine philosophy, in’ which “the contemplations of man penetrate to God,” natural philosophy, which covered the whole field now embraced in natural science; and hunian philosophy, under which was included what we now know as psychology, social science, political economy and the like. “It seems to me that Franklin must have had this very definition of Bacon’s, with its threefold divisions, in his mind when he composed his circular of May, 1743, in which he first: projected and named this Society. With wording drawn from the early verses of the book of Genesis, he de- fines its mission to be “to let light into the nature of things, to increase the power of man over matter, and to multiply the conveniences or pleasures of life.” Clearly this is but a Brinton.) 556 ' [Marehels, free -and>popular, rendering: of: Bacon’s scholastic language 5 and» obviously. therefore, ‘Franklin; dvished this Sveiety:to meet, in:the fullest senses the Fequirémentis: of the title:philo- sophical.| \ All. that, pertains tooman and nature are:the legit mate subjects ofitssinquiry, providing-they can bepplied to some useful end. || Moreover; with )that) practical wisdom for which -he) was: famous, his! notion ‘of utility -was::mot limited to, dry atid: hard applications. : He.recognized >the pursuit.of the pleasures of lite:as |a: becoming: and worthy subject’ for. philosophical: research. He orecommended! it specifically to his associates,as a desirable object of learning. o Tf we pass from the’ Baconian to the more strictly techui- cal meaning of Philosophical, we shall’ find other matter for our thoaght.'The philosophical’ mind is:one earnest if the love: of knowledge." But that knowledge is ‘of ‘a pect liar kid.) Tt is not) the accunrulation of detached ficts's it is not mere erudition and extersive learning.” Tt is that main ner of knowing which Bacon in a famous aphorism calls true knowing,” knowing through ‘principles ‘and laws, knowing through causesic\ Veréseire est per ‘eausas scires’ This’ itis which gives facts their real value,this it iswhieh transforms thegrains of knowledge into the peatlsof wisdom: Thehighest etfort of thought is to pass from the special ‘fact to the wen- eral law, from ‘the experiment to'the prineipley from’ the eoncrete'to the abstract; and i ame i tint sophical knowldédge of things. : qqs Ylidgile dnd. need “To achieve such a knowledge; to baila it oti'a firm forte dation, can only be done by tniting the reviilts' of many bs servers und coniparing them in thé light; one of “the others. Henee it is essential that a’ Philosophical’ Society should ert brace a wide variety of ‘scholars, éach of ability: in his special pursuit! It shoukl He . papas fed from the conttol if MVviTrJont aon 1880. 5o7 [Brinton. of specialism!;.it should cover ithe whole*field of observation and not: be dominatedyby one part of it; by one department of study or thought, Franklin: framed the constitutiowof the association to fulfill this meaning of theword). The mem- bers were to be,chosen: from all; the learned pursuits; ‘they were to communicate'to eachother such results and°eonelu- sions:as/should be of ‘benefit to allj not: mere details of *their specials lines;;and the results to be: published were :torbe confined to: abstracts:and papers “of public advantage? "9 1) Ihe pursuance of this. plan, Franklin provided: that the minimum number of active members should be sevenjeach of whom was,to pursue a different, branch; of study. oOue! of . these, was designated. as a ‘* General Natural, Philosopher,” and.under this title it appears. to me he had clearly;in:view the formation... of ,a,, class, of, thinkers, which’ haso beén earnestly) advocated, in: this, day. by: Comte sand | Herbert Spencers) that is,a class who shall nnite together the results of the different specialists in science under broad philosophi-+ cal schemata, and weave them into.a system of knowledge eo-extensive..with. observed facts, and, subsumed under the widest possible generalizations, i? » In, this; way alone do the ‘ain oenatalila details of science: become, available to. the public good, and manageable by; the.general. intellect..; At. the, date of the) originivof this Society, the need of such an. appointment must have been but slightly apparent; but now, that the details) of Specialties are, becoming day. by day more, technical, more abstruse, and. more, remote from even general, scientifi¢ language, the need is; urgent...The danger .is constantly present that the pursuit of a: narrow path, of investigation, which, however, demands the most)strenuous labor, to follow out, will warp, the thoughts from jthe,broad views,and,com- mon motives of human culture. = f Brinton.} 558 [March 15, Finally; Dr. Franklin,called the .organization.a Society. Nothing is more impressive in the biography of this great man than the profound appreciation he had of the benefit of uniting men together to accomplish “a purpose, of the value of free combination, of voluntary co-operation in social and national life. This idea lies at the basis of all modern, as dis- tinguished from ancient progress. In the classic periods we read of the master and his disciples, of the noble and his retainers, of closely united classes and callings, but of nothing which corresponds to a modern scientific or literary Society. Such an institution belongs toa period when the sacredness of the individual is recognized, when an equality of knowledge | overweighs the difference of wealth or birth, when all are wil- jing to take off their shoes as they enter the temple of Truth. One of the earliest public results of Franklin’s life was the gathering together of his “ ingenious acquaintances ” into the well known “ Junto.” ‘The fundamental principles of the Junto were three:—to be free from prejudice on acount of profession or religion; to desire the welfare of mankind in general; and “ to love truth for truth’s sake.” Whether our Society was or was not an outgrowth of this Junto, undoubtedly it was the intention of the philanthro- pist who created both associations, to inspire both with the same grand and holy principles of toleration, good feeling and sincerity. All that tends to these ends would surely be~ consonant with the name we assemble under and the projects — of our founder; and certainly an occasion like the present, © which brings us together to recall the worthy labors of our predecessors, to extend to each other the social courte-_ sies of life, and to express our aspirations for the continued advance of the Society in the grand career which was from its _ birth marked out for it, does in a significant manner meet the requirements of our name and the objects of our association. 1880.] ; 559 | (Snowden, 7. The need of an elevated and permanent civil service, A. Loupon SNOWDEN, Esq., Superintendent U. S. Mint. « Oh, reform it altogether.’’—Hamlet. ‘In response, Mr. Snowden said: I am honored, Mr. President, by your call, and doubly so by the cordial manner in which it has been received by the gentlemen of the Society, and heartily wish it were in my power to repay your kind partiality by something worthy of your consideration. It must be a pleasure to all the members of the Society to be present upon this interesting occasion, not alone to dis- cuss the good things provided by the thoughtfulness of the Committee of Arrangements, but to partake of the intellec- tual feast which has been so bountifully provided. You have been pleased sir, in presenting my name, to as- sociate with it, the names of three of my predecessors in the management of the Mint of the United States in this City, who were also presidents of this ancient Society, which has embraced in its membership, and upon its rolls of honor, some of the most, illustrious names in letters and science which the last century has produced. The three distinguished gentlemen to whom you were good enough to refer, David Rittenhouse, Robert Patterson and Robert M. Patterson, were, in their day, citizens and public officers who conferred lasting benefits upon the publie service, and who were, in all the relations of life, examples worthy of imitation. David Rittenhouse, who succeeded Benjamin’ Franklin, and preceded Thomas Jefferson, as President of this Society, was wisely selected by Washington on the passage of the’ Act of 1792, authorizing the establishment of the Mint in PROC. AMER. PHTLOS, soc. xvilI. 106. 37. PRINTBD MAY 24, 1880. Snowden.] 560 [Maren 15, this City, on’ acéount of his eminent scientific knowledge and great mechanical skill. He superintended the erection of the Mint building’ on Seventh ‘street; saw “to: its’equip- ment in machinéry, to the perfecting of its organization, and, in 1793, issued thé first coinave of the Republic. ‘Little did he dreani in that dayof small things, that in less\'than fifty years, the one cumbersome screw press then in aséejand capable of executing all the coinage required) at the’rate of about ten or fifteen pieces a minute, would give place to the steam togglejoint ‘press witha capacity of from eighty to one hundred pieces to the minute, and that im much less than one hundred years,over thirty/of those grand coining presses, with. largely inereased, capacity and power, would. be kept thundering night and day to execute the coinage demanded by law:and by the wants of) the people.) of) of boliaus Robert Patterson, the fifth President of this Society; was called to the management of the Mint by President J effer- son in 1805. > He had ‘been honorably connected» with» our Revolutionary’ struggle, and» subsequently was a Professor in the University of Pennsylvania; conspicuous for his learn- ing and thorough administrative ability: ‘ | Robert M. Patterson, electedthe' eighth Prosidlentiof:this Society, was a son of Robert Patterson, to: whom [have just referred, and suceeeded Dr. Samuel Moore in: the Mints!» ‘He graduated at the University of Pennsylvania, and ‘sub- sequently prosecuted his studies ‘in “Europe. (‘On ‘His: return to Philadelphia, he was elected Professor i our University, Was Vice-Provost, and’ filled, successively) the! Chairs of Nataral Philosophy, Chemistry and Mathematics!’ In 1828, he became a Professor in the Universityof Virginia, from “which he was transferred to the Directorship of the Mint in 1885; in whieh position he remained; rendering most ae- Se a ee 1880,} +.) 561 [Snowden. ceptable. service, until,1851, when foiling henth, induced him. to retire from publie lite. It were well, Mr,.President, for, the honor pear profit of our country, if high public station were always.as well filled, and, sacred public trusts as faithfully administered as,in;the instances to which, by/your courtesy, I; have, been permitted to.refer. | io This. spiel tes: to the. ‘services: sia by;, shops dis. tinguished, public officers brings me, very-naturally, to, the consideration,of| the theme you have. been pleased to assign me this/evening, to wit: is 5 | OTHE NEED ‘OFAN ELEVATED AND PERMANENT) CIVIL) SERVICE. » “This is a’ practical and important’ question, touching very Closely the ‘highest and: best interests of our Country; and entitled to the a attention of every» mpitirie citizen. ; seg oN dither! sits proprieties of this occasion nor: ryour, eikiibed ‘would justifyan elaborate or exhaustive discussion at my shands: ‘| What»I shall; therefore, with your leave, submit, -will' be but a brief reference: to the most; ‘obwious points that present themselves in a-rapid glance at-the subject. » | ei In the: minds ‘of ‘all thoughtful and,-patriotic, men; there sean ‘be:no' doubtias to the great advantage resulting fromthe elevation of our civilservice above the control and influence of mere partisan interference. The battle to be fought; be- fore.the triumph of this important principle. is assured, will Dbejsharp and, well contested at every: point, although no; one jshould despair of the.result, m, view, of the.generaland_in- _ereasing intelligence: of the paren now, DONDE ‘brought. to hear upon, the question, ;. 1) 5, te Sed ond «| Of lateyears,: public, onteatien bis ae tc Siceuhads to the subject, but, as was,to, be,expected; it, has; met, the most Snowden.] 562 [March 15, determined opposition from the representatives ofall parties. Every weapon that sareasm, ridicule, and falsehood could forge i in the workshop of selfishness, has been hurled! agit its ‘advocates. And yet it must be: confessed that the g rreat- est injury inflicted, has come ‘from pretended friends, wh, under that garb, have attempted to. accomplish ii enda and thus have brought ridi¢ule upot the: eauise. aol D “Nevertlieless, steady advance has béen had Within 64 past few years, and some Todgment made in ‘the thinds’ of the people. et tedhie taonrebus, That there is’ too much foolish, intemperate, and unjust dentinciation of ‘our present ‘service there can’ be°tio doubt! If we were to beliéve one-half that is ‘written and spoken On this’ subject, we ‘must conclude that but’ few, if — honest oF honorable then are’ éngaged in publie affairs.” itt This tendency to carp and cavil at, and criticise all ai engaged in the public sétvice; is stid’'td Be a’natural ‘out- growth of our free institutions, which makes’ every citizen a censor. But whether this be trae or’ “not, ithe fact is Hever theless patent; that’ from’ thé very orgiinizition of ‘our Gov- ernment, there ‘has been toré or Tess\of this sort of thing prevalent. Even ‘Washitigtdny the most illustrious Of AI our éitizens, if not the thost Wustribus Mai of allithe world, was hot exempt; nay, onthe Gontrary, in spite of! his inva uable services to ‘the country, his ‘Hobility of°soul, arid’ his tratiscendent patriotism, he Was’ subjected to the most Vid- lent, bitter, and unreasonable Pires son under" it’ pyiais from public life!) 9 on roqent aid 20. soit ‘It was fashionable’ then, ds! it G8) How, ‘dhiong certain ¢ramblers and inconsiderate persons, to dénoutice ‘our civil kervice ‘on all decasidns!” They do Hot fake the’ trouble! to obtain reliable ‘facts’ upon which’ an’ intelligent judgement 1880,) pe 503 fShomden: may. be, formed,.as, touching the general service, but are prone to. take, isolated instances of wrong-doing, and base their opinion of the whole service thereon. That this is a most ‘irrational and unjust process from which to arrive at a sound conclusion, there can be no 0 doubt, and yet it is the usual mode. . These grumbling pessimists who, find no “good in, 1, their own country. or times, are very often least, fitted, either by cultivation of mind or purity of character, to form « a ) sound judgment of their fellow men. , Dismissing, this class as. worthy, of. no, farther attention, it must,be admitted, that. although our civil service fairly . represents the average moral, and. intellectual, status of our people; it, can nevertheless, be elevated and rendered more - eflicient. by means which are simple in themselves, and not difficult, of application, , When I say. the meaus of avcaraplishing this desired sk are simple and easy of application, I should say, they are so, provided, the people haye courage and patriotism enough, to, demand_of their political teaders, that, our, civil service uust be permanent—promotions coming through ficiency, and the tenure of office: dependent, upongood behavior. It, will not do.to simply incorporate. these ideas. or principles into the political platforms, of the, parties, as catch votes, to be for- gotten.after elections,are lost or won; but let our civil Ser- yice.be, organized uuder, the sanction of law, as.are the, mili- tary, and; nayal, services, and thus secure a permanent, appli- cation of this important principle, no matter how, often administrations change, or parties succeed to power, . That the law,should bind all, parties in this respect—if the, prin- ciplejis,good-—must be quite apparent...An attempt.on the part,.of any administration, to establish such a wholesome - Snowden.] 564. [March 15, system Without the binding force of law to: sustaitt’ it, ean only hope for partial and ‘unsatisfactory Spied no" matter how-earnest and honest may be the éffort.” lefliea € It is doubtful, indeed; if arly ‘adniinistration is song enough to enforcé the reform against long established préce- dent, and thé selfishness Of partisan mainagers, Yinless: forti+ fied and strengthened bylaw: oo. ts soivisa odT ‘The ‘reasons ‘are’ manifold why thé ‘policy, as’a mere’ad: ministrative measure, is likely’ to bea failures: First; if for no other reason, because! it ‘would be looked “pon ‘as afi ephemeral effort” or experiment, likely“to. disappear with the administration, ‘if ‘not break down before it termitiated: Second, because as such, it would be constatithy assaulted With a view to its abandonment; ‘whereas, if ander the sanction of the law, if would be accepted 4s a fixed faetiand remain’ practically ‘unassailed 5’ and "Third, bécause it! would have no binding force’ upon’ succeeding’ Presidents, ‘who could and’ probably ati nie overthrow in a day the work of years. : VHIG .Svitieog & asw oll President Hayes will éver be ‘remembered fora’ noble effort in this direction, and although’ ‘much good has been accomplished, yet, from the: ‘causes T have enumerated, and others, results ri ag and Hope for have’ not been eps realized.” bat dod tle General Jackson is credited with the declaration that; “to the Victors beldng’ the’ spoils,” and Whether he ‘or William L. Marcy is’ respotisible for the utterance) there ‘an! bd! Ho doubt that Jackson was the’ first President who broke dowh the old tentre of Offied, hated ‘down. ‘to ‘us! from our Eti- glish ancestors, and recognized by Washington and his ¢on- patriots, as of the highest value inthe’ administration of public affairs. L998 ol daot ace eee 1880], iy} 565 (Snowden, » Lt is well,to remember, however, that whilst. General Jack- son struck a, fatal blow, at.the civil service, and prostituted it to selfish partisan ends,:the;service itself; was, largely, re- sponsible for, the blow. that.was given. - 47 Although existing,by English and pete precedents, it) was not. restrained by law, within its legitimate sphere, 5 The service at that time was Jargely, composed. of, those who. differed politically with Jackson, and as it was.a period of bitter.partisan, strife, they did all in their power to hamper and. embarrass, his; administration, This was neither wise nor prudent, and.exhibits to us. the. fact, that, with the ex- ception of the tenure of office, the service was. badly organ: ized, and conducted..Instead of performing quietly and efficiently, its legitimate, functions, without, regard to, the change; im..the political, head of the government,. it, was violently partisan,and used its;entrenched position to defeat the measures advanced by, the President. * 2 ‘o There owas, therefore;.some excuse for Jackson’s .course. Ile was a positive, brave, although sometimes an indisereet, man, and accustomed, from, his habits of thought and train- ing; to. strike, an enemy whenever and: wherever, he could find him, He struck his Whig adversaries, fortified in the civil service, aud paralyzed. them, as a power against him- self. But in doing so he inflicted an evil upon his country which, has widened and deepened as the years have followed. Had; -Gen,,Jackson, succeeded in applying a remedy for the ‘gyil,justly complained of, by such, legislation as would ,pre- yent,a,civil officer—as. the unwritten law. prevents officers inthe army, and navy—from participating in partisan strife, he would have accomplished the immediate. purpose in view, and left to the future, this, as the brightest page in, his re- markable career. bared Snowden] : 566 [Marek 15, o1The primary and. paraniount’ object. of all service) is, to promote that which. is best for the people at large,without distinction of party ; whereas, under a corrupted system, it is customary to consider all the offices of the country. as the common. property of the party in )power, to be distributed to their partisans as: rewards for) services ‘rendered, or as implements. to. be used for future» party purposes. No one will deny that this is:the fact, and yet it isan utter perver- sion of the true and, legitimate objects for which.the offices were créated..; ) fii 7 a1 onei/, botools ai - ‘The number of officers or places-under the government is quite insignificant in comparison with the population of the country, and it is of very little moment to the? great bulk of the people whether John Smith, Jones, or Robinson hold office or place; but it is of the highest importance ‘that whosoever does hold the same, be skilled, enaneueed a and trustworthy.” ehies ) to cree - Tow are these essential qualities to be obtained? Is it by rotating a man in or out of office for a political purpose, or‘in having his continuance in place dependent upon. his ability to carry.a precinct) or a ward convention in partisan contests, or, on the contrary; are not the offices more likely to be well and acceptably filled by haying those holding them understand that.so, long as they are honest, attentive and faithful in the discharge of their duties, they will «be retained and promoted for meritorious conduct when an opportunity, presents ?;The continuance of a faithful and intelligent officer increases his opportunities! for usefulness to the public. One of the evils, and not a small one, attend. ing our present defective system is, that we are, by ourshort tennre, constantly put to the inconvenience and expense of - educating new men. |, | , Dobaodss eT 1880.J) 04) , 567 (Snowden, | A change in the national administration ofthe ;}Govern- ment, especially where; one political «party is succeeded by another, must of necessity be followed: by a;change in such Jeading :and>important) public positions:as reflect: the pur- poses and policy of the party in power, but: in» the name of alli that is reasonable and proper why should:a change in the administration necessitate a perfect upheaval in all our civil service, from the humblest laborer to the most skilled expert, mechani¢ or accountant? Because anew President is elected, is no reason why a skilled workman. in the Mint, an/intelligent, well trained letter carrier, or any other faith- ful employé/of the Government should, be removed. ; They have been. educated) for the service at the public expense, their education and equipment is’ the common. property of the people, and,should not be thrown away to gratify — san. selfishuess. What man of business, banker, manufacturer'or meréhant would think of adopting such a short-sighted or pernicious system in his own business? I know of no such man. » » And why should we not apply in public affairs the same common sense principles and rules that: govern in the ordi- nary pursuits of>life? “It seems to be so reasonable and proper:a course that I cannot conceive ofa good argument against its adoption. Because the people, as ‘is their right, see fit to change the administration of national affairsoon - aecount ‘of!:important) public questions, such as' the tariff, finance, state right encroachments, or centralization, omany other issue that»may arise, is no reason why all the faithful und skilled employés of the Government; from’ the; lowest up, should be turned ‘out to give place to inexperienced suc: cessors, whose education and equipment, for the service: is attended with discomfort, errors, and loss:to the people.” PROC, AMER. PIHILOS. SOC. XVIII. 106, 3U.. PRINTED MAy 24, 1880. Snowden;] 568 [March 16; » Without going deeperintothe subject, incall its bearings; or-trespassing farther-upon: yoor kind:indulgené; I think. it must be admitted that.a civilservice based uponso illogical and uncertain\a :tenure,»is defective in. the extreme, and should: be replaced» by oneoresting upon commonsense, \as manifested inthe usual: business affairs, of Jife. The opposi- tion to a change from the present to a better system, comes principally:from those leaders of both parties who,claim that patronage ‘is (an) important. partisan, weapon.; «But ) I\am clearlyof. the opinion: that) an, honest ‘and fair! test ofsthe new system would satisfy;even these persons, that) they had. over-estimated patronage as: a) factor in partisan) contests. I think our political leaders would discern, likesmanyyan intelligent man ofthe South has, by the greati lessomof the war, that, whereas he formerly leaned upon slave.labor—felt he could not exist without it—yet, when schooled insadWersity to self-trust: and self-support, would not: now return, to} the same orderiof things, or repossess -his: slavesif freely prof: fered> him. Patronagesis: not’ always.a-power—and> is) oft- times a weakness~and Liam convinced with some) knowl- edge and experience, that its influence is much overrated: );; Some of the grandest and most memorable contests ever fought upon the political battle-fields of our country have been fought and won without patronage, and ‘indeed against the whole jpatronage of an.administration improperly used. The proposed change, in our civil service would not. only elevate and increase its efficiency, but, would eliminate much that is venal, selfish and dangerous’ to’ ‘the polities of the country. This branch of the subject is too wide and fur- reaching in its results for mdve ‘than'a anes illusion to this.eyening. )....5 . Per, Knowing the defects in our present sanvicg, and. the oyile 1880,}* 569 [LeConte. flowing therefrom, what isothe remedy, and how'shall it be applied? | The remedy I would, suggest» is; 10 remove bylaw the civil service of the country from under:the control of partisan interference, and prevenbits' subordinates from an active partici» pation therein.’ By this course you will elevate othe’ service, increase: its ahaa and largely decrease its ee tothe peste. 9 j ois ils the! ete an impossiblevor:éven a diffieult: one: to apply ?)°To a nation which: has: laid oforestsy:builts splendid cities, peopled a continent, overcome’ a:mighty rebellion;and emancipated four millions of human beings within the stride of a single eentury—it would seem as if ‘this “er be-ac- complished?!) 10° ) oT know’full well that it.can be:done, and that ere if good men of. att cael will:only unite and determine! that it shall be. | x6 tor 9 o- Tf the pernicious influences exerted bip our RE: Aafons tiveisystem areeliminated from our politics, we wilh have removed one of the greatest hindrances to our advance, and danger to our future peace, tranquility and seat Ys asia nation. | OV BL ‘eal : 1Od 3 fy 8. Lhe Deore: of scientific culture, beau ylio tse Dr. Joun L. LECONTE, 2 hia vino toa blu ia . Reasoning at every step he takes, f NOUot Sieulorile »)Manvyet mistakes his way ; i . stavols While meaner things, whom instinet Jeads, wer rarely known to stray.” . fit 10 2 big st baonte: i in reply, anid : You have already been told that one hundred years ago the’ Commonwealth grantéd to a body’ of’ well-educated 57 LeConte,] vt 0 [Marcly, 1, citizens, an act. of incorporation oonstituting them | ¢¢ ‘ the American Philosophical Society,” and to this, name. was added, “ held at, Philadelphia, for, promoting , useful Anowh edge,” | fo vd ews It seems spieantial on hie oceasion, , when we are met, to do reyerent homage to the memory of those. founders of the Society, to enquire what were their objects, and what y was, then, and is now, considered ry useful knowledge.” Before doing this, let us review, briefly. as ‘the. time ‘per. mits, the names and objects of some similar societies in older countries, Two examples will suffice: i Ae _;, dn; the first years, of the seventeenth, century eae ‘founded at Rome the ‘* Aceademia dei Linéei,” or the Acad- emy., ofthe Sharp- “seers, for the general promotion of higher intellectual culture; this has since developed, into, a fall Academy, under governmental protection, consisting of. C0; ordinate branches for different.departments of learning. Three score and ten years later was, organized ji in fieae the Leopold-Caroline |“ Academia. Nature; Curiosorum);” persons curious about Nature. Its objects related chiefly, to medical art, and,are declared to be the study of Anatomy, Botany, Pathology, Surgery, Therapeutics, and Chemistry, The transactions were published as.“ Miscellanea, curiosa,” real These, names are now, fav, from expressing ithe aims..08 scientific thought ; yet,in them may, be discerned) the.Jineas ments, of the; embryo of modern) scienge, whose, sudden ps pearance and, inflaence parallel the ancient myth. of the birth of Minerva. These names accentuate. the difference, not between the old, and. the new philosophy, but, between medieval scholasticism, and. modern..,observation...... Lhe former, construeted from, the depths, of, its.own | conseious- hess, gave answers, to, ull, physical.and spiritual eniguas, 1880.) 571 (LeConte: based upon human motives’ and passions and sensations 3 the latter éndeavors to ascertain the government? bf” th Universe, and’ thé raeans ‘of conforming Most perfectly to its laws, by close scrutiny of what is within our scope of coni2 itlictist Tn other words, the ldtter replaces! by bbserva- tion and classification the a priori guesses of the former. ’ As the domain of knowledge became extended, a division of branches of science took place, each of’ which has‘ con- tributed, though i in unequal degree, at different times, to the rapid ‘advance of modern civilization : ; and thus all are en- titled to be comprised in the limits of useful knowledge. . Though T am free to say that some which’ have yielded‘and will in’ futtire yield the ‘most’ valuable’ results, are ‘still te. garded by the mass of the comrnunity, if not with ridicule; at least with a charitable contempt for thé’men who waste their lives in’ such’ trifling ‘pursuits. | Even'as Tate as 2786: when the Magellanic Fund of this Society was' established; there existed a prejudice against “mere Natural History,” which led! to its express said bythe: weapi23 from the benefits of his gift, 990% © 8 EDOM enoa'og ‘All this is now changed. “The'truth of the ancient text; showing the shortsightadhess of the ordinary mati, has again beet epintenesa “The stone which’ the builders’ réfased is Beconie'the ‘héadstone'of the corner.” The auch despised Natural History of the past’ generations has’ beconie' tlie Biology of the’ present, and ‘rightfully reigns) by more than Humati authority; seated in the: bits, Donn har throne of" pre re Qiiéen' of the seiences.?) Os | .evieg IM “to did ‘OPetous! ‘how examine the various» mprsdes th! ‘whieh’ the séiénces ‘have’ manifested their usefulness, S¥S31 DOM “You will ‘alPagree with me that: first in importance must be placed the higher personal education, which characterizes LeConte.] 572 [Mareh,15, the; best, modern, instruction; the substitution of common sense and individual judgment, upon; matters.of fact, for.un- intelligible jargon .or incomprehensible dogma... For, as, is well, observed. by, Rrof. Huxley, “ science, is common. sense at,its best, that.is: rigidly accurate in observation, and mer- ciless;to, fallacy, inlogi¢e ous asitizoirus % erotosilos hosigqe «Ro ithisiend, that is; to the: nilaniia of -obaanveltschiodd hightet inventive } power has co-operated with «the most acutely directed ‘reason, in devising instruments of precision by which» magnitudes;and movements, inappreciable. by, the unaided: senses, are. accurately observed, and.even, demon- strated to large bodies ofispectatorsslouy 3o syoxl ont yluw Ingenuity of a higher kind than.that:employed «in» com- mercidl:workshops, anid labor more severe than! any known tortlie artisan or mechanic, havé-been given to the construe, tion of philosophical, apparatus,.and to the collection of ma- terials for investigation. The community: has often |profited by the economic advantages: indirectly derived from such untiring exertions, which ‘were inspired, by higher, objects. The reward striven for has’ been, indeed, rather.spiritual and moral than physical and, setisuous.).'The love.of knowledge and truth |for their own sake, isothe stimulus ; and,:-as) jis natural in Communities growing) in| intelligence, greater.in- finence in the realm-of thought:-is the result..’,For be:it.ob- served, that, the largest contribators, to, the thought ‘of ;the present day are biologists and physicists; and theinopponents are chiefly among those wedded to prejudice of ancient,usage, or addicted to pursuit of their own temporal advantages}, These classes, we have reason) to, believe, are gradually diminishing in number; and svill more rapidly: lessen, as the genial influence of the still youthful science of, observation infuses itself into our daily Jife and conduct. oo0 fo ont don . 1880.) "| 573 [LeConte. “Tt thay be observed, in this connection; that while tiathe- miitics,: physies ‘and chemistry ‘have contributed, both by their apparatus and processes; to ‘this result, Biology, aided by these appliances, has given’ the finest and’ highest de- velopments of ‘modern thought. | From the’ formerly ‘de- spised collectors of curiosities, weeds’ and bugs and bones, have" been’ evolved the classifiers and morphologists, who are displaying ‘to “your view the magnificent procession of: ani- mated beings through measureless. periods of ‘time, and denionstrating to'you the: much misunderstood correlation of the different! organs°of the body. In: their hands ‘are _ truly the keys of prolongéd “human life, increased power and enlarged usefulness. ©» During the new: reconstruction. of thought, based: upon observation, many antiquated notions, by a perversion of lan- gaage called venerable, havebeen rudely assailed; \Meta- physical terms eluding definition or relating to subjects: not capable°of thought; have been replaced. by words of clear nieaning. The mists of superstition are being dispersed The necromancer (vulgo spiritualist) instead of ‘being turned ‘over to legal or ecclesiastical tribunals for torture, is ‘viewed either asa juggler practicing his trade “for fraudalent pur- “poses, or as°a'fatuous’ hysterical individual ‘sadly needing the “are of ‘his family physician: Persecition is obsolete} with liberty of thought has. begun a tolerance’ of! opinion and ‘a charity’ towards action, unknown ‘in ‘previous! ages, from: mritene ae be expected the pti sce vee ‘im the future. ot betoi bbe ( While: stich. has been’ the influence of science upon’ re- ligious teaching and moral instruction, there! is: one matter whieh itis my duty to mention with regret; though this»is not the place nor the time toexploitvit fully! It-is'the LeCon te.] 574 {March 15, status of scientific men in courts of justice. As students above all others single-minded in the pursuit of truth, as trained observers, as careful and conscientious instructors, — they are entitled to be invited into court as the advisers and evlighteners of the judge in regard to facts which he has neither the time nor the opportunity to ascertain for him- self, and not to be summoned as the witnesses of the advo- cate. I say it with sorrow, but I think I can say it with truth, that upon no class of minds has the progress of con- temporaneous science had so little influence as upon the legal; and no kind of business has been so slightly modified by its influence as legal procedures. | The other influences of science upon auehehy are perhaps 7 more generally appreciated, though hardly with strict ad-— herence to the great law of sequence, or cause and effect, — which dominates everything within human cognizance. A _ mere mention of them must suffice, lest I trespass unduly on the courtesy to which I owe the present Sp pOnener of addressing you. Next in order to the spiritual advancement which I hate mentioned, are the habits of discipline and self-control which are essential to any serious study of science. As an educator, scientific training must be rated_as codrdinate — with mechanical skill, For, whereas, a person trained as an artisan has always the power of earning a living, one : versed in accurate observation and reflection has greater power of resisting the disturbing influences of evil than he — would otherwise possess. | | = Thirdly, and lastly,-by the labors of the investigator, the — inventor is enabled to devise and perfect his application of gs science to the ordinary wants of the community; a thing - * which the man of science has rarely any opportunity of 1880. 5T5 (eConte. doing, _ For, it is quite evident, that. the rivalry for priority, the embarrassments_of legal. proceedings, and the expendi- ture of time, and. the distraction of. thought. necessary to make any invention, however, meritorious, a, commercial, success, are absolutely fatal to the accuracy .and_ serenity which are essential to investigation.. But the suggestions by the student of future applications of scientific principles, are not seldom the gems of thought, in which are latent the immense fortunes and interests,created_ by the inventor, It may be truly said of the philosopher, that as soon as. the pecuniary or personal value of his science becomes prominent in his mind, his spiritual force is weakened.. He. is properly a coadjutor, and not a rival, to all who are en- gaged in the good work. It is his duty to assist, not to sup- plant. To strive for the best that is attainable, with grati- tude but without desire for approbation, and also without fear of censure, must be the life-law of the man of science, _ as it must also be for the artist and for the religious teacher. If time permitted, I would be glad to mention to you what I conceive to be the proper functions of scientific Socie- ties, and the claims they have upon popular sympathy and assistance. They are ina strict.sense neither oral teachers nor custodians; but to use the phraseology of Smithson, so hap- pily interpreted and applied by our venerable (in its true — sense) associate, Prof. Henry, “institutions for the increase and diffusion of knowledge among men.” I could show, by many examples, how, by departing from this simple path of duty, the resources of Societies have _- been crippled, and their.usefulness paralyzed by indulging in the fascinating luxuries of large museums, and ornate archi- tecture. The former should be under the protection of Goyernmental assistance, or in the care of largely endowed PROC, AMER, PHILOS. soc. xviit. 106. 8V. PRINTED MAY 25, 1880. LeConte.] 546 [March 15, institutions of learning. _ Voluntary contributions,and, un- paid labor can never support,a museum which is rapidly growing; nor do.such collections fulfill their functions, ex- cept as, appendages of Universities, They. soon, degenerate into .imperfectly . classified storehouses of curiosities, occa. sionally visited by students desiring to verify types. which have_been imperfect] y described. ‘Though an ingestigalor can_be assisted, I have rarely known one made _by the in- fluence. of a large museum. ‘The material i 4s too vast for the use of a beginner... " wonide donee The true lite of scientific Societies tedides . in ‘the zeal of the members, the completeness of the library, and the facili- ties afforded for publication. The objects for. study lie every: where around us and in us; and, as. Prof, Agassiz told me, many years ago, the most familiar objects, and those most frequently scrutinized, will give the most important results. If I have. correctly exposed to, you some of the influences which science, can exert upon. daily. life, it is just to infer that upon the results of the labors of investigators (the accu- rate observers, and the correct interpreters of the phenomena of the Kosmos), future generations will rely for: ist. The emancipation of religious teaching from the shack- les of traditional superstition ;'the promulgation of reason- able dogma, and firmer adherence to correctly detined morals, 2d.) The. reform of the practice of the law in stricter accordance with the principles of substantial justice, 3d. The rational directions of primary education, so as. to cultivate the observation and the judgment, of the pupils, Ath.,The increase of comfort, the suppression; of disease, and the prolongation of life, by the natural outflow of com, mercial applications. of scientifie truths now, or, in future, within the reach of man. ———---”- — 1880. | ae 577 {MeKean. UBER THe reformation © OF inany dépaitments *Of eeneral and ‘Tdcdil goverumiéits, by’ thie" appointment’ ‘to. "athe ‘fe. quiritig sciettific knowledge, of men quiilified £6 perfdtni the duties ; and in trath, by a cheerful recognition, a the fact, that’ men of science are not. inferior to ordinary 1 men, bi ESE ini Galpacity’« or: intégrity’' in the transaction of asiness "YE has “become too much the habit of unthinking persons #6 donfiise the « earhest student. of p prog gressive scidnce, the man of practical’ thought, who often makes a life-long Sacrifice 6 6: “such things as men possess, ”** with the inventor; ‘who wil if eye"td prospective profit” is’ sometimes led‘ ‘into ‘Visionar achetnes, based ‘upon imperfect information, or into skiing ub BYE radL HRY” introduce contrivances, well devised’ perba in’ plineiple, but not needed for the: pave desires “of ots Goihiintinity. ” ) soy Yen Kia | it” “is” ny firm donvietion, under the Providence, which | presides over, and ‘directs the system of Evolution, that none ofthese athe pe of humanity will be Yerte iy 998 O13) 3 : go Jens saomonoda j ond to vist 9tnt Joorios odt haa ,etov1sedo Stat i} 7 anlt to 9, seo aid J Periodical Literature, -aoad AT tal “0EROT TO 1 Heal oO’ oMr, W: NW, Moi tans Philadelphia! BLE Rijs 20f b alt ds “To aim tap Hearing without raat is with Dankides to ae water ina sieve.’ 19391132 ) Homig odd To: Waniams (1639). mr? d3iw sonabin00s . Mr. McKean, after a playful observations expressing fits’ astonishment at’ finding himself set down ‘for: a spe peech BVISiD9 in the pretty little Book’ containing the 1 menu and a e pro- etairime, when “he had decidedly disked to be éxctused’ ‘from spbalkiniy' tipo thé valid °grotind that he; beri ditHotiy tH youngest! of the’ American Philosophers prise, prefered t6 ke go1 ot aidiper '* Miller, Sacred Books of the East, I, 78. MeKean 578 [March 15, listen to the Sages of the Society, and, after refering’ to’ the subject assigned him as being far too Jarge for ‘the’ ten minute rule sagaciously adopted: by the ‘Committee, éoiitin- wed as. follows : Re ry atest ats shee e . Mr. Passntere AND Ganaienen;— With your, ar, permission, I, will;change the subject. When, I.fownd that I was. ac tually booked, to,speak,)I gave jery close attention. to, what was, ope aes* said, in the. expectation, that. RBS. one of the pearls, Gila ihe the. topic in ‘his cre ee the name of Benjamin, Thompson, more widely known,as Count Rumford, the, American, founder of the, Royal Institution of England. A. great, deal;,has come to the world from that jinstitution, though Count. Rumford. had not. much money of his own to conduct it with, and did not succeed in o ob- taining-much from others, but it is worth while to consider what. the world has gained by the, simple. ‘endowment ‘of a chair for original research in that institution as compared with, the outcome from institutions with princely endow- ments in, this and other countries, where the money has been largely expended in Stately atchitectural structures. - Let. me illustrate. It happened . oncé to me to make. a visit to a neighboring city (1 won't, say what city) with a very dear, friend of, mine, who. had endowed a ‘university. , ot far from our hotel on that occasion, was { an inetieatiog ‘that had also heen endowed very largely by an ‘oininent Ameri- ean. IfT mistake not the amount of money that wis put into the building and its eqitipment was about half a'inillion of dollars. ‘I wert into it with the’ son of the’ gentlemiin whom T speak of, and found thére a tibrary, ‘hather cho iee, but not very large, But in looking around ‘its shelves I eaw but few books that were not upon the shelves: ‘of bther 1880, } al t+ | | McKean. | Y Libraries. in the same city. There were five persons | in salle library, at, the t time looking ‘at the books. We passed out “ot that and went into. the basement, and there. we found : an orchestra playing some very fine scientific music, and in| front was an audience hardly more numerous than the ‘orchestra’ itself! “There were “perhaps forty’ persons -there, maitily ladies, atid” front théir ‘appearance belonging’ to ie ealthiy umilies living in’ the neighborhood ofthat buildt ihe, every ‘one ‘Of Whom could have’ paid « for that Sort or daxury: & OpierdWwas' thd! result” of "ait" endowment of half tn of dollats!'' A’ ‘stately and expeiisive building“a FO. library that was not better than Gther libraries in that tow, lo nottott and au orchestra’ ‘playing scietitific ‘music “to people every ‘ ff one 0 whom could pay for it themselves’ and . for’ ‘their faamifies Certain! ¥ that was a very ineagre result! for thatt “U0 tnuch money. Well, ‘gentlemen, similar results may be seen in other parts of this. country. _ There are a great. many magnificent structures put up from these grand endowments. Phe’ first thing t tlie trustees appear to have in their minds is ‘£8 bi- ploy ax an architect to. put upa monumental structure which drains the fund fake to the bottom, ays rvetit that, coities § wat ue among men. A won't _ over them, yob rod UIdi Jé . ‘where these buildings are and what the venules’ are, t TRI { + Let..me now. return to President Gilman’s mention’ of Sinsicaiy Thompson (Count Rumfor d), a Massachusetts map, Who left this, country about the beginning of the Reyplution ecause. his neighbors disputed his loyalty. He was, a man of ythe. x ranklin type—an inguiring man, an investigating man. Nothing. passed before | him that he did, not want to, Know McKeatt.} 580° [March 15, something: moreabontits ..Evén a: wheelbarrow» was tiotibe- neath his notice.) Heavould intivestigate lamp; orastove, or Jasikitchen,oor a@ smoky ochimney, ; dvithe phenomena of heatyor tight, justias: Franklinndids: »Through his:efforts; with some: of -his»money and what he eould induce: afew others to contribute, the Royal Institution of Tiondon was founded, and he Jeft,at his; death;some money for, medalsyas prizes, for original,research. I hardly.agree with President Gilman, that ‘the,best result of, Benjamin.Thompson’s gifts and }legacies;came out ,of the Harvard, medal-and; other prizes: In my.judgment,the best results, thatjcame out of Ramford’s;, work, awas, the, Royal. _Institution,,..It, was; not provided with a grand. architectural home at the expense, of the, foundation fund,, Ido not know what kind. of, housing it, has.nows bat for a;long period: of its, career, it-had a, very plain habitation, and yet from that,small atnount, of money, given;.or, procured,to, be, given, by Count ,Rumford ito that institution, we have, Sir,.William, Young, Sir, Humphrey Davy; Michael Faraday aud, John, Tyndall, and.all the pro; gress\in useful knowledge jthey, hayegiven to, the world, No money was.wasted|there upon a structure. He simply; with the aid that, came to him,and. to) his, idea, provided, and.en, dowed\a chain inj» which a; man of) philosophic, mind; a man With.a/ turn for scientitic investigation, could, give his whole time) to, original research, the sort, of investigation: that, has moved. the world along. .It, was, not required, that, the man who peoupied that chair should be, occupied all night.long as ty teacher, in getting up bis lectures, for his class ;, it pas notrequired thatthe occupant, of that, chair should, be sub; jeeted to, the drudgery, of lifesto earn, money, by which shis family was tobe supported. ; But there was.an, endowment, w Amal endowment, whigh gaye to, its occupant a sufficient 1880. 581 [MeKeany sum of money to carry him along, and ‘he »was not required to do-aithing ‘except to carry on investigations!in the line of original) research ; and the outcome to the, world are :the four magnificent characters: named alittle while ago, with theirs grand: results in chemistry, eH physics, sos natural sciences generally. ¢' . [to “That is an example fur us’ in’ these dagk4 in this country. There has been inthis room to-night aman who ought to have been the Pasteur of the United States if he had been provided for} a8\'thosé ‘men were in the Royal Institution, and it would have take but little money todo it. There ha’ been a man here to-night if he had’ been taken‘care of in the same way, and if he did not have to go through’ the daily drudgery*to earn moriey to take care'of his household, WOuld have beet} tind has the ability to be the Faraday’ of the United Statés. “We do not provide’ aso many of ‘that kind of men for the world as'we ought to do in this country: Tam not unmindful that we have students in this country who are very distinguished; Tari ‘not unmindful of the’ Le Contes; Leidys, Copes; Marshes, Neweombs, Drapers, Miteli2 ells,’ Rutherfords, and others, but we do not give to ‘the world’ as many ‘as:we ought, and we do not do justice to the teh whose nanies' ought to stand in emulation with those ‘of men In other eountries like Huxley, Pasteur, Helmholtz and Yyndall inthis day in England and on the continent of But rope. It would not take much money to do all this, very little iidney indeed. The example set by Benjamin Count’ Rum- ford is an examplé to be commended and remembered; that Ought 'to be made Known far and wide as faras the influence 6f the ménibers Of the American Philosophical Society an’ reach. Endowed chairs for original research in’ whieh ‘to place ovr able tien) are! the ‘eqiipment for our day—chaire Ira o Lesley.] 582 \Mareh'ls, so endowed. that’ ‘the oecuparits ‘shall be relievedofronr:the drudgery (of teaching and the necessity forthisday’s work to pay for the next day’s living. We have able'men who need nounore than this‘to’place ‘them’as peers in-the promotion of useful knowledge with ‘the bést) in the world!) This«plan, ‘ventlemen, is; in my estimation, worth’ more to'the country and the world’ than’ all ‘the monumental buildings for uni- versity and collée¢e purposes in allour jand; and it costs but a tithe of be sensseetecle Brenions Gilman: can get ag! sees buildings saad base ssuchisses loeb the J ania Gack University is now housed, as he could (if; it. were housed. jin ‘the Capitol at) Washington. The one. building and, equip- ment. to-which ‘I; have already>referred..cost.as much jas, it ‘would to endow ten chairs, and: its outcome. is, not, or not long-ago was not, equal to -a) tenth partof what came from the chair Michael Faraday, occupied.» . I thank you, gentlemen, for your attention...) _ 10, The c Spi whiin Bhdlenselained seis -46\ at | . ot Prot. J P. Lissiey, Philadephia, ; yY of : ) Fy (hee Science moves, but slowy dowig, creeping on. "Tennyson Sista Lesley; in response, said: 8 noi 1 Wt The serious andthe gay things of our existence ste so blended in our experience as individuals, that:a very slight expology will be demanded of me,ifyoh this joyous occasidh, — I venture to-stggest a few grave topics of reflection, 6+ ov We meet as members of a Society which boasts of vener- ablecantiquity—-after am American fishions+or rather.on an American seale :\a,/boast! which would certainly be ridieu- penne ‘583 - Uhesley. lous were it made in the\city,of the Pharaohs,/or,,the,.city of the Oevesars,ior at, Aix,la Chapelle, or almost anywhere, ex- ‘cept in the city of William Penn. tron alt wot Yaq of jo Letoussuppose, however, that we were (as, a Society. a -méan) otic thousand, years old instead/of one hundred. ; What weal difference would it make ?),, Weshould, be invested , per- haps with more vanity, but, with not.a whit) more faculty, : nor be a whit less responsible, to.our,own exertions, for jprag cuba translating pride into power. nan etl Hor Bites OT takeit that perhaps'the crowning beauty of humawhistory lies in the essential identity of mankind ofall ages.°. So faras ‘thought is’concerned there is nothing newand nothing oli. “The ancients proposed the same problems to themselves thiat ‘aveido 3wondered at Nature as heartily and helplessly as»we /d6 questioned ‘the gods in precisely the same spirit (Lhough ‘by means of different apparatas) in’ which we question the forces; found the same excitement in the struggle for exist- ence, and the same repose in old age. Temperance, justice and fumily love were then as now the acknowledged palladia of society ; while the older sages stood upon the same plat- — form of philosophical indifference to circumstances, and con- . fidence. in, the resources of,a free will for all purposes of offence and defence against evil, from which the philosophi- cal minds of our nineteenth century now rey ‘tolerance for opposition and trust in'theeorder of -eventsoces!orl _o» Neither’ is the difference greater between climes»and! faces ithan it:is between generations and ages: » There have beén ~Turanian‘as well as Aryan philosophers ; and their seriptures are so like’in ‘spirit that) they a have ‘been written m In “ithe same: alphabet.: . fost 9 W © On: thevother hand: while:God :has | made saci of one blded all the dwellers upon earthy; the diversities of individual PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XVII. 106. 3W. PRINTED MAY 29, 1880. Lesley] - 5384 [March 16,: character bafile-our: comprehension. || In one sand the same: family: the')physiologist and) psychologist: may :find--not, merely: representatives—but exaggerations: ofthe different human races::in ifeature,! tendency of -affections, modes: of thought, and» lines of practical pursuitons ocd oil ovo ») A-philosophieal society like ours} dating far Sabie Hogue’ senting infact’ the’ traditions“ of the: middle ages,and? the ages beyond them—composed at first of emigrants or ‘the sons of «migrants from every nation in-Christendom beyond _ the seas—established on no narrow or special basis} but! ¢on® séerated to the diffusion of useful knowledge as’a wholeand in ‘all its forms—abscrbing into itself all coming tendencies; informations, systematic developments of the ideal and ‘of the practical, like’a fertile’ farm sown every! tiew ‘year with fresh seed and every year yielding’ a’ néw, fresh’ harvest. surely such ‘a Society is’ one of those’ fair pheriomena of Naturé over which ‘the poet may sing’ his most. exalted: strain, while the ‘philosopher’ invents’ for'it his frees and® finest’ hopes. } 1GOYGS 4. .BaV I Jat au ds wo tion’ “We celebrate, then, the: ive of Ca living 1 being, ‘to _ which a handred years is butias one year, - whieh in one year may live an hundred.’ DBs. 0 JENW-—S1DIOIG: § We celebrate: the éreation of one of those immortal things of this World’ Which ‘have ‘beginning, but which need not have'an'end. Political dynasties; like families, expires but sciehtific societies should ‘be ignorant: of the ‘possibility: of death. Like ‘ecclesiastical organizations, they recruit thei wasting tissues by a perpetual renovitiation ; ‘but, ‘unlike ecclesiastical organizations, they ruiy HO risk “Of | becoming’ fixed ‘and hatd ; their tenets ‘can’ never bedome’ effete, for the basis of their lifé is the old ever being made over new— : truth out of truth, a’ thoubitd times’ reverified, improved, ae 1880sJou 585 (Lesley. selfillustrated.and self-luminous: «Growing with the growth» of the world; and: of man,-and of knowledge); the! ‘freshest! blood! of each !suecessive generation courses throughy their veins.) For them the past is rectified in the alembic ofthe’ present. Like the mountains they grow gray without !grow- ing old... Like the, immortal gods, they. are inot,,sabject,to the decay of memory, ;. nor, can. their, wealth, icon pney of robbers... nit de 16o—stedt Haoyed ) We,celebrate dp sake tlie 00h of, the immortal youth of our Society, | _ Nevertheless, the despotic . law, to which all viesieh alias are subjected. is the same for them all:,they must,eat;;-and their food must, be wholesome. : | This, is,the topic, of reflection which, I wish part: to ins true into the menu, of this festival, ele lao’) Who. is,to feed our. Society? or, rather, with, voltae fog is. it. bound, by, the laws.of life, to feed itself?; For, all nature) shows us,;that onlyjinyalids are fed. by other hands than, their own. Let us feed ourselves. I appeal to every;mem# ber of the Society to judge between him, and. it, whetherhe has felt this necessity., Lask you to consider—to frame in, a picture—what our stated meetings,would be like were, we to come to, them: aspeople come to-a, pieni¢ party, each, gne with a hamper of savoury. yiands to swell, the common. feast. I see around this table lawyers, doctors, clergymen, natural, ists, mathematic ians, poets, artists, merchants, mechanicians, politicians, and, philanthropists (which are, of course, ongand. the same)--every one of whom, has. been taught, fine, things of (and. by) his self- -clected, art or profession, ‘ One hundred and. fifty such members reside w ‘ithin, walking or. viding distance of the Hall. Only thirty, meetings are-held in the year, If, then,,,each member, of, the Society, would—only, once, in, Tenibeyi] 586 [Mareh J5, five years—skim:the thickest» ofthe cream, from» his, mill pans, and make ai bold (or a shy) present, of it;toj the Society; itisquite evident-that every year of nits. oeitiot ance would. be ‘a(‘twelve months’ festival. , (sir DOO & : slotio-inrsa ods Gentlemen, the Hall of the Philosopbieal: Saciedpoiaina club-house,;.It,is.a rendezvous for thinkers. . Its. Society i is a/republie, of men who, haye, inherited; nowledge-—who have themselves manufactured and; sold know] edge—who are more or less diseiplined ;to.tell, what. they, know+-whose function it is.to.diffuse true information—whos¢ very nature it is to be hungry for truth, jealous for the truth, thankful, for the-truth, proud of the truth, believing and, trusting in truth as the alpha,and omega of the principles of things, animate and inanimate, and apt inthe use of all. the, truth they eam getifor the conduet of lifes io joowe had dofdw volts sInoeqe Let me:say,a word of the was which, should characterize a «i Bhidosaphien, Society, ke OUBsoarnco I. ebaek-o Rin - When, Lbegan, to attend, its meetings aupR. years. ago—I Was an ardent young jman-then—the. first, thing. that, struck amie was,the coldness;of the, room, Ido, uot mean to conceal the fact that there was,a bright anthpacite, fire in, they, grate — on winter nights, »Bat,svhen, anything. too), earnest,,.or.a little enthusiastic was said, there was: -not only no papplapse, but commonly NO, Fesponse, Chilling,,s silence. like. a fog. fell upon. orator and audience, Among, tho,elders I could notice a, great regard» for forms and precedents. “Certainly 4 younger man, was always respectfully. staph to, but ORY ‘how or other he seemed to have no heart, to speak again... ) The meetings, too, were often as short, as they, were for ‘mal, ay adjournment was moved, 8 SOOD.AS might be after the min utes, obituary notices and nominations had been attended t to. Thetr a, few old jcronics, avould gather, around, the Airoplace, 1880. |’ 15M) 587 | Lesley: andthe ‘real meeting? would apparently begim:-There was little or nothing strictly philosophical tovstay for; but racy ariecdétes and ‘sometimes very clever jokes would «go.round the semi-circle; and a good many sg pees! made:my young wiliardened cheeks burn. of!) to Mell ot amelie) Bf Is it’ possible,’ thought", that men the: iéfort of whose elueornaand’ learning is’in' every mouth—for whom allothe Seed of pastaves has’ been sowhts ‘whose Véyesthe mys téries of thé universe have been in’ part tnveiled for whom the ‘awit ‘future waits Lean tutti S6"nbble an institution As this into a jest?! Can these portraits: onthe wall ‘fail to | restrain levity and ‘arouse’ eithtsiasm ?’ Ts such) air'as this tobe spoiled with the! odor of earthiness? TP understood “it béttér after ‘Heatitic the sad story of the Chinese’ Maséum speculation, which had swept off like a flood all the savings OF the"'Society “and “left its Library and’ Cabinet inthe sheriff’s hands. I cannot help wishin@ the whole of this story’ were written and ‘published for the warning of the members" in’ fatare” years, a perpetual protest’ against: all attempts or’ stiggéstions to alter ‘the thrifty policy of the Society, and a cogetit aroument against the founding of a ‘iniietimt' or thé erection of'a pretentious edifice. ° But! ‘my allotted time is’ out. I have ‘tmissed the’ track ip rly emi. “AN: that has passed ‘away. Our meetings how are as full of life as they seem to have been in’ the days ‘of ‘Franklin, Rittenhouse, Hopkinson, Hutchinson, Samuel ‘Vatigh, wing, “Rush, and‘ Timothy Matlack, a hundred years, ‘ago. And thie lite of ‘our meetings is genial ‘aswell as dignified! “Every wholdsome and : thoughefar ‘utterance 8 ope penly: welcomed. “Perfect. equality, cordial ‘friendship abd "io science seem to make our evenings what they “should ben {3 uy T Sometinnes wonder whether the traditions Lestey) 588: [Mareh'15, of -fiverand twenty yoatagordo not yeti litiger abouit tiv and prevent our fellow-members from waking up to’ véhe enw édge ‘and appreciation of the ‘ease as it now statis. SSurel y more'of them would (then attend the ‘meetings! britiging their best ‘thinkings with? then! UIs it an'ddle. faiey ‘thut every one of our meetings might be -tiadé' a" good déal like this oe, abb tord Jo noieuisnes ont IA” Thé: spirit aha 5 Philosophical Society should, as holo ; to me, have two elements of character. If should be ane ously ‘eatholies and it should ‘be bot fee Oe ao, Pe usive in ‘regard to both | ‘persons and pap i coon old 10 A ee Fog ataadel » of at i i otf W Fh Sse’ are, in ‘fact, ‘the ‘two J oles of human excellence C8 both in thotight ‘and. feeling. af ooR, first bestows fiery the second guarantees honor dnd security. , A ms I cannot end without noticing’ a ‘strange TRAN ei the usage, if not in the laws, of our Society, whieh, forbids | the discussion of questions of religion and questions of politics. In past times this may have been an excellent safeguard against dissension and perhaps dissolution. But it seems an odd attitude for a Philosophical Society to maintain now-a-days, I Can there be a philosophy which does not concern itself with religion and politics? Yes: a philosophy resolute in shutting its eyes to all of the universe which does not con- sist of brute matter, Good then! let us resolve our Society into an assoeiation of physicists and naturalists. For my part, as I believe in God as much as I believe in man, and in acommonwealth as much as in a geological for- mation, my idea of a Philosophical Society is, that its mem- bers should busy their brains about a// truth, temporal and eternal, material and spiritual, formal and essential ; inter- rogating the past, the present and the future; in a spirit aPibwie} 589 [Lesley, neither weakly catholic and.,generous, nor pire critical and exclusive, ., | Hu9vot _ Lbeg leave. therefore to offer this oamh Sa the: sens of the American Philosophical Society ever,,be, reverent, to- ward God, generous for opinions, critical of facts,and.benev4 olent towards. mankind. sist 8 iy 40 SO ¥ 19V3 At the conclusion of Prof, Lesley’s address, ‘Mr. Fraley arose and said: one B80 ,OMf od “The hour of adjournment has now pocle I -congratu- late you upon the success of this celebration, and L hope that, when, those who are to come after us celebrate 1943 and 1980, they, y will have as good.a dinner as we have had, and, See what I have said myself, as good speeches # as those to which we have Hatened. lacnea ; is i Mardin if jonunss I aoe. : - Gi 2iy Siti to | fj : 2B : ree voar hb s1J daolloo ree | is 190 SvVet ; : is BOTILLOG " ci ore : a>) | 7 4 \" O R NeCra! formu ioe ; ie it bbs eI ot yierood. | é a's : aa ; tl atl i'l : 1 ‘ il a7 ; 4 7 - ic tor ob a > ’ [2 ' . ¥ : ( | + ve - yioiv0e 1 ie aves } } ( - s vata g ai ovoried J 10T igoso fe y ¢ RO : ir bank i i I. DOB jit ‘ } fa B19 a | Ore i952) 1 ful 4 fi J ‘ tiniga & M1 79100 trgeota ait jes ¢ f on ee vos > oye Bins sade ngrs e ey e eee ane ed ee Se é : s roe . + (es i! oa 6 4oe 3 es - E duns hi S .chie tee aa we : B etystieniy bs Ry a ee : id + bon Porat ‘ a «shat ee ; ha eee ; * ik Rite n : ea f Pt he et te FA - ew’ One ; Lae <2 oy = > ev * vege or — INDEX TO VOLUME XVIII. Stated Meetings Held, Page. July 19th to October 4th, 1878........... Soe lame i wees ah th oe tae a wkd i eee dk Galle 6 e % + oie jbisle. 6 ie’ webs See a Pepe i November Ist, 1878.............. D ste enions niga Sri tans i ee ng co a ee. ooh & dae we sonia nce Ghat ake xe Se aE RAS Sos 6 ei as orp) oleae, ee e-4aiele ® ee oy hae we ae ee a eee Boe ded we bi a ere te acm er elie eie 87 IETS SU gig 5) gd ole wee ei wpe ee ¢idrelaiane gece oe SPS ATOMS ROTO ola el did abies 6 See eo RT ae ce aera WAN ie 6 ip eee SN RIN ahaa’ is glla) Wleiie ses ee. se 6's 8 a easy Care the ae poeta 181 , February 2lst, 1879...... rea Sy MIS. kg an: ws a ta ee gS\ ocidt ae March 7th and 2ist, 1870.0 2 4sc 2 8. we ee ila ale’ aba Aa 210—212 Writ 40h, IRI. so os oe Phatlshietk ts aces PRR ere ge zeker wees 217 I SSO 5 nig 5, & bs 0 when 4.0 m0 6 06) 0 eB iabele Wie 235—237 Se re hata be a id dee 40) + Mr. Frederick Fraley. Hon. M. Russell Thayer, Dr, Henry Hartshorne, ete 593 Socielies ant Fournals, Place. on the List of Correspondents. Page. Baltimore. American Journal of Mathemiaties..............-4-- 179 leveland, Ohio.. The Américan’ Antiquarian. . .-.... 6... At Slbsake Baltimore. - American Chemical Journal. Dr. Remsen, Editor. . 2.0.0. 5 2236 Leipsig,Germany. -Zoologiseher Anzeiger. .....%..%.%% » A O28L WU 2988 Lexington.. Kentucky Historical Society . SELON He eee AAD! SIG Michigan- State Library’. 7 POW Nf. ee eee eo Mis Vise ao Médena, -R. Acoad.- dUSdietize HPO, HM ee ee eo cen SHOL SRALAWLEQIE New York. American Chemical Society Pe oe ee oS NTS EO, COTSIBS Philadelphia. Engineers’-Club. 22.0. 002 6 vans ee te te a OC Philadelphia. Journal of the Medical Seienees.. 22... eS 2 a WPT BSS Beeb Chester, Pa. Philosophical Society —. . se ee ee ee es 8? __. Committees-on Papers sor: the Transactions, . . .one2l 2yal Ww. M. FonvrarneE AND J. C. Waite. Upper Carboniferous Flora of West isaac Da a atte dat Ara aoa Wa lean, 8. 8. ner ~' “Pre-Historic Remains in the Cave near éindaiiee Rock, in baneitet ce ‘County, Pa... ... Mae iis th th ti Ma Be ey ft Gey Serer eae uz ° ° ‘ ABor! 320 L Communications. ASHBURNER, C. i : jeg . OL Well Records in McKean and eres . Jom vole «indica -, On the Constitution of the Bradford Oil Sand . ier wine BARKER, GEORGE F. ; é; “* -On the Total Solar Eclipse of July 29, 1878... 0.0... oo ps a le Buastus, Winu1AM. ; T woltsit . Musical Invention of Mr, Matthews... + epics sonnie ston gine ny tee Sih Brraas, ROBERT. 12D Artificial Ice Machines-at Paris. aed ste rete te TENE aw ees Force and Fuel “ne to Electric pment: Compared v with Light- y ing by. Coal Gas . eee : PO - Perpetual.Batiergy~. ss. sew vee ets w ae vara hns 1701, Jo beer rinTON, D. G. mee Obituary Notice of Dr. Hays.......... rat earns oo were ~ 248,250 A OORORN OS TURMIO die wos ic sos 6 6 0 8 es cess ee sototot)* eee Brirron, Bi. . 99100P .iisy Small Specimen-Rock Crusher for Laboratory Use....++-+.- «0 a0 CATTELL, Wo. C. ss : 81 Ber SP Moe Th LANSUAESS - Rew AN Re ee Peart roe ee 5A3 Cuase, P. E.. UES SCriétal Harmonies, .. ~ 1... es eb ww ee steht? ots’ s oro 6 2 8, BF ‘The Limiting Constant of Gravitation awe ae es vw Aan oA OTA 0 SE : L Of SNotelon hie Density of the Kinetic Ether... ....+. ee mae ee -o « © eye “Phe Pliflosophy of Christianity. .......00eesee% ew OL; IBS cit 0 Sa ee St ees ott + ee Ale ARE DeErRBy, OrvILLE A. Contribution to the Geology of the HowerAmazonas.'. Loos 155, 208 Geology of the’ Diamantiferous Region of the Province of Parana, Brees. Sars sit 21s bese e seed ewe eb eee eva ad. 248, 251 FRALEY, FREDERICK. , President’s Address at the Centennial Celebration a iar Se ac a FRAZER, PERSIFOR, JR. Overtones Heard in the Use of the Telephone... ........-.+..- 39 Dolomitie Limestone Rocks in Cumberland County, Pa... 2... nee Magnified Colored Picture of the Crystals in a Transparent Slice of Trap from Lancaster County. . os sree - wera 88 Physical and Chemical Characteristics of a > Trem Occurring at Wil- Tampons PONE. aio cob. oo eee oid wivtcal d Scantbte ee Mite Chromatic Method of Chemical Analysis. tukenitats tava sister ee Copper Veins near Liberty, Md., and in Mouterey, Pa... ........ 2.0 Structure of Chicques Rock, near Columbia... .. 2.0.2. ee 220 Obituary Notice of Robert. Frazer... 20604 6 oa eee deel woe 0/188, 233 Cause of Change of Color.in Autumn Foliage... wee ee ee ee 239 Fossil (?) Forms in the Quartzose Rocks of the Lower Susquehanna, . . 277 Section along the ait ol sicae pipkssa se as br pela a: hus Sigg. sehen hae EPS a PERO ROMS UE AOS on soo 0 ote He vibe Pampa (eon tere FA EM S28 6m Microscopic Reflevtor 1) Oe f Tee BULA TAG at V0 OS AIT, 419 Mirror for illuminating Opadue Objects for the Projecting Microscope. 503 ' Three Methods and 48 Solutions of the 15 Problem. TEA TORRD, 600. ‘ GaTscHET, ALBERT 8S. . ba Timacua Language. . . - . ninviata tes) Ae ee Rovita eatin OO Gentn, F, A. 10 { On Pyrophyllite from Sehvuy etl County’. wb ee 0 8 epee Ts gah Bom Gitman, D.C. | ‘ The Alliance of Universities and the Learned Socletios, . ss ee ee eo BBG : Gray, Asa. ee a Letter from—read at the Dentennial Celebration . aw eaasppegad ag Os OD. Greenr, Wo. On the Formation of Dibenzyl by the action of ica yn Chloride. on Benzol in the presence of Alluminium Chloride. . .. . . . 845,860 On Dioxyethyl-Methylene, and the, FAAP AEAHER of Methylene Cbioride. vo. sa» 0 3. 0-09 ha) WUE, 000- » gui bt Ue cintti babes anne Oe On the priority of Mr, Silva in, nogard toa paper on the,formation of Dibenzyl bw. 6 te ee be oo 0 8 a eyaevere)S Prenton pauele * #6 . B68 On anew Synthesis of Hallgouin. . coe wie eit ees et a a re 412, 451 595 Groret, Aue. R. Page. _*. The Pnilosophy of the Biblical Account of Creation. ....... + + +) « B16, 358 HALE, Horatio. ~ Indian SETUBOR ALON TIGR SRP Reservation at Brantford. .ou8. 44 . 378 ves C. E. . Relations of the Crystalline Rocks of Eastern Pennsylvania to the Silurian Limestones and the Hudson River Age of the Hydro- mehemiBchis0ein. 06) io cobs worst 2 oO) ceitadi sone) ebay M09, 435 / Provisionally solored Map of Southeastern Pennsylvania..,,....4L1 Hysnitiio! W. A. Our Friends who Have Passed Away... ...--+++++++ oeietae « OSE Haupt, L. M. ) Cee Ee POCO BEG 5k hdl while wap ee a. A Chitose - va tac de “Apparatus of the Pneumatic Tramway Engine Co. , ...- 6 4.4 e574 + 212 U~-S. Trigonometrical (coast) Survey in Berks, Chester and Lancas- OE ee oe ee AP rr mr fe re oe 363 On the Codrdination of the Various Methods of Expressing Thought as Applied to the System of Public School Instruction. . . . , 348, 368 Honw. Gro. H. Synopsis of the Euphoride of the United States............ 378, 397 A Monographie Revision of the Species of Cremastocnilus of the Cs ea a aw eae aris ee Se ean are » 2 + «015, 382 Hlouston, Epwin J. on ‘a New Form of Electric Lamp . o's. Boe ees STH IEPA. ss 2 New System’of Hlectric Lighting: ..-.-.-.*.° 25... 53594 5 BORN ww ke 2,8 Efficiency of Dynamo-Electric Machines, (See also Them pet (E.)}). . 45, 58 Krrkwoop, Danten. - Meteoric Fireballs Seen in the United States during the year end- ing March 3lst,.1879..0. 2... 200s tA Bini ia as i.e ~/ 237,238, 239 Cosmogony of Laplace... ..5. 88.04 (ods Kl anvicl 1% Une WSS Kone, Gro. Ava. Chemical apparatus for applying the use of sliding Glass Wedges to the Optical Extinction of colors. ........46. OO ere Preliminary Notice on Chromometry . shed? Babe atid ott GarsiT.s «ae Dolomitic Limestone Rocks of Cumberland County, Pa. Pte Dee ae rt RiCOrse EERE, 4 6 ac ee eae os ss Sie ie eos ate 184, 203 Chromatic Method of Chemical Analysis. .:..:........2... Pir) On Spinel and Chondronite.......... a alan ioe eee 5d eer es Lautu, Pror. Letter concerning a New Work on Egyptology........ onetekd S20 LeConteE, Joun. Laminated Native Copper from the Calumet and Hecla Mine, Lake MERC erasc as) a's > artca ae ete cee a eer ew ie fe i aot 219 lron Pipe corroded by deposit from the City Water a ae ea Pars ae) | The Tendencies of Scientific Culture. . 0. 668 spe wate wet edie ae » 56D Lesury, J. P. Pintesorrermian Fossil Plants. os). vs eos ee el ase ofa sem Ro ae SS ar oo ar tnd irid ee oe neh pratt eo ae 8 Notes on a series of analyses of the Dolomitic Litneatone Rocks of Cumberland County, Pa...... BR at Te Tae a . 39, Lit 596. Leszey, J. P. Ns . A | | 1S Paige. Drift Phenomena of the United States. aval aale sohioM viswlailerd. 585 'J.F. Carll’s colored map of Preglacial Water Basins of bc rts ee tern Pennsyl vases is 636) Sa Mine rreaieia (one acca ae F eA 4 Gas Well at Murrayville, in Westmoreland County; Pal, 2 2) PLS . 207 Large Colored Geological Map of Pennsylvania. . . . . wy. a. arora ne Lesquerenx’s Coal Flora Atlas... . 06s asc een ag nae 28 . Brazilian’ Geology and Topography... 2... ee ee merci | Slab of Limestone full of Trenton Trilobites....... A ga ned -nTisa, Ancient buried river channel! crossing the Allegheny. River to oie x - B54 Contoured Geologfcal-Map of Morrison's Cove. er mraiter’ 2 Scraiayienk « 909 Contoured Map of Western Pennsylvania. aac &d HOYFG HOloaIe ee Reymology of fpazdye oo. Se tee ewe EPG TS pote . . . 363 _ Slab of Roofing Slate Covered with Casts of ibvabcaned flexuosa. areet @ Obituary Novice of John, Wy Hardens 40 bo sow ale oie De ae OW MIB, 422 The Spirit of a Philosophical Society... 1. 6... 6 cee eee ee es +» « 582 LEsQuEREUX, LEO. nee Extract from his letter on @ Specimen | ‘of ‘Cordaites... Ma PUy shy denis «5 ae On a Branch of Cordaites Bearing SPRUE Fu! Ais ca oo cs ae - 219, 222 Marks, Wo. D. ae enim New Link-Work for deseribing Ares of Epi¢ycloid Curves. . 2. 2. . 180 Specimens of Peaucellier Cell Forms. oy. wiypsrey tienes + So sr@isye dB" New Combination of Peaucellier Cells ........ oe ant nintnelia > 188 Theoretical Limits of the Power barrie? rotitot Aantitetemetenm tons tm + 218 Compound Compass... ee ee ee ee © + + ening otet: ++ 208 McCarter, H. G. vi Seana ae (See Sadtler below.). .... Eas i Oe ERT ei A: bs 485 McKean, W. V. ba oid ee (yiaow Daily and Periodical Giteratwne:s: sistas 6 eens 258-3 86 weaee ein eee McQuiLuen, Joun H. Vivisection of the Brain of a Pigeon. eras Siw ce > Wate ee Ae a ee 62 Nornis, Isaac. — AAS Tdnaet Bee ateBRNO 19 tele ss Wes dss ana AMicrophone.... 0 08.6 © 0 oe e052 + botos Ki Dans bolamiarcsy cae Purnurs, Henry, Jr. rrogest « rod sonsat"l Descriptive List of Medals Struck ‘to Commemorate' the Battle PIAA Waterloo. s sos ee yy ae evions PER - ee 2 78, 8h Some Notes Upon the Collection of Coins and Medals at the Penn- sylvania Museum and School of Industrial Art. Histitecystiere Additional Notes, GCs o-. <+. 15% 10% 6 TORS Eo i od abstitin wee e « 827, 358 Earthquake at Aix la Chapelle, Anguat 26th, 1868 Trechia ite 216 Account of an Old Work on preg, emo ae OLS ey ae "00, 411, 443 PLATT, FRANKLIN. Character of some Sullivan County Coals..ou ocli ee yeas £188, 18h Prom, Freperiex. bad el tests a Glacial Drift of Northampton County, Pa, 6. ee ie te B Price, Exvr K. ueularort otaallogs Mi Nature's Reforesting.. Ve BPP ees 2 2, 26 Roeers, FARMAN. ; * onand plow Obituary Notice. of Joseph Henry. wet Set du dle BOS GIT TON LA ILE S eye pe : : : : 1 Saprien, Samurn P. odivairais Chenileal Preparation from a Keaction of Petroleaw.ii dpe ered welt lo a 597 > geese (SAMUEL P.) AND H. G. McCartEr. Page. -Preliminary Notice of an in of gpg a cee ooo, 188, 185 ee Gary. . aod TOY Slices for the Microscope? w.seeeee ever cee eee. «68 Suarrer, P. W. ria as a Tests of the visibility of Stars in Daylight from the densbe of Mines. , ..179 Smrra, EpGaR F. “<- On the Electrolytic Estimation of Cadmium... 2... 22.40 +e ger 46 we Analysis‘of a Calculus Found ina Deer... .. ey ee eee ee ee ge 2 2B “°- Detection of iron by means of Salicylic hdd eee rey eit «ate SNOWDEN, A.) Loupon. «sep “<| ‘Whe Need of an Elevated and Permanent Civil Seryice. 2... . .,, . 559 STEVENSON, De Fe Surface Geology of Southwest TaRRaya eae and Adjacent por. . tions of West Virginia and Maryland , £: Po Ptal®) See Fy trey $f ee 402 OOO Hf THAYER, M. RusskE.1. : Movements of Troops in Cities in Cases of Riot or Insurrection.. . . «88, 89 Tompson, E. (See Houston, E. J:) . “* = Electric Lighting. .*.°.°. °°. + mton nem fees shteth) tqpinaraciee «8 ~~~ On the circumstances influencing the efficiency of Dynamo-Elec. PS ERENCE in np W009 0 40 ofa 6! a6, # 0,-o- SRE Emin fete 4 Watrter, T. U. Dolomitic Limestone Rocks of Cumberland Co., Pa. (See Frazer and Ns ahh ores ot Sek a alae et wag Se PS PE Regular Business. Annual Election of Officers............. Slaven gids cee epee oD, 410 Minutes of Board of Officers and Council Read.,........ oe « 250, 263, 417 Librarian Nominated and Hlected..... Sea aa eae . 155, 188, 410 Finance Committee Reports... .. 20 6 6 6 + ee 0 ee whole od 6. 88; 239, 379 On Two, Memoirs by. Dr. Lautenbachy jo .ioiat ie esl bulicenl. «7 all. Committee Resolution (new shelves), -.. . 6.552 se bisa Wie. . 358 reasurer’s Annual Reports... spsieos eo eit abla Gikt Steg ls Godoy cer 86, 369 ss Mesolubion Gap R ATF INVRSRMBY bass museuld elcaviyR, \.°s 200 Trustees of the Building Fund Report. . 0 oe 6 , oDae BOSOM La ctodsI hb A. 87 Standing Committees appointed.)«:......6 4 odie nisl? sleds woes alate alle 80, 412 cht LIB! Occasional Business. Michaux Legacy Committee Reporty) 6. eee . 184 Guarvoriy Interest 6 06 eek cw ree ene ee setae eh By Ald Recommendation. ......... easy evntkr Apa rticete bet foinetiey Lee La 300 extra copies of * Nature’s Reforesting,” ordered . «ta etat eka use tate Magellanic Premium Minutes of Special Meeting of the Board of Officers;on, Paice a4. 879 Committee on “ Epi and Hypo-cycloidal Linkages”... . . 213, 369, 418 WOR ree OOM MILEOS 65a es weed e: anelanetione eters sie waa Se 221, 239 Committee ona Premium for an Anthraaite Dirt Bering Process . 184, 236, 250, 360 POPaNGte Oe CO CALMIORUG ..o 5) es ls os cle s-seb etal ee Tn asin aon tO eon 859 Proceedings 102 and 108 published. . . 2... 4... +.< c.e se ee ees é*. 4 de ee List of Members publistiéa!)'! 9 10 OL hn 8 ee eee eae varye 182 598 Page. Centennial Celebration, Committee, Resolutions, &c........... 414, 419, 511 Committee of the Eulogy of Dr. George B. Wood... ...........--. 219, 353 Deposit of Cabinet of Coins, &c., with the Numismatic and Antiquarian Society . 2. See ieee wile Sete tel eed eer Wiener ete He bree RA eels . 62, 86, 87 Removal of Cabinet of Antiquities to the ‘Academy of Natural Sciences. . . . 86 Illustration—ordered ........ OO EO ne Fy te 221 Dr.-George B."WoO0G's Bequests: fais Se so lee s6e Sane: eee whim me Supele cs <0 ewe 221 Appropriation of $10 for “ Life of Dr. William Smith.”..... ; ait Corrections on page 728 of Proc. Vol. XVII. Resolutions and dinauit- SOD. Oe Se ee ee ey oe ee he re 4(dijenseB, 8, 40, 45 Special Donations. Bronze Medal from the Batavian Society. ....... a:h' ss 1,6 Lie: |e) py us Sea, Tw 377 Medal of the late Joseph HICORT, F Arcee tor sia 'o as we Ue Balers celle cote > aise ae eee Davy: Moga 514 Se Vinge’ She Rms eRe Bh eo. elon a a le pn hs Hie Medal from the Numismatic pea Antiguarian Society. ......0%.. » pene 218 Cast orSkolt) 2s Ns. eee tee Re eee ee ere tod eee St eae 356 Volumes (in Elephant F°) bequeathed cig Dr. Wood @ . Wafults: ee 'Si wee an 248 Sabin’s Bibliotheca American . ...... 00.222 he SER BIR ee ee Correspondence. American Academy of Arts and Sciences, Boston (Centennial Celebration). .415 Baird, Spencer F. (Prof. Henry’s Library)... ..... res ee Berg (Herr. Fr. Th.) and Herr, Ellis Sidenbladh... . . . «2 ne wee ees 2 416 Bigot, Léon. f°... ee Bi Samia a aaa Bea aid Aran alete gt gol ais Cie e i 3 218 Boston Public Eibravy.:i sc 5 2 coo es o's + ol eiee lie fa es yb Jee pt ns a Bridgeport Scientific Society, Conn... ........ Pv arinive tia Stn ore Byington (Mrs.), Concerning MS. Choctaw Grammar. .........+.-. 182, 210 Cambridge, England, University Librarian... 2... 1. ee eee ee eee 217 Cleveland Library Assooiation, :Ohio.): . 02 24h oe ee tw ke oie ww OO 364 Central Anstalt far Meteorologie, Vienna............ a foe ee - 409 Dawn CE Boy. ate > eo Ga o> be ble nee Cee ain taivd eee . 409 Ecole Polytechnique, Paris. ......52++6s2+s4586 ice EK wb <» 8. Ap eeeeeee Editor of the “American Catalogue,”. . ... 6.4... .686+ Pere - j CRUORMID Rs Bho in 355 0 os ghee nD wae Yo We ee aR eee Lvl aee gli ete Re te a Ae y plietesst Henderion,. 5. Gi! suis verse aceus nie spt A SEAS he ls kee TES mal bad tee oie UR ee kee Henry (Miss Mary A.)........ opi Bp AA OAS be Ole AMONAOHOT Apiose?. Pe mEE Netw Rn™ 4 eid MER AD To NGC Ni ih! I tay’ & . YineH dqesot ssstoitt to leh ; wets; sae bSM yvaed ! 4 lena. 22 tl sin mane song bre oliemalouryt edt niowt ishoM Ry 9h tty Rot ER alah ewer salar Wiel ls! wheels tae 4s. « HAE aad PE Ms Cs id gd xt ye eos DOOW I ed bédtasnped 8 jaedqslS si) esotuloV ee BB: Ot Be en es ne gee oo. + TROIOMA soodiolidid a'aldae h\ i (ah Gaaames As ‘ noat Jjogitt 2 eat ee A RETEST er ae Cartas tel ere ee nr yieidil olldpT sojeok. Oba eee ene ss TAMIATEIO WalOdD AM yninreonod (aM) moinatee siete apie 5 Pe Wet vie WS. wutaleeshe YWlesvial bosleat sebhidsiad e oe ; 01D ,noliginos2 A yundnt bosheyolD ; +i. e8ioeiV sigolorosjeM 107 tela A let aed ‘BOD TRAE et Wier rt ee eng (.@ Hf} soewatl a Reise’ avaital, ee Wi pene ate slisT .6u pindosiyle'l sloo® Te tee a Melee a ee ee) aot goleisD meolisatA” od? Ig 104fba PPR AINA ee er 68 pms ac 0ihe peel a £ e ee eit rie eT aS swt bm o> 9 eo te eran ot ob Oho BERR Se Re CEN ee we ee egy sre oo eo elede CIGM BalM) Vinee OVE wie ee ee ee ee ee 2 e USl0a leshojall yioaued é ‘he bien ny gee oe VISE ot10M aaa apiaw bio RE nolssioosa A wiedhT meaideiM kites Kory ee Oe tea - ss » CQoedtaA 42 Yo alist ads ie . Claire waisondd) WE oipM Mewot San LEM 1egQ0.T-n19T) Yielco® lsstroisif alaevigecaed ; ong ste. os. + -ogcimod ofaeh lo “sisd ish soylerk™ yJotoor: SS ae ee wie a se eA CIBIGED Lavoe sindaastA ae eae BI Me: Hiei} HA avant eee foodie? oildoT aluod we Rte vs oes yo eH abtows his ae eh Ra tava peed mW Ce nipesn yak: kee nobaal.,.o0 ® 10d07T eee Msi ple ea) k-3'. Se , . . QiotevisedO lsvaYl notgaineaw PE se eS tisino® lavidqosolid 1eie9h0 dea Be aces ee ie His + «««y « 4AM e9t) otent oscil Ww c te eee Die oltamwins edt sia ,.o2 etiod io sonided Yo tizoged Be keh eked ven b os see e Qi01008 catvelsd odt mot isheM omnowl | i ce Peed ak aye 4 (ymWt a relauiel or 8 weodege ,brist | ips? ws os tgs 2 SDMA ISbIE alk Sie bie ea? 1 119) 19 | Page 827, , Tine 15 from oe r meaning read meanings. — ome Page 451, line 17 from top, for currents read Cuprert, Hisnojoe doqoyhhy 10 eee eféto vieessvionA AINE ext? of aoliasizal) .eiloqasautht. Lee ee et rte SS ee Q American Philosophical 11 Society, Philadelphia P5 Proceedings v.18 ere Physteal @ ye, Ws Ae ae Applied Sal, \ ae BR PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY STORAS To sake eee Lyerge bbe tha ee od Be ne er = ee tone “ pe ek eh gyre. - ~orar att a nee Le 2% peer aoa re ee or ae eae 1 08-100 EE) orks. Veta eebete Sectchuas’ we a oe aren? See as 4 20 tate